JP2020054843A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving the freedom degree for setting a shooting mode of game balls.SOLUTION: A drop delaying plate 12250 changes a ball entrance interval to a detection sensor 1240. Therefore, by adjusting prescribed conditions, ball entrance mode (speed and interval) to the detection sensor 1240 can be set. In this way, the freedom degree for setting a shooting interval of game balls can be improved. When an opening/closing plate 12300 is in an open state, the drop delaying plate 12250 does not become an obstacle to game balls reaching the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, a change in the ball entrance interval of the game balls to the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to a case in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is switched to a closed state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 180

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is guided to a special winning opening without spilling a ball (Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-177858 A

  However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the degree of freedom in setting the mode of launching the game ball.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of freedom in setting the shooting mode of a game ball.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. Ball entry switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entry port and a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port cannot be guided to the entry port; Detecting means for detecting an incoming ball, and a flowing state changing means for changing a flowing state of a ball flowing on the upstream side of the ball entrance, and the flowing state changing means includes a ball entering the ball entrance The interval can be changed according to a predetermined rule.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the shooting mode of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to make the change in the down-flow interval of the game ball correspond to the operation of the entrance switching means.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the entering mode to the entrance is changed by using the game ball entered to the entrance. Can be done.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning device in the XII-XII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device in XII-XII line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 19 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 18. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of a variable prize-winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning device in XXId-XXId line of Drawing 21 (c). FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter and a big hit type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the second operation pattern. FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27 (c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening and a 2nd specific winning opening in a 4th operation pattern, and (b) is a 1st specific winning opening and a 2nd specific winning opening in a 5th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning openings. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A) to (c) are sectional views of the first variable prize-winning device taken along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the flow-down aspect of the ball which reached the 1st variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of a game board in a 4th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening and a specific area | region in a 6th operation | movement pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the time measurement of a 1st specific winning opening and a specific area | region in a 7th operating pattern. It is a figure showing a change. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 8th operation pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the time measurement of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in a 9th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific field in the 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of a game board in a 5th embodiment. It is a partial back view of a game board. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (A) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd specific winning opening in the 11th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd operation pattern in the 12th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning openings. It is a partial front view of a game board in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LII-LII in FIG. 51. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device. (A) is a figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 13th operation pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the timekeeping of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 14th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a back perspective view of a covering front board in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of a 1st variable winning device. FIG. 36 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to a line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXIIId-LXIIId in FIG. 63 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. FIG. 64D is a rear view of the variable winning device, and FIG. 64D is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXIVd-LXIVd in FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a change in the driving (excitation) state of a solenoid of the driving device, and a time-based change in the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member, and a regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. 70A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable prize-winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the first variable prize-winning device along line LXXd-LXXd in FIG. 70 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of a variable winning device, and (d) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device in LXXId-LXXId line of FIG.71 (c). FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a change in the driving (excitation) state of a solenoid of the driving device, and a time-based change in the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member, and a regulating member. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a change in the driving (excitation) state of a solenoid of the driving device, and a time-based change in the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member, and a regulating member. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a change in the driving (excitation) state of a solenoid of the driving device, and a time-based change in the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member, and a regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in a 10th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (d) are diagrams illustrating an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening and a time change in the state of the movable member in the round game R. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening, schematically showing the arrangement of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device in the first control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during a notice effect performed in a round before a timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and (b) is a timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of inside. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during a timing effect (operation effect). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of a timing effect (operation effect) in an interval between rounds immediately before a fifth round game R, and (b) is during a timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during a timing effect (operation effect). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which notifies that the round game of the 6th round is performed by a 3rd symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario table. It is. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening, an interference member, and a specific area in a 15th operation pattern, (b) is a 1st specific winning opening, an interference in a 16th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a time change of a member and a specific field. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening, an interference member, and a specific area in a 17th operation pattern, (b) is a 1st specific winning opening, interference in an 18th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a time change of a member and a specific field. It is a figure showing time change of the 1st specific winning opening, an interference member, and a specific field in a 19th operation pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening, an interference member, and a specific area in a 20th operation pattern, (b) is a 1st specific winning opening, interference in a 21st operation pattern. It is a figure showing a time change of a member and a specific field. FIG. 4 is a model diagram illustrating a counter and the like provided in a RAM of a main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the fluctuation | variation display data table among display data tables. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a status command setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit control process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the big hit operation setting processing. It is a flow chart which showed the contents of opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the notification process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a storage control process. 5 is a flowchart showing the contents of an operation counter upper limit value setting process 1; 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of an operation counter upper limit value setting process 2; It is the flowchart which showed the content of the storage valve operation process. It is a flow chart which shows V winning processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a hit related process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit production process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the display effect round command setting process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a lamp output process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of button input monitoring / production processing. It is a flowchart which shows a ball number confirmation process. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit type selection table 202b in a 2nd control example. (A) is a figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing plate and auxiliary opening / closing member in the 22nd operation pattern, and (b) showed the time change of the opening / closing plate and auxiliary opening / closing member in the 23rd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing plate and auxiliary opening / closing member in the 24th operation pattern in FIG. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which notifies that the round game of the 6th round is performed by a 3rd symbol display device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM in an MPU of a main control device in a third control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the content of a first random number table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit type selection table. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table. It is the figure which showed the time change of the open / close plate, solenoid, and distribution device in the small hit A, and the time change of the open / close plate, solenoid, and distribution device in the small hit B. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of a 3rd symbol display device. It is a figure explaining the relationship of a game state, the type of a special symbol, a fluctuation time, and a hold type. (A) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the jackpot game in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a start round selection table that defines the discharge mode at the end of the start round. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the game of an effect round, and (d) schematically shows the contents of a post-effect game round selection table that specifies the discharge mode at the end of the post-effect game round. FIG. It is a timing chart which shows a change of an electric state of a solenoid, a detection sensor, and a specific field, and a change of a display of a 3rd design display. It is a schematic diagram in display example 1 which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus from a start of an effect round to the start of a game round after effect in a time series. It is a schematic diagram in display example 1 which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus from a start of an effect round to the start of a game round after effect in a time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of a notice effect operation difficulty switching table and a discrimination display switching table. It is a schematic diagram in display example 2 which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus from a start of an effect round to the start of a game round after effect in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of the basic effect of a V winning round in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of a V winning round in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of a V winning round in time series. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device in this control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate operation scenario table. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the audio ramp control device in the present control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM in the present control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in a main control device after a startup process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit control process. It is a flowchart showing a winning process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating the contents of a setting value selection setting process. It is a flow chart which shows V winning processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a hit related process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the effect start flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect switching process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the effect round display mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of attention effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of operation determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of V display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the display switching process for halfway closing. It is a front view of the game board of a 12th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the change of arrangement | positioning of the sphere which flows down the upper surface of an opening / closing plate. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate operation scenario table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device in a time series in the big hit game in which the 1st variable winning device operates in the 25th operation pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows in time series the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device in the big hit game in which the first variable winning device operates in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect switching process 3. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-round switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-round effect process. It is a front view of the game board of a 13th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the CXCIV-CXCIV line in FIG. 191.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning hole 63. The entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 1000, the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is formed by the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin-made arc member 70 connecting the rails on the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed in response to a prize winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When passing, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as a probable change state of the special symbol), For example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 is referred to as “the lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the lottery is performed for the entrance to the second entrance 640. The special symbol lottery to be performed is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  It should be noted that as the jackpot types of the special symbols, there are provided six types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot a”, “jackpot b”, and “jackpot c” (FIG. 22). reference). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000 is changed.

  When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) elapses, the lottery result is displayed. Is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of retained balls for the second entrance 640 (special) If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is started. When both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol), it is determined whether or not the winning is the normal symbol. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be in an easy state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  In the present embodiment, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given from the end of the special game state to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries, and the special symbol lottery is performed. After the completion of 100 times, the normal state is set.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol change state is given after the special game state ends, the special symbol change state is configured to end according to the number of special symbol lotteries. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), the pachinko machine 10 May shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed). In this case, after a jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c, which will be described later), a normal symbol time reduction state is set until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  In addition, the number of lotteries of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

  Further, the number of lotteries of the special symbol which is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the so-called probability is being changed (probable change), in other words, to the special game state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the special symbol is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the special symbol being changed.

  The normal symbol time reduction state (medium time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. In addition, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which the special symbol is not probable and the normal symbol is not shortened (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability increases).

  During a special symbol change or a normal symbol during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the normal symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is changed. A longer time is set as compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is being shortened. That is, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

  It is to be noted that, while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time. Alternatively, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when a normal symbol is hit may be configured to be greater than in the normal state. In addition, during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the ordinary symbol ( Only the winning probability of the second symbol) may be increased as compared to the normal state.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, at the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate in a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, is being executed. In this case, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation is completed, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry of the ball is performed. The number of balls is retained up to a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, Special symbols (first symbols) according to the jackpot a, the jackpot b, and the jackpot c) are shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 to change the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and a variable symbol display of a second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball at a normal entrance (through gate) 67. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the fluctuating display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", or "big hit c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A fluctuation display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", any of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including the odd number is also included. The variable display in which the main symbols to which are added is aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of a display (right-hand navigation) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and prompts the user to launch a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is positively changed or the normal symbol is reduced in time, so that the ball is shifted to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting the ball (right-handed), the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. As will be described in detail later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) is performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first entrance 64 As compared with the case where a special symbol is drawn based on the ball having entered the ball (a special symbol 1 lottery), a jackpot (a jackpot a) in which the maximum profit can be obtained is more likely. Therefore, in the certain state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit, or in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the right-handed execution is advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the positive change state or the normal symbol time saving state, the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol's probable change state or the normal symbol's time reduction state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol is in a probable change state or in a normal symbol time reduction state, a specific image (right-handed navigator) is displayed so that the player can change the special symbol in a probable state or a normal symbol time reduction state. It is configured to ensure that the benefits of

  In the right-hand navigation, the character "Aim for the right!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely obtain the benefits of being in the specially changed state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined that the player is performing right-handing even though it is not during the period in which the player should launch (right-hand) the ball on the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the image is displayed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not in a stable state or a normal symbol is not saved in time).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily opened in the normal state (even if the player hits right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, when the player hits the ball in the normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the player hits the ball at the first entrance 64 by hitting the ball left. That is, if the player makes a right-handed hit in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to hit the jackpot, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) loss of the player.

  When it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state, the characters "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that right-handing should not be performed (left-handing should be performed). Also, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal state by checking the presence or absence of the right-hand warning screen.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not the ball is right-handed, for example, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) into which the ball can flow when right-handed. Judgment is made based on whether or not the ball is hit.

  In the present embodiment, a right strike warning image is displayed when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (entered) the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being played, and the right A hit warning image may be displayed. Thus, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether there is any fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when detecting that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a, a signal indicating that the illegality is being performed to the hall computer is provided. You may comprise so that it may output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that the illegal operation is performed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the illegal operation is performed.

  Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable prize device 1000 is, for example, a case where a ball is detected in the first specific prize port 1000a even though it is not in the special game state (big hit state).

  When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable prize device 1000, a large character "Warning" is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a character "Please call a gate error attendant" is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and can promptly request a clerk in the hall for repair or the like.

  Each time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction in the game state than in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol change, and during the normal symbol time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, the chance of hitting the normal symbol increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during a certain change of the special symbol and during a time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during the certain change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than that during the normal state during the special change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per one normal symbol contact may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball flowing down the right side of the game board. Are configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. Also, the number of assembled normal entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the mounting position of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on when the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view, a second entrance 640 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on by the second entrance switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are different from each other, for example, the first entry. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins the ball opening 64 may be set to three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second inlet port 640 may be set to five.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, The object 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher during a special symbol change and during a normal symbol time reduction, and the time required for the normal symbol change display is shorter than in the normal state. In the display, the symbol “○” is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than in the normal state. Therefore, a state in which a ball can be more easily won in the second entrance 640 than in the normal state can be created during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as provided in the second entrance 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Here, the probability of a big hit in the case where a ball has won in the first entrance 64 and the case where a ball has won in the second entrance 640 is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. However, the probability of the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) that provides the maximum profit (departure) as the jackpot type selected in the case of the jackpot is determined when the ball is won in the second entrance 640. Is set higher than when the ball has won the first entrance opening 64.

  In normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim for

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the ball is passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be opened. Since the ball is easy to win in the second entrance 640, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right strike”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim at the big hit by the prize at the second entrance 640 while opening the electric accessory 640a by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Becomes

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second ball entrance 640), and the first specific opening that is opened in the left-right direction substantially at the center thereof. A winning port (large opening port) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery performed due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning port 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated, for example, at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player. (15 balls based on winning of one ball).

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300 that forms an open state for guiding a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening / closing plate 1300. Have. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or is hardly won. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the open / close plate 1300 upward, thereby temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, and switching between the open state and the normal closed state. Is operated alternately.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first entrance port 64. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the entrances 63, 64, 1000a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first exit 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. I do.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening and closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) composed of a solenoid with a large open port for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, and the like) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. I do.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 1000 has an inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof, and enters the second entrance 640 of the balls flowing down the right side of the variable timepiece unit 80 when the player makes a right hit. Almost all of the spheres that have flowed downstream from the sphere are guided to the flow path forming part.

  FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a covered front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covered front plate. An opening / closing plate 1300 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the power transmitting member 1200 and a power transmission member 1400 rotatably supported on the rear side of the main body member 1100 and applying a load to the opening / closing plate 1300 by rotation; A driving device 1500 that drives the driving device 1400, a regulating member 1600 that regulates the discharge of the sphere in conjunction with the opening and closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, and a regulating member 1600 that cover the main body member 1100 from the rear side. And a rear cover 1700 that is fastened and fixed as described above.

  The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 which is recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front to the back side. A housing part 1120 that is housed and formed partially through, a holding hole 1130 that is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side of the housing part 1120 when viewed from the front, and a ball flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 A projecting portion 1140 projecting along the path, an outlet 1150 for ejecting a sphere from the front to the rear of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation projecting to the rear side of the thin plate member 1110 and supporting the power transmission member 1400; Mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 protruding in a claw shape so as to be able to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 above the discharge port 1150. Provided.

  The housing portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed, a rectangular recess 1122 provided in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and A through-hole formed in a rectangular shape having a posture perpendicular to a straight line connecting a pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 operating along the right end of the recess 1122 forward and backward of the thin plate member 1110. 1123 mainly.

  The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly larger in width than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening on the back surface of the front plate 1200 is closed. You. That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the covering front plate 1200.

  The rectangular concave portion 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the depth of the concave portion is slightly deeper than the plate portion 1310. Accordingly, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is inclined (closed state), the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular concave portion 1122, and the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding from the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

  The protruding portion 1140 is protruded to a position where the protruding portion 1140 comes into contact with a sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200. The falling ball is decelerated by contacting the protruding portion 1140. Note that a similar protruding portion 1235 is also provided in the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap the protruding portion 1140 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

  The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a uniform protrusion height on the rear side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib.

  The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotation tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip portion 1421.

  The covering front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 to the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 in front view to the rear side. 1220, a housing portion 1230 extending in a box shape opened to the back side toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220 in the left-right direction, and provided at the upper end of the housing portion 1230. And a detection sensor 1240.

  The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220 when viewed from the front, the left side wall portion of the housing portion 1230 when viewed from the front, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow passage as a hole through which a ball flows down in the vertical direction. Unit is configured.

  The storage portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape in a front view, and has a storage channel 1231 formed with a width that allows a sphere to flow down inside, and protrudes rearward at a middle portion of the storage channel 1231. It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side in front view.

  The storage channel 1231 is configured such that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens to the back side is extended while being bent in a front U-shape, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 so that a sphere passes therethrough. To form a flow path. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the area where the storage channel 1231 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231.

  The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12) which is an inclined surface that guides the ball toward the rear side at the lowermost end, and rolling that rolls the ball guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. Surface 1231b.

  The angle of inclination of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the angle of inclination of the near side (right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 reaching the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane.

  The projecting portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the protruding portion 1235 is protruded to a position where it can contact the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 and decelerates the sphere by contacting the sphere.

  The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left as viewed from the front. This allows the ball that has landed on the inclined surface 1237 to roll leftward and be guided to the flow path forming portion.

  The detection sensor 1240 has a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the passing of the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the winning number is counted.

  The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between a case where the ball is rolled toward the detection sensor 1240 and a case where the ball is dropped without contacting the ball, depending on a difference in posture. And a pair of shaft portions 1320 protruding from the short-side end of the plate portion 1310 along the longitudinal direction, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view. And a loaded portion 1330 to be provided.

  The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls in the rising posture (open state), and the length in the short direction is covered in the rising posture (open state) in which the short direction extends in the front-rear direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered in an arc-shaped cross section at an upper corner in an ascending posture (open state) at an end opposite to the shaft 1320.

  The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

  The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry preventing portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an interposed transmission portion 1332 extended to the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the interposed transmission portion And an engagement portion 1333 protruding from 1332 to the right in rear view (on the side where the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

  The engaging portion 1333 extends to a position where the engaging portion 1333 interferes with the operation trajectory of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on an upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, not the corners but the chamfered portion 1333a comes into contact with the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. .

  The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body 1410 and an extension 1420 extending from the main body 1410 in the axial direction.

  The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a protruding pin 1412 protruding from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the direction in which the support hole 1411 is formed.

  The protruding pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the protruding pin 1412 is displaced with the linear movement of the distal end member 1520 due to the switching of the excitation of the driving device 1500, and the power transmission is performed. The member 1400 rotates.

  The extending portion 1420 includes a rotating tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, a pushing portion 1422 protruding forward from the rotating tip portion 1421, Is provided.

  The driving device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves the movable member by switching the excitation, and a tip member 1520 in an H shape (a shape having concave portions in the upper and lower parts) when viewed from the front, which is disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , Mainly comprising.

  The tip member 1520 is configured such that the upper concave portion is capable of accommodating the protruding pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, the concave portion is formed in a shape that keeps the protruding pin 1412 housed inside while the power transmission member 1400 rotates (see FIG. 20).

  The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extending portion 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, A surface on the member 1100 side is mainly provided with an extended portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 formed at the surface position and having a greater thickness than the extended portion 1620.

  The extending portion 1620 is arranged on the movement trajectory of the interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the interposition transmission portion 1332 when the opening / closing plate is in the rising posture (open state).

  The ball receiving portion 1630 overlaps with the discharge port 1150 in a tilted position (a position in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is located at a lower position, a storage state) (the ball is discharged through the opening of the discharge port 1150). In such a manner as to be narrowed so as not to be performed.

  Note that the regulating member 1600 is urged by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain a rising posture (a posture in which the end on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, a discharging state).

  The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710, which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. The ball discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the opening and closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1110 are covered. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be arranged along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without reducing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are juxtaposed at an interval through which a sphere can pass, the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 in the state shown in FIGS. By guiding the ball in between, the ball can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and to receive an irregular prize (for example, a ball hitting a nail or the like is skipped in the lateral direction without being guided to the opening and closing plate 1300). 1240).

  Although details will be described later, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, so that the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  The open state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. 10 and 11, the opening and closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated by imaginary lines in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. This prevents the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 from falling.

  The sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 rolls on the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 along the slope, and a detection sensor 1240 from the right end thereof. And enters the storage channel 1231.

  In the open state of the opening and closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the front plate 1200. Therefore, compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that the plate portion 1310 is in contact with the covering front plate 1200, the required material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening / closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

  In addition, by reducing the movement trajectory of the distal end of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the short direction, it is easy to avoid interference between a ball passing in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

  Here, although the details will be described later, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state, so that the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the sphere passing through the detection sensor 1240 is stored in the storage channel Is stored in Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state where the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the storage channels 1231 of the present embodiment are formed with a length capable of storing spheres up to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). When ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the tenth ball stops at the position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  Therefore, the tenth ball becomes a stopper, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, when the eleventh ball attempts to pass through the detection sensor 1240, the resistance becomes extremely large, and the eleventh ball can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, so that the balls remaining on the opening / closing plate 1300 flow down below the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged by switching the regulating member 1600 to the discharging state in accordance with the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere stops at a position where it is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. I do.

  When the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state. During the switching, the tenth ball receives the load from the ball entry prevention unit 1331 and the tenth ball is stored. It is pushed into the inside of the road 1231 (see FIG. 21B). In other words, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a state of closing the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening / closing plate 1300 is being switched to the closed state, the tenth ball entry preventing portion 1331 does not move. Block the opening of the detection sensor 1240 while abutting (rubbing) with the other ball, due to the difference between the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates. The moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened can be prevented, and the eleventh ball can be prevented from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, there is no need to limit the period from when the specified number of balls is detected by the detection sensor 1240 to when the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening / closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening / closing operation may be started one second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after the tenth ball comes into contact with the ninth ball (after the center of the ball is located on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the ball entry prevention portion 1331). In order to operate the opening / closing plate 1300, control is performed so that the opening / closing plate 1300 opens and closes 0.5 seconds after the detection by the detection sensor 1240.

  According to the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening and closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In the present embodiment, the prevention (delay) of entry of the ball can be performed only for the eleventh ball. That is, the first to tenth spheres can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special game state as compared to the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole sphere.

  For example, in a structure in which a ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 is once decelerated at the passing position to delay winning of a subsequent ball, it is easy to suppress winning of the eleventh ball, while it is easy to suppress winning of the eleventh ball. When the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 because the tenth ball also decelerates when each of the tenth balls rolls on the rolling surface 1311 in a partially continuous manner. There is a problem that the game becomes longer and the game is prolonged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the first to tenth balls are decelerated is not employed, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. Even if the balls flow down in succession, the balls can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at the flow speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

  In addition, even if most of the period during which the open / close plate 1300 is in an open state due to repair of a clogged ball has elapsed and the game has begun at the end of the period, the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 is not affected. Since there is no significant deceleration, more balls can be entered.

  Regarding the eleventh ball, no matter how fast the ball falls toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts tilting), regardless of the speed, The ball up to the tenth ball can be physically prevented from passing the eleventh ball through the detection sensor 1240.

  With reference to FIG. 12, the arrangement of the spheres staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 12, spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated.

  Here, a mechanism will be described in which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 have the same arrangement every time. First, the ball P1 that first enters the empty storage channel 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231a inclined backward at the lowermost portion of the storage channel 1231 and is arranged at a position where it contacts the front surface of the regulating member 1600. You.

  The ball P1 is weighted by the ball P2 that subsequently enters the ball reaching the lower end, and settles in the arrangement shown in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom of arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). That is, the pachinko machine 10 may lean toward the covering front plate 1200 side or may lean toward the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100 depending on the degree of fall in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 12, the protruding portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 1140 comes into contact with the ball P2. There is no contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

  The ball P2 is weighted by reaching a position where the subsequently entered ball P3 comes into contact with the ball P2. Here, in the present embodiment, even when the ball P2 is located at any position in the front-rear direction, the projecting portion 1235 arranged on the covering front plate 1200 is located on the right side of the ball P2 and the projecting portion 1235. The ball P3 is located between the positions where the ball P3 cannot enter and come into contact with the thin plate member 1210 of the overlaid front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the ball P2 is kept small).

  Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is located on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is positioned on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side in FIG. 12). ). Therefore, the ball P2 is moved toward the front side (the lower side in FIG. 12) by the load of the ball P3. Thereby, the ball P2 is settled in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the ball P3 receives a load from the subsequently entering ball P4 under substantially the same conditions (except that the front-rear direction is reversed) as the condition that the ball P2 receives the load from the ball P3. Settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  That is, the arrangement of the n-th ball in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n + 1) -th ball. Further, in the present embodiment, the fixing of the arrangement of the spheres is not performed by narrowing the storage channel 1231, but while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere, the projecting portions 1140, 1235 is provided. Thereby, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the ball is stored in a fixed arrangement every time an action of storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, the number of stored items can be unified each time.

  With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIGS. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 13A, the ball P1 is ejected and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13B, the ball P2 is ejected and the ball P3 is located at the position of the ball P2 in FIG. Is shown in the figure.

  As will be described later, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the open / close plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231. When the ball is ejected. The ball disposed at the lowermost end (the ball P1 in FIG. 12) is discharged to the rear side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following ball (the ball P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space formed thereby. The balls are ejected in sequence.

  Here, the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the extended portion (the flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage channel 1231 with respect to the horizontal plane. Since the flow speed is higher than that of the ball P2, a gap is generated between the ball P1 and the ball P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, the load applied from the ball P2 to the ball P1 at the time of discharging the ball P1 can be minimized, so that the speed at the time of discharging the ball P1 is uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P1. Can be

  After the sphere P1 is discharged, the following spheres P2, P3, and P4 flow downstream (left side in FIG. 12) along the inclination of the extending portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the ball P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the balls P3 and P4 come into contact with the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are changed to the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-back direction components, and pass through the positions of the leading spheres P2 and P3, respectively, and decelerate.

  In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231 by abutting the protruding portions 1140 and 1235, and the ball stored earlier stops. It is rearranged to the position where it was, and decelerates.

  As a result, a gap is created between the ball P2 and the ball P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load applied to the ball P2 from the ball P3 when the ball P2 is discharged can be minimized. The speed at which the ball P2 is discharged can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P2.

  That is, since the subsequent ball flows down the storage flow path 1231 for a longer distance, the manner of acceleration of the subsequent ball by gravity changes as the number of stored balls increases, and accordingly, the discharge mode of the ball P2 (speed at the time of discharge, There is a possibility that the discharge interval between the ball and the ball P1 may change. However, the change in the discharge mode is determined by the action of the above-described protrusions 1140 and 1235 (the ball that is discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball). (A function of eliminating a load due to gravity) by providing a gap between the ball and the sphere.

  Thereafter, the subsequent spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B to discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231. As described above, by forming a gap between the ball discharged by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the discharged ball is discharged without receiving the weight of the subsequent ball. Therefore, the discharge mode of the spheres (speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) can be made uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the projections 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the ball (speed at the time of discharge, discharge interval, and the like) uniform. Note that, in the present embodiment, the discharging mode of the ball requires about 0.2 seconds to discharge one ball. Therefore, by keeping the regulating member 1600 in the discharge state for 2 seconds or more, all of the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged.

  14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 1000. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is located above the engagement portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300. It is arranged at a distance.

  Since the interposed transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the upper side and is separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not receive a load from the interposed transmission portion 1332, and the regulating member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). The discharge state is maintained by the urging force.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 projects in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or smaller than the projected area of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

  FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device along line XIX-XIX in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 1000. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced in a counterclockwise direction. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

  The interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side with the rotation of the power transmission member 1400. In this state, the extension 1620 of the restriction member 1600 receives a load from the interposition transmission portion 1332, and the posture of the restriction member 1600. Is switched to the tilting posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

  In the open state of the open / close plate 1300, a load associated with the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and the urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the regulating member 1600. In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring is applied. , While maintaining the open / close plate 1300 in the open state while suppressing the driving force of the solenoid 1510. The large biasing force of the torsion spring enables the regulating member 1600 to be immediately switched to the discharging state, thereby leading to the effect that the ball can be quickly discharged from the storage channel 1231. Hereinafter, the adopted structure will be described.

  In this embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation trajectory E1 of the power transmission member 1400, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state. , The power transmission member 1400 is pushed out of the motion trajectory E1 along the rotation axis direction of the power transmission member 1400. The movement trajectory E1 is illustrated as the outer shape of the movement trajectory of a portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

  Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400 but the surface forming the rotation direction. And in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

  That is, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 1600 is directed to the direction in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is pushed back toward the closed state. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

  Thus, once the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the open / close plate 1300 in the open state can be prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the open / close plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the open / close plate 1300 at the maximum value.

  That is, after the solenoid 1510 was excited so as to generate a driving force sufficient to switch the regulating member 1600 to the stored state against the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of the operation, the applied voltage was reduced. However, the open / close plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

  Therefore, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be kept open and the regulating member 1600 can be kept in the storage state without being affected by the load.

  In addition, as the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, a load given by the weight of a sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, the opening / closing plate 1300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311. Therefore, when the ball lands, it receives a load due to the weight of the ball, and the number of balls frequently changes. 1300 is given a varying load. In addition, for example, since a load is applied to the regulating member 1600 from a sphere stored in the storage channel 1231, particularly a sphere arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231, the load is applied to the regulating member 1600. Thus, a fluctuating load is given.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening and closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked, the regulating member 1600 cannot be set to the discharging state while the opening and closing plate 1300 is kept open. Therefore, even if the open / close plate 1300 is illegally maintained in an open state, it is physically determined that more balls (10 or more balls in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the opening and closing plate 1300 from being fraudulently maintained in the open state and increase the number of prize balls to be obtained.

  20 and 21 illustrate the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 21 (a). 21C is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XXIb-XXIb, FIG. 21C is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21D is XXId of FIG. 21C. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device 1000 in the -XXId line.

  20 and 21, in order to facilitate understanding, only the open / close plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). The other components are not shown, and the state in which the open / close plate 1300 changes from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order.

  That is, FIGS. 20A and 20B show a state in which the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (a state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited). 20 (c), the state in which the distal end member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). 21), the tip member 1520 is displaced and is located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2. In FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced. A state where the reference numeral 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (a final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) is illustrated.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the near side is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross-section as used in the illustration is indicated by an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the ball.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 20 (c), although the power transmission member 1400 rotates, the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains its posture. Note that, in FIG. 20C, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300 abut.

  This allows the power transmission member 1400 to be energized before the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated from the closed state to the open state, so that the power transmission member 1400 starts rotating and the opening / closing plate 1300 starts rotating simultaneously. Thus, the driving force required at the start of rotation (at the time of initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharging state, the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and switches between the closed state and the open state. An intermediate state is set (see FIG. 21B).

  In the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, when the plate portion 1310 protrudes to the front side, the ball flows down to the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 (the right side in FIG. 21B). The ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21B), but power is transmitted by moving the tip member 1520 rightward in rear view (rightward in FIG. 21A). Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, the rotation of the open / close plate 1300 due to the weight of the ball can be prevented.

  Therefore, in the intermediate state of the open / close plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, it is possible to discharge the sphere from the discharge port 1150 and to suppress the ball from passing downward on the front side of the open / close plate 1300. .

  Thus, the problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharging state during the time required to discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 and the problem of shortening the closing state of the opening and closing plate 1300 (reducing the interval), which is opposite thereto. In the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the discharge of the ball is continued, the plate portion 1310 is extended to the middle position, and the ball is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200. , Can be achieved together.

  At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), the opening / closing plate 1300 is positioned so as to prevent the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position separated from the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 below, so that the rolling surface 1311 in the state shown in FIG. Can be prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. This can prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, and can effectively maintain the function of limiting the winning number of balls by the first variable winning device 1000. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21D, at the same time when the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be used also as the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

  20 and 21, the case where the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state is described. However, when the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is grasped by going back to FIG. 20 and FIG. can do.

  When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21D is changed to the state shown in FIG. 21B. Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operation direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the loaded portion 1330.

  That is, since the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state after the operation of the open / close plate 1300, it is impossible to maintain the open / close plate 1300 in the open state after the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state. Can be. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular winning in which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts being discharged.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball abuts against the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. In the present embodiment, this can be made impossible.

  That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the open / close plate 1300 is being changed from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward. When the sphere comes into contact with the sphere, no load is generated to support the opening / closing plate 1300 acting in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 descends with the weight of the ball, so that the ball cannot be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the irregular winning from occurring.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 22B is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22 (b)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored. , And the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot A, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot B is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 49” (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot B is reached, the jackpot game of eight rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 1200 prize balls.

  The jackpot C is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot C is reached, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 600 prize balls.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), in any case, the first variable prize winning device 1000 sets the first operation pattern. Works with Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out that can be obtained by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. As the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game increases.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, while a jackpot of 4 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 50%. So basically you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the four-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the fifteen-round jackpot game, so that the launch of a ball aiming at the subsequent jackpot acquisition can be started earlier.

  On the other hand, when a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the second entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, The jackpot a is defined in association with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the big hit a, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 as in the case of the big hit A. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot b is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 89” (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot b is reached, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 (details will be described later). In this case, the prize balls paid out to the player are necessarily less than 2250 (1200 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of the jackpot a.

  The jackpot c is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot c, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 (details will be described later). In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of jackpot a, and the prize paid out in each round The time required for ball and jackpot games fluctuates.

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn in a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the type of the big hit. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, and the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, the time required for the jackpot game can be made longer when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and big hit c) than when the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when the jackpot (the jackpot b and the jackpot c) with a small number of payouts is acquired, the timing at which the ball is hit for the next jackpot is delayed as compared with the case of the jackpot a.

  Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency (Including the number of payouts).

  As a result, the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entry to the second entrance 640) is divided into a jackpot (a jackpot a) in which a large amount of payout can be received in a time efficient manner, and a time inefficient payout. It is possible to provide a small number of jackpots (jackpot b and jackpot c), and it is possible to increase the profit of the player obtained when the jackpot a is acquired. As a result, the difference in the number of payouts when playing the game continuously for a predetermined time while maintaining the probability of obtaining the jackpot a large (the difference between the maximum value of the total number of obtained balls and the minimum value of the total number of obtained balls). (Difference) can be increased.

  As described above, during the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the hit of the normal symbol is reduced. It is set to be longer (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if the big hit is made, the special design prone to the big hit a (maximum hitting big hit) is repeated. This makes it easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as the determination value that is the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, the normal symbol It is determined whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23 (b) is a time measurement of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. FIG. 23C is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the third operation pattern.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the first operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time period in which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be entirely discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored spheres. Is done. Therefore, in order to discharge 10 balls, it takes 2 seconds for the furniture.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  In the first operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which no ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the ball during the first interval time Int1 between rounds. Therefore, even in the second and subsequent rounds, the specified number (in this embodiment, ten) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of each round is achieved. Then, the round game R can be ended without waiting for 30 seconds. Therefore, the round game R can be advanced promptly.

  Thereafter, in the same manner, the round game R of the third round up to the fifteenth round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between the rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

  The second interval time between rounds Int2 is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored spheres. Is done. Therefore, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is five, for example, when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the balls are discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. However, five spheres still remain in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  In the second operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the ball during the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third to fifteenth rounds are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds between each round game R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game are compared. The ball can be fired at intervals of at least 0.6 seconds.

  First, when a jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, the time required for ten balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is at least 6 seconds. When the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time between rounds Int1, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) × 15R + ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10C × 15R).

  On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, ten balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only five balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) × 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 ( 2s) + ED (11s)). Further, the payout number is 1200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only five balls can be won in the round game R of the second and subsequent rounds.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, it takes three times or more as long as the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern. Will be dramatically worse.

  Thereby, the interest of the player in the case of performing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern can be improved. That is, the rare value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a can be increased, the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot can be improved, and the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Although the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 second, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be set to various numerical values, and can be changed in each round.

  For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to use

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time between rounds Int2 is set to 0.5 second, since only two balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If 10 are stored, the round game R is started with eight balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the payout number is also small (30).

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, since seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If the individual balls are stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) of payouts can be desired.

  In addition, the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds can be set to 2.0 seconds (or more time). In this case, at the start of the immediately following round game R, no balls remain in the storage channel 1231 and ten balls can be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to reduce the progress time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  The state in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the second round of the round game R due to the discharge of the balls during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is formed. In this embodiment, ten pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls can be paid out, and the first operating time T1 of each round can be obtained. The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, the prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as in the first operation pattern, while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

  Thereafter, similarly, the third to tenth round round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 interposed between the round round games R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the tenth round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the eleventh round game R is started.

  In the eleventh round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by a timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the eleventh round round game R, The open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eleventh round of the round game R ends.

  Thereafter, similarly, the twelfth to fifteenth round round games R are repeated with the second inter-round interval time Int2 interposed between the round games R, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  By discharging the ball during the second interval time Int2 between rounds, a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in the eleventh round and thereafter can be formed. Therefore, after the eleventh round, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

  Also, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is reduced as compared to the tenth round. Accordingly, the total number of payouts is smaller than the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 = (10C × 10R + 5C × 5R) × 15), and the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is reduced. It can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on what round game is being performed.

  In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the end of the round is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mode in which the number of payouts is small at the beginning but the number of payouts increases toward the end, or a mode in which the number of payouts has a peak in a middle round.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is changed depending on the number of the round game R to be performed, so that the jackpot game is moderated and the interest of the player is improved. Can be done.

  In addition, when the jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, the player does not change from the first operation pattern until the round game R of the tenth round. A jackpot game can be performed with the expectation that the number can be obtained.

  Further, the second interval time Int2 between rounds set in one second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary numerical value corresponding to each round for each big hit type. For example, in some jackpot types, the second interval time Int2 between the rounds of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds, and in another certain jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between the rounds of the third operation pattern is set. For example, the interval time Int2 can be set to 0.5 seconds in an odd round and set to 1.0 seconds in an even round.

  That is, by further subdividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games having different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the eleventh round, it is possible to make the number of balls finally paid out unpredictable until the jackpot game ends, and it is possible to improve the attention to the jackpot game.

  Further, the change in the degree of payout and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) may be made to correspond. For example, when a jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, a figure of a running character is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the stamina of the character remains in the beginning (the first round). The running character runs smoothly, and many prize balls are paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina is depleted (in the last round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and starts walking, and in conjunction with that, the payout of prize balls decreases.

  In this way, by associating the degree of prize ball payout with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible for the player to easily transfer emotions to the liquid crystal effect, and to enhance the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

  In addition, by performing the jackpot game in the above-described second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, each round can be advanced based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game can be performed in a predetermined manner. It can progress over the production time. In other words, for example, when the ball wins in the first specific winning opening 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the time of the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of the moving image that is loop-reproduced for a predetermined rendering time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from ending before the effect during the big hit is completely viewed.

  In addition, when performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a support message from a character (such as “Try your best”) is displayed, the longer the time of the jackpot game, the easier it is to display a support message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thereby, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be advanced (rather happily) without giving stress to the player.

  On the other hand, it is also possible to display a mode in which the player gives more stress. For example, a case will be described in which a character that runs during a jackpot game is displayed, and that the character takes a break in a break area during an interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, the interval between rounds is reached each time a predetermined number of balls are won, so that the character can complete the run without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the eleventh round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the interval between rounds will not be reached unless the specified number of prizes have been won and the maximum value of the first operation time T1 (30 seconds) has to be waited. Therefore, the effect of accumulating fatigue can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between the rounds is short in the first place, the character can be produced. It is possible to perform the production that there is no time to rest. Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the exhausted character and give stress to the player, the ambition of the player to recover in the next big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, in the case where the same display is performed, an effect may be provided in which the character rehydrates at the timing of winning. In this case, while the first operation pattern can sufficiently supply water, in the eleventh and subsequent rounds of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the number of times of water supply (the number of winnings) is the first. Since the running period of the character (the period of the jackpot game) becomes longer as well as the operation pattern becomes shorter, the amount of water that can be replenished is shorter than the sweat from the character, and the character becomes tired more and more. A number of effects can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). As a result, it is possible to make the state of the character correspond to the profit (payout ball including time efficiency) obtained by the player, and to determine how much the jackpot that the player has won is , A jackpot or a super jackpot) can be easily recognized by the player through the effect of the entire jackpot game.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed has been described. However, the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment has the number of balls that can be stored inside. Is configured to be changeable. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the arrangement of the balls stored in the second storage channel 2251 when a ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255 a are illustrated by hidden lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a driving device 1500 similar to those of the first embodiment, and a body member slightly different from that of the first embodiment. 2100, a covered front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and further a second variable winning device 2800 newly introduced in the second embodiment. The second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable prize device 2800 includes a second specific prize port 2255a through which a ball serving as a payout criterion passes during a big hit game.

  The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a which is normally closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). (Or until 10 balls are won), the operation of releasing is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Although the details will be described later, the opening operation can be performed in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern and fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large number of balls win the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  The main body member 2100 has the same configuration as the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the accommodating portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170). , A slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole formed in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is a through hole similarly formed in the thin plate member 1110 and which can be fitted with the second detection sensor 2255. A pair of wall portions arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and a drive guide rib 2183 extending linearly in the left and right direction; and a pair of drive guide ribs along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110. A transmission guide rib 2184 whose walls are arranged side by side in parallel and extend linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 21 that supports the transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800. And 5, a mainly includes.

  The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole for guiding the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 provided on the cover front plate 2200 is inserted.

  Each of the ribs 2183 and 2184 is a rib that guides a sliding operation of the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

  The covering front plate 2200 is connected to the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the housing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) provided in the housing front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second storage section 2250 is provided.

  The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of the thin plate formed at the surface position with the thin plate member 1210, has an upward opening, and has an end connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. The storage channel 2251 and the second detection disposed in the second storage channel 2251 in a posture near the upper end portion of the second storage channel 2251 with the opening along the direction in which the second storage channel 2251 extends. The sensor 2255 closes the space between the front plate of the second storage section 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the left side of the opening of the second storage channel 2251 in a front view, and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left. And an inclined surface 2257.

  When the sphere is stored by closing the discharge port 1150 when the sphere passes through the second detection sensor 2255 and is stored inside the second storage part 2250, the number of stored spheres is reduced. It is configured to be 14 at the maximum.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device that has the second specific winning opening 2255a and produces the same operation as the detection sensor 1240. In other words, when the ball enters the housing portion 1230 by switching the open / close plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball is switched via the second housing portion 2250 by the switching of the second variable winning device 2800. When the ball enters 1230, the ball is detected by the second detection sensor 2255.

  The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening and closing plate 1300 is provided. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage channel 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are directed to the channel forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. You. Therefore, during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open, the player opens any of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a. In the state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by performing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unskilled player can easily play a game.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is provided inside the second storage channel 2251 with a margin for arranging one ball on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing at which the remaining one ball becomes a specified number as it passes through the second detection sensor 2255), a plurality of balls continuously flow into the second storage channel 2251. And a structure in which a predetermined number or more of balls can enter.

  The regulating member 2600 has a configuration in which the regulating member 1600 of the first embodiment is provided (the shaft portion 1610, the extending portion 1620, and the ball receiving portion 1630), and the shaft portion 1610 is further extended leftward. A second extending portion 2640 formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction of FIG.

  The second extended portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates, as described later. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 allows the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening and closing plate 1300 to perform the switching operation of the second variable winning device 2800 and the switching operation of the opening and closing plate 1300. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

  The second variable winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left and right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and a mid-abdomen while one end is supported by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830, and extending from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100; A rod-shaped interposed rod portion 2850 having one end fixed to the member 2820 and slidably disposed inside the drive guide rib 2183, and a transmission guide rib having one end disposed at a position capable of abutting the interposed rod portion 2850. The other end extends along the inside of the second member 2184 and the other end of the second A transmission rod portion 2860 that is disposed against possible position, mainly comprises.

  The interposed rod portion 2850 is guided by the drive guide ribs 2183 in the left-right direction, while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured so as to be closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer (the distance between the drive guide ribs 2183 is narrowed). The movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

  The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided by the transmission guide rib 2184 in the up-down direction, while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured to be closer to each other (narrower between them) as the separation distance of the main body member 2100 from the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer, so that the transmission rod 2860 The movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

  Note that the surfaces of the end portions where the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. Thus, it is possible to smoothly transmit the force from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

  FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 has an arcuate cross-sectional shape on the opposite surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860, and the regulating member 2600 is directed toward the discharge state. The urging force of the urging torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod 2860 via the facing surface 2641. Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, it is determined that a ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable prize device 2800 for enabling a ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

  27 (a) to 27 (c), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. FIGS. 27A to 27C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. 27 (a) to 27 (c), for ease of understanding, illustration of components unnecessary for description is omitted, and the state of the slide plate 2840 changes from the closed state to the open state. Are illustrated in chronological order.

  In FIG. 27A, the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, and the tip member 2820 is located at the position farthest from the solenoid 2810. In FIG. 27B, immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the distal end member 2820 is disposed at the intermediate position in the movement range is disposed in a state in which the distal end member 2820 is drawn most toward the solenoid 2810 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). Each state is shown in the figure. In the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state for preventing the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255. In the state shown in FIG. , An open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, regulating member 2600 is in the discharged state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in the non-excited state, the operation of the second variable winning device 2800 can prevent the regulating member 2600 from being in the storage state. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, a control mode in which the operation of the solenoid 2810 is not generated (maintained without excitation) (for example, a control mode in the first embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

  When a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod 2860 via the interposed rod 2850 to start displacing. I do. Here, in the present embodiment, the portion where the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 contact each other is slightly separated in the state of FIG. The operation of the bar 2860 starts almost simultaneously.

  When the transmission rod 2860 is displaced downward by being pushed by the end of the interposition rod 2850, the lower end of the transmission rod 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extension 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is slightly pushed down, and is in the state between the discharge state and the storage state.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the distal end member 2830 has completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the end position by the intervening rod portion 2850, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27C, the interposed rod portion 2850 slides to the extent that the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod portion 2860 toward the transmission rod portion 2860, so that the interposed rod portion 2860 is moved from the transmission rod portion 2860 to the interposed rod portion. The load applied toward 2850 can flow in the direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of interposed rod 2850.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposed rod portion 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the interposed rod portion 2850 due to the change in the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the distal end member 2820 via the regulating member 2600 from fluctuating, and therefore, to maintain the open state of the slide plate 2840 that changes state due to the displacement of the distal end member 2820, the solenoid 2810 Can be prevented from fluctuating. Thus, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

  Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod 2860, and the state of the regulating member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, the response of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. Thereby, fine adjustment of the state change timing of the regulating member 2600 is possible, so that it is possible to suppress a deviation between the control value of the discharge number specified for each round interval time in the jackpot game and the actual discharge number, The number of discharges can be stabilized.

  FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end of the transmission rod 2860 and the opposing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod 2860. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) for urging the regulating member 2600 toward the arrangement in the discharge state effectively acts on the transmission rod 2860.

  Accordingly, when the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) to the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the regulation by the intervening rod 2850 is released, the urging force of the torsion spring is released. As a result, the transmission rod 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

  FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol according to the present embodiment.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Note that the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is: The description is omitted because it is the same as that described in the first embodiment. In the following, a case in which a lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) results in a big hit in this embodiment. explain.

  Specifically, in the case of a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on entry to the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is associated with a jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

  When the big hit d is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the fourth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 (the details will be described later). In this case, the player can receive the payout of the number obtained by adding the limited increase to about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot e is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 99” (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

  In the case of the jackpot e, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fifth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 (details will be described later). In this case, the prize balls paid out to the player are the number of payouts obtained by adding a limited increase to 2250 prize balls, but the difficulty in increasing the number of payouts is smaller than that in the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the payout number is increased as well as the payout number, the time required for the jackpot game is much larger than the case of the jackpot d.

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn in a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the type of the big hit. Due to the difference in the operation patterns, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, and the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (the first to seventh round game R). When the first variable prize device 2000 receives more balls than the specified number, extra payouts are subtracted in the subsequent specific round game R (the eighth round game R) and the game proceeds to the eighth round. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the additional ball paid out by allowing the first variable prize device 2000 to enter a ball of a specified number or more can be obtained by the player without being deducted. It is configured as follows.

  In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, the game method in which the player can obtain the highest profit as the profit including the time efficiency is a fixed number of prizes until the eighth round, and the round game R after the ninth round The aim is to increase the number of payouts in order to win more than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to insert a predetermined number of balls or more in the first variable winning device 2000 depending on the round game R of the round, and the player's attention to the jackpot game Can be improved.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot d, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means sets the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R is started after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between the rounds.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls ejected from the outlet 1150 during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that in each round game R, more than 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 2255a. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum storage number when the ball is entered from the second storage channel 2251 side is set to 14, so in the jackpot game of the jackpot d, the number of winnings exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. It is limited to four through jackpot games. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that can be obtained by the player playing the jackpot game with the jackpot d can be limited to 60 (= 15 × 4C). As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from greatly changing due to a difference in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, and the like). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy profits fairly irrespective of the experience value of the player.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third round up to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 2810 controls the driving of the solenoid 2810 so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot e, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls ejected from the outlet 1150 during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that in each round game R, more than 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 2255a. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  Thereafter, similarly, the third to seventh round game Rs are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 interposed between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the seventh round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. After the elapsed time, the round game R of the eighth round is started.

  In the eighth round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the eighth round of the round game R, The open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eighth round is completed.

  Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, if balls exceeding the specified number have passed through the second specific winning opening 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the round R in the eighth round Since the balls remain in the storage channel 1231, only the winning of the number obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round) from the specified number in the round game R of the eighth round can be performed. Therefore, the payout of the prize balls including the eighth round is equalized to the payout of the specified number of prize balls up to the eighth round. In addition, since the specified number of pachinko balls cannot be won in the eighth round of the round game R, the player must wait 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, before the next round. It will shift to the game.

  Therefore, the player suffers from the loss of the prize balls paid out by the 7th round being lost, and the time loss that the round R of the 8th round becomes unnecessarily long. Will receive. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game carefully so as not to win more balls than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of winning of a ball exceeding the specified number, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

  If there is no winning exceeding the specified number by the seventh round, the specified number of balls can be passed through the one specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the specified number of balls are paid out. In addition, the round game R of the eighth round can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, a predetermined number of prize balls can be paid out while advancing the round game R quickly.

  Therefore, in the big hit game of the big hit e, intentionally suppressing winnings exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round leads to the player's profit. Therefore, the player's attention in the game up to the seventh round can be kept high.

  When the big hit game R of the eighth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After a lapse of time Int1, a ninth round game R is started. Note that, at the start of the ninth round of the round game R, a state in which no ball remains in the storage channel 1231 can be set.

  In the ninth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is controlled to drive the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the ninth round, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the ninth round of the round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the tenth round to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In the round game R of the ninth and subsequent rounds, since the opening and closing plate 1300 does not perform the opening and closing operation, the prize balls paid out by the balls that have won the second specific winning opening 2255a in excess of the specified number after the ninth round are , Can be received by the player without being deducted.

  Therefore, in the case of performing the jackpot game of the jackpot e, the jackpot game R is suppressed so that the winning in the second specific winning opening 2255a exceeding the specified number does not occur in the jackpot game R up to the seventh round. Aiming for a prize in the second specific prize port 2255a exceeding the number is a game method in which a player can obtain the largest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

  That is, in the round game R of each round, by inserting balls exceeding the specified number into the second specific winning opening 2255a, it is possible to cause a case where the player gains profit and a case where the player suffers damage. Thereby, different playability can be provided for each round of the jackpot game, and the attention of the player who performs the jackpot game can be improved (it is possible to prevent the casual play of the jackpot game). .

  Further, according to the present operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive the payout of the additional prize ball by causing the second specific winning opening 2255a to win the ball exceeding the specified number is substantially performed after the ninth round. Can be restricted. This makes it possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to a difference in game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.), and to prevent a large change in the payout balls. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy profits fairly irrespective of the experience value of the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the sphere that reaches the flow path forming portion when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state and flows down to the downstream of the open / close plate 1300 when the open / close plate is in the open state falls as it is. In the first variable winning device 3000, the falling of the ball is delayed when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, and a part of the ball can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of a first variable winning device 3000 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. It is a rear surface perspective view of the installation front board 3200.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an open / close plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a regulating member 1600, and a rear cover 1700 similar to those of the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a covered front plate 3200 slightly different from those of the first embodiment are provided. FIG. 32 shows a closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  The main body member 3100 has the same configuration as the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the accommodating portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170). An additional winning opening 3181 arranged in a manner to be connected to the left side wall of the covering front plate 3200 in front view on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and upward from the left side wall portion of the additional winning opening 3181 in front view. And a curved extension plate 3182 which extends in a curved manner.

  The additional winning opening 3181 is a ball opening for discharging a ball flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and when balls enter the additional winning opening 3181, the upper limit is 15 balls. Prize balls are paid out. In the present embodiment, it is set so that eleven balls are paid out.

  The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts the passage of a ball flowing down the game area by setting the gap in the up-down direction in the game area to be equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. . In addition, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed to have a shape that is inclined downward from the middle abdomen toward the left in front view, and is inclined downward from the middle abdomen toward the right to the front view.

  The laid front plate 3200 has a structure (a thin plate member 1210, a side wall portion 1220, a housing portion 1230, and a detection sensor 1240) included in the laid front plate 1200 of the first embodiment, and a space between the side wall portion 1220 and the housing portion 1230. , A drop delay plate 3250 extending from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface.

  The drop delay plate 3250 is disposed on the front side of the movement trajectory of the opening and closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening and closing plate 1300, and is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. An extended plate portion 3251 that extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 and connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 and has a concave upper surface from a curved shape. And a rolling arc portion 3252 to be formed.

  The drop delay plate 3250 has a long shape to the left and right, and is decelerated so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down (including bouncing and rolling down) a distance of half the length of the plate. Formed from the shape In addition, the opening / closing plate 1300 is formed in a mode in which the ball flows down in one second or less when the ball flows down a half distance of the length of the plate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the extension plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed so as to be inclined such that the closer the detection sensor 1240 is, the longer the separation width from the main body member 3100 is. The housing includes a facing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b that faces the side wall portion 1220 of the housing portion 1230 and is spaced from the housing portion 1230 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is determined by the radius of the sphere at the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). At the intermediate position (the middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32), the distance is switched to be equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere. The diameter is equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the opposing surface 3251 a is formed along the front-rear direction, and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 3200. (Tangent lines drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction are along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

  The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the sphere that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covered front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the most upstream upstream position Pf1 to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls away from the rolling arc portion 3252, is moved to the downstream position Pf2. Flow down through

  In the present embodiment, since the distance between the facing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the distance until the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3 is reached. , Is prevented from falling through the rolling arc portion 3252. Therefore, the ball will fall from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, the manner in which the ball flows down on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

  34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable prize device 3000 along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. Note that FIG. 34B illustrates a sphere arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34C illustrates a sphere arranged at the downstream position Pf2. In FIG. 34, the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c), the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and contacts the plate portion 1310. The diameter of the ball, which flows down to the contact portion with the falling delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the sphere in the axial direction), is reduced as the ball flows down.

  That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34B, the diameter r1 up to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the drop delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34 (c), the radial length r2 up to the portion where the ball contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the ball.

  These diameter lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of gyration of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In other words, if the rotation speed of the ball is the same, the rolling speed of the ball decreases (the ball is delayed) as the diameter lengths r1 and r2 are shorter. According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Accordingly, the turning radius of the sphere is gradually reduced as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 31). Accordingly, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced as the ball flows down the falling delay plate 3250 to the downstream side.

  Further, when the extension plate portion 3251 extends along the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300, FIG. 34 (c) showing the axial view thereof shows a state as compared with the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). The ball is displaced downward in the state shown in parentheses). That is, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the ball can be separated from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be diverted from the first specific winning opening 1000a. it can.

  Accordingly, even if the ball entry preventing portion 1331 is not formed on the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the falling delay plate 3250 to the downstream end, and is directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is won by flying.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rises to the open state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable prize device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) is the first variable prize device 3000 along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. Note that FIG. 35 (a) illustrates the closed state of the open / close plate 1300, FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c) illustrate the open state of the open / close plate 1300, and FIG. 35 (c) illustrates the open / close plate 1300. The outer shapes of the plate portion 1310 and the ball in the closed state are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 35A and 35B illustrate an example of a ball that has entered the flow path forming unit of the first variable winning device 3000.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the open / close plate 1300 is closed, the ball that has landed on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 moves rightward in a front view along the extending direction of the extension plate portion 3251. If the open / close plate 1300 keeps the closed state as it is, it falls after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the above-described extension plate portion 3251, so that the rolling time of the ball can be maintained long and the attention to the ball can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the open / close plate 1300 moves upward (rotates) toward the open state while the ball rolls, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly moves up along the arc shape of the dynamic arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent of the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the ball abuts at the start of the movement of the ball is oriented in the front-rear direction, the operation of the ball at the start of the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be smoothed. it can.

  The downflow direction when the sphere moves up and rolls over the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 and flows down is parallel to the downflow direction illustrated in FIG. Therefore, compared to the case where the flowing direction of the ball changes completely different directions before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player who visually recognizes the operation of the ball before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300. it can.

  As described above, when the sphere is disposed below the plate portion 1310 of the open / close plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35C), the open / close plate 1300 moves upward to open the sphere. By pushing back (backflow) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the above, it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the ball which is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 and once cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a is brought into a state where it can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a by ascending movement. Since it can be returned, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In other words, FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) both show a state where the sphere is arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240 since there is still a possibility that the sphere passes through the detection sensor 1240. It can be said that. That is, by the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state.

  Further, even when it becomes impossible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 flows down in a direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player may win the first specific winning opening 1000a, and to maintain the player's attention.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the open / close plate 1300 forms a closed state, the fall of the ball reaching the front side of the open / close plate 1300 is delayed, and when the open / close plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By configuring so that it can be resurrected above, it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball that arrives in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. As a result, the number of balls passing through the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening and closing plate 1300 from being hindered due to the arrangement of the ball on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure in which the ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate as in a conventional gaming machine, the ball is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate and the glass plate by operating the opening / closing plate, thereby opening and closing the ball. There has been a problem that the opening of the board is hindered, which may cause a loss to the player.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 in front of the opening / closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained substantially constant (restriction). can do. Therefore, the ball is pinched between the open / close plate 1300 and the glass plate as compared with the case where the ball freely flows down the front side of the open / close plate 1300 and the distance of the ball from the rotation axis changes freely. The risk that the operation of the plate 1300 is hindered can be reduced. Note that, in the present embodiment, the sphere is sandwiched between the glass plate and the opening / closing plate 1300 while the opening / closing plate 1300 is changing to the open state, and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 may be hindered. The drop delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the ball is maintained at the position.

  36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the manner in which the ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000 flows down. In FIG. 36 (a), in a case where the ball is hit and left, the two balls reaching the first variable prize device 3000 flow down in a time-series manner, and in FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball By performing a special hitting method (so-called “twisting”) in which the ball is hit weakly and the second ball is hit harder, the ball when two balls are connected to reach the first variable winning device 3000. Are shown in chronological order.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the ball is hit and the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a predetermined interval, the ball is hit. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state due to the winning of the first specific winning opening 1000a by P1, the ball P2 can still be in a state arranged on the upstream side of the drop delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 completely flows down the drop delay plate 3250, so that the ball can be easily maintained on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. Can be.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when two balls continuously reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball P1 wins the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. When switching to the state, the ball P2 is arranged near the position (falling position Pf3) immediately before the detection sensor 1240, so that it is not possible to wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is next opened, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from plate 3250.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, compared to the case where two balls flow down consecutively by a special hitting method, the case where two balls flow down at a predetermined interval by releasing (normal hitting) is used. This makes it easier to receive the action of the drop delay plate 3250 (changing a ball that has reached the front of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the interval time between rounds so that the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game by a special hitting method such as twisting.

  FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. FIG. 37 illustrates a state immediately after the state of the open / close plate 1300 changed from the closed state to the open state, and illustrates a sphere that jumps upward by colliding with the open / close plate 1300.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open / close plate 1300 in the open state, the bouncing as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball that has landed on the open / close plate 1300 is rebounded during the upward movement of the open / close plate 1300. Only in this case, the sphere bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

  The subsequent flow of the bouncing ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 again or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. Is done. Therefore, the player can receive the prize ball by the bouncing ball. Therefore, a ball that arrives at the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening / closing plate 1300 is being switched to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66, and the player cannot obtain a profit. Can be prevented.

  Further, even when a ball wins in the additional winning opening 3181, a prescribed number (ten in the present embodiment) of balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a separately. The payout by winning the mouth 3181 results in award balls (a profit for an additional amount) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, it is possible to cause a difference in the profit obtained by the player depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening and closing plate 1300 is being switched to the open state. , It is possible to improve the attention of the ball that flows down.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a specially changed state (high probability state) of a special symbol is given as an added value after the end of the jackpot regardless of a difference in a flow state of a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 according to the fourth embodiment includes a probability variation determination unit that determines a right to shift to a certain symbol change state (high-probability state) of a special symbol based on a difference in the manner in which a ball flows. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is shown in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 below the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability variation that is provided on the back side of the game board 13 is changed. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (a main body member 1100, a covering front plate 1200, an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a regulating member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and further includes a new probability variation determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

  The probability variation determination unit 4800 includes a communication path 4810 that is a flow path through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows and extends vertically downward, and a bifurcated flow that is communicated with the lower end of the communication path 4810. The probability variation determination channel 4820 that is a road, the specific region 4830 that is arranged to communicate from the channel on the left side in front view of the probability variation determination channel 4820, and the specific region 4830 that communicates from the channel on the right side in front view A non-specific area 4840, a distribution device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with a game ball at a branch portion of the probability variation determination channel 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 for detecting the passage of a game ball in the specific area 4830, A non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area 4540.

  The communication path 4810 is formed to have a length that elapses approximately one second until the ball that has entered from the outlet reaches the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  The distribution device 4850 is disposed so as to protrude inside the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and allows the sphere to flow down to the specific area 4830 (forms an open state) and to flow to the non-specific area 4840 (changes to the closed state). It mainly includes a distributing member 4851 operable between a closed position (formed) and a solenoid 4852 for driving the distributing member 4851.

  The probability change determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding the acquisition of the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state) only in the special round during the jackpot game (the fifth round in this embodiment). In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game balls to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in an open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in a closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the big hit game, a transition is made to a special symbol positive change state (high probability state). In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased, so that the ball can easily win the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, 40 It is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1 /

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination.

  In the present embodiment, five types of special symbols such as “big hit D”, “big hit E”, “big hit F”, “big hit G”, and “big hit f” are provided (see FIG. 40). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 4000 and The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state).

  FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type of the entrance that triggered the symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is associated with a jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot D, five jackpot games are executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot E is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 49” (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot E, a 5-round jackpot game is executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 675 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state).

  The jackpot F is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 79” (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot F, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot G is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99” (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot G, a 5-round jackpot game is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 750 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift to the surely changed state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) with a probability of 50%. Can be reliably obtained. On the other hand, even in the remaining 50%, it is possible to rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, The jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot f, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850, as in the case of the jackpot D. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot g is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “95 to 99” (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot is g, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls and, rarely, can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state).

  As described above, if a special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) becomes a big hit, the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 have a 95% probability of the sixth variable prize device. Operates in an operating pattern. At this time, it is possible to almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the specially changed state (high probability state) of the special symbol, so that the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64). This is advantageous for the player as compared to a case of a jackpot. Therefore, in order to obtain a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), in the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player performs a right-handed game. Do.

  During the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol decreases (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the normal symbol hit increases (1). Second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is reached, the jackpot f (almost certainly shifts to the special symbol probable change state (high probability state)) It is easy for the player to easily acquire a large amount of prize balls, because the probability of the special symbol being easily changed is likely to be repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41 (b) is a first specific winning in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the sixth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 is controlled so as to be maintained, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round game R is started.

  In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the third round of round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the third round of the round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the third round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, thereby obtaining the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the lapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and the solenoid is operated so as to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has elapsed. The driving of the 4852 is controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. The predetermined time is set as a time during which the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the maximum speed, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is estimated normally that only about five balls can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round is completed only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in this operation pattern, in the interval immediately before the fourth round, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150. Therefore, since the storage channel 1231 is filled with approximately five winnings in three seconds, it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity given to the player due to the shorter time of the round R in the fourth round than in other rounds. can do.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In the second opening time OP2, when the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of stored balls is up to six), all the discharged balls are in the probability variation determination channel 4820. When the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is seven or more (when the number of stored balls is seven or more), at least one of the discharged balls is used. The time is set to be shorter than the time when the sphere of the part passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In the present embodiment, since the fourth round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, even if the fourth round game ends in the second operation time T2, The number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily increased to seven or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the ball remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the remaining ball can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, unlike the prior art, in the present operation pattern, in the fifth round of the round game R, it is not necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation. In addition, the opening and closing plate 1300 can be operated without discomfort. Hereinafter, this will be described.

  In the related art, when a predetermined number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the operation of the distribution operation member 4581 starts, and the round game R ends, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. However, there is a risk that a ball may not be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the player may not be able to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state). In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the open / close plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 was closed before the operation (it was opened twice in one round).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since it is a game property that switches whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a can be made to enter the specific area 4830 by the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round. Even if the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. Since the ball heading for the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable prize device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) without any problem.

  Therefore, in the present operation pattern, the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened so that the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be performed even while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the fifth round of the round game R. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it prevents a problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the winning pattern. can do.

  In addition, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R stays in the storage channel 1231 during the first operation time T1, so that the first ball is won in the fifth round game R. It is possible to prevent a ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination channel 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. Thereby, the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) according to the mode of winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent a problem that whether or not it can be changed occurs.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot E, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as the sixth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, thereby obtaining the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the lapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and the solenoid is operated so as to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has elapsed. The driving of the 4852 is controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass to the specific region 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the maximum speed, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is estimated normally that only about five balls can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round is completed only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in the present operation pattern, in the interval immediately before the fourth round, ten balls (all spheres) are discharged from the discharge port 1150. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled with approximately five possible prizes in three seconds, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the sphere won in three seconds remaining in the storage channel 1231. .

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, since about five balls are ejected from the outlet 1150 in the interval immediately before the fifth round of the round game R, eight or more balls in three seconds are the first specific prize due to some rare cause. Unless the mouth 1000a is awarded, the distributing operation member 4851 is displaced after all the ejected balls have passed through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, no ball remains in the probability variation determination channel 4820, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the open / close plate 1300 and the distributing member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in can be obtained.

  Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the ball can be stored to near the fullness of the storage channel 1231 during the fourth round of the round game R. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high-probability state) of the special symbol, depending on the difference in how the ball is stored, so that the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231. Attention to the ball can be improved. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the first variable winning device 4000.

  Also, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter in the fourth round of the round game R, it is almost certain that the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) is obtained. Although it is possible, since the time of the round game R is short, the more the player is accustomed to the game, the more the player loses the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

  In other words, an unfamiliar player is easier to hit and play during a jackpot game, while a person who is more accustomed to the game is more likely to avoid hitting to avoid wasting balls between rounds during the jackpot and to make it easier to stop between rounds Is the difference resulting from

  More specifically, in the case of an open game, a plurality of balls always flow in the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300, and the ball is prized to the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. Because it occurs, if there are even three seconds, there is enough room for three or more balls to enter. Therefore, an unskilled player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) without any problem.

  On the other hand, in the case of starting the launch after the start of the fourth round of the round game R and performing the stop between the rounds so as to prevent the ball from flowing near the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval period, the useless ball is certainly Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300 until a while after the start of the round game R of the fourth round (for example, two seconds have not elapsed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining one second, which makes it difficult to acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state). Therefore, even a player who is accustomed to the game can be encouraged to make a launch without hitting during the jackpot game.

  As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent risk that, depending on the mode of launching, a person who is more accustomed to the game may decrease the profit obtained. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed, the player can be encouraged to play the game without hitting the jackpot, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be secured.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, after grasping the above-mentioned risks, it is possible to provide a player who still stops between rounds with a jackpot game requiring concentration, which cannot be enjoyed by other pachinko machines 10. . That is, the number of useless balls is reduced by performing an inter-round hitting operation in which the ball is started backward by calculating backward so that the ball flows into the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round. Meanwhile, the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) can also be acquired. In this case, a stop between rounds is performed before the end of the third round game R, and a launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, it is necessary to perform a high-level calculation of starting the launch while predicting the timing of the ball entry while considering the randomness of the flow of the ball entering the ball during the third round game R. Therefore, if the timing at which the ball that has started launching reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning opening 1000a is as calculated, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is a first specific winning in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot F, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the third round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved to the open position. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round game R, and the fourth round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Is terminated by the passage of.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. Note that this opening operation is performed simultaneously with the opening operation due to the elapse of the third opening time OP3.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the ejected balls pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  In this operation pattern, since the fourth round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the fourth round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is seven or more, the distribution operation member 4851 may be opened with the balls remaining in the probability variation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the open / close plate 1300 and the distributing member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in can be obtained.

<When operating in the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is similar to that of the eighth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved to the open position. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round game R, and the fourth round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Is terminated by the passage of.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distributing operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass to the specific region 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the ejected balls pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the fourth round of the round game R is started in a state in which no balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the fourth round of the round game R, a specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to end the fourth round of the round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1. However, when the fourth round game R is completed without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1 as in the case where the fourth round game R is ended by a predetermined number of winnings, in many cases, Immediately after that, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820, and then the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced.

  On the other hand, when the distributing operation member 4851 ends the round game R of the fourth round until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is over, if seven or more balls are ejected in the interval immediately after that, The sphere can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not hurry to win the specified number of prizes, but makes the first specified winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls immediately before the end of the fourth round of the round game R, so that the player has a special symbol. The right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) can be obtained.

  Also, as another method, by ending the fifth round of the round game R immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the ball ejected at the interval immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is stored in the specific area. By flowing down, the player can also acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable state (high probability state).

  As described above, according to the present operation pattern, at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, etc.), the player can change to the certain state of the special symbol (high probability state). Whether or not the right to transfer can be acquired can be made different.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the round game R of the fourth round is specified. When the operation time is specified (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), the player continues to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a so that the player can play the special symbol no matter how the game is played. The right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) can be acquired, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the operation time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player himself / herself selects the operation time according to the game mode (when the specified number of balls are to be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a). In some cases), the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) may be acquired in some cases. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player a sense of excitement to acquire a probable change state by himself. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  The sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern are characterized in that the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is shorter than usual, and the fourth round of the round game with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 is performed. When R is started, it is easy to obtain the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state). That is, when the number of award balls obtained in the round game R of the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is set to such a length as to discharge the ball in the storage channel 1231 as a whole ball, the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state) is granted. Difficult to get. That is, in the case where it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, it is possible to realize the gaming property that the payout of the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game increases. Thereby, a large number of balls to be launched by the player in the normal state to be continued later can be prepared, so that the player's cash investment can be easily suppressed.

  These differences can be grasped at the start of the fourth round by whether or not balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, at the start of the fourth round of the round game R, the player predicts a state after the end of the big hit game. can do. Even in the case of an operation pattern in which it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol state (high-probability state), the right to shift to the special symbol transition state (high-probability state) depends on the manner of the ball entry. Can be obtained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, by forcing the player to make a selection, the concentration of the player during the jackpot game can be maintained. That is, the game mode in which it is easy to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) is exactly the opposite.

  More specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the round game R of the fourth round, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. Winning a prize increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to a special symbol probable state (high probability state) (it is beneficial to win many balls from the start of the fourth round). In the case of the operation pattern of No. 9, in the round game R of the fourth round, a predetermined number of balls are awarded until the end of 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and the period of the round game R is extended. As a result, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) is increased (it is advantageous to suppress the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

  As described above, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) changes depending on how the ball is won in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to maintain the concentration on the game.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the tenth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the fourth round of the round game R is the same as in the case of the above-described sixth operation pattern, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distributing operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In the present operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the lapse of the second opening time OP2 is performed for a short time, the ball cannot basically flow down to the specific area 4830.

  In addition, since the distribution operation member 4851 is opened during the round R of the fifth round, if the round game can be completed early, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. Although there is a possibility that the game will be performed (for example, when the operation after the lapse of the third opening time OP3 is long), in the present operation pattern, the fifth round of the round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be entered, and the fifth round game cannot be ended early. Therefore, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distributing operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R has the same portions as those in the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of No. 6 can be obtained.

  Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the fourth round game R. Since the pattern of the other portions is the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  The tenth operation pattern causes the ball to flow down to the specific area 4830 even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the fourth round of the round game R in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern. They differ in that they cannot.

  That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not relieved even if the ball can be fully stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the game R, and the discharged ball is in the specific area. The user can be prompted to confirm whether to pass 4830 or not. That is, in the jackpot game, a stage (first step) of determining whether or not a ball can be stored in the storage channel 1231, and the distribution operation member 4851 operates before the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes. It is possible to focus on a different part for each stage, divided into the stage of whether or not (second step). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game unintentionally, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where a pitch corresponding to the jackpot type can be acquired regardless of the progress of the game in the special symbol change state (high probability state). However, the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment is described. 5000 is provided with a pitch adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to obtain more pitches as the number of times of change until the jackpot is obtained in the special symbol change state (high probability state) is smaller. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, a covered front plate 2200, In addition to the opening and closing plate 1300, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, An outgoing ball adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the outgoing ball by causing the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 to enter the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is mainly provided.

  The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 that extends downward from the lower end of the rotating tip 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the lower end of the time difference forming portion 5423 extends to a position where the time difference forming portion 5423 contacts the engaging portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is not excited.

  In addition to the configuration described in the second embodiment, the second variable prize device 5800 is configured such that an interposed rod portion 5850 having a slightly added shape and a sliding operation in a vertical direction on the left side in rear view of the transmission rod portion 2860, By being pushed down by the branched portion of the interposed rod portion 5850 (the L-shaped portion in the rear view added to the configuration of the interposed rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment), the interposed rod portion 5850 is arranged so as to be in contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the pitching adjustment device 5900. A pressing action portion 5870 is provided.

  The outgoing-ball adjusting device 5900 is configured to penetrate through the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end of the flowing-down passage forming portion 5910 and the lower end of the flowing-down passage forming portion 5910 to store the ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640. A communication hole 5920 arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) in which a ball can flow into the flow path 1231 and an opening / closing member 5930 for opening and closing the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are mainly provided. Prepare for. It should be noted that the flow-down passage forming portion 5910 is disposed so as to pass through the back side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, and is illustrated with imaginary lines for easy understanding. Also, illustration of the intermediate portion is omitted.

  The flow-down passage forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path through which the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 flows down. The opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920, and the ball is connected to the communication hole 5920. The adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in, and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceeds the specified number (30 in the present embodiment), and then enters the second ball entrance 640. And a surplus sphere discharge channel 5915 for discharging the collected spheres to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The adjustment flow channel 5911 is formed as a deceleration flow channel 5912 formed as a reverse U-shaped flow channel that is curved by a half turn near the lower end, and a second ball entrance 640 is formed from the upper end of the deceleration flow channel 5912. And a falling channel 5913 extending vertically in the rearward direction.

  Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the load of the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent sphere stagnating in the deceleration flow path 5912 is reduced irrespective of the number of stagnation balls. be able to. In other words, when the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the own weight of the subsequent ball from the subsequent ball, the deceleration flow path 5912 assumes that the inclination near the communication hole 5920 is gentle (inclination close to horizontal). Therefore, the effect of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of stagnation balls, the speed at which the sphere immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the sphere to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

  Since the falling channel 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the falling sphere does not receive deceleration and falls freely. Therefore, when a ball continues to enter the second entrance 640 and enters the ball, the preceding ball is decelerated earlier than the subsequent ball, and impedes the flow of the subsequent ball. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the surplus sphere discharge channel 5915.

  In the present embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the balls to stay in order from just before the communication hole 5920, and when the number of the staying balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball becomes the excess ball discharge flow path 5915. The flow path length is designed to be above the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the ball after the 31st ball enters the surplus sphere discharge channel 5915. In other words, up to 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the high probability state of 30 rotations. During this time, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and the player can proceed with the game by a right-handed game, thereby aiming for the next jackpot acquisition while suppressing ball loss. On the other hand, since the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 enters the adjustment channel 5911, the ball stays in the adjustment channel 5911 from the start of the high-probability state to the end of the high-probability state. The sphere increases.

  The opening / closing member 5930 is arranged at a position protruding inside the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not excited, and closes the opening below the outer shape of the sphere, while one of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is excited. Accordingly, the movable closing member 5931 disposed at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, the movable closing member 5931 is connected to the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and is movable in the left-right direction with the driving of the solenoid 1510. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110; and a slide rail portion 5933 provided at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 so as to be vertically movable relative to the connecting rod portion 5932. One end of the connecting rod portion 5932 is provided to apply an upward urging force to the movable closing member 5931. An elastic spring 5934, mainly comprising.

  FIGS. 46A and 46B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 along the line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. FIG. 46A illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is opened, and FIG. 46B illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and the sphere flows into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920 and can stay there, the third ball AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231. The fourth ball AP54 is kept at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920.

  In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) having passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a in this state flows into the storage channel 1231. The space for the ball AP 54 held at a position where the ball AP 54 does not fall out of the 5920 to enter the storage channel 1231 is filled with the flowed ball IP 51. Therefore, the ball retained at a position where it does not escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 and is maintained at the same position.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the restricting member 2600 changes to the discharge state, the movable closing member 5931 moves from the overhang adjustment flow channel 5911 to the storage flow channel 1231. Ball inflow is regulated.

  When the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is completed, the state is switched again to the state shown in FIG. 46A, and the sphere AP54, which has been retained at a position where it has not been removed from the communication hole 5920, becomes the top and the third sphere The ball up to flows into the storage channel 1231.

  In the jackpot game, the inflow of the sphere from the adjustment flow channel 5911 to the storage flow channel 1231 is repeated as described above, and the inflow is regulated at a maximum of three times per one opening of the communication hole 5920. You.

  With reference to FIG. 47, a case where the jackpot game proceeds by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. FIGS. 47A to 47C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

  In FIG. 47 (a), the state where the solenoid 1510 is excited is shown. In FIG. 47 (b), the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the tip of the time difference forming section 5423 is on the rear side of the engaging section 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. FIG. 47 (c) illustrates a state in which the time lag forming portion 5423 is disposed above the engagement portion 1333, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened when the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass.

  When the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves along with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920, while engaging the opening / closing plate 1300. The portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction, and the movement of the open / close plate 1300 is regulated, so that the regulating member 2600 maintains the stored state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the regulating member 2600 is in the discharging state, and the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, in driving the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started. Balls can be prevented from flowing from 5911.

  FIGS. 48A and 48B are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the operation of the regulating member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 by the driving of the solenoid 2810 is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 48A illustrates a state where the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited, and FIG. 48B illustrates a state where the solenoid 2810 is excited.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the movable closing member 5931 is pushed down by the pressing action portion 5870, so that the communication hole 5920 is opened. This allows the sphere to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the urging force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  Accordingly, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened and the ball can flow into the storage channel 1231 while the communication hole 5920 is de-energized. It is closed and the inflow into the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

  In the big hit game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the above-described mechanism, a fixed number (three in the present embodiment) of balls are flown into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes With a probability of 1, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, and the special symbol lottery 30 times It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased, so that the ball can easily win the second entrance 640.

  In this embodiment, three types of special symbols, "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i", are provided (see FIG. 49). Although details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a are differently configured depending on the jackpot type, so that the number of balls that enter the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Be composed.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type of the entrance that triggered the symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”. Is associated with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", and the big hit h Are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

  When the jackpot H or the jackpot h is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive the payout of approximately 2250 prize balls, can win the specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive the payout of the specified upper limit.

  In the case of a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the big hit i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

  When the big hit i is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the payout number of the prize balls and the time required for the jackpot game are made variable depending on the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is obtained.

  In other words, when a special pattern 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), a specified number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big hit. In the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), according to the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is obtained, a prize ball is obtained. Since the maximum number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the gaming ability of acquiring a jackpot in a right-handed game is different from the gaming ability of paying out prize balls depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs. Sex can be added. This makes it possible to prevent the right-handed game from being played indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the attention to each change.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing the time change in the twelfth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the eleventh operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  In the first round of the round game R, the communication hole 5920 is opened with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). When storing the spheres from the second storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 balls can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so that how many (1 to 1) spheres flow from the communication hole 5920 can be stored. Even if it is 3), the round game R can be ended by winning the specified number (10C).

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means sets the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. , And after the third interval time Int3 between rounds has elapsed, the second round game R is started. Here, a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 at intervals of 3 seconds, so that at the end of the first round of the round game R, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251 Spheres (up to 14 spheres) that can be stored in a row can be discharged globally.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third round up to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 2810 controls the driving of the solenoid 2810 so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 from the adjustment channel 5911 every time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excited). Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the entire sphere is stored until the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the tenth round game R). Since the ball can enter the road 1231, the big hit game can be ended without the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating in the twelfth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot i, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed. The operation up to the fourth round of the round game R is the same as that of the eleventh operation pattern, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, although it is possible for the ball to flow from the communication hole 5920 even in the round game R of the fifth round, unlike the fourth round, the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the balls are actually flown from the communication holes 5920, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls obtained in the fifth round of the round game R of the present operation pattern is smaller than the number of prize balls obtained in the same round game R in the eleventh operation pattern, and the first prize ball is obtained. Since the end of the round game R is to be waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the big hit game is prolonged.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the sixth to fifteenth rounds is repeated with the third interval time Int3 between the rounds between each round game R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time between rounds Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In the present operation pattern, the decrease in the number of winning balls that can occur in the subsequent round game R from the fifth round game R and the extension of the round time mean that a ball flows from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231. The number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the jackpot changes the degree to which the number of winning balls decreases and the round time increases. The number of spheres remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of spheres passing through the second entrance 640, while the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the second entrance) 640), the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 is related to the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2.

  In the following description, in the present operation pattern, the number of times of the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) and the number of the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Are described assuming that they have the same number.

  As described above, in the jackpot game of the present operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a once. That is, up to twelve balls have already flowed into the storage channel 1231 before the fourth round of the round game R. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the ball flows into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 because the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911. Is the case. In other words, this is a case where the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) has been received 13 times or more after the transition to the high probability state. .

  Therefore, if the jackpot is obtained between the transition to the high probability state and the reception of the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry to the second entrance 640) 12 times, the number of award balls decreases. And the extension of the round time does not occur, so that the player's attention to acquiring the jackpot by the 12th lottery can be improved.

  In addition, even after the thirteenth lottery, the number of prize balls decreases for each one lottery, and the round time is extended for each three lotteries. Attention can be improved.

  That is, for example, when a jackpot is acquired in a state where 14 balls remain in the adjustment channel 5911 (the 14th lottery of the special symbol 2), the ball is stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the flow channel 1231 is two, the number that can be won in this round is eight. When a jackpot is won in a state where 15 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the 15th lottery of the special symbol 2), the storage flow path passes through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the 1231 is three, the number that can be won in this round is seven. Therefore, as the number of remaining balls increases, the number of prize balls paid out in the fifth round of round R decreases.

  On the other hand, in the case where the jackpot is won in the thirteenth to fifteenth lotteries, in any case, the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 flows into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R. Is zero. Therefore, from the sixth round game R, a specified number of balls can be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a, thereby completing the sixth round game R. No change occurs in the degree of extension.

  In addition, when the number of remaining adjustment channels 5911 when the jackpot is acquired is 16 to 18, in the round game R of the sixth round, and when 19 to 21, the number of adjustment channels 5911 is 22 to 24 in the round game R of the seventh round. In the number of rounds, the number of prize balls decreases in the round game R of the eighth round, in the round game R of the ninth round, in the case of 25 to 27, in the round game R of the ninth round, and in the round game R of the tenth round, in the case of 28 to 30. And the round time is prolonged.

  Thereby, as in the present embodiment, in the gaming property in which the high-probability state ends with the number of lotteries, in the case where the jackpot is acquired shortly after the transition to the high-probability state, and in the case where the jackpot is acquired just before the end of the high-probability state. Thus, it is possible to make a difference in the profit (number of payouts of prize balls, progress time of the jackpot game, etc.) given to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the profit given to the player is reduced as the number of lotteries from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot acquisition is increased, if the number of lotteries until the jackpot acquisition is small, Originally, there should have been a chance to receive a lottery with a high probability even with the remaining number of lotteries, but it is possible to partially eliminate the player's dissatisfaction that the lottery cannot be received.

  In other words, if the jackpot was won in the first lottery after the high probability state was reached, the remaining 29 lotteries should be added and the next 59 lotteries could be received. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to 30 times again can be partially solved. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

  In addition, even in the high probability state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the second specific winning port 2255a is set in the eleventh operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout irrespective of the number of lotteries after opening and closing and shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may play a game (left-handed game) aiming at winning the ball in the first entrance 64 in the high probability state.

  In this case, as compared with the case of performing a right-handed game, the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 is increased without leading to the special symbol lottery, the interval at which the lottery can be received becomes longer, and the game time becomes longer. May be longer.

  Therefore, as a method of playing in the high-probability state, the player may be able to receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time while suppressing the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is obtained. Do you aim for the jackpot of jackpot h) (whether you play a right-handed game) or increase the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is acquired, and expect that the game time will be longer, It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim for a jackpot of a jackpot type (jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of a decrease in the prize ball in (a left-handed game). As a result, it is possible to widen the range of the game method to be selected depending on the player's taste and the situation where the player is placed (playable time or the like).

  After the high probability state ends, the second entrance 640 becomes difficult to open, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment channel 5911, but in the case of the jackpot type (big hit H) that can be obtained in the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by the specified number of prizes, the profit given to the player (the profit in both the number of prize balls and the game time) is not impaired. Therefore, even when the player stops playing the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being lost. A player can start a game at an arbitrary timing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (the lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) and the number of the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (the second entry ball) The description has been made assuming that the number of balls entering the mouth 640) is the same. However, in an actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the time of obtaining the jackpot is the number of balls of the special symbol 2 until the jackpot is obtained. It should be noted that the number of lotteries is rarely the same.

  That is, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed when a ball is won at the second entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the lottery has won the jackpot in the subsequent reach production or , After a button press effect, etc., it is normal for the player to continue to hit the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since up to four balls can be held in the second entrance 640, a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player receives a lottery efficiently, a so-called hold stop) In this case, the player keeps the state in which a maximum of about four balls enter the second entrance 640 in addition to the number of lotteries in which the player can recognize the jackpot determination.

  Also, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 when the number of reserves is the maximum, the lottery cannot be received, but the ball enters the adjustment channel 5911, so that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is reduced. More likely to decrease. The hold is digested by stopping the change and starting the next change, in other words, the longer the period until the stop of the change, the higher the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game decreases. Will be.

  Therefore, when the ball is left open in an effect with a high sense of expectation such as a long reach, it is possible to form a gaming property in which the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is reduced is increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during a high-reliability production such as a long reach, so that the player can concentrate on adjusting the firing power of the ball, eliminating the concentration power can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve a player's concentration on an effect such as a long reach, and it is possible to improve attention to the effect.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position has been described. However, the first variable winning device 6000 according to the sixth embodiment interferes with the balls by driving. Thus, the arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, below the first variable prize device 6000 in the present embodiment, the probability variation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is disposed, and the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 is placed in the specific area 4830. The state after the jackpot game is changed depending on whether or not the game passes.

  FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 along the line LII-LII in FIG. FIG. 52 shows the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable prize device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable prize device 1000 in the first embodiment (the main body member 1100, the covering front plate 1200, the opening / closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and a new interference device 6900 in the sixth embodiment.

  The interference device 6900 is provided with a solenoid 6910 disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and having a movable slide axis disposed along a plane that is flat with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and a tip of the movable portion of the solenoid 6910. A main member 6920 is mainly provided with an interference member 6930 that is slid in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the front member 6920.

  The tip member 6920 includes a long hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The long hole 6921 is formed to be inclined in such a manner as to be closer to the thin plate member 1110 toward the distal end side of the distal end member 6920.

  The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by a through hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 arranged to face the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200, and the rear end portion is a long hole 6921. The rear end moves back and forth along the long hole 6921 with the driving of the solenoid 6910. By this back and forth operation, it is possible to enter the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

  The through hole H61 is provided at a position slightly separated to the left from the center of the third ball P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. When the interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 to be in a protruding state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), the ball P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  FIGS. 53A and 53B are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. FIG. Note that FIG. 53A illustrates a case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53B illustrates a case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. The sphere that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is shown by an imaginary line, and “V” is described in the sphere that first enters the specific region 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later. .

  As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 when the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, while the third ball is stored when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. Subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231, and the number of stored balls is less than 10 balls. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the specified number of the big hit games per round game R is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be ended due to the specified number of winnings, the end of the round game R is waited until the specified time. The effect that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, a quarter With a probability of 1, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends ten times, and the special symbol lottery is performed ten times. When the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 after the game is over, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, the game is normally performed until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be in the time saving state of the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, two types of special symbols such as “big hit I” and “big hit j” are provided. Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000, The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state).

  More specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). . When the big hit I is reached, the big hit game of two rounds is executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of approximately 285 prize balls and cannot almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is selected by lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), a jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

  When the jackpot is j, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state).

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn by a lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the second entrance 640), the right to shift the special symbol to a probable state (high probability state) is almost surely acquired. This is advantageous to the player as compared with a case where a big win is achieved in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64). Therefore, in order to obtain a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), in the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player performs a right-handed game. Do.

  During the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol decreases (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the normal symbol hit increases (1). Second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is hit, the jackpot j is almost completely shifted to the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state). It is easy for the player to easily acquire a large amount of prize balls because the special symbol that becomes the jackpot that can acquire the right) is easily repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is a first specific winning in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  In FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operation time TL). Is done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the length of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the length of each time is performed based on the time relationship described below.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the thirteenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). Then, the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The drive of the solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, and the distributing operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the protruding state by the long-term operation time TL, and after the lapse of the long-term operation time TL, the solenoid 6910 is driven to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again. By controlling, the interference member 6930 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53 (b)). In the present embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the interference member 6930 is first waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is reached. Is in a retracted state, so that it is practically impossible to win a specified number of balls, and the first round of the round game R ends when the first operation time T1 elapses.

  Simultaneously with the end of the first round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retreat state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot pass through to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to maintain the retraction state, respectively, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the fourteenth operation pattern>
In the case of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). Then, the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The drive of the solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, and the distributing operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the protruding state for a very short time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the very short time, the interference member 6930 is again held in the retracted state. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state most of the time, so as shown in FIG. Balls can be awarded. Therefore, while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is set in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability variation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to maintain the retraction state, respectively, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time at which it is expected that the winning number of balls will be 3 or more and less than 6 in the first round of the round game R. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball blocks the line of sight of the player, and it is difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to check the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

  Therefore, the change due to the overhang of the interference member 6930 is limited to the third and subsequent balls moving only slightly in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the player recognizes whether or not the change by the interference member 6930 has occurred. It is possible to make the player enjoy the game of making the first specific winning opening 1000a win a ball and storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 without giving a sense of incongruity to the player by the operation of the interference member 6930. Can be.

  Then, the balls are stored near the entrance of the storage channel 1231, and yet the first round of the round game R is not completed, giving a sense of incongruity for the first time, and causing the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to be actually counted. For the first time, it is possible to form a new game characteristic of recognizing a difference in a jackpot type.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation (change in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, and the player can be operated by the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify a change in the situation of the game board 13 from the given discomfort in an easily recognizable manner, and to make the player recognize the difference in the jackpot type. Therefore, attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment is different from the third embodiment. The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured such that the ball disposed at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of the 1st variable winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to the line. The configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment except for the covering front plate 7200, and thus the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same configuration as the configuration described in the third embodiment (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the accommodation portion 1230, the detection sensor 1240, and the drop delay plate 3250). In addition to the above, a second drop delay plate 7260 newly provided in the present embodiment is provided.

  The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member extending between the terminal surface 3251b and the accommodation portion 1230 and extending to the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and descends as the upper surface 7261 separates from the detection sensor 1240. Incline. As shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 extends rearward so as not to interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the second drop delay plate 7260 has a distance between the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 near the detection sensor 1240 less than the diameter of the sphere and a position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) with respect to the movement trajectory of the sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the ball rolling the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second drop delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member that changes whether or not it comes into contact with the ball according to the path of the ball. This will be described below.

  FIGS. 58A and 58B are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35B. FIG. 58 (a) illustrates a case where the open / close plate 1300 changes to a closed state in a state where the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, and FIG. 58 (b) illustrates a case where the open / close plate 1300 is closed. The case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 in the meantime is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the ball is placed on the front plate in accordance with the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 generated during the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it comes into contact with the second drop delay plate 7260 in the process of falling, flows down to the drop delay plate 3250 side along the slope of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 to fall again to the drop position Pf3. To reach.

  Since the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (the distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball, the force of the ball Is large, it is possible to prevent the ball from vertically falling on the back side of the second drop delay plate 7260.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the sphere rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 moves along the rearward slope of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250 toward the main body member 3100. It flows down while contacting with.

  At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the ball is disposed below the second drop delay plate 7260, the length of the second drop delay plate 7260 extended to the back side is determined by the movement trajectory of the ball. The ball falling from above can be received by the upper surface 7261 while also being held on the front side.

  The sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and falls directly after reaching the fall position Pf3. Therefore, similarly to the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250 without delay.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the ball receives the action of the second drop delay plate 7260 and the case where the ball does not receive the ball, depending on from where the ball approaches the second drop delay plate 7260.

  In the present embodiment, while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the ball rolling the drop delay plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, the two balls are continuously rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 1300, and the previous ball is rolled. Even if the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by passing through the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the fall of the ball disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

  In addition, even if two balls are not connected in a row, the ball that rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 1300 happens to be closed when the ball is accidentally placed in front of the detection sensor 1240. Also, the ball can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the sphere rolls leftward on the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260, and then resumes rightward rolling along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, the ball can be maintained substantially in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 for a time longer than the time when the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 1300 is rolled. Thus, the number of useless balls (balls flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and discharged from the first out port 66) that can occur during the interval time can be reduced.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000.

  59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away so that the opening / closing plate 8300 is visible, and a part of the side wall part 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIGS. 59 and 61, after the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is driven (excited), the open / close plate 8300 is in the open state (elevated posture), and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 is in the open state (extended posture). 60 and 62, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the closed state (inclination posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state (submerging posture). ) Is shown. Also, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the near side of the drawing is referred to as a front (front) side, and the far side of the drawing is referred to as a rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 59 to FIG. 62, the open / close plate 8300 of the first variable winning device 8000 has a distance between the shaft portion 1320, the loaded portion 1330, and the both shaft portions 1320 described in each of the above embodiments of about 4 or the like. And a plate portion 8310 formed in a plate shape in three sections on the left side (front side distant from the detection sensor 1240) in front view.

  That is, in the present embodiment, a gap is formed between the opening and closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are arranged in this gap. Is established.

  In addition, since the axial length of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 is shorter than that of the first embodiment, the formation range of the rectangular recess 1122 can be shortened. In the present embodiment, the rectangular recess 1122 is formed in a minimum range necessary for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a portion fixed to the covering front plate 8200, and plays a role of a rolling surface of a ball guided to the detection sensor 1240. Note that the configuration of the covering front plate 8200 is the same as that of the covering front plate 1200 described in the above embodiment, except for the fixed receiving portion 8250. Description is omitted.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-shaped member protruding from the rear surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the main body member 1100, and has a protruding end (rear end) on the right side of the main body member 1100. Abuts on the main body member 1100 in such a manner as to close the open end (front end). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed such that the upper surface (the rolling surface of the sphere) is flush with the upper surface (the rolling surface) of the open / close plate 8300 in the open state, that is, as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the right. The lower surface is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. The arc on which the shape of the lower surface is based is formed as an arc whose radius is shorter than the radius of the operation locus (arc) of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (the longest portion radius, that is, the radius of the motion locus of the upper end of the opposing surface 8341b). Is done. Accordingly, the upper corner of the facing surface 8341b and the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 moves (rotates) the fixed receiving portion 8250 by a predetermined angle or more. Be regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the protrusion of the fixed receiving portion 8250 (length of extension to the left) is designed to be a length that does not allow the ball dropped from the left end of the inclined surface 1237 to ride on the rolling surface as it is. You. That is, in the present embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is disposed to the left of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, even if the ball collides with the fixed receiving portion 8250 when the ball falls vertically from the inclined surface 1237, the center of gravity of the ball is located on the left side of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250. The event that the ball flows down to the detection sensor 1240 hardly occurs, and the ball spills leftward from the fixed receiving portion 8250 and falls toward the first out port 66.

  In addition, when a ball spilling leftward from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the opposing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the load applied to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from the ball causes the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 to be closed. (The direction in which the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is rotated clockwise in front view). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from changing to the open state due to the load applied from the ball.

  Also, due to the configuration on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 8000 in the game area (arrangement of nails, second ball entrance 640, etc., see FIG. 2), a ball having a lower right speed is sent to the fixed receiving portion 8250. The probability of a jump event occurring is extremely low.

  Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having the rolling surface is arranged on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not exert an effect that the ball is excessively easily guided to the detection sensor 1240. It is composed of

  The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to suppress the occurrence of a problem in flowing down a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) while opening and closing the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 by a rotation operation. Hereinafter, the details of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 will be described.

  The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is a member rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110, and is provided with a receiving plate 8341 disposed on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and extends from the receiving plate 8341 toward the rotating shaft. Rod-shaped connecting portion 8342, a loaded portion 8343 arranged on the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and configured to be able to abut the power transmitting member 1400, and the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are relatively non-rotatable. A rod-shaped member to be connected, which mainly includes a shaft support rod portion 8344 rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110.

  In the present embodiment, the shaft support rod portion 8344 has a circular cross section in which the shaft support portion supported by the thin plate member 1110 has a circular cross section, and a support portion supporting the connecting portion 8342 on the front side and a load portion 8343 on the rear side. The supporting portion to be supported is formed in a D-shaped cross section (a shape other than a circular shape). A fitting portion (a hole or a concave portion) having a shape corresponding to the D-shape is formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the load-receiving portion 8343. In a use state (see FIG. 59), the support portion and the fitting portion are fitted. By being combined, the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

  Loaded portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end is rotatably supported by shaft support rod portion 8344, and includes a contact curved surface 8343a that is a curved upper surface that contacts power transmission member 1400, and a loaded portion 8343. And a center of gravity 8343b including the position of the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the abutting curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, and is extended when the extending portion 1420 descends (tilts). The right end where the extension 1420 starts to contact has a surface substantially parallel to the contact start line FL1 including the point where the portion 1420 and the loaded portion 8343 start to contact.

  A smooth curved surface is formed from the right end to the left end, which is the end point of contact with the extending portion 1420, in such a manner that the radius of rotation is gradually reduced. The load transfer to / from the 8343 can be generated smoothly (with low dynamic friction). Accordingly, the ability of the loaded portion 8343 to follow the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

  The center of gravity portion 8343b is a portion for maintaining the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in a closed state (submerged posture) when a load from the power transmission member 1400 is not generated. That is, since the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is included in the center of gravity 8343b, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its posture toward the closed state (submerged posture) by rotation due to its own weight. When the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 contacts the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250, further rotation of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is restricted, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (submerged posture). Is done.

  The connecting portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at a left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 (that is, a portion adjacent to the opening / closing plate 8300 and where a load may be generated). Accordingly, the rigidity of the left end of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342 is narrowed. Therefore, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened and closed by the opening / closing plate 8300. Even if the collision occurs, the possibility that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is damaged can be reduced.

  The connecting portion 8342 only needs to be able to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, and the configuration of the connecting portion 8342 is not limited to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft supporting rod portion 8344, the right end portion of the receiving plate 8341 may be connected to the shaft supporting rod portion 8344 (ie, two connecting rod portions 8344). The right and left ends of the receiving plate 8341 may be supported by rods.) In this case, the two rods are connected and reinforced by a planar plate along a plane orthogonal to the shaft support rod 8344. Is also good.

  The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-shaped portion having a front-rear width substantially equal to the width in the short direction of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300, and is connected to a flat rolling plane 8341a and a left end of the rolling plane 8341a. And a facing surface 8341b that faces the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (see FIG. 59).

  The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a parallel plane that is connected at the surface position to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (upward posture) in the open state (extended posture).

  The facing surface 8341b is configured as a plane orthogonal to the rolling plane 8341a, and has a width in the short direction (thickness of the receiving plate 8341) substantially equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. Accordingly, a surface that receives a load when the opposing surface 8341b contacts the plate portion 8310 can be enlarged, so that the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is damaged by the load at the time of contact (breaking or chipping occurs). Or breakage, etc.) can be easily avoided.

  Here, the facing surface 8341b is disposed on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) of a plane passing through the shaft support rod portion 8344 and orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates in the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60), the movement trajectory LC1 of the facing surface 8341b is a rolling plane in the open state. It will swell above 8341a (radially outward of the shaft support rod portion 8344). This makes it easier to push the sphere (one in the present embodiment) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240, but the details will be described later.

  Next, an operation mode and an operation sequence of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the opening / closing plate 8300, and the regulating member 1600 by the load transmitted through the power transmission member 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  63 and 64, the operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 65 illustrates a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a). 63 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along the line LXIIId-LXIIId in FIG. 63 (c).

  FIG. 64A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along the line LXIVd-LXIVd in FIG. 64 (c).

  In FIGS. 63 and 64, in order to facilitate understanding, fixing of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62), the other components are not shown, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are closed (see FIG. 63 ( FIGS. 63A and 63B) are shown in chronological order as they change from the open state to the open state (see FIGS. 64C and 64D).

  That is, in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), a state in which the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (a state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited). 63 (c) and 63 (d), the distal end member 1520 is displaced, and the auxiliary second distance shorter than the second distance h2 (see FIG. 20 (c)) shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a. 64 (c) and 64 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (when the solenoid 1510 Excited State of being arranged in a final arrival position) of the focus is illustrated, respectively.

  When the distal end member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 63 (c)), the power transmission member 1400 moves the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 to the contact start line FL1. I agree with the state to match. That is, in the states shown in FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts receiving a load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the state shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), FIG. The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is kept closed until the state shown in FIG. 63 (c) and FIG. 63 (d) is reached.)

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 65, distances h1, h2, h2a, h3, and h4 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) the single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operation earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and ends operation earlier. .

  In addition, the regulating member 1600 starts operating toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time as the opening / closing plate 8300 opens. As shown in FIG. 65, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, the respective members operate in the reverse order of the drive (excitation), as shown in a symmetrical manner in each timing chart.

  As shown in FIG. 65, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, the opening / closing plate 8300 is not in the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is provided. The state in which the hemisphere can enter is maintained (see FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d)). Therefore, in a period in which the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, a state in which a ball can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the movement trajectory LC1 of the opposing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is configured to expand above the rolling plane 8341a, and when the detection sensor 1240 detects the sphere P81, the sphere P81 is detected. The center of the sphere P82 flowing down the upstream side of the sphere P81 in series with the sphere P81 is a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320 and passing through the center of the shaft support rod portion 8344 (the most swelling point of the motion trajectory LC1 is (The plane passing through) is disposed closer to the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, a load in the rightward direction (the direction in which the ball P82 is pushed into the detection sensor 1240) can be applied to the ball P82 at the upper end of the facing surface 8341b.

  Accordingly, with the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor on the assumption that an open ball is formed (the conditions of the ball upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfy the conditions, see the balls P81 and P82 in FIG. 59). When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released by the detection at 1240 (for example, when the specified number of balls in the round game R is detected by the detection sensor 1240 detecting the ball P81) However, only one ball (corresponding to the ball P82) riding on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 has an over-winning prize (so-called over-winning; that is, a predetermined number of round games R (books). In the embodiment, it is configured to allow the detection sensor 1240 to detect more than 10 balls (pass the first specific winning opening 1000a). Can.

  In the present embodiment, while the load is applied to the ball P82 by the receiving surface 8341 operating in an arc orbit, the upper surface of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is rolled after being pushed into the detection sensor 1240 side by the load. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball P82 is pushed along the arc trajectory into the detection sensor 1240, the ball P82 flutters when passing through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the ball P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240 and the downflow occurs. Stagnant, bouncing back, etc.) can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the sphere is configured to be able to be stored on the downstream side (storage channel 1231) of the detection sensor 1240, and as described in each of the above embodiments, the detection sensor is configured by the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231. The passage of 1240 spheres can be regulated. Therefore, when the storage channel 1231 is full of spheres, the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is regulated by the sphere, so that the sphere P82 does not enter the storage channel 1231 and the auxiliary opening and closing is performed. After the member 8340 is closed, it spills and flows down to the first out port 66.

  On the other hand, if there is a gap in the storage channel 1231, excess winning can be allowed for only one ball on the rolling plane 8341 a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. Accordingly, the arrangement of the spheres downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (i.e., the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage channel 1231) can change the likelihood of occurrence of excess winnings. This can be performed by controlling the flow of the sphere in the road 1231 to be adjusted.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is smooth in such a manner that the radius of rotation gradually decreases from the contact start portion (right end) to the power transmission member 1400 to the contact end portion (left end). A curve was formed. As a result, the load can be transmitted in a state where the dynamic friction is small. Accordingly, the ability of the loaded portion 8343 to follow the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

  In a state in which the open ball is formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is limited to one ball on the rolling plane 8341a. When the state changes (rotates) from the open state to the closed state, a load is applied from the rolling plane 8341a to the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a). Thus, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (operates to the closed state), a limited number (one in the present embodiment) of the sphere enters the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a). The ball can be easily made. This can increase the possibility of occurrence of an excess winning with a limited number.

  In addition, the possibility of occurrence of the excess prize changes depending on how the balls in the storage channel 1231 are stored. That is, depending on the arrangement state (the number of stored balls, etc.) of the balls in the storage channel 1231 when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (operates toward the closed state), it is possible to change the possibility of occurrence of an excess winning. Further, the arrangement state of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be adjusted by the driving (excitation) control mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the operation mode of the interference member 6930. In other words, by controlling the drive (excitation) mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, the number of award balls to be paid out due to excess winning can be equalized.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 in the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. The same components as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  66 and 68, a state after the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (elevated posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the open state (extended posture). In FIGS. 67 and 69, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the closed state (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state (submerged posture). The state after the change is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiment, except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from the above embodiment. In brief, this corresponds to a case where the power transmission member 1400 of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment is replaced with the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment.

  As in the above-described embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400, the front-side protruding end of the pushing portion 1422 and the front-side protruding end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are the same orthogonal to the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400. It is arranged on a plane. Therefore, the opening / closing plate 8300 can be opened by pushing the engagement portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 8300 by the time difference forming portion 5423 (corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 71A even before being pushed by the pushing portion 1422). The state changes to the state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

  The thin plate member 9110 extends to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 with an auxiliary entrance 9111 formed to have a size that allows a ball to pass therethrough, and a length capable of guiding the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111. And a rolling plate 9112.

  The auxiliary entrance 9111 is a through-hole disposed to the left of the outlet 1150 in a front view, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) balls are paid out by detecting the passage of the balls. It is a prize ball mouth. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the auxiliary entrance 9111 may be an entrance (for example, an exit) in which payout of award balls does not occur.

  The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate on which the sphere flowing down between the main body member 9100 and the covering front plate 8200 rolls on the upper surface, and as the upper surface approaches the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 (the more toward the right side). ) It is formed as an inclined surface that descends. Further, the rolling plate 9112 is formed so as to be connected to the lower side of the auxiliary entrance 9111. On the front side of the auxiliary entrance 9111, the rolling plate 9112 is formed as an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the rear side. You.

  That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided along the slope to the front side of the auxiliary entrance 9111, and then passes through the auxiliary entrance 9111 and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in the present embodiment, three prize balls are paid out to the player.

  The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed to be such that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the inclined surface 1237 does not pick up the ball flowing down the flow path FK1 of the ball falling freely. That is, in the state where the first variable prize winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball does not pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111 regardless of how much rightward is continued.

  On the other hand, the opening / closing plate 8300 having an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the right is slightly driven (for example, excited for 0.1 second and the opening / closing plate 8300 is rotated toward the open state), and the opening / closing plate 8300 is turned rightward from the opening / closing plate 8300. When the ball flows down the load flow path FK2 in which the loaded ball flows down, the ball can roll on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111. That is, in this embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven, the ball that has come into contact with the opening / closing plate 8300 can pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111 in addition to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Here, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 is different from that described in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

  70 and 71, the operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Also, FIG. 72 illustrates a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the open / close plate 8300, the auxiliary open / close member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

  70A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70A. 70 (c) is a rear view of the first variable prize device 9000, and FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable prize device 9000 along the line LXXd-LXXd in FIG. 70 (c).

  FIG. 71 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a). 71 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along the line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71 (c).

  70 and 71, for easy understanding, the fixing of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69), the other components are not shown, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are in the closed state (FIG. 70 ( 70 (a) and FIG. 70 (b)), and how the state changes from the open state (see FIG. 71 (c) and FIG. 71 (d)) in chronological order.

  That is, in FIGS. 70A and 70B, a state in which the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (a state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is shown. 70 (c) and 70 (d), a state in which the distal end member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIG. FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (b) show a state where the distal end member 1520 is displaced and is located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a shorter than the auxiliary first distance h1a. In FIG. 71 (d), the distal end member 1520 is displaced and located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a (a final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited). State is shown, respectively.

  When the tip member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a (see FIG. 70C), the interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400 and the restriction are provided. This is the same as the state where the contact with the extension portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d), the regulating member 1600 starts receiving a load from the open / close plate 8300 (from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b) to FIG. 70 ( Until the state shown in FIG. 70 (c) and FIG. 70 (d), the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the raised posture (discharged state)).

  In the present embodiment, unlike the eighth embodiment, in a state where the distal end member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71A), the open / close plate 8300 is opened. State (elevating posture), and the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state. Then, in a state where the distal end member 1520 is disposed at a position away from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71A) that has been closed is opened (see FIG. 71A). 71 (c)).

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), the open / close plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (elevated posture) and regulated. The member 1600 is maintained in the storage state.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 72, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) the single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operation earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 After the operation is completed, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating.

  In addition, the regulating member 1600 starts operating toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time as the opening / closing plate 8300 opens. As shown in FIG. 72, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, the members operate in the reverse order of the driving (excitation), as shown in the timing chart in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 starts driving from a non-excited state, only the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 has not started operating yet. Therefore, by shortening the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (by performing a short opening), the state of the open / close plate 8300 can be changed while the auxiliary open / close member 8340 is maintained in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 73, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  FIG. 73 illustrates a case where the period during which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) is set to a half of the time (0.1 seconds in this embodiment) required for the open / close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. (I.e., a case where driving (excitation) is performed for 0.05 seconds is shown).

  In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and the operation of raising only the opening / closing plate 8300 to the intermediate state is repeated. According to this operation, a load can be applied to the sphere flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300, so that the flow path of the sphere reaching the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven is caused to flow down. The path can be switched from the path FK1 to the load flow-down path FK2 (see FIG. 66). Therefore, by continuing to launch the ball by right-handing, it is possible to pass the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 and pay out the prize ball to the player.

  With this configuration, it is possible to configure, for example, a playability of paying out a prize ball by a small hit game. In the small hitting game, by driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 in the open pattern shown in FIG. 73, the downward flow path of the ball reaching the front side of the open / close plate 8300 is switched at the timing when the open / close plate 8300 operates, and the auxiliary The player can guide the ball to the entrance 9111 and pay out the prize ball.

  Since the driving of the solenoid 1510 for the small hitting game can be continuously performed a plurality of times, the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of times. For example, since one drive (excitation) period is 0.05 seconds, when the drive (excitation) period of the solenoid 1510 is 1.8 seconds in total, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excitation) 36 times. be able to.

  Further, by setting the drive (excitation) interval, it is possible to easily apply a load to the ball via the opening / closing plate 8300. For example, when the ball is fired at 0.6 second intervals, since 0.6 × X (the number of times the ball arrives) = 0.5 × X + 0.1 × X =, the solenoid 1510 is fired at 0.5 second intervals. (Excitation), a load can be applied to the spheres via the open / close plate 8300 at a rate of about one in five spheres, regardless of the drive (excitation) start timing.

  In this case, about seven balls can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 in one small hitting game, and about 21 prize balls can be paid out to the player.

  In this case, the period of the small hitting game is 0.5 seconds interval × 36 times = about 18 seconds. As described above, by extending the time of one small hitting game, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reserved ball of the special symbol is lost (cut) by the end of the small hitting game. Thus, the small hit game can be generated without interruption.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 disposed above the auxiliary entrance opening 9111 is maintained in a closed state, so that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates as described above (above the auxiliary entrance 9111). As in the case where a movable object operates), a ball flowing down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 side (that is, a ball flowing down on the load flow-down path FK2) receives a load from the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and is flipped or opened / closed. It can be prevented from being guided by the detection sensor 1240 on the rolling plane 8341a of the member 8340.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is not in the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is provided. The state in which the hemisphere can enter is maintained in the same manner as described in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, also in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily configure an excess winning with a limited number of balls.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, control is performed so that the regulating member 1600 changes its state to the discharging state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed. When the storage flow channel 1231 is full, it is possible to prevent the ball from being discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 from being erroneously accelerated, so that it is possible to prevent occurrence of an excess winning.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed, the opening / closing plate 8300 maintains the open state (see FIG. 71A). Therefore, the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be changed while the state where the ball can be placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 (open state) is maintained. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 74, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is set to １ ／ of the time required for the open / close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment). Is performed (that is, a case where the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is illustrated). In the following, the mode of releasing the drive (excitation) is also referred to as “１ ／ release”.

  In this case, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the state (maintain the storage of the sphere in the storage channel 1231), and only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the balls on the upper surfaces of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, several spheres (the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300, (Mainly, the sphere located outside the motion trajectory LC1) can flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66).

  Thus, when the ball rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 8300 still passes through the detection sensor 1240 when the open / close plate 8300 is still open (when 15 payout balls are paid out). And the case where the detection sensor 1240 does not pass and passes through the auxiliary entrance 9111 (the case where three prize balls are paid out).

  In this case, the time required for the specified number of balls to pass through the detection sensor 1240 is extended, so that the time of the round game R can be extended without causing a ball loss.

  It is to be noted that the upper and lower surfaces of the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are provided with irregularities, and a vertically long rib is protruded toward the front side at a position in front of the thin plate member 9110 where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 8300 is in contact. By doing so, the flow speed of the ball may be suppressed, and the ball may be arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240. Thereby, when the 1/4 release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is executed, the possibility that the ball is arranged at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300 can be increased. The function of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by canceling the drive (excitation) by 1/4 can be improved.

  In addition, a plurality of types of timing and the number of times of performing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 can be set by associating with the big hit type.

  For example, when the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 1/4 of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released during 9.0 seconds required for 15 balls to reach the opening / closing plate 8300. Occurs five times, that is, one quarter of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released once every 1.8 seconds, so that about five balls are assisted during the round game R. The guide can be guided to the entrance 9111.

  In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball wins in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R.

  In addition, by making this interval twice, that is, once every 3.6 seconds, and 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, about 5 balls are played during the execution of the round game R twice. The guide can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111.

  In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball wins in the first specific winning opening 1000a during the execution of the round game R twice.

  In order to satisfy the condition five times in 9.0 seconds, it is not necessary to make the intervals 1.8 seconds. For example, the solenoid 1510 is repeated five times during 9.0 seconds by adding 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds, and 2.2 seconds in that order for each 0.2 seconds. May be canceled. Further, the １ ／ release of the solenoid 1510 may be generated at different timings. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs.

  Also, for example, the timing at which the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed is concentrated in the first half of the round game R, so that the ball is continuously fired from the start of the round game R, so that the ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111. It is possible to configure a gaming property that increases the probability of being played.

  In this case, if the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds, the ball may not reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing when the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In other words, those who have hit the ball at the interval between rounds can start the next round game R while the hit ball has reached near the first variable winning device 9000, Since the probability that the ball is guided to the ball opening 9111 can be increased, and as a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be increased, it is possible to motivate the player to continuously hit the ball in the interval between rounds. it can.

  Also, for example, the timing for executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is densely arranged in the latter half of the round game R, so that a predetermined number (ten in the present embodiment) of winning (first specification) is reached until the middle of the round game R. It is possible to promote a loose jackpot game in which a ball is fired intermittently so as not to cause a winning in the winning opening 1000a).

  In this case, in the latter half of the round game R, prolonging the round game R until the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed causes payout of the prize ball due to the ball passing through the auxiliary entrance 9111. Since the number of payouts can be increased, it is possible to cause the player to execute a loose jackpot game such as intermittently firing a ball.

  In this case, a difference is provided in the number of times the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs in the second half of the round game R (for example, there are 0 times, 1 time, and 5 times). As a result, the additional prize balls obtained as a result of the loose jackpot game can be differentiated, so that the player's attention to the flow-down state of the ball that has reached the first variable prize device 9000 is maintained in a high state. can do.

  On the other hand, a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls may be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the ball is continuously fired and before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released. . In this case, an increase in the payout of prize balls due to the passage of the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 cannot be expected, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R and the end of the jackpot game The timing of receiving a lottery later can be hastened.

  In this way, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim at the payout of the prize ball through the auxiliary entrance 9111 or to ignore the payout ball and end the round game R early.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A configuration in which a ball that collides with the opening / closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening / closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by being subjected to a load directed to the auxiliary entrance 9111. did. Thereby, even in the case of the operation mode in which the period during which the open / close plate 8300 is maintained in the open state is short, the payout of the prize ball can be easily performed. Can be enthusiastically executed.

  By performing the ４ release of the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 while maintaining the state where the opening / closing plate 8300 guides the ball to the detection sensor 1240, the ball reaching the upstream of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at a specific timing. Flows down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111. Thereby, a variation can be provided in the progress mode of the round game R in the big hit game and the mode of paying out the prize balls.

  For example, even when the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a does not exceed the specified number, the player can pay extra prize balls by entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 to obtain extra prize balls (first It is possible to obtain a prize ball more than a prize ball (150 in the present embodiment) paid out when a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the specific winning opening 1000a.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 in the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. The same components as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 75 and 76 show a state where the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is de-energized and the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 reaches the lowermost end. In FIG. 77, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is shown. Are driven (excited) so that the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 can be discharged on the way.

  As shown in FIG. 75 to FIG. 77, the first variable winning device 10000 includes a case where a ball can be discharged from an intermediate position of a storage channel 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the covered front plate 10200. Except for the difference from the embodiment, the present embodiment is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiment. Briefly, the movable parts (that is, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the interference device 6900) excluding the intermediate discharge device 10180 are the same as those in the eighth embodiment. Is diverted as it is.

  In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging a sphere at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231 will be described. In the present embodiment, the covering front plate 10200 extends in a box shape that opens toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage portion 10230 having a storage channel 1231, a projecting portion 1235, and an inclined surface 1237. .

  The accommodating portion 10230 includes a bulging portion 10232 formed such that a lower wall portion of the box bulges downward, and a through hole 10233 formed in the front-rear direction near the bulging portion 10232.

  The bulging portion 10232 bulges vertically below the sphere whose flow is regulated by the interference member 6930 with a volume equal to or larger than a sphere. Is formed. Thus, the ball staying at a position near the interference member 6930 can be configured to drop downward from the storage channel 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232.

  The through hole 10233 has a horizontal hole 10233a extending horizontally below the bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 and a vertical hole spatially connected to the horizontal hole 10233a and extending downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. 10233b, and an inclined surface 10233c as an upper bottom surface of the vertical hole 10233b, which is inclined downward toward the rear side.

  The horizontal hole 10233a is disposed above the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right ends, near the right end, and below the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231. It is configured to enter above a plane (a plane with a constant inclination) along the extension of the lower bottom surface.

  The main body member 10100 has the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a in the thin plate member 10110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 described in the above embodiment. A horizontal hole 10111 to be bored, an outlet 10112 through which a ball thrown to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c is bored, and a movable hole provided in the thin plate member 10110 and moving along the horizontal hole 10111 And an intermediate discharge device 10180 having a portion.

  The intermediate discharge device 10180 mainly includes a movable member 10181 that is inserted into both the horizontal holes 10111 and 10233a and is movable to the left and right, and a solenoid 10182 that generates a driving force to move the movable member 10181 to the left and right. Prepare.

  The movable member 10181 excites the solenoid 10182 in a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes an opening in the middle of the storage channel 1231 (an opening leading to the through hole 10233) when the solenoid 10182 is not excited (not driven). In the (driving) state, the state is switched to an open state (see FIG. 77) that allows a sphere to pass through an opening in the middle of the storage channel 1231 (an opening leading to the through hole 10233).

  The movable member 10181 is kept out of contact with the bulging portion 10232 when the ball is not on the ball. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of friction between the movable member 10181 and the bulging portion 10232, and it is possible to reduce the movement resistance.

  On the other hand, in the closed state, the movable member 10181 is supported by the upper surface of the bulging portion 10232 and the left and right ends abutting up and down. Accordingly, even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 in the closed state of the movable member 10181, the movable member 10181 can be prevented from drooping excessively, and the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 can be prevented. Flow can be smoothed.

  The movable member 10181 is an upper surface, which is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left, and functions as a rolling surface on which a ball rolls in a closed state. And an inclined lower surface 10181b formed at the left end and inclined downward toward the right.

  The inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state before the ball rides, and in a state where the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in a vertical direction (a state in which the movable member 10181 is floating), the right end portion is adjacent to the storage portion. The flow path 1231 is disposed slightly below the lower bottom surface. Thereby, the load (resistance) received by the ball when the ball moves from the storage channel 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a can be reduced.

  In addition, the inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state after the ball rides, and in a state where the movable member 10181 vertically contacts the bulging portion 10232 (a state in which the movable member 10181 sinks), the left end portion is adjacent to the storage portion. The flow path 1231 has a shape that corresponds to the lower bottom surface and the surface position. Thereby, the load (resistance) applied to the ball when the ball moves from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage channel 1231 can be reduced.

  Note that the shape of the above-described inclined upper surface 10181a has a smaller degree of inclination than the shape of the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 and is not the same shape. However, since the difference is slight, in this embodiment, similarly to the above embodiment, the time required for one ball to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2. Seconds.

  The inclined lower surface 10181b is used to make it easier to get on and off the bulging portion 10232 even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state and the movable member 10181 is about to fall forward. It is an inclined surface provided in. Thereby, the tip of the movable member 10181 is restricted from moving toward the inner surface of the vertical hole 10233b, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the movable member 10181 stops in that state, and keep the flow of the sphere of the storage channel 1231 smooth. be able to.

  When the intermediate discharge device 10180 is opened (see FIG. 77), the upstream sphere, including the third storage sphere counted from the downstream end, flows down the vertical hole 10233b, and the load from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is sent to the rear side and is sent to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the discharge port 10112.

  In this embodiment, a detection sensor 10112a that detects passage of a sphere is provided at the outlet 10112, and is configured to be able to determine the number of spheres that have passed through the outlet 10112. The ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a is detected by detecting means (for example, the specific region detecting sensor 4860, the non-specific region detecting sensor 4870, and the detecting sensor 10112a or the non-specific region detecting sensor 4870 in FIG. 51). ), And control is performed to determine whether the number of incoming balls matches the number of discharged balls.

  According to the present embodiment, according to the operation mode of the intermediate discharge device 10180 in the round game R, when the specified number (ten in the present embodiment) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel It is possible to switch between a case where the storage channel 1231 is full and a state where the storage channel 1231 is not full. This will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of FIG. 78, for ease of understanding, description will be made assuming that the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state.

  FIG. 78 (a) to FIG. 78 (d) are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a and a time change in the state of the movable member 10181 in the round game R. In FIG. 78 (a), the first specific winning opening 1000a is in an open state (also referred to as "open" in the figure. The closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also referred to as "closed" in the figure. The time change when the movable member 10181 is maintained in the closed state (also referred to as “closed” in the drawing; the same applies in the subsequent drawings) over a period of time assumed to be the same in the following drawings is shown in FIG. At 78 (b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in the open state (also referred to as “open” in the figure; the same applies to the subsequent figures) over the period in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is in the open state. The timing changes in each case are illustrated.

  In FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after a lapse of a first predetermined time (1 second in this embodiment) after the first specific winning opening 1000a starts to change to the open state. 2. When the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state after the lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) and is maintained as it is, in FIG. 78 (d), the first specific winning opening 1000a is in the open state in FIG. The movable member 10181 changes to the open state after a lapse of the reference time T11s (about 15 seconds in this embodiment) from the start of the state change, and then closes after the lapse of a second predetermined time (2 seconds in this embodiment). Time changes when the state changes and is maintained as it is are shown respectively.

  As described above, the driving of the movable member 10181 (the driving of the solenoid 10182) is associated with (combined with) the combination of the number of the round R to be executed and the jackpot type. It can be executed in various types of driving modes.

  For example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (a), during the round game R, the movable member 10181 is always in the closed state, so that the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 is discharged in the same manner as in each of the above embodiments. It is discharged from the outlet 1150. That is, since the balls are not discharged from the middle position of the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is formed by entering a predetermined number (ten in the present embodiment) of the balls into the first specific winning opening 1000 a. It is full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (it can be made impossible).

  Also, for example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (b), since the movable member 10181 is always in the open state during the round game R, the sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 is different from the above embodiments. Before reaching the outlet 1150, it falls into the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the outlet 10112. That is, even if the specified number (ten in the present embodiment) of the balls enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel 1231 does not become full. For this reason, it is possible to easily generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be possible).

  In FIG. 78 (b), after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released as the end of the round game R, the movable member 10181 after a lapse of 2 seconds (a period required for the ball to pass through the storage channel 1231). Is changed to the open state, so that the ball including the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a last (immediately before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released) can be dropped toward the through hole 10233. Therefore, it is possible to configure so that the ball passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a does not flow down to the outlet 1150 at all.

  Further, for example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the open state 1.0 seconds after the start of the round game R, and the movable member 10181 3.0 seconds later. Since the control is performed so as to change from the open state to the closed state, if the ball can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds elapse from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in this embodiment) ) Of the balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel 1231 does not become full. For this reason, it is possible to easily generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be possible).

  In order to arrange the ball above the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds elapse from the start of the round game R, considering the time for the ball to flow down the storage channel 1231, about 2.5 seconds from the start of the round game R Before the second elapses, the ball needs to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  In this embodiment, the time of about 2.5 seconds is the time required for the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to flow down the game area and reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (the shortest time). Time, about 4 seconds). Therefore, it is not enough to fire the ball from the start of the round game R.

  Therefore, in order to prevent the storage channel 1231 from being full, it is necessary to continue firing the ball even in the inter-round interval before the round game R. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval between rounds.

  In addition, an effect is formed by a display device or the like such that it is difficult for the player to grasp the information on whether the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c) is generated in the round game R of the round or not in the first place. Thus, regardless of whether or not the round game R is driven in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R is suppressed. Can be.

  Further, for example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from the start of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is opened, and 2.0 seconds elapse thereafter. Later, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change to the closed state.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively performed during the period in which the round game R is continued, but the control is skipped when the round game R is completed, and the movable member 10181 is forcibly closed. Is switched.

  In the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), for example, when a first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in this embodiment) Of the balls pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R ends before the movable member 10181 enters the open state, so that all the balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a are stored in the storage channel. The storage channel 1231 is full and the storage channel 1231 is full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (it can be made impossible).

  On the other hand, for example, when a second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the balls is the first specific winning. If the ball 1000 passes through the mouth 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the round game R ends, and the ball falls toward the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112. It does not become tongue. For this reason, it is possible to easily generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be possible).

  Therefore, according to the driving mode of FIG. 78 (d), the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) is determined depending on whether the time required for the round games R is less than the reference time T11s or longer than the reference time T11s. It is possible to switch whether or not excess winnings occur.

  In the case of this driving mode, it is preferable to execute the round game R over a long period of time if the number of payouts of the prize balls in the round game R is emphasized. That is, it is preferable that the firing of the balls is intermittently stopped so that the specified number (ten in the present embodiment) of the balls do not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a early. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds is promoted.

  On the other hand, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), as described above, by continuously firing the ball at the interval between rounds, it is possible to aim for the occurrence of an excess winning.

  In this way, by distributing the driving modes in which the preferable ball firing modes are opposite to each other in the round game R of the jackpot game (even in the same round, the driving mode is controlled to be different depending on the jackpot type), It is possible to improve the player's concentration on the jackpot game as compared to the case where the jackpot game should always be executed in the same firing mode (the player can obtain the same profit).

  According to the present embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is determined by the operation mode of the movable member 10181. Can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between a case where the storage channel 1231 is full when 10 balls are filled and a case where the storage channel 1231 is not full even when 10 balls are filled.

  In addition, when the interference member 6930 is in the protruding state, the number of the storage channels 1231 is seven (when the two balls are already arranged downstream of the interference member 6930, nine, see FIG. 75). ) Can be switched between a case where the tank is full by entering the ball and a case where the storage channel 1231 is not full even if 7 (or 9) balls are entered.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 in the extended state in response to the movable member 10181 being in the open state, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing over the through hole 10233 in the left-right direction (jumping over) through the momentum. Can be prevented.

  The driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to be driven by operating the operation button 300.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  By opening the movable member 10181, the sphere can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. Thus, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  That is, while the first specific winning opening 1000a is maintained in the open state, the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is the same as the stored number of the storage channel 1231; The case where the number of balls is different from the stored number of the storage channel 1231 can be configured. This makes it possible to change the possibility of occurrence of an excess winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a depending on the driving mode of the movable member 10181.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 in the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 along line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the installation front board 11200.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in the first variable winning device 11000 of the present embodiment, the shape of the open / close plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream portion of the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted, and the first It has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 3000 of the third embodiment except that two additional winning ports 11183 and the like are added. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the above-described embodiment, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The main body member 11100 has a configuration in which the thin plate member 11110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board is apart from the configuration already described in each of the above embodiments by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the ball. A pair of left and right projecting ribs 11111 projecting toward the front side of the thin plate member 1110, a guide hole 11112 formed as a horizontally long hole and guiding the movement of opening / closing means 11190 described later, and extending to the left of the guide hole 11112. And a guide recess 11113 that is formed as a bottomed recess.

  In addition, the main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional winning opening 11183 configured to allow a ball to pass therethrough, and an opening / closing means 11190 for changing a winning probability of the ball to the second additional winning opening 11183. The details of the opening / closing means 11190 will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the fall delay plate 3250 formed on the covering front plate 11200 maintains only the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position more distant from the side wall 1220 than the diameter of the sphere on the upstream side, The left part of the cut surface SP12 is omitted.

  The position of the cut surface SP12 is set as a position where the sphere that has reached the fall delay plate 3250 by rolling on the inclined surface 1237 does not reach alone. In other words, the ball that has reached the fall delay plate 3250 by rolling on the inclined surface 1237 flows down to the lower right (in the direction approaching the detection sensor 1240) along the slope of the fall delay plate 3250 as long as no external force is applied. I do.

  On the other hand, when a load is applied to the ball and the ball is thrown to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball falls to the second additional winning opening 11183 with a high probability. This falling ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 after passing through the opening / closing means 11190 which will be newly described in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening from which three prize balls are paid out by detecting the passage of the ball.

  The opening / closing plate 11300 has an inclined surface 11340 remaining in the left half portion after being cut off in a shape inclined toward the left shaft portion 1320 from the rotation tip side toward the rotation shaft side.

  The inclined surface 11340 has a position where the end on the rotation tip side is rightward of the cut surface SP12 and the horizontal speed becomes zero after landing on the drop delay plate 3250 (final arrival position FP12, FIG. (See FIG. 82 (a)).

  Therefore, when the open / close plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state when there is a ball at the position where the speed in the left-right direction becomes 0 (final arrival position FP12; see FIG. 82A), the inclined plane 11340 The ball is loaded. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIG. 82 (a) to 82 (c), the change of the state of the first variable prize device 11000 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 82 (a), the opening / closing plate 11300 is in the closed state, and the inclination is inclined. The final arrival position FP12 of the ball that has rolled on the surface 1237 and landed on the drop delay plate 3250 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 82B, the opening / closing plate 11300 is changed from the state shown in FIG. The state after the change is illustrated, and FIG. 82 (c) illustrates a state where the ball falls from the state illustrated in FIG. 82 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the sphere arranged at the final arrival position FP12 comes into contact with the inclined surface 11340 when the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state, and receives a leftward load. The ball given the leftward load is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the drop delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional winning opening 11183.

  On the other hand, when the ball has not reached the final arrival position FP12 (for example, when the ball slightly flows down from the final arrival position FP12 and is arranged at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 82A), the open / close plate 11300 is opened. Even if the state changes, the inclined surface 11340 does not come into contact with the sphere, and the sphere has a rightward component since the rotation direction of the opening / closing plate 11300 (the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal). Direction), and is pushed to the detection sensor 1240 side. Therefore, in this case, the ball does not enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, at the timing when the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state, depending on which position on the front side of the open / close plate 11300 the ball is directed to the detection sensor 1240 , It can be switched to the second additional winning opening 11183.

  The payout of the prize ball by passing the ball through the second additional winning opening 11183 is an extra prize ball exceeding the prize ball planned for the jackpot game for the player, and therefore, the ball passing through the second additional winning opening 11183. The more players there are, the more profits the player can get.

  During the period when the opening / closing plate 11300 maintains the closed state (inter-round interval period), the launching of the ball is continued toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate is stopped as compared with the case where the emission of the ball is stopped. Since the situation where the ball is disposed at the final arrival position FP12 at the timing when the 11300 changes to the open state can be easily caused, it is possible to promote a game mode in which the launch of the ball is continued over the interval period between rounds. it can. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the player stops firing the ball during the interval period between rounds.

  Note that the entry of the ball into the second additional winning opening 11183 is based on the condition that the open / close plate 11300 is changed to the open state, and thus the open / close plate 11300 is driven to the open state (big hit game or small hit game). In a state other than the above, even if right-handed is continued, the ball is unlikely to enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

  Thereby, in a situation where the opening / closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation where the right-handed instruction effect is not executed), even if the right-handed player performs a right-handed shot, the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183. It can be configured that it is difficult for the player to obtain the accompanying profit. In other words, the second additional winning opening 11183 can be made to function as a winning opening in which a ball can easily enter in a situation where driving of the opening and closing plate 11300 occurs (small hitting game or big hitting game).

  Next, the opening / closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) show the arrangement of the protruding rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190, and the second additional winning opening 11183. It is a schematic front view of the projecting rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190, and the second additional winning opening 11183 schematically shown. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the time change of the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening / closing means 11190 is a movable means which is guided by the guide hole 11112 and moves right and left in conjunction with the movement of the distal end member 1520, and is supported by being inserted into the guide hole 11112. Main body support portion 11191, a transmission portion 11192 extending upward from the back side portion of main body support portion 11191 and supported by tip member 1520, and extending leftward from the front side portion of main body support portion 11191. An extending portion 11193, a first projecting portion 11194 projecting to the front side at the left end of the extending portion 11193, and a space slightly longer than the diameter of the ball is provided to the right of the first projecting portion 11194. And a second projecting portion 11195 projecting in the same shape as the first projecting portion 11194.

  A method of assembling the opening / closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is vertically enlarged so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portion is slightly longer than the main body support portion 11191 and is entirely longer than the main body support portion 11191. Is formed as a horizontally long slot.

  Therefore, after projecting the transmission portion 11192 to the rear side through the enlarged portion, the opening / closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and then the driving device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100, and the transmission portion 11192 is supported by the tip member 1520. Thus, the opening / closing means 11190 can be assembled in a manner interlocked with the tip member 1520. Since the transmission portion 11192 does not reach the enlarged portion on the right end of the guide hole 11112 in the movable range of the solenoid 1510 (see FIGS. 83 and 84), it is possible to prevent the opening / closing means 11190 from being disengaged from the guide hole 11112. can do.

  The extension portion 11193 is formed to have a thickness enough to be completely accommodated in the guide concave portion 11113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down on the front side of the opening / closing means 11190 from colliding with the extending portion 11193, and the flowing path of the ball changes in the front-rear direction, or the extending portion 11193 is loaded by the ball. It is possible to prevent breakage.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 are formed as inclined plates which are inclined downward and leftward when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, when the ball on the fall delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, it falls between the protruding ribs 11111 and enters the second additional winning opening 11183 by the opening / closing means 11190. Whether to do is switched. This will be described in detail.

  FIG. 85A shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end of the movement range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end of the second protrusion 11195 and the right protrusion rib 11111 are arranged on the center line of the second additional winning opening 11183.

  When the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85A, the ball contacts the second protruding portion 11195 and flows to the left. As a result, since the ball flows off the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be reduced.

  FIG. 85 (b) shows a state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at an intermediate position in the movement range (see FIG. 20 (c)). That is, it corresponds to immediately after the opening and closing plate 11300 is in the closed state.

  In this case, the upper end of the first protrusion 11194 is disposed to the left of a vertical line passing through the middle position between the pair of protrusions 11111, and the upper end of the second protrusion 11195 has a second additional prize. It is arranged on the right side of the center line of the mouth 11183.

  Therefore, when the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (b), the ball contacts the first protruding portion 11194, flows rightward, and contacts the second protruding portion 11195. It flows to the left. Since the falling ball flows down to the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be increased.

  FIG. 85 (c) shows a state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the right end position of the movement range (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the opening and closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state, as in FIG. 85 (b).

  In this case, the upper end of the first projecting portion 11194 is disposed on the right side of a vertical line passing through the intermediate position between the pair of projecting ribs 11111.

  Therefore, when the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85C, the ball contacts the first protruding portion 11194 and flows to the left. The falling ball is deviated from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down, so that the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be reduced.

  That is, the opening / closing means 11190 keeps the probability that a ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 while the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the open state or the closed state, and keeps the second additional winning while changing the state. It is configured such that the probability of a ball entering the mouth 11183 increases.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 changes by the opening / closing means 11190 interlocking with the state of the opening / closing plate 1300. Here, a description will be given of a case where a ball can be expected to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 and a case where it cannot be expected due to a difference in drive control of the solenoid 1510.

  The phenomenon that the ball flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the falling delay plate 3250 occurs when the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c)).

  Therefore, in a drive pattern in which the solenoid 1510 continues to maintain the drive (excitation) state (an operation pattern with a low probability of entering the ball), when the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the protruding rib 11111, the tip member 1520 The opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position in the same manner as the arrangement of (1). Since the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained because the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained, the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 is deviated from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

  On the other hand, immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), once the drive (excitation) is released (opening / closing plate 11300 is shortly opened) in the drive pattern (operation pattern with a high probability of entering the ball), the cut surface SP12 When the ball flowing to the left passes through the protruding rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the left end position. Thereafter, the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is temporarily released. The opening / closing means 11190 moves toward the right end position by the urging force of the return spring. As a result, the sphere flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a rightward load from the first projecting portion 11194 and flows down along the second projecting portion 11195, and is directed toward the second additional winning opening 11183. Can flow down.

  In this way, by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate 11300, the cut surface SP12 is cut at the same timing (for example, the timing at which the inclined surface 11340 comes into contact with the ball at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82 (b)). The probability that the ball that has flowed to the left will enter the second additional winning opening 11183 can be changed.

  Note that, in the operation pattern with a high probability of entering the ball, the timing of releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is not particularly limited. In this embodiment, the timing at which the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 due to the load from the opening / closing plate 11300 passes through the projecting rib 11111 and reaches between the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195. Is controlled to release the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510.

  In addition, the second additional winning opening 11183 may be configured as an opening for starting the change of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters. In this case, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be increased by the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 11300 during the interval between rounds, so that the normal symbol has a high probability state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon that is accompanied by the suspension of the special symbol 1 and gives a disadvantage to the player.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Depending on the position of the ball on the front side of the opening / closing plate 11300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, the ball moves toward (enters) the detection sensor 1240 or the second additional winning opening 11183. In addition to being able to switch between heading (entering) and continuing to fire the ball during the inter-round interval, the ball can easily flow down to the second additional winning opening 11183. As a result, as a result, it is easier to increase the number of prize balls to be paid out by continuing the firing of the ball during the interval between rounds, so that the game mode of continuously firing the ball during the interval between rounds is promoted. Can be made easier.

  The second additional winning opening 11183 is configured such that it is difficult for the ball to enter even if the ball reaches while the state of the open / close plate 11300 is maintained. This allows the second additional winning opening 11183 to function as a winning opening in which a ball can easily enter in a state in which the opening and closing plate 11300 is driven (small hitting game or big hitting game).

  While it is difficult to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained, it is easy for the ball to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is changing. In addition to the above configuration, a ball receiving a load from the opening / closing plate 11300 when the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state is provided in the second additional winning opening 11183. It was configured to flow down to 11183. Accordingly, by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 11300 after the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven toward the open state (the round game R has started), the probability of the ball entering the second additional winning opening 11183 is provided. Can be changed.

  Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. In FIG. 86 (a) and FIG. 86 (b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is visible, and a part of the side wall part 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are imaginary lines. Is illustrated in FIG. Further, FIG. 86 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a shielded state of the first variable prize device 6000, and FIG. 86 (b) shows a state where the inside is difficult to visually recognize (not easily visible but is visible). Is a schematic diagram showing a transmission state of the first variable winning device 6000 when a transmission effect of changing the first variable prize device to a transparent state that can be visually recognized is executed. Also, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the first variable winning device 6000 described in this control example makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 by the thin plate member 1210 disposed on the front side of the storage channel 1231. (The transmittance of the thin plate member 1210 is low).

  In addition, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage channel 1231 is formed as a bent channel and the downstream side cannot be visually recognized. It is configured so that the number of balls stored in the vehicle cannot be grasped. In addition, since the disposition position of the interference device 6900 is downstream of the bent portion, the movable state of the interference device 6900 cannot be visually recognized.

  Further, by extending the thin plate member 1210 on the upstream side (the left side in FIG. 86A) of the opening direction of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 14), the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is limited. Further, the inside of the storage channel 1231 is configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

  With this configuration, in the shielded state of the first variable winning device 6000, it is difficult to make it difficult to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900. it can.

  In the variable winning device 6000 configured as described above, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on a predetermined condition (for example, success of the timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88B)) being satisfied. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the covering front plate 1200 is constituted by a half mirror so as to switch to a transmission state in which the inside is visible. Thus, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on, it is possible for the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900.

  Note that an optical sensor for detecting light incident from outside may be provided behind the covering front plate 1200. In this case, utilizing the characteristics of the half mirror, which allows the inside to be visually recognized by irradiating strong light from the outside, it has been confirmed that the illegal act of irradiating the covered front plate 1200 with strong light to view the inside was performed. , Can be determined from the output of the optical sensor. Therefore, by setting an error command in response to a change in the output of the optical sensor and performing control so as to make the continuation of the game difficult, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the present control example, a configuration is used in which the light is transmitted to the covering front plate 1200 (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a part (for example, a thin plate member 1210) of the covering front plate 1200 or the light emitting unit is movable so that the incident angle of light emitted from the light emitting unit (LED) that is constantly lit to the covering front plate 1200 is switched. It may be configured so as to be in a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized only when the movable part is located at a predetermined position.

  Further, the covering front plate 1200 may be configured with a transparent color in which the inside is visible, and may be configured to perform a process (for example, a graining process) of irregularly reflecting the irradiated light on the surface thereof. Thereby, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the first variable prize device 6000 is made difficult to see by light emitted from various lamps, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (ie, When the lamp is not lit), the inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be made visible. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the variable winning device 6000.

  In the case of using such a configuration, a shielding wall that blocks light emitted from various lamps from being emitted to the first variable winning device 6000 is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. A configuration may be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 even while the game is being played.

  In addition, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the first variable winning device 6000 with light is provided, and light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231. You may make it switch between a state (state in which light is irradiated) and a visible state (state in which light is not irradiated).

  Furthermore, a movable member for decoration is provided on the covered front plate 1200 in which the inside is visible, and by controlling the operation of the movable member, a state in which the inside of the storage channel 1231 is visible (the movable member for decoration is A state in which the storage channel 1231 is movable at a position that does not overlap with the storage channel 1231) and a state in which the interior of the storage channel 1231 is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which the movable member for decoration is movable so as to cover the storage channel 1231). You may make it switch.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the entire area of the storage channel 1231 is made difficult to visually recognize by the covering front plate 1200, and it is ensured that the movable state of the interference device 6900 is visually recognized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it has an effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in a posture in which a normal game is being played.

  For example, only the lower half of the storage channel 1231 (downstream from the bent portion) may be difficult to see, and the visibility of the upper half may be ensured (even if the formation of the upper half mirror is omitted). Good), or it may be difficult to visually recognize only the portion overlapping the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 in a front view with the same concept. Accordingly, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 can be constructed at low cost.

  Further, for example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 may be secured (the formation of the lower half mirror is omitted), but the visibility of the upper half may be reduced. In this case, the lower limit of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped by visually recognizing the balls remaining in the lower half of the storage channel 1231, while the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. It can be difficult to grasp the exact number.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to stop firing when temporarily stopping the firing of the ball in an attempt to reduce the useless balls (balls not entering the winning opening). In the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in the present control example, when the storage channel 1231 is full (ten balls are stored), no more balls can be expected. With such a configuration, the useless sphere can be reduced by stopping the firing of the sphere at that timing.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, in the round game R of the predetermined number of times, the number of balls that have entered the first variable prize device 6000 does not always match the number of balls that are stored in the storage channel 1231. Even if the number of balls entering the variable winning device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 cannot be known accurately. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to visually check the inside of the storage channel 1231.

  That is, because of the configuration of the present control example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 is ensured (the formation of the lower half mirror is omitted), while the configuration of making the upper half difficult to view becomes effective. It is difficult for the player to easily set the timing for stopping the firing of the ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention and concentration on the launch of the ball in the jackpot game, and prevent the player from playing the game indiscreetly.

  The control example shown in FIGS. 86A and 86B is characterized in that the operation timing of the interference member 6930 is controlled by operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) in addition to the change in the visual recognition state described above. The timing that can be set by the user is prepared, but the details will be described later.

  Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided at the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a center frame 86 are arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 uses the trigger as a trigger to change the display of the special symbol (first symbol). Be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 87B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 93) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second.

  In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), it is determined whether or not the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big hit). Overlooking whether or not there is). In addition, if the combination of the big hit symbols (the same combination of the main symbols in this control example) is arranged on the pay line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as the big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in time. When both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are present, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), there is rarely a situation where there is no ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In many cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided in the left-right direction into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3. Among them, the small area Ds1 indicates the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  Also, a third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the type of the special symbol (either the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) in which the lottery is easily executed differs according to the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery in which a lottery is easily performed in the current game state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed in a case where a lottery of a special symbol, in which a lottery is hardly performed in the current gaming state, is performed.

  Here, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol, in which the lottery is difficult to be executed, is executed is a great attention for the player. For example, in the normal state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol 2 in which the lottery is difficult to be executed is executed, and when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the player is compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit. There is a case where the expectation of the profit obtained is higher. In addition, for example, in the special symbol high probability state, the lottery of the special symbol 1 in which the lottery is difficult to be executed is performed, and when the lottery result is a big hit, compared to the case where the special symbol 2 lottery is a big hit. In some cases, the expectation of the profit obtained by the player may be low.

  Therefore, in the small area Ds3, the variable display is performed only when the special symbol lottery in which the lottery is difficult to be executed in the current game state is executed (by separating from the variable display in the main display area Dm). The player's attention can be easily attracted, and the player can be drawn into the variable display.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of a third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed in the right small area Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a beeper in this control example) performs a predetermined operation, and sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a different character. A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), and If a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is being performed, the number of entered balls is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is the first. This is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second symbol). Retained ball number design) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 87 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

  Note that, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, a timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present control example, an effect related to the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86) is executed based on an operation on the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). In addition, as an effect related to the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, for example, an effect of changing the visibility inside the storage channel 1231, and a discharge mode of the ball stored inside the storage channel 1231. An effect to be changed is exemplified. These effects are configured such that the content of the effect changes depending on the degree of deviation between the operation timing serving as a predetermined reference and the timing at which the player operates the operation buttons 300.

  Here, in the present control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Then, in accordance with the timing effect (operation effect), by performing the operation in a timely manner, the effect is configured so that the profit obtained by the player is maximized. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved.

  First, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display contents during a notice effect performed in a round before a timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during a timing effect (operation effect). In each of the drawings, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status of the operation unit (operation button 300) are used to change the operation of the operation unit (operation button 300) based on the operation of the operation unit. The display contents of the three symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 88, on the third symbol display device 81, a round number display section 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a form indicating that the third round of round game R is being performed. In the area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim at the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the game method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for indicating the number of balls acquired based on the fact that the ball has won the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls of the specific winning opening 1000a. Is done. This acquired number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball in the specific winning opening 1000a, and is then moved and displayed toward the small area Ds2, and finally, the small area Ds2 is displayed. It is added as an acquisition indicator.

  In the number-of-rounds display section 714, a display related to a currently executed game section (number of rounds or an interval) is largely displayed on the left side, and a display related to a game section started after the end of the currently executed game section is displayed on the right side. It is displayed small.

  Also, four circles are displayed side by side below the round number display. The circles are switched depending on the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than four, the circle at the left end is painted out (see FIG. 88 (a), corresponding to the shortage display) and stored in the storage channel 1231. When the number of spheres to be performed is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the intermediate number display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7 If the number is less than nine, the second circle from the right is painted out (see FIG. 92 (a), corresponding to the lack display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten. In this case, the circle at the right end is painted out (see FIG. 92 (b), corresponding to the full display).

  In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying a player that a timing effect (operation effect) is started from the next round and a guidance display for notifying the game property of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

  In this effect area, a button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed, and in response to the button display mode 715, a sub-display area Ds4 in which a display pointer 719 (see FIG. 88 (b)) is displayed. Below the sub-display area Ds4, there is provided a sub-display area Ds5 that is arranged in the same shape as the sub-display area Ds4 and displays information related to the operation of the player.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 88B, the sub-display area Ds4 is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scroll-displayed from right to left, and is a display mode in which the display pointer 719 indicates an operation timing. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at a timing that matches the bar display unit 717, a successful effect (see FIG. 88 (b) described later) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display portion 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 89 described later) is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on in association with the execution of the successful effect in the fourth round game R (see FIG. 86 (b)). In the description of this control example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), when the transmissive lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off, the inside of the translucent lamp 1200 A half mirror is configured to switch to a transmissive state in which the inside can be viewed by turning on 227ba to 227be. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the flowing state of the sphere flowing near the interference device 6900 (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)) (the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231) The storage mode) can be made known to the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 89, in connection with the failure effect being executed in the fourth round game R, some of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on. This makes it impossible to visually recognize the storage mode of the sphere disposed near the interference device 6900 (the lower half of the storage channel 1231), but is disposed near the detection sensor 1240 (the upper half of the storage channel 1231). The storage mode of the sphere is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), while the notice effect is being executed, the characters “waiting” are scroll-moved from right to left in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5.

  Next, the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4. When the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display portion 717, the center of the screen is displayed. Is displayed as a result display mode 720, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the character “Focus on an attacker!” Is displayed near the result display mode 720, and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds5. The character "good" is displayed in the same manner as.

  In this case, by distributing the characters “good” on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display, and an attacker (the first variable prize device 6000) can give the player noticed the display. ) Can be easily noticed. Then, the player can be made aware that the stored balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable prize device 6000 are visible, and the player who has noticed that, Accordingly, appropriate launch ball adjustment can be performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at a timing at which the display pointer 719c does not match the bar display section 717 in the timing effect (operation effect). The word "bad" is displayed, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 89, at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the character “bad” is displayed in the sub display area Ds5 in the same manner as in the result display mode 720. Note that, here, the character of "Attention to attacker!" Is not displayed.

  In this case, by distributing the characters “bad” on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display. Also, by not dare to display the words “Focus on the attacker!”, The player can use the attacker (the first variable) until the stored balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable prize device 6000 are difficult to see. Attention to the winning device 6000) can be suppressed, so that the player's attention to the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's confidence in the display of the characters "Watch out for the attacker!" (Reliability that profit is obtained if the display is followed).

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 89, when the result display mode 720 is displayed, some of the transmission lamps 227ba are turned on. On the other hand, in the present control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the fourth round of the round game R, the operation of the operation button 300 is not performed even if three seconds have elapsed after the display pointer 719 passed through the bar display portion 717. If not performed, since all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to be kept off, in the subsequent round game R (from the fourth round to the sixth round), the storage channel 1231 It is configured such that it is extremely difficult to see the inside.

  FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R. FIGS. 90 (b) to 91 (b) () Is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect). In each of the drawings, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status of the operation unit (operation button 300) are used to change the operation of the operation unit (operation button 300) based on the operation of the operation unit. The display contents of the three symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 90, on the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned round number display section 714 is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a form indicating that the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round of the round game R is in progress, In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim at the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the game method.

  In the center of the screen, an operation instruction display consisting of the characters “press!” For prompting the operation of the operation button 300 is executed. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

  In the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, a band display section 716 that is a display mode indicating operation timing is displayed similarly to the bar display section 717. The band display section 716 has a first band section 716a on the right side of which is displayed the text of "secure" with respect to the bar display section 717, a bar section on the left side of the first band section 716a, and a bar display section. A second band portion 716b that vertically overlaps with 717 and displays a character of “highest” and a third band portion 716c that displays a character of “failure” on the left side of the second band 716b. .

  As described above, the display pointer 719d is scrolled and displayed from right to left in the sub display area Ds4. In the present control example, control is performed such that the profit obtained by the player is changed depending on where the display pointer 719d is on the band display section 716 and the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated.

  For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated while the display pointer 719d is located above the first band portion 716a, a secure effect (see FIG. 91A described later) is executed. In this case, an advantageous event occurs in which a bonus that shifts to the special symbol high-probability state can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced (specified number). (In this control example, the prize balls are reduced as much as ten balls cannot be entered.) An adverse event occurs in which the duration of the fifth round of the round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds). .

  Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated while the display pointer 719d is located above the second band portion 716b, the highest effect (see FIG. 90 (b) described later) is executed. In this case, there is an advantageous event that it is possible to acquire the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and a specified number (10) of balls are set in the fifth round game R in the first round. While there is an advantageous event that the ball can be made to enter the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), no disadvantageous event occurs.

  Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is located above the third band portion 716c, or when the operation button 200 (operation means) is not operated, a failed effect (See FIG. 91 (b) described later). In this case, an unfavorable event occurs in which it is not possible to acquire the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, while the specified number (10) of balls are set in the fifth round game R in the first round. An advantageous event occurs in which the player can make the ball enter the special winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is in the second band portion 716b vertically overlapping the bar display portion 717, the maximum benefit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719d vertically matches the second band portion 716b. In the center of the screen, the result display mode 720 displays the character "maximum! V acquired!" (Maximum effect), and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. You. This allows the player to visually recognize that the maximum profit can be obtained, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  Note that, by operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is in the second band portion 716b vertically overlapping the bar display portion 717, control is performed so that the maximum benefit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (effect in the fourth round of the round game R) displayed in FIG. 88 (b) and FIG. 89, the effect in the interval between rounds is immediately started. Also, the player can execute the operation of the operation buttons 300 (operation means) without feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), since the guidance display indicates that "do not be distracted even after the end of the round", the interval between rounds after the end of the fourth round of the game R (see FIG. 90 (a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Thus, the possibility that the player does not notice the timing effect (operation effect) shown in FIG. 90B and cannot operate the operation button 300 (operation means) can reduce the possibility of disadvantage. it can.

  Next, an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719e vertically matches the first band portion 716a. In the center of the screen, the result display mode 720 displays the character “Relief! V acquisition with a sense!” (Reliable effect) and the fact that the operation button 300 was operated changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Is displayed with. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that it is possible to obtain a safe profit, albeit with some disadvantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  As described above, the slight disadvantage is that the payout of the prize balls in the fifth round of the round game R is slightly reduced (the specified number (ten in the present control example) cannot be entered). This means that the continuation time of the fifth round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Next, an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719f vertically matches the third band portion 716c. In the center of the screen, the character “Fail! V not! Next expected!” (Failure effect) is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation mode of the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Will be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that a great disadvantage will occur.

  As described above, the great disadvantage is a disadvantage that the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game cannot be obtained. Also, in this case, as described above, a specified number (10) of balls can be made to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round of round game R, and the fifth round of round game R can be continued. Since the time can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the end timing of the jackpot game can be advanced and the lottery of the special symbol can be executed earlier than in the case shown in FIG. Since it is possible, the timing for shifting to the next jackpot game can be easily advanced.

  As described above, in the present control example, the profit obtained by the player is based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R. Since it changes, the player's willingness to operate the operation buttons 300 (operation means) can be improved.

  Next, the display in the sixth round of the round game R will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b). FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b) are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the round game R of the sixth round is being executed. It should be noted that FIG. 92 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display when the big hit type is “big hit L” or “big hit N”. In FIG. 92 (b), the big hit type is “big hit K”, It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of a display in the case of "big hit M" or "big hit k".

  In an example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (a), it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot of “jackpot L” or “jackpot N”, that is, that the jackpot has been won in the sixth round. The "big hit" character shown is displayed.

  In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (b), the jackpot type is a jackpot of “jackpot K”, “jackpot M” or “jackpot k”, that is, 6 round jackpot. Is displayed, and the interference device 6900 is executed in an advantageous operation pattern (twentieth operation pattern) for the player in the sixth round of the round game R. Is displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 that informs the user of the excessive winning prize, and the character "Intently right-handed!" Is displayed on the guidance display section in the small area Ds3.

  In the case of the jackpot type of "jackpot K", "jackpot M" or "jackpot k", in the sixth round of round game R, by continuing without firing the ball, more balls than the specified number The interfering device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence of (see FIG. 99 (a)). Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of receiving a prize ball exceeding the specified number by continuing to launch the ball in accordance with the display of FIG. 92 (b).

  As described above, in addition to the mode of notifying that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the mode of notifying the operation state of the interference device 6900 during the jackpot is notified on the display screen in the round game R, A display mode suitable for the round game R of various patterns can be displayed. In the present control example, by continuing or stopping the launching of the ball in accordance with this display, the player can easily receive the maximum profit scheduled for each jackpot type as the profit given to the player. Is controlled. Therefore, the player can easily obtain the maximum profit by firing the ball according to the display.

  In the present control example, the effect of the timing effect (operation effect) is made different based on the operation content of the player executed in the timing effect (operation effect). An operation history (operation) in which the player operated the operation button 300 (operation means) in an operation effect (for example, a mini game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change) executed in a manner other than (operation effect). The effect form of the timing effect (operation effect) may be made different based on the number of times, the operation content, and the operation result). Thereby, a game can be enthusiastically performed with respect to various operation effects performed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, the timing effect is not limited to the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) by the player, for example, based on the time period measured by the time measurement means (RTC) or the game period in which the player played the game. The effect mode of (operation effect) may be configured to be switched.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described again with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 4 will be described, and a description of the same portions will be omitted.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a model diagram illustrating a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, selection of the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the big hit (and the small hit) and selection of the big hit type (big hit symbol). , A stop type counter C3 used to select a stop type, a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern, and an initial value setting of a first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

  In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. The small hit type is selected using a small hit type counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 117). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for a prize for the first ball entrance 64 and each counter value for a prize for the second ball entrance 640. And a special symbol 2 storage sphere storage 203b.

  In the present control example, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are provided with up to four retaining balls, respectively, so that a total of eight retaining balls can be stored in total. Therefore, when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be selected by lottery, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner or when a special symbol jackpot is not being played, each counter value becomes a special symbol. When the game ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second ball entrance 640 wins, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, the respective counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processing for this are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and various counter values for variably displaying the special symbol 2 are displayed. Settings and control processing are executed.

  On the other hand, during a period in which the special symbol 1 cannot be randomly selected, such as during the fluctuation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or during the jackpot game of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, the game ball is set to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance. When the winning port 640 is won, if the number of reserves for the winning port (starting port) is less than the upper limit value (four in the present control example), each counter value is obtained and the winning is performed. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entered entrance is stored. If the number of reserves for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in the present control example), each counter value or the like is not obtained and the prize ball (five in this control example) is not obtained. Prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in the present control example) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (319 in the present control example). I have. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number which is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 94A). If the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  Here, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 94A) will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is set. Specifically, when the gaming state is the low probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is “0” in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery, If it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is in the range of “1 to 4” in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery. If it is within the range of “1 to 4”, it is determined that the hit is a big hit.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “0” is stored in the first random number table as described above. 202a (see FIG. 94 (a)). As described above, the total number of random number values is 320, and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/320”. On the other hand, in the special symbol high-probability state, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 serving as a special symbol jackpot, and the random numbers “1 to 4” are stored in the first random number table as described above. 202a. As described above, the total number of random numbers is 320, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 4, so the probability of a big hit of a special symbol is “1/80”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. When the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)). The Rukoto. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reaching, which is different from the symbol which is reached as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: a "reach out" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and a "complete out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example). When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203 as a special value. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability cases and a special symbol for low-probability cases. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, when the special symbol is in a probable change state, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely out of range" is easily selected, and "reach out of range" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "reach out of range" is hard to be selected. In addition, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry opening 64. The table for the low probability is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of range”, and the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out of reach” is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do.

  In the present control example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 117) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d storing a random value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables commonly used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set. Have been.

  In the present control example, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is usually a hit of the symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 94 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is Is equal to the winning random number specified in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). In the present control example, in the second random number table 202c, there are five random numbers that can be a hit of a normal symbol at the time of a low probability of a normal symbol (during a normal state of the normal symbol), and the range is "5 to 9". It has become. Since the total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 240 out of 240, the total number of random numbers to be won is 5, so the probability of winning a normal symbol at low probability of a normal symbol is “1”. / 48 ".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), there are 200 random numbers that can be hit by the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5-204”. The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that can be obtained is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a symbol is normally "1 / 1.2". . As described above, in the present control example, since the random number value which is the hit of the ordinary symbol is significantly different between the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the winning probability is greatly different. Further, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the ordinary symbol is hit are different between the low probability and the high probability of the ordinary symbol. . For this reason, the ease of entering the second entrance 640 greatly differs between the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, so that in the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, The player can play the game aiming at the first entrance 64.

  When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 (FIG. 2), the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 2 times ”.

  On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed for one second on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2). If the value of the executed and obtained second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed. As a symbol, a symbol “○” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”. In the present control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time and the number of times of opening may be changed as appropriate as long as the game performance is not impaired.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, “0 to 239”), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 117).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 93, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 117), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 116). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c described above, a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an open / close plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area At least an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each type of special symbol, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning and the first hit type selection table 202b are compared. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 for the special symbol 1 is defined as "big hit K" in a range of "0 to 24". This "big hit K" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counters that becomes “big hit K” is 25, so if the special symbol 1 has a lottery, “big hit K” is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  For the "big hit K", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 time savings (80 times of ST) after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of a throwing ball (expected throwing ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big hit to the return of the game state to the normal state.

  Further, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of “25 to 49”, and “big hit L” is defined in association with the value. This "big hit L" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are "big hits L", so "big hits L" are determined when the special symbol 1 has a big hit. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  The “big hit L” is set to six rounds as the number of rounds, and the transition to the high probability state (ST 80 times) of 80 time savings after the end of the big hit is similar to the “big hit K”, but as described later, In terms of game efficiency (number of payout prize balls / time required for the jackpot game), the jackpot type is disadvantageous compared to the "jackpot K".

  For the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of "50 to 74", and "big hit M" is defined in association with the value. This "big hit M" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 "big hit M" counter values, so "big hit M" is determined when the special symbol 1 has a big hit. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  In the “big hit M”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, 100 time saving states of the ordinary symbol are given.

  Further, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as being associated with "big hit N" in a range of "75 to 99". The “big hit N” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit N”, so if the special symbol 1 has a lottery, “big hit N” is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  The "big hit N" is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, 100 times of the time saving state of the ordinary symbol are given in the same manner as the "big hit M". The big hit M is disadvantageous in that the maximum payout number is small (the possibility of excess winning (over winning) is low).

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, “big hit k” is defined in association with the range (all ranges) in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 99”. This “big hit k” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit k" is 100, so if the special symbol 2 is a lottery, "big hit k" is determined. The proportion is 100%.

  The “big hit k” is set to six rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, it is determined whether to shift to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) or to give 100 times the normal symbol time saving state. , Depending on the game mode of the player during the jackpot game. The game mode of the player is not limited at all, and it may be that a ball is passed through a predetermined entrance or by operating a predetermined operation means. It will be described later.

  In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the special symbol 2 is more advantageous in the bonus (normal time saving state or high probability state of the normal symbol) given after the end of the jackpot. (It is easy to shift to the high probability state).

  As described above, in the present control example, the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery and the case where the special symbol 2 is a lottery is shifted to a high probability state in which the player is more advantageous than the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery. It is configured to be easy. Therefore, once the extended play mode (the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol time reduction state) is set, the ball is hit right into the second entrance 640 to draw the special symbol 2 by lottery. Is easily executed, and the jackpot game is easily repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for one purpose of shifting to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the detailed contents of the open / close plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The open / close plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) are stored for each scenario type. Using the information stored in the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game.

  Specifically, operation scenario 1 to operation scenario 6 are defined as the scenario type in the open / close plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set for the open / close plate 1300 and “retreat state” is set for the interference member 6930 as the scenario contents. In the operation scenario 1, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 ends when a predetermined number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and Control is performed so as to return to the state (the state in which the open / close plate 1300 is closed and the interference member is in the retracted state).

  The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario of a maximum of 10 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 and “retreat state” is set in the interference member 6930 as the scenario contents. In the operation scenario 2, even before 10 seconds elapse, the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (ten in this control example) of the balls by the detection sensor 1240, and It is controlled to return to the state.

  In the operation scenario 3, “open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 as the scenario content, and the “retreat state” is set in the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “1.0 seconds → extended state 0.1 seconds → evacuated state” is set. In the operation scenario 3, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when a predetermined number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the operation scenario is initialized. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-described operation scenarios 1 and 2, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (open state) and then closed (closed state), whereby the storage channel 1231 is opened. The remaining balls can be discharged, but details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, it takes 0.2 seconds to discharge one sphere).

  Note that, of the spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231, the sphere ejected while the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds is guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800. In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the fifth round, and 18.0 seconds after that (the fifth round). At 20.0 seconds after the start of the game R), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position.

  The “after 2.0 seconds” is later than the timing at which the third ball counted from the downstream among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 passes through the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51). The numerical value is set as a time point before the timing at which the fourth ball passes through the distribution operation member 4851. That is, the fourth ball passes through the outlet 1150 immediately before the end of 0.8 seconds when the closing (closed state) of the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained (1. This is a numerical value derived from the setting that it takes 1.0 second to pass through the communication path 4810 from the outlet 1150 (2.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R in the fifth round). .

  In the operation scenario 4, “open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 as the scenario content, and the “retreat state” is set in the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “1.0 seconds → extended state 24.0 seconds → evacuated state” is set. In the operation scenario 4, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the initial state ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 4, similarly to the above-mentioned operation scenario 3, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 is opened. Can be discharged, and details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, it takes 0.2 seconds to discharge one sphere). Note that among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the balls ejected while the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800 as described above. is there.

  The “extended state 24.0 seconds” of this operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value capable of maintaining the extended state at least until the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closing position. That is, in the operation scenario 4, as described later, the specified number (ten in the present control example) of the spheres cannot pass through the detection sensor 1240 until the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. Since the distributing operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball ejected from the discharge port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. It becomes impossible to flow down to the specific area 4830.

  In the operation scenario 5, “open (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 as the scenario content, and the “retreat state” is set in the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “0.2 seconds → extended state 0.2 seconds → evacuated state 2.6 seconds → extended state 20 seconds → evacuated state” is set. In the operation scenario 5, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 5, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), thereby discharging one ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 as described later. This is an operation scenario in which the flow of the sphere is restricted by the interference member 6930 and the number of spheres stored inside the storage channel 1231 is limited to eight (see FIG. 53 (b), the interference member 6930). Is equivalent to a state in which there is one downstream sphere).

  In this case, it is possible to restrict the passage of the ball through the detection sensor 1240 in a state where the number of balls passing through the detection sensor 1240 is less than the specified number (9 in the present control example). Since it is possible to allow the ball to pass to the detection sensor 1240 based on the displacement, it is possible to cause the ball to pass to the detection sensor 1240 in a state where a plurality of balls are arranged on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. it can. As a result, it is possible to easily generate an excess winning (a so-called “over winning”).

  In the operation scenario 6, “opening (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → opening (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 as the scenario content, as in the operation scenario 5. In the operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds, “interruption state 0.2 seconds → extension state 2.6 seconds → retraction state 0.2 seconds → extension state 0.2 seconds → retraction state” is set in the interference member 6930. is there. In the operation scenario 6, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 ends when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 6, although the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), since the ball is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. This is an operation scenario in which the ball is not discharged from the discharge port 1150 while maintaining the closed state (closed state). Also, after 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, so that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten (see FIG. 53 ( a)), the round game R ends based on the detection of the tenth ball by the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the operation scenario 6, unlike the operation scenario 5, it is not easy to generate an excess winning.

  In this way, by storing the operation scenarios separately based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, the profit that the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 that is currently being executed gives the player can be obtained. It can be easily determined.

  Note that, for each operation scenario, the opening / closing plate 1300 is forced to be in the closed state (see FIGS. 8 and 9) when a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. (The operation scenario ends), but even if the specified number of balls has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a during the operation scenario, the interference member 6930 will control the round game R The operation based on the operation scenario is continued until the end of the inter-round interval after the end of the operation, and control is performed so as to change to the evacuation state (end of the operation scenario) simultaneously with the end of the inter-round interval.

  FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f. The open / close plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided with information indicating which predetermined scenario type corresponds to which jackpot type and in what round game R.

  In the MPU of the main control device 110, when executing the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930, information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is written. Reading from the operation scenario storage area 202e, the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved.

  The open / close plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is configured so that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on a combination of a jackpot type and a round game R in which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which the interference member 6930 is movably controlled in response to the start timing of the round game R of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the setting order is stored in advance in the opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f, and the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario that changes sequentially from power-on (or a predetermined operation start timing) every time the operation scenario ends. It may be controlled. Thus, the correspondence between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the operation of the interference member 6930.

  Referring to FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), opening / closing plates corresponding to the jackpot type The operation of the 1300 (first specific winning opening 1000a), the interference member 6930, and the distribution device 4850 (specific region 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

  96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b) show the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The first specific winning opening 1000a is also indicated as "closed", the extended state of the interference member 6930 is indicated as "tension", and the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is also indicated as "retracted". The state in which the ball can flow into the area 4830 (that is, the state in which the distribution operation member 4851 is arranged at the open position) is also referred to as “open”, and the state in which the ball cannot flow into the specific area 4830 (that is, the distribution operation member). 4851 is located at the closed position).

  As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 (the first specific winning opening 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round game R to the fourth round game R is as follows. Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the fourth round game R to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

  Further, as described above, the driving mode of the distribution operation member 4851 is common regardless of the type of the big hit (see FIG. 96 (a)). That is, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round of the round game R (opened so that the ball can pass to the specific area 4830), and 18.0 seconds later (5 At 20.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the round), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position (the ball is blocked so as not to pass to the specific area 4830).

  FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96 (a) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is the big hit K (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the first round time Int1 (2.0 seconds) is interposed between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round of the round game R (0.2 seconds × 10 balls). (= 2.0 seconds) The ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R does not remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game. Also, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231. The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during a period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state (the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state). Since the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position and the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the sphere is opened so as to be able to pass to the specific area 4830, the event is not generated.

  On the other hand, the storage channel 1231 is formed in a shape capable of storing a limited number (ten in the present control example) of balls, so that the fifth round of round game R is transferred to the first specific winning opening 1000a by 10 balls. It can be terminated by putting in individual balls. Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific region 4830 (20.0 seconds), the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round of the round game R can be discharged, so that the first specification By continuously firing the ball toward the winning opening 1000a, an event occurs where the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round of the round game R.

  That is, in the present operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give an advantageous privilege (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) to the player. In addition to being able to do so, the round game R of the fifth round can be completed in a short time (finished by winning a specified number (10 in this control example)), so that the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game is reduced. Can be raised.

  Further, since the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round game R, it is difficult to determine whether the ball passes through the specific area 4830 over the fifth round round game R. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 96 (b) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is the big hit L (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the sixteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the second round time interval Int2 (1.0 second) is interposed. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, five balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds × 5). (= 1.0 second) In the fourth round of the round game R, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 may remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round of the round game R. For example, in the round R of the fourth round, when five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the number of balls obtained by subtracting 5 from the stored number remains in the storage channel.

  Here, the progress of the fifth round game R changes depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R, and the cases will be separately described below.

  First, in the fourth round of round game R, when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the fifth round game R starts with five balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Is done.

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Therefore, when the fifth round of round game R is started with five balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific region 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, an advantage (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) advantageous to the player can be given at an early stage.

  On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds). At 1231, one ball remains. Therefore, in the fifth round of the round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage channel 1231 is 9 (less than the specified number (10 in this control example)). The eye round game R does not end until the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of 30.0 seconds elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

  FIG. 96 (b) shows, as a representative example, a time change when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round.

  Second, in the fourth round of the round game R, when nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the fifth round of the round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Is done.

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Therefore, when the fifth round of the round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, an advantage (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) advantageous to the player can be given at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been thrown are ejected. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number). The game can be terminated by making the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Third, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 0 to 8 in the round game R of the fourth round, 5 is calculated from the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. The round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where the number of balls (0 to 3 balls) that have been drawn is stored.

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Also, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231. The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the fifth round R is started, while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the entire sphere (from 0 to 3), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the sphere cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, an event does not occur in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is started.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been thrown are ejected. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number). The game can be terminated by making the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. In addition, if the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 for 1 second or more after the end of the fifth round game R (19 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fifth round game R) If a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this control example) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a beforehand, an event occurs in which the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific area 4830. As the ball passes through the specific area 4830, a benefit (continuation of the special symbol high-probability state in the present control example) that is advantageous to the player is given as the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to.

  To summarize the first to third cases described above, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round is ten, the event that the balls pass through the specific area 4830 is early. On the other hand, the time efficiency with respect to the number of prize balls to be paid out in the fifth round of the round game is reduced (in the first case), and 9 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the round game R. In the case of the number of balls, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be generated at an early stage, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls of the fifth round game increases (second case), the fourth round When the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R is 0 to 8, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R. In, go up is time-efficient for the payout prize ball number of 5 round round game (third case).

  Therefore, in the case of controlling with the same operation pattern, the timing at which the player can obtain a profit and the magnitude of the obtained profit can be changed for each game mode of the jackpot game.

  In the present control example, as described above, in the round game R of the fourth round, by setting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to nine, the profit obtained by the player can be maximized. . For this reason, at least when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, information on the standard of the number stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)). Thereby, the attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved, and the line of sight of the player can be guided.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the seventeenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 97 (a) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is big hit M (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the seventeenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) is interposed between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at an upper limit of nine balls (0.2 seconds). × 9 balls = 1.8 seconds) In the fourth round of round game R, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 can remain in the storage channel 1231 with an upper limit of one ball until after the start of the fifth round game. There is. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for a ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, a new ball is newly added to the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round of round game R. The entered ball is not ejected from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 for one second after the start of the fifth round game R.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state (the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state). , The distributing operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, so that an event of passing through the specific area 4830 does not occur immediately after the ball is opened to allow the ball to pass to the specific area 4830.

  In addition, from 1.0 second after the start of the round game R of the fifth round to 25.0 seconds, the interference member 6930 is in the protruding state and regulates the flow of the ball (FIG. 86). (Refer to (a)), the storage channel 1231 is in a state where the restricted number (ten in this control example) of balls cannot be stored (a maximum of nine can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930). Since the balls are not stored, a maximum of seven balls can be stored). Therefore, the round game of the fifth round cannot be completed until 25.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, and thereafter, ten balls are thrown into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Or, after a predetermined time (30.0 seconds in this control example) elapses, the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (until 20.0 seconds elapse from the start of the fifth round of round R), the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round of round R. Ball cannot be discharged. Therefore, even if the ball is continuously fired toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, an event does not occur in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the fifth round R is completed.

  That is, in the present operation pattern, since the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830, an advantageous privilege (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) is given to the player. In addition to this, the round game R of the fifth round becomes longer, so that the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game cannot be increased (can be reduced).

  FIG. 97 (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the eighteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 97 (b) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is big hit N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the eighteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the first round time Int1 (2.0 seconds) is interposed between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a) and FIG. 97 (b), the eighteenth operation pattern is different from the seventeenth operation pattern except that the length of the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R is different. Since this is the same as the pattern, the description of the parts common to the above description will be omitted.

  The difference between the eighteenth operation pattern and the seventeenth operation pattern is whether or not a remaining ball that remains without being discharged from the storage channel 1231 occurs in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R.

  That is, in the seventeenth operation pattern, as described above, the inter-round interval is the fourth inter-round time interval Int4 (1.8 seconds), so that the maximum number of discharges is nine, and When 10 are stored, one remnant sphere is generated.

  On the other hand, in the eighteenth operation pattern, the interval between rounds is set to the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds), so that the number of discharges becomes 10 at the maximum, and the number of balls 1231 (the maximum) Even if it is stored, it can be discharged globally, and no residual ball is generated.

  In this case, in the seventeenth operation pattern, since there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, the ball is identified immediately after the start of the fifth round game R. While it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the area 4830 (expected normal jackpot), in the eighteenth operation pattern, immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the storage channel 1231 Since there is no ball to be ejected (remaining ball), the player can know that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R (expected non-normal jackpot).

  Therefore, the player's expectation can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 while substantially sharing the profit obtained by the player.

  In addition, as described above, the profit obtained by the player is greater than the jackpot whose jackpot type is jackpot M, and the sixteenth operation pattern in which a remaining ball occurs in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R (see FIG. 96 (b)) can be grasped by the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the nineteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is big hit k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the nineteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the round game R is interposed with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The round game R of the fifth round is started in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, how many balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R changes by the operation of the player.

  That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) in accordance with the above-described timing effect (operation effect, see FIGS. 90 and 91), the interference member 6930 changes to the overhang state, Since the subsequent discharge of the sphere is regulated, the sphere disposed upstream of the interference member 6930 remains in the storage channel 1231. The operation of the operation button 300 is controlled such that only the first pressed timing in the interval between rounds is determined to be valid, and control is performed so as to be invalid for the subsequent pressing, which will be described later in detail.

  Here, the progress of the fifth round of the round game R changes depending on the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so that the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved. Hereinafter, the cases will be described separately.

  First, the case where there are many spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 (the case where the number is five or more) will be described. That is, the fifth round of the round game R is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to a case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91A).

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Therefore, when the fifth round of the round game R is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball moves to the specific region 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific region 4830. Since the vehicle passes, a privilege (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) advantageous to the player can be given at an early stage.

  On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds). One or more spheres remain at 1231. Accordingly, in the fifth round of the round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 9 or less (less than the specified number (10 in this control example)). The round game R of the round does not end until the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of 30.0 seconds elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

  That is, in the first case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of the prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced. In other words, the prize balls decrease because the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be entered, and the disadvantage is that the duration of the fifth round R is the maximum time (30 seconds). Events occur.

  Second, a case where four spheres remain in the storage channel 1231 will be described. That is, the fifth round of the round game R is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is well-tuned (see FIG. 90 (b)).

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Therefore, when the fifth round of the round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, an advantage (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) advantageous to the player can be given at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been thrown are ejected. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number). The game can be terminated by making the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. Note that the specified number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is limited after the elapse of 25.0 seconds from the start of the fifth round of the round game R from the control mode of the interference member 6930. .

  That is, in the second case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game can be obtained, and the specified number (10) of the round game R in the fifth round can be obtained. While the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the advantageous event that the duration of the fifth round round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds) occurs, while the disadvantageous event is Does not occur.

  Third, a case where the number of spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 is small (the number is three or less) will be described. In other words, this is a case where the fifth round game R is started in a state where three or less balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to a case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91B).

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Also, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231. The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the fifth round R is started, while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the entire sphere (from 0 to 3), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the sphere cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, an event does not occur in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is started.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Although all the balls were ejected, the interfering member 6930 maintains the extended state from 1.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round of game R to 25.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round. The number (ten in this control example) of balls cannot be made to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Further, when 20.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830.

  Therefore, it is configured such that the event that the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round of the round game R does not occur.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been thrown are ejected. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number). The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a (the ball can be ended without waiting for elapse of 30.0 seconds which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1).

  Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. Note that the specified number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is limited after the elapse of 25.0 seconds from the start of the fifth round of the round game R from the control mode of the interference member 6930. .

  In other words, in the third case, an unfavorable event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game is not obtained, while the specified number (10) of the fifth round game R is generated. An advantageous event occurs in which a ball can be made to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Summarizing the first to third cases described above, when five or more spheres remain in the storage channel 1231, an event that the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 can be caused at an early stage, while 5 Time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls of the round game in the round is reduced (first case), and when four balls remain in the storage channel 1231, an event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 occurs early. And the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls to be paid out in the fifth round game increases (second case), and when three or less balls remain in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830. While no event occurs, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game increases (third case). Which case is applied changes according to the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

  That is, the profit obtained by the player can be changed according to the timing at which the operation button 300 is operated, so that attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved, and participation in the timing effect (operation effect) can be achieved. Motivation can be increased.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the twentieth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99 (a) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is the big hit K, M or k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the round game R of the sixth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to this operation pattern, the upper limit on the number of extra balls (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)) into the first specific winning opening 1000a in the sixth round of the round game R. It can be easily caused by one. Details will be described below.

  The inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round game R is set as a first inter-round time interval Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started with zero balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

  Immediately after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is set in the extended state, but immediately returns to the retracted state (see FIG. 95A). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a before 1.0 second elapses from the start of the sixth round of the round game R is prevented from flowing down by the interference member 6930 for 2 seconds. It takes 0.0 seconds to reach the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, a position in contact with the regulating member 1600).

  The initially entered ball is ejected when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed (the outlet 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened) 3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round game R. . Here, since the period during which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is limited to one upper limit.

  3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts to open, the interference member 6930 changes to the protruding state. Therefore, thereafter, the ball arranged upstream of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

  The internal shape of the storage channel 1231 is formed such that up to two spheres can be stored downstream of the interference member 6930 and up to seven spheres can be stored upstream of the interference member 6930 when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (FIG. 86 (b)).

  After 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930 and stays upstream of the interference member 6930. Will be.

  On the other hand, as described above, when one ball disposed at the lowermost end is discharged from the storage channel 1231, as a result, the ball disposed downstream of the interference member 6930 inside the storage channel 1231 It becomes one or less. Therefore, the maximum number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is eight. Since the total number of the spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number (10 in the present control example), the specified number of spheres is maintained while the interference member 6930 maintains the extended state. Cannot be made to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the sixth round cannot be ended.

  During this time, since the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86 (b)), the player can continue right-handing according to the display on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92 (b)). In addition, a plurality of balls can be aligned on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 1300 (so-called “grape” can be generated).

  When the interference member 6930 changes from the extended state to the retracted state, it flows down along the inclination of the opening / closing plate 1300 so that the sphere, whose flow has been regulated inside the storage channel 1231, follows the flow down later. (Runs down like an avalanche). The opening / closing plate 1300 starts to move toward the closed state when a predetermined number (ten in this control example) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a due to the flow of the balls, but corresponds to the number of ejected balls. Since a gap corresponding to one ball is generated in the storage channel 1231, the momentum of the ball flowing into the storage channel 1231 is maintained even after the opening and closing plate 1300 starts operating.

  Therefore, before the opening / closing plate 1300 closes the first specific winning opening 1000a, there is a possibility that a ball that gains momentum enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. A prize can be generated.

  In the case where the ball is not arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the downstream of the interference member 6930 is continued after the lapse of 3.0 seconds. Does not change the number of spheres placed in the sphere. Therefore, in this case, the number of spheres remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0 to 2. In addition, since the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 does not occur, the above-described gap is not generated inside the storage channel 1231, and the configuration is such that the effect of generating an excess winning cannot be achieved. You.

  FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the twenty-first operation pattern. In this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 99 (b) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is the big hit L or N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the twenty-first operation pattern, the round game R of the sixth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to the present operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, an extra ball (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)) enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be difficult. Details will be described below.

  The inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round game R is set as a first inter-round time interval Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started with zero balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

  Immediately after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the extended state for 2.6 seconds (see FIG. 95 (a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a until 1.0 second elapses from the start of the sixth round of the round game R is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

  When the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the sphere whose flow has been regulated restarts to flow down, but 0.2 seconds (2.0 seconds, which is the time required to flow down the storage channel 1231/10 storable numbers) In ()), the sphere flows down only for the length of one sphere. Therefore, the sphere that has resumed flowing is the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating to the closed state (the outlet 1150 (see FIG. 14) starts opening). (A position where it comes into contact with the regulating member 1600). Therefore, in the present operation pattern, the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the sixth round.

  3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts to open, the interference member 6930 changes to the extended state again, but immediately returns to the retracted state. Therefore, after that, the sphere disposed upstream of the interference member 6930 is not restricted by the interference member 6930 from flowing down, and the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 in order.

  With the specified number (ten in this control example) of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the twentieth operation pattern), the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. Changes to At this time, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten, and the storage channel 1231 is full, so that more balls are prevented from entering. Therefore, according to the present operation pattern, similarly to the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23A), the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is equal to the prescribed number (10 in this control example). ) And no extra winnings can be generated.

  Therefore, even if a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at the end of the sixth round jackpot game R, the ball does not contribute to the benefit of the player. Therefore, in the sixth round game R in the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is the jackpot L or N, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display that does not strongly encourage the continuation of the ball to be fired (see FIG. 92 (a)). Be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a) and FIG. 99 (b), the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state based on the start of the sixth round of the round game R, and the interference member When an excess winning is likely to occur in the round R of the sixth round while performing the control in which the timing at which the 6930 changes from the evacuation state to the overhang state is common (see FIG. 99 (a)), it is unlikely to occur. (See FIG. 99 (b)).

  This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the round game R of the sixth round in the current jackpot game is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or the twenty-first operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which a ball suitable for the operation pattern is fired while predicting the operation pattern. This can prevent the player from inadvertently digesting the big hit game.

  As described above, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the twentieth operation pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is shortly opened (opened for 0.2 seconds), No two balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930. On the other hand, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the twenty-first pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is shortly opened (opened for 0.2 seconds), the interference member 6930 is opened. May leave two spheres downstream of.

  Therefore, by confirming how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930, the round game R of the sixth round is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or controlled by the twenty-first operation pattern. Since the ease of discrimination is improved, the interference member 6930 enters the retreat state after a predetermined period of time (for example, 23.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round of the round game R) on the downstream side of the interference member 69301. (Until 2.0 seconds before).

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability change counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, output flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p , The closing flag 203q, the count start flag 203qa, the closing counter 203r, the V flag 203s, the V winning effective counter 203t, the notification counter 203u, the winning number counter 203w, the discharging number counter 203x, and at least the other memory area 203z. It is.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Of the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the winning winning in the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). In the vacant areas of the (area), the areas are sequentially stored in ascending order of the area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the counter value increases to a maximum value of 4. It is incremented by one (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 108, S405 in FIG. 111). reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of retained balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102 (b)) of the sound lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Due to the influence of the above, even if the number of balls is deviated from the actual number of balls retained in the variable display retained in the main controller 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command. .

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 (see FIG. 93) of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. To send a display hold ball count command for The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times.

  The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e increases to a maximum value of 4. One is added at a time (see S410 in FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 108). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts up to four times the number of waiting balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to.

  The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 114). ).

  The certainty change counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times of change of the remaining special symbols in the specially changed state of the special symbol. That is, when the value of the probability change counter 203g is a natural number, the special symbol is in a probable variation state, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol is in a low probability state. In the present control example, the special symbol probable change state usually involves the time-saving state of the symbol, and the value of the probable change counter 203g corresponds to the remaining time-saving period (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates).

  When the ball passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game, 80 is set in the probability change counter 203g at the end of the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). That is, in the present control example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the probable change state after the jackpot game is limited to 80 times.

  In addition, the probability change counter 203g is set to 0 when a jackpot is set by the lottery of the special symbol and the start of the jackpot is set (see S219 in FIG. 108). In the initialized state (that is, the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed), the probability change counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power-off occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the power-off occurs is backed up.

  The time reduction counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time reduction period (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) in the normal symbol time reduction state (time reduction state). When the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the big hit game, 100 is set at the end of the big hit game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, if the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game, 100 time saving states are given.

  In this control example, a case has been described in which the time-saving state is given regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, all or one of the big hit types (“big hit K”, “big hit L”, and “big hit k”) that allow the ball to flow to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing the game in an appropriate game mode. In the section, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the big hit game, control may be performed so that the time saving state is not provided.

  In this case, the game was not executed in an appropriate game mode (for example, the ball was not fired or the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) was not operated without following the notification of the display device). ) Is excessively large (they do not shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, which should have shifted, and the time reduction state is not given), so that the motivation to execute the game in an appropriate game mode can be improved. it can.

  The operation scenario storage area 203i stores the open / close plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f (see FIG. 95 (b)) when the operation control (see S1004 in FIG. 117) of the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 53) is started. ) Is an area for reading out and storing the operation scenario. The operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

  The operation counter 203j is a counter for determining the timing of movably controlling the interference member 6930 in the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set in the operation counter 203j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

  The outgoing flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state, and when turned on, indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state (see FIG. 53B). , Off indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53A).

  This outgoing flag 203k is determined in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125) when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 has been detected during the valid period (S1403 in FIG. 19: Yes) or at the operation start timing. If it is performed (S1408: Yes in FIG. 125), the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed by being set to ON, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). ) Is set to off (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set ON in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see S1282 in FIG. 123), and is used to start counting by a remaining ball timer 203n described later.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is a timer that is counted in order to specify a normal range in the big hit control process (see S1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (a value corresponding to one second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific region detection sensor If the number of spheres detected by 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the number of spheres detected by non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) do not match, the difference between those numbers is It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

  The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting a difference between the number of incoming balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 over each round. When it is determined that the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0 in the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 121) (S1231: No in FIG. 121), an error command is set.

  The closing flag 203q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, and is a flag that is set to ON in the winning processing (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see FIG. 123). S1278) is used to start the count of a closing counter 203r described later. Then, in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129), the closing flag 203q is set to OFF based on the fact that the closing counter 203r has exceeded a predetermined value.

  The count start flag 203qa is set to ON based on the close flag 203q being set to ON in the fifth round of the round game R, and is used to start counting by the close counter 203r. The count start flag 203qa is determined based on the fact that the closing counter 203r has reached the upper limit value (a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is set to off (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

  The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129) that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 at normal timing. It is a counter to perform. The closing counter 203r is incremented by one each time the V winning process is executed.

  In the present control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as an interval period after the round game R according to various timings. The closing counter 203r is used for determining an abnormality in the timing of the V winning in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

  At a predetermined timing (within a set value, in this control example, a predetermined period after the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is in a closed state), the V flag 203s indicates that the ball is in the specific area 4830 (FIG. ) Is set to ON when it is detected that the vehicle has passed the vehicle. This V flag 203s is set to OFF after the value of the probability change counter is set to 80 in the ending process (see S1110 in FIG. 121) (see S1236 in FIG. 121).

  The V winning effective counter 203t is a counter that is decremented by the same number as the closing counter 203r in the V winning processing (see S1009 in FIG. 129). The V winning award effective counter 203t is used to determine that the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 has passed normally through the specific area 4830 in a state where the distribution operation member 4851 is located at the open position. Then, in the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123), a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) is set when the close flag 203q is turned on.

  The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts a time until a notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) is set based on a predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). .

  The winning number counter 203w is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123).

  The discharge number counter 203x is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. The relationship between the numerical values of the winning number counter 203w and the discharge number counter 203x is determined each time the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit value in the abnormal process (see S1113 of FIG. 124).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a large open-port solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid 1510) and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a solenoid 6910 for driving an interference member 6930 are connected. The MPU 201 issues various commands and commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, and a game The operation button 300 operated by the user is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on various switches 208, a signal output from the operation button 300, and a RAM erasure signal SG 2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253. To execute various processes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 102A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command) ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from main controller 110.

  The opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario 222b is provided for the operation status of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930, the operation of which is controlled by the main control device 110, to be grasped also on the sound lamp control device 113 side. This is an area in which information stored in an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the control device 110 is stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 223d, a change start flag 223e, and a stop type selection A flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a probable change state flag 223i, a time saving state counter 223j, a storage state flag 223k, a storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, and an operation flag 223p. Effect temporary storage area 223r, first operation effect flag 223wa, second operation effect flag 223wb, first input flag 223wc, second input flag 223wd, effect under execution flag 223x, and pressing period information storage area 223y. And other memory area 223z There has been provided with at least.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. In detail, it is constituted by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 132) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c are variable effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that are reserved in the main control device 110 for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the reserved ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c stores the second special symbol ( This corresponds to the number of balls reserved for a variable effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2).

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. , The number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 adds the number of reserved balls of the variable display due to the entry into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or a special symbol in the main control device 110. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of retained balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2210 in FIG. 132). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the stored first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, the second special symbol The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the retained ball counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 retaining ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 retaining ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. While its value is changed. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. And change it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command when a command set when the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 increases or decreases is received. This counter is used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol managed by the main controller 110 with the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol managed by the voice lamp controller 113. is there. The value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when displaying the retained symbol number of ordinary symbols on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the case where the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are the same as the case where the reserved symbol number of the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described above. The description is omitted because it is the same.

  The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process (see FIG. 131) is executed, the value is incremented by one and updated. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown). When determining the effect pattern with reference to a plurality of counter values in one loop processing, the values of the different counters are different from each other. Used. Thus, when one effect pattern is set, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of locations, so that the bias of the effect pattern to be set can be suppressed. The effect pattern may be set by using different values calculated after performing different processes on the values acquired from the same counter. Specifically, of the effect patterns, one selection refers to the first place of the obtained value, another selection refers to the tens place of the obtained value, and another selection refers to the first place of the obtained value. A value obtained by multiplying the tens place by three times and a value obtained by multiplying the tens place by five times may be used to refer to the one place of the obtained value. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The round number accumulation counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and is updated to a value corresponding to the command when a round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received ( In S2504 in FIG. 133), the counter value is reset to 0 by receiving the jackpot ending command (S2510 in FIG. 133). In the sound ramp control device 113, a display command related to the display during the big hit game is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

  The probable change state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probable change state flag 223i is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from main controller 110.

  In the present control example, in the present control example, if the value of the probability change counter 203g is 1 or more, it is assumed that the probability variation game is being performed, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is If the value is 1 or more, it is determined that the game is during a time saving game, and when the value of the probable change counter 203g is 0 and the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109). Is a mode indicating that a normal game is being played.

  It is determined whether or not the current state is the special symbol change state according to the state of the change state flag 223i, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image displayed in the special symbol probable change state, or to display a right-handed warning image when a right-handed game is executed in a normal state. Or to determine.

  The time-saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal symbol time-saving state. If the time reduction state counter 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state, and if it is off, it indicates that the normal symbol is in the normal state (low probability state). The time saving state counter 223j is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. In accordance with the state of the time reduction state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time reduction state of a normal symbol, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, or to determine whether to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86 (a)), and is a detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and a ball discharged from the discharge port 1150. Is set based on the detection result. If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. If the storage state flag 223k is off, the number of balls less than the stored number is stored in the storage channel 1231. Indicates that

  This storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (four in this control example). (See S2807 in FIG. 137), and is set to off when it is determined that the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the predetermined number (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, an intermediate number is displayed on the display during the round game, and when the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF, the shortage display (FIG. 88) (Refer to (a)).

  The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in the present control example). The setting based on the detection result of the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 is performed. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. If it is off, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is not stored in the storage channel 1231. Show.

  This storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is the upper limit number (see S2814 in FIG. 137). If it is determined that the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the upper limit number, it is set to off (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON, a full tank display (see FIG. 92 (b)) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF, a dissatisfaction display (FIG. 92 (a)).

  The storage counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the ball, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by one, and the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 causes the specific region detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific region detection sensor 4870 (or a dedicated The value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 when the value is detected by the ball discharge sensor.

  The operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the operation button 300 has been operated. If the operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 has been operated, and if it is off, it indicates that the operation button 300 has not been operated. The operation flag 223p is set to ON when an operation command is received in the command determination processing (S2218 in FIG. 132: Yes), and is set to OFF in the button input monitoring / effect processing (see S3007 in FIG. 139). .

  The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect contents until the effect is executed. For example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is displayed. During the period from the set timing (the third round) to the timing (the fourth round) at which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the big hit, the content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored. This effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and in the case of the round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the big hit effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134). Is read (S2537 in FIG. 134).

  The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether or not to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for executing an effect for causing the player to operate the operation means (operation button 300). If ON, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. If OFF, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied.

  In the present control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the second operation effect flag 223wb indicates that the fourth round game R has been started with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa. On the other hand, it is set that the round game R of the fourth round of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k has been started. The effect information read from the effect temporary storage area changes depending on the setting of the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb.

  Further, the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are turned off after the effect execution flag 223x is turned on (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

  The first input flag 223 wc and the second input flag 223 wd are flags for limiting the number of times the operation button 300 is operated during the corresponding effect (in the present control example, limiting the number of operations to one). When the first operation is performed during the period, or when the operation period is exceeded, the operation is set to ON, and the input of the operation button 300 thereafter is invalidated. Further, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to be turned off after the round game R of the fifth round is started and the effect execution flag 223x is set to be turned off (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

  The effect execution flag 223x is a flag for determining whether or not a timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and if it is off, it is off. For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect execution flag 223x is referred to when determining whether an operation on the operation means (operation button 300) is an operation based on a timing effect (operation effect).

  The effect execution flag 223x indicates that the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2532 in FIG. 134: Yes) in the big hit effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134), and the display effect round command is displayed. After the setting, it is set to ON (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) ends, it is set to off (S2542 in FIG. 134).

  The press period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). .

  In the press period information storage area 223y, a successful press period is set corresponding to the set display pointer (effect pointer). The successful pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring and effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the timing at which the operation button 300 is pressed is the successful pressing period.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are output from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initialization processing executed after the boot processing by the boot program is completed is set.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 106) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process on the one-frame image display time in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “x” at the same position as the symbol “○” are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", display "○" symbol for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if "missing special symbol", display "X" symbol after stopping the variable effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. An instruction is given from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed at 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and displays, for example, a city, the sea, the sky, and the like. In addition, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 88A) and the like are also stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. It is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a big hit (big hit K or the like). ), The stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed will be opened, and the round effect is This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big hit state).

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which one frame of image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is expressed as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image in the image are defined as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address. For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 104) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 105). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 105).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 105, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , In the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 231. Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. Set to off.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected. When the simple image display flag 233c is on, The simple command determination process and the simple display setting process are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing and display setting processing are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process, and is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is no resident target image data, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed, and if the simple image display flag 233c is off, it is necessary for the drawing process. A normal image transfer setting process for transferring the proper image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for the image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while defining the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237, the pointer is set. Update processing is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 106), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 106, the back image used for the image of one frame and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present control example).

  Based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed. Each time it is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235. If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set, and the image controller 237 is set. Then, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a.

  On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the rendering process is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (319 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random number counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 319, 99, 99, 239), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol changing process is performed through the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67. A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change processing (S104). This special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are stored.

  After the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the obtained special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 by the process of S209 (S209: No), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the processing shifts to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S214: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a jackpot K, a jackpot L, a jackpot M, a jackpot N, or a jackpot k.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 when the big hit K occurs, and the red LED is turned on when the big hit L occurs. If the jackpot is M, N or k, the yellow LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the operation scenario of the first specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and thereafter, the start of the jackpot is set (S218). . The operation scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened for 1 to 4 rounds for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), and in the 5th and 6th rounds, the jackpot type is set. This indicates that the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened in a corresponding pattern (see FIG. 95 (b)). When the process of S218 ends, the value of the probability change counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the counter 203h during working hours is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is off (S216: No), a status command setting process is performed to determine whether or not the time saving state has ended (S222), and the process proceeds to S221. Transition.

  In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, the present process ends.

  Next, the state command setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the status command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and includes various types of the probability change counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h. This is a process for determining a game state based on the value of the counter and setting a state command (S234, S238).

  In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203g is 1 or more (S231). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes), the probability change is performed. The value of the counter 203g is decremented by one, and the value of the medium time counter 203h is decremented by one (S232). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter 203g is 0 (S233). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S233: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), a state command indicating the normal game state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, it is 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more (S235). When it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 or more (that is, it is 0) (S235: No), the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more (S235: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S236). Next, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203h during working hours is 0 (S237). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S237: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter 203h during the working hours is 0 (S237: Yes), a state command indicating the normal gaming state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (determination of success or failure), and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of a variable effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, a first random number counter C1 and a first type counter C2 stored in a common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , And the respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302). If it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, four random numbers of “1 to 4” are set as the random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the first one. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 share the judgment value of the jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is selected. A different random value may be used. With such a configuration, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the judgment value of the big hit is set to the same number in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 And the number of judgment values to be a big hit may be changed. With this configuration, the probability of the jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player By doing so, it is possible to give expectations to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (the low-probability game state). ), The lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability. (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of “0” is set. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value for the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot is set. Is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes) The display mode at the time of the big hit indicating the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the five types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots) are compared. It determines what the jackpot type is among K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k). . In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k) are set as the stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

  The variation patterns specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, “out (for a long time)”, “out (for a short time)”, “out of a chance”, “out of a chance” Various types of "normal reach", various types of "missing super reach", and various types of "missing chance reach" are specified. In addition, as the fluctuation patterns of various types of jackpot sharing, various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “shared super reach”, various types of “shared chance reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. On the basis of this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to be out of reach or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete out is set. If it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). The variation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 117). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and determines whether there is a winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters when a winning start is made, and executing a holding process of the values.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is changed) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

  On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are updated. Then, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first of the available reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as each processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The processing of S407 to S412 is different from the processing of S401 to S406 only in that the processing of retaining the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed. Since they are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the processes of S407 to S412 are completed, a pre-read process is executed (S413), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the prefetch processing (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 111).

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and any one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is determined. If there is no new winning (S501: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is the special symbol change state. It is determined (S502), if the special symbol is in the probable change state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the processing of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the special symbol change state (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the processing is S505. Move to.

  In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the results of the jackpot determination, are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and is associated with the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of suspended display of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: Yes), the second information acquired in the processing of S607 is obtained. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for a high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 94 (c)).

  In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time reduction state (S608: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607. Based on the second random number table for low probability and the second random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 10 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 94 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol obtained by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S613). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S613: Yes), the motorized hand attached to the second entrance 640 is determined. The release period of the object 640a is set to one second, the number of times of release is set to two (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of times of release is set to one (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

  In the processing of S611, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S611: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

  In the processing of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S617). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S617: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is set to one second (S618), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-saving state (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and the process ends. Thus, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 1 second", compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602). S622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S618 or the processing of S619 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623).

  In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device (lighted display). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S616, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S612 or the processing of S616, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624).

  If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or S615 are completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 107), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, this is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704).

  Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the empty holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93), and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a description will be given of a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). In the initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S910 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S910 in such a case.

  The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1017 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S911, S912).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S912) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). Upon completion of the process in S912, the process shifts to a process in S913.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power return to the sound lamp control device 113 is output (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a probable change state, whether or not the ordinary symbol is in a time saving state, the number of times of ordinary symbol saving, and the like.

  A state command is generated in accordance with the value of the counter 203h during the working hours and the value of the counter 203g, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113. By outputting this status command, the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can match the recognition of the game state. Therefore, right-handed navigation (for example, see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 88 (a)) is displayed in spite of the low probability state of the normal symbol, or the high probability state of the normal symbol. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a right-handed warning image (not shown) from being displayed when the player makes a right-handed. That is, it is possible to match the game state with the effect to be executed.

  When the processing of S913 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S914). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S915), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001).

  Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is corresponded to the number of acquired balls. Send a prize ball command.

  In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 108) and the start winning process (see FIG. 111) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 1000a of the variable winning device 6000 is executed (S1004).

  In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 1000a are set for each round of the jackpot state according to the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108). In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present control example, of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends, the first symbol display device 37 displays The executed variable display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variable start process (see FIG. 110). Display (lit).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. I do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on.

  Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 113). Lights up).

  After executing the processing of S1007, the storage control processing is executed (S1008). The storage control process (S1008), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, executes a process for setting the retreat and extension of the interference member 6930. Next, when the process of S1008 is completed, a V winning process is executed (S1009). This V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, when the processing of S1009 ends, other processing is executed (S1010).

  When the process of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1012). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1012: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, and thus the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1011, if the information of the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 115 has been executed, the processing at S1015 and thereafter upon power-off is executed.

  First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1017), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1011 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1001 to S1010 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001.

  That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). The jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed or the first specification is performed. This is processing for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 1000a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1101, if a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1103, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1103: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1103 that the special symbol is being hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the big hit operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

  The operation of the distribution device 4850 (the distribution operation member 4851, the solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set based on the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). After that, this process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the distribution device 4850 (the distribution operation member 4851 and the solenoid 4852) and the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 are set for each round.

  As described above, each operation of the first variable winning device 6000 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1105 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio ramp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 (S1107). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), an opening / closing process is performed (S1108).

  Here, the opening / closing processing will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening / closing process (S1108). In the opening / closing process (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the sorting device 4850 that matches the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004). Then, the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed after 6 rounds have been completed, and the standby time, which is the ball ejection time (3.0 seconds or more from the design of the storage channel 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800, is required). It is required, and in the present control example, when 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined as the ending effect start timing. If it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, the ending process (S1110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 121). In the ending process (FIG. 121, S1110), it is first determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a problem such as clogging of the ball has occurred, or the player has improperly stopped the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 by a strong magnet or the like. Therefore, an error command is set (S1232), and then an ending command is set (S1233).

  The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the error command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a display mode of the error notification based on the information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, an error command corresponding to the display mode of the selected error notification is transmitted to the display control device 114. When an error command is received by the display control device 114, an error notification is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, the characters "Ejection error. Please call a hall clerk" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the control is performed so as to notify the player that an abnormality has occurred.

  Further, when receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 emits a strong red light to the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the illumination units 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1) or the sound output device 226. By controlling the hall clerk (see FIG. 4) to output a loud sound (in this control example, the sound of a black phone bell), the hall clerk is made aware of the occurrence of the abnormality.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, an ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1233 ends, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set to on (that is, whether the ball has passed the specific area 4830) (S1234), and is set to on (that is, the specific area 4830). (S1234: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203g is set to 80, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 80, and then the V flag 203s is set to off. (S1236), it returns to the big hit control processing (S1004), ends this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1234 that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set. It is set to 100 (S1237), the process returns to the big hit control process (S1004), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203s is on, and if it is on, a numerical value is set in the probability change counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is passing through the specific area 4830 and set a certainty change. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable change game state until the jackpot game ends.

  Furthermore, if a ball can be passed to the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, the certainty-change game state is given after the jackpot game, so that even during the jackpot game, it is determined whether the ball passes through the specific area 4830. Play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1109: No), a notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification processing (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification processing (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and if it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No). This process ends, and the process returns to the big hit control process (S1004).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is a value larger than 0 (S1252). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253). In the fourth round, the end timing of the fourth round is determined by detecting that 10 balls have been won or by determining that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that the end timing of the fourth round has been reached (S1253: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1253 that it is not the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: No), this processing ends. Here, the counter of 0.5 seconds is set in S1254, so that the notification counter 203u becomes 0 during two seconds of the interval time, which is the ball elapse time after four rounds, and the sound of "pressing" is given. Is output.

  Therefore, the distribution device 4850 operates in the fifth round, but the player must operate the operation buttons 300 in the interval time after the end of the fourth round, and attention is drawn to the operation buttons 300 and the liquid crystal. The number of spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made less visible. Thereby, it can be suppressed that whether or not the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 is identified from the number of remaining spheres. Therefore, for example, at the start of the fifth round, by performing the above-described control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231, it is difficult to determine whether a ball has passed the specific region 4830, The player can play a game until the end of the jackpot game (and even after the end of the jackpot game), expecting that the certain-variable game state will be given (given).

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203u, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the fifth round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1252, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is updated by subtracting -1 (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u after the update is 0 (S1256). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), a notification command is set (S1257). After that, this processing ends. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the output of the sound “press”.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), it is first determined whether or not the round is valid (S1271). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the open / close plate 1300 is opened to when the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state and the interval period ends. If it is determined that it is outside the round validity period (S1271: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether the vehicle has passed the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a. When it is determined that the vehicle has passed the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is updated by adding 1 (S1273). After that, the process of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the light does not pass through the detection sensor 1240 (S1272: No), the process of S1274 is executed.

  In the processing of S1274, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203q is on (S1277), and when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on. (S1277: Yes), this process ends, and the process returns to the big hit control process (S1004).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1277, when it is determined that the close flag 203q is off (S1277: No), the close flag 203q is set on (S1278), and thereafter, the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t ( In this control example, a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds or more is set (S1279), and thereafter, the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a is set. 1300 is set to be closed (change of state of the closed state) (S1280), and thereafter, a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) is set in the V winning effective counter 203t (S1281). The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, it can be determined that the ball has been thrown since the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. Thereafter, the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit control process (S1004).

  As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t varies based on the number of stored balls. Accordingly, when only three balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (control is performed so that the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the flow of the balls due to dirt inside the storage channel 1231 is reduced. Even if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 with a delay, the passing of the specific area 4830 can be invalidated outside the range of the set value of the V winning counter 203t.

  Thereby, when a different display effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 depending on the number of stored in the storage channel 1231, the degree of expectation indicated by the display effect (a degree of payout of prize balls and an end of the big hit game) It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a discrepancy between the actual game result and the degree of the possibility of shifting to the special symbol high probability state later).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1274 that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1275). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processing from S1277 to S1282 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening / closing plate 1300 halfway based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, if it is determined that it is the timing to close halfway (S1276: Yes), the processing from S1277 to S1282 is executed. The process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). After that, this processing ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal processing (S1113). In the abnormal process (S1113), a process of monitoring whether the specific area 4830 has been illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormal process (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round valid period (S1301). If it is out of the round validity period (S1301: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302). It should be noted that whether the game ball has passed through the outlet 1150 is determined by whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51). Done.

  If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203x is updated by adding 1 (S1303). After that, the process of S1304 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302: No), the processing of S1304 is executed.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1304: Yes), the ball is being thrown out, so the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by one and updated (S1305). The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether the upper limit value (various interval times in this control example) has elapsed (S1306). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1306: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1306: Yes), the number of ejected balls (the number of spheres detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51)) It is determined whether or not the total value of the number of balls detected in step (1) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203w) (S1307).

  If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the processing of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), a value obtained by subtracting the value of the discharge number counter 203x from the value of the winning number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the processing of S1309 is executed. I do.

  In the process of S1309, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1309). If it is not the ending effect start timing (S1309: No), the process of S1312 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). If the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the process of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set because an abnormality has occurred in the ejection of the ball (S1311), and the process of S1312 is executed.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, even if the game balls are left illegally in the storage channel 1231 or the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800, and the jackpot types of the jackpots to be acquired later are the jackpots M and N, the illegally passing the game balls to the specific area 4830 is performed. Can be suppressed.

  In this way, by controlling to notify the ball ejection error at the start timing of the ending effect, even if a difference occurs between the number of incoming balls and the number of ejected balls in the round game R of each round, the error notification is performed. Game can be executed without any change. Thereby, it is possible to partially control the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 in the interval between rounds, and to realize the gaming property of starting the next round with the ball stored in the storage channel 1231. .

  Also, even if a difference occurs between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls in the round game R of each round, the game can be executed without performing error notification. (A period required for discharging the spheres stored in the flow path 1231 as a whole sphere).

  The method of setting the ball ejection error command is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, a value that can be normally generated as the difference between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls is set, and if the difference between the numbers is within the range of the value, no error command is set and the difference between the numbers However, if the value is out of the range, control may be performed so that an error command is set. In this case, it is possible to determine that a ball ejection error has occurred without waiting for the start timing of the ending effect, so that the occurrence of an abnormality can be detected early. Thus, when the ball discharge error is caused by a fraud, it is possible to detect the fraud early.

  In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1313). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203w and the discharge number counter 203x are reset to the initial values, respectively (S1314), and thereafter, this processing ends.

  Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for setting the state of the interference member 6930.

  As described above, depending on the situation, the state of the interference member 6930 changes when the player operates the operation button 300 (S1403 to S1407), and when the state changes at a preset timing ( S1408 to S1411), both of which are included in the storage control process (S1008).

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401). If it is determined that the output flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the interference member 6930 is turned off. It means that it is in the evacuation state. Next, it is determined whether the operation period of the operation button 300 is valid (S1402).

  If it is determined that the period is valid (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S1403, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept in the retracted state. In order to keep this, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 has been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has been detected) (S1403: Yes), the upper limit value setting processing 1 of the operation counter is executed (S1404). Here, the upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation counter upper limit value setting processing 1 (S1404). In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), a process of setting an upper limit value that differs depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as the operation counter upper limit value is performed.

  That is, in the upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter (S1404), pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected from the inter-round interval period after the start of the inter-round interval period (that is, the press detection signal is generated). The value indicating the remaining period is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), the process ends, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, the output flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (the extended state based on the operation of the operation button 300, the extended state). The storage state command corresponding to the protruding state of the interference member 6930 is set to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the change to the outgoing state 1) (S1407), and this processing ends, and the storage control is performed. It returns to processing (S1008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the valid period (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). If it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), the present process ends, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), the upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter is executed (S1409). Here, the upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter (S1409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation counter upper limit value setting processing 2 (S1409). In the upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter (S1409), a process of setting an upper limit value preset according to the operation scenario as the upper limit value of the operation counter is executed.

  That is, in the upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter (S1409), first, it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the overhang state based on the operation scenario (S1431). If it is determined that it is not the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the overhang state (S1431: No), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the overhang state (S1431: Yes), the interference member 6930 is maintained in the overhang state based on an appropriate value from the operation scenario (based on the operation scenario). Is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  Next, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, the output flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (the extended state, the extended state based on the operation scenario). The storage state command corresponding to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 is set in order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 that 2) has been reached (S1411), and this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the overhang state, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a display back image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the overhang state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

  That is, for example, the mode is set such that the character “passing ball is being stored” is displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87A). This allows the player to easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the storage state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the output flag 203k is ON (S1401: Yes), the storage valve operation processing for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, the storage valve operation process (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the storage valve operation process (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930.

  In the storage valve operation process (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is set to ON (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not particularly shown, if the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443).

  In the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is set to off (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to off (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), the process ends.

  Upon completion of the process in S1412, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is off (S1413). If it is determined that the output flag 203k is not off (that is, on) (S1413: No), the process ends. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), it means that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of this fact, a storage state command corresponding to the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command corresponding to the evacuation state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the evacuation state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

  By executing the storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set according to the operation state of the operation button 300. Thereby, it is possible to switch between a state where the flow of the ball is restricted by the interference member 6930 at an arbitrary timing of the player and a state where the restriction is released and the flow of the ball is permitted.

  In addition, by this storage control process, the interference member 6930 can be driven at a time other than the operation timing of the operation button 300. Therefore, a member that operates according to the operation state of the operation button 300 and a member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be configured by the same member.

  Next, the V winning process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the V winning process (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for performing control for monitoring the flow of the ball after the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. .

  In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). If it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether the close flag 203q is on (S1502). If it is determined that the close flag 203q is ON (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current execution is the fifth round (S1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, if it is determined that the close flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), it is determined that the current execution is not the fifth round in the processing of S1503. If the processing has been performed (S1503: No), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the count start flag 203qa is ON (S1501: Yes), it means that it is near the timing at which the distribution operation member 4851 that opens and closes the specific area 4830 operates. In order to determine whether or not the passage of the ball to the specific area 4830 has occurred normally, the closing counter 203r is updated by adding 1 to the closing counter 203r (S1505), and thereafter, the V winning effective counter 203t is similarly decremented by 1. Update.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the closing counter 203r is a predetermined value (that is, whether or not the period during which the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has elapsed) (S1507), and if the value is the predetermined value (S1507). : Yes), the closing flag 203q is turned off and set (S1508), and then the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if the value is not the predetermined value (S1507: No), the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the process of S1509, it is determined whether or not the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (4.0 seconds). If the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (S1509: Yes), it means that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t has become 0, so the count start flag 203qa is turned off (S1510), The closing counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, when the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process proceeds to S1512 as it is.

  As described above, after the closing counter 203r has reached the upper limit value (that is, 4.0 seconds have elapsed since the opening and closing plate 1300 was closed), the count start flag 203qa is turned off. The processing of S1512 is not executed. In other words, the process of S1512 is performed only during a period from when the open / close plate 1300 is closed to when 4.0 seconds have elapsed.

  In the processing of S1512, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (that is, whether the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860). When it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is within the range of the set value (S1513).

  In the processing of S1513, if it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is within the range of the set value (S1513: Yes), it means that the ball has normally passed the specific area 4830. , The V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and the process ends.

  Immediately after the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds is set in the V winning effective counter 203t, and the value is subtracted from the value. As described above, the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is set as the timing at which the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830. In the present control example, the set value is 3.0 seconds. Hereinafter, a numerical value range corresponding to (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds or more is set.

  Therefore, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is larger than 3.0 seconds), the value falls outside the range of the set value. In this case, it is suspected that the ball is stuck near the lower end of the communication path 4810 (clogged or stopped due to improper fastening of the ball) and that the ball started flowing down immediately after the closing plate 1300 was closed. Is controlled to notify an error.

  Further, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after a long time has passed since the opening and closing plate 1300 closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is less than (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds), The value is out of the setting range. In this case, a problem (ball biting, stopping by illegally holding the ball, or the like) occurs when the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231, and the timing of discharging the ball from the storage channel 1231 (when the open / close plate 1300 is closed). Since it is suspected that the ball has begun to be ejected with a delay from the timing of the state), control is performed so that an error is notified just in case.

  In addition, as improper stopping the ball, improper operation of holding the ball with a strong magnet or improper operation of the ball by launching a ball with a thread attached to the game area and operating the thread by the player is assumed. . In this pachinko machine 10, in order to prevent fraud by a magnet, a magnetic sensor (not shown) is arranged near the storage channel 1231 or the storage channel 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800 are set to such an extent that the magnetic force does not reach. This is achieved by disposing the glass unit 16 behind the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) or increasing the thickness of the glass unit 16.

  In addition, against illegality due to a ball to which a thread is adhered, when the thread is crawled into the communication path 4810 via the storage channel 1231 and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 When the thread is fixed and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 and the drainage member are sandwiched between the holding member 1230 and the side wall of the storage portion 1230 that holds the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7). The yarn is fixed by being sandwiched between the outlet 1150. Therefore, even if the player operates the thread, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the ball in the communication path 4810.For example, the thread held by the player at an arbitrary timing is released, As described above, even if the ball is illegally passed through the specific area 4830, the thread is fixed in some places, so that it is easy to prevent illegally passing the ball through the specific area 4830. Can be.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t does not fall within the range of the set value (S1513: No), an error command is set because some irregularity or a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 is suspected. (S1515), and terminates this process. In this case, the V flag 203s does not turn on.

  In the present control example, a case has been described where the setting value of the V winning effective counter 203t is set based on the number of stored in the storage channel 1231 to determine the occurrence of fraud or malfunction, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not. For example, the occurrence of fraud or malfunction may be determined by detecting the discharge interval of balls from the storage channel 1231. The occurrence of fraud or trouble may be determined by detecting the period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged. The determination may be made, and if the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the required number (less than 4), the occurrence of fraud or malfunction is determined based on the detection of the passage of the balls in the specific area 4830. May be determined.

  In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, a case has been described where the V flag 203s is set to ON only when it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is within the set value. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is not within the set value, the V flag 203s is set to ON so that the game cannot be performed until the error caused by the error command is eliminated. It may be controlled. The elimination of the error command is executed by turning off the power. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 203 may need to be cleared.

  In this case, if the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is shifted due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 instead of the fraud of the player, and after it is detected, the player can operate the special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol without any problem. A game can be executed.

  On the other hand, if the cause is fraudulent by the player, after it is detected, first, the game of the fraudulent player is stopped, the hall clerk clears the RAM 203, and the special symbol has a low probability state. Force control so that Thereby, it is possible to prevent another customer from having an extra waiting time before starting a game on the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraud has been performed.

  In the present control example, while the error command is set in S1515, for example, control is performed so that the launch of the ball is disabled, or when the launch of the ball occurs, an error notification is made to notify the clerk. In such a way as to prevent the prize ball from being paid out even if the fired ball enters the winning opening (for example, to stop the function of the payout control device 111), or to launch or win a ball. The control is performed such that the power is turned off based on a ball entering the mouth, or the like, and the game is controlled so as to be impossible to play.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 130, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-on processing of S2120 is performed (see FIG. 131) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 131), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2117 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S2120 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S2120 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S2120, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S2117 (see S2116 in FIG. 131). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2117 is executed, the process starting in S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). The permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S2008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S2008 is performed via the processes from S2004 to S2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probable change state flag 223i is updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2011), interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. By updating the probable change state flag 223i based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the sound ramp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, an effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  The reason why the clearing process in S2009 is skipped is that when the process from S2004 to S2008 is performed via the process in S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing or the current processing of S2101 (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2110. In the processing of S2101, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is determined mainly in S2102 to S2110, which is processing relating to display (staging), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2111, the variable display setting process of S2112, and the storage state monitoring process of S2113 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay. Further, by executing the process of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m without delay based on the storage state.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2108 to be described later (S2103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S2104).

  The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and the production corresponding to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform. In this process, when an operation of the operation button 300 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set to the display control device 114.

  When the button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S2110 ends, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from main controller 110 is performed (S2111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2112. In the process of S2112, a variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The storage state monitoring process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process is performed in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination processing (S2111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 132, S2113), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is analyzed. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). The fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol, and the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each of the symbols.

  In the process of S2201, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this processing ends. The extracted variation pattern type can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as a variation pattern type of a special symbol for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol). In the case of notifying the start of the special symbol variable display effect and the display mode of the special symbol variable display effect to the display control device 114 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later. This is used when setting a special design display variation pattern command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2204). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) has been received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to ON. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special type The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON.

  Next, the type of stop (one of K, L, M, N, and k) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the process ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. This is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display controller 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), a display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this processing ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. (I.e., the number of spheres on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S2210), and the process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. Is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and thus the starting winning is obtained. Every time there is, by the processing of S2210, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are stored in the special symbol 1 holding device of the main control device 110. The value can be adjusted to the value of the ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Alternatively, even if the value deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided. Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2209 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). In the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2212: Yes), the winning information command receiving process is executed (S2213).

  In the winning information command receiving process (S2213), setting of various flags and setting of various counters to be referred to for setting various effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol on hold, before the change of the special symbol on hold is started (that is, the special symbol executed before the change of the target special symbol is changed). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol that has transmitted the winning information command, and the lottery result of one special symbol is provided to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. A suggestion can be given, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2212 that the winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), the display notification command is set (S2215), and the process ends.

  In the process of S2214, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2214: No), the storage device related command (the storage status command corresponding to the evacuation status (S1414, see FIG. 125)) or the overhang status is supported. It is determined whether a storage state command (S1407, see FIG. 125) has been received (S2216) .If it is determined in S2216 that a storage device related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the corresponding display back image is changed. The command is set (S2217), and the process ends.

  In the process of S2216, when it is determined that the storage device related command has not been received (S2216: No), it is next determined whether an operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, if it is determined that the operation command has been received (the operation button 300 has been operated (pressed down)) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. I do. This operation command is a command output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (S2220).

  In the processing of S2220, if it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S2220: Yes), the hit-related processing is executed (S2221), and this processing ends. The details of the hit-related processing (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2220 that no hit-related command has been received (S2220: No), a process corresponding to another command is executed (S2222), and this process ends.

  In the process of S 2222, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, and a processing result is stored in the RAM 223. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, the input command is set based on the fact that the ball has entered each of the entrances provided in the game board 13. Is received, a process of accumulating the number of entered balls is executed for each type of entrance where the ball has entered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S2221). The hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2111 in FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the main control This processing is executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110.

  When the hit-related processing (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then a display opening command is set (S2502), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that no opening command has been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2503). In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the round number accumulation counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot medium effect process is executed (S2503). S2505), this process ends.

  The big jackpot effect process (S2505) is a process for selecting the mode of the round effect (the effect of the round game R and the effect of the interval between rounds), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the hit related command received this time is not the round number command (S2503: No), it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from main controller 110 when each round in the jackpot is completed. In the process of S2506, if it is determined that the interval command has been received (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set ( S2507), and terminates the process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the big hit ending command has been received (S2508). In the process of S2508, if a jackpot ending command is received (S2508: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2509), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S2508, if it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2508: No), this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 134, the middle jackpot effect process (S2505) will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the jackpot mid-game production process (S2505). In the jackpot-in-producing process (S2505), in addition to the jackpot game effect for congratulating the jackpot as an effect executed during the jackpot, the inside of the storage channel 1231 is visually recognized by causing the player to operate the operation button 300. The first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) that is enabled, and the second operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) in which the state of the interference member 6930 is changed by causing the player to operate the operation button 300 are defined. After the number of balls has been entered, an effect mode and a presence / absence of an effect are set for a continuous firing effect that prompts the continuation of firing of the ball, and each effect is executed.

  When the big hit effect processing (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect executing flag 223x is ON (S2531). When it is determined that the effect under execution flag 223x is ON (S2531: Yes), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is not on (is off) (S2531: No), then it is determined whether the currently received round number command is the round number command indicating the third round of the jackpot. Is determined (S2532).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2532 that the command is the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2534.

  In the process of S2534, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S2534). If it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot k (S2534: Yes), the second operation effect flag 223wb is turned on. Is set (S2535), and the flow shifts to the process of S2536. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the jackpot k (S2534: No), the process directly proceeds to S2536.

  That is, if the jackpot is k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to ON, but if the jackpot is a jackpot other than the jackpot k (jackpot K, L, M, N). , Only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON.

  Here, the display effect round command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the display effect round command setting process (S2536), first, it is determined whether the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551), and if the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551: Yes), The first display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2552), and this process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot effect process (S2505).

  In the first display mode, as a display effect round command, it is displayed that, in the third round of the round game R, there is an operation effect in the next round, and that there is an operation effect also in the interval period after the end of the next round (FIG. 88 (a)), and an operation effect is displayed in an interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R (see FIGS. 90 and 91).

  The display during the interval period after the end of the third round round game R and the display during the fourth round round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, it is off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot L or M (S2553). If it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2554), and this process ends. Then, the process returns to the jackpot medium effect process (S2505).

  In the second display mode, as the display effect round command, there is an operation effect in the next round in the third round game R (see FIG. 88 (a)). Information is set to be displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)), and during the interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed. Is done.

  Here, the information on the number of stored balls is prepared so as to be displayed, and is based on the operation button 300 being operated at the successful timing of the operation effect (for example, the timing at which the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display portion 717). Is controlled so that the display is executed.

  The display during the interval period after the end of the third round round game R and the display during the fourth round round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2553 that the jackpot type is not the jackpot L or M (that is, the jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), the information is read as information readable from the effect temporary storage area 223r. Then, the third display mode is set (S2555), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit production process (S2505).

  In the third display mode, as the display effect round command, in the third round of the round game R, there is displayed an operation effect in the next round, and a character that prompts the firing of a ball toward the first specific winning opening 1000a is displayed. (See FIG. 88). In the interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed.

  The display during the interval period after the end of the third round round game R and the display during the fourth round round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

  As described above, the display of the third round game R and the fourth round game R are collectively set as display effect round commands.

  Returning to FIG. After the processing of S2536, the effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and a display effect round command for a display effect of the third round game R and the fourth round game R is set (S2537). The effect execution flag 223x is set on (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set off (S2539), and the process ends.

  Although not shown in detail, the process of S2539 is configured to skip the process if the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb is already set to off. doing. Thereby, execution of unnecessary processing can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2532 that the command is not the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: No), it is next determined whether the currently received round number command is the fourth round of the jackpot ( S2540).

  In the processing of S2540, if it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), a display command indicating that the fourth round has been reached is set. Then, since the display mode of the fourth round has already been selected as described above, this process is ended to avoid selecting another display mode in duplicate, and the process returns to the hit-related process (S2221).

  On the other hand, in the process of S2540, if it is determined that the currently received round number command is not the fourth round of the jackpot (S2540: No), then, the currently received round number command is the fifth round of the big hit. It is determined whether or not (S2541).

  In the process of S2541, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect execution flag 223x is set to off (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wc described later are set. The input flag 223wd is set to off (S2543), and the flow shifts to the process of S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2541 that the command is not the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S2544.

  In the processing of S2544, it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is the sixth round of the jackpot (S2544). In the process of S2544, if it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M or k (S2545).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M, or k (S2545: Yes), a display continuous firing round command is set (S2546), this process ends, and the process returns to the hit-related process (S2221). .

  The display continuous firing round command is set as a display effect round command to include a display (see a small area Ds3 in FIG. 92 (b)) that prompts to continue firing the ball without stopping. . This display is executed only in the jackpot type (jackpot K, M or k, see FIG. 94 (b)) for which an excess prize can be expected in the round game R of the sixth round. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of an excess winning by continuing to fire the ball according to the display.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2544, when it is determined that the command is not the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or in the processing of S2545, the jackpot type is not the jackpot K, M or k (that is, the jackpot L, If it is determined that the number is N (S2545: No), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and the process ends.

  Accordingly, in the present control example, when the round number command of the first, second, fifth round, and the sixth round when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, N, the display round number command is set by the processing of S2547. You. On the other hand, when another round number command is received, a display effect round command or a display continuous firing round command is set. As described above, by changing the display of the round game R according to the type of the big hit and the number of rounds, the big hit game can be advanced without getting the player bored.

  The various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command) set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the. When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command), the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. I do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the current round number is determined based on the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Alternatively, the process of adding the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223h may be eliminated by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command.

  In addition, when the third round number command is acquired, the display mode of the fourth round is also selected. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the third round number command may be acquired. The same control as that performed when the fourth round number command is acquired may be repeatedly performed. Also, for example, the display mode is set only when the third round number command is acquired, and the display mode is selected when the fourth round number command is acquired. May be.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the next round (three rounds) before the round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed is performed. A notice effect is given to notify that a timing effect (operation effect) will be executed in the round (see FIG. 88 (a)). Then, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88 (b)).

  As described above, since the notice effect is performed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the effect of operating the operation button 300 is executed. it can. In addition, since the notice effect is executed only in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the notice effect is executed. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is configured to be executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be used. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are stored, a timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. This allows the player to play the game of storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 more positively.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2112). The variable display setting process (S2112) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) is based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (completely out of reach, out of reach, big hit), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the process proceeds to S2706 because the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is ON (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the special symbol at this time is determined based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. The processing of each of S2702 to S2705 is performed.

  More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702), then, the extracted fluctuation pattern is obtained (S2703), and a fluctuation pattern command for display is set (S2704). Winning information included in the command storage area based on the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter (the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c). The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the flow shifts to the processing in S2706.

  In the process of S2706, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set off (S2707), and then the command determination process (FIG. 132) In the process of S2206 in step S2206, the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2710), and the process ends.

  Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring process (S2113) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51). This is the process for determining that

  Here, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage flow path 1231 is provided as a part of a storage device capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of 10 balls can be stored. It is composed.

  A detection sensor 1240 is provided at an upstream end of the storage channel 1231, and the detection sensor 1240 detects a ball entering the storage channel 1231. The sphere discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

  In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (ie, whether the ball has been detected by the detection sensor 1240) (S2801), and the first specific winning opening is determined. If the ball has passed the 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process shifts to S2803. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (S2801: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S2803.

  In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (ie, whether the passage of the ball has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870) (S2803), and the ball is discharged from the outlet 1150. Is determined to have passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S2804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the outlet 1150 (S2803: No), the flow shifts to the process of S2805.

  In the processing of S2805, it is determined whether or not the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is turned on. Is determined (S2806). If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set on (S2807), and a display intermediate number command is set (S2808). ), And proceeds to the process of S2812. On the other hand, in the process of S2806, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to S2812.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2805: No). S2809). When it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2809: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S2810), a display shortage command is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. . On the other hand, in the process of S2809, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to S2812.

  In the process of S2812, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. It is determined whether or not (S2813). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set on (S2814), and a display full command is set (S2815). ), End this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2813, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2813: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2812, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816). ). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2817), a dissatisfaction command for display is set (S2818), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2816, when it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2816: No), the present process ends as it is.

  As described above, the settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are updated as needed based on the detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific area detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

  As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in the present embodiment, the storage state of the sphere in the storage channel 1231 is determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 1231.

  In the above description, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are based on the number of balls entered based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharges based on the detection results of the specific region detection sensor 4860 and the non-specific region detection sensor 4870. Is calculated, but the number is not limited to this.

  For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a sphere is provided at an arbitrary position in the storage channel 1231, and based on a lapse of a predetermined period in a state where the sphere is detected by the sensor, the sphere is stored downstream thereof. May be determined. As an example, when a sensor is provided at a position where the third ball from the downstream stays, three spheres including the two spheres disposed on the downstream side are stored by the sensor. Can be determined.

  Further, even if the open / close plate 1300 is closed, if the ball is continuously detected by the sensor, it is possible to suspect that the ball is improperly parked. Can be found early. That is, the sensor for detecting a sphere can be used for both detection of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and detection of fraud.

  Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this lamp output processing (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. It is processing for.

  Here, in the present control example, as the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93), in addition to the above-described configuration, the decoration lamp 227a (described above) used for effects and the like provided over the entire pachinko machine 10 is used. In contrast to the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like), and the covering front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided to cover the storage channel 1231, the inside of the covering front plate 1200 A transmission lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) for bringing the player into a transmission state in which the player can view the display, and another lamp 227z are provided.

  When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present time is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, the predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) clocked by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2905.

  When the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, it is controlled so that all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on (intensity).

  Here, in the present control example, in a normal game state, the cover front plate 1200 is provided so as to configure a state where it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the internal state of the storage channel 1231 and the operation state of the interference member 6930. I have. As described above, the covering front plate 1200 is configured to irradiate predetermined light (light from a transmission lamp) from the back surface, thereby changing the state from the shielding state to the transmission state.

  Then, the transmission lamp is turned on for a predetermined period (a predetermined period after the start-up process is performed) after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, regardless of the gaming state. Thus, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, at the timing when the clerk checks the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the storage channel 1231 covered by the wrapped front plate 1200 can be easily visually recognized. it can.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the present time is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, ( Next, it is determined whether or not the detection sensor 1240 has detected the passage of a ball (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 ( S2903), and proceeds to the processing of S2906.

  Note that the transmission lamp lighting command in this case is a time (for example, 2.0 seconds) sufficient for the ball to pass through the area covered by the covering front plate 1200 in the storage channel 1231 (for example, 2.0 seconds). Is set to be lit, and while the permeable state is maintained during the period in which the sphere flows down the storage channel 1231, the permeable state can be released after the sphere is stopped, It is not limited to this. For example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off under the condition that a ball has passed through the discharge port 1150, or that the specific region detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific region detection sensor 4870 has detected the passage of a ball (shielded from the transmission state). State). This allows the covering front plate 1200 to be maintained in a transparent state during the period in which the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the process of S2902, if the detection sensor 1240 does not detect the passage of a sphere (S2902: No), it is then determined whether a transmission lamp-related command has been set (S2904), and the transmission lamp-related command is set. If it has been set (S2904: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command specified in advance is set (S2905), and the flow shifts to the process of S2906. On the other hand, if the transmission lamp-related command has not been set (S2904: No), the process directly proceeds to S2906.

  The setting of the transmission lamp-related command is mainly executed by the ball number confirmation process (S3004) described later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2906, a decoration lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state) (S2906), and this processing ends. In addition, the decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to a variation pattern to be executed, a current game state, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button input monitoring / production process (S2107). In the button input monitoring and effect processing (2107), an input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of effect is monitored, and when the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform a corresponding effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, setting of an operation button effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated, and setting of various flags based on the operation contents are performed. The settings are made.

  Specifically, first, during the round game R of the fourth round, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is a pressing success period. Sets the lamp lighting command for transmission to execute the lamp lighting based on the determination result, and sets the display command for displaying the ball number grasping effect (successful effect, failed effect, unacceptable effect) accompanying it. (See FIG. 140). Secondly, in the interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is a large press success period or a successful press down period. It is determined whether the period is a press-down failure period or not, and a display command for displaying an effect (great success effect, successful effect, failure effect) based on the result is set.

  When the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect-in-progress flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). If it is determined in the process of S3001 that the effect execution flag 223x is ON (S3001: Yes), it is next determined whether the currently-running jackpot type of jackpot is the jackpot k (S3002). . In the process of S3002, if it is determined that the jackpot is k (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is an interval period (S3003), and if it is an interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the hit is not the jackpot k (that is, the hit is K, L, M, and N) (S3002: No), or in the process of S3003, it is not during the interval (that is, the round game) If it is determined that R is being executed (S3003: No), a ball number confirmation process is executed (S3004), and this process ends.

  Here, the ball number confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the ball number confirmation process (S3004). This ball number confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed in the button input monitoring / production process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. is there.

  This ball number confirmation processing (S3004) monitors an input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect, and responds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, as described above, various flags are set based on the operation content, a transmission lamp lighting command for executing lamp lighting is set, A display command for displaying the ball number comprehension effect (successful effect, failed effect, unacceptable effect) accompanying it is set.

  When the ball number confirmation processing (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and if it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes). Since the transmission lamp lighting command and the display ball number grasping related command have already been set, the present processing is terminated as it is, and the flow returns to the button input monitoring / production processing (S2107).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is not on (that is, it is off) (S3101: No), it is next determined whether or not the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is detected. (S3102). When the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether it is within the ball number grasping period (S3103).

  Here, the number-of-balls grasping period means a period in which the display pointer 719 at least partially coincides with the bar display unit 717 in the above-described timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88B). The length of the ball number grasping period can be adjusted according to the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the bar display section 717.

  In this control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], the operation speed is 20 [cm / s], and the width of the bar display section 717 is 1 [cm]. In this case, the ball number grasping period is the same as the time when the display pointer 719 moves by 4 [cm], and thus is 0.2 [s].

  In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the time is within the ball count period (S3103: Yes), a display ball count grasp success command is set (S3104), and a transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set (S3105). ), And proceeds to the process of S3111.

  Here, when the display ball number grasping success command is set, a display prompting grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (for example, a character display of “Attention to the attacker !!”) is displayed in the third symbol display. This is executed in the device 81, and “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation button 300 is changed to the pressed state (see FIG. 88 (b)).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on at least from the fourth round game R to the fifth round game R.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3103 that the operation of the operation button 300 has not been performed within the ball count period (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 has been performed at a timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display unit 717 are shifted (see FIG. 89)). (S3103: No), the display ball number grasping failure command is set (S3106), the transmission lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

  Here, when the display ball number grasping failure command is set, the display for prompting the grasp of the ball number stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and “bad” is displayed as the result display mode 720 and the operation is performed. A button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 is changed to a pressed state mode (see FIG. 89).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is turned on at least from the fourth round game R to the fifth round game R.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3102, if it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 has not been detected (S3102: No), the process proceeds to S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether or not the limit time (3 seconds from the start of the round R in the fourth round in the present control example) has elapsed (S3108). If it is determined that the time limit has elapsed (S3108: Yes), a display ball number unobservable command is set (S3109), a transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S3108, if it is determined that the time limit has not elapsed (less than 3 seconds from the start of the round R in the fourth round), the process is terminated, and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) Return to).

  Here, if the display ball number grasping impossible command is set, the display for prompting the grasp of the ball number stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 does not change (see FIG. 88A).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the subsequent round game R.

  As described above, in the present control example, a player can obtain a player operating the operation button 300 from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b, rather than not operating the operation button 300. Controlled to increase profit. In the case of operating the operation button 300, performing the operation during the ball number grasping period (0.2 seconds in the present control example) is better than performing the operation at other timings. Is controlled such that the profit obtained by the player from the display at the time and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b is increased.

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to operate the operation buttons 300 during the fourth round of the game R, and to concentrate on the operation. The operation of the operation button 300 is performed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the gaze of the player trying to operate the operation button 300 can be collected on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to ON (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to ON by operating the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the time limit), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to ON, the ball number confirmation processing (S3004) is skipped. Therefore, in the ball number confirmation process (S3004), only the first operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is validated (S3101).

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly hit repeatedly and to carefully time the operation of the operation button 300. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (displaying a reminder) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of times of use early, and to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

  When the processing in S3111 ends, the present processing ends, and the flow returns to the button input monitoring / production processing (S2107).

  139 will be described again. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005). If it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is ON (S3005: Yes), the display operation button-related effect command has already been set, so this process ends as it is, and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). Return to

  On the other hand, in the process of S3005, if it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is not on (that is, it is off) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S3006). The fact that the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125 and S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132) is an effect for changing the state of the interference member 6930 to the extended state (see FIGS. 90 and 91). Means that the operation of the operation button 300 (pressing down) is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, it means that the state change of the interference member 6930 to the extended state is executed.

  If it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to off (S3007), and the round is determined from the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the fourth round of the round game R. After subtracting a value obtained by dividing the elapsed time of the interval by 0.2, it is determined whether the number of remaining balls indicated by the value obtained by subtracting 2 is 4 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of spheres left in the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930.

  Here, the value calculated in S3008 is 4 because, in the timing effect (operation effect), when the display pointer 719d is at a position where at least a part of the second band portion 716b vertically coincides with the second band portion 716b, The control is performed so that the operation is performed (see FIG. 90B). Here, during a period in which the display pointer 719d is in a position where at least a part thereof is vertically aligned with the second band portion 716b, depending on the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the second band portion 716b. , Length can be adjusted.

  In the present control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], and the width of the second band portion 716 b is newly set to 4.2 [cm]. Since the time required for one ball to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 0.2 seconds, the time required for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second band 716b is 0.1 seconds. , The operating speed of the display pointer 719 becomes 72 [cm / s]. With this setting, the display pointer 719 is controlled such that its left end reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (for 0.8 seconds). At the timing, the right end passes through the left end of the second band portion 716b). In the present control example, by performing such control, it is possible to limit the period in which the display pointer 719 and the second band portion 716b at least partially coincide with each other up and down to 0.1 second.

  In the process of S3008, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 4, (S3008: Yes), a display operation button great success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button great success effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the highest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 90 (b)).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3008 that the number of remaining balls is not 4 (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls is 5 or more in S3010 is that in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all of the display pointers 719d are in a position vertically matching the first band portion 716a. Is executed (see FIG. 91A). That is, this corresponds to a case where the operation button 300 is operated before 0.7 seconds elapse from the start of the interval period (when the operation is performed too early).

  In the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), a display operation button success effect command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a moderate profit (that is, a profit that is neither the highest nor the lowest) as a result of the timing effect (the operation effect). The indicated display is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or the operation flag 223p is not set to ON. If the limit time (1.5 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S3012: Yes), a display operation button failure effect command is set (S3013), and the process shifts to S3014.

  Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls is 3 or less in S3010 is that, in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all the display pointers 719d are in positions vertically matching the third band portion 716c. Is executed (see FIG. 91 (b)). That is, this corresponds to a case where the operation button 300 is operated after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period (when the operation is too slow) or a case where the operation button 300 is not operated.

  Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the lowest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 91 (b)).

  As described above, in the present control example, operating the operation button 300 increases the profit obtained by the player rather than not operating the operation button 300, and accordingly, the display on the third symbol display device 81 also changes. Is controlled as follows. When the operation button 300 is operated, the operation is performed at a timing when the number of remaining balls becomes 4 (until 0.8 seconds elapse from 0.7 seconds after the start of the interval period). It is controlled so that the highest profit can be obtained, the medium profit before the timing, and the lowest profit after the timing.

  Therefore, the player is able to improve his / her willingness to operate the operation button 300 during the interval period immediately after the fourth round game R, and can select the operation mode of the operation button 300.

  That is, when the player wants to obtain at least a medium profit, the player can press the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period to obtain a medium profit without danger (stably). Profit). On the other hand, if you want to get the highest profit, if you delay the operation even a little, you will not get a medium profit and you will get the lowest profit, so take into account the disadvantage (Profits are unstable and volatile).

  In this way, by making the operation mode of the operation button 300 different, the player selects whether the medium profit is stably obtained or the unstable but the highest profit is obtained. be able to.

  Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation button 300. The operation of the operation button 300 is performed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the gaze of the player trying to operate the operation button 300 can be collected on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to ON (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set to ON by operating the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the time limit), and while the second input flag 223wd is set to ON, the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) is performed. Since the operation is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is validated in the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107).

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly hit repeatedly and to carefully time the operation of the operation button 300. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (displaying a reminder) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of times of use early, and to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

  According to the control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The visibility inside the storage channel 1231 is changed depending on the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ease with which the operation mode of the interference device 6900 can be grasped.

  In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to take a line of sight from the storage channel 1231 and pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) and participate in a timing effect (operation effect). It was configured so that Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the big hit game ends with the player's line of sight concentrated on the first variable winning device 6000.

  Further, when the storage channel 1231 is in a transparent state as a result of the player operating the operation button 300 in the timing effect (operation effect), pay attention to the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage channel 1231 is provided. The display that prompts the user to do so is configured. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) to be moved to the storage channel 1231 when necessary.

  A circle is displayed on the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) so that the number range of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. This makes it easier for the player to predict the state of the inside of the storage channel 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and to easily determine how many more balls should be fired before the specified number of prizes. be able to. Therefore, the launch mode of the ball can be easily selected.

  As timing effects (operation effects) performed on the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81), different qualities (in the present control example, regarding the visibility of the storage channel 1231 and payout of prize balls) are provided to the player. In the case where the timing effect (operation effect) for giving the profit of (directly connected to) is continuously executed, the operation timing for giving the highest profit for the player is grasped as the same timing (similar timing) for the player. It was configured to be. Thereby, even when the transition from the previous timing effect (operation effect) to the subsequent timing effect (operation effect) occurs immediately, it is possible to cause the player to execute the operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  Depending on the jackpot type, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the sixth round), when a ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (the twentieth operation pattern, operation scenario 5), or when it is not discharged (the twenty-first operation pattern). , And the operation scenario 6). This makes it possible to define whether or not an excess winning has occurred in the predetermined round game R, depending on the type of the jackpot.

  By changing the interval between predetermined rounds (for example, the interval between the fourth round and the fifth round) depending on the jackpot type, the inside of the storage channel 1231 in the round game R immediately after the interval between the rounds is changed. The state (the number of stored balls) was configured to change. Thus, even if the state of the state change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the round game R is the same, the progress of the round game can be changed.

  The predetermined number of round games R (the fourth round game R in the present control example) is different from the specified number (10 in the present control example) (nine in the present control example) of balls. By ending the game with the specific winning opening 1000a, the profit obtained by the player in the next round game R (the fifth round game R in the present control example) is maximized. did. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from inadvertently digesting the jackpot game.

  In a configuration in which the ball flows down toward the specific region 4830 as the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, a specified number of the first specific winning opening 1000a are stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a while the interference member 6930 maintains the extended state. The ball was configured to be impenetrable. Thereby, by the operation mode of the interference member 6930, the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R can be defined, and the ball reaches the upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing and the end timing of the round game R can be dissociated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R can be defined.

  In the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls are configured to be easily retained in a state where the balls are arranged upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the retained balls are in a state in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. It is configured to flow down to the first specific winning opening 1000a at the changing timing. Thus, a plurality of stagnated balls can be collectively entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the possibility of occurrence of excess winning can be increased.

  In addition, the number of excess winnings can be defined. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of excess winnings from becoming excessive and hindering the game performance.

  Further, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the excess winning can be defined by the operation mode of the interference member 6930 disposed downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the operation mode of the interference member 6930 is predetermined based on the type of the big hit. You. As a result, even if the ball is similarly retained upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to switch between a case where an excess winning occurs and a case where no excess winning occurs based on the type of big hit.

  On the basis of the operation timing of the operation button 300, the profit (for example, the visibility inside the storage channel 1231 or the number of ejected balls discharged from the storage channel 1231, which is obtained by the player in the round game R, or based on it) The configuration is such that the presence / absence of a ball entering the specific area 4830 and the maximum number of balls entered in the round game R are changed. Thereby, the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved.

  Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, two types of profits obtained by the player are configured to be seesawed, and the display device (the third symbol) is provided so that the player can grasp the mode of the profits obtained by the player. The display device 81) is configured to display the image. Thereby, the player who has visually recognized the display on the display device can obtain a profit suitable for the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit to be preferentially obtained. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the timing effect (operation effect) can be increased.

  Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 141, for the special symbol 1, the “big hit P” is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”. This "big hit P" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value of "big hit P" is 50, so "big hit P" is determined when the special symbol 1 has a big hit. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

  In the “big hit P”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol shift to the high probability state. In the present control example, at least one big hit is controlled from the transition of the special symbol to the high probability state to the transition to the low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of a throwing ball (expected throwing ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big hit to the return of the game state to the normal state.

  For the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in a range of "50 to 99" in association with "big hit Q". The “big hit Q” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit Q”, so if the special symbol 1 is a lottery, “big hit Q” is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

  The “big hit Q” is set to six rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, 100 time saving states of the ordinary symbol are given.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, “big hit m” is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 99” (entire range). This “big hit m” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of “big hit m” is 100, so if the special symbol 2 is a lottery, “big hit m” is determined. The proportion is 100%.

  For the “big hit m”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol shift to the high probability state. In the present control example, at least one big hit is controlled from the transition of the special symbol to the high probability state to the transition to the low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of a throwing ball (expected throwing ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big hit to the return of the game state to the normal state.

  In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the bonus (normal symbol high-probability state or special symbol high-probability state) given after the end of the jackpot is changed to the special symbol 2 Is defined to be more advantageous (it is easier to shift to a high probability state).

  As described above, in the present control example, the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery and the case where the special symbol 2 is a lottery is shifted to a high probability state in which the player is more advantageous than the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery. It is configured to be easy. Therefore, once the extended play mode (the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol time reduction state) is set, the ball is hit right into the second entrance 640 to draw the special symbol 2 by lottery. Is easily executed, and the jackpot game is easily repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for one purpose of shifting to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 142, of controlling in the round game R of the sixth round the operation pattern to be different in accordance with the jackpot type. Note that, in this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described in the ninth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the 22nd operation pattern, and FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing in the 23rd operation pattern. FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the member 8340, and FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the open / close plate 8300 and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 in the twenty-fourth operation pattern.

  In the present control example, in the sixth round game R of the big hit P, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven in the 22nd operation pattern, and in the sixth round game R of the big hit Q, The opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven in the 24th operation pattern in the round game R of the sixth round of the jackpot m in the operation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the twenty-second operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), and the round game R starts. After the elapse of the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example), the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state.

  Note that the interference member 6930 returns to the retreat state when the round game R ends (the skip is performed when the round game R ends before the standby time TK). Here, the round game R is determined such that the passage of a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) is detected at the first specific winning opening 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example, (30 seconds) elapses.

  In the round game R of the sixth round of the jackpot P in which the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are drive-controlled in the 22nd operation pattern, the specified number (10 in this control example) before the standby time TK elapses. When the ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R ends without waiting for the waiting time TK.

  On the other hand, when the specified number of balls have not entered the first specific winning opening 1000a before the standby time TK has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is in a protruding state, and ten balls can be stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be thrown into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the time required for the round game R becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1 (30 seconds).

  The standby time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) does not stop the launch of the ball even in the interval between rounds from the end of the round game R of the fifth round, and the ball is not released even after the start of the round game R of the sixth round. By continuing firing, a period in which the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls can reach the first specific winning opening 1000a sufficiently is set. In this control example, the ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  On the other hand, for example, when the firing of the ball is stopped during the interval between rounds from the end of the fifth round of the round game R and the firing of the ball is started at the start of the sixth round, the fired ball is From the balance with the time required to reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (approximately 4.0 seconds), a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls are transferred to the first specific winning opening by the elapse of the standby time TK. 1000a cannot be passed.

  Therefore, when the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round, the case where the firing of the ball is continued at the interval between the rounds is compared with the case where the firing of the ball is continued at the interval between the rounds. Can be configured to be longer. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval between rounds.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the twenty-third operation pattern, the open / close plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), but before the elapse of the standby time TK. Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is controlled to open and close a plurality of times (one side opens and closes as shown in FIG. 74). That is, the control for canceling the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

  Note that, after the elapse of the standby time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) from the start of the round game R, the state of the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state, as in the twenty-second operation pattern. .

  According to this operation pattern, not all the balls riding on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some balls flow toward the auxiliary entrance 9111. Before the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses, a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls can be made harder to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a than the operation pattern. .

  Therefore, the round game R of the sixth round can be extended for a long time (30 seconds) with a high probability. On the other hand, unlike the twenty-second operation pattern, a prize ball can be paid out when the ball enters the auxiliary entrance 9111, so that the number of prize balls paid out is larger than in the twenty-third operation pattern. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), but before and after the standby time TK elapses. Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is controlled to open and close a plurality of times (one side opens and closes as shown in FIG. 74). That is, the control for canceling the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

  Note that, after the elapse of the standby time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) from the start of the round game R, the change of the state of the interference member 6930 from the retracted state to the extended state is caused by the 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern. The operation pattern is the same.

  In the present operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some balls flow toward the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66). Similarly to the twenty-third operation pattern, the probability that the round game R will be completed can be reduced by passing the specified number (ten in the present control example) of balls through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, the round game R of the sixth round can be extended for a long time (30 seconds) with a high probability. On the other hand, unlike the twenty-third operation pattern, the ball can be made to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the elapse of the standby time TK. Throughout, it is possible to generate a payout of a prize ball due to a ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. Therefore, more payouts of prize balls can be caused as compared with the twenty-third operation pattern.

  In this operation pattern, control is performed so that one-sided opening and closing can be performed even after the interference member 6930 is set in the extended state. In other words, even after the storage channel 1231 is filled with spheres (filled up) and the spheres stay on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one-sided opening / closing occurs. Is easier to guide the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 at the time of one-sided opening / closing as compared with the case where is not specified.

  Next, referring to FIG. 143 (a) and FIG. 143 (b), the display in the round game R of the sixth round will be described. FIG. 143 (a) and FIG. 143 (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents that the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the round game R of the sixth round is being executed.

  In FIG. 143 (a), an example of the display of the round game R in the sixth round when the jackpot type is “big jackpot P” or “big jackpot Q”, or the sixth round game in the case of “big jackpot m” FIG. 143 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display before the elapse of the standby time TK in R. In FIG. 143 (b), the standby time TK in the sixth round of the round game R when the jackpot type is “big hit m” is shown. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display after the lapse has been illustrated.

  That is, when the jackpot type is “big hit P” or “big hit Q”, a display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained over the round game R, and the jackpot type is “big hit”. In the case of “m”, after the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained, the display is switched to the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) after the elapse of the standby time TK. The display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) is maintained until the end of the round game R.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the round number display section 714 for displaying the current round number is in the sixth round of the round game R. A sub-round display section 714b, which is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a manner and is displayed below the number-of-rounds display section 714, indicating that a period in which an additional prize ball can be expected in the round game R is displayed.

  In FIG. 143 (a), the number-of-rounds display unit 714 displays light (displays brightly), while the sub-round display unit 714b displays light-off (displays darkly). In FIG. The unit 714 is turned off (darkly displayed), while the sub-round display unit 714b is illuminated (brightly displayed).

  That is, in the present control example, the round game R is executed by the display in the mode shown in FIG. 143 (a) during the period in which the payout of prize balls accompanying the ball entry into the first specific winning opening 1000a is mainly performed. In addition to notifying the player of this, after the elapse of the standby time TK, it becomes impossible to expect the payout of the prize ball accompanying the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the ball enters the auxiliary entrance 9111. The player can be made aware that the period in which the payout of prize balls can be expected continues.

  Here, by changing the display on the sub-round display portion 714b, it is possible for the player to easily recognize a substantial change in profit obtained by the player by entering the ball. That is, the payout of the prize ball due to the entry of one ball into the auxiliary entrance 9111 is three as described above, and is 1/5 of the case where the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is. This change in the number of winning balls with respect to the number of entered balls can be easily recognized by the player.

  Further, the ball flows to the auxiliary entrance 9111 only when the ball is arranged between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 during a short time when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened, The ball does not always flow to the auxiliary entrance 9111 each time the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened.

  Accordingly, the frequency of the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 during the period in which the sub-round display portion 714b is emitting light (displaying brightly) is the same as the frequency of the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 during the period in which the round number display portion 714 is emitting light (displaying brightly). It is lower than the frequency of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  As described above, according to the present control example, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended, the player can obtain the profit (change of the prize ball paid out by entering one ball, change of the prize ball, At the same time).

  In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 143 (b), the character “+ chance” is displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 described above. In the present control example, the character “+ chance” may cause a ball to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by firing a ball. Corresponding to being able to get paid.

  As described above, in the present control example, control is performed so as to pay out additional prize balls due to the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 in the round game R. Therefore, in the round game R, the number of prize balls (150 in the present control example) to be paid out to the player when a specified number (10 in the present control example) of the balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. More prize balls (excess prize balls) may be paid out.

  In particular, in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, even after the elapse of the standby time TK, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the auxiliary entrance 9111, and the game will be performed in comparison with the other twenty-second and twenty-third operation patterns. The number of prize balls paid out to the player can increase. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

  That is, from the 22nd operation pattern to the 24th operation pattern in the present control example, it is possible to provide a difference in the number of award balls to be paid out to the player while maintaining the same driving mode of the interference member 6930.

  Note that the maximum number of times that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes in the round game R corresponds to the maximum number of times that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

  According to the control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the inter-round interval period, the period required for the next round game R is more likely to be longer when the firing of the ball is stopped than when the firing of the ball is continued during the inter-round interval period. Thus, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval period between rounds.

  The driving mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (that is, whether or not the above-described “one-sided opening / closing” occurs) can positively change the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the round game R. . In other words, whether the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the auxiliary ball opening 9111 downstream of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is determined. It can be switched by the driving mode of 8340.

  Accordingly, it is possible to separately configure a timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 and a timing at which the ball is not easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111. Therefore, for example, during the period of the round game R, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be concentrated in a part of the period. In this case, the balls reaching the circulating movable object are sorted in the order of arrival, and a predetermined number of the reached balls is guided to the winning opening (winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary opening 9111). As a result, the attention power in the vicinity of the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be improved.

  That is, the ball is fired at a timing when the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111, and the firing of the ball is stopped at other times, so that the number of fired balls with respect to the payout number can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the timing at which the ball should be fired in order to win the auxiliary entrance 9111 is made different based on the type of big hit. Thus, it is possible to request the player to change the shooting mode of the ball for each big hit game, so that it is easy to prevent the player from playing the big hit game casually. In addition, by making it difficult to grasp the jackpot type, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a capture method, and to provide a particular player (experienced player) with excessive profit (for example, the number of paid out balls rather than the number of launched balls) Is increased) can be prevented.

  The auxiliary entrance 9111 is located at a position where the ball is not guided (is difficult to be guided) when the opening / closing plate 8300 is not driven (non-excited). This makes it possible to improve the concentration of the player on the game as compared with the case where the ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are not driven.

  In the round game R, the player can easily grasp the change in the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out with respect to the number of balls arriving at the first variable winning device 9000 from the display of the display device (the third symbol display device 81). It was configured as follows. This makes it easier for the player to arbitrarily select whether to continue firing the ball or stop firing the ball from the display on the display device during the continuation of the same round game R.

  Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. In the ROM 202, a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202c, a first type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, At least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided in addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f.

  The small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is something that can be done.

  With reference to FIG. 145, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 145 (a) to FIG. 145 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the first random number table 202a indicates whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 obtained by the game ball entering the first entrance 64 is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 obtained by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. Special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. This is a table in which (judgment values) are set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the obtained first random number counter C3 is “0”, and if the value is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that the small hit is made. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 319”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the second special symbol lottery based on a ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is set in the table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the obtained first random number counter C3 is “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined that the big hit has occurred. In addition, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 obtained is “1 to 318”. If the value is “1 to 318”, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. In addition, when it is determined to be “319”, it is determined to be out of place.

  As described above, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first random number counter C3, at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the number of random hits of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is Since there are 320, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of a big hit of the first special symbol is “1/320”. In addition, since the total number of random hit values for small hits is 3, the probability of small hits for the first special symbol is “3/320”.

  On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the random number value which is the jackpot of the second special symbol is one. Since the total number of the random numbers is 1, the probability of the jackpot for the second special symbol is “1/320”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be the small hit is 318, the probability of the small hit of the second special symbol is “318/320”.

  In addition, as in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples, when it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, “停止” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). The symbol is lighted up and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is reduced, but is opened for only 0.2 seconds when the time is not reduced. Therefore, even when the value of the second random number counter C5 is a hit when the time is not reduced, it is difficult to cause the game balls to win the second winning opening 640. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player tries to enter the second winning opening 640 even though the time is not reduced (the jackpot with the time reduction is not displayed).

  FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, as described above, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C4 is It is defined in association with the jackpot type and the type of the winning opening that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 49”. Is associated with a jackpot R (see 202b21 in FIG. 146).

  In the case of the jackpot R, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is a time-saving state (100 times) until the change of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  The jackpot S is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C4 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b22 in FIG. 146).

  In the case of the jackpot S, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls, but cannot obtain the benefit of the time reduction after the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game can be reduced to the time-saving state with a probability of 50%. During working hours, the player will aim for a bigger jackpot by playing a small jackpot game described later.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 is a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 9”, and the big hit is obtained. n are defined in association with each other (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). The jackpot n gives the player the same profit as the jackpot R described above.

  In other words, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes the time reduction state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  A large hit p is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C4 in the range of “10 to 99” (see 202b24 in FIG. 146). The big hit p is provided with a difference in the number of times of the time saving game while giving the player the same payout of the prize ball as the big hit n described above.

  In other words, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes the time-saving state (four times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is consumed four times. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  As described above, the jackpot generated by the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640) shifts to the time saving state when 100% is established. Therefore, the possibility of acquiring the next big hit in a short time after the end of the big hit game is increased as compared with the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1.

  As described above, during the special symbol time reduction, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit is reduced. It is set to be long (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, the ball can be easily entered into the second winning opening 640, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. Then, if the special symbol 2 is a lottery and the big hit is a big hit, the time is reduced after the big hit is completed, so that it becomes easier to obtain a big hit by the special symbol 2 lottery.

  Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the time-saving state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is reached, the special symbol that is likely to be the jackpot G is likely to be repeated. It becomes easier to obtain a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the special symbol time saving state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the present control example, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved special symbols are related to each other, so that the ball is in the specific area 4830 (in the present control example, the next big hit is caused by the passage of the ball. (See FIG. 51) is determined, but the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g.

  The small hit type selection table 202g includes a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202g1 for selecting a small hit type based on the first entrance 64 and a small hit based on the second winning port 640. There is a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202g2 for selecting a hit type (see FIG. 147 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 147 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first entrance 64, if the value of the small hit type counter C6 is "0 to 1", the small hit A is selected, and "2 to 99". ", The small hit B is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), at the time of the small hit based on the second winning opening 640, if the value of the first hit type counter C6 is “0 to 9”, the small hit A is selected, and “10” is selected. In the case of "-99", the small hit B is selected.

  In this control example, the operation of the open / close plate 1300 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 148). Although details will be described later, the small hit A is a small hit in which a large hit is given with a high probability when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, and the small hit B is a small hit in which the big hit is not given with a high probability. .

  In addition, in the present control example, the big hit given after the small hit A and the small hit B is configured to be the big hit G (16R hour big hit).

  In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit. However, as another specification, the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit is Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent small jackpot game, the jackpot that has just acquired the right is executed by the game ball passing through the specific area 4830. You may. By doing so, the player can select the small hit that passes through the specific area 4830, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510, and the sorting device 4850 at the small hit A, and the time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510, and the sorting device 4850 (see FIG. 51) at the small hit B. It is. The operation of the distribution device 4850 is the same for the small hit A and the small hit B.

  In FIG. 148, the illustration of the difference between the operation timing of the open / close plate 1300 and the drive timing of the solenoid 1510 is omitted, and the operation is started at the same time.

  First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. At the small hit A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) such that the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.0 second from the start of the small hit, and when 1.0 second has passed, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). (Excitation) is released. 0.2 seconds after the excitation is released, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, and the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 0.6 seconds, and then the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released.

  Next, an outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In the small hit B, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.8 seconds from the start of the small hit, and when 1.8 seconds have elapsed, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). ) Is released.

  As described above, the small hit A and the small hit B differ in whether or not the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed during the small hit game, while the time of the small hit game is the same (1.8 seconds). .

  In the present control example, when the small hit game is started immediately after the small hit game ends, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol remains and the small hit game is continuously generated, during the small hit game, The period during which the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to a minimum of 0.4 seconds. Therefore, in the above-described embodiment, when the small hitting game occurs continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51), the ball is discharged from the discharge port 1150 during the small hitting game. The number of balls performed is limited to two. Therefore, the ball that entered the storage channel 1231 in the previous small hit game may remain in the storage channel 1231 even during the next small hit game.

  An operation mode of the distribution device 4850 will be described. The distributing device 4850 keeps the distributing operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds elapse after the solenoid 1510 starts driving (excitation) at the start of the small hitting game, and after 2.0 seconds elapses The distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds, the distributing operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. In addition, the distributing device 4850 moves the distributing member 4851 to the open position after 3.2 seconds from the start (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 at the start of the small hitting game, and maintains the distributing member 4851 for 0.5 second. After elapse of 0.5 seconds, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) in such a manner that the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again.

  That is, the distribution operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for one small hitting game. The first movement corresponds to one second (corresponding to the time that elapses until the ball that has passed through the discharge port 1150 reaches the sorting operation member 4851) after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed at the small hit A. .

  From this, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is driven with the small hit A, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 in advance, the ball passes through the specific region 4830 during the first movement of the distribution operation member 4851. Can be done. On the other hand, the probability of occurrence of the small hit A is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, so that it is difficult to frequently cause the ball to pass to the specific area 4830 at this timing.

  The second movement of the sorting operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small hitting game (corresponding to immediately after the second ball that has passed the outlet 1150 has passed the sorting operation member 4851). Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is a mode in which the ball is not allowed to enter the specific area 4830 if up to two balls have been discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the small hitting game.

  That is, according to this control example, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 unless the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. It can be configured as follows.

  Thus, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time-saving game, the timing at which the ball passes the specific area 4830 can be limited to when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. In this case, a prize ball paid out in a game in which a ball is continuously inserted into the second ball entrance 640 so that the number of reserved balls does not become 0 can obtain a payout prize ball in a short time game.

  On the other hand, it is difficult to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830 while the ball continues to be inserted into the second entrance 640, so that the next jackpot is obtained (the ball passes through the specific area 4830). In addition, the player needs to make a timing for reducing the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the time saving game. Thus, in a time-saving game, if the number of remaining time-savings is reduced, it is possible to configure so that the timing at which the number of reserved balls is frequently reduced to 0 increases the profit obtained by the player.

  According to the setting of the second movement, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is three, the balls pass through the specific area 4830, but the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, the number of discharges may be set when the number of discharges is greater than the number of discharges (two) at the shortest interval (0.4 seconds) of the small hit game. The second movement may be set at the passing timing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small hit game). In addition, the shortest interval of the small hit game may be set to 0.2 seconds (the number of ejected pieces is one). In this case, the second movement is performed when the number of ejected pieces is larger than the number of ejected pieces (one piece). For example, the second movement may be set at the timing when the second ball passes the specific area 4830 (1.2 seconds from the end of the small hitting game).

  Also, since the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 in one small hit game is about 1 or 2 on average, the storage channel 1231 can be set before the small hit game in which the number of reserved balls becomes zero. By accumulating the sphere in the area, the possibility that the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 can be increased. Therefore, the timing at which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is set to 0 can be selected based on the number of balls in the storage channel 1231 that increases or decreases with each small hit game. Thereby, the attention power to the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In the present control example, as the period of the time saving game becomes longer, the payout prize balls due to the ball entering the second entrance 640 increase. Here, by setting the number of prize balls of the second entrance 640, the player can select whether to shorten or lengthen the time saving game period.

  For example, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is one, there is no profit (number of payout prize balls) that the player can obtain by subtracting the number of shot balls from the number of shot balls. Therefore, it is beneficial for the player to shorten the time-saving game period.

  On the other hand, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is two or more (for example, five), there is a profit (number of payout prize balls) that can be obtained by the player by subtracting from the number of shots (one piece). that's all). Therefore, it may be beneficial for the player to suppress the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830 and lengthen the time-saving game period.

  In the present control example, the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 for one small hitting game is set to 1.8 seconds from the first opening start to the closing, so that the opening time is set to the first specific winning opening 1000a in one small hitting game. Is 3 or 4 balls, but is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the opening pattern of the small hitting game in an opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls) can be obtained during one small hitting game. ) May be configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, for example, by disposing the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, even when the opening time of the opening and closing plate 1300 is short, the ball is closed at the lower end of the opening and closing plate 1300 when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. It is possible to prolong the time required for the ball to fall downward, and to guide the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  In the present control example, the ball is controlled to be able to be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so that the small hitting game (small hitting A, small hitting B) in which the period from opening to closing is 1.8 seconds is the shortest interval (0 (At intervals of .4 seconds), the number of small hit games with respect to the number of balls that can be fired is 11 balls / 3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be fired during three small hit games.

  Here, in order to generate a small hitting game, it is necessary to enter a ball into the second entrance 640, so that the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 is 0, such as at the start of right-handing. Therefore, it is necessary to make three balls enter the second entrance 640 as the number of balls for generating three small hit games. Therefore, it is the remaining eight balls that deviate from the second entrance 640 to the first specific winning opening 1000a. In three small hit games, for example, if all the small hits are the above described small hits B, six balls are ejected through the three small hit games. Therefore, after three small hit games, two balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the expected number of additional balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 when the balls are continuously fired is two for three small hit games.

  It should be noted that the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hit game is not discharged if it has not reached the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It takes 2 seconds to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231 from the first specific winning opening 1000a, and even if it is considered that the opening in the small hitting game is completed in 1.8 seconds, the second time in the small hitting game is considered. Before the ball that has passed the one specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231, the opening of the next small hit game may start.

  Therefore, when the ball starts to be stored in the storage channel 1231 (when the ball is not zero, the first time), the small hitting game in which the ball is not zero (for example, in a state where two balls remain in the storage channel 1231) In comparison with the case where the number of balls is additionally increased in the executed small hit game (continuous round), the balls can be easily left in the storage channel 1231.

  On the other hand, when the number of retained balls at the second entrance 640 is not 0, even if three balls do not enter the second entrance 640, the number of retained balls and the number of remaining balls are newly set. If the number of balls that have entered the second entrance 640 exceeds three, three small hit games can be executed at the shortest interval (at 0.4 second intervals). In this case, the number of balls going to the first specific winning opening 1000a during the three small hit games is 8 or more, and more balls can be directed to the storage channel 1231. Thus, more than two spheres can be additionally left in the storage channel 1231.

  As described above, in the present control example, the small hitting game that is generated based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and as many balls as possible It is controlled so that it is more profitable for the player to make the ball enter the one specific winning opening 1000a and leave the ball in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the ball entering the second entrance 640 does not contribute to the occurrence of the small hitting game (when the number of reserved balls is full (four in this control example)), the ball enters the second entrance 640. Is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls and from the viewpoint of increasing the number of additional balls left in the storage channel 1231 (to the second entrance 640 during a right-handed game). May be disadvantageous for the player).

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during a right-handed game.

  Here, in the present control example, when aiming to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830, at the stage where the number of reserved balls at the second entrance 640 becomes zero, more balls than two are stored. It needs to be stored in the channel 1231. That is, the ball flows into the specific area 4830 unless the number of the reserved balls is reduced based on the time when there are more balls than twice the number of the reserved balls in the second entrance 640 (identification). It is configured so that it is difficult to make it. Thereby, in addition to the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In this control example, the adjustment of the game area (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment in which a ball easily passes through the normal entrance 67 and many balls enter the second entrance 640 during a right-handed game. However, even if it is an adjustment that makes it difficult for balls to enter the second entrance 640 and many balls are likely to go to the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to reduce the loss given to the player.

  That is, for example, in the case of an adjustment in which many balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during a right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to be stored in the storage channel 1231, and while the small hit game B continues to be generated. Although it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830, the ball can pass to the specific area 4830 if the small hitting game A selected in 10% of the times occurs, so that the ball enters the specific area 4830. By allowing many balls to enter the second entrance 640 before this, it is possible to pay out many prize balls.

  In addition, for example, during the right-handed game, when the ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 and many balls are easily adjusted to the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Because it is difficult to enter, most of the right-played game balls can be allowed to enter the storage channel 1231. In addition, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on the entry into the second entrance 640 is 0. Since it is easily maintained as it is, it becomes easy to discharge two or more balls in the first small hit game. Therefore, since the ball can easily pass through the specific area 4830 early, the time-saving game can be ended early, and a period in which a loss due to the difficulty of the ball entering the second entrance 640 (ie, the time-saving game Period) can be shortened.

  In this control example, since the opening and closing plate 1300 and the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small hitting game, it is desirable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big hitting game. For example, as described in the second embodiment, a second specific winning opening 2255a different from the first specific winning opening 1000a may be set as a winning opening used in the jackpot game.

  In this case, the storage channels 1231 do not necessarily need to be merged. For example, an independent storage channel may be configured by the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, The second specific winning opening 2255a may not constitute a storage channel (discharged to a ball discharge channel).

  Note that this control example is an example of one means of the technical idea related to a gaming machine that “the player can select the timing at which the ball flows into the specific area 4830 (can aim)”, and other means for the same purpose. May be used.

  For example, a small hit (small hit A in the present control example) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is driven (excited) in a driving mode in which the ball easily flows (flows) into the specific area 4830, and the ball hardly flows into the specific area 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small hit (small hit B in the present control example) for driving (exciting) the opening / closing plate 1300 in the drive mode in which no inflow is selected, which small hit is to be executed is determined. The game is controlled so as to notify the player, and the content of the notification is grasped, and the control is performed so as to include the case where the shot ball can pass through the specific area 4830. May be selectable. According to this, it is possible to allow a “game mode in which the ball is not fired at the predetermined timing to avoid the ball from entering the specific area 4830”.

  The means of notification is not limited at all. For example, the notification may be given on the display of the third symbol display device 81 or may be given by voice.

  In the third control example, as described above, a jackpot can be obtained by passing a ball through the special area 4830. That is, it is controlled so as to be operable as a so-called “one and two type mixer”. In addition, by associating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 with the number of balls flowing down to the specific region 4830, when the ball passes through the specific region 4830, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is reduced. It is configured so that the case of 0 occurs most frequently. Next, an example of the effect of the present control example will be described.

  FIGS. 149 (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of display contents of the third symbol display device 81. The current state of the storage channel 1231, which is not actually arranged there, is schematically shown inside a circular broken line on the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, for easy understanding, the display of the main display area Dm is omitted. The display at the time when the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 148) is opened due to the small hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2 is illustrated.

  In FIGS. 149 (a) and (b), as shown in the small area Ds1, it is assumed that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is the same, while as shown in the circular broken line. , The number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is different. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 149 (a), three balls are stored, while in the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), seven balls are stored.

  In the small area Ds2, a semicircular picture, a first display Ds21 in which "sorry" is described on the left part of the semicircular picture, and a state that a predetermined profit can be obtained on the right part. A second display Ds22 described as “V” and a needle Ds23 that rotates while overlapping with the picture of the semicircle with the center axis of the semicircle as the rotation axis are displayed.

  In the small area Ds3, an appropriate display is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the game method. That is, in FIG. 149 (a), the ball is fired toward the second ball entrance 640 because the ball is fired toward the second ball entrance 640 because the player is in a state where profits are easily received. The message "Aim for the right" is displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 149 (b), as will be described later, since it is in a state where the player is likely to benefit even by suppressing the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640, A "chance of stopping" is displayed, which indicates that the firing of the aimed ball can be stopped.

  Here, a description will be given of the subsequent game progress when stopping the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in the state of FIGS. 149 (a) and 149 (b). The display content of the small area Ds2 is the content along the game progress. In order to facilitate understanding, all the lotteries corresponding to the hold display of the special symbol 2 shown in FIGS. 149 (a) and 149 (b) are all small hits, and all the small hit types are small. The description will be made on the assumption that the hit B (see FIGS. 147 (c) and 148).

  First, in the state shown in FIG. 149 (a), when the ball entry to the second ball entrance 640 is stopped, a small hit occurs as many times as the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (ie, two times). Here, as described above, when small hits occur continuously due to the number of retained balls of the special symbol 2 remaining, the upper limit number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is two. Therefore, the small hit occurs twice after the state shown in FIG. 149 (a), and the number of ejected balls from the storage channel 1231 is 2 balls and 1 ball.

  As described above, after the small hit B repeatedly occurs, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830 when three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Limited. Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 149 (a), the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) thereafter.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), when the ball entry to the second entrance 640 is stopped, a small hit occurs as many times as the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (ie, two times). . Here, as described above, when small hits occur continuously due to the number of retained balls of the special symbol 2 remaining, the upper limit number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is two. Therefore, the small hit occurs twice after the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), and the number of discharged balls from the storage channel 1231 is 2 balls, 2 balls, and 3 balls.

  As described above, after the small hit B repeatedly occurs, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830 when three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Limited. Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), the ball then passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51).

  As described above, the display of the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 is based on the reserved number of the special symbol 2 and the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, and thereafter, whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830. It has a role as notification.

  That is, when the ball cannot be expected to pass to the specific area 4830 even if the ball entry to the second ball entry port 640 is stopped, the needle Ds23 is switched to the first display Ds21 as shown in FIG. 149 (a). It is arranged at an intermediate position between the two displays Ds22.

  Note that the needle Ds23 does not need to be arranged at the accurate intermediate position, and it is difficult for the player to determine whether the needle Ds23 is inclined toward the first display Ds21 or the second display Ds22. Any arrangement is acceptable. Further, the needle Ds23 may be stopped, or may vibrate left and right.

  Further, as another case where the hand Ds23 is disposed at the intermediate position, the hand Ds23 may be inclined toward the first display Ds21. For example, when the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 is completely discharged before the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 due to the small hit of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (see FIG. 149 (a)). That is, in the case of ((the number of reserved balls × 2) ≧ the number of stored balls), the needle Ds23 is displayed so as to be inclined toward the first display Ds21 side, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is opened / closed by a small hit. When the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 may remain until after the end of the opening / closing operation of the plate 1300 (for example, in FIG. 149 (a), five or six balls are stored in the storage channel 1231). That is, in the case of ((the number of reserved balls × 2) <the number of stored balls <(the number of reserved balls × 2) +3), the hand Ds23 is positioned at an intermediate position between the first display Ds21 and the second display Ds22. May be displayed so as to be arranged.

  By doing so, as compared with the case where the hand Ds23 is arranged at the intermediate position, the time when the hand Ds23 is inclined toward the first display Ds21 is a period until the ball enters the specific area 4830. Is long (that is, there is a large number of balls to enter the second entrance 640 by an opportunity to enter the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be used as a notification that allows the player to predict the time (or the number of shot balls) required to make the ball enter the specific area 4830.

  In FIG. 149 (b), the needle Ds23 in the small area Ds2 is tilted toward the second display Ds22 as a display corresponding to a state in which the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 can pass through the specific area 4830. However, the process leading to this state is not a single one, and various modes are exemplified.

  For example, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are in the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), the hand Ds23 is tilted toward the second display Ds22. Alternatively, after a predetermined time delay (for example, after a lapse of 3 seconds or a lapse of the opening / closing time of the second ball entrance 640) from the time point determined as such, the hand Ds23 may display the second display. It may be inclined to the Ds22 side, or when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 becomes larger than the state shown in FIG. 149 (b) (when the number of spheres becomes excessive). The hand Ds23 may be inclined toward the second display Ds22.

  In the above description, the case where all the small hits of the special symbol 2 are the small hits B has been described. However, when the small hit A occurs, the display may be changed in another mode. That is, in the case of the small hit A, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 can pass through the specific area 4830 regardless of the reserved number of the special symbol 2 if the ball can be discharged. It is desirable to control the display so as to be changeable irrespective of the relationship between the reserved number of symbols 2 and the stored number of storage channels 1231.

  Here, when the small hit of the special symbol 2 is the small hit A, the timing at which the hand Ds23 switches to the display tilted toward the second display Ds22 is not limited at all. For example, if it is determined that the small hit A has occurred, the display may be switched regardless of the storage state of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 (the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 as an operation pattern of the opening and closing plate 1300). The display may be switched when it is determined that a small hit A occurs and the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 so that the ball can be discharged. Then, the display may be switched in accordance with the actual operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 due to the small hit A (the ball passes through the specific area 4830). This is equivalent to switching the display by calculating the timing backward).

  When the display is switched in accordance with the actual operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 due to the small hit A, the time required for the ball discharged from the storage area 1231 to reach the specific area 4830 is about 1 second as described above, Immediately after the hand Ds23 is switched to the second display Ds22 side, the player shifts his / her line of sight to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) at the lower right of the game area, and the ball passes through the specific area 4830. Can be visually recognized.

  In other words, the time from when the display is switched to when the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 can be defined, so that the third symbol display device 81 is focused on until the display is switched, thereby allowing the third symbol display device to be focused. The display is switched one second before the ball passes through the specific area 4830 while securing a long period for the player to pay attention to 81, thereby preventing the player from overlooking the state where the ball passes through the specific area 4830. It can be aimed at.

  This is because the ball that entered the first specific winning opening 1000a earlier than the ball that entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game being executed can pass through the specific area 4830 in the present invention. It is only possible if there are features. That is, as in a conventional gaming machine, in the case of a structure in which a ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a passes through the specific area 4830 in a small hit game being executed, a ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. There is a possibility that the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 may be affected by the timing. Therefore, most of the display on the third symbol display device 81 focuses on the specific area 4830 during a period in which the ball can pass through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, as in the present control example, when the ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a passes through the specific area 4830 in the small hit game executed before the small hit game being executed, the current execution is performed. The timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is determined by the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 (the mode of discharging the ball from the storage channel 1231) regardless of the mode of entering the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small win game in the middle. Can be specified.

  Therefore, even when the display that suggests that the player visually recognizes the specific area 4830 is executed only at the timing (moment) when the ball passes the specific area 4830, the player can display the ball that passes through the specific area 4830. The possibility of oversight can be reduced. Thereby, while extending the time to pay attention to the third symbol display device 81, the possibility that the player misses the ball passing through the specific region 4830 (the region arranged outside the third symbol display device 81) is reduced. be able to.

  If the special symbol 2 includes a miss (the value of the random number counter C3 per first is 319), the ball easily passes through the specific area 4830 by the number of the misses. This is advantageous for the player. For example, if the two special symbols 2 shown in FIG. 149 (a) are out of hold, no small hits will occur after that, so the three balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are The sphere is discharged at once, and the sphere passes through the specific area 4830.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 145 (c), the probability that the special symbol 2 will be lost when the special symbol 2 is held is the same as the probability of the jackpot. The fact that the special symbol 2 is released from holding is advantageous for the player when trying to pass the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 to the specific area 4830. In other words, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the special symbol 2 to come off to the same extent (or more) as the special symbol 2 being a big hit.

  In addition, when the fluctuation currently being executed or the special symbol 2 is held and the jackpot (the value of the first random number counter C3 is 0) is included, whether or not the ball passes the specific area 4830 is determined. Irrespective of this, since the game shifts to the jackpot game, it may be controlled so that a notification indicating the game is executed separately.

  For example, when the change currently being executed is a big hit, while the display of the small area Ds3 is maintained at “Aim at the right” (see FIG. 149 (a)), the display of the small area Ds2 is changed by the hand Ds23. It may be changed so as to be inclined toward the second display Ds22 (see FIG. 149 (b)).

  The timing at which the needle Ds23 inclines is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted from the timing of the start of the change, or may be tilted at the timing of the stop of the change.

  Further, for example, when there is a big hit in the holding of the special symbol 2, the corresponding holding may be made different from the display form of another holding. For example, the color may be changed to another color, blinked, glowing luminously, or the shape may be changed.

  In addition, as described above, the display of the small area Ds2 may be changed such that the hand Ds23 is inclined toward the second display Ds22 (see FIG. 149 (b)). Further, the change of the display mode of the suspension and the change of the display of the small area Ds2 may be executed in conjunction (combination).

  FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the relationship among the gaming state, the type of special symbol, the fluctuation time, and the type of hold. To facilitate understanding, only the special symbol 2 will be described, and the description of the special symbol 1 will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game is set to one of the normal state and the time saving state described above, and the game proceeds based on the set game state. In FIG. 150, the description is made on the assumption that only the small hit B described above is executed as the small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the normal state, when a deviated symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 minutes. Further, in the case of the time saving state, when the departure symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.1 second.

  As a result, even for the same out-of-design, the profit obtained by the player changes depending on whether it fluctuates in the time saving state or in the normal state. When the time fluctuates in the time saving state, as described above, the discharge mode of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is estimated from the number of spheres to be reserved in the special symbol 2. It acts so as to be advantageous to the player by the number of off symbols included in the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2.

  For example, the number of reserved balls is two, the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 is five, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened due to the small hit currently being executed, and the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 is performed. If there are no symbols in the hold and the remaining holds are small hits, the ball will be placed in the order of two, two and one for each small hit based on the number of balls held. The sphere will be ejected and will not pass through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, in the same case, if there is one missing symbol in the hold and the remaining hold is a small hit symbol, the small hit that occurs is one time, so two for each occurrence of the small hit, The balls are ejected in the order of three, and the balls pass through the specific area 4830.

  As another case, for example, even if the number of reserved balls is two and the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 is three, if all of the symbols have been released, the small hit currently being executed is performed. Since no small hit occurs after the end of the process, three balls are discharged collectively from the storage channel 1231, and the balls pass through the specific area 4830.

  Therefore, the inequality ((the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2−the number of retained balls in the off symbol) × 2 ≧ 3) can be used as a guide as to whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830. The player's attention to the determination of the departure symbol based on the suspension of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, the change time of the off symbol in the normal state is set to 10 minutes. Therefore, once the off symbol is determined, the next change is not started for 10 minutes even if the special symbol 2 is retained. Even if the small hit symbol is determined by the remaining reservation, the number of discharged balls from the storage channel 1231 is not limited by the small hit.

  As an example, a case will be described in which three balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of time savings is 0 in a state where the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 4, and the state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state. When the small hit symbol is determined based on all four holdings, the fluctuation time is not different from the time saving state until 10 times after the transition to the normal state, so the discharge mode of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is: The ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 because it is divided into two pieces and one piece.

  On the other hand, when the shift is made in the same manner, if the departure symbol is determined based on the first or second variably displayed hold, the execution of the subsequent small hit game is delayed. Are discharged collectively, whereby the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Unlike the fluctuation of the off symbol in the time saving state, a sufficient time elapses to discharge all the balls from the storage channel 1231 in one fluctuation, so the presence or absence of the off symbol is noticed, and the number of the off symbol is a problem. Not be.

  On the other hand, in the case where the shift is made in the same manner, when the departure symbol is determined based on the hold that is variably displayed at the third or fourth time, the ball has already been removed from the storage channel 1231 by the execution of the previous small hit game. Since the ball is discharged, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 does not pass through the specific area 4830. As described above, even when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are the same, the profit obtained by the player varies depending on which of the retaining symbols is determined. (In the present control example, it is more likely that the player who determines the departure symbol based on the hold whose change starts earlier will benefit the player).

  In other words, the player advances the game with the expectation that a symbol deviating from the suspension of the special symbol 2 after the transition to the normal state will be determined based on the suspension whose change starts earlier. Thereby, it is possible to configure a gaming characteristic in which the possibility that the player can obtain a profit by determining the off symbol based on the holding of the special symbol 2 after shifting to the normal state is increased.

  Further, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be a predetermined time (0.1 second) from the start of the normal state to 10 fluctuations, Thereafter, a random time of 5 to 10 minutes is determined. Further, in the case where the small hit symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2 in the time saving state, the fluctuation time is determined to be a predetermined time (0.1 second).

  The reason why the fluctuation time is set to a long time of 5 to 10 minutes is that the profit obtained by a player who tries to execute a game (illegal game) in which a ball is thrown into the second entrance 640 during normal times is obtained. This is to lower it. That is, it is to suppress the occurrence of illegal profit. On the other hand, in the 10 fluctuations after the transition to the normal state, the same fluctuation time as that in the time reduction state is set, because the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 immediately before the end of the time reduction state changes with the transition to the normal state. This is to prevent discharge at a stretch. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from easily protruding through the specific area 4830 when the time-saving state transitions to the normal state.

  Conversely, it may be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer regardless of the number of fluctuations after the transition to the normal state. In this case, the interval of the small hits after the shift to the normal state can be extended, and the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged at a time. It can be configured such that the ball sometimes protrudes and passes through the specific area 4830.

  In the present control example, when the ball has passed the specific area 4830 by a predetermined number of times (10 times in the present control example) after the gaming state has changed to the normal state, if the ball passes through the specific area 4830, the normal state is assumed. It is controlled so that a big hit game is started. That is, even when the ball passes the specific area 4830 after the end of the time-saving game, the big hit game may be started.

  On the other hand, if the ball has passed the specific area 4830 after the predetermined number of times (10 times in this control example) has been executed since the gaming state became the normal state, an error command is set. Is controlled. Thereby, if the player executes the game in a game mode in which the notification is ignored and the ball is launched toward the second entrance 640, even if the ball may pass through the specific area 4830, It is possible to prevent a transition to a jackpot game triggered by this.

  Further, in the normal state, when the big hit symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.1 second. In addition, in the time saving state, when the big hit symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.1 second. Thus, by stopping the fluctuation early and starting the big hit game, the timing at which the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830 can be entered during the big hit game, so the big hit symbol is determined. It is possible to prevent a plurality of jackpot games from being generated as a result of being played. In addition, by stopping the fluctuation early, it is possible to immediately shift to the production of the jackpot game, so that the player does not feel the separation of the time-saving game and the jackpot game from the time-saving game to the jackpot game. The transition to can be felt smoothly.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 178. In the first control example, the case where the operation effect of the operation button 300 is executed while the launch of the ball toward the storage channel 1231 is continued has been described. However, in the fourth control example, the operation effect of the operation button 300 is performed. Is executed during the execution of the effect of stopping the emission of the sphere toward the storage channel 1231 (the effect of preventing the excessively entering ball). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Further, the description will be given by using the variable winning device 4000 described in the fourth embodiment. First, an outline of this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152.

  FIG. 151 (a) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the jackpot game in the fourth control example, and FIG. 151 (b) shows the contents of the start round selection table Tb which defines the discharge mode at the end of the start round Rpb. FIG. 151 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the progress of the game in the effect round Rpt, and FIG. 151 (d) specifies the discharge mode at the end of the after-effect game round Rpa. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the after-production game round selection table Ta.

  FIG. 152 is a timing chart showing changes in the electrical states of the solenoid 1510, the detection sensor 1240, and the specific area 4830 and changes in the display of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example.

  As shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, in the present control example, as a round game R for executing a continuous effect toward the V winning round Rv, a start round Rpb, an effect round Rpt, and a post-effect game round Rpa are consecutive. (See FIG. 151A).

  In each round, a participation promotion effect for encouraging the player to participate is performed, and the execution of the game in accordance with the participation promotion effect has a V prize in comparison with the case of performing the game without following the participation promotion effect. In the round Rv, control is performed so that the difficulty of passing the ball through the specific area 4830 can be reduced. Therefore, the player's willingness to operate in each round can be maintained, and the player's attention to the display can be prevented from decreasing in any of the round games R.

  As shown in the start round selection table Tb (see FIG. 151 (b)), the start round Rpb is controlled so that the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the round game R can be made different, and the discharge mode is performed. Is defined in association with the jackpot type as an interval time, but details will be described later.

  When the first discharge mode Tb1 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the fifth interval time Int5 (1.2 seconds) between rounds. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly six balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the balls are fully stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the fifth interval time Int5 between rounds has elapsed, four balls remain in the storage channel 1231 (insufficient discharge occurs).

  The expression “full” in the present control example means a state in which the storage channel 1231 stores the ball until the additional ball cannot be entered (in other words, “full”). ). In other words, it indicates a state in which the maximum number of stored balls (10 in this control example) that can be defined in advance in the storage channel 1231 is stored in the storage channel 1231. In the following, unless otherwise specified, the expression “full” is used in the same sense.

  When the second discharge mode Tb2 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the fourth inter-round time interval Int4 (1.8 seconds) described in the above embodiment. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly nine balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the balls are fully stored in the storage channel 1231, one ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (insufficient discharge occurs) immediately after the elapse of the fourth interval time Int4 between rounds.

  When the third discharge mode Tb3 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds) described in the above embodiment. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly 10 balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, even when the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in a full state, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged globally after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds (insufficient discharge). Does not occur).

  The start round selection table Tb is based on the assumption that insufficient discharge of balls occurs from a state where the balls are fully stored in the storage channel 1231. For this reason, the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 may be different from the number expected for the effect depending on the game style of the player.

  For example, in the start round Rpb, when the player voluntarily performs a game in which the number of entering balls into the storage channel 1231 is fixed to six, there is no insufficient discharge regardless of the selection of the start round selection table Tb. .

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the control is performed such that the greater the number of winnings in the start round Rpb (the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231), the greater the profit obtained by the player in the subsequent effect round Rpt. You. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the ball in the start round Rpb, and to improve the willingness to execute the launch of the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (c), in the effect round Rpt, the ball entry possible period starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 and the X-th (X: An integer from 1 to 10 is entered. (See FIG. 152) The period after the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240 (after the storage channel 1231 is full with less than the specified number of balls in the round game R). During the (ball entry impossible remaining period), control is performed so as to execute an attention effect described later. At the same time, a notification indicating stoppage of the launch is executed (see FIG. 152, “stop instruction”).

  Note that examples of the attention effect include a player-participation type operation effect executed on the third symbol display device 81, information that is displayed along with the operation effect, and a display that is beneficial to the player, and the like.

  In addition, as information which suggests stop of launch, not only information which simply recommends stop of launch but various modes are illustrated. For example, a mode may be used in which the player is notified that the profit obtained by the player with respect to the predetermined winning opening is the maximum, and it is suggested that the player does not gain any more shots of the ball, or the launch is stopped. The notification mode may be the same as the notification period, or may be a mode in which the winning opening targeted is changed.

  In this manner, by specifying the timing at which the player stops firing the ball in the round game R, the firing of the ball is continued during the remaining period in which it is impossible to enter the ball, and the ball is discharged through the out port 66 without entering any winning port. Can be prevented.

  In addition, by executing a noticeable effect relating to the profit of the player at the timing of stopping the launch of the ball, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player in the remaining period in which the player cannot enter the ball. In addition, in the present control example, the effect of maintaining the concentration of the player can be enhanced by including the timing effect (operation effect) in the attention effect.

  As shown in the post-production game round selection table Ta (see FIG. 151 (d)), the post-production game round Rpa is controlled such that the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the round game R can be made different. The discharge mode is defined in association with the jackpot type as an interval time, but the details will be described later.

  If the first post-production discharge mode Ta1 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the sixth inter-round time interval Int6 (0.4 seconds). That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly two balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when three or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls remain in the storage channel 1231 (insufficient discharge occurs) immediately after the lapse of the sixth interval time Int6 between rounds.

  When the second post-production discharge mode Ta2 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between rounds. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly nine balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when ten or more balls (10 in this control example) are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls remain in the storage channel 1231 immediately after the fourth interval time Int4 between rounds has elapsed (discharge). Shortage).

  When the third post-production discharge mode Ta3 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly 10 balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, even when the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in a full state, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged globally immediately after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds (discharge). Shortage does not occur).

  If a remaining ball occurs in the storage channel 1231 immediately after the end of the post-production game round Rpa, the V winning round Rv (see FIG. 152) cannot be completed by the specified number of balls, so the V winning round Rv is specified. It does not end until the time (30 seconds in this control example) elapses. In the present control example, since the opening period Tv during which the specific area 4830 is opened is set to be shorter than the specified time of the V winning round Rv, the storage channel 1231 immediately after the end of the post-game round Rpa. When the remaining ball is generated, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, information indicating which of the discharge modes Ta1 to Ta3 is selected from the post-production game round selection table Ta is a player's attention.

  In the present control example, the mode of notification (see FIG. 152, “discrimination display”) indicating which discharge mode Ta1 to Ta3 is selected from the post-production game round selection table Ta corresponds to the attention of the performance round Rpt. In the operation effect, the control is performed differently depending on whether or not the player succeeds in the operation. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the operation effect can be improved.

  According to the post-production game round selection table Ta, since the minimum number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the post-production game round Rpa is two, the production is performed irrespective of the presence or absence of the notification and the mode of the notification. If the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 in the subsequent game round Rpa is suppressed to two or less, it is possible to prevent the V winning round Rv from being started in a state where there is a remaining ball in the storage channel 1231. Before the opening period Tv elapses, a predetermined number (ten in this control example) of balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240, thereby completing the V winning round Rv and allowing the balls to pass through the specific area 4830. it can.

  Therefore, even if there is a situation where the operation in the effect round Rpt cannot be performed (for example, even if the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) is broken), the ball is passed through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv. It is possible to enable a game in a game mode in which the game can be performed.

  On the other hand, in this game method, there is a possibility that the maximum number of prize balls obtainable in the post-production game round Rpa while maintaining a state where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv is not obtained. Then, by performing an appropriate operation in the effect round Rpt, the appropriate number of entering balls in the post-effect game round Rpa is notified.

  By performing the game in accordance with the notification, the player can easily obtain the largest prize ball that can be obtained in the post-production game round Rpa while maintaining a state where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 152, the above-described attention effect, stop instruction, and determination display are all executed in the first display example, and are all omitted in the second display example. Whether or not the attention effect, the stop instruction, and the determination display are executed is controlled so as to be determined based on the jackpot type and the winning mode of the ball, which will be described later in detail.

  The display contents of display example 1 (see FIG. 152) will be described. The display content of the display example 1 corresponds to a case where the discharge shortage occurs immediately after the end of the start round Rpb. 153 and 154 are schematic diagrams showing, in chronological order, changes in the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the start of the effect round Rpt to the start of the post-effect game round Rpa in the first display example.

  In each display content, four circles are displayed side by side below the number of rounds display. As in the case of the first control example, the circles are switched depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, similarly to the first control example, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than four, the circle at the left end is painted out, and the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is When the number is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is painted out, and when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more and less than 10, the right circle is displayed. When the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten, the circle at the right end is filled.

  153 and 154 show a common display example up to the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side). That is, in the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), five main enemies and a tank that bombards the enemies are illustrated in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A). In the eyes (display example shown in the middle left), the state where the enemy is invisible due to the smoke accompanying the shelling is shown, and in the third frame (display example shown in the lower left), the timing effect (attention The sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 for executing the operation effect in the effect (see FIG. 88 (a)) are shown.

  Switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is executed at the timing when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is full. From the second frame, since it is impossible to expect the ball to enter the storage channel 1231 (it becomes impossible), the display on the guidance display unit of the small area Ds3 is "Aim at the right" (indicating continuation of launching). The display switches from “display. Launch instruction” to “do not hit” (display indicating launch stop. Stop instruction).

  153 and 154 show different display examples from the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), and will be described in order. In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side) in FIG. 153, a state in which the timing effect (operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88 (a)) is successful is shown, and on the fifth frame (shown in the middle right side). In the display example), it is displayed that the number of remaining enemies is two, and thereafter, the production round Rpt ends, and the state after the post-production game round Rpa is started is shown in the sixth frame (shown in the lower right). Display example). In the display of the sixth frame, “insert two” is displayed on the guidance display section of the small area Ds3, so that a notification that explicitly suggests the number of entering balls is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in the case where the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88 (a)) is successful, the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) should be made to enter the ball in the game round Rpa after the effect. Since the display indicating the number of balls (discrimination display) is explicitly notified, the player can play the game without hesitation.

  In the present control example, if a larger number of balls than the explicitly notified number are caused to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231), the player is disadvantaged (the specified number in the V winning round Rv (the number of balls)). In the control example, 10) balls are prevented from entering the detection sensor 1240).

  On the other hand, in the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side) of FIG. 154, a state in which the timing effect (operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88 (a)) has failed is shown. Display example), it is displayed that the smoke is still fine and the remaining number of enemies is unknown, and then the rendering round Rpt ends, and the state after the post-production gaming round Rpa starts is 6 frames. This is illustrated in the eyes (display example shown on the lower right). In the display of the sixth frame, a notification indicating that the number of entered balls is unknown is displayed by displaying “insert?” In the guidance display section of the small area Ds3.

  As shown in FIG. 154, when the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88 (a)) fails, the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) should be entered in the post-effect game round Rpa. The display indicating the number of balls (discrimination display) is a mode in which the number is not explicitly notified, and the number of balls to be entered is unknown, so the player is wondering how many balls to fire to the detection sensor 1240. The game will be played.

  Here, when a ball in the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) is made to enter a larger number of balls than the number of balls notified when the timing effect (operation effect) is successful in the game round Rpa after the effect, the player Since it is controlled so as to be disadvantaged, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a game in a game mode for causing a large number of balls to enter the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, as will be described later, since the lower limit is two, the number of balls that enter the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) in the post-production game round Rpa is reduced to two, Can avoid disadvantages. Therefore, the display of “OK up to two” as the number of balls that the player does not suffer disadvantage is displayed in the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower part of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A)). ).

  FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the attention effect operation difficulty switching table and the discrimination display switching table. As shown in FIG. 155, in the present control example, the length of the noticeable effect and the difficulty of the operation effect change according to the entry timing of the Xth ball (the timing at which the storage channel 1231 becomes full). Is controlled.

  That is, if the X-th ball entry timing is before 15 seconds from the start of the effect round Rpt, “long moving image” is selected as the noticeable effect. In this long moving image, the display pointer 719 moves from end to end of the sub-display area Ds4 over 10 seconds, so that the operation button 300 can be easily operated when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717. (Easy difficulty).

  If the X-th ball entry timing is from 15 seconds after the start of the effect round Rpt to 25 seconds after the start, “short moving image” is selected as the noticeable effect. In this short moving image, the display pointer 719 moves from end to end of the sub-display area Ds4 over 5 seconds, so that it is difficult to operate the operation button 300 when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717. The moving speed of the display pointer 719 is twice as high as the difficulty level “easy”. The difficulty level is “difficult”.

  Here, the movement mode of the display pointer 719 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, after disappearing at a predetermined position while moving, it may suddenly reappear at another position, may hide the display pointer in a predetermined section, or increase the speed by a predetermined section from the predetermined position while moving. The vehicle may be moved so as to move instantaneously (may slide), or may move so as to change direction once at a predetermined position during movement and change direction again at another position.

  In any case, since the time from the start of the attention effect to the period when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 is determined in advance, at the time of the timing effect, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the start of the attention effect. When the operation of the operation button 300 is detected at the timing when the time until the period when the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display section 717 is detected, it is determined that the operation timing is appropriate. (See S4763 in FIG. 176).

  When the X-th ball entry timing is from 25 seconds after the start of the effect round Rpt to 30 seconds after the start, “still image” is selected as the target effect. In this still image, "press!" Is largely displayed on the entire screen (not shown). Then, in the present control example, when the operation of the operation button 300 is detected at the same time when the still image is displayed, it is determined that the operation is successful.

  That is, in order to succeed in the operation effect, it is required to match the timing of entering the ball to the detection sensor 1240 with the operation timing, but the display timing of the “still image” is transmitted to the detection sensor 1240 due to control. Since the ball is slightly delayed from the entering ball timing, the timing at which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 is checked, and the operation button 300 is operated by slightly delaying the operation timing instead of completely adjusting the operation timing to the timing. It is required to operate the operation button 300 at the moment when it is confirmed that has been executed (operation difficulty level “extremely difficult”).

  As described above, the earlier the timing at which the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231), the easier it is to achieve a successful timing effect. The player's motivation to shorten the period up to the winning can be improved.

  As shown in the discrimination display switching table, if the timing effect is successful, the number explicit display (see the fifth and sixth frames in FIG. 153) is executed, while if the timing effect fails, the number unknown display (5 and 6 frames in FIG. 154) is displayed. Is executed).

  Here, the entry timing of the X-th ball tends to be earlier as the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the effect round Rpt is larger. In this control example, the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the effect round Rpt is linked to the jackpot type and changes according to the selection of the start round selection table Tb, so the jackpot type (see FIG. 160 (b)) ) (I.e., due to factors other than the manner of launching the ball and the manner of falling in the effect round Rpt), the possibility of making the Xth ball entry timing earlier can be changed.

  The start timing of the noted effect changes depending on the manner in which the player's ball is fired during the round game R. Therefore, if the mode of the attention effect is uniform, there is a possibility that the V winning round Rv may end in the middle of the attention effect depending on the game mode (the mode of launching the ball or the mode of entering the detection sensor 1240). On the other hand, in the present control example, the attention effect to be executed is updated over time.

  Accordingly, in the present control example, the noted effect can be ended before the end of the effect round Rpt, regardless of the timing at which the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, even if important information is displayed at the end of the noted effect, the effect round Rpt does not end before the display is performed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the noted effect can be improved.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which timing effects with different degrees of difficulty are performed once depending on the timing at which the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). It is not limited.

  For example, a timing effect is performed a plurality of times from the start of the effect round Rpt to the Xth ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231), and the number of successes in the timing effect (success probability ), The difficulty of the timing effect executed after the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) may be changed. For example, the greater the number of successes (the higher the probability of success), the lower the difficulty of the timing effect executed after the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). Is also good.

  In this case, if the timing sensor does not participate in the timing effect until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) or fails, the timing effect having a higher importance (for example, FIGS. 153 and 154). (See the third and fourth frames.) Since the difficulty level increases and it is difficult to succeed, the player pays attention to the timing effect even before the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). It is possible to make it difficult to notice the flowing state of the sphere inside and around the storage channel 1231. In this case, the player shoots a ball regardless of the number of balls inside the storage channel 1231, so that a ball that does not fit into the storage channel 1231 is discharged from the out port 66, resulting in a ball loss for the player. .

  That is, for the player, the timing effect is repeatedly executed while preparing for a certain ball loss, and the game is performed so as to reduce the difficulty of the timing effect having a high importance, or the storage channel is set so that the ball loss does not occur. By paying attention to the flow of the ball inside and around 1231 and adjusting the firing of the ball, it is possible to play or select so as to be prepared for the difficulty of timing production with high importance to increase. Can be prevented from becoming sluggish.

  In addition, the earlier the timing at which the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240, the lower the difficulty of the timing effect is made (control is performed so that the difficulty is determined by multiplying the conditions). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped when the timing effect is performed until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, in this case, the case where the player is forced to make the selection as described above is divided into the operation of the timing effect and the timing of entering the storage channel 1231 as in the present control example, according to the jackpot type. Thus, a case where the player is not forced to make a selection (a case where the game may be executed in order as informed) may be provided. In addition, the type of the jackpot game being executed may be notified so that the player knows which jackpot type corresponds to the type, or may be notified so that it is difficult to understand.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated about the profit which a player can obtain by a timing effect. For example, an unusual image (premier image) of a character that cannot be normally seen may be the benefit displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, at the start of the effect round Rpt, a plurality of cloud-like figures are displayed so as to hide at least a part of the character, and the timing until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 The display may be switched so that the cloud-shaped figure disappears little by little and the character can be visually recognized each time the effect is successful.

  In this case, important information of the character (for example, when the face is displayed, the character is displayed in a portion that becomes visible when the timing effect after the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 succeeds) Information that indicates whether the character is a normal character or a special character that indicates a jackpot), or information that is important for future games (such as the state of the game being executed or information on the number of balls that have been fired up to the present) Is drawn, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be increased.

  In addition, for example, the display corresponding to the desired number of entering balls (for example, the display of the sixth frame in FIG. 153) described in this control example is set so that the accuracy is about 50% (accuracy of less than 100%). , The number to be displayed may be selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from hindering a free game, and it is possible to configure the display effect of the third symbol display device 81 as a display (display for effect) having little effect on the number of payouts.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a method of making the accuracy of the correct answer less than 100%. For example, a plurality of numbers may be displayed in advance, and whether a "+" or "-" is inserted between them may be unknown (the four arithmetic operations are expected by the player), or a well-known sequence of numbers may be used. The number of the predetermined digit (for example, the number of digits below the decimal point of the pi) may be hidden and displayed as "the number of hidden numbers", or the number may be displayed only for a moment. You may let it.

  Next, the display contents of display example 2 (see FIG. 152) will be described with reference to FIG. The display content of the display example 2 corresponds to a case where shortage of discharge has not occurred immediately after the end of the start round Rpb (global discharge has been performed). FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the start of the effect round Rpt to the start of the post-effect game round Rpa in the display example 2.

  In FIG. 156, in the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), as in FIGS. 153 and 154, the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A) shows five enemies and A bombarding tank is shown. In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), the state where several enemies (two in FIG. 156) have fallen down by bombardment is shown, and in the third frame (display example shown in the middle right), The state after the enemy has fallen is illustrated, then the state after the production round Rpt is completed and the game round Rpa after the production is started is shown in the fourth frame (a display example shown on the lower right side).

  The switching of the display is executed based on the number of detections of the detection sensor 1240. That is, the display is switched such that every time two balls are detected, one enemy falls down. That is, the display of the second frame is a state where four balls have passed through the detection sensor 1240 in the effect round Rpt, and the display of the third frame is a state where ten balls have passed the detection sensor 1240 in the effect round Rpt. Each corresponds.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 156, the display of the small area Ds3 on the guidance display unit is maintained as "Aim at the right" (display indicating that continuation of launching. Launching instruction). Therefore, the player can proceed with the jackpot game without hesitation while continuing to launch.

  Next, the switching of the display of the V winning round Rv will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. The display of the V winning round Rv is switched to a different display depending on the jackpot type, which will be described later, but the display mode to be started is a common basic effect regardless of the jackpot type. That is, various factors that change depending on the jackpot type (the presence / absence of a remaining ball in the storage channel 1231, the round digestion time that changes accordingly, the presence / absence of ball discharge from the storage channel 1231 during the round game R, and the like) are determined. Control for switching the display is executed.

  FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the basic effect of the V winning round Rv. The basic effect is a display mode started at the same time as the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the first frame of the basic effect (display example shown on the upper left), in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87 (a)), a treasure chest hidden in a dent and five rocks (number 1 And tanks bombarding the rock. Until ten seconds have elapsed since the start of the V winning round Rv, the display of the first frame is maintained.

  In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), a situation is illustrated in which rocks are broken and a plurality of rocks (numbered 2 are added) fall into the formed space. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 157, three rocks fall after this. Switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is executed at a timing when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), a situation is illustrated in which the five rocks that have fallen (number 2 is added) accumulate again and block the depression. The display of the third frame is maintained for 10 seconds after the lapse of 10 seconds from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), a situation is illustrated in which rocks are broken and a plurality of rocks (numbered 3 are added) fall into the formed space. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 157, three rocks fall after this. Switching from the display of the third frame to the display of the fourth frame is executed at a timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the fifth frame (display example shown on the right side in the middle), a situation is illustrated in which the five rocks that have fallen (number 3 is added) accumulate again and close the depression. The display of the fifth frame is maintained for 10 seconds after 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), the treasure chest is enlarged, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in the present control example, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game). "Sorry" is displayed to indicate that no profit was obtained.

  Switching from the display of the fifth frame to the display of the sixth frame is executed at a timing when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv, and the display is maintained even during the interval immediately thereafter. Then, in the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A) after the end of the interval period, the display is switched to the prepared ending time display.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the display example of the present control example, the display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A) is performed for the second and third frames, the fourth and fifth frames, and It is common except for the number added to the rock. This makes it possible to reduce the number of images required to execute moving image display over the V winning round Rv.

  FIG. 158 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the V winning round Rv.

  In the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), a display similar to the basic effect described above in the first frame in FIG. 157 is illustrated. That is, in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87 (a)), a treasure chest hidden in the dent, five rocks (numbered 1 is added) closing the dent, and a tank that bombards the rock are illustrated.

  In the second frame (display example shown on the left side in the middle), a state where the rock is crushed is illustrated. In addition, the rock does not fall into the formed space, and the state where the dent is opened is maintained. Switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is performed by determining that a specified number (ten in the present control example) of the balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Be executed. That is, the display of the second frame is switched to the end timing of the V winning round Rv, and the display is maintained even immediately after the interval time.

  Note that the basic effect described with reference to FIG. 157 is continued until the display is switched to the second frame. It is not determined that a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) within a specified time (30 seconds in this control example) of the V winning round Rv. In this case, the display does not switch to the second frame, but switches from the basic effect to the display of the ending time ED.

  In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left), the treasure chest is expanded and opened, and the player gains a predetermined profit (in this control example, the ball passes through the specific area 4830, thereby completing the game after the big hit game ends). The letter “V” is displayed, indicating that the profit of shifting to the probability state has been obtained. For the purpose of adjusting to the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830, the display is switched to the third frame 1.0 seconds after the display is switched to the second frame.

  The display of the third frame is maintained until the end of the interval time, and when the display shifts to the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A), the display is switched to the display for the ending time prepared in advance.

  As described above, the timing of switching to the display of the second frame is unknown in the display example shown in FIG. 158, but the display of the third frame can be described as a display example in which the interval time is reliably reached.

  FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the V winning round Rv.

  In the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), a display similar to the basic effect described above in the first frame in FIG. 157 is illustrated. That is, in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87 (a)), a treasure chest hidden in the dent, five rocks (numbered 1 is added) closing the dent, and a tank that bombards the rock are illustrated.

  In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), a situation is illustrated in which rocks are broken and a plurality of rocks (numbered 2 are added) fall into the formed space. In FIG. 159, only two rocks are shown, but three rocks fall after this. Switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is performed in a short period of time when the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is closed (in this control example, less than 0.2 seconds; specifically, 0). (1 second).

  Note that the basic effect described with reference to FIG. 157 is continued until the display is switched to the second frame. Here, as will be described later, in the present control example, the first timing of switching to the closed state for a short time is before 10 seconds from the start of the V winning round Rv, so the second frame in FIG. Is switched before the switching timing in the basic effect (the switching timing to the display of the second frame in FIG. 157). Therefore, display switching without a sense of incongruity can be performed.

  Further, the timing at which the display is switched to the closed state for a short time is approximated to the timing at which the display is switched in the basic effect (for example, after 10 seconds or 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv, etc.), and it is performed at present. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the displayed display is the display of the basic effect or the display of the display example shown in FIG. 159. Thereby, during the V winning round Rv, a predetermined profit (in this control example, a profit of shifting to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game by passing the ball through the specific area 4830) can be obtained for the player. The game can be executed with the expectation that the game may be performed.

  In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), a situation is illustrated in which the five rocks that have fallen (number 2 is added) accumulate again and block the depression. The display of the third frame is maintained until the next time when the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is switched to the closed state. When the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the closed state for a short time while the display of the third frame is continued, the display is switched again to the display of the second frame (the number assigned to the rock increases by 1). That is, each time the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the closed state for a short time, the display of the second frame and the continuous display of the third frame are repeatedly switched.

  In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), the character “Moshiya” is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A). In FIG. 159, switching to the display of the fourth frame is switched from the display of the first frame or the third frame, and is controlled so as not to be switched from the display of the second frame.

  The switching to the display of the fourth frame is performed when the opening and closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is switched to the closed state for a long time (in this control example, a time of 0.2 seconds or more, specifically, 0.2 seconds). It is executed according to.

  In the fifth frame (display example shown on the middle right), a state in which the rock is broken is shown, as in the second frame in FIG. 158. In addition, the rock does not fall into the formed space, and the state where the dent is opened is maintained. In addition, a letter "V" flying toward the treasure chest is displayed. The character “V” is displayed so as to fly at a speed reaching the treasure chest one second after the timing of switching to the fourth frame (the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830).

  In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), the treasure chest is expanded and opened, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in the present control example, the ball passes through the specific area 4830, so that after the big hit game is over, The letter “V” is displayed, indicating that the profit of shifting to the probability state has been obtained. After the character “V” reaches the treasure box in the display of the fifth frame, the display is continuously shifted to the display of the sixth frame.

  Then, the display of the sixth frame is maintained until the end of the interval time, and when shifting to the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A), the display is switched to the display for the ending time prepared in advance.

  As described above, in the display example shown in FIG. 159, the timing at which the display is switched to the display of the second frame or the display of the fourth frame is defined by the operation pattern. Irrespective of the setting.

  This display is particularly effective in a jackpot type in which the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is determined regardless of the winning mode of the V winning round Rv (that is, determined based on the previous winning mode) as described later. Becomes That is, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 and the timing at which the treasure chest is opened can be matched, so that the effect can be improved.

  In the display examples described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159, the display example in which the basic effect is continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 157 is compared with the display examples shown in FIGS. Profits are lower. In other words, in the V winning round game Rv, the player continues the game while expecting the display to be switched from the basic effect.

  On the other hand, since the basic effect is displayed until the display is switched in common in FIGS. 157 to 159, even if the display is switched in any of the display examples in FIGS. It can be expected that the display can be switched from the basic effect. Therefore, even if the V winning round Rv ends as a result of the lapse of the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) (the round game R takes a relatively long time), the player can play the game. You can prevent getting tired of it.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c described above, a first hit type selection table 202b3, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3, At least an opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is provided.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b3 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b3. The first hit type selection table 202b3 is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type. It is stipulated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning and the first hit type selection table 202b3 are compared, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected. In FIG. 160 (b), the contents of the post-production game round selection table Ta, the start round selection table Tb, and the V winning prize round Rv whose contents are switched according to the selected jackpot type are also described.

  In the present control example, by providing a variation in the combination of the post-production game round selection table Ta, the start round selection table Tb, and the V winning round Rv, the player can determine the jackpot type during the jackpot game and expect to obtain The aim is to prevent the profits that can be made from being grasped in advance.

  That is, in the distribution of the special symbol 1, the first difference that can be grasped by the player is the interval time (difference in the start round selection table Tb) between the effect round Rpt and the post-effect game round Rpa. In the present control example, regardless of whether the first discharge mode Tb1 or the second discharge mode Tb2 is selected as the interval time, the distribution of the post-production game round selection table Ta and the V winning round Rv are similarly determined for each of them. The first hit type selection table 202b3 is configured to occur (with the same probability).

  Similarly, even if the player grasps the difference in the interval time immediately before the V winning round Rv (the after-production game round selection table Ta), whether the subsequent V winning round Rv is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player? Does not change, so that the player can execute the game while predicting the jackpot type until the V winning round Rv is being executed. As a result, the player can be drawn into the game as compared with a gaming machine whose jackpot type can be quickly grasped, and the concentration of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the "big hit Ua" is defined in association with the special symbol 1 when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9" ( (See 202b31 in FIG. 160 (b)). The “big hit Ua” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hits Ua", so if a special symbol 1 has been hit by a lottery, "big hits Ua" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  In the “big hit Ua”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to a high probability state (ST 80 times) of 80 time savings after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830, the specified number (with this control example) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv In this case, it is required to end the round game R by causing 10) balls to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the first discharge mode Ta1 (0. In the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, all the balls are discharged when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is configured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv. Therefore, in the big hit game of “big hit Ua”, the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is adjusted. In many cases, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 if the sphere cannot be formed.

  For the special symbol 1, “big hit Ub” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 24” (see 202b32 in FIG. 160B). ). This “big hit Ub” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit Ub”, so if a special pattern 1 lottery wins, “big hit Ub” is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  In the “big hit Ub”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds. When the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161 (a)) that is long closed during the round game R, the specified number (the number of pieces) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv is determined. In the control example, even if 10 balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv). Regardless of that, when the ball is closed for a long time during the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) so that the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to. Therefore, even if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not determined whether the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830.

  In addition, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of "25 to 34" in association with "big hit Va" (see 202b33 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This “big hit Va” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hits Va". Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the special symbol 1 lottery, the "big hits Va" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  In the “big hit Va”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state (ST 80 times) of 80 time savings after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  Since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 34 (see FIG. 161 (a))) in which only a short closing is performed during the round game R, V is required to pass the ball through the specific area 4830. In the winning round Rv, it is required that a specified number (ten in the present control example) of balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) within the opening period Tv to end the round game R. Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the first discharge mode Ta1 (0. In the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, all the balls are discharged when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is configured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv. Therefore, in the big hit game of “big hit Va”, the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is adjusted. In many cases, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 if the sphere cannot be formed.

  Also, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of "35 to 49", and the "big hit Vb" is associated and defined (see 202b34 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This "big hit Vb" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 15 counter values that are "big hits Vb", so if the special symbol 1 has a lottery, the "big hits Vb" is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  In the “big hit Vb”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit. If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161 (a)) that is long closed during the round game R, the specified number (the number of pieces) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv is determined. In the control example, even if 10 balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv). Regardless of that, when the ball is closed for a long time during the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) so that the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to. Therefore, even if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not determined whether the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830.

  For the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of “50 to 59”, and “big hit Wa” is associated and defined (see 202b35 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This "big hit Wa" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit Wa", so "big hit Wa" is determined when a big hit occurs in the special symbol 1 lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  In the “big hit Wa”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit. If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830, the specified number (with this control example) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv In this case, it is required to end the round game R by causing 10) balls to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the first discharge mode Ta1 (0. In the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, all the balls are discharged when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is configured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv. Therefore, in the big hit game of “big hit Wa”, the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is adjusted. In many cases, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 if the sphere cannot be formed.

  Also, for the special symbol 1, “big hit Wb” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C 2 in the range of “60 to 74” (see 202 b 36 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This “big hit Wb” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit Wb”, so if a special pattern 1 lottery wins, “big hit Wb” is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  In the “big hit Wb”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161 (a)) that is long closed during the round game R, the specified number (the number of pieces) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv is determined. In the control example, even if 10 balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv). Regardless of that, when the ball is closed for a long time during the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) so that the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to. Therefore, even if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not determined whether the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830.

  For the special symbol 1, “big hit Ya” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “75 to 84” (see 202b37 in FIG. 160B). ). The “big hit Ya” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit Ya", so if the special symbol 1 has a lottery, "big hit Ya" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  In the "big hit Ya", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  Since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 34 (see FIG. 161 (a))) in which only a short closing is performed during the round game R, V is required to pass the ball through the specific area 4830. In the winning round Rv, it is required that a specified number (ten in the present control example) of balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) within the opening period Tv to end the round game R. Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the first discharge mode Ta1 (0. In the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, all the balls are discharged when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is configured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv. Therefore, in the big hit game of “big hit Ya”, the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is adjusted. In many cases, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 if the sphere cannot be formed.

  For the special symbol 1, “big hit Yb” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “85 to 99” (see 202b38 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This “big hit Yb” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 15 counter values that are "big hit Yb", so if a special pattern 1 lottery wins, "big hit Yb" is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  In the “big hit Yb”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161 (a)) that is long closed during the round game R, the specified number (the number of pieces) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv is determined. In the control example, even if 10 balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv). Regardless of that, when the ball is closed for a long time during the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) so that the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to. Therefore, even if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not determined whether the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit q” in a range of “0 to 99” (entire range). This “big hit q” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since the counter value of “big hit q” is 100, “big hit q” is determined when the special symbol 2 has a big hit. The proportion is 100%.

  In the “big hit q”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit. If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830, the specified number (with this control example) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv In this case, it is required to end the round game R by causing 10) balls to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  In addition, since the discharge mode in the immediately preceding interval time is the third discharge mode Ta3 after the production, the V winning round regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (even if the ball is full). Rv can be started in a state where no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but in the special jackpot game of the special symbol 2, regardless of the number of balls in the post-production game round Rpa immediately before the V winning round Rv. Since the ball can be passed to the specific area 4830, the player can proceed with the jackpot game without stopping the launch of the ball (without adjusting the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231). . Therefore, the big hit of the special symbol 2 can progress the big hit game more smoothly than the big hit of the special symbol 1.

  As described above, in the present control example, the state is shifted to the high-probability state in which the player who wins in the special symbol 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the case in which the special symbol 1 lottery wins. It is configured to be able to smoothly advance the game for. Therefore, once the extended play mode (the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol time reduction state) is set, the ball is made to enter the second entrance 640 by right-handing, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed. Is easily executed and the jackpot game is easily repeated, and the digestion speed of the jackpot game can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for one purpose of shifting to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the detailed contents of the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e3. The opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) are stored for each scenario type, and are stored in the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3. The open / close plate 1300 is operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game using the information that has been set.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3, operation scenarios 31 to 34 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 31 is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 31, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls. Control is performed so as to return to the state (the state in which the open / close plate 1300 is closed).

  The operation scenario 32 is an operation scenario of a maximum of 10 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 32, even before the elapse of 10 seconds, the detection sensor 1240 detects the specified number of balls (10 in this control example), and the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  The operation scenario 33 includes, as the scenario contents, “open (open state) 9.0 seconds → closed (closed state, short-closed) 0.1 seconds → open (open state) 5.0 seconds in the open / close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6). → Closed (closed state, long-closed) 0.2 seconds → Opened (open state) 4.0 seconds → Closed (closed state, long-closed) 0.2 seconds → Opened (open state) 4.0 seconds → closed (Closed state, long-closed) 0.2 seconds loop "is set, and the operation scenario is a maximum of 30 seconds.

  In the operation scenario 33, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in the present control example), and the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In the operation scenario 33, unlike the above-described operation scenarios 31 and 32, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state, long-closed), so that the storage channel is opened. The ball remaining at 1231 can be discharged. Therefore, the sphere can be allowed to pass through the specific area 4830, and the sphere can be newly entered into the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) by eliminating the fullness of the storage channel 1231.

  That is, in a situation where the round game R is started from the state where the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is full, and the round game R is continued, the round game R wastes the remaining time. In order to suppress the sphere, it is desirable to stop firing the sphere. On the other hand, this playability gives the player time, which may reduce the concentration of the player and reduce the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in the operation scenario 33, even when the storage channel 1231 is full, each time the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (closed state, long-closed), one ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 one by one. Therefore, a new ball can be made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). In this case, it is preferable to restart the launch of an appropriate number of balls from the aspect of the number of payout prize balls and the rapid digestion of the round game R. That is, according to the present control example, even after the storage channel 1231 is full, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (closed state, long-closed) to enter the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). Since the ball can be restarted, it is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and concentration of the ball to fire.

  As described above, the closing of the opening and closing plate 1300 is related to the profit of the player in two points, that is, the possibility of the ball passing into the specific area 4830 and the new entry of the ball into the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, the player's attention to the closing (operation) of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be improved.

  The operation scenario 34 includes, as the scenario contents, “open (open state) 9.0 seconds → closed (closed state, short-closed) 0.1 seconds → open (open state) 5.1 seconds in the open / close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6). → Closed (closed, short-closed) 0.1 seconds → Opened (opened) 4.1 seconds → Closed (closed, short-closed) 0.1 seconds → Opened (opened) 4.1 seconds → closed (Closed state, short-closed) 0.1 seconds is a loop, and the operation scenario is a maximum of 30 seconds.

  In the operation scenario 34, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 34, unlike the above-described operation scenario 33, closing after the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened (open state) is configured only by closing (closed state, short closing). Therefore, as in the operation scenario 33, the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the open state (open state), but the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are not discharged. Therefore, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 at the timing of closing (closed state, short closing) of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the fullness of the storage channel 1231 cannot be eliminated.

  That is, in the operation scenario 34, while maintaining the effect of the operation scenario 33 in which attention is paid to the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, even if the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed, the profit obtained by the player does not change. It can be maintained (if the storage channel 1231 is full, it remains full after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, and the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830).

  The closing timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 is common to the operation scenario 33 and the operation scenario 34, and the difference in the operation length is 0.1 second, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated in either the operation scenario 33 or the operation scenario 34. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the player is operating.

  Therefore, when the player resumes firing the ball in accordance with the closing of the opening / closing plate 1300, additional profit can be obtained as expected (in the case of the operation scenario 33), and most of the fired ball becomes a prize ball. The case where they are not linked (in the case of the operation scenario 34) can be configured.

  In this way, by storing the operation scenarios separately based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, the profit given to the player by the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 currently being executed can be reduced by the main control device. 110 can be easily determined.

  FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate operation scenario table 202f3. The opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is provided with information indicating which of the predetermined scenario types corresponds to which jackpot type and which round game R.

  The MPU of the main control device 110 reads information corresponding to the contents specified in the opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 from the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 and executes opening / closing when controlling the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. The plate 1300 is moving.

  The opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is configured so that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on a combination of the jackpot type and the number of the round game R. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the open / close plate 1300 is movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

<Main controller flow>
Next, details of the RAM 203 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 162, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a described in the first control example (see FIG. 101). Symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probable change counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, exit flag 203k, remaining ball Timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p, closing flag 203q, count start flag 203qa, closing counter 203r, V flag 203s, V winning effective counter 203t, notification counter 203u, winning number counter 203w, discharging number counter 203x , Addition of the other memory area 203Z, has not reached flag 203Qb, winning after counter 203Wa, at least.

  The unreached flag 203qb is a flag for determining whether or not a ball is disposed at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. ON and OFF are switched based on the relationship with the time required to flow down. When the unreached flag 203qb is on, a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231, and when the unreached flag 203qb is off, no sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

  The post-winning counter 203wa is a counter that measures the time since the last ball entered the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) in a predetermined round (in this control example, the V winning round Rv). That is, it is set to be reset each time a ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) is detected.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the ROM 222 has at least the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a described above in the first control example and the open / close plate operation scenario 222b3.

  The opening / closing plate operation scenario 222b3 is provided for the operation status of the opening / closing plate 1300 controlled by the main control device 110 on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area in which the information stored in the opened / closed plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 and the opened / closed plate operation scenario table 202f3 is stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 in this control example. The RAM 223 stores a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c, and a normal symbol retaining ball number in the same manner as described above in the first control example. Counter 223d, fluctuation start flag 223e, stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probable change state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, an operation flag 223p, an effect temporary storage area 223r, a first operation effect flag 223wa, a second operation effect flag 223wb, a first input flag 223wc, a second input flag 223wd, Effect executing flag 223x and pressing period information storage area 2 3y, and at least a memory area 223z. In addition, the attention effect timer 223ga, the effect switch flag 223gb, the V winning round timer 223gc, the skip flag 223gd, the unreached effect flag 223qb, At least a first effect start flag 223ya, a second effect start flag 223yb, a third effect start flag 223yc, and a fourth effect start flag 223yd are provided.

  The attention effect timer 223ga is a timer for measuring the elapse of a predetermined round (in this control example, the effect round Rpt), and is used for setting a display effect to be executed.

  The effect switching flag 223gb is a flag for preventing a malfunction that is updated to another effect after a display effect with an operation effect, which is executed in a predetermined round (in the present control example, the effect round Rpt), is set. It is. If the effect switch flag 223gb is on, it indicates that the display effect to be executed is determined, and if the effect switch flag 223gb is off, it indicates that the display effect to be executed is not determined.

  The V winning round timer 223gc is a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  The skip flag 223gd is a flag for preventing the display from being erroneously updated after the display is updated.

  The unreached effect flag 223qb is a flag that is controlled to be turned on and off in conjunction with the on / off switching of the unreached flag 203qb in the RAM 203. Therefore, when the unreached effect flag 223qb is on, a ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231, and when the unreached flag 223qb is off, no ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. .

  The first effect start flag 223ya to the fourth effect start flag 223yd are on / off switching controlled in conjunction with the progress of the big hit game.

  The first effect start flag 223ya is a flag that is switched according to the progress status of the jackpot game, and when turned on, before the end of the start round Rpb (the third round in the present control example) from the start of the jackpot game (effect round Rpt). If it is off, it indicates that it is after the end of the start round Rpb (after the start of the effect round Rpt).

  The second effect start flag 223yb is a flag that can be switched in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game. If the second effect start flag 223yb is on, after the start round Rpb (the third round in the present control example) ends (after the start of the effect round Rpt). This indicates before the end of the effect round Rpt (in the present control example, the fourth round) (before the start of the game round Rv after the effect), and if OFF, before the end of the start round Rpb (before the start of the effect round Rpt) ) Or after the end of the effect round Rpt (after the start of the after-effect game round Rpa).

  The third effect start flag 223yc is a flag that can be switched according to the progress state of the jackpot game, and if ON, after the end of the effect round Rpt (the fourth round in the present control example) (after the start of the post-effect game round Rpa). ) Indicates before the end of the game round Rpa after the effect (the fifth round in the present control example) (before the start of the V winning round Rv), and if OFF, before the end of the effect round Rpt (the game after the effect). This is before the start of the round Rpa) or after the end of the post-production game round Rpa (after the start of the V winning round Rv).

  The fourth effect start flag 223yd is a flag that can be switched in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game, and if ON, after the end of the post-effect game round Rpa (the fifth round in the present control example) (start of the V winning round Rv). After), before the end of the V winning round Rv (the sixth round in the present control example) (before the start of the ending time), and when off, before the end of the post-production game round Rpa (the V winning round). Rv), or after the end of the V winning round Rv (after the end of the ending time).

<Main controller flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a description will be given of a main process in the fourth control example executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process described above in the first control example. FIG. 164 is a flowchart illustrating a main process in the fourth control example executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process. In this control example, the jackpot control process S1004 is changed to S4004, the V winning process S1009 is changed to S4009, and the storage control process is different from the main process (FIG. 117) of the first control example. This is common except that S1008 is deleted. Therefore, the same portions as those in the main process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Only different portions will be described.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S4004) in this control example. The jackpot control process (S4004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 164). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed or the first specification is performed. This is processing for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 1000a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

  In the jackpot control process (S4004) in the present control example, the notification process (S1111) is omitted from the jackpot control process (S1004) in the first control example (the role of the audio lamp control device 113 whose role will be described later). 169), and is the same as the jackpot control process (S1004) except that the winning process (S1112) is changed to the winning process (S4112). Therefore, the same portions as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the winning process (S4112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S4112) in the fourth control example. This prize processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 164), similarly to the prize processing (FIG. 123) in the first control example, and the first specific winning opening ( This is a process for closing the (large open port) 1000a and setting condition values (set values and initial values) for determining whether or not the specific area 4830 has passed normally after the close.

  The prize-winning process (S4112) in the fourth control example is the same as the prize-winning process (S1112) in the first control example, after executing the process of S1278 and then executing the set value selection setting process (S4290). The only difference is that the set value is set (S4297), and the rest is the same. Therefore, the set value selection setting process (S4290) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the setting value selection setting processing (S4290). In the set value selection setting process (S4290), a process of selecting a range of the set value set in the V winning effective counter 203t according to the situation is executed.

  First, the outline of the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example will be described. The setting value selection setting process (S4290) is a process provided to cope with a difference from the first control example.

  First, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example in which the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 is limited at the start of the round game R, the discharge from the storage channel 1231 in the middle of the V winning round Rv is performed. Since the discharge of the balls occurs at predetermined intervals, the balls may be arranged in the storage channel 1231 in a separated state at the end of the round game R. In other words, the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is started before the sphere that has passed through the detection sensor 1240 collides with the sphere staying downstream of the storage channel 1231 (a complete ball is formed). Could be done.

  Also, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, when a ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the middle of the V winning round Rv, regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, A predetermined number (one in this control example) of balls is ejected.

  That is, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, it is necessary to determine the set value in consideration of the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage channel 1231 and the timing at which the closing is performed. The process of selecting a value is the set value selection setting process (S4290).

  Next, the details of the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example will be described. In the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example, it is determined in the process of S4290 whether or not the game is closed at the end of the round game R (S4291). If the closing is not the closing at the end of the round game R (S4291: No), it is determined from the operation scenario currently being executed whether the closing is a long closing (0.2 second closing) (S4292).

  In the process of S4292, when it is determined that the ball is not long-closed (S4292: No), the ball is closed shortly (closed for 0.1 second), so that the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the present processing is ended, and the flow returns to the winning processing S4112.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4292, when it is determined that the ball is long-closed (S4292: Yes), in order to determine whether or not the ball is parked at the lower end of the storage channel 1231, the lowermost stream remaining in the storage channel 1231 is determined. It is determined whether or not 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the sphere passed through the detection sensor 1240 (S4293).

  This determination is made, for example, by providing a plurality of (for example, 10) counters for starting time counting when a ball entering the detection sensor 1240 is detected, similarly to the counter 203wa after winning, and before the time counting, the detection sensor 1240 is provided. Based on the ball entering, one of the counters is controlled to start timing (i.e., since the timing is sequentially started, the value to be counted will be different for all counters), and the timing is started. Thereafter, the counter is controlled so as to reset the clock every time 10 balls enter the detection sensor 1240. On this premise, the value of the counter corresponding to the most downstream sphere among the spheres remaining inside the storage channel 1231 that is grasped from the detection timing of the detection sensor 1240 and the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 based on the operation scenario It is executed by confirming.

  In the process of S4293, when it is determined that 2.0 seconds or more have elapsed (S4293: No), the lower limit of the numerical range described in the first control example is set as the number of stored balls = 1, and the range of the set value is selected. I do. That is, a range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × 1) seconds or more (S4294), and the process shifts to S4299. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4293, when it is determined that 2.0 seconds have not elapsed (S4293: Yes), the non-arrival flag 203qb is set to ON (S4295), the process ends, and the winning process S4112 is executed. Return.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4291 that the game has been closed at the end of the round game R (S4291: Yes), the value of the post-winning counter 203wa is set to a predetermined determination formula (2- (number of stored items) × 0.2). ) Is determined (S4296).

  The process of S4296 is a process for determining whether the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 forms a ball with the whole sphere, or whether there is a part that is distant even in part.

  In the process of S4296, when it is determined that the value of the post-winning counter 203wa is not smaller than a predetermined determination formula (2- (storage number) × 0.2) (S4296: No), the inside of the storage channel 1231 is determined. Indicates that the sphere constitutes an open ball in the entire sphere, so that the range of the set value is selected in the numerical range described in the first control example. That is, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) or more (S4297), and the process proceeds to S4299. Transition.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4296, if it is determined that the value of the post-winning counter 203wa is smaller than a predetermined determination formula (2- (number of stored items) × 0.2) (S4296: Yes), the storage channel Since there is an interval (separation) between the balls inside the 1231, it is inappropriate to select a range of the set value from the stored number. Therefore, the lower limit of the set value is set as the time when the ball that last passed the detection sensor 1240 reaches the specific area 4830. That is, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected in a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3- (3-value of post-prize counter 203wa) = value of post-prize counter 203wa) or more. Then, the flow shifts to the processing of S4299.

  In the above equation, (3-value of the post-winning counter 203wa) is a period during which the ball passes through the storage channel 1231 (2.0 seconds in the present control example) and the communication path 4810 from the outlet 1150. From “3” which is the sum of the period during which the ball passes (1.0 second in the present control example), the current position of the ball that has finally passed the detection sensor 1240 is subtracted by the counter 203wa after winning, and the ball is connected to the communication path 4810. Is a part where a period until the specified area 4830 is reached after passing through is calculated.

  In the process of S4299, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t selected in any of S4294, S4297 or S4298 is set. Thereafter, the present processing is ended, and the flow returns to the winning processing S4112.

  Returning to FIG. In the present control example, the V winning process (S4009) is changed from the first control example. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example. This V winning process (S4009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 164), similarly to the V winning process (FIG. 129) in the first control example, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. This is a process for controlling to monitor the flow of the ball after the ball has flown.

  The V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example is different from the V winning process (S1009) in the first control example in the process in S1501 after the count start flag 203qa is determined to be off. Only the difference is (S1501: No), and the others are the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

  First, an outline of changes in the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example from the first control example will be described. First, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, the opening / closing plate 1300 is controlled to be able to be closed (shortly closed) in such a manner that the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 does not occur. The response is. Second, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, a case may occur in which a ball can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the V winning round Rv. At this time, the ball is discharged. Whether this is determined by the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage channel 1231 (whether or not the spheres are arranged at the lower end) is dealt with. Third, since the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed during the V winning round Rv and the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed at the end of the V winning round Rv, a different predetermined value is set to the closing counter 203r. It corresponds to.

  Next, the details of the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example will be described. In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). If it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is ON (S1501: Yes), the subsequent processing is the same as in the first control example, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether the close flag 203q is on (S1502).

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the close flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), the process proceeds to S4526.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is ON (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether the current closing is a closing (short closing) that does not discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 (S4521).

  In the process of S4521, if it is determined that the closing is a closing (short closing) that does not discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 (S4521: Yes), the closing flag 203q is set to off (S4522), and the process of S4526 is performed. Move to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4521, the closing is not a closing (short closing) that does not discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 (that is, the closing is a closing that discharges the ball (long closing or closing at the end of the round game R)). ) (S4521: No), it is determined whether the closing is a closing (long closing) in the middle of the V winning round Rv (S4523).

  In the process of S4523, when it is determined that the closing is a closing (long closing) in the middle of the V winning round Rv (S4523: Yes), it is determined whether the unreached flag 203qb is on (S4524).

  In the process of S4524, when it is determined that the unreached flag 203qb is ON, it indicates that the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the unreached flag 203qb is set to OFF (S4525), and the closing flag is set. 203q is set to off (S4522), and the flow shifts to the process of S4526.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4523 that the closing is the closing at the end of the V winning round Rv (S4523: No), and in the processing of S4524, the unreached flag 203qb is not on (that is, off). When it is determined that there is (YES) (S4524: No), the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S4528), a different numerical value is selected from the closed contents, and a predetermined value of the closed counter 203r is set (S4529). finish.

  In the process of S4529, a numerical value according to the closing time is selected. That is, 0.1 second is selected when the closing is short, 0.2 second when the closing is long, and the interval time immediately after the closing at the end of the round game R is selected. In the present control example, if normal, the process of S4529 is not executed at the time of short closing, but if the process of S4529 is executed due to some problem (such as generation of noise), the above-described process is performed. Then, a numerical value is selected for the closing counter 203r.

  In the process of S4526, it is determined whether the sphere has passed the specific area 4830 (S4526). Since S4526 is a process executed when the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 in a normal game. Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S4526 that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 (S4526: Yes), it is expected that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 illegally, and an error command is set (S4527). Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the sphere did not pass through the specific area 4830 in the processing of S4526 (S4526: No), the present processing ends.

  Note that the control after the error command is set is the same as the content described in the first control example (the processing of S1515 in etc.), and thus the description is omitted here.

<Control of audio ramp control device>
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, in the present control example, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the main processing in the present control example is different from the main processing in the first control example in that the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) is omitted and the command determination processing (S4111). Is different from that of the first control example in that it is mainly different from the first embodiment in that the effect is changed and the effect switching process S4701 is added after the storage state monitoring process S2113. Are omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  Next, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination processing (S4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  The command determination process (S4111) is different from the command determination process (S2111) in the first control example only in that the hit-related process (S2221) is changed to the hit-related process 2 (S4221). Are identical.

  FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 2 (S4221). The hit-related processing 2 (S4221) is different from the hit-related processing (S2221) in the first control example in that the effect start flag setting processing (S4301) is executed after the round number command is received. The point that the bonus jackpot effect processing (S2505) shifted after receiving is changed to the processing of S4505 (processing of setting a display round number command corresponding to the received round number), and after the jackpot ending command is received The only difference is that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set off (S4509), and the other points are the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first control example, and description thereof is omitted.

  Every time the round number command is received in the processing of S2503, the effect start flag setting processing (S4301) is executed, the display round number command is set in the processing of S4505, and the command output processing (S2102, see FIG. 169) is performed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this output, the display control device 114 can grasp the number of rounds to be executed next.

  The effect start flag setting process (S4301) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an effect start flag setting process (S4301) in the fourth control example. This effect start flag setting process (S4301) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 169), and sets a flag for the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the contents of the currently executed round game R. It is.

  In the effect start flag setting process (S4301) in the fourth control example, it is determined whether the started round is round 1 in the process of S4301 (S4302).

  If it is determined that the started round is the round 1 (S4302: Yes), the first effect start flag 223ya is set to ON (S4303), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the started round is not the round 1 (S4302: No), it is determined whether the started round is the effect round Rpt (round 4 in the present control example) (S4304).

  In the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the started round is the production round Rpt (S4304: Yes), the first production start flag 223ya is set to off (S4305), and the second production start flag 223yb is set to on. (S4306), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the started round is not the rendering round Rpt (S4304: No), it is determined whether the started round is the post-production gaming round Rpa (round 5 in the present control example). (S4307).

  In the process of S4307, when it is determined that the started round is the post-production game round Rpa (S4307: Yes), the second production start flag 223yb is set off (S4308), and the third production start flag 223yc is turned on. This is set (S4309), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4307, if it is determined that the started round is not the post-production game round Rpa (S4307: No), it is determined whether the started round is the V winning round Rv (round 6 in the present control example). (S4310).

  In the processing of S4310, when it is determined that the started round is the V winning round Rv (S4310: Yes), the third effect start flag 223yc is set to off (S4311), and the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to on. (S4312), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4310, when it is determined that the started round is not the V winning round Rv (S4310: No), the process ends as it is. After receiving the jackpot ending command (S2508), the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to off in the process of S4509. As described above, in the present control example, the currently executing round can be determined based on the states of the first effect start flag 223ya to the fourth effect start flag 223yd.

  Next, the effect switching process (S4701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the effect switching process (S4701). This effect switching process (S4701) is a process of a main process (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing an effect that changes according to the progress of the jackpot game. is there.

  In addition, since this processing includes processing for detecting a winning state of a ball to the first variable winning device 4000, the main processing is configured to be executed in a short cycle (within 1 ms). Thus, the setting for detecting the winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 4000 can be performed without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 173, in the effect switching process, in the process of S4701, it is determined whether the second effect start flag 223yb is on (S4702). If the second effect start flag 223yb is on (S4702: Yes), the effect round display mode setting process (S4703) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, the effect round display mode setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (S4703). FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect round display mode setting process (S4703). In the effect round display mode setting process (S4703), first, it is determined whether the process is the first process after the start of the jackpot (S4720). If the process is the first process (S4720: Yes), the basic effect prepared in advance Is displayed (S4721), and if it is not the first processing (S4720: No), the processing of S4721 is skipped, and the detection sensor is started at the start of the currently performed effect round Rpt. It is determined whether or not a value obtained by subtracting the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the 1240 is 1 or more (S4722).

  In addition, in the process of S4720, various methods can be considered as a method of determining that it is the first time. For example, a process of determining whether the value of the predetermined counter is 1 or more is provided as the process of S4720, a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4720 and S4721, and a predetermined counter is provided at the start of the jackpot game. May be set to 1.

  Note that, in the present control example, the basic effect in the process of S4721 is the display shown in the first frame (display example on the upper left side) in FIGS. 153, 154, and 156.

  In the process of S4722, when it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S4722: No), the effect is produced. This means that the storage channel 1231 was empty at the start of the round Rpt (there was no remaining ball), and the display number erasure is set so that the number display is erased in the game round Rpa after production. The command is set (S4723), and the process ends.

  When the display number erasure command is set, in this control example, a display in which the notification of the number is intentionally omitted (see the display example of the fourth frame (lower right side) in FIG. 156) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4722, when it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 is 1 or more (S4722: Yes), at the start of the effect round Rpt Means that a residual ball has occurred in the storage channel 1231, and the flow shifts to S4724.

  In S4724, it is determined whether or not the effect switching flag 223gb is on (S4724). If it is determined that the effect switching flag 223gb is not on (ie, off) (S4724: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. Is determined (S4725).

  In the process of S4725, if it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S4725: No), the attention effect timer 223ga is set to 1 in order to check the lapse of time from the start of the effect round Rpt. The processing is added and updated (S4726), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4725 that the storage upper limit flag 223m is ON (S4725: Yes), the attention effect setting processing (S4727) is executed.

  Here, the attention effect setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 175 (S4727). FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the attention effect setting process (S4727). In the attention effect setting process (S4727), first, the difference between the specified time of the effect round Rpt (30 seconds in this control example) and the value of the attention effect timer 223ga is set as a determination numerical value (S4740). It is determined whether the determination value is included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741).

  In the process of S4741, if it is determined that the determination value is included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741: Yes), the attention effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155) is used as the attention effect. , “Long moving image” (easy) is selected, and the present process is terminated (S4742).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4741 that the determination value is not included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741: No), the determination value is included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds. It is determined whether it is (S4743).

  In the process of S4743, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4743: Yes), the attention effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155) is used as the attention effect. , “Short video” (difficult) is selected, and the present process ends (S4744).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4743, when it is determined that the determination value is not included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4743: No), it means that the determination value is less than 5 seconds. Therefore, “still image” (extremely difficult) is selected as the noted effect from the noted effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155), and the process ends (S4745).

  Returning to FIG. After the processing of S4727, the display effect command for display of the selected target effect is set (S4728), the effect switch flag 223gb is set to ON, and the present process ends (S4729).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4724 that the effect switching flag 223gb is off (S4724: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S4730).

  In the process of S4730, if it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S4730: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4730, if it is determined that the operation flag 223p is not on (that is, it is off) (S4730: No), an operation determination process is executed, and this process ends (S4731).

  Here, the operation determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (S4731). FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation determination processing (S4731). In the operation determination process (S4731), first, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the operation waiting period (S4761).

  If it is determined in the process of S4761 that the operation is in the operation waiting period (before the start of the interval between rounds in this control example) (S4761: Yes), it is determined whether the operation of the operation button 300 is detected (S4762). ).

  If it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 has not been detected in the processing of S4762 (S4762: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4762 that the operation of the operation button 300 has been detected (S4762: Yes), it is determined whether the operation timing is appropriate (S4763). Here, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not the operation timing is appropriate based on whether or not the operation is performed (appropriate) or not (inappropriate) at the timing when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display unit 717 ( 153 and 154).

  If it is determined that the operation timing is appropriate (S4763: Yes), display commands for a success display (see the display example of the fourth frame in FIG. 153) and an explicit display (see the display example of the fifth frame in FIG. 153) Is set (S4764), and a number explicit display (refer to the display example of the sixth frame in FIG. 153, see FIG. 155 in the present control example) is set as the display of the next round (game round Rpa after production) (S4765). The operation flag 223p is set to ON, and the process ends (S4766).

  Note that the number of displayed in the explicit display depends on the mode of the post-production game round selection table Ta, and thus indirectly corresponds to the jackpot type (see FIG. 160 (b)). That is, in the big hit type of the first discharge mode Ta1 (0.4 seconds) after the effect, since the number of balls to be discharged is two, "2" is displayed when the explicit display is displayed. . In addition, in the case of the big hit type in the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, since the number of balls to be discharged is nine, "9" is displayed when the explicit display is displayed. In addition, in the case of the big hit type of the third discharge mode Ta3 (2.0 seconds) after the effect, since the number of balls to be discharged is ten, "10" is displayed when the explicit display is displayed.

  In addition, when the player is likely to obtain an excessive profit by notifying an appropriate number every time in the explicit display, the probability that the above-described number is displayed as the explicit display may be reduced (the reliability of the number). May be reduced). Thereby, the explicit display can be made a display for reference only.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4763, when it is determined that the operation timing is inappropriate (S4763: No), a failure display (see the display example of the fourth frame in FIG. 154) and an unknown display (the fifth frame in FIG. 154) A display command is set (refer to a display example) (S4767), and the number unknown display is displayed as a display of the next round (a game round Rpa after production Rpa) (in this control example, refer to the display example of the sixth frame in FIG. 154, see FIG. 155). ) Is set (S4768), the operation flag 223p is set to ON, and the process ends (S4766).

  If it is determined in the process of S4761 that the operation is not in the operation waiting period (S4761: No), it means that the operation button 300 has not been operated until the start of the interval period, and the process proceeds to S4768. Then, the process of S4766 is executed, and this process ends.

  In the above control flow, for the sake of convenience, control is performed so that the operation flag 223p is set to ON even when the operation button 300 is not operated (when the operation waiting period has elapsed). Since this is after the time during which the player can operate the 300, the player does not suffer any disadvantage by this control.

  The effect switching flag 223gb and the operation flag 223p set in the effect round Rpt are turned off at the timing when the currently executing big hit game ends, and the attention effect timer 223ga ends the currently executing big hit game. Reset at the timing.

  Returning to FIG. 173, the description will be continued. In the process of S4702, when the second effect start flag 223yb is not on (that is, off) (S4702: No), it is determined whether the third effect start flag 223yc is on (S4704).

  In the processing of S4704, when it is determined that the third production start flag 223yc is ON (S4704: Yes), a display command based on the setting in the immediately preceding round game R (production round Rpt) is set, and this processing is performed. The process ends (S4705).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4704, when it is determined that the third effect start flag 223yc is not on (that is, it is off) (S4704: No), it is determined whether the fourth effect start flag 223yd is on (S4706). ).

  In the process of S4706, when it is determined that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is on (S4706: Yes), the V display setting process (S4707) is executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4706, if it is determined that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4706: No), the process ends as it is.

  The V display setting process (S4707) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V display setting processing (S4707). In the V display setting processing (S4707), first, it is determined whether the current processing is the first processing after starting the current big hit (S4781), and when it is determined that the processing is the first processing (S4782: Yes), the display for display prepared in advance is performed. The basic effect command is set (S4782), the loading of the display material is set (S4783), and the flow shifts to the process of S4784.

  In the process of S4781, various methods are conceivable as a method of determining that it is the first time. For example, a process of determining whether the value of a predetermined counter is 1 or more is provided as the process of S4781, a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4781 and S4782, and a predetermined counter is provided at the start of the big hit game. May be set to 1.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4781 that the process is not the first process (S4781: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S4784.

  In addition, in the present control example, a predetermined moving image is displayed on the third symbol display device by the setting of the display basic effect command in the processing of S4782 (the table of the first frame which is a common display in FIGS. 157 to 159). See example).

  The necessary materials in the processing of S4783 include various display materials (for example, display of broken rock (second frame in FIG. 158) that can be switched at a predetermined timing from the basic effect (see FIG. 157), (The third frame in FIG. 158), the display for V preparation (the fourth frame and the fifth frame in FIG. 159), and the like.

  In the processing of S4784, the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is incremented by 1 and updated (S4784), and the opening / closing pattern of the V winning round Rv is determined from the type of big hit (S4785). That is, in the V winning round Rv, it is determined whether or not the big hit type in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed halfway.

  If it is determined in the V winning round Rv that the jackpot type does not cause the closing of the opening / closing plate 1300 (S4785: Yes), it is determined whether a ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv. Is done.

  Various methods are used to determine whether a ball remains inside the storage channel 1231. In this control example, the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (no remaining ball) Yes).

  If it is determined that a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv (S4786: Yes), the V winning round Rv ends after a specified time (30 seconds in this control example). That is, the sphere cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the basic effect is continued (S4787), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4786 that there is no remaining ball in the storage channel 1231 (there is no sky) (S4786: No), it is determined whether the skip flag 223gd is on (S4788).

  If it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4788: No), 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the V winning round Rv based on the value of the V winning round timer 223gc. It is determined whether it is (S4789).

  Note that the numerical value of 5 seconds is set as the number of seconds in which the probability of winning the specified number (10 in this control example) is low, and can be changed according to the situation.

  If it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the V winning round Rv (S4789: Yes), a display command for displaying broken rocks (see the display example of the second frame in FIG. 158) is set (S4790). , To S4792.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv (S4789: No), it is determined whether a specified number (ten in this control example) of the balls have entered the detection sensor 1240. It is determined (S4791).

  If it is determined in step S4791 that a specified number of balls have hit the detection sensor 1240 (S4791: Yes), the flow shifts to steps S4790 and S4792.

  In the process of S4792, the skip flag 223gd is set to ON (S4792), and the flow shifts to the process of S4793. Also, in the process of S4788, when it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is ON (S4788: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S4793.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4791 that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4791: No), the flow directly proceeds to the processing of S4793.

  In the process of S4793, it is determined whether the sphere has passed the specific area 4830 (S4793). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4793: Yes), a display command for displaying that a V prize has been given (see the display example of the third frame in FIG. 158 in this control example) is issued. This is set, and this processing ends (S4794). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4793 that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S4793: No), this processing ends as it is.

  The sphere detected to pass through the specific area 4830 in the process of S4793 is a sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 after the start of the V winning round Rv. That is, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the V winning round Rv passes through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4785, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 closes halfway in the V winning round Rv (S4785: No), the display switching process for halfway closing (S4795) is executed, and this process is executed. To end.

  With reference to FIG. 178, the halfway display switching process (S4795) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the halfway display switching process (S4795). In the halfway display switching process (S4795), first, it is determined whether the skip flag 223gd is on (S4801).

  If it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), then it is determined whether the specified number (ten in this control example) of the balls have entered the detection sensor 1240. It is determined (S4802).

  When it is determined that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4802: No), the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is referred to, and the ball is short-closed (0.1 seconds in the present control example). It is determined whether or not the timing is such that the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 (closed state) (S4803).

  Note that the timing is determined so that the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the operation timing of the open / close plate 1300 in the currently executing big hit game using the open / close plate operation scenario 222b3 (see FIG. 163) provided in the ROM 222. Therefore, it can be easily performed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4803 that it is the timing at which the short closing occurs (S4803: Yes), a gassing effect display command is set (S4804), and the processing shifts to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4803 that it is not the timing when the short closing will occur (S4803: No), the process directly proceeds to the processing of S4805.

  In the present control example, the display example of the second frame and the third frame shown in FIG. 159 is such that the display changes from the immediately preceding display and then returns to the original display. Is done.

  In the processing of S4805, referring to the value of the V prize round timer 223gc, it is a timing at which a long close (close for 0.2 seconds in this control example, a close for discharging the ball from the storage channel 1231) occurs. It is determined whether it is (S4805). If it is determined that it is not the time when the long closing will occur (S4805: No), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the time when the long closing occurs (S4805: Yes), it is determined whether or not a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806). In the present control example, if the unreached effect flag 223qb is on, it is determined that a ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. If the unreached effect flag 223qb is off, a ball is positioned at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. Can be determined that is not arranged.

  If it is determined that no ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806: No), no ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231, so that a gash effect display command is set and the process is terminated ( S4807). Note that, as the gaseous effect, an effect similar to the above-described effect is executed in the processing of S4804.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4806 that a ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806: Yes), a V preparation effect display command is set (S4808), and the skipping flag 223gd is turned on. Is set (S4809), and the flow shifts to the process in S4812.

  If it is determined in step S4801 that the skip flag 223gd is ON (S4801: Yes), the process directly proceeds to step S4812. Also, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the specified number (ten in this control example) of the balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4810.

  In the process of S4810, when it is determined that the process is the first process (S4810: Yes), the process proceeds to S4811 and then to S4812. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the first process (S4810: No), the process directly proceeds to S4812.

  Note that in the process of S4810, various methods can be considered as a method of determining that it is the first time. For example, a process of determining whether the value of a predetermined counter is 1 or more is provided as the process of S4810, a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4810 and S4811, and a predetermined counter is set at the start of the jackpot game. May be set to 1.

  In the process of S4811, a display command for displaying a broken rock (see the display example of the second frame in FIG. 158) is set (S4811), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S4812. In the process of S4812, it is determined whether the sphere has passed the specific area 4830 (S4812). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4812: Yes), a display notifying that a V winning has been made (in the present control example, the display example of the third frame in FIG. 158 or the sixth frame in FIG. 159) A display command to perform the display process is set, and the process ends (S4813). On the other hand, in the process of S4812, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S4812: No), the process ends as it is.

  In this control example, the V preparation effect is a display that informs that a V prize has been won as shown in the display example of the fourth and fifth frames in FIG. 159 (see the display example of the sixth frame in FIG. 159). ) Means a display (a display that gives a feeling of foresight).

  The sphere detected to pass through the specific area 4830 in the process of S4812 is not limited to the sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 after the start of the V winning round Rv, and the storage channel at the start of the V winning round Rv. The ball may remain on the 1231. That is, by providing the processing of S4812, it is felt that the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv is not an existence that gives the player only a disappointing impression, but may lead to a profit. Can be present.

  Note that the skip flag 223gd set in the V display setting process (S4707) is set to off at the timing when the currently executing big hit game ends, and the updated V winning round timer 223gc sets the currently executing big hit game. Is reset at the timing when is ended.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the ball that has reached the open / close plate 1300 rolls rightward and passes through the detection sensor 1240 has been described. However, the first variable winning device 12000 in the twelfth embodiment has It is configured to be symmetrical, and the ball rolling leftward is directed to the detection sensor 1240. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments (including the parts that have only changed symmetrically) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 179 is a front view of the game board 13 of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, the first variable winning device 12000 is different from the third embodiment in that the opening / closing plate 12300 is a longer plate (in the present embodiment, the width in the long direction is 135 [mm]). ), And additionally includes a drop delay plate 12250 having a shape similar to that of the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment.

  The opening / closing plate 12300 has the same configuration as the opening / closing plate 1300 described in each of the above embodiments, except that the plate portion 12310 is long in the axial direction. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The main difference between the fall delay plate 12250 and the third embodiment is that the configuration of the fall delay plate 12250 differs for each section in the left-right direction. Here, the drop delay plate 12250 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 180 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 12200. As shown in FIG. 180, the drop delay plate 12250 is arranged on the front side of the movement trajectory of the opening / closing plate 12300 so as to avoid interference with the opening / closing plate 12300, is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 12300, and An extension plate portion 3251 which is a linear plate portion parallel to and extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and connects between the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210. And a rolling arc portion 12252 having an upper surface formed of a concave curved shape.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the extension plate portion 3251 is configured to be longer than in the third embodiment, but the other shapes are the same and are configured for the same purpose. The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  Supplementary to the opposing surface 3251a, in the present embodiment, the distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 12110 of the main body member 12100 is set at the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (the right side in FIG. 179). Is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere at a portion arranged vertically below, and is switched to be equal to or more than the radius of the sphere at an intermediate position (the middle position in the horizontal direction in FIG. 179), and is arranged at the most downstream side (left side in FIG. 179). In a portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere, the radius is equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. That is, as compared to the third embodiment, the inclination of the facing surface 3251a with respect to the thin plate member 12110 is gentler.

  The rolling arc portion 12252 is divided into three equal parts along the longitudinal direction of the drop delay plate 12250. That is, it mainly includes a first rolling portion 12252a, a second rolling portion 12252b, and a third rolling portion 12252c from the side far from the detection sensor 1240.

  The first rolling portion 12252a, like the rolling arc portion 3252 in the third embodiment, has a shape in which a tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the facing surface 3251a extends in the front-rear direction. At the same time, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 12200 has a shape that smoothly intersects with the thin plate member 1210 (a tangential line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

  The radius of curvature of the first rolling portion 12252a as viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, resistance when the ball rolls on the first rolling portion 12252a in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  In the second rolling portion 12252b, the upper end of the upstream end surface (the end surface farther from the detection sensor 1240) is connected to the upper end of the downstream end surface (the end surface closer to the detection sensor 1240) of the first rolling portion 12252a. At the same position, the radius of curvature when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of curvature of the first rolling portion 12252a.

  Therefore, the resistance when the ball rolls on the second rolling portion 12252b in the front-rear direction increases as compared with the resistance when the ball rolls on the first rolling portion 12252a in the front-rear direction. That is, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction may be increased in the rolling in the second rolling portion 12252b as compared with the rolling in the first rolling portion 12251a. it can.

  In the third rolling portion 12252c, the upper end of the upstream end surface (the end surface farther from the detection sensor 1240) is connected to the upper end portion of the downstream end surface (the end surface closer to the detection sensor 1240) of the second rolling portion 12252b. The second rolling portion 12252b is disposed at the same position and has a radius of curvature that is larger than the radius of curvature of the second rolling portion 12252b.

  Therefore, the resistance when the ball rolls on the third rolling portion 12252c in the front-rear direction increases as compared with the resistance when the ball rolls on the second rolling portion 12252b in the front-rear direction. That is, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction may be increased in the rolling in the third rolling portion 12252c as compared with the rolling in the second rolling portion 12251b. it can.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the degree of deceleration when the ball rolls in the front-back direction on the rolling arc portion 12252 can be changed depending on the left-right position of the ball. That is, when there are a plurality of balls flowing down on the rolling arc portion 12252 at the same speed, when these balls are similarly rolled back and forth, compared with the deceleration degree of the balls arranged on the upstream side In addition, the degree of deceleration of the ball disposed on the downstream side can be increased. Therefore, the interval between a plurality of spheres can be reduced, and by rolling back and forth a plurality of times, the interval between the spheres can be eliminated (composed of a continuous ball).

  With reference to FIG. 181, an example of a flow-down mode of a sphere flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a change in arrangement of spheres flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300.

  In FIG. 181, a schematic graph is shown as an example of the arrangement of spheres flowing down the horizontal axis and the vertical axis flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300. The vertical axis indicates the rolling start point of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 at the intersection of the lower axis with the horizontal axis, and the rolling end point of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 (detection sensor). 1240). The horizontal axis is graduated at equal intervals, similar to the ball firing interval. That is, in the present control example, since the firing interval of the ball is 0.6 seconds, the interval between the scales on the horizontal axis corresponds to 0.6 seconds.

  FIG. 181 illustrates curves connecting the arrangement of spheres over time. For easy understanding, the flow of the sphere will be described as the flow due to the gravitational acceleration. Therefore, when a load other than gravity is not applied to the sphere, the curve shown in FIG. 181 is a quadratic curve, and this curve will be described as a basic curve BPF.

  Here, in the twelfth embodiment, after the ball reaches the open / close plate 12300 maintained in the open state, the open / close plate 12300 rolls on the upper surface of the open / close plate 12300 maintained in the open state to detect the detection sensor. It is configured so that it takes about 4 seconds to enter 1240. Therefore, the basic curve BPF is illustrated as a quadratic curve that reaches the upper end position of the vertical axis (the position of the detection sensor 1240) after 4 seconds. Note that, in order to facilitate understanding of the mechanism that forms the open ball, the description will be made assuming that the flow velocity of the ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 is 0.

  The sphere flowing down the opening / closing plate 12300 basically flows down along the curve BPF. Therefore, when the open / close plate 12300 maintains the open state, the interval at which the ball reaches the open / close plate 12300 and the interval at which the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 are the same. On the other hand, when the state of the open / close plate 12300 changes between the closed state and the open state, the ball may be decelerated and the interval may change.

  FIG. 181 illustrates an example in which the open / close plate 12300 changes state between the closed state and the open state (corresponding to halfway closing in operation scenarios 51 and 52 described later) at closing timings TC1 to TC3. The closing timings TC1 to TC3 are illustrated as straight lines parallel to the vertical axis. The interval between the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing TC3 is illustrated at one second intervals in order to facilitate understanding of operation scenarios 51 and 52 described later.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the degree of deceleration changes depending on the arrangement of the balls. That is, whether the ball is disposed above the first rolling portion 12252a, whether the ball is disposed above the second rolling portion 12252b, or whether the ball is disposed above the third rolling portion 12252c. The degree of deceleration changes depending on whether or not the vehicle is moving.

  In FIG. 181, the change in the degree will be described by a change in a curve immediately after the closing timings TC1 to TC3. That is, when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state in which the ball is arranged above the first rolling portion 12252a, it is assumed that the subsequent flow-down state of the ball is not affected (the degree of deceleration is small). When the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state where the ball is arranged above the second rolling portion 12252b, the subsequent ball flow-down mode changes to the middle position HC of the curve BPF (one second after the flow-down start). ) (The degree of deceleration is medium), and when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state where the ball is arranged above the third rolling portion 12252c, the subsequent ball Is to be restarted from the start position SC of the curve BPF (the degree of deceleration is large).

  The falling trajectory of the sphere shown by the first curve BP1 is the first closing timing TC1 on the way down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300, but since it is arranged above the first rolling part 12252a, the influence is affected. It is a trajectory when the flow continues without receiving.

  On the other hand, the falling trajectory of the ball shown by the second curve BP2 is the first closing timing TC1 on the way down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300, which is the same as the ball shown by the first curve BP1. Since it is located above the second rolling portion 12252b, the trajectory is decelerated, and the trajectory from the middle position HC resumes the downward flow.

  Since the first curve BP1 and the second curve BP2 intersect at the intersection position UC before reaching the upper end of the vertical axis, the sphere indicated by the first curve BP1 and the sphere indicated by the second curve BP2 are connected. Is configured.

  The falling trajectory of the sphere indicated by the third curve is the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing on the way down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300, and is located above the third rolling portion 12252c. , A trajectory from which flow-down is resumed as a trajectory from the start position SC.

  The falling trajectory of the sphere shown by the fourth curve is the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing on the way down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300, and the first rolling portion at the second closing timing TC2. Since it was located above the 12252a, the Chinese continued without being affected, and at the time of the third closing timing TC3, it was located above the second rolling part 12252b, so that it was decelerated and moved as a trajectory from the intermediate position HC. This is the trajectory where flow has resumed.

  Since the third curve BP3 and the fourth curve BP4 intersect at the intersection position UC before reaching the upper end of the vertical axis, the sphere indicated by the third curve BP3 and the sphere indicated by the fourth curve BP4 are connected. Is configured.

  In a fifth control example described below, the twelfth embodiment is used. In the fifth control example, a description will be given of a case in which during the round game R, a timing at which an over-win is easily made and a timing at which it is not so are configured. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 executes notification relating to the timing.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183. FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c, a first hit type selection table 202b5, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5, At least an opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is provided.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b5 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b5. The first hit type selection table 202b5 is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type. It is stipulated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b5, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big win in a lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 39”. Is associated with the jackpot Ta (see 202b51 in FIG. 182 (b)).

  If the big hit Ta is reached, a big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 12000 (see FIG. 23A). In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  A large hit Tb is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “40 to 79” (see 202b52 in FIG. 182 (b)).

  In the case of the jackpot Tb, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in a 25th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 12000 described later. In this case, in addition to the payout of approximately 2250 prize balls, the player can receive a prize ball for an excess prize with a high probability.

  The jackpot Tc is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99” (see 202b53 in FIG. 182 (b)).

  When the jackpot Tc is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern of the first variable prize device 12000 (see FIG. 23C). In this case, in addition to the payout of the prize balls obtained by subtracting the unacquirable portion due to the influence of the remaining balls from about 2250 balls, the player receives the payout of some prize balls due to the balls winning in the general winning opening 63. be able to.

  Here, the similar operation pattern means that the second interval time Int2 between rounds is arranged after the tenth round in the third operation pattern, and the second interval time Int2 is arranged between predetermined rounds. Corresponding. In this control example, the second interval time Int2 is arranged at least between the fifth round and the sixth round.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”. The jackpot r is defined in association with it (see 202b54 in FIG. 182 (b)).

  When the big hit r is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the 25th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 12000, which will be described later, as in the case of the big hit Tb. In this case, in addition to the payout of approximately 2250 prize balls, the player can receive a prize ball for an excess prize with a high probability.

  As described above, when the special symbol 2 is won by a lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), a jackpot game that can receive a prize ball for an excess winning with a high probability is executed. You. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to win the jackpot by the special symbol 2 lottery.

  Next, in order to describe the configuration of the twenty-fifth operation pattern, the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and the opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5. The open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 is an area in which an operation scenario used for operation control of the open / close plate 12300 (see FIG. 179) is stored for each scenario type, and is stored in the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5. The open / close plate 12300 is operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game using the information that has been set.

  Specifically, an operation scenario 51 and an operation scenario 52 are defined as scenario types in the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5. The operation scenario 51 includes “(open (open state) 5.0 seconds → (close (close state, short-close) 0.1 seconds) → open (open state) 0” in the open / close plate 12300 (see FIG. 179) as the scenario content. .9 seconds) × 5 (repeated)) × 3 (repeated) ”.

  In the operation scenario 51, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 12300 ends when the specified number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the initial state ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 51, the closing after the opening / closing plate 12300 is opened (open state) is configured only by closing (closed state, short closing). Therefore, although the opening and closing plate 12300 operates from the open state (open state), the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are not discharged. Therefore, the number of the stored balls in the storage channel 1231 cannot be reduced during the round game R.

  In the case of the operation scenario in which the closing of the open / close plate 12300 is released before the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 as in the operation scenario 51, the ball is displaced particularly near the regulating member 1600. That is, since the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state in 0.1 second when the opening and closing plate 12300 is in the closed state, the ball is about to be discharged in that 0.1 second, and then the regulating member 1600 is in the storing state. The ball is pushed back.

  Therefore, when the sphere is pushed back, there is a concern that the whole sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is pushed back and detected again by the detection sensor 1240. In the present invention, the arrangement of the detection sensor 1240 is defined. This prevents re-detection. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the detection sensor 1240 has a center in the width direction as a detection position on the upstream side of the ninth ball from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231, and It is arranged so that the downstream hemisphere portion of the tenth sphere from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 enters the center in the width direction as the position.

  By arranging the detection sensor 1240 in this manner, even if the ball once flowing downstream (displaced with a diameter smaller than the diameter of the ball) is pushed back by the operation of the regulating member 1600, the downstream of the storage channel 1231 is pushed. The tenth ball from the side is always kept at the center in the width direction as the detection position of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, during the operation of the regulating member 1600, even if the detection sensor 1240 keeps detecting the ball, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ball is detected again.

  In this control example, although the arrangement of the detection sensor 1240 is devised to prevent the occurrence of re-detection due to being pushed back by the regulating member 1600, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, during the operation of the regulating member 1600, a preventing means for preventing the displacement of the stored sphere on the upstream side from the predetermined position may be provided, or even when the regulating member 1600 operates, the flow of the ball starts for 0.1 second. A flow restricting means for restricting the flow of the sphere may be provided so as not to prevent the flow.

  The operation scenario 52 includes, as the scenario content, “(open (open state) 5.0 seconds → (closed (closed state, long closed)) 0.2 seconds → open (open state) in the open / close plate 12300 (see FIG. 179). ) 0.8 seconds) × 5 (repeated)) × 3 (repeated) ”.

  In the operation scenario 52, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 12300 ends when a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the initial state ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 52, the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged by closing (closed state, long-closed) after the open / close plate 12300 is opened (opened state). For this reason, the number of stored channels in the storage channel 1231 can be reduced, so that a gap is easily formed inside the storage channel 1231 when a specified number of balls enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Since it is easy to configure a state in which balls are less than the allowable number (10) of 1231), the probability of occurrence of excess winning can be increased.

  In the present control example, the case where excess winning is unlikely to occur (in the case of the operation scenario 51) and the case where excess winning is likely to occur (in the case of the operation scenario 52) are different for each round, and the 25th operation pattern Is composed. More specifically, the twenty-fifth operation pattern is configured with the even round as the operation scenario 51 and the odd round as the operation scenario 52. As a result, excessive occurrence of excess winnings can be suppressed.

  In this way, by storing the operation scenarios separately based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, the profit that the operation of the opening and closing plate 12300 that is currently being executed gives the player can be controlled by the main controller. 110 can be easily determined.

  The closing timing of the opening / closing plate 12300 is common to the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52, and the difference in the closing length is as short as 0.1 second. This makes it difficult for the player to determine which pattern is operating.

  FIG. 183 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate operation scenario table 202f5. The opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is provided with information indicating which of the predetermined scenario types corresponds to which jackpot type and which round game R.

  The MPU of the main control device 110 reads information corresponding to the contents specified in the opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 from the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and executes opening / closing when controlling the operation of the opening / closing plate 12300. The plate 12300 is moving.

  The open / close plate operation scenario table 202f5 is configured so that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on a combination of a jackpot type and a round game R in which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the open / close plate 12300 is movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

  Next, an example of display contents during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the big hit game in which the first variable winning device 12000 operates in the twenty-fifth operation pattern.

  The first frame in FIG. 184 (display example shown on the upper left side) is a display following the part in the middle of the above-described basic effect (for example, the third frame in FIG. 157 (display example occupying the lower left side)). That is, the display example shown in FIG. 184 is a display that is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the display is being performed in the basic effect.

  In the first frame of FIG. 184 (display example shown on the upper left side), in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87 (a)), a treasure chest hidden in a dent and five rocks (number 2 The tank that bombards the rock is shown, and the display in the guidance display section of the small area Ds3 changes from “Aim at the right” (indicating that continuation of launching is to be performed. Launch instruction (see FIG. 157)). (Indicating that the launching should be continued, which is equivalent to a stop suggestion instruction).

  Switching from the basic effect to the display of the first frame in FIG. 184 is based on the average time (1 second) for the ball to reach the opening / closing plate 12300 from the launch of the ball and the second frame in FIG. ) To the 6th frame (lower right display example), the opening and closing plate for the total time (2.5 seconds) of the time related to the countdown effect (display is switched at regular intervals, 1.5 seconds in total) The display is switched at the timing of rewinding from the start of the period in which the closing of 12300 is repeated. That is, in the present control example, at the timing when 2.5 seconds, 12.5 seconds, or 22.5 seconds elapse from the start of the above-described operation scenarios 51 and 52, the display is displayed in the display example of the first frame in FIG. 184 from the basic effect. Is switched.

  In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), a child trying to pass in front of the rock (image suggesting that the ball firing is stopped) is displayed. In the third frame (display example shown in the lower left), The state in which the child is passing in front of the rock is illustrated, and the display of the small area Ds3 in the guidance display unit is switched to “3”.

  Thereafter, in the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), a state in which the child passed the front of the tank is illustrated, and the display of the small area Ds3 on the guidance display unit is switched to “2”. Thereafter, in the fifth frame (display example shown in the middle right), a state in which the child passed the front of the tank (an image suggesting a reunion of launching a ball) is shown, and the small area Ds3 is displayed on the guidance display unit. Is switched to “1”. In addition, the number of the guidance display part of the small area Ds3 is displayed as an example of a so-called “countdown effect” in which the number is reduced by one and some notification is made at a timing when the number may become “0”.

  In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), a state in which the tank starts to bombard (display suggesting the launch of a ball) is illustrated, and the display of the small area Ds3 on the guidance display unit is “Aim at the right”. The display is switched to a display indicating that the launching is to be continued. A launch instruction (see FIG. 157).

  When changing the launch and stop of the ball according to the display switched as shown in FIG. 184, the launch of the ball is stopped from the first frame to the fifth frame in FIG. 184, and the launch of the ball is started at the sixth frame ( Restart). In this case, the ball fired immediately after being switched to the sixth frame (in this control example, immediately after the timing of the lapse of 4 seconds, 14 seconds, or 24 seconds from the start of the above-described operation scenarios 51 and 52), is 1 second later. Reaches the opening / closing plate 12300 at the timing when the closing of the opening / closing plate 12300 is started.

  Therefore, the ball fired during a predetermined period thereafter (4 seconds in the present control example) rolls toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening / closing plate 12300 during a period in which the opening / closing plate 12300 repeats the closing operation. In addition, the kinetic energy is reduced with the closing operation of the opening and closing plate 12300.

  In addition, as described above, the degree of decrease in the kinetic energy associated with the closing operation of the opening and closing plate 12300 is greater for the sphere disposed downstream (on the side closer to the detection sensor 1240). The distance between the rolling balls can be reduced. For this reason, it is possible to easily form the open ball.

  On the other hand, when the ball is fired from the first frame to the fifth frame, the ball reaches the opening / closing plate 12300 during a period in which the opening / closing plate 12300 maintains the open state. Therefore, the interval between the balls rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 is easily kept unchanged from the interval when the ball arrives at the opening and closing plate 12300. Therefore, it is difficult to form a ball.

  That is, according to the present control example, the execution and stop of the ball in accordance with the display example shown in FIG. Thus, the ball rolling toward the detection sensor 1240 can easily form an open ball.

  Here, when the balls rolling toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening / closing plate 12300 constitute an open ball, a predetermined number (in this control example, In the case where the winning (10) is detected and the open / close plate 12300 is switched to the closed state, the ball connected to the upstream side of the previous ball easily enters the detection sensor 1240 before the switching.

  Therefore, the player can increase the profit (payout of the prize ball) obtained in the jackpot game by firing the ball so as to form the open ball. In the present control example, since the third symbol display device 81 notifies the timing at which the open ball is likely to be formed, the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  In the present control example, the display change as shown in FIG. 184 is executed both in the case of the operation scenario 51 (even round in the present control example) and in the case of the operation scenario 52 (odd round in the present control example). . On the other hand, when an open ball is formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 12300, excess winning can be expected only in the case of the operation scenario 52.

  In this way, by displaying an indication to the player to stop launching, while maintaining the effect of prolonging the digestion time of the round game R, it is possible to prevent excessive winning in each round and increase the profit of the player excessively. Can be prevented.

  Note that the configuration of the display example is not limited to this. For example, the display change shown in FIG. 184 may be executed only in the case of the operation scenario 52 (an odd round in this control example). In this case, it is not necessary to stop firing of the ball in order to form an open ball until an excess winning cannot be expected, so that the progress of the round game R can be made smooth.

  Further, for example, the display change illustrated in FIG. 184 may be executed only in the case of the operation scenario 51 (even number round in the present control example). In this case, excess winning can be suppressed, and the progress of the round game R can be made slow (slow).

  According to this control example, the opening and closing plate 12300 repeatedly changes to the closed state for 5 seconds after the ball is fired in accordance with the switching of the sixth frame in FIG. 184. During this period, as described above, the ball heading toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening / closing plate 12300 is decelerated to some extent to facilitate the formation of the open ball. However, if the open / close plate 12300 changes to the closed state immediately before or during the plurality of balls forming the open ball passing the detection sensor 1240, the ball may fall between the detection sensor 1240 and the end surface 3251b. In this case, there is a possibility that the pre-configured open ball may be canceled (for example, when a ball between the open balls falls).

  Therefore, if the open ball can be formed, a period during which the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state (in the present control example, from the start of the operation scenarios 51 and 52 to the lapse of 5 seconds, from the lapse of 10 seconds to the lapse of 15 seconds, Alternatively, it is preferable to pass the detection sensor 1240 between the time when 20 seconds elapse and the time when 25 seconds elapse). Here, as described above, in the twelfth embodiment, after the ball reaches the open / close plate 12300 maintained in the open state, the upper surface of the open / close plate 12300 maintained in the open state is rolled, and the detection sensor 1240 is rotated. It takes about 4 seconds to enter the ball.

  Therefore, for example, after about 4 seconds before the period during which the opening and closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state starts (and before the period during which the opening and closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state starts). When the open ball is formed with the ball that has arrived at the top, a situation where the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 during the period in which the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state can be generated with high probability.

  On the other hand, even before about 4 seconds ago, if the ball stays on the open / close plate 12300 for 4 seconds or more, the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 while the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state. Can be generated with a high probability.

  Here, according to this control example, the timing shown in the sixth frame in FIG. 184 (display example on the lower right) is about six seconds before the period in which the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started. Immediately after this, the ball that has fired reaches the opening / closing plate 12300 about 5 seconds before the period in which the opening / closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started, and thus is before about 4 seconds before.

  However, thereafter, the switching plate 12300 repeatedly switches to the closed state, so that the sphere flowing down along the switching plate 12300 is decelerated. That is, there is a situation where the ball stays on the opening and closing plate 12300 for 4 seconds or more. Therefore, the time that the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 12300 stays on the opening / closing plate 12300 about 5 seconds before the start of the period in which the opening / closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is extended by 1 second (that is, the flow speed of the ball) Is reduced to 80%), the timing at which the leading ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 can be included in the period in which the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state.

  In addition, the ball fired at the timing shown in the sixth frame (the lower right display example) of FIG. 184 is positioned near the upstream end of the opening / closing plate 12300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 12300 starts the switching operation to close. To reach. Therefore, the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 12300 while the opening / closing plate 12300 is performing the switching operation (repeating operation) to the closing or the closing of the opening / closing plate 12300 while the opening / closing plate 12300 is rolling. The number of times of deceleration by the operation of the opening / closing plate 12300 can be increased to the maximum as compared with a ball or the like in which the switching operation of (i) is started. Therefore, it is possible to most easily form the open ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 185, an example of the display content during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 12000 operates in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern.

  The first frame (display example shown on the upper left side) in FIG. 185 is a display following the part in the middle of the above-described basic effect (for example, the third frame (display example occupying the lower left side) in FIG. 157). That is, the display example shown in FIG. 185 is a display that is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the display is being performed in the basic effect.

  Here, the predetermined condition is that when the storage channel 1231 is full (see S5032 in FIG. 189), the detection sensor 1240 detects that a specified number of balls have passed in the currently executed round game R. If there is no such condition (see S5033 in FIG. 189), the condition is satisfied (hereinafter, also referred to as a "full-fill-unreached condition"). That is, it is assumed that the round game is started in a state where there is a remaining ball in the storage channel 1231.

  Here, in a situation where the round game R is started from a state in which the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is full, and the round game R is continued, the remaining time of the round game R is In order to prevent the generation of a useless ball, the firing of the ball may be stopped. On the other hand, when the firing of the ball is stopped, a free time is generated for the player, so that the concentration of the player may be reduced and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, even in a situation where the storage channel 1231 is full and a ball is prevented from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a (when the full tank non-attainment condition is satisfied). , While maintaining the display for promoting the launch of the ball (display indicating launch), switching the display so as to notify the player that the expected profit (payout of the prize ball) has been switched by the launch. I do.

  This control example utilizes the above-described structure capable of storing a sphere in the storage channel 1231. That is, in the present control example, after the above-described condition of not reaching the full tank is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state (elevated posture) until the specified time of the round game R (30 seconds in the present control example) elapses. Is done.

  Therefore, if the launching of the sphere (right-handed) is continued while the full tank failure condition is satisfied, the sphere that has reached the opening / closing plate 12300 moves in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing plate 12300 due to the storage channel 1231. Since the downward movement is regulated by the opening and closing plate 12300, the ball is held on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 until the opening and closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state. In other words, the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 12300 is kept in an unknown destination until the opening / closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state. It is unknown at this time.

  When the open / close plate 12300 shifts to the closed state from the state in which the ball remains on the upper surface of the open / close plate 12300, and then opens again, in other words, when the previous round game R is not the final round, There is a possibility that the ball on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 is scooped up again.

  More specifically, in the twelfth embodiment, a drop delay plate 12250 is provided below the opening / closing plate 12300, and when the opening / closing plate 12300 is in a closed state, a ball moves the upper surface of the drop delay plate 12250 along the length of the opening / closing plate 12300. Rolls in the direction along the direction (the direction along the opening direction of the detection sensor 1240), and falls toward the out port 66 on the left side of the terminal end surface 3251b. Therefore, the sphere that has not reached the terminal surface 3251b before the opening / closing plate 12300 changes to the open state rides on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 12300 again and passes through the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a).

  Therefore, there is a possibility that even if the ball has reached the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 while the full tank condition has not been reached, a prize ball can be paid out by winning the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). Can be. Therefore, as compared with the case where it is not possible to expect the payout of a prize ball due to a prize to the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a) (when there is almost no possibility, for example, in the normal state), the ball is fired (right). It is possible to improve the player's willingness to continue hitting.

  In the twelfth embodiment, since the length in the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing plate 12300 is about 135 [mm], when the balls (diameter 11 [mm]) are arranged side by side without overlapping vertically. Can put up to 12 balls on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the launch of the ball (right-handed) is continued while the full tank failure condition is satisfied, and some of the balls that have not reached the opening / closing plate 12300 enter the general winning opening 63. Win a prize. The payout number of the general winning opening 63 is set at five. The greater the percentage of balls that enter the general winning opening 63, the greater the total number of prize balls paid out to the player in the jackpot game.

  The display example shown in FIG. 185 uses these structures. That is, while promoting to the player that the possibility of the ball loss is low due to the structure of the opening and closing plate 12300 and the drop delay plate 12250, the player is allowed to enter the general winning opening 63 to obtain a payout of the prize ball while promoting the game. It is.

  When a movable object capable of changing the storage state of the ball is arranged inside the storage channel 1231, the round game R is started with the storage channel 1231 empty (there is no remaining ball). In such a case, the full tank failure condition may be satisfied. For example, in the case where the above-described interference device 6900 is provided in the sixth embodiment, the above-described predetermined condition may be satisfied by setting the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 to the overhang state after the start of the round game R. .

  In the first frame (upper left display example) of FIG. 185, the sub-round display unit 714b is displayed in the small area Ds1 (FIG. 87A). Before switching to the first frame in FIG. 185, the number-of-rounds display section 714 displays light (displays brightly) and the sub-round display section 714b displays off (displays dark). In the meantime, on the contrary, the number-of-rounds display section 714 is turned off (displayed dark), while the sub-round display section 714b is displayed light-emitting (displayed brightly). Note that the meaning of displaying the period in which an additional prize ball can be expected in the round game R in the sub-round display portion 714b is the same as that described above (see FIG. 143).

  In the first frame (upper left display example) in FIG. 185, a display that promotes the launch of a sphere (a display that suggests launching) is maintained in the small area Ds3, and the background is displayed at 1-second intervals in the background. The character "3" is displayed as the number to count down.

  In the second frame of FIG. 185 (display example in the middle left), a state in which the display of the small area Ds3 is down and the number “1” is displayed is shown, and one second after that, 3 seconds in FIG. It can be switched to the frame (lower left display example).

  In the third frame of FIG. 185 (display example on the lower left side), an area including the main display area Dm is maintained below the small area Ds3 while the display for promoting the launch of the ball (display indicating launching) is maintained. , A plurality of circular figures are superimposed and displayed near the center of each figure, and a display for promoting the launch of a sphere (character “hit”) is added. In this state, a figure of a “treasure box” to be described later is prepared in advance on the back side of the plurality of figures.

  In the fourth frame (upper right display example) in FIG. 185, the above-described circular figure is partially erased, and a state in which a part of the “treasure box” is exposed is illustrated. In the display example on the right), a state is shown in which all of the above-described circular figures are deleted and the entire “treasure box” is exposed.

  In this control example, it is possible to switch the number of the circular figures to be erased in accordance with the number of balls entering the general winning opening 63 after the display is switched to the display example of the first frame in FIG. 185. It is said. That is, control is performed so that the number of circular figures erased increases as the number of balls entering the general winning opening 63 increases.

  As an example, in this control example, four circular figures are displayed in the third frame of FIG. 185, and one circular figure is deleted each time a ball enters the general winning opening 63. Is controlled. That is, the display example of the fourth frame shows a state in which two balls enter the general winning opening 63 (a state in which ten payout award balls are generated by entering the general winning opening 63). The display example of the frame shows a state where four or more balls have entered the general winning opening 63 (a state where 20 or more payout balls have been paid out by entering the general winning opening 63).

  The “treasure box” in the display example of the fifth frame has a meaning as a display indicating the level of profit obtained by the player. That is, when the entire “treasure box” is displayed, 20 or more prize balls to be paid out by entering a ball other than the first variable prize device 12000 are generated. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of payout balls to be paid out by entering the general winning opening 63 by grasping the number of times of viewing the display of the “treasure box” (the predetermined number (in this control example, the treasure box) (The number obtained by multiplying the number of times of viewing by 20) can be used as an indication that an excess winning has been obtained.

  Further, this display is displayed separately from the prize ball by the ball entering the first variable prize device 12000. Therefore, the player can display the “treasure box” from the display of the “treasure box” and determine the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the first variable prize device 12000 in the jackpot game (that is, (the number of rounds) × (the specified number of round games R) ) × (the number calculated from the number of payout prize balls per winning of one ball)), it is possible to grasp how much the number of payout prize balls can be increased.

  In addition, in the display example of the fifth frame, the case where the display corresponding to the number of payouts of the prize balls has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of “treasure box”, any of the characters “probability variation”, “normal” or “time saving” (display indicating a gaming state) is associated with the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game in advance. May be prepared. In this case, the player can grasp the game state after the end of the currently running big hit game by increasing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 63.

  Note that it is often difficult to make two or four balls enter the general winning opening 63 within 30 seconds (during round R). Therefore, before switching to the display example of the fifth frame in FIG. 185, a corresponding ball loss (the ball flows to the right of the open / close plate 12300 after the open / close plate 12300 becomes full, A player who does not find any benefit here may stop firing the ball and suppress the ball loss.

  That is, as a game mode, the player continues to fire the ball so as to be able to see advantageous information (for example, the above-mentioned display indicating the game state) even if a ball loss occurs, or the ball to prevent the ball loss. To stop firing.

  Note that if the display is switched to the fifth frame in FIG. 185 before the top of the open / close plate 12300 is full (four or more balls can be made to enter the general winning opening 63), the game is played. Can obtain advantageous information with minimal ball loss. Therefore, after the display is switched to the first frame in FIG. 185, the firing of the ball can be motivated to continue.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 186 (a), the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuating pattern selection table 222a and an opening / closing plate operation scenario 222b5.

  The opening / closing plate operation scenario 222b5 is provided for the operation status of the opening / closing plate 12300 controlled by the main control device 110 on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area where the information stored in the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and the open / close plate operation scenario table 202f5 is stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 223d, a change start flag 223e, and a stop type selection A flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a probable change state flag 223i, a time saving state counter 223j, a storage state flag 223k, a storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, and an operation flag 223p. Effect temporary storage area 223r, first operation effect flag 223wa, second operation effect flag 223wb, first input flag 223wc, second input flag 223wd, effect under execution flag 223x, and pressing period information storage area 223y. And other memory area 223z There are at least provided, in addition, a display switching flag 223Pa, a light emitting timer 223Yh, and a display erasing counter 223yj are at least provided.

  The display switching flag 223pa is a flag that is set to ON when the storage channel 1231 becomes full in the middle of the round game R, and the sound lamp control device 113 performs the sub-round effect processing (S5036, see FIG. 190). ) Is a flag for grasping the timing of executing ().

  The light emission timer 223yh is a timer for managing a period during which the transmission lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) disposed near the first variable winning device 12000 emits light. In this control example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on each time a ball passes through the general winning opening 63, and is turned off after one second.

  The display erasure counter 223yj is a counter that manages the number of balls that have entered the general winning opening 63 since the display switching flag 223pa is turned on, with an upper limit of four. Each time the number of the display erasure counter 223yj decreases, the circular figure (see the third to fifth frames in FIG. 185) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased, and the display on the back side (FIG. The “treasure box” at 185 is controlled to be easily visible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, in the present control example, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  The main processing in this control example is different from the main processing in the first control example in that the processing shifts to the effect switching processing 3 (S5001) after the storage state monitoring processing (S2113), and the other is the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and different portions will be described.

  Next, the effect switching process 3 (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the effect switching process 3 (S5001). This effect switching process 3 (S5001) is a process of a main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing an effect that changes according to the progress of the jackpot game. It is.

  Note that this processing also includes a process of detecting a winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 12000 and a process of detecting a winning mode to the general winning opening 63, so that a short cycle (within 1 ms) in the main process. It is configured to be executed by. This makes it possible to make settings for detecting and detecting a winning mode of a ball in the first variable winning device 12000 or the general winning opening 63 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 188, in the effect switching process 3, in the process of S5001, it is determined whether or not a big hit is occurring (S5011). If it is determined that the big hit has not been made (S5011: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5011 that a big hit is being made (S5011: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit type is a big hit Tb or a big hit r (S5012). If it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot Tb or the jackpot r (S5012: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the display switching with reference to the open / close plate operation scenario 222b5 (S5013), and the timing of the display switching ( If it is determined that the timing is 2.5 seconds, 12.5 seconds, and 22.5 seconds from the start of the round game R (S5013: Yes), a first countdown effect display command is set (S5014). ), End this processing. Also, in the process of S5013, when it is determined that it is not the timing of display switching (S5013: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5012 that the jackpot type is neither the jackpot Tb nor the jackpot r (S5012: No), it is next determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot Tc (S5015).

  In the process of S5015, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot Tc (S5015: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5015, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot Tc (S5015: Yes), the process proceeds to a sub-round switching process (S5016), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, the sub-round switching process (S5015) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the sub-round switching process (S5015). This sub-round switching process (S5015) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113, and the storage channel 1231 becomes full during the round game R. This is a process for executing the effect after the game has become true.

  As shown in FIG. 189, in the sub-round switching process, in the process of S5015, it is determined whether the display switching flag 223pa is on (S5031). If it is determined that the display switching flag 223pa is not on (that is, it is off) (S5031: No), it is determined whether the storage channel 1231 is full (S5032).

  In addition, various methods are exemplified as a method of determining that the storage channel 1231 is full. In the present control example, it is determined that the length of time that the detection sensor 1240 detects a sphere exceeds a predetermined period (2 seconds in this control example). In this case, the entry timing of the Xth ball may be set at the elapse of a predetermined period, at the start of the predetermined period (that is, at the timing of entering the detection sensor 1240), or at the elapse of the predetermined period. A flag may be set at one point in time, and when it is determined that the tank is full when a predetermined period has elapsed, the flag may be set at the timing.

  In the process of S5032, when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is not full (S5032: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5032 that the storage channel 1231 is full (S5032: Yes), the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls is detected in the currently executed round game R. It is determined whether the ball has entered the sensor 1240 (S5033).

  In the process of S5033, if it is determined that the specified number of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (S5033: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5033, when it is determined that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S5033: No), a display switching command is set (S5034), and the display switching flag 223pa is turned on. This is set (S5035), and this process ends.

  In the present control example, after the display switching command is set (S5034), in the third symbol display device 81, the number-of-rounds display section 714 is turned off (dark), while the sub-round display section 714b emits light. The display is controlled so as to be displayed (brightly displayed) (see the first frame in FIG. 185).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5031, when it is determined that the display switching flag 223pa is ON (S5031: Yes), the process proceeds to a sub-round effect process (S5036). The details of the sub-round effect processing (S5036) will be described later.

  After the processing of S5036, it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the round (S5037). If it is determined that the timing of the end of the round is reached (S5037: Yes), the display switching flag 223pa is set to off (S5038), and The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing is not the end time of the round (S5037: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the sub-round effect processing (S5036) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the sub-round effect processing (S5036). This sub-round effect process (S5036) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and performs the lighting effect and the lighting effect after the storage channel 1231 is full. This is a process for executing a display effect.

  As shown in FIG. 190, in the sub-round effect process, in the process of S5036, it is determined whether or not the timing is 5 seconds before the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) in the currently executed round game R is reached. (S5051).

  In the process of S5051, if it is determined that the timing is 5 seconds before the specified time is reached (S5051: Yes), a second countdown effect display command is set (S5052), and the value of the display deletion counter 223yj is set. “4” is set, and the routine goes to the processing of S5054. On the other hand, in the process of S5051, if it is determined that the timing is not 5 seconds before the specified time is reached (S5051: No), the process directly proceeds to S5054.

  In this control example, after the second countdown effect display command is set (S5052), control is performed on the third symbol display device 81 so that a series of display effects starting from the first frame in FIG. 185 are executed. Is done. Since the value of the display deletion counter 223yj is 4, four circular figures are displayed as shown in the display example of the third frame in FIG. 185.

  In the processing of S5054, it is determined whether or not a ball has won the general winning opening 63 arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 12000 (S5054). In the processing of S5054, if it is determined that the ball has won the general winning opening 63 (S5054: Yes), the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) in the currently executed round game R has elapsed within 5 seconds. It is determined whether it is the timing to perform (S5055).

  In the processing of S5055, when it is determined that it is the timing when the specified time has elapsed within 5 seconds (S5055: Yes), the value of the display deletion counter 223yj is subtracted (S5056), and the display deletion command is set (S5056). S5057), and the process proceeds to S5058. On the other hand, in the process of S5055, when it is determined that the timing is not the time when the specified time has elapsed within 5 seconds (S5055: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S5058.

  After the value of the display erasure counter 223yj is subtracted (S5056), and the display erasure command is set (S5057), the third symbol display device 81 displays the circular figure shown in the display example of the third frame in FIG. 185. Is controlled so that the display is switched in such a manner that one is deleted. The display of the fourth frame in FIG. 185 shows the state after the process of S5057 is executed twice from the display of the third frame in FIG. 185, and the display of the fifth frame in FIG. The state after the processing of S5057 has been executed twice (or more) from the display of the frame is shown. After the processing of S5056 and S5057 is performed for the fifth time (the value of the display deletion counter 223yj <0), the circular figure is maintained in the display of the fifth frame in FIG. 185.

  In the process of S5058, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on (S5058), the numerical value corresponding to "1 second" is set in the light emission timer 223yh (S5059), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5054 that the general winning opening 63 has not been won (S5054: No), the light emission timer 223yh is subtracted (S5060), and it is determined whether the value of the light emission timer 223yh is 0 (S5050). S5061).

  In the process of S5061, if it is determined that the value of the light emission timer 223yh is 0 (S5061: Yes), it is determined whether the transmission lamp 227b is on (S5062), and the transmission lamp 227b is on. If it is determined (S5062: Yes), the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (S5063), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5061 that the value of the light emission timer 223yh is not 0 (S5061: No), or if it is determined in step S5062 that the transmission lamp 227b is not on (S5062: No). ), And the process ends.

  As described above, according to the present control example, every time a ball wins in the general winning opening 63, the control is performed so that the transmission lamp 227b is turned on for one second, and the visibility of the internal state of the storage channel 1231 is improved. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, at the end of the round game R, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are ejected. Therefore, by visually checking the internal state of the storage channel 1231, the end timing of the round game R can be easily determined. It becomes possible to grasp. Further, the end timing of the round game R is one of the important timings for the player as a material for determining the timing of switching between firing and stopping of the ball.

  Therefore, the timing at which the effect such as the display effect is switched is not made to correspond to the end timing of the round game R, and the change in the state of the ball inside the storage channel 1231 is grasped to grasp the timing of the end of the round game R. In the case where a gaming machine capable of being constructed is configured, the willingness of a ball to enter the general winning opening 63 can be improved.

<Another example of the fifth control example>
Next, another example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194. Another example of the fifth control example will be described using the first variable winning device 13000 described as the thirteenth embodiment.

  FIG. 191 is a front view of the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 191, the first variable prize device 13000 is provided with three paths through which the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 can pass, compared to the configuration of the twelfth embodiment, and whether or not each path can pass. Is different from that of the first variable winning device 12000 of the twelfth embodiment in that a path switching device 13800 that is configured to be able to be switched in association with the driving of the solenoid 1510 is provided. The points will be described in detail, and the same portions will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  The path switching device 13800 is visible below the opening / closing plate 12300 in a front view (visible by making at least a part of the game board 13 transparent), and is disposed on the back side of the game board 13. Provided with two discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813, and a sphere discharged from the lower end of the storage channel 1231 through the discharge port 1150 is detected by any of the discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813 and arranged downstream thereof. It is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown). Next, details of the path switching device 13800 will be described.

  192 and FIG. 193 are rear views of the first variable winning device 13000, and FIG. 194 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 13000 along the line CXCIV-CXCIV in FIG. Note that FIG. 192 shows a state in which the driving of the solenoid 1510 is released (non-excitation state), and FIGS. 193 and 194 show a state in which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excitation state). In FIGS. 192 and 193, the rear cover 1700 is shown by imaginary lines for easy understanding, and the discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813 are arranged behind the discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813 with the sectional view thereof. 194 is omitted, and in FIG. 194, the resistance change member 13854 is omitted for easy understanding, and the cross section in FIG. 194 is similar to the cross section in FIG. The storage channel 1231 is configured as a surface along the slope on the lower end side (or a surface cutting the center of the stored sphere).

  As shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, the path switching device 13800 of the first variable winning device 13000 includes a plurality of discharge path sensors 13810 arranged side by side downstream of the discharge port 1710 and a tip member of the solenoid 1510. An operating member 13820 that operates in accordance with the movement of the 1520 and a groove shape for defining the movement trajectory of the operating member 13820 are formed in the same shape on the thin plate member 12110 and the rear cover 1700 (formed in a groove shape (thin plate member). 12110) or a perforated (rear cover 1700)) defining portion 13830, a first switching device 13840 in which the state is switched each time the operating member 13820 makes one rotation of the defining portion 13830, and a corner portion 13831 of the defining portion 13830 Each time the operating member 13820 arrives, and operates under the load from the operating member 13820. A second switching device 13850 configured so as to vary, mainly comprises.

  The part that can switch the path of the ball before guiding the ball to the discharge path sensor 13810 will be described first. As shown in FIG. 192, the defining portion 13830 is formed in an elliptical groove shape in rear view, and has a known shape for defining the moving direction of the operation member 13820 by switching the depth of the groove. Each time the solenoid 1510 is switched between the excited state and the non-excited state, the operating member 13820 is guided in one direction along the defining portion 13830.

  That is, when switching from the non-excited state to the excited state, it passes through the upper half groove (state change from FIG. 192 to FIG. 193), and when it is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state, it passes through the lower half groove (FIG. State change from 193 to FIG. 192).

  The defining part 13830 includes a corner part 13831 formed as a path that deviates from a round path of the elliptical shape. The corner 13831 is configured as a portion to which the operating member 13820 reaches when the operating member 13820 is switched again to the excited state before the operating member 13820 has completely moved after the switching from the excited state to the non-excited state is started ( The defining portion 13830 is formed in such a shape that the operating member 13820 can reach the corner 13831).

  Accordingly, when the de-energized state is maintained for a sufficient time (for example, 2 seconds) as in a normal round-to-round interval, the corner 133831 does not reach the operating member 13820, while the operating scenario 51, When the non-excitation state is maintained for a short time (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds) and is immediately switched to the excitation state, as in the closing during the round game R of 52 (see FIG. 183 (a)). Is configured as a portion to which the operating member 13820 reaches. That is, according to the present configuration, the operating member 13820 is brought into contact with the closing member during the round-to-round interval to apply a load (in the present control example, the first switching device 13840), and the operating member 13820 is brought into contact with the closing member during the round game R. The target to which the contact load is applied (in the present control example, the second switching device 13850) can be different.

  The first switching device 13840 is configured to have a switching valve 13841 having a slide body that can slide back and forth above the first discharge path sensor 13811, and to be able to transmit the load given from the operating member 13820 to the switching valve 13841. And a transmission member 13842 which is

  The arrangement of the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is switched and maintained by a known notch mechanism, and the position is switched between a front position 13841a and a rear position 13841b every time a load is applied from the transmission member 13842. When the slide body is at the front position 13841a, the sphere flowing down from the discharge port 1710 goes to the first discharge path sensor 13811. However, when the slide body is at the rear position 13841b, the sphere flowing down from the discharge port 1710 is moved to the first discharge path. Before arriving at the sensor 13811, it collides with the slide body and flows down to the second discharge path sensor 13812 along the slope of the upper surface of the slide body. That is, the discharge path sensor 13810 through which the ball flowing down from the discharge port 1710 passes changes according to the state of the slide body.

  The transmission member 13842 is configured as a target to which the operating member 13820 abuts and applies a load when closed during the inter-round interval. When a load is applied to the transmitting member 13842 as the operating member 13820 moves along the defining portion 13830 (moving along the lower half of the defining portion 13830), the transmitting member 13842 is slightly moved about a predetermined axis. However, when the load applied from the operation member 13820 is released, it is configured to return to its original position by its own weight. That is, the transmission member 13842 is configured to repeat the same posture change (oscillation) every time a load is applied from the operation member 13820.

  Then, the load is transmitted to the slide body of the switching valve 13841 by the change in the posture of the transmission member 13842, and the arrangement of the slide body is switched. In other words, the arrangement of the slide member of the switching valve 13841 is configured to be switched each time the operating member 13820 operates along the defining portion 13830 by closing in the interval between rounds.

  The second switching device 13850 has a special discharge member 13851 that rotates by stacking posture changes due to a load applied from the operation member 13820, and an arrangement that is switched according to the state of the rotation of the special rotation member 13851 in the third discharge path. A regulating member 13852 configured to switch the manner in which the ball passes to the sensor 13813; a belt-shaped connecting band 13852 that connects a predetermined angular position of the special rotating member 13851 to an upper end of the regulating member 13852; And a resistance change member 13854 that can change the resistance in the rotation direction of 13851 by the arrangement of the operation member 13820.

  The special rotating member 13851 is a member having a rotationally symmetric shape (for example, a gear shape or a disk shape) rotatably supported below the rear cover 1700, and receives a load from the operating member 13820 that has reached the corner 13831. Are arranged to be able to be given. The operating member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831 from the left and right intermediate position of the defining portion 13830, and at this time, applies a load in the rotating direction to the special rotating member 13851, and the special rotating member 13851 rotates by a predetermined amount. According to the present embodiment, the connection belt 13853 rotates in the rotation direction in which it is pulled up.

  When the operation member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831, the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 is increased by an operation described later of the resistance change member 13854, and the rotation of the restriction member 13852 by its own weight is restricted. Therefore, as the number of times that the operation member 13820 reaches the corner 13831 increases, the rotation angle of the special rotation member 13851 increases. In the present embodiment, when the number of times that the operating member 13820 reaches the corner 13831 is two or more, the regulation of the discharge path sensor 13810 by the regulating member 13852 is released, and the ball can enter the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is configured to be.

  Note that the number of times that the operation member 13820 needs to reach the corner 13831 before the restriction of the discharge path sensor 13810 by the restriction member 13852 is released is not limited and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, in consideration of the amount of rotation of the special rotation member 13851 every time a load is applied from the operation member 13820 and the accompanying movement amount of the restriction member 13852, the position of the restriction member 13852 on the second discharge path sensor 13812 side is considered. The position of the end may be adjusted.

  The regulating member 13852 has one end connected to the connection band 13853, and the other end extending obliquely right and left (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 192 and 193) above the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is supported by the guide 13852a.

  The regulating member 13852 normally closes the third discharge path sensor 13813 in a fall-down state (see FIG. 193). The other end slides along the guide portion 13852a (moves to the side where the left and right distance from the one end is reduced), and the regulating member 13852 gradually rises (from the collapsed state to the special rotation). The state in which the member 13851 is loaded on the operating member 13820 twice or more). Then, when the load via the special rotating member 13851 is released, the state returns to the state of falling by its own weight (see FIG. 193).

  In a state where the regulating member 13852 has fallen (see FIG. 193), the upper surface is inclined downward toward the second discharge path sensor 13812, so that the sphere that has deviated from the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the action of the switching valve 13841 is removed. The guide can be smoothly guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812.

  In a standing state, the regulating member 13852 is arranged at a position where the other end does not hinder the passage of the ball to the third discharge path sensor 13813. As a result, the ball that has deviated from the first discharge path sensor 13811 due to the operation of the switching valve 13841 is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812 or the third discharge path sensor 13813.

  The connection band 13853 is made of a material with low elasticity, such as a string or a cloth, or a thin metal wire (thin metal plate). Therefore, the rotation position of the special rotation member 13851 and the arrangement of the regulating member 13852 correspond one-to-one.

  The resistance changing member 13854 is a member that is long in the vertical direction and is disposed in such a manner as to fall down on the special rotating member 13851, and one end (upper end) has an end (left and right ends) of the defining portion 13830 and an upper end. The other end (lower end) is rotatably supported below the rear cover 1700, and can be brought into contact with the special rotating member 13851 at the middle portion.

  The resistance change member 13854 has an effect of increasing the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 by contacting the special rotation member 13851. In other words, while the resistance changing member 13854 leans against the special rotating member 13851 and applies a load by contacting the special rotating member 13851, the rotation of the special rotating member 13851 due to its own weight is regulated (maintaining the posture), and the operating member 13820 is moved. Only rotation by the load when reaching the corner 13831 occurs.

  On the other hand, when the operating member 13820 is disposed at the end of the defining portion 13830 at the time of closing and opening during the inter-round interval, the upper end of the resistance change member 13854 is pushed by the operation member 13820, and the resistance change member 13854 And the special rotation member 13851 is released from contact. Accordingly, the rotation resistance of the special rotating member 13851 decreases, the special rotating member 13851 rotates by its own weight, and the regulating member 13852 falls down (the special rotating member 13851 is in a state before a load is applied). Become.

  Note that the rotation resistance of the special rotating member 13851 may increase at a timing excluding the interval between rounds (for example, at the time of opening and closing during the round game R, the timing at which the operating member 13820 is arranged at the corner 13831). In this case, the state of the special rotation member 13851 and the regulating member 13852 is maintained.

  Next, the arrangement and operation of each sensor of the discharge path sensor 13810 will be described in order. The first discharge path sensor 13811 has an opening that can pass when a ball that has passed backward through the discharge port 1710 falls vertically downward is configured as a detection port. That is, the ball that has passed through the discharge port 1710 passes through the first discharge path sensor 13811 and is detected by the first discharge path sensor 13811 unless an external force other than its own weight is applied.

  In the present control example, the first discharge path sensor 13811 is configured as a detection device that sets the V flag 203s to ON when detecting passage of a ball. In other words, the same operation as that of the specific region 4830 or the specific region detection sensor 4860 in each of the above embodiments occurs.

  Although the first switching device 13840 is disposed between the first discharge path sensor 13811 and the discharge port 1710, the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is switched at every interval between rounds. Regardless of the game R, by playing the jackpot game normally in a mode in which the ball enters the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be passed through the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the end of the jackpot game.

  The second discharge path sensor 13812 is a detection sensor arranged next to the first discharge path sensor 13811. The second discharge path sensor 13812 is configured as a detection sensor that detects only passage of a ball. That is, the state of the V flag 203s does not change (is maintained) even when the ball passes through the second discharge path sensor 13812.

  The third discharge path sensor 13813 is arranged next to the second discharge path sensor 13812, and is used when a sphere flowing down from the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the action of the switching valve 13841 does not pass through the second discharge path sensor 13812. It is a detection sensor that passes. When the regulation of the passage of the ball by the regulating member 13852 is released (when the regulating member 13852 is in a standing state), the ball is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812 or the ball is guided by the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is configured such that there is no large difference (becomes random) as to whether or not it is guided.

  In the present control example, the third discharge path sensor 13813 is configured as a detection device that sets the V flag 203s to off when detecting the passage of a ball. That is, in the ending process (S1110, see FIG. 121) described in the above control example, it is determined whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a probable change state or a time saving state by delaying the ball during the jackpot game. It is possible to configure a gaming ability that changes depending on which of the first discharge path sensor 13811 and the third discharge path sensor 13813 has detected.

  According to this control example, it is possible to configure the following gaming characteristics. In this control example, the jackpot type used in the fifth control example is used (see FIGS. 182 and 183).

  As described above, in the interval between rounds, the restricting member 13852 is in a state of falling down, and the passage of the ball of the third discharge path sensor 13813 is restricted. Therefore, when the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 only at the closing time between rounds (for example, in the case of the jackpots Ta and Tc), the ball is detected by the third discharge path sensor 13813 and the V once turned on. There is no possibility that the flag 203s is set to off.

  On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth operation pattern including the operation scenarios 51 and 52 in which the opening and closing plate 12300 is closed at intervals other than between rounds, the ball may be discharged from the storage channel 1231 at intervals other than between rounds. Since the turned-on V flag 203s may be set to off, it is possible to improve the attention of the whereabouts of the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231.

  The following description focuses on the twenty-fifth operation pattern. In the present control example, in the twenty-fifth operation pattern, the description will be made assuming that the open / close plate 12300 is drive-controlled in the operation scenario 52 in the all-round game R.

  Since the twenty-fifth operation pattern is configured as a 15-round (odd-number) jackpot game, the state of the first switching device 13840 in the predetermined round is not determined in one way, and the jackpot game of the 25th operation pattern is continuously performed. If so, it will be replaced every time a big hit game is played.

  For example, when the slide body of the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is at the front position 13841a in the fifteenth round game R in the first jackpot game, the fifteenth round round game R in the second jackpot game The sliding body of the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 in the above is set to the rear position 13841b.

  Therefore, the passage of the ball to the first discharge path sensor 13811 is restricted in the 15th round once every two times (there is a possibility that the V flag 203s is set to OFF), and once in the 15th round is the 15th round. In, the ball is guided to the first discharge path sensor 13811 (the big hit game is easily ended by turning on the V flag 203s). In other words, a gaming machine capable of guaranteeing two sets of the probability change state with a high probability (the number of times the state after the end of the jackpot game becomes the probability change state is up to two) can be configured.

  When the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the round game R in a state where the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is disposed at the rear position 13841b, at the time of the first discharge, the regulating member 13852 is still in the third discharge path. Since the passage of the ball to the sensor 13813 is restricted, the ball is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812.

  As described above, in discharging the first ball, the discharged ball can be visually recognized by the player in a front view without changing the state of the V flag 203s. That is, the ejection of the ball can be used to direct the player's attention to the path switching device 13800.

  After the second ejection, the ball of the third ejection path sensor 13813 is allowed to pass. Accordingly, in the round game R, the balls are ejected every five seconds, one ball per second, for a total of five balls, but the second and subsequent four balls are sent to the third ejection path sensor 13813. Can be guided.

  Here, when the interval between rounds is reached, the regulating member 13852 shifts to the falling state, so that the player starts to discharge the balls during the round game R, and then determines the number of incoming balls within a short time. To start the interval between rounds.

  In other words, at a timing when one ball is ejected from the storage channel 1231 (the space of the storage channel 1231 directly connected to the excess winning number is equal to one ball), the specified number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 ( According to the game mode of (10 in this control example), the ball is not detected by the third discharge path sensor 13813, and the game can be executed with confidence.

  On the other hand, by discharging two or more balls from the storage channel 1231, a sufficient space is secured in the storage channel 1231, and many balls are opened and closed after a lapse of 15 seconds from the start of the round game R. In a game mode in which a ball is formed to aim for an excessive winning prize (a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped during the round game R and the firing of the ball is restarted in accordance with the operation timing of the open / close plate 12300) Since the balls are successively discharged from the discharge port 1710 in a state where the balls can be guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813, the balls enter the third discharge path sensor 13813 as a reaction to the increase in the number of excess winnings that can be aimed at. It is more likely to ball. That is, when the degree of aiming for the excess winning becomes excessive, it is possible to constitute a gaming property in which the possibility that the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is changed to the certainty state is reduced.

  In the present control example, the opening and closing during the round starts 5 seconds after the start of the round game R, but if the game mode in which the firing of the ball is not stopped and firing is continued, the specified number (this control example) In this case, 10 balls are fired in 6 seconds, so if the total of the balls fired before the start of the round game R is detected, 10 balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240 within 5 seconds. Things happen with a high probability. In addition, the drop delay plate 12250 (see FIG. 191) further guides the ball to the terminal surface 12251 b in front of the detection sensor 1240 irrespective of the open / close state of the open / close plate 12300.

  For this reason, in the present control example, the notification "Aim at the right" is continuously maintained in the sub-display area Ds3 as the notification related to the firing mode in the jackpot game (see FIG. 158). In this control example, when the ball is continuously fired according to this notification, the possibility that the ball is guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the game mode in which the launch of the ball is stopped without following the notification that the launch of the ball is continued, the ball may be guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813. Is also good.

  For example, the notification may be divided every 5 seconds, and it may be clearly notified that the possibility that the ball is guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813 increases every 5 seconds. In this case, by notifying the player at the same time that the V flag 203s is currently turned on, the player is not required to fire the ball. It is possible to select whether to proceed to a round game.

  Also, based on the same notification, whether or not to link the position of the first switching device 13840 and the effect changes depending on the required game characteristics, and either may be controlled. For example, when the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is disposed at the front position 13841a, all the discharged balls pass through the first discharge path sensor 13811 regardless of the state of the regulating member 13852, and therefore, the third discharge path Since the possibility that the ball is guided to the sensor 13813 does not increase, the above-described notification may be omitted, or the above-described notification may be executed as an effect regardless of the position of the switching valve 13841.

  In the former case, by giving the player a correct state, the game is made to be slow (shooting a ball without hitting (sudden) and allowing the shooting to be stopped (slow)). be able to. In the latter case, it is possible to cause the ball to continue firing anyway, so that the speed of the jackpot game can be increased.

  In the present control example, the switching valve 13841 is configured to slide back and forth, and it is difficult to recognize a change in the state of the switching valve 13841 in a front view. Therefore, the player plays the game by visually confirming the state of the switching valve 13841. It is possible to reduce the possibility (a game in which the production intention is ignored).

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the storage channel 1231 is configured as a channel extending on a plane, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be configured so that the right side of a plane orthogonal to the left-right direction is bent 90 degrees and extends in the front-rear direction. That is, the flow path may extend in the left-right direction from the detection sensor 1240 to the bending position, extend in the front-rear direction from the bending position, and extend again in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150.

  The flow path extending in the front-rear direction has a flow path shape in which the extending direction is switched from left and right to front and rear (rotated by 90 degrees about a vertical axis) by diverting the shape of the storage flow path 1231. It is formed by combining two substantially symmetrical light-transmitting members having concave portions constituting one side surface of the flow path on the opposite side from the left and right.

  The storage channel 1231 including the channel extending in the front-back direction is different from the above embodiment in the direction of the channel, but the number of balls that can be stored downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (10 in this embodiment). Pieces). That is, also in the present embodiment, the same playability as the playability described in each of the above embodiments can be configured.

  Also with respect to the storage channel 1231 including the channel extending forward and backward, the solenoid 6910 enters the channel when driven (excited) in a state where the solenoid 6910 is driven (excited). When the drive (excitation) is released, there is provided an interference member that is retractable from the flow path and can be switched between a retracted state that allows the sphere in the flow path to flow down.

  Here, the arrangement of the interference member with respect to the flow path is the same as in the sixth embodiment. That is, of the balls stored on the downstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the flow path extending forward and backward on the upstream side of the second ball counted from the lowermost ball restricted from flowing down by the regulating member 1600. And the third ball is disposed so as to be able to regulate the downward flow of the third ball. In the extended state of the interference member, seven balls are located upstream of the interference member and downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. Of balls can be stored.

  The flow path extending back and forth is formed so that the third and subsequent balls are stored behind the second ball counted from the lowermost ball whose flow is regulated by the regulating member 1600. Therefore, when the second ball is arranged, the ball is arranged on the front side of the interference member, and the interference member is hidden by the ball. That is, the state of the interference member can be made difficult to grasp by the ball.

  Compared to the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, the entire sphere is not visually recognizable, and the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the visual recognition target is reduced by the flow path itself extending to the back side. In the case where the storage channel 1231 includes a channel extending forward and backward for reasons such as being farther away, the state in which ten spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 by retracting the interference member and the interference member Are protruding, and it is difficult to grasp the state in which nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 from the arrangement of the balls. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored balls even when the first variable winning device 1000 is directly viewed.

  In the case where such a feature is provided, for example, the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, it is better to look at the third symbol display device 81 than to visually recognize the storage channel 1231 having poor discrimination of the number of stored balls, to grasp the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 1000a. Since the configuration can be made to be easy, the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved relatively to the attention to the first variable winning device 1000. Therefore, it is possible to easily remove the player's line of sight from the first variable winning device 1000.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member that opens and closes the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You may do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged without strictly controlling the operation length of the second discharge port regulating member. Therefore, the number of discharged balls can be changed between the case where the balls are discharged from the first discharge port and the case where the balls are discharged from the second discharge port. In this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be simultaneously opened, the time required for discharging the ball as a whole can be reduced, and the interval can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 that moves up and down can guide the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the upper position, and can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the lower position. May be deviated. In this case, when the ball is raised, it is not necessary to arrange the ball at a position sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200, so that the ball can be lifted more smoothly.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged from the single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional outlet may be arranged at a position midway in the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed depending on whether to discharge from the discharge port 1710 or to discharge from the additional discharge port. That is, it is difficult to discharge the ball clogged on the discharge port 1710 side from the additional discharge port. In addition, by discharging both of the discharge ports at the same time, the discharge efficiency of the ball can be increased, and the interval can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability variation determination unit 4800 starts operation based on the operation timing of the open / close plate 1300 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the sphere according to the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be acquired depending on the number of ejected balls regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly deviated has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation may be started at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resistance of the ball entering the ball changes depending on whether there is a gap in which the ball enters the storage channel 1231 (whether the storage channel 1231 is in the full state), It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that a predetermined sphere entering the storage channel 1231 is decelerated depending on whether or not the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is nearly full. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of round games R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, winning more than the specified number can be suppressed. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being prolonged while suppressing winnings of a specified number or more, as compared to the case where the ball is decelerated regardless of the stored number. In addition, not only deceleration but also acceleration may be performed. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than a predetermined number of winnings.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 so that the stored ball restricts the ball from entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electrically driven member may be provided that operates by a predetermined amount when a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes and that facilitates regulating the ball from entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the interval between rounds can be reduced as compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged at one time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the specified number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specified number of +1 balls may be stored. In this case, the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a exceeding the specified number can be limited to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, for each round, the round in which the eleventh ball easily passes and the round in which the eleventh ball is restricted from passing may be switched.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening and closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held (falls) at a position in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that two balls are not won simultaneously. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one ball may be held, so that the ball may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a until the open / close plate 1300 is closed. Alternatively, the possibility of this possibility may be switched for each round.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening through which the ball passes is configured as an opening that gives a benefit to the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed so that a fall flag (a flag for shifting the probable change state to the normal state or the time saving state) is turned on when a ball enters a predetermined winning opening. In this case, it is possible to execute a game in which attention is paid so that a ball does not enter a predetermined winning opening.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the regulating member 1600 mechanically interlocks with the open / close plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the regulating member 1600 may be driven by a driving device different from the solenoid 1510 for driving the opening / closing plate 1300, or the regulating member 1600 may be configured to be drivable by the solenoid 1510 or another driving device.

  In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage channel, and the storage channel may be a channel that branches off toward the outlet on the way. In this case, a predetermined number of spheres can be left in the storage channel 1231 regardless of which outlet the sphere is discharged from.

  In the second embodiment described above, the case where the number of storable balls when entering the ball from the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game, It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a is less than the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when the ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255a. May be equal to or more than the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure a gaming property in which, when the ball is ejected from the first specific winning opening 1000a while the ball is ejected every time at the interval between rounds, the round time is necessarily extended.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the ball that has flowed below the opening / closing plate 1300 is lifted again above the opening / closing plate 1300 by the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be lifted by a movable member having a constant operation capable of picking up the ball. In this case, the player can be entertained by the movement of the ball.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (the drop delay plate 3250) is provided below the open / close plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib projecting from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be provided above the opening / closing plate 1300. When the sliding plate 1300 is in the open state, the ball may not contact the rib, and when in the closed state, the ball may contact the rib. Thus, even above the opening and closing plate 1300, the flow speed of the ball can be changed to delay the flow.

  As a method of preventing the ball from abutting on the rib, the ball may be moved to the front or rear by tilting in the front-rear direction, and the rib may be provided on the opposite side.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the falling of the ball is delayed by the drop delay plate 3250 arranged on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be constituted by a flow path curved through the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that once passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player by the opening and closing plate 1300 is discharged again from the exit. Can be performed by the falling of the ball, and the area for delaying the ball is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. Therefore, even when the interval is long, the ball is delayed until the next round is started. A sufficient section can be secured.

  Note that the entrance is preferably below the opening and closing plate 1300, and the exit is preferably above the opening and closing plate 1300. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the opening of the entrance is narrowed by a part of the opening / closing plate 1300 to such an extent that the passage of a ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening and closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side has been described. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be configured to become gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the flowing direction of the sphere becomes small, and the sphere can be decelerated.

  The change in acceleration / deceleration may be reversed. In the case where the ball accelerates toward the downstream, it is possible to prevent the formation of an open ball on the drop delay plate 3250.

  In the third embodiment, the case where only the ball that has passed below the opening and closing plate 1300 abuts on the opening and closing plate 1300 by arranging the drop delay plate 3250 below the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, in a mode in which a ball slides in a pocket where a winning opening is arranged in an open state and a ball rolls on an upper surface of the open / close plate in a closed state, the rolling ball is opened and closed by a front and rear slide type opening and closing plate. A rib that can contact when reaching the downstream side on the plate may be arranged. A ball that directly enters the pocket does not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the open / close plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the ball from moving up and down with the operation of the open / close plate.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the formation of the fall delay plate 3250 at the fall position Pf3 is omitted and the ball falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the drop delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, and a through-hole through which the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 to the right is formed, and the ball is discharged from the through-hole. You may make it. In this case, even when the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be disposed above the open / close plate 1300.

  This is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the sphere that has fallen at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and lands on the fall delay plate 3250 remains rightward (detection sensor). The ball that has fallen to the second fall delay plate 7260 by the same fall, once falls to the left (to the side away from the detection sensor 1240), and then falls again to the fall delay plate 3250. To reach. That is, the period in which the flow of the sphere is delayed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the path along which the sphere flows are different.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, a case is described in which the flow paths in which the balls flowing from the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning ports 1000a and 2255a flow down to the storage channel 1231 and the number of entered balls is related. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sphere may be automatically supplied to the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the high probability state, the case where the number of lotteries until the jackpot is obtained decreases as the profit obtained by the player decreases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the greater the number of lotteries up to the jackpot, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained by the jackpot obtained in a short time is small, and the profit obtained by the jackpot obtained in a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be made uniform.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 to change the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operation member that operates in the storage channel 1231 in accordance with the stored number and changes the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 may be provided. In this case, regardless of the drive timing of the drive device 1500, the operation members move according to the stored number, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the operation timing of the operation members is different from normal.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion (particularly, a U-shaped portion) forming the storage channel 1231 moves in the extending direction (left-right direction) of the channel to change the length of the storage channel 1231. May be. In this case, even if the player has moved in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice whether or not the player has moved because of the small movement amount. Therefore, it is possible to form a playability in which the player notices the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) only after the ball is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable prize device 6000 can be increased. Can be improved.

  The movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the switching of the movement may or may not be performed by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 projects in a state where a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an overhang state may be formed before the ball starts to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be seven. In addition, a pattern that forms a protruding state after the ball is stored and a pattern that forms a protruding state before the ball starts entering the storage channel 1231 may be mixed in each round. In this case, a single member can be used to switch between a round in which the storage number is seven and a round in which the storage number is nine.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be changed to a protruding state while the sphere is being discharged from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing at which the ball is ejected and the timing at which the interference member 6930 is brought into the extended state, the ejection mode of the ball can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

  In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is auxiliaryly viewed, but is not limited thereto. For example, only the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 may open and close, and the opening and closing plate 8300 may be configured as a fixed plate. In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be provided with a flow path for dropping a ball from above vertically so as to prevent the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from passing leftward. In this case, a limited number of excess winnings can be allowed based on the open ball mode.

  Further, for example, for each round game R, the opening / closing mode of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be switched between a long-term opening and a repeated short-term opening. In this case, at the end of the round game R, it is detected by the detection sensor 1240 and closed, or is closed as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240, and a specified number of balls are passed through the detection sensor 1240 during closing. Is detected, the round game R ends, and it can be switched whether or not the next opening will occur. In this case, the probability of occurrence of excess winnings will be lower in the case of repeated short opening than in the case of long opening, so the possibility of occurrence of excess winning will differ depending on the operation pattern. Can be.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the same driving device has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a dedicated driving device may be provided for each device, and the driving device may be independently driven.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are changed to the open state, the opening / closing plate 8300 rotates in a manner of rising upward and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is turned leftward. Although the case has been described in which the opening and closing plate 8300 is configured to rotate in a manner approaching from above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are parallel (for example, the axis in the front-rear direction), and the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are opposed to each other (for example, one is downward and the other is upward). You may make it operate. In this case, an effect can be performed in which the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 sandwich a sphere in accordance with a state change.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 includes the ball entry prevention portion 1331 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball entry prevention section 1331 may be omitted. In this case, since the opening / closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be used as a member that regulates the guidance of the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Further, for example, the front surface of the ball entry preventing portion 1331 may be recessed so as to be recessed toward the back. In this case, the period from the start of the state change of the open / close plate 8300 toward the closed state until the passage of the ball of the detection sensor 1240 is disabled can be lengthened.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 have been described as members for allowing the passage of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, but are not necessarily limited thereto. There is no. For example, by omitting the ball entry prevention unit 1331, the permissible passage of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a can be switched only by the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 allows the ball to enter the auxiliary entrance opening. It may be interpreted that the ball is thrown toward 9111 or the first out port 66. That is, the opening / closing plate 8300 merely serves to guide the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether or not the ball is guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a is switched according to the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. May be interpreted. In this case, the attention of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be improved as compared with the attention of the opening / closing plate 8300.

  In the ninth embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which a plurality of members are movable on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a ball is caused to flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 by configuring a driving mode of operating one of the members. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable member is singular (for example, the opening and closing plate 1300), and the interference member 6930 is controlled to be in the extended state in accordance with the timing when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed, thereby closing the opening and closing plate 1300. The discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or by setting a shorter period for closing the opening and closing plate 1300 (the time required for one ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150). (Less than 0.2 seconds), the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 may be suppressed.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary entrance 9111 is configured as a general winning opening has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to a special symbol lottery. In this case, by configuring the special symbol 2 to be able to acquire the lottery of the special symbol 2 by entering a ball into the auxiliary entrance 9111 under the control of changing the special symbol 2 in preference to the special symbol 1, the big hit game It is possible to suppress the start of the change of the special symbol 1 immediately after the end.

  In the ninth embodiment, the rolling plate 9112 is configured as a fixed plate, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state changes between a state in which the rolling plate 9112 is retracted from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which the rolling plate 9112 does not collide with a game ball) and a state in which the rolling plate 9112 extends over the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which it hits a game ball). May be configured as a movable plate that is driven and controlled to perform the operation. In this case, various modes are exemplified as the operation pattern. For example, a fixed operation may be performed after the power is turned on, or a predetermined operation starting from the start of the big hit game may be performed.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case has been described in which the operation speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released is substantially constant (depending on the restoration mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the time of the return operation of power transmission member 5400, a damper that applies a load to power transmission member 5400 after auxiliary transmission member 8340 is closed may be provided. In this case, the period during which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state can be lengthened, so that one-side opening control can be facilitated.

  In the above-described ninth embodiment, the description has been given of the case where the ball is switched to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 on the assumption that the state of the opening / closing plate 8300 changes toward the open state. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a ball can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 at a predetermined ratio during a period in which the open / close plate 8300 maintains the closed state. For example, another movable object having a constant operation may be provided, and a ball may collide with the movable object to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the ball is discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181 and the number of balls that can be accommodated in the storage channel 1231 or more can pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the capacity of the storage channel 1231 may be configured to be variable. In this case, since the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made to correspond to the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the specific area detection sensor 4860, the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, and the like are exemplified as the detection means for detecting the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the opening of the outlet 1150 (or an opening arranged close to the opening) may be configured as a detecting means (a ball passage sensor). In this case, a time delay from the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 to the detection of the ball by the detection means can be minimized.

  In the tenth embodiment, the ball is discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181, so that a space is formed inside the storage channel 1231 and it is advantageous for the player that an excess prize can be aimed at. Although a case where a significant change occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 due to the operation of the movable member 10181 falls at a predetermined probability with a fall detection sensor (a detection sensor that sets the V flag 203s off, a third discharge path sensor of the thirteenth embodiment). (Similar to 13813). In this case, by discharging the ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181, not only a change advantageous to the player but also a disadvantageous change can occur.

  In particular, in the tenth embodiment, since a plurality of types of operation patterns of the movable member 10181 are prepared, notification of which operation pattern drives the movable member 10181 is performed in advance, so that the player can The player can play the ball in a mode of launching a ball that allows the ball to be ejected from the middle of the storage channel 1231 (for example, continuously firing (leave the ball)), or launch the ball so as not to enter the storage channel 1231 as much as possible. It is possible to select whether to play in a firing mode in which execution and stop of the game are adjusted. That is, the player chooses whether to aim for an over-prize prize with the risk that the V flag 203s may be set off or to eliminate the risk that the V flag 203s is set off instead of giving up the excess prize. can do.

  In the first control example, the case where the periphery of the first variable winning device 6000 is brightly lit based on the operation of the operation button 300 and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit location does not need to be near the first variable prize winning device 6000, but may be a wide range (such as the center frame 86) including the first variable prize winning device 6000.

  Note that various modes are exemplified as means for changing the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. For example, a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and the data of the lighting mode is transmitted to the lamp control device 227 at the rise of the clock pulse, and the transmitted data is corresponded at the fall of the clock pulse. The lamp may be turned on. In this case, when turning off the light, data corresponding to the turning off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227. Also, a combination with a latch may be used.

  Alternatively, a plurality of types of lighting pattern tables may be prepared in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the table. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining this lighting pattern table and the above-described clock. Further, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or control may be performed using a serial port driver.

  The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be based on a so-called dynamic lighting method (a lighting method that produces a difference in brightness by changing the time interval of turning on and off) or may be based on a voltage level.

  In the first control example, a case has been described where the transmission lamp 227b is kept lit if the operation effect is successful, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on for a short period (for a moment). In this case, the attention to the storage channel 1231 can be improved. Further, based on the success of the operation effect, for example, the number of remaining balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 may be notified instead of turning on the lamp.

  In the first control example, a case where five or more spheres are stored upstream of the interference member 6930 and the sphere is caused to flow into the specific area 4830 by setting the interference member 6930 to the retracted state by operating the operation button 300 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the number of balls stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is set to four or less and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the stored ball can pass. You may. In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called “holding device”.

  In the first control example described above, a case has been described in which the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 is notified by display in the round game R in which the operation effect has been executed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the round in which the operation effect is executed may be advanced by one round, and the number of balls to be made to enter the storage channel 1231 in a round game after the round in which the operation effect is executed may be notified. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls from being excessively stored in the storage channel 1231 before the notification.

  In the case of notifying the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, a time that is insufficient to reach the number (continuously firing the balls) It is desirable to execute the notification at a time that is insufficient when the notification is performed. Thereby, even if the launch of the ball is continued from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball is excessively entering the storage channel 1231 at the execution timing of the notification.

  In the first control example, the case where the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation effect is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operating speed of the display pointer 719 and the number of displays may be controlled to be changeable based on a predetermined condition. Examples of the predetermined condition include, for example, the number of times the special symbol has changed up to the jackpot, the score accumulated according to the number of games, and the like. In this case, for example, when the number of times the special symbol changes is large or when the privilege is high, control is performed so that the difficulty level of the operation effect is reduced, so that the burden (the number of changes, The greater the number of games, the greater the benefit that the player can obtain from the operation effect.

  Here, examples of the difficulty level include the difficulty level of the operation effect itself, the difficulty level of obtaining a profit after the operation effect, and the like. When the difficulty level of obtaining the profit after the operation effect is high, for example, the operation effect and the execution timing of the notification accompanying the operation effect are in the latter half of the round game R (the period of time during which the specified number of balls can enter the storage channel 1231). (After) is exemplified. In this case, at the timing of the notification, a situation may occur in which the number of spheres that have entered the storage channel 1231 exceeds the number notified as the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231.

  Further, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself may be associated with the difficulty level of obtaining the profit after the operation effect. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is low, it is easy to succeed in the operation itself, but the time lapse until the operation timing is long. There is a possibility that more balls than the reported number will enter. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is high, it is difficult to succeed in the operation itself, but the time lapse until the operation timing is short. Can be prevented from entering more balls than the number reported as.

  In addition, since the duration of the remaining round game R differs depending on the difference in the execution timing of the notification, the adopted display effect may be controlled to be switchable in accordance with the duration of the remaining round game R. For example, when the duration of the remaining round game R is short, a display effect is configured with a moving image that can be completed in a short period, and when the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, the display effect is displayed with a moving image that lasts for a long period. The effect may be configured. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a problem that the loading of the moving image does not end in the remaining time of the round game R and the round game R ends without being displayed.

  In the above-described first control example, the case where the number of balls to enter the storage channel 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number, is not limited thereto, and the number of balls to enter is arbitrary. Can be set to For example, an extremely small number (for example, two) of balls may be made to enter the storage channel 1231 so as to increase the profit obtained by the player. In this case, at the start of the round in which the notification is made, the player can be prompted to stop firing the ball. At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 or the like may give a notification such as "Stop firing".

  In the first control example described above, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the operation effect and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 may be shifted by a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation of the operation button 300 using the state near the interference member 6930 (flowing state of the ball) as a guide, and it is possible to improve the attention to the operation effect.

  In the above-described first control example, the timing at which the error command is set in S1515 is the timing at which the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 is performed, and the solenoid 1510 is turned off. If the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 even after the setting, the discharge from the storage channel 1231 is continued, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, another movable object that regulates the passage of the ball of the outlet 1150 is provided, and is driven (excited) to allow the passage of the ball of the outlet 1150 when the power is turned on. May be controlled to change the state so as to restrict the passage of the ball. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the timing when the error command is generated. When an error command is set for deceleration due to dirt, etc., it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused to the player. After that, the error command is canceled by turning off the power or the like, and the power is turned on again, so that the game can be restarted from a state in which the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (a state immediately before the error command is set). .

  Note that the control of the movable object is not limited to the control depending on whether or not an error command is set. For example, control may be performed so that the state changes when the power is turned on and off. In this case, for example, when the game cannot be continued due to a sudden power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231.

  The control of the movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, it is not necessary to be able to restart the game from the state immediately before the error command is set until the case where the setting of the error command is based on a fraud and the RAM 203 is cleared. Before restarting the game, the operation of the movable object may be controlled to discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231.

  The form of the movable object is not limited at all. For example, a drive device is separately provided, and the means for preventing the discharge of the ball may use the regulating member 1600, or may be configured so that the interference member 6930 can be maintained in the extended state as a process at the time of power-off. The interference member 6930 may be employed as the movable member.

  In the first control example described above, the control flow is configured based on the number of rounds started in the big hit effect processing S2505. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control is performed based on the start of a specific effect, such as the start of a round game R in which a ball can pass through a specific area 4830 or the start of a round game R in which an operation effect is started. A flow may be configured. In this case, even if the round in which the effect is to be performed is changed due to a specification change or the like, a significant change in the control flow can be made unnecessary. it can.

  Also, the control flow is configured such that the flag turned on in the control flow in the case of determining the third round in the big hit production process S2505 is turned off in the control flow in the case of determining the fifth round. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed so that the flag is turned off at the end of the control mode set in the third round, that is, at the end of the round of the round R in the fourth round. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of changing the specifications when adopting the four-round jackpot game.

  In the first control example, the case where the interference member 6930 retreats at the start timing of the fifth round of the round game R has been described as the nineteenth operation pattern, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the evacuation may be performed 0.5 seconds before the start timing of the round game R. In this case, the round game R of the fifth round can be started in a state in which the ball whose flow has been restricted by the interference member 6930 is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

  In the first control example described above, the case where the operation button 300 is pressed according to the effect to emit light around the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the presence or absence of the effect, control may be performed so that the light around the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 is emitted when the operation button 300 is operated at a predetermined timing. In this case, the player's willingness to press the operation button 300 can be improved when the operation effect during the round game R is not executed.

  In the first control example, the case where the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment is controlled has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment may be controlled. In this case, by the operation of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, it is possible to easily set the number of excess winnings and determine whether or not an excess winning occurs.

  In the second control example, the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111 by the drive control in which only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by employing the open / close plate 1300 described in the first embodiment and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a drive (excitation) mode in which the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in a closed state for a predetermined period during the round game R, an auxiliary entrance is provided. The ball may flow down to 9111. In this case, the ball can flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 without dividing the board for guiding the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  In this case, by setting the period during which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state to less than 0.2 second, the discharge port 1150 is again discharged before the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (in a state where the ball is almost discharged). Of the ball can be restricted. Therefore, the sphere can flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 without reducing the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second control example, the case has been described where the display mode of the round number display unit 714 and the sub-round display unit 714b is controlled to be switched based on the elapse of the standby time TK. It is not limited. For example, control may be performed so as to be switched based on the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, by controlling to switch the display based on the fact that the number of the balls stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a is nine (the storage channel 1231 is full when the interference member 6930 is overhanging), The change timing of the display mode can be recognized by the player as the timing when the storage channel 1231 is full.

  The number inside the storage channel 1231 may be determined based on the value of the remaining ball counter 203p, or a separate contact sensor may be provided in the storage channel 1231 to directly detect the number of balls. You may do it.

  In the second control example, the case where the character of “+ chance” is displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 at a predetermined timing of a predetermined jackpot type has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, irrespective of the jackpot type, the character “+ chance” may be displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 during a period when a ball can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111, or the auxiliary entrance may be performed. The character “+ chance” of the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 may be controlled to be able to be displayed as a fluttering display during a period during which the ball opening 9111 cannot be entered. For example, when the number-of-rounds display portion 714 is displayed brightly, the character “+ chance” may be displayed.

  In addition, as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721, the character “+ chance” may be continuously displayed for a certain period, or displayed so that display and non-display can be switched in a short period. May be.

  In the second control example, the configuration is such that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is controlled to open to one side based on the jackpot type and the lapse of time from the start of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the occurrence frequency and the occurrence timing of the one-sided opening may be changed based on the jackpot type or the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the firing mode of firing the ball so that the ball reaches the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (reducing the effect of the firing mode).

  In the third control example, the case where the sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 is continuously discharged while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the interference member 6930 and controlling it to be in the protruding state at a predetermined timing, the case where the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 while the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is configured. be able to. This makes it possible to complicate the selection of the shooting mode of the ball by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing casually.

  In the third control example, the case where the type of the jackpot game shifted based on the passage of the ball through the specific area 4830 is one type is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there are prepared a plurality of types of jackpot games in which the number of rounds, the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained, the number of time reductions that can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, and the like are determined, and the jackpot determined by when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 You may comprise so that the kind of game may change. In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting the timing at which the shooting of the ball is stopped to aim at the passage of the ball to the specific area 4830, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the third control example, the case where the small hit is determined from the plurality of small hit types based on the numerical value of the small hit type counter value C6 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the small hitting A or the small hitting B (or another small hitting) may be determined without depending on the small hitting type counter value C6. In this case, the relationship between the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be made uniform.

  In the third control example, the case where the time (0.4 seconds) in which the upper limit of the number of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is two is set as the interval at which the small hits are continuously executed is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper limit of the number of ejected balls may be one (the interval at which the small hit is executed is 0.2 seconds), or the upper limit is three or more (the interval at which the small hit is executed is 0.6 seconds or more). good. In addition, changing the operation pattern of the distribution device 4850 with changing the small hitting interval is naturally allowed.

  In the third control example, the case where the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are limited to the balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a has been mainly described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as described in the fifth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball that has entered the second entrance 640 also joins the storage channel 1231. In this case, compared to the case described in the third control example, it is necessary to keep a larger number of storages in the storage channel 1231 as much as the ball has entered the second ball inlet 640 but flows into the storage channel 1231. Can be.

  Therefore, even if the ball is excessively guided to the second entrance 640 or is in a nail state, and the ball is difficult to be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a (or depending on the situation, In other words, it is possible to prevent a sufficient number of balls from being hardly stored in the storage channel 1231 in the time reduction game. Accordingly, by stopping the launch of the ball, the timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 can be maintained for a long time, so that the timing at which the player can select the timing for stopping the launch of the ball is increased. it can.

  In other words, the player can stop firing the ball by selecting a desired timing while grasping the number of remaining time savings, so that the player's concentration can be improved as compared with the case where the time saving game is played casually. It is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, means for suppressing the timing at which the player can select the timing to stop firing the ball may be employed. For example, by distributing the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 (including the case where the fluctuation time becomes long), even if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remains, the interval at which the small hit is executed. Is extended (the small hit is not executed until the fluctuation stop). Accordingly, it is possible to increase the types of modes in which the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231, and it is possible to provide a portion that is difficult to predict in the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, by providing distribution for the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2, a plurality of variations can be given to the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, and the effect can be complicated.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the sphere that has entered the second entrance 640 does not merge with the storage channel 1231, but acts on a sphere that flows down inside the storage channel 1231. In this case, the action on the sphere flowing down inside the storage channel 1231 may be changed according to the number (or frequency) of spheres entering the second entrance 640.

  As a first method, for example, a movable piece that can be displaced is arranged in a flow path of a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance 640, and the movable piece is displaced when the game ball collides with the movable piece. In such a configuration, while the movable piece enters the storage channel 1231 due to the displacement, when the game ball separates from (passes through) the movable piece, the movable piece retreats outside the storage channel 1231 by a return spring or the like. By doing so, the movable piece may enter the storage channel 1231 so that the flow of the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 can be inhibited (stoppable or decelerable).

  As a second method, for example, a sphere that has entered the second entrance 640 does not flow into the storage channel 1231, but partially enters (for example, a ball AP 54 shown in FIG. 46A). No.), the ball may flow down via the state, so that the ball may enter the first specific winning opening 1000a and contact the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to correlate the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 with the flow-down state of the ball inside the storage channel 1231 without using a movable piece.

  In the third control example, the case where the small hit A or the small hit B that is completed in 1.8 seconds is determined as the small hit type is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is possible to determine the small hit Z such that the opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times as described above in 0.1 seconds between the opening besides the small hit A and the small hit B. May be controlled.

  In this case, 3.3 seconds can be secured as a time for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Guide to the mouth 1000a can be facilitated. Further, since the interval between the open periods (the period during which the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state) is 0.1 second, the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3.3 seconds can be stored in the storage channel 1231.

  For the player, the small hit Z is positioned as a small hit that allows the ball to be more easily stored in the storage channel 1231 in one small hit than the small hit A or the small hit B. Therefore, after the small hit Z occurs, the game can be continued in a state where the ball is sufficiently stored in the storage channel 1231, and the firing of the ball is stopped in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830. The degree of freedom in selecting the timing to perform can be improved.

  In the third control example, the execution interval of the small hit game corresponds to the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830, and it is more profitable for the player to play the ball so that the ball easily enters the specific area 4830. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the probability change state with a predetermined probability, and the ball falls through the specific area 4830, and the fall flag (the flag for shifting the probability change state to the normal state or the time saving state) is turned on. It may be controlled to be set. In other words, since it is disadvantageous for the player to make the ball enter the specific area 4830, it is possible to execute the game in a game mode in which the ball does not easily enter the specific area 4830 while the probable change state continues. it can.

  Here, in the third control example, since three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231 at a time, the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 with a high probability. As a game mode in which it is difficult to enter a ball, for example, a mode in which the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) is set to 2 or less per small hit game, or a small hit game In order to maintain the interval in a period in which only two balls are discharged, a mode in which the holding of the special symbol 2 is not interrupted is exemplified.

  In the above-described third control example, as the small hit type, the small hits A and B in which the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 during the small hit game is small have been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as another operation mode of the small hit C completed in the same 1.8 seconds, the opening / closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state, and changes to the closed state after maintaining the open state for 0.2 seconds. Then, it operates in such a manner that it changes to the open state after being maintained in the closed state for 1.4 seconds, and then changes to the closed state after being maintained in the open state for 0.2 seconds. Control may be performed such that driving to the open position is omitted (or the drive returns to the closed position in a minimum time). In this case, at the time of occurrence of the small hit C, since many balls can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 while lowering the probability of the balls passing through the specific area 4830, the number of stored balls so far is significantly reduced (reset). S) can be given a meaning as a distribution of small hits, and by providing the player with surprise, the interest of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the small hit C is a great loss to the player that the meaning of storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 after a few changes of the special symbol 2 to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 is lost at a stroke. It is desirable to set the occurrence probability to several percent (for example, 0.1%) because it is a small hit that makes you feel. Further, in order to distinguish the small hits A and B from each other, it is possible to control such that an effect dedicated to the small hits C is executed by the third symbol display device 81, or the same effect as the other small hits A and B. The effect may be completed, and the discharge of a large number of balls may not be noticed until the player sees and confirms the storage channel 1231.

  In the third control example described above, a case has been described where the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed after the small hitting game, whereby the ball is entirely discharged from the storage channel 1231. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the opening and closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, the number of discharges is adjusted by another driving device arranged so as to be able to maintain the regulating member 1600 in the stored state, or the interference member 6930 is arranged in the storage channel 1231 to form the opening and closing plate. Even when 1300 is in the closed state, the number of discharged balls may be adjusted by the interference member 6930. In this case, for example, even if a long variation (for example, about 2 to 3 minutes) is selected as the variation of the special symbol and the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state for a predetermined time, the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 may be maintained. Can be prevented from decreasing.

  In the fourth control example, the case where the production round Rpt, the production round Rpa, and the V winning prize round Rv are successively configured with the start round Rpb being the third round has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, the jackpot game may be configured with 16 rounds more than 6 rounds, and the start round Rpb may be configured as the 10th round instead, or both the 3rd and 10th rounds may be configured as the start round Rpb. May be. In this case, by changing the timing of setting the corresponding effect start flags 223ya to 223yd to ON, the control flow (control flow of the effect switching process (S4701)) can be diverted, so that the specification can be easily changed. Can be.

  In the fourth control example, the case where the effect in the round game R and the effect in the interval period are separated has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if it is determined during the previous round of the V winning round Rv (the post-production gaming round Rpa) that the game ball passes through the specific area Rv in the V winning round Rv, the V winning round Rv and the post-production game An effect extending from the middle of the interval period to the round Rpa to the V winning round Rv may be executed. In this case, even if a long effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the effect from being delayed.

  In the above fourth control example, even if the launch of the ball is continued after "hitting" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the fourth round of the round game R. The case where the specified number of balls do not enter the detection sensor 1240 has been described because control is performed so as not to be ejected, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the round game R of the fourth round, the opening / closing plate may be closed (long-closed) at a predetermined timing and the ball may be discharged from the storage channel 1231. In this case, when a plurality of balls are on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300, an additional ball is added to the detection sensor 1240, and thus the fourth round of the round game R ends without waiting for a specified time (30 seconds). there's a possibility that. Therefore, as a disadvantage given to the player when the ball is continued to be fired after "not hit" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the effect performed in the fourth round of the game R is interrupted. The disadvantage is that you can only see it up to that point.

  When such a disadvantage is provided, it is desirable that the timing of displaying “do not hit” be a timing before the storage channel 1231 becomes full. For example, based on the detection mode by the detection sensor 1240 and the detection mode of the sphere passing through the discharge port 1150, the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is monitored, and the number of spheres inside the storage channel 1231 becomes full. When it is near the tongue (for example, seven), “Do not hit” may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where an extra ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 due to the slow execution of the display even though the emission of the ball is stopped according to the display.

  In the fourth control example, when the storage channel 1231 is filled with a ball, a predetermined operation effect is executed during the round game R, and if the operation effect is successful, advantageous information in the next round game R is displayed. A case has been described in which a predetermined profit can be obtained (a ball can pass through the specific area 4830) by playing the next round game R in accordance with the information, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a predetermined operation effect is executed in an interval between rounds which is started when a specified number of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240, and when the operation effect is successful, advantageous information in the next round game R is obtained. A predetermined profit may be obtained by playing the next round game R according to the information. In this case, since the operation effect can be executed in a period that is not changed by the game mode of the inter-round interval, the possibility that the operation effect is interrupted can be reduced.

  In the fourth control example, the case where the X-th ball is entered in the storage channel 1231 is determined by determining that the detection time of the ball by the detection sensor 1240 is long (2 seconds). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the start of the round game R, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is controlled by a predetermined counter (winning number counter 203w, discharge number counter 203x) so as to be determined in advance. On the other hand, the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 after the start of the round game R is added, and when it is determined that the total has reached the specified number (10 in this control example), the Xth ball is determined. It may be determined that the ball has entered.

  In the fifth control example, in the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52, the period in which the open / close plate 12300 repeats the change between the open state and the closed state is configured at one second intervals, but is not necessarily limited to this. It can be changed in design. For example, depending on the degree of deceleration of the ball when a load is applied from the rolling arc portion 12252, the frequency of the occurrence of a continuous ball, or the like, the interval may be shortened, may be increased, or may be different. May be combined to form an operation scenario. In this case, basically, the shorter the distance, the greater the total load that the ball receives when it moves between the open / close plate 12300 and the rolling arc portion 12252 and moves back and forth. The effect becomes remarkable, and a ball is easily generated.

  In the fifth control example, the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52 are the closing (short closing) of the opening / closing plate 12300 that cannot discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 and the opening / closing plate that can discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231. Although described as a difference from the closing (long closing) of the 12300, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operation scenario of performing an operation of closing (second long closing, closing for 0.4 seconds) in order to have a variation in length as a closing of the opening and closing plate 12300 capable of discharging a ball from the storage channel 1231 is described. May be provided. In this case, the longer the closing of the opening / closing plate 12300, the larger the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the larger the number of spheres that can enter when the opening / closing plate 12300 is next opened. can do.

  In the fifth control example described above, the case where the winning tempo (the period required until the specified number of winnings) is changed by short closing of the opening and closing plate 12300 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a long-time closing of the open / close plate 12300 is performed immediately after the start of the round game R, and from the start of the round game R until the ball actually starts being guided by the detection sensor 1240 (until the open / close plate 12300 is opened). ) May be long. In this case, when the opening / closing plate 12300 is in the closed state, it reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 12300, reaches the terminal surface 3251b before the opening / closing plate 12300 is opened, and falls between the detection sensor 1240 and the terminal surface 3251b. The hit ball heads to the out port 66 as it is.

  In another example of the fifth control example, a case has been described in which the V flag 203s may be set to off by a ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 during a jackpot game, but is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, in the case where a probability change state is provided as a game state to be shifted to after the big hit game ends, and a special symbol (for example, special symbol 2) mainly changing in the probability change state is provided with a small hit distribution, the small hit game is performed during the small hit game. The falling flag (flag for shifting the probable change state to the normal state or the time saving state) may be set to ON when the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 enters the third discharge path sensor 13813.

  In this case, for example, as the small hit type, the second switching device 13850 allows the small hit to allow the ball to pass through the third discharge path sensor 13813 and the second hit to allow the ball to pass through the third discharge path sensor 13813. The 2 switching device 13850 may be provided with a small hit that regulates. Thereby, it is possible to configure a gaming property in which the probability change state may be ended by the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the small hit game during the probability change state.

  In another example of the fifth control example, a case has been described where the discharge path sensor 13810 that guides the ball is switched according to the state of the switching devices 13840 and 13850 that are switched in conjunction with the operation of the solenoid 1510, but not necessarily. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined probability (such as a jackpot type, a game mode, and the like, and whether or not a ball is to be taken at a gate passing timing when a jackpot game is started by passing through a predetermined gate, is determined downstream of the outlet 1710. A rotating member that rotates at a constant speed is provided with a ball receiving portion on which the ball rides, and the ball is placed at a predetermined time (for example, two minutes) after the ball is loaded on the ball receiving portion. The rotating member may be configured to rotate so as to pass through a falling sensor that turns on a falling flag (a flag for shifting a certain state to a normal state or a time saving state).

  In another example of the fifth control example, while the resistance change member 13854 is in contact with the special rotation member 13851, the special rotation member 13851 does not rotate by its own weight of the regulating member 13852 (the resistance is not sufficient). (Large) case has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, while the resistance change member 13854 is in contact with the special rotation member 13851, the special rotation member 13851 may be slowly rotated (the resistance is slightly small) by the weight of the regulating member 13852. By setting this rotation speed to a rotation speed sufficient to return to the state in which the regulating member 13852 has fallen in 5 seconds, the state of the regulating member 13852 at the timing at which short opening and closing during the round game R is started is overturned. State.

  In another example of the fifth control example, the case where the resistance change member 13854 interferes with both left and right end portions of the defining portion 13830 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that interference occurs only at one end of the defining portion 13830 (the end where the operating member 13820 reaches when the solenoid 1510 is in the excited state). In this case, the arrangement of the regulating member 13852 is maintained during the interval between rounds, and the solenoid 1510 is excited to start the round game R of the next round, so that the regulating member 13852 starts to fall down, so that during the interval between rounds, It is possible to configure a high game rate with a high occurrence rate of an event in which a ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 is guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813.

  In another example of the fifth control example, the case where the increase in the resistance of the special rotation member 13851 is canceled after the interval between rounds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the resistance change member 13854 may be in contact with the special rotation member 13851 even in the inter-round interval, and the posture of the special rotation member 13851 may be periodically switched while the resistance increase is maintained. In this case, the special rotating member 13851 does not return to the original state at the end time or the start time of the big hit game, and also the number of times the special rotating member 13851 changes its posture in one big hit game depends on the game mode of the player, In addition, since the jackpot game is allowed to start regardless of the state of the special rotating member 13851, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and prevent capture.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points not to win more than the target number>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. And a ball entry preventing unit that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the entrance when a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a predetermined period by the detection unit. Machine A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly and vigorously on the operating member, an extra ball is required between the start of the operation of the operating member and the drop of the ball from the operating member. However, there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of balls may pass through the detection port because there is a possibility of passing through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means can make it difficult for the predetermined number or more balls to pass through the detection means. Therefore, irrespective of the magnitude of the momentum of the ball in the state arranged on the upstream side of the entrance, the ease of passage of the ball when passing through the entrance is determined by comparing a predetermined number of balls with a predetermined number of balls. It can be changed with subsequent spheres. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port.

  In addition, as the ball entry preventing means, means for changing the ease of passage of the ball in accordance with the detection result of the detecting means, means for constantly maintaining the ease of passage of the ball in the ball entrance, etc. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the ball entry preventing means includes: a container for accommodating the ball passing through the ball entrance; an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits the container; A first state in which the ball can pass therethrough, and a discharge switching unit that is switched in a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, wherein the storage unit is provided between the entrance port and the discharge port. A game machine A2 characterized by being formed with a volume that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, the accommodation means is formed with a capacity for accommodating a maximum of a predetermined number of balls between the entrance port and the exit port. When the balls are stored in the storage means while the means are maintained in the second state, the balls stored in the storage means can prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the predetermined number or more balls from passing through the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A2, the entering ball switching means is formed so as to be maintained in the second state while the discharge switching means is in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the accommodation means from the entrance while the ball is being ejected from the accommodation means. The operation timings of the discharge switching unit and the incoming ball switching unit may be simultaneous or different.

  The gaming machine A4, wherein the gaming machine A2 or A3 is provided with a driving unit which is also used as the discharge switching unit and the incoming ball switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the combined driving means. Thereby, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, after the incoming ball switching means starts changing the state from the second state to the first state, the discharge switching means moves from the first state to the first state. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that a state change is started in a state in which the state change is started toward two states, and the state changes are completed almost simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the accommodation means from being ejected from the ejection port after the entrance switching means is in the first state. While preventing (while preventing irregular winning), the ball switching device can be started to operate from the second state before the ball is discharged from the discharge port, so that the discharge from the discharge port is performed. As compared with the case where the operation of the ball-input switching means is started after the completion of the game, the number of balls flowing through the game area and passing through the ball-input switching means toward the out port can be reduced.

  The order of the state change may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching unit, or a dedicated driving unit may be provided for each switching unit to control the timing. May be.

  A gaming machine A6, wherein any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 includes a changing means for changing the maximum number of the housing means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodation units can be changed by the changing unit, so that the predetermined number is temporarily (for example, in a specific round). A state in which more balls than the number are accommodated in the accommodation means can be formed. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to reconfigure a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of numerical values are changed by using accommodating means having the same shape (it is possible to cope with a difference in specifications). As a result, development costs can be reduced as compared with the case where a shape is created for each specification.

  In the gaming machine A6, the entrance is connected to the first entrance and the storage means downstream of the first entrance, so that the ball flowing down the game area can pass therethrough. And a second entrance where the passage is switched by the entrance switching means, wherein a ball enters the accommodation means from the first entrance and the accommodation from the second entrance. In the case where the ball enters the means, the maximum number of accommodated means is changed, and the changing means selectively sets which of the entrances allows the ball to pass therethrough. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the ball entering from the first entrance and the ball entering from the second entrance can be stored together in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required space as compared with a case where separate storage units are provided respectively.

  In the gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interference means capable of projecting into the accommodation means, wherein the interference means interferes with a ball which is projected and stored inside the accommodation means, and A game machine A8 characterized in that the maximum accommodation number of accommodation means is changed depending on whether or not the accommodation means is evacuated to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the number of balls to be accommodated is changed by changing the volume inside the accommodation means without changing the path of the ball entering the accommodation means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the accommodation number without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the accommodation means, and is configured to be able to arrange a ball on the front side during evacuation. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of evacuation can be hidden by the ball arranged in front. This makes it possible to make the operation of the interference means inconspicuous while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Point AK to hide the number of stored balls>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. And a ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for the balls to pass through the entrance when the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a prescribed period. A game machine comprising: accommodation means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the entrance, and a visibility-reducing means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the ball accommodated in the accommodation means. AK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the visibility downstream of the detection port does not change, the effect of the effect of the effect of the ball passing through the detection port becomes insufficient, and the attention power may be reduced. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AK1, at least a part of the balls accommodated in the accommodation means is made difficult to be visually recognized by the visibility obstruction means, so that the effect differs depending on the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means. In the case of employing a mechanism for generating the action, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's expectation of the effect to be generated coincides with the effect to be generated. As a result, the power of attention for the effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AK1, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits the storage means, a first state in which the ball can pass through the outlet, and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the outlet. Wherein the accommodation means is formed to have a capacity for accommodating the predetermined number of balls at the maximum between the entrance port and the exit port. Machine AK2.

  According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK1, the ball can be stored in the accommodation means, so that the period in which the effect by the ball can be maintained can be extended.

  A gaming machine AK3, characterized in that the gaming machine AK1 or AK2 is configured to change the action of the visibility-reducing means based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the player's attention to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition can be improved.

  Note that the form of the predetermined condition is not limited at all. For example, as the predetermined condition, detection that an operation means operable by the player has been operated by the player at a predetermined timing may be employed. In this case, the magnitude of the deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means and the actual operation timing is detected, and the degree of change in the action of the visibility-reducing means is changed according to the magnitude. Is also good. For example, changes may be made so that the visibility of the ball accommodated in the accommodation means is better when the degree of displacement is small compared to when the degree of displacement is large. In this case, the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be improved. Alternatively, the reverse is also possible.

  Further, for example, a condition that a ball has passed a predetermined entrance hole may be adopted as the predetermined condition. In this case, for example, the degree of change in the operation of the visibility-reducing means may be changed according to the number of balls that have passed through a predetermined entrance in a predetermined period. For example, the change may be made such that the greater the number of balls that have passed through the entrance, the better the visibility of the balls accommodated in the accommodation means. In this case, the player can be motivated to fire more balls. Alternatively, the reverse is also possible. In this case, since the adjustment of the launching strength of the ball can be made eager, it is possible to suppress a casual game.

<Points for performing launch stop instruction utilizing this structure: Aim A>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. In a state in which the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a notification for urging the player to stop firing game balls toward the entrance. A game machine AKK1 characterized by being performed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly and vigorously on the operating member, an extra ball is required between the start of the operation of the operating member and the drop of the ball from the operating member. However, there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of balls may pass through the detection port because there is a possibility of passing through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AKK1, it is possible to execute a notification for prompting the stop of the launch of the game ball, so that the extra ball passes through the detection port by causing the player to play the game as the notification. Possibilities can be reduced.

  In addition, as the notification, the ball entrance is configured as a starting port, and the purpose is to prevent further ball entry that occurs when the number of reserved balls is full, or Although a lottery is not executed, a lottery entrance is configured as a special winning opening, and a purpose for preventing a ball loss which occurs when the end of the round game is approaching is exemplified.

  Further, the manner of executing the notification is not limited at all. For example, the notification of the purpose may be executed by generating a display urging the stop of the firing, or the notification of the target may be performed by extinguishing (prohibiting, hiding, and erasing) the display promoting (prompting) the firing. You may.

  In addition, the effect on the player when the notification is ignored is not limited at all. For example, by ignoring the notification and continuing the firing of the game ball, an abnormal notification (error notification) may be made to the player, or a ball loss may occur (the probability increases). Alternatively, the content other than the prize ball (for example, the right to shift to the special game state) and the expected profit may not be obtained.

  That is, it may be set so that if the game ball is fired or stopped in the firing mode as informed, it is not possible to obtain the profit that would normally be obtained. In this case, regardless of whether the game is fired in accordance with the notification or fired or stopped ignoring the notification, the type of special game acquired (the player May be configured to be variable.

  In addition, as the predetermined period, a period required until a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the storage means (storage channel) for storing the game balls that have entered the ball entrance (a period that varies depending on the type of ball entry) ), And a period until a predetermined control mode started by entering a game ball into the entrance is completed.

  In the gaming machine AKK1, a situation is provided in which a special gaming state is provided in a state where a lottery entrance port for executing a lottery relating to a state change of the entrance port is provided, and the number of game balls stored in the entrance port is 0. Game machine AKK2 characterized by the fact that the maximum number of occurrences occurs.

  According to the gaming machine AKK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK1, the number stored in the entrance can change the possibility of shifting to the special gaming state. In other words, the sense of expectation to shift to the special game state can be greatly changed depending on whether the number of game balls stored in the entrance is 0 or not.

  In addition, as the number of game balls to be stored, the number of game balls when actually accumulating game balls, such as a ball staying downstream of the entrance port, and the entry data to the entrance port are The number of pieces of data to be held (the number of pieces of hold) and the like are exemplified.

  A game machine AKK3, wherein the game machine AKK2 is configured to be able to perceive in advance a point of transition to a special game state based on the game balls being stored in the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine AKK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK2, the occurrence of an event in which a player stands before the transition to the special gaming state can be reduced by knowing the point in time when the gaming machine shifts to the special gaming state. .

  In addition, examples of the means for perceiving include a method of perceiving the flowing state of the game ball by making it visible, a method of notifying by a display device, and the like.

  In the gaming machine AKK2 or AKK3, even after the possibility of transition to the special game state occurs, a game ball can be added to the entrance to allow the ball to enter the special game state. A gaming machine AKK4 characterized in that it can be shifted to a special game state later than the scheduled shift.

  According to the gaming machine AKK4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK2 or AKK3, the timing of transition to the special game state is changed by firing of the game ball after the possibility of transition to the special game state occurs, It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from losing interest before shifting to the special game state.

<Points for setting the upper limit of ball entry: Aim B>
The gaming machine AKK11, wherein an upper limit within a predetermined condition period is set in the calculation of the predetermined number of balls in the gaming machine AKK1.

  According to the gaming machine AKK11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK1, the higher the frequency of the ball entering the entrance, the higher the frequency of the ball entering the entrance before the notification to prompt the stop of the firing is executed. The number of spheres can be increased.

  In the gaming machine AKK1 or AKK11, the gaming machine AKK12 is characterized in that the length of a predetermined period corresponds to a large number of the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine AKK12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AKK1 or the gaming machine AKK11, it is possible to easily grasp the relationship between the period required for the game and the gaming ball fired toward the entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11, and the gaming machine AKK12, the number of game balls that can enter the entrance by the end of the predetermined period is determined by the number of game balls entering the entrance. The game machine AKK13, which is configured to be changeable depending on the difference between the game machine AKK13 and the game machine AKK13.

  According to the gaming machine AKK13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11 or the gaming machine AKK12, the number of gaming balls that can enter the entrance by the end of the predetermined period depends on the entering mode. Since they are different, it is possible to cause the player to devise the manner of launching the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling free.

  In any one of the gaming machines AKK1 and the gaming machines AKK11 to AKK13, by stopping the launch of the gaming ball based on the notification, it is possible to prevent the delay in determining the profit based on the entering of the ball into the entrance. A game machine AKK14 comprising a fixed delay prevention means capable of executing control.

  According to the gaming machine AKK14, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AKK1, the gaming machines AKK11 to the gaming machines AKK13, the control for preventing the delay of the determination of the profit given to the player due to the stop of the launch of the gaming ball is prevented. Can be executed, so that a period in which the ball is allowed to enter the entrance (a period including a predetermined period) has passed before the scheduled profit is determined, and the player obtains the planned profit. Missing can be prevented.

<If launching is continued after launch stop indication is displayed: Aim C>
A game machine AKK15 characterized in that, in any of the game machines AKK1, the game machines AKK11 to the game machine AKK14, before and after the notification is executed, the state change state of the incoming ball switching means is similarly maintained.

  According to the gaming machine AKK15, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11 to the gaming machine AKK14, the game ball can be generated under the same condition even after the notification, so that the game ball can be generated. The degree of freedom in selecting the firing mode of the camera can be improved.

  Under the premise that the magnitude of the profit obtained by stopping the launch of the game ball and the gain obtained by continuing the launch can be changed, the launch mode of the game ball is determined based on the comparison result. Can be changed.

  For example, when the profit obtained by stopping the launch is early jackpot acquisition (acquisition of the right to shift to the special game state), and there is no time left to execute the jackpot game due to circumstances. (E.g., if the player has circumstances, or it is just before the closing time), even if abandoning the early jackpot acquisition, a lot of prize balls are paid out based on letting game balls win at the entrance. Acquiring is more profitable for the player.

  In this case, if the entry probability to the entrance changes before and after the notification is executed (the entry probability decreases after the notification), the player stops firing the game ball and shifts to the jackpot. There is a possibility that the game will end without watching the production. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine of the present case, if the firing of the game ball is continued even after the notification, the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the entrance may be obtained even slightly, Motivation to play until full time can be increased. Thereby, the operating rate of the gaming machine (for example, an index of the ratio of the length of the gaming time to the business hours) can be improved.

<Instructions for operation when launch stop notification>
In any of the gaming machines AKK1 and AKK11 to AKK15, an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and during the period in which the notification is being performed, a second notification for prompting the operation of the operation means is provided. A game machine AKK16 comprising an instruction means.

  According to the gaming machine AKK16, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11 to the gaming machine AKK15, the player is allowed to operate the operating means by notifying the player of the operation of the operating means. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming idle while firing is stopped.

  The gaming machine AKK17, wherein in the gaming machine AKK16, the second notification is updated in accordance with a timing at which the notification prompting the stop of the firing is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AKK17, the second notification is updated in accordance with the timing at which the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed, so that the player is bored compared to the case where the content of the second notification is the same each time. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AKK17, the second notification is configured such that the earlier the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed, the easier the operation difficulty of the operating means becomes. .

  According to the gaming machine AKK18, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK17, the earlier the timing at which the notification prompting the stop of the firing is executed, the easier the operation becomes to be successful, so that the gaming ball is eagerly fired at the entrance. be able to.

<Direction decision by previous ball entry>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. In a state where the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a predetermined period, the mode of effect relating to the game ball entering the entrance is being executed. A gaming machine AKK20 characterized in that the game machine AKK20 is defined regardless of whether a game ball enters the entrance in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine AKK20, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance relating to the game ball that entered the entrance.

  In the case where the gaming machine is provided with an operation means and performs an effect for prompting a player to perform an operation in the effect, a timing (timing in a predetermined period) at which a predetermined number of game balls enter the entrance of the ball is detected. May be changed according to the effect. For example, control may be performed such that the earlier the timing, the lower the difficulty of the operation effect. In this case, the greater the profit obtained by the player due to the successful operation effect, the more the launch of the game ball to the entrance can be promoted (the stop of the launch of the game ball can be suppressed).

  The gaming machine AKK21 according to the gaming machine AKK20, wherein the effect is configured based on a point in time at which a game ball enters a right-occurring entrance located below the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine AKK21, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK20, an effect corresponding to the time of entry into the right-occurring entrance opening is configured, so that the effect is associated with the actual flow of the game ball. It can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AKK20 or AKK21, when the first state is set, the rendering is performed in accordance with the manner in which the game ball enters the entrance when the first state is switched to the previous state. The gaming machine AKK22, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine AKK22, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK20 or AKK21, even if the manner of entering the game ball into the entrance in the first state during execution is the same as the previous state of the first state. The effect can be made different when the game ball enters the entrance of the game ball in a different manner, so that the player's attention to the effect currently being executed can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines AKK20 to AKK22, when the effect is executed in the first state, a start time of the effect is set before the first state is started. Gaming machine AKK23.

  According to the gaming machine AKK23, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AKK20 to AKK22, the effect can be started before the incoming ball switching means is switched to the first state, so that the switching timing of the incoming ball switching means The game can be continued while making it difficult for the player to be aware of the game.

  Further, when the effect is started during a period in which the incoming ball switching means is maintained in the second state, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the effect. In addition, it is possible to easily perform an effect that is continued for a long period of time, as compared with the case where the effect starts during the first state.

<Points to suppress unnecessary balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Delay means for delaying the flow of a ball at an upstream position of the entrance when the incoming ball switching means is in the second state, as compared with the case where the incoming ball switching means is in the first state; A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the out port, it is possible to strike the ball so that the ball does not fall from the operating member. There is a problem that a certain number of pitches actually occur depending on whether or not (the level of the technique of launching by the player).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the incoming ball switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing from the upstream position of the incoming port cannot be guided to the incoming port, the delay means operates. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to easily arrange the ball at an upstream position of the ball entrance until the ball switching device is switched to the first state. If the incoming ball switching means is in the first state while the ball is at a position upstream of the entrance, the ball is guided to the entrance. As a result, the effect of the player's launching technique on the actual pitch can be reduced, so that a beginner-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

  The mode of the delay unit is not limited. For example, it may be a drop restricting means composed of a horizontally long member for supporting the ball from below and restricting the ball from falling down to the end, or a projecting means formed of a projection for decelerating the ball by contact.

  In the gaming machine B1, the delay means increases the degree of delay in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side as compared with a case where the ball is arranged on the upstream side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases in a state where the ball is arranged downstream of the delay means, so that the attention of the ball flowing down along the delay means is increased. Can be improved.

  Note that the degree of the delay is not limited at all. For example, the velocity of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the incoming ball switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that a ball arranged on a downstream side has a shape in which an interval between the ball and the opening direction of the entrance is larger than a ball arranged on an upstream side. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in the downstream side of the delay means in such a manner that the distance between the opening direction of the entrance opening and the ball increases. Is formed, it is possible to suppress direct entry into the entrance to the ball when the ball vigorously flows down the delay means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the incoming ball switching means includes an ascent means for elevating a game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means comprises: A gaming machine B4, which is disposed below the lifting means in a state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is disposed below the ascending means in the first state, so that the ball can be moved from the incoming ball switching means. The ball can be delayed after being visually recognized by the player as if it had fallen. As a result, attention to the ball can be improved.

  The gaming machine B5, further comprising a climbing restricting means which is disposed on the upstream side of the ball flow path from the lifting means and regulates the upward movement of the ball and guides the ball in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is restricted by the upward restricting means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

  The gaming machine B6, wherein the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascent control means is provided with a rescue entrance for giving a predetermined benefit to the player.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, as a benefit different from the benefit generated when the ball passes through the entrance opening due to the ball that has been given a load when the ascent means is lifted and flew off. In addition, it is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the rescue entrance. Thus, even if the ball deviates from the downflow path to the entrance, it is possible to prevent the attention from being reduced, and the movement of the ball can enhance the interest of the player.

  The gaming machine B7 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, wherein the delay means includes a variable action portion having a different effect on a ball depending on a mode of arrival at the delay means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be made different depending on the mode of arrival at the delay means. As a result, it is possible to select different spheres to give different effects.

  It should be noted that the difference between the modes of arrival is not limited. For example, a difference in the arrival position of the ball with reference to the entrance port or a difference in the flowing direction of the ball before reaching the delay means may be used.

  In the gaming machine B7, the variable action section delays the flow of the ball reaching the delay means at a position separated from the entrance by a predetermined distance or less, while separating from the entrance by a predetermined distance or more. The gaming machine B8, wherein the gaming machine B8 does not act on a ball that has reached the delay means at a position.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B7, for a ball that is close to the entrance and cannot switch the state of the entrance switching means in time, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action section. On the other hand, an appropriate game speed can be maintained by not allowing the variable action portion to act on a ball that is far from the ball entrance and is sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball switching device.

<Point BK that makes use of the ball that arrived in the interval>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. , Compared to the ball that has reached the ball-input switching means while the ball-input switching means is in the first state, while the ball-input switching means is in the second state or from the second state. A gaming machine BK1 comprising a profit giving means that easily gives a profit to a player by a ball that has reached the entering ball switching means during the state change to the first state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the out port, it is possible to strike the ball so that the ball does not fall from the operating member. Depending on whether or not (the level of the player's launching technique), a substantial number of pitches occur, so that the player has to be careful in playing the game, and there is a problem that interest may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, the profit is given to the player by employing the profit giving means because the ball which arrives during the state change of the entering ball switching means can easily give the profit to the player. Since chances can be included in the magnitude of profits, it is possible to remove caution from games and improve interest.

  In addition, the mode of the profit provided to the player by the profit providing means is not limited at all. For example, a payout of prize balls, a lottery of a predetermined symbol, a right to shift to a high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game, or a determination of the next jackpot may be performed.

  For example, when the mode of the profit provided to the player by the profit providing means is a lottery of the special symbol 2, during the jackpot game, the ball is made to reach the ball entry switching means at a predetermined timing, so that the special symbol 2 The number of reserved balls can be increased to a predetermined upper limit. This suppresses the occurrence of an event in which the change of the reserved special symbol 1 is started because the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0 when the state shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Can be. Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is more advantageous to the player, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player wins unintentionally by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and disadvantageously occurs to the player. can do.

  In the gaming machine BK1, a ball is sent to the profit providing means by a load applied from the incoming ball switching means.

  According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which a ball is thrown to the profit provision means when the ball entry switching means is stopped.

  In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the profit that can be provided to the player by the profit providing means is equal to or more than a loss that can occur while the incoming ball switching means maintains the second state. .

  According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the player's attention to the profit giving means can be improved, and the game is performed so that the profit given by the profit giving means can be obtained. You can be encouraged to.

  The gaming machine BK4, wherein in any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, the profit giving means is controlled so that a plurality of types of periods maintained in the second state can be selected.

  According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, a period in which the profit giving means is maintained in the second state is selected in a plurality of types. It is possible to make it difficult to fire a ball in anticipation of the timing of change to the second state. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball through the profit provision means, it is possible to configure a gaming property in which the firing of the ball must be continued.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game launch>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A ball that can pass through the entrance in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance during a period in which the first state was formed before the entrance switching means maintains the first state; A gaming machine C1 comprising number changing means capable of changing the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, by the number changing means, the number of balls passing through the entrance hole in the state where the incoming ball switching means forms the first state, and before that, the incoming ball switching means uses the In the case where the first state is formed, it can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance, so that in a series of operation patterns in which the incoming ball switching means repeatedly forms the first state, the profit given to the player can be reduced. Adjustments can be made.

  The method of adjusting the profit is not limited. For example, due to having passed through a large number of balls through the ball entrance when the ball switching device previously formed the first state, the ball was then entered when the ball switching device formed the first state. The mode in which the number of balls that can enter the mouth may be suppressed may be used, or when the incoming ball switching unit next forms the first state due to a similar event, the profit of the player (not limited to outgoing balls, For example, the right to shift to the high probability state may be obtained).

  In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes: accommodation means for accommodating the balls passing through the entrance; an exit through which the balls pass when the balls exit the accommodation means; Discharge switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes. A gaming machine C2 comprising: an operation mode switching unit that enables a change in the number of balls ejected from the storage unit depending on a difference in operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the number of the balls accommodated in the accommodating means discharged from the outlet can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the balls remain in the accommodating means. And the number of remaining spheres can be made variable. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres required until the accommodation means is filled with spheres, and to physically change the maximum number of spheres passing through the entrance.

  The difference between the operation modes is not limited at all. For example, the operation periods may be different, or when a plurality of outlets are arranged, the discharge switching unit provided in which outlet is operated (operating target) may be different.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining an interval of discharging balls from the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, since the interval of discharging the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, regardless of the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means, The number of discharge balls from the discharge port can be defined according to the length of the period in which the switching unit is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls to be discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

  The mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load that the ball immediately before the discharge port receives from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or the flow path may be formed from the inner wall of the storage means. A rib that is protruded and applies a load to the sphere to decelerate the sphere may be used as the means.

  In the gaming machine C3, the gap maintaining means includes a protrusion protruding from an inner surface of the housing means in a flow path of the ball near the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, since the protruding portion is protruded into the downflow path, the downflowing ball is brought into contact with the protruding portion to decelerate, so that the ball having a short distance from the discharge port. And the falling speed of the sphere with a short distance from the discharge port can be prevented from changing greatly, and the falling speed of the sphere can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine C4, the accommodating means includes a discharge path for causing the ball to flow continuously in a predetermined flowing direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protruding portion is staggered from an opposing surface constituting the discharge path. A game machine C5, which is projected at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the protruding portions are alternately protruded from the opposing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the protruding portions collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path, thereby causing the balls to collide. It is possible to cause the ball to collide with the protrusion at predetermined intervals while being displaced in the vertical direction in the predetermined flow-down direction, and the action of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long time.

  In the gaming machine C5, the accommodation means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and that rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the falling velocity of the ball is formed to be higher than the falling velocity of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flow down at a higher speed than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so that the balls stored in the storage means. Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) for discharging the balls from the outlet can be kept constant.

  The gaming machine C7 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, wherein the entrance includes an opening for judging a special symbol big hit by passing a ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of times of the special symbol big hit determination and the number of entering balls into the entrance can be associated. Thereby, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed according to the number of times of determination of the special symbol required until the big hit is obtained.

  The gaming machine C7 includes starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting port can enter the accommodation means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine C8.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices provided can be reduced.

  Incidentally, the outlet includes a first outlet and a second outlet arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first outlet and the second outlet independently of each other. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are provided to the storage means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the ball is discharged from the second discharge port (under the same conditions). It may be arranged at a position where the number of remaining balls can be changed.

  In this case, the number of the balls remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, so that the flow speed of the balls flowing down the storage means changes. Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the number of balls discharged from the storage means.

  The arrangement of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodation means and the other may be arranged at an intermediate position of the accommodation means, or both may be arranged at the lower end, and a branched flow path for distributing the sphere may be arranged upstream thereof. You may do it.

  Further, the operation mode of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited. For example, they may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are opened, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the storage means can be reduced as compared with the case where balls are discharged from a single discharge port. Thereby, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls ejected from the out mouth during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  By the way, the first discharge port may be disposed at a lower end of the storage means, and the second discharge port may be disposed upstream of the first discharge port.

  In this case, when discharging the ball from the second discharge port, regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is stored in the storage means. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means varies, it is possible to easily keep the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls constant. Further, even if the launch of the ball is reduced due to clogging of the ball or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage means.

  Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on a downstream side branched at a lower end portion of the storage means.

  In this case, from the state in which the same number of balls are accommodated in the accommodation means, it is possible to switch from which outlet the last ejected ball is ejected through the operation mode of the ejection switching means. From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the discharge mode of the ball. That is, for example, in a case where the profit given to the player changes depending on which discharge port discharges the ball that is discharged last, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow-down state of the ball.

<During a round, as if the round was switched>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. An opening state switching unit configured to be able to switch between a period during which the ball easily passes through the entrance and a period during which the ball is hard to pass when the entrance switching unit maintains the first state. A gaming machine CK1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the ball is entered in the same manner in the winning opening in each round, the attention to the winning opening may not be sufficiently improved. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CK1, while the entrance switching unit maintains the first state, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball entry mode to the entrance by the opening-side switching unit. .

  The mode of the open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of a movable object disposed on the upstream side of the detection unit, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detection unit. May be.

  The gaming machine CK2, wherein the gaming machine CK1 includes a notifying unit for notifying a change in profit given to a player while the incoming ball switching unit maintains the first state.

  According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, it is determined that the profit obtained by the player has changed while the incoming ball switching means maintains the first state. Can understand. Therefore, the game mode can be adjusted by the notification of the notification means.

  The mode of notification by the notification means is not limited at all. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, it may be informed that a break is made in the middle of the round game R (a screen is switched or a sound is output), or the display of the number of rounds is turned off. , Sub-round may be displayed as if a new round game R had been started. In any case, assuming that the start timing of the round game R and the notification timing by the notification means are game breaks, the number of times exceeding the maximum number of control-controlled rounds (for example, 16 rounds) and the break of the jackpot game are By being set (for example, 20 breaks), the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CK2, it is configured to easily give a predetermined profit to the player based on the fact that the number of balls that can pass through the entrance is guided to the entrance switching means. A gaming machine CK3 comprising conditional profit giving means.

  According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CK2, when more balls than the number that can pass through the entrance are fired, all of them can be prevented from becoming useless balls. As a result, it is possible to link the enhancement of interest to the player by the effect with the substantial profit (payout of the prize ball).

  It should be noted that a notice may be given to instruct the player to continue firing so that the player does not stop firing by visually recognizing that the ball has stopped passing through the entrance. Various modes are exemplified as the mode of notification in this case. For example, a direct notification such as "Continue firing" may be used, a notification indicating the number of fires in a euphemistic manner such as "5 chances are great", or "Some objects can be seen through a ball" (In this case, it is not possible to visually recognize when there is no ball, and when there is a ball, irradiate a light beam that displays some figure or picture so that it can be visually recognized to a predetermined position near the ball switching unit and where the ball is stored. Is desirable).

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A switching drive unit that is controlled to be drivable by switching the entrance ball switching unit to the second state in response to a prescribed number of balls passing through the entrance for a predetermined period, and based on the prescribed number. A gaming machine DKK1 comprising: adjusting means configured to adjust the number of excess balls to the entrance.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DKK1, the adjusting means can adjust the excess entering ball to the entrance, so that the profit given to the player by the ball passing through the entrance fluctuates in a short time. In the meantime, leveling can be performed for a long time.

  It should be noted that the mode of the adjustment of the extra ball is not limited at all. For example, the system may be adjusted so as to be able to see the same number of excess balls every time, based on the specified number of balls that can be passed through the entrance during the first state by the entrance switching means, or may be a predetermined (plural or singular). ) With respect to the first extra ball that occurs when the first state is entered at the timing, the second extra ball that occurs when the first state is entered at another (plural or singular) timing is reduced. It may be adjusted so that the first extra ball and the second extra ball are balanced, or depending on whether the period in which the ball switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit The number of occurrences of extra balls can be distinguished and adjusted so as to balance them, and the case where the period during which the ball switching means is in the second state is short or long (between rounds). It can be an interval or during a round May be a status change), the number of occurrences of excess ball entrance may be set to be distinguished.

  In the gaming machine DKK1, the adjusting means is configured to be able to change at least one of a frequency at which the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state and a period maintained in the second state. Machine DKK2.

  According to the gaming machine DKK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DKK1, it is possible to pay attention to the frequency and the period during which the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state, and as a result, the player's attention to the incoming ball switching means Strength can be improved.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as the frequency of switching. For example, the number of times of switching may be a little, or the occurrence of switching may be determined. That is, in the case where switching to the second state is performed once in the predetermined period, the state is switched to the second state as compared with the case where switching to the second state is not performed in the predetermined period (when switching occurs 0 times). High frequency.

  In addition, when the frequency of switching to the second state is high, excessive entering balls may be easily generated, and when the frequency of switching to the second state is low, excessive entering balls may be easily generated. .

  In the gaming machine DKK1 or DKK2, the adjusting means includes a load applying means configured to apply a load to the game ball when the state of the entering ball switching means changes, and the load applying means includes the entrance port. A game machine DKK3 configured to change a load applied to a game ball in accordance with a distance between the game ball and the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine DKK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DKK1 or DKK2, it is possible to pay attention to the arrangement of the game balls when the state change of the incoming ball switching means occurs, and as a result, the player for the incoming ball switching means Attention can be improved.

  In the gaming machine DKK3, the load applying means is configured such that the closer the distance between the entrance and the gaming ball is, the greater the load applied to the gaming ball is.

  According to the gaming machine DKK4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DKK3, it is possible to improve the power of attention for gaming balls that are close to the entrance. In this case, the load applied to the game ball may be a load in a direction toward the entrance (a load along the opening direction of the entrance) or a load in a direction to retreat from the entrance ( Load along the opening direction of the entrance) or a load in a direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the entrance.

  For example, when the load is in the direction toward the entrance, the game balls arranged near the entrance are pushed into the entrance due to the load, and the expectation that excessive entering will occur. Can be directed.

  For example, when the load is in the direction of retreating from the entrance (or when a load is applied in a direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the entrance and the game ball is decelerated due to friction or the like), the load is applied to the entrance. A closer game ball has a greater degree of deceleration of the speed toward the ball entrance as compared to a game ball far from the ball entrance, and the interval between the game balls can be reduced. In this way, a plurality of game balls can be guided to the entrance in a lump, so that a sense of expectation that an excess ball is generated can be produced.

  In any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK4, the adjusting means includes a ball entry prevention means capable of preventing a subsequent ball entry into the entrance port with a previous entry into the entrance port, A gaming machine DKK5, characterized in that the maintenance of the entry ball prevention by the entry ball prevention means can be determined based on the driving mode of the switching drive means.

  According to the gaming machine DKK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK4, the switching drive means that the player does not visually recognize whether or not the ball entry prevention means maintains the ball entry prevention. Is determined on the basis of the driving mode, so that the player's imagination as to whether or not it is possible to enter the entrance is stimulated.

<Technical concept considering the V flag off route>
In any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK5, the game machine includes a profit ball entrance to which a predetermined profit is given by entering the game ball, and the mode of entering the game ball into the profit ball entrance is determined by the switching. A gaming machine DKK6 that changes in response to driving of a driving unit.

  According to the gaming machine DKK6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK5, the switching drive means can be used not only to switch the manner of entering the ball entrance but also to enter the game ball into the profit entrance. It can also be used for switching between spherical modes.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a predetermined profit. For example, it may be a profit that is positive for the player, or a profit that is negative for the player (loss, positive for the game store).

  The gaming machine DKK7, characterized in that the number of pieces that are adjusted to allow excess ball entry by the adjusting means in the gaming machine DKK6 increases so that it becomes easier to enter the profit ball entrance.

  According to the gaming machine DKK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DKK6, a game in which a profit by entering the profit ball opening is provided along with a payout prize ball as a profit provided as a result of excess entering the ball. Sex can be configured.

  For example, when the profit provided by entering the profit entrance is a positive profit for the player, it is possible to recommend that the player play a game aiming at excess entering ball.

  On the other hand, for example, if the profit provided by entering the profit entrance is a negative profit (loss) for the player, is it possible to aim for an extra ball even if the player is prepared for the negative profit (loss)? In order to avoid a negative profit (loss), the player can choose whether or not to give up (not aim) the extra ball.

  In the gaming machine DKK6 or DKK7, the profit entrance is disposed downstream of the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine DKK8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DKK6 or DKK7, it is possible to improve the attention to the gaming ball after entering the entrance.

  A gaming machine DKK9, wherein in any one of the gaming machines DKK6 to DKK8, a mode of entering a game ball into the profit entrance is set in accordance with a driving mode of the switching drive unit.

  According to the gaming machine DKK9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines DKK6 to DKK8, the switching drive means can be effectively utilized.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Switching drive means for switching the incoming ball switching means to the second state in response to a predetermined number of balls passing through the entrance opening during the first state, A gaming machine DK1 comprising: adjusting means configured to be able to adjust an excess ball entering the entrance based on a prescribed number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DK1, since the adjusting means can adjust the excess entering ball to the entrance, the profit given to the player by the ball passing through the entrance fluctuates in a short time. In the meantime, leveling can be performed for a long time.

  It should be noted that the mode of the adjustment of the extra ball is not limited at all. For example, the system may be adjusted so as to be able to see the same number of excess balls every time, based on the specified number of balls that can be passed through the entrance during the first state by the entrance switching means, or may be a predetermined (plural or singular). ) With respect to the first extra ball that occurs when the first state is entered at the timing, the second extra ball that occurs when the first state is entered at another (plural or singular) timing is reduced. It may be adjusted so that the first extra ball and the second extra ball are balanced, or depending on whether the period in which the ball switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit The number of occurrences of extra balls may be distinguished and adjusted so as to balance them.

  Note that the incoming ball switching means may be configured in a single arrangement or in a plurality of arrangements.

  In the gaming machine DK1, in the process of the switching drive by the switching drive unit, a load application unit configured to be able to apply a load directed to the detection unit to a ball arranged at a predetermined position on the upstream side of the detection unit is provided. A gaming machine DK2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine DK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DK1, the ball arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means can be configured to be easily detected by the detecting means by the action of the load applying means.

  The number of balls to which a load is applied by the load applying means is not limited at all. For example, the number may be one or more.

  In the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, as a state at the start of the switching drive, a post-driving ball that can be switched between an allowable state in which the ball is allowed to pass through the entrance and a restricted state in which the ball is restricted from passing. A gaming machine DK3 comprising state switching means.

  According to the gaming machine DK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass through the entrance regardless of the manner in which the ball flows to the entrance and the operation speed of the entrance switching means. Can be defined by the entry state switching means after driving, so that the degree of excessive entry of the ball into the entry port can be easily adjusted.

  In any of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, the load applied from the ball to the ball switching device is applied in a direction along the direction in which the ball switching device is driven during the switching drive. Machine DK4.

  According to the gaming machine DK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress a problem that the load from the ball prevents the incoming ball switching means from changing to the second state. .

  In addition, as a mode of applying the load from the ball, for example, the incoming ball switching unit is configured to be driven in a manner of falling (dropping) by the switching drive, and the own weight of the ball is applied to the incoming ball switching unit. The case is exemplified.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Switching drive means for switching the incoming ball switching means to the second state in response to the predetermined number of balls passing through the entrance during the first state, and After the switching drive by the switching drive unit is started, an allowed state that allows the ball to pass to the entrance and a driven ball state switching unit that can form a regulated state that regulates the passage of the ball, A gaming machine D1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the after-drive ball-entry state switching means switches whether or not a ball can enter after the entrance has been closed by the switching drive means, an extra ball can enter. Timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine D1, the entrance includes a first entrance and a second entrance, and the post-drive entry state switching means forms the restricted state at the first entrance. The gaming machine D2, wherein the second entrance is formed in the allowable state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number depends on whether the ball passes through the first entrance and the ball passes through the second entrance. It is possible to switch whether or not the ball can be made to enter the ball, so that it is possible to improve the attention of which ball opening is opened by the ball switching device.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first entrance is provided with a drop hole in front of the opening, and when the entrance switching means starts switching to the second state, the first entrance is closer to the first entrance than in front of the opening. A gaming machine D3, wherein a ball disposed on the upstream side is also dropped into the drop hole.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains upstream of the first ball entrance, the ball is dropped into the hole while the ball switching device maintains the second state. And keep it away from the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a ball exceeding the specified number from passing through the first entrance.

<Points where balls join the storage channel from multiple winning ports>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A storage means for storing a predetermined number of balls passing through the entrance, and a ball stored in the storage means based on the switching of the input ball switching means to the second state. A gaming machine EK1 comprising discharging means for discharging, wherein the input ball switching means can be switched to the first state before the discharging action by the discharging means is completed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EK1, the discharging action by the discharging means is configured to be able to be ended leaving the ball ended in the accommodation means, so that the number of balls that can be inserted into the entrance in each round is related. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference between the prize balls throughout the jackpot game.

  Also, since the balls can be accommodated in the accommodation means over a period in which the state of the incoming ball switching means is switched a plurality of times, the number of balls that can pass through the entrance while the incoming ball switching means is maintained in the first state More balls can be accommodated in the accommodation means. As a result, a guide to the frequency of ball entry can be notified, so that the player can be shown the gaming efficiency of the gaming machine currently playing.

  The means for indicating the game efficiency is not limited at all. For example, the ratio of the number of awarded spheres paid out to the number of spheres launched (prize spheres / number of launch spheres) may be used. An index indicating whether the ball has been passed may be used.

  The number of the entrances, the entrance switching means and the accommodation means is not limited to one, but may be plural. In this case, the entrance switching unit and the accommodation unit may be provided corresponding to each entrance, and the state of each entrance switching unit may be configured to occur in order, or each entrance switching unit may be provided. You may comprise so that a state may change partially simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine EK1, it is configured such that whether or not the discharging action ends with the ball accommodated in the accommodation means being ended can be adjusted according to the manner in which the ball is fired.

  According to the gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine EK1, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in a game in which game balls are fired toward the entrance.

  In the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the balls passing through the first entrance or the second entrance merge. The gaming machine EK3, wherein the accommodation means is formed by:

  According to the gaming machine EK3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the balls that have passed through the first entrance or the second entrance are merged inside the accommodation means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the first entrance. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts associated therewith) throughout the entire game can be made uniform.

  A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A container for accommodating a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entrance, wherein the entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the first entrance Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 wherein the accommodation means is formed in such a manner that the balls passing through the second entrance are merged.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance merge in the accommodation means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. The number of balls that can pass through the second entrance hole can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts associated therewith) throughout the entire game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the accommodation means is empty, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the first entrance and the accommodation by passing through the second entrance. A gaming machine E2, wherein the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second entrance are different. The player's attention to whether or not the entrance to the ball is opened can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance is set smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls are discharged when each entrance is closed. The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance, and the first entrance is opened during the opening when the second entrance is opened a plurality of times. A gaming machine E3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, the ball that has passed through the second entrance before opening the first entrance and the second entrance after opening the first entrance. The passed ball can make a substantial difference to the player.

  That is, if the ball passes through the second entrance before opening the first entrance, even if more balls than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, the ball is exceeded. No ball is ejected, and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated from the first entrance, so that the second entrance has the same number as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance. The player will only get the same profit as passing through the number of.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, and if more balls than can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, they are deducted. The player can get additional benefits.

  The setting of the number of game balls that can be accommodated is performed in various modes. For example, it can be performed by setting the length and thickness of the flow path in which the game balls are accommodated. Further, the change in the substantial profit given to the player is not limited to the number of winning balls, and for example, changes the substantial profit given to the player also depending on whether the ball can pass through a specific area. Can be.

<Points where the interference member overhangs>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. An interfering means which is disposed in a flow path of a ball passing through the entrance and is switchable between a protruding state in which the ball can interfere and a retracted state in which the ball does not interfere. Gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the interference means is disposed on the flow path of the ball passing through the entrance, the interference means is maintained in the extended state, so that the distance from the entrance to the interference means is maintained. Ball can be blocked in the path, and further balls can be prevented from passing through the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the prize ball throughout the jackpot game by the operation mode of the interference means.

  A gaming machine F2 comprising a stopping means for stopping a ball in front of the interference means in the retreat state of the interference means in the gaming machine F1.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhang state in a state where the ball is parked in front of the interference means. , The movement can be hidden by the sphere. Therefore, the operation can be made hard to be noticed by the player.

  In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the state of the interference means can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of the state change state of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means, so while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state, The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<It is difficult to predict the type of privilege from the number of stored items>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Operating means arranged on the flow path of the ball passing through the entrance and capable of operating in a plurality of operation patterns, and changing the profit obtainable by the player based on the operation patterns of the operation means. A gaming machine FK1 characterized in that it can be configured.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the special winning opening. There was a problem that there is.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, the operating means is provided downstream of the entrance and the operating pattern of the operating means can change the profit obtainable by the player. Of attention to the downstream side of the can be improved.

  The gaming machine FK2, wherein the gaming machine FK1 includes operating means operable by a player, and an operation pattern of the operating means is configured to be changeable by a player operating the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine FK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine FK1, the operation pattern of the operating means can be changed by the player operating the operating means, thereby improving the player's willingness to operate the operating means. Can be done.

  In the gaming machine FK2, a first privilege and a second privilege are set as profits given to a player based on a game ball passing through the entrance, and the first mode is set according to an operation mode of the operation unit. A gaming machine FK3 characterized in that the mode of acquiring the privilege and the second privilege changes.

  According to the gaming machine FK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player directly changes depending on the operation mode of the operating means, so that the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be improved. it can.

  The modes of the first privilege and the second privilege are not limited at all. For example, the first privilege may be set as the payout of the prize ball, the second privilege may be set as the determination of the probable change state after the jackpot game (as the V-variable gaming machine), or the second privilege may be set as the determination of the jackpot. (As a small hit game in a one-type two-type mixer).

  Note that the relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited at all. For example, the relationship may be large or small, may have another property, or may be in an opposite relationship.

  Here, as the one having the relationship of large and small, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege is both the payout of the prize ball, and the number of the payout balls in the first privilege is larger than the payout ball in the first privilege. When the number of balls to be paid out in the 2nd privilege is larger, or the profit given to the player in the 1st privilege and the 2nd privilege is a transition to the jackpot game state, and is compared with the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st privilege. Then, a case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

  Further, as another characteristic, for example, while the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a shift to the jackpot game state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is an award. In the case of paying out balls, or in the case where the profit given to the player in the first privilege is the indication of the playing state, the gain given to the player in the second benefit is to obtain the maximum payout prize ball. And the like.

  Further, as the conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the player's profit such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). Information), the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or information relating to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot). For example, the case of extinction is exemplified.

<Points if you pass "passing" without entering the entrance. Difference with "entrance">
A game area in which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area can pass, and a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance; A gaming machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball port to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball port; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball port. In the above, it is provided with an operating means arranged in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the entrance, and can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns, the profit that can be obtained by the player based on the operation pattern of the operation means A gaming machine FKK1 which is configured to be changeable and wherein a game ball passes through the entrance in the second state of the entrance switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in each round, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening depends on the situation on the upstream side of the special winning opening and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. The player's line of sight concentrates on the game board, and the entire game board cannot be effectively used.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FKK1, the operating means is disposed on the downstream side of the entrance and the profit that can be obtained by the player can be changed by the operating pattern of the operating means. Of attention to the downstream side of the can be improved.

  In addition, since a game ball that has passed through the entrance without entering the entrance will affect the profit that can be obtained by the player, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball. .

  In addition, if it is set that a profit equal to or greater than the profit obtained by the player when a game ball enters the entrance is given to the player by the action of the game ball passing through the entrance, It is possible to construct a game that expects a game ball to pass without entering the mouth. As a result, it is possible to improve the power of attention in the region on the downstream side of the entrance.

  In the gaming machine FKK1, a post-passing entrance where a game ball passing through the entrance is disposed so as to be able to enter, and a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the post-passing entrance after the passing. And a post-passing ball switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can flow from the upstream side of the ball entrance after passing and a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance after passing cannot be guided to the ball entrance. The gaming machine FKK2, characterized in that the entering ball switching means is configured to be able to shorten the interval of switching to the first state as the entering of a game ball into the entrance takes place.

  According to the gaming machine FKK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine FKK1, the presence or absence of a game ball entering the entrance affects whether or not the game ball enters the entrance after passing. , The attention to the entrance can be improved.

  In the gaming machine FKK1 or FKK2, a lottery entrance ball port is provided upstream of the entrance port so that a predetermined lottery can be started when a game ball enters, and according to the lottery result of the lottery entrance port. A game machine FKK3 wherein a pattern in which the state of the incoming ball switching means is switched is selected.

  According to the gaming machine FKK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FKK1 or FKK2, the switching of the state of the ball entry switching means occurs based on the pattern selected by entering the lottery entrance. That is, since the entry of the game ball into the lottery entrance is a condition for changing the state of the entrance switching means, the area for improving the player's attention can be expanded to the lottery entrance.

  In the gaming machine FKK3, a gaming ball that has entered the lottery entrance is configured to enter the entrance after the passing.

  According to the gaming machine FKK4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine FKK3, the role of conditioning the change in the state of the entry switching means for the game ball entering the entrance, and entering the entrance after passing In this case, a role of giving a predetermined profit to the player can be shared. Thereby, the attention power of the game ball can be improved.

  The gaming machine FKK5 according to any one of the gaming machines FKK1 to FKK4, wherein a plurality of rules are prepared for the incoming ball switching means to switch between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine FKK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines FKK1 to FKK4, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball entry switching means.

  In addition, as a plurality of rules, for example, a rule in which the length of the period maintained in the first state is different or a rule in which the state change start timing after the start of the flow of the game ball toward the incoming ball switching means is different. And the like.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize is possible based on the attacker's actions>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. And a profit switching means that can be switched in the game machine. In the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, when a ball can pass through the profit provision means, It is possible to switch between the case where the ball cannot pass through the application means. Game machine G1, wherein.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, when the ball can pass through the profit provision means, and when the ball passes through the profit provision means. Since it is possible to switch between cases where it is not possible, it does not obstruct the entry of the ball into the entrance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the entrance.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a stopping means disposed upstream of the profit switching means and switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed. The stopping means is switched from the stopped state to the passing state as the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the ball flowing downstream of the stopping means is switched to the profit switching. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the ball passing through the entrance is once stopped by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball gains at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent reaching to the switching means. Thus, no matter how the ball passes through the entrance while the entry switching device is in the first state, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching device at unexpected timing. it can.

  The gaming machine G2 further includes a period changing unit that changes a period during which the ball that passes through the stopping unit and reaches the profit switching unit after switching the stopping unit to the passing state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period in which the ball can pass through the stopping means and reach the profit switching means changes due to the period changing means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the playability of the game, and to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

  Incidentally, the period changing means may be means for changing the flowing speed of the ball passing through the stopping means, or means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state to when the ball starts to flow, Means for changing the number of balls stopped at the stopping means may be used.

  The gaming machine G4, wherein in the gaming machine G3, the period changing means is formed so as to be able to switch the number of balls stopped by the stopping means in accordance with a profit given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted based on the number of balls parked in the stopping means, so that attention is paid to the balls parked in the stopping means. Strength can be improved.

  The means for switching the number of balls parked in the parking means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means can be changed by a combination of a period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and a period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

  That is, for example, when the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened, and then immediately after that, the period during which the entrance switching means is set to the first state is extremely shortened, However, since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream of the stopping means is extremely small, even if a new ball does not enter from the entrance, a large number of balls are stopped at the stopping means.

  On the other hand, if the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state is sufficiently long, and then immediately after that, the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state is extremely short, of the balls that have been parked in the stopping means, In addition to the fact that most of the balls flow downstream of the stopping means and that no new balls enter the entrance, almost no balls remain in the stopping means.

  In this way, by changing the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and immediately after that, shortening the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state, the ball is stopped in the stopping means regardless of the launch mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the entering ball switching means includes a plurality of types of closing maintaining periods that are maintained in the second state, and the setting unit selects and sets the closing maintaining periods, and a predetermined period from an end point of the closing maintaining periods. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a lapse.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, since the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods in which the entering ball switching means maintains the second state, the ball is stopped. Since the period from when the ball is passed to when the profit switching unit is switched to the first state is formed in a plurality of types, even if the number of balls stopped in the stopping unit is the same, the ball passes through the profit providing unit. It can be controlled to be able to form when it does and when it does not pass. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the power of attention for the downward flow of the ball.

  Note that, for example, a period in which the entrance ball switching unit is maintained in the first state for a period long enough to allow a specified number of balls to pass through the entrance, and immediately after that, a period in which the entrance ball switching unit is maintained in the second state. When the setting unit selects the closed maintenance period in an extremely short manner (the ball passing through the stopping unit is shorter than the ball reaching the profit switching unit), the entering ball switching unit enters the first state immediately thereafter. By changing the state of the profit switching means from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set a period from when the stopping means enters the passing state to when the profit switching means enters the first state. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed the stopping means passes through the profit provision means. Thereby, regardless of the number of balls arresting on the arresting means and the mode of the arrest (for example, timing), it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the sphere that has passed the arresting means passes through the profit provision means.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the entrance switching means is performed not by the first operation caused by a specified number of balls entering the entrance, but by a second operation caused by the passage of a specified time. A gaming machine G6 including an intentional selecting means for intentionally selecting the game machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, by the action of the intentional selecting means, the switching operation of the incoming ball switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time, It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching depending on the passage manner of the ball at the entrance. Thereby, while the profit switching means is in the first state, it is possible to secure a long time during which the ball is not allowed to enter.

  The intentional selecting means is exemplified by a state in which the ball does not pass through the entrance due to the passage of less than the specified number of balls. This can be realized by intentionally clogging (making the ball not passing) the ball in the middle of passing through the entrance.

  A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. In the gaming machine provided with a profit switching means, which is switched in, the flow-down state determination means for determining whether the flow-down state of the ball to the profit provision means is normal, and a notification based on the determination result by the flow-down state determination means And a notifying means for performing the game. GK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, there is a problem that a considerable number of players try to gain an illegal benefit due to an improper act of applying a load (magnetic force or impact) to the ball before reaching the distribution unit. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GK1, when the abnormality is determined, the notification is made by the notification means, so that the wrongdoing can be suppressed. In other words, even if the flow of the ball is illegally obstructed, there is a high possibility that the notification will result in the inability to gain improper profits. Deterrent effect can be exerted.

  It should be noted that the manner of determining the abnormality is not limited at all. For example, the timing may be set such that the ball is completely discharged after the profit switching unit is switched to the first state, and the notification may be performed by detecting that the ball has not been discharged even at that timing. In this case, since the notification can be made before the ball passes through the profit switching means, dissatisfaction from the player can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine GK2 in the gaming machine GK1, wherein the flow-down state determination means makes a determination based on the number of balls arranged from the entrance to the profit provision means.

  According to the gaming machine GK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether the flow-down state of the ball is abnormal irrespective of the degree of accumulation of gaming balls from the entrance to the profit providing means. it can.

  In the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, the gaming machine GK3 further includes an arrangement suppressing unit that suppresses a change in arrangement of a ball on an upstream side of the profit providing unit after the notifying unit executes the notification.

  According to the gaming machine GK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, the change in the arrangement of the balls can be suppressed by the arrangement suppressing means, so that the player suffers when resuming the game when an unexpected error occurs. Losses can be minimized.

<Point 2 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize is possible based on the attacker's operation, there is a fool>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched in the game machine, wherein the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by the operation mode of the incoming ball switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching unit can be changed by the operation mode of the ball switching unit while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the ball is reached by the profit switching means.

  The gaming machine H2, wherein the number of balls related to the time when the entering ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means in the gaming machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the player can determine how the ball is guided to the profit switching means based on the length of the incoming ball switching means maintained in the second state. , It is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the entering ball switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a start state in which a ball is started to be sent to the profit switching means is formed while the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means only after the start state, the operation of the ball entry switching means is stopped immediately before the start state, Since it is possible to return to the first state, it is possible to form a playability in which throwing the ball to the profit switching means is not necessarily started just by starting the operation from the first state. As a result, it is necessary to directly check whether the ball reaches the profit switching means, so that the attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

  A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. And a profit switching means that is switched in the game machine, comprising: a state changing means configured to be in a state capable of changing the state of the entering ball by detecting the passage of a ball, the state changing means To the profit switching means based on the passing frequency of the ball to Gaming machine HK1, characterized in that it is configured to be switchable, the number of balls that can be spherical.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine HK1 is configured such that the number of balls that can be sent to the profit switching means can be switched based on the passing frequency of the balls to the state changing means. Can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the behavior of the ball that has passed through the entrance.

  In the gaming machine HK1, an upper limit value of the number of balls sent to the profit switching means in a predetermined period is set when a frequency of entering the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency. Machine HK2.

  According to the gaming machine HK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine HK1, it is possible to escape from the gaming property that it is better that the ball is passed through the state changing means.

  In the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, the game machine HK3 is characterized in that the ball that has passed through the entrance through a plurality of opening / closing operations of the entrance switching means can be sent to the profit switching means. .

  According to the gaming machine HK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, the ball entering the entrance at the time of the plurality of opening and closing of the ball entry switching means can be associated with the throwing mode to the ball entry switching means. Therefore, the variation of the throwing mode can be increased as compared with the case where the throwing mode to the entering ball switching means is independent by one opening and closing of the throwing ball switching means.

  In addition, how to count the number of times of opening and closing of the incoming ball switching means is not limited at all. For example, it may be counted based on the number of operations of the incoming ball switching means, or may be counted based on the number of occurrences of a combination of operations of the incoming ball switching means (for example, a preset operation pattern such as a small hit game).

  Operation means operable by a player, a storage state for temporarily storing a ball that has entered the ball-switching means, and a passage state for releasing the storage of the ball and allowing the ball to flow toward the profit provision means. A gaming machine HP1 comprising: a temporary storage device that can be switched between the temporary storage device and the operation device.

  According to the gaming machine HP1, the player can switch the state of the temporary storage unit at an arbitrary timing, so that the willingness to participate in the operation of the operation unit can be increased.

  The gaming machine HP2, wherein the profit given to the player is selected from a first privilege or a second privilege according to the operation timing of the operation means in the gaming machine HP1.

  According to the gaming machine HP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine HP1, the player's attention to the operation of the operation means can be improved.

  Note that the relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited at all. For example, the relationship may be large or small, may have another property, or may be in an opposite relationship.

  Here, as the one having the relationship of large and small, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege is both the payout of the prize ball, and the number of the payout balls in the first privilege is larger than the payout ball in the first privilege. When the number of balls to be paid out in the 2nd privilege is larger, or the profit given to the player in the 1st privilege and the 2nd privilege is a transition to the jackpot game state, and is compared with the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st privilege. Then, a case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

  Further, as another characteristic, for example, while the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a shift to the jackpot game state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is an award. In the case of paying out balls, or in the case where the profit given to the player in the first privilege is the indication of the playing state, the gain given to the player in the second benefit is to obtain the maximum payout prize ball. And the like.

  Further, as the conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the player's profit such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). Information), the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or information relating to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot). For example, the case of extinction is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine HP2, based on the selection of the first privilege, the passage of the ball at the entrance when the entrance switching means is set to the first state is restricted. Gaming machine HP3.

  According to the gaming machine HP3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine HP2, based on the selection of the first privilege, the ball is prevented from passing through the entrance, regardless of the state of the entrance switching means. If the player does not want the ball to pass through the entrance, it is possible to eliminate the need to temporarily stop firing the ball (perform a so-called "striking") at an appropriate timing. it can. In this case, since the player can continuously shoot the ball regardless of the state of the entering ball switching means, the desired game can be smoothly executed.

  In the gaming machine HP3, based on the selection of the first privilege, the gaming machine HP4 is controlled so that the game can be continued irrespective of the ball detection time by the detecting means.

  According to the gaming machine HP4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine HP3, it is possible to realize a playability of restricting the entering ball by clogging the detection means with a ball.

<Technical concept to secure the shortest time of R game longer than expected from firing interval>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry Ball entry switching means for switching between a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and detection means for detecting entry into the ball entry port. It is provided with a flow-down state changing means for changing a flow-down state of a ball flowing down the upstream side of the ball opening, and the flow-down state change means is configured to be capable of changing a pitch of the ball entering the ball entrance according to a predetermined rule. Gaming machine IKK1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a ball shot to a special winning opening is guided to the special winning opening almost without spilling the ball (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-177858). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to balance with other gaming machines, instead of being able to receive a large amount of prize balls in a short time in a jackpot game, the progress in a normal game is set to be slow. Have been. For example, by increasing the firing interval of game balls, the number of lotteries is reduced, and the time until a jackpot is obtained is increased.

  The firing interval of the game balls is directly linked to the exit speed in the jackpot game. That is, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the firing interval of the gaming ball may be determined in order to balance the game different from the jackpot game of the normal state or the probable change state with the jackpot game, in which case, There is a problem that the degree of freedom in setting the firing interval of the game balls is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine IKK1, since the flow-down state changing means changes the pitch of the ball into the entrance, the presence or absence of the flow-down state change means is set for each ball entry port, or a predetermined rule is set. By making adjustments, it is possible to set a ball entry mode (speed, interval) for each entrance. As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the firing interval of the game balls can be improved.

  In the gaming machine IKK1, the flow-down mode changing means includes a contact means disposed so as to be capable of contacting a game ball, and the contact means is provided while the incoming ball switching means maintains the first state. A gaming machine IKK2, wherein the gaming machine IKK2 is configured at a position different from a flowing trajectory of a gaming ball entering the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine IKK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine IKK1, the contacting means does not obstruct the game ball reaching the entrance in the first state of the entrance switching means, so that the game ball enters the entrance. Can be limited to the case where the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state.

  In the gaming machine IKK1 or IKK2, the flow-down mode changing unit includes a ball entry prevention unit configured to prevent a game ball from entering the entrance by a game ball entering the entrance. A gaming machine IKK3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine IKK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine IKK1 or IKK2, the ball entry preventing means is configured to prevent the ball from entering the entrance using the game ball entered into the entrance. Therefore, the timing at which the ball is prevented from entering the entrance can be associated with the manner of entering the entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machines IKK1 to IKK3, the flow-down mode changing means is configured to be able to extend a pitch between the balls into the entrance, as compared with a firing interval of the balls. .

  According to the gaming machine IKK4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines IKK1 to IKK3, the other entrances while extending the entrance interval to the entrance located downstream of the flow-down state changing means are extended. It is possible to prevent the interval between entering the ball from being extended. Thereby, for example, while maintaining a short interval between the entrance to the starting port, the entrance to the entrance (for example, a large winning opening) arranged downstream of the flow-down state changing means as compared with the interval between the entrance to the starting port. Can be extended, so that it is easy to configure a gaming machine that increases the number of prize balls in one jackpot game while shortening the interval at which the special symbol lottery is executed.

  In the gaming machine IKK4, the flow-down mode changing means includes a second ball entrance that is configured to allow a ball that flows down the game area and does not enter the entrance to enter the ball. Gaming machine IKK5.

  According to the gaming machine IKK5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IKK4, the frequency of entering the second entrance can be reduced by generating the entrance to the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to configure the flow-down state changing means by using the second ball entry port that is usually arranged in the game area, and it is possible to use the members in common.

  In the gaming machine IKK5, the flowing-down mode changing means changes a pitch of the ball into the entrance according to a predetermined rule regardless of the number of balls entering the second entrance. .

  According to the gaming machine IKK6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine IKK5, it is possible to prevent a change in the manner of changing the pitch between the balls into the entrance due to a slight difference in the number of balls into the second entrance. Can be.

  In the gaming machine IKK5, a flow path in which the ball that has entered the entrance port flows down and a flow path in which the ball that has entered the second entrance port flows down are configured to merge. Gaming machine IKK7.

  According to the gaming machine IKK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine IKK5, the flow path is configured to merge, so that the entering mode to the second entrance and the entering mode to the entrance are improved. Can be associated. This makes it possible to compose complex playability.

<Technical philosophy related to gaming ability that falls when passing through the gate>
A game area in which the game ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the game ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which the game ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance. Ball entry switching means for switching a game ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance to a second state in which the game ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and the game state can be changed by entering the game ball And a first state in which game balls can enter the variable ball entry means, and a second state in which game balls cannot enter the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine J1 comprising: a second switching unit configured to change the state according to the operation of the incoming ball switching unit.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. A gaming machine that improves the power of attention to the special winning opening by changing the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching corresponding to each round by opening in a short time when the ball is impossible (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, since the special winning opening is grasped as a target only for a game ball to enter, there is a problem that a degree of improving a player's attention may become insufficient. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the state of the second switching means for switching whether the game ball can enter the ball or not to the variable ball entry means relating to the change of the game state is entered. Since it is configured to change in response to the operation of the switching means, since the operation of the entrance switching means disposed around the entrance is related to the change in the game state, the entrance and the entrance switching The player's attention to the means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the entering ball switching means can change the state in a plurality of modes, and the second switching means can change the state in a different manner corresponding to the changing state of the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, if a state change occurs irrespective of the state of the state change of the incoming ball switching means, the incoming ball is compared with the case where the second switching means changes the state. Attention to the switching means can be improved.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of the state change of the incoming ball switching means. For example, a mode in which the length maintained in a predetermined state is different (long / short), a mode in which the interval between status changes is different, a mode in which the number of status changes is different, or a status change is started (until it ends) Examples of such different times, combinations thereof, and the like are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine J2, the variable ball entry means includes a plurality of variable ball entrances through which game balls can enter, and the second switching means includes a plurality of variable ball entrances provided corresponding to the respective variable ball entrances. A gaming machine J3, characterized in that a different switching member changes its state in response to execution of a different state change as the state change of the incoming ball switching means.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2, it is possible to improve the attention to the incoming ball switching means.

  In the gaming machine J3, the plurality of variable entrances include at least a disadvantageous variable entrance configured to be able to change a game state to a disadvantage side for a player by entering a game ball. Gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, the disadvantageous variable entrance is provided, so that when the ball enters the variable entrance, the game state changes to an advantageous side for the player. , The attention to the variable entrance can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J4, the plurality of variable entrances include at least an advantageous side variable entrance configured to be able to change a gaming state to an advantageous side for a player by entering a game ball, A change in the game state when a game ball enters both the advantageous side variable entrance and the disadvantage side variable entrance is the variable entrance on the side where the game ball entered later in the predetermined period. A gaming machine J5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J4, it is possible to obscure the direction of the change in the game state due to the entry of the gaming ball into the variable entrance until the end of the predetermined period. Attention can be paid to the variable entrance during the period.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a predetermined period. For example, in the case of a jackpot game, the period may be a predetermined round game R or a period until the end of the ending effect.

  The gaming machine J6, wherein any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5 includes a driving unit, and the driving unit is also used as the incoming ball switching unit and the second switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the control mode of the driving means can be simplified.

  A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 , The gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 , The gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 , Wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device (part of notification means, part of operation instruction means)
110 Main controller (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selecting means, part of flow-down mode determining means, part of fixed delay prevention means, adjusting means Part of)
300 operation buttons (operation means)
640 Second entrance (part of entrance, starting port, part of state changing means, lottery entrance)
640a Electric accessory (part of entry switching means)
1000a First specific winning opening (part of the entrance, first entrance)
1140 Projection (part of interval maintaining means, projection)
1150 Discharge port (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means)
1210 Thin plate member (visual difficulty means)
1231 Storage flow path (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-drive ball entry state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path, part of adjustment means)
1231a Guide surface (part of interval maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of interval maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Projecting part (part of interval maintaining means, projecting part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening / closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
1310 Plate part (lifting means)
1331 Ball entry prevention part (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 Restriction member (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, discharge switching means, stop means, part of arrangement suppression means, part of adjustment means, part of post-passing ball switching means )
2251 Second storage channel (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-drive ball entry state switching means, storage means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd specific winning opening (part of the entrance, 2nd entrance)
2840 slide plate (part of ball entry switching means)
3181 additional winning opening (relief entrance)
3182 Curved extension plate (lift control means)
3250 Drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b Terminal surface (part of falling hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit granting means, right entry entrance)
4850 distribution device (part of profit switching means and operating means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit provision means)
5900 Ball adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means, part of adjustment means, part of post-driving ball state switching means, part of operating means, part of arrangement suppression means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 Opening / closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening / closing member (part of ball switching unit, part of switching unit in open state, part of adjustment unit, part of load applying unit, part of ball entry state switching unit after driving)
9111 Auxiliary entrance (part of entrance, part of profit provision means, part of conditional profit provision means)
10112a Detection sensor (part of detection means)
10180 Intermediate ejection device (part of operation means, part of ball entry switching means)
11183 Second additional winning opening (part of the entrance)
11190 Opening / closing means (part of the entering ball state switching means after driving)
12250 Fall delay plate (part of adjustment means, load applying means)
13811 First discharge path sensor (part of profit entrance, part of variable entrance means, part of variable entrance, advantageous side variable entrance)
13813 Third discharge path sensor (part of profit entrance, part of variable entrance means, part of variable entrance, disadvantageous variable entrance)
13840 First switching device (part of second switching means, part of switching member)
13850 second switching device (part of second switching means, part of switching member)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is guided to a special winning opening without spilling a ball (Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-177858 A

  However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the degree of freedom in setting the mode of launching the game ball.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of freedom in setting the shooting mode of a game ball.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. Ball entry switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entry port and a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port cannot be guided to the entry port; Detecting means for detecting an incoming ball, and a flowing state changing means for changing a flowing state of a ball flowing on the upstream side of the ball entrance, and the flowing state changing means includes a ball entering the ball entrance The interval can be changed according to a predetermined rule.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the shooting mode of the game ball.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning device in the XII-XII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device in XII-XII line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 19 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 18. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of a variable prize-winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning device in XXId-XXId line of Drawing 21 (c). FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter and a big hit type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the second operation pattern. FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27 (c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening and a 2nd specific winning opening in a 4th operation pattern, and (b) is a 1st specific winning opening and a 2nd specific winning opening in a 5th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning openings. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A) to (c) are sectional views of the first variable prize-winning device taken along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the flow-down aspect of the ball which reached the 1st variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of a game board in a 4th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening and a specific area | region in a 6th operation | movement pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the time measurement of a 1st specific winning opening and a specific area | region in a 7th operating pattern. It is a figure showing a change. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 8th operation pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the time measurement of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in a 9th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific field in the 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of a game board in a 5th embodiment. It is a partial back view of a game board. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (A) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd specific winning opening in the 11th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd operation pattern in the 12th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning openings. It is a partial front view of a game board in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LII-LII in FIG. 51. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device. (A) is a figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 13th operation pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the timekeeping of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 14th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a back perspective view of a covering front board in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of a 1st variable winning device. FIG. 36 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to a line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXIIId-LXIIId in FIG. 63 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. FIG. 64D is a rear view of the variable winning device, and FIG. 64D is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXIVd-LXIVd in FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a change in the driving (excitation) state of a solenoid of the driving device, and a time-based change in the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member, and a regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. 70A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable prize-winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the first variable prize-winning device along line LXXd-LXXd in FIG. 70 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of a variable winning device, and (d) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device in LXXId-LXXId line of FIG.71 (c). FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a change in the driving (excitation) state of a solenoid of the driving device, and a time-based change in the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member, and a regulating member. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a change in the driving (excitation) state of a solenoid of the driving device, and a time-based change in the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member, and a regulating member. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a change in the driving (excitation) state of a solenoid of the driving device, and a time-based change in the position and state of a tip member, an opening / closing plate, an auxiliary opening / closing member, and a regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in a 10th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (d) are diagrams illustrating an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening and a time change in the state of the movable member in the round game R. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening, schematically showing the arrangement of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device in the first control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during a notice effect performed in a round before a timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and (b) is a timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of inside. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during a timing effect (operation effect). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of a timing effect (operation effect) in an interval between rounds immediately before a fifth round game R, and (b) is during a timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during a timing effect (operation effect). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which notifies that the round game of the 6th round is performed by a 3rd symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario table. It is. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening, an interference member, and a specific area in a 15th operation pattern, (b) is a 1st specific winning opening, an interference in a 16th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a time change of a member and a specific field. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening, an interference member, and a specific area in a 17th operation pattern, (b) is a 1st specific winning opening, interference in an 18th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a time change of a member and a specific field. It is a figure showing time change of the 1st specific winning opening, an interference member, and a specific field in a 19th operation pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening, an interference member, and a specific area in a 20th operation pattern, (b) is a 1st specific winning opening, interference in a 21st operation pattern. It is a figure showing a time change of a member and a specific field. FIG. 4 is a model diagram illustrating a counter and the like provided in a RAM of a main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the fluctuation | variation display data table among display data tables. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a status command setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit control process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the big hit operation setting processing. It is a flow chart which showed the contents of opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the notification process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a storage control process. 5 is a flowchart showing the contents of an operation counter upper limit value setting process 1; 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of an operation counter upper limit value setting process 2; It is the flowchart which showed the content of the storage valve operation process. It is a flow chart which shows V winning processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a hit related process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit production process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the display effect round command setting process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a lamp output process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of button input monitoring / production processing. It is a flowchart which shows a ball number confirmation process. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit type selection table 202b in a 2nd control example. (A) is a figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing plate and auxiliary opening / closing member in the 22nd operation pattern, and (b) showed the time change of the opening / closing plate and auxiliary opening / closing member in the 23rd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing plate and auxiliary opening / closing member in the 24th operation pattern in FIG. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which notifies that the round game of the 6th round is performed by a 3rd symbol display device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM in an MPU of a main control device in a third control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the content of a first random number table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit type selection table. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table. It is the figure which showed the time change of the open / close plate, solenoid, and distribution device in the small hit A, and the time change of the open / close plate, solenoid, and distribution device in the small hit B. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of a 3rd symbol display device. It is a figure explaining the relationship of a game state, the type of a special symbol, a fluctuation time, and a hold type. (A) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the jackpot game in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a start round selection table that defines the discharge mode at the end of the start round. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the game of an effect round, and (d) schematically shows the contents of a post-effect game round selection table that specifies the discharge mode at the end of the post-effect game round. FIG. It is a timing chart which shows a change of an electric state of a solenoid, a detection sensor, and a specific field, and a change of a display of a 3rd design display. It is a schematic diagram in display example 1 which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus from a start of an effect round to the start of a game round after effect in a time series. It is a schematic diagram in display example 1 which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus from a start of an effect round to the start of a game round after effect in a time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of a notice effect operation difficulty switching table and a discrimination display switching table. It is a schematic diagram in display example 2 which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus from a start of an effect round to the start of a game round after effect in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of the basic effect of a V winning round in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of a V winning round in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of a V winning round in time series. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device in this control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate operation scenario table. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the audio ramp control device in the present control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM in the present control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in a main control device after a startup process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit control process. It is a flowchart showing a winning process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating the contents of a setting value selection setting process. It is a flow chart which shows V winning processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a hit related process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the effect start flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect switching process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the effect round display mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of attention effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of operation determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of V display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the display switching process for halfway closing. It is a front view of the game board of a 12th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the change of arrangement | positioning of the sphere which flows down the upper surface of an opening / closing plate. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an opening / closing plate operation scenario table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device in a time series in the big hit game in which the 1st variable winning device operates in the 25th operation pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows in time series the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device in the big hit game in which the first variable winning device operates in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect switching process 3. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-round switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-round effect process. It is a front view of the game board of a 13th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the CXCIV-CXCIV line in FIG. 191.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning hole 63. The entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 1000, the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is formed by the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin-made arc member 70 connecting the rails on the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed in response to a prize winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When passing, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as a probable change state of the special symbol), For example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 is referred to as “the lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the lottery is performed for the entrance to the second entrance 640. The special symbol lottery to be performed is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  It should be noted that as the jackpot types of the special symbols, there are provided six types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot a”, “jackpot b”, and “jackpot c” (FIG. 22). reference). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000 is changed.

  When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) elapses, the lottery result is displayed. Is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of retained balls for the second entrance 640 (special) If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is started. When both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol), it is determined whether or not the winning is the normal symbol. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be in an easy state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  In the present embodiment, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given from the end of the special game state to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries, and the special symbol lottery is performed. After the completion of 100 times, the normal state is set.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol change state is given after the special game state ends, the special symbol change state is configured to end according to the number of special symbol lotteries. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), the pachinko machine 10 May shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed). In this case, after a jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c, which will be described later), a normal symbol time reduction state is set until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  In addition, the number of lotteries of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

  Further, the number of lotteries of the special symbol which is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the so-called probability is being changed (probable change), in other words, to the special game state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the special symbol is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the special symbol being changed.

  The normal symbol time reduction state (medium time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. In addition, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which the special symbol is not probable and the normal symbol is not shortened (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability increases).

  During a special symbol change or a normal symbol during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the normal symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is changed. A longer time is set as compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is being shortened. That is, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

  It is to be noted that, while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time. Alternatively, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when a normal symbol is hit may be configured to be greater than in the normal state. In addition, during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the ordinary symbol ( Only the winning probability of the second symbol) may be increased as compared to the normal state.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, at the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate in a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, is being executed. In this case, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation is completed, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry of the ball is performed. The number of balls is retained up to a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, Special symbols (first symbols) according to the jackpot a, the jackpot b, and the jackpot c) are shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 to change the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and a variable symbol display of a second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball at a normal entrance (through gate) 67. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the fluctuating display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", or "big hit c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A fluctuation display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", any of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including the odd number is also included. The variable display in which the main symbols to which are added is aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of a display (right-hand navigation) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and prompts the user to launch a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is positively changed or the normal symbol is reduced in time, so that the ball is shifted to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting the ball (right-handed), the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. As will be described in detail later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) is performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first entrance 64 As compared with the case where a special symbol is drawn based on the ball having entered the ball (a special symbol 1 lottery), a jackpot (a jackpot a) in which the maximum profit can be obtained is more likely. Therefore, in the certain state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit, or in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the right-handed execution is advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the positive change state or the normal symbol time saving state, the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol's probable change state or the normal symbol's time reduction state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol is in a probable change state or in a normal symbol time reduction state, a specific image (right-handed navigator) is displayed so that the player can change the special symbol in a probable state or a normal symbol time reduction state. It is configured to ensure that the benefits of

  In the right-hand navigation, the character "Aim for the right!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely obtain the benefits of being in the specially changed state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined that the player is performing right-handing even though it is not during the period in which the player should launch (right-hand) the ball on the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the image is displayed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not in a stable state or a normal symbol is not saved in time).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily opened in the normal state (even if the player hits right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, when the player hits the ball in the normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the player hits the ball at the first entrance 64 by hitting the ball left. That is, if the player makes a right-handed hit in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to hit the jackpot, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) loss of the player.

  When it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state, the characters "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that right-handing should not be performed (left-handing should be performed). Also, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal state by checking the presence or absence of the right-hand warning screen.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not the ball is right-handed, for example, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) into which the ball can flow when right-handed. Judgment is made based on whether or not the ball is hit.

  In the present embodiment, a right strike warning image is displayed when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (entered) the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being played, and the right A hit warning image may be displayed. Thus, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether there is any fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when detecting that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a, a signal indicating that the illegality is being performed to the hall computer is provided. You may comprise so that it may output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that the illegal operation is performed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the illegal operation is performed.

  Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable prize device 1000 is, for example, a case where a ball is detected in the first specific prize port 1000a even though it is not in the special game state (big hit state).

  When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable prize device 1000, a large character "Warning" is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a character "Please call a gate error attendant" is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and can promptly request a clerk in the hall for repair or the like.

  Each time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction in the game state than in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol change, and during the normal symbol time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, the chance of hitting the normal symbol increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during a certain change of the special symbol and during a time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during the certain change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than that during the normal state during the special change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per one normal symbol contact may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball flowing down the right side of the game board. Are configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. Also, the number of assembled normal entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the mounting position of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on when the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view, a second entrance 640 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on by the second entrance switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are different from each other, for example, the first entry. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins the ball opening 64 may be set to three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second inlet port 640 may be set to five.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, The object 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher during a special symbol change and during a normal symbol time reduction, and the time required for the normal symbol change display is shorter than in the normal state. In the display, the symbol “○” is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than in the normal state. Therefore, a state in which a ball can be more easily won in the second entrance 640 than in the normal state can be created during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as provided in the second entrance 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Here, the probability of a big hit in the case where a ball has won in the first entrance 64 and the case where a ball has won in the second entrance 640 is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. However, the probability of the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) that provides the maximum profit (departure) as the jackpot type selected in the case of the jackpot is determined when the ball is won in the second entrance 640. Is set higher than when the ball has won the first entrance opening 64.

  In normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim for

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the ball is passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be opened. Since the ball is easy to win in the second entrance 640, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right strike”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim at the big hit by the prize at the second entrance 640 while opening the electric accessory 640a by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Becomes

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second ball entrance 640), and the first specific opening that is opened in the left-right direction substantially at the center thereof. A winning port (large opening port) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery performed due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning port 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated, for example, at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player. (15 balls based on winning of one ball).

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300 that forms an open state for guiding a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening / closing plate 1300. Have. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or is hardly won. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the open / close plate 1300 upward, thereby temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, and switching between the open state and the normal closed state. Is operated alternately.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first entrance port 64. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the entrances 63, 64, 1000a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first exit 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. I do.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening and closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) composed of a solenoid with a large open port for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, and the like) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. I do.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 1000 has an inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof, and enters the second entrance 640 of the balls flowing down the right side of the variable timepiece unit 80 when the player makes a right hit. Almost all of the spheres that have flowed downstream from the sphere are guided to the flow path forming part.

  FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a covered front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covered front plate. An opening / closing plate 1300 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the power transmitting member 1200 and a power transmission member 1400 rotatably supported on the rear side of the main body member 1100 and applying a load to the opening / closing plate 1300 by rotation; A driving device 1500 that drives the driving device 1400, a regulating member 1600 that regulates the discharge of the sphere in conjunction with the opening and closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, and a regulating member 1600 that cover the main body member 1100 from the rear side. And a rear cover 1700 that is fastened and fixed as described above.

  The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 which is recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front to the back side. A housing part 1120 that is housed and formed partially through, a holding hole 1130 that is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side of the housing part 1120 when viewed from the front, and a ball flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 A projecting portion 1140 projecting along the path, an outlet 1150 for ejecting a sphere from the front to the rear of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation projecting to the rear side of the thin plate member 1110 and supporting the power transmission member 1400; Mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 protruding in a claw shape so as to be able to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 above the discharge port 1150. Provided.

  The housing portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed, a rectangular recess 1122 provided in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and A through-hole formed in a rectangular shape having a posture perpendicular to a straight line connecting a pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 operating along the right end of the recess 1122 forward and backward of the thin plate member 1110. 1123 mainly.

  The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly larger in width than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening on the back surface of the front plate 1200 is closed. You. That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the covering front plate 1200.

  The rectangular concave portion 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the depth of the concave portion is slightly deeper than the plate portion 1310. Accordingly, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is inclined (closed state), the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular concave portion 1122, and the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding from the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

  The protruding portion 1140 is protruded to a position where the protruding portion 1140 comes into contact with a sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200. The falling ball is decelerated by contacting the protruding portion 1140. Note that a similar protruding portion 1235 is also provided in the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap the protruding portion 1140 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

  The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a uniform protrusion height on the rear side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib.

  The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotation tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip portion 1421.

  The covering front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 to the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 in front view to the rear side. 1220, a housing portion 1230 extending in a box shape opened to the back side toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220 in the left-right direction, and provided at the upper end of the housing portion 1230. And a detection sensor 1240.

  The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220 when viewed from the front, the left side wall portion of the housing portion 1230 when viewed from the front, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow passage as a hole through which a ball flows down in the vertical direction. Unit is configured.

  The storage portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape in a front view, and has a storage channel 1231 formed with a width that allows a sphere to flow down inside, and protrudes rearward at a middle portion of the storage channel 1231. It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side in front view.

  The storage channel 1231 is configured such that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens to the back side is extended while being bent in a front U-shape, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 so that a sphere passes therethrough. To form a flow path. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the area where the storage channel 1231 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231.

  The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12) which is an inclined surface that guides the ball toward the rear side at the lowermost end, and rolling that rolls the ball guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. Surface 1231b.

  The angle of inclination of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the angle of inclination of the near side (right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 reaching the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane.

  The projecting portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the protruding portion 1235 is protruded to a position where it can contact the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 and decelerates the sphere by contacting the sphere.

  The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left as viewed from the front. This allows the ball that has landed on the inclined surface 1237 to roll leftward and be guided to the flow path forming portion.

  The detection sensor 1240 has a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the passing of the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the winning number is counted.

  The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between a case where the ball is rolled toward the detection sensor 1240 and a case where the ball is dropped without contacting the ball, depending on a difference in posture. And a pair of shaft portions 1320 protruding from the short-side end of the plate portion 1310 along the longitudinal direction, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view. And a loaded portion 1330 to be provided.

  The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls in the rising posture (open state), and the length in the short direction is covered in the rising posture (open state) in which the short direction extends in the front-rear direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered in an arc-shaped cross section at an upper corner in an ascending posture (open state) at an end opposite to the shaft 1320.

  The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

  The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry preventing portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an interposed transmission portion 1332 extended to the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the interposed transmission portion And an engagement portion 1333 protruding from 1332 to the right in rear view (on the side where the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

  The engaging portion 1333 extends to a position where the engaging portion 1333 interferes with the operation trajectory of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on an upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, not the corners but the chamfered portion 1333a comes into contact with the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. .

  The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body 1410 and an extension 1420 extending from the main body 1410 in the axial direction.

  The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a protruding pin 1412 protruding from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the direction in which the support hole 1411 is formed.

  The protruding pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the protruding pin 1412 is displaced with the linear movement of the distal end member 1520 due to the switching of the excitation of the driving device 1500, and the power transmission is performed. The member 1400 rotates.

  The extending portion 1420 includes a rotating tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, a pushing portion 1422 protruding forward from the rotating tip portion 1421, Is provided.

  The driving device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves the movable member by switching the excitation, and a tip member 1520 in an H shape (a shape having concave portions in the upper and lower parts) when viewed from the front, which is disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , Mainly comprising.

  The tip member 1520 is configured such that the upper concave portion is capable of accommodating the protruding pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, the concave portion is formed in a shape that keeps the protruding pin 1412 housed inside while the power transmission member 1400 rotates (see FIG. 20).

  The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extending portion 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, A surface on the member 1100 side is mainly provided with an extended portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 formed at the surface position and having a greater thickness than the extended portion 1620.

  The extending portion 1620 is arranged on the movement trajectory of the interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the interposition transmission portion 1332 when the opening / closing plate is in the rising posture (open state).

  The ball receiving portion 1630 overlaps with the discharge port 1150 in a tilted position (a position in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is located at a lower position, a storage state) (the ball is discharged through the opening of the discharge port 1150). In such a manner as to be narrowed so as not to be performed.

  Note that the regulating member 1600 is urged by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain a rising posture (a posture in which the end on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, a discharging state).

  The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710, which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. The ball discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the opening and closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1110 are covered. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be arranged along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without reducing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are juxtaposed at an interval through which a sphere can pass, the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 in the state shown in FIGS. By guiding the ball in between, the ball can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and to receive an irregular prize (for example, a ball hitting a nail or the like is skipped in the lateral direction without being guided to the opening and closing plate 1300). 1240).

  Although details will be described later, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, so that the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  The open state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. 10 and 11, the opening and closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated by imaginary lines in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. This prevents the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 from falling.

  The sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 rolls on the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 along the slope, and a detection sensor 1240 from the right end thereof. And enters the storage channel 1231.

  In the open state of the opening and closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the front plate 1200. Therefore, compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that the plate portion 1310 is in contact with the covering front plate 1200, the required material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening / closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

  In addition, by reducing the movement trajectory of the distal end of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the short direction, it is easy to avoid interference between a ball passing in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

  Here, although the details will be described later, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state, so that the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the sphere passing through the detection sensor 1240 is stored in the storage channel Is stored in Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state where the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the storage channels 1231 of the present embodiment are formed with a length capable of storing spheres up to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). When ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the tenth ball stops at the position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  Therefore, the tenth ball becomes a stopper, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, when the eleventh ball attempts to pass through the detection sensor 1240, the resistance becomes extremely large, and the eleventh ball can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, so that the balls remaining on the opening / closing plate 1300 flow down below the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged by switching the regulating member 1600 to the discharging state in accordance with the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere stops at a position where it is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. I do.

  When the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state. During the switching, the tenth ball receives the load from the ball entry prevention unit 1331 and the tenth ball is stored. It is pushed into the inside of the road 1231 (see FIG. 21B). In other words, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a state of closing the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening / closing plate 1300 is being switched to the closed state, the tenth ball entry preventing portion 1331 does not move. Block the opening of the detection sensor 1240 while abutting (rubbing) with the other ball, due to the difference between the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates. The moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened can be prevented, and the eleventh ball can be prevented from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, there is no need to limit the period from when the specified number of balls is detected by the detection sensor 1240 to when the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening / closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening / closing operation may be started one second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after the tenth ball comes into contact with the ninth ball (after the center of the ball is located on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the ball entry prevention portion 1331). In order to operate the opening / closing plate 1300, control is performed so that the opening / closing plate 1300 opens and closes 0.5 seconds after the detection by the detection sensor 1240.

  According to the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening and closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In the present embodiment, the prevention (delay) of entry of the ball can be performed only for the eleventh ball. That is, the first to tenth spheres can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special game state as compared to the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole sphere.

  For example, in a structure in which a ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 is once decelerated at the passing position to delay winning of a subsequent ball, it is easy to suppress winning of the eleventh ball, while it is easy to suppress winning of the eleventh ball. When the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 because the tenth ball also decelerates when each of the tenth balls rolls on the rolling surface 1311 in a partially continuous manner. There is a problem that the game becomes longer and the game is prolonged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the first to tenth balls are decelerated is not employed, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. Even if the balls flow down in succession, the balls can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at the flow speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

  In addition, even if most of the period during which the open / close plate 1300 is in an open state due to repair of a clogged ball has elapsed and the game has begun at the end of the period, the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 is not affected. Since there is no significant deceleration, more balls can be entered.

  Regarding the eleventh ball, no matter how fast the ball falls toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts tilting), regardless of the speed, The ball up to the tenth ball can be physically prevented from passing the eleventh ball through the detection sensor 1240.

  With reference to FIG. 12, the arrangement of the spheres staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 12, spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated.

  Here, a mechanism will be described in which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 have the same arrangement every time. First, the ball P1 that first enters the empty storage channel 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231a inclined backward at the lowermost portion of the storage channel 1231 and is arranged at a position where it contacts the front surface of the regulating member 1600. You.

  The ball P1 is weighted by the ball P2 that subsequently enters the ball reaching the lower end, and settles in the arrangement shown in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom of arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). That is, the pachinko machine 10 may lean toward the covering front plate 1200 side or may lean toward the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100 depending on the degree of fall in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 12, the protruding portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 1140 comes into contact with the ball P2. There is no contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

  The ball P2 is weighted by reaching a position where the subsequently entered ball P3 comes into contact with the ball P2. Here, in the present embodiment, even when the ball P2 is located at any position in the front-rear direction, the projecting portion 1235 arranged on the covering front plate 1200 is located on the right side of the ball P2 and the projecting portion 1235. The ball P3 is located between the positions where the ball P3 cannot enter and come into contact with the thin plate member 1210 of the overlaid front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the ball P2 is kept small).

  Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is located on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is positioned on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side in FIG. 12). ). Therefore, the ball P2 is moved toward the front side (the lower side in FIG. 12) by the load of the ball P3. Thereby, the ball P2 is settled in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the ball P3 receives a load from the subsequently entering ball P4 under substantially the same conditions (except that the front-rear direction is reversed) as the condition that the ball P2 receives the load from the ball P3. Settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  That is, the arrangement of the n-th ball in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n + 1) -th ball. Further, in the present embodiment, the fixing of the arrangement of the spheres is not performed by narrowing the storage channel 1231, but while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere, the projecting portions 1140, 1235 is provided. Thereby, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the ball is stored in a fixed arrangement every time an action of storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, the number of stored items can be unified each time.

  With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIGS. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 13A, the ball P1 is ejected and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13B, the ball P2 is ejected and the ball P3 is located at the position of the ball P2 in FIG. Is shown in the figure.

  As will be described later, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the open / close plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231. When the ball is ejected. The ball disposed at the lowermost end (the ball P1 in FIG. 12) is discharged to the rear side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following ball (the ball P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space formed thereby. The balls are ejected in sequence.

  Here, the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the extended portion (the flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage channel 1231 with respect to the horizontal plane. Since the flow speed is higher than that of the ball P2, a gap is generated between the ball P1 and the ball P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, the load applied from the ball P2 to the ball P1 at the time of discharging the ball P1 can be minimized, so that the speed at the time of discharging the ball P1 is uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P1. Can be

  After the sphere P1 is discharged, the following spheres P2, P3, and P4 flow downstream (left side in FIG. 12) along the inclination of the extending portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the ball P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the balls P3 and P4 come into contact with the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are changed to the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-back direction components, and pass through the positions of the leading spheres P2 and P3, respectively, and decelerate.

  In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231 by abutting the protruding portions 1140 and 1235, and the ball stored earlier stops. It is rearranged to the position where it was, and decelerates.

  As a result, a gap is created between the ball P2 and the ball P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load applied to the ball P2 from the ball P3 when the ball P2 is discharged can be minimized. The speed at which the ball P2 is discharged can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P2.

  That is, since the subsequent ball flows down the storage flow path 1231 for a longer distance, the manner of acceleration of the subsequent ball by gravity changes as the number of stored balls increases, and accordingly, the discharge mode of the ball P2 (speed at the time of discharge, There is a possibility that the discharge interval between the ball and the ball P1 may change. However, the change in the discharge mode is determined by the action of the above-described protrusions 1140 and 1235 (the ball that is discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball). (A function of eliminating a load due to gravity) by providing a gap between the ball and the sphere.

  Thereafter, the subsequent spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B to discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231. As described above, by forming a gap between the ball discharged by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the discharged ball is discharged without receiving the weight of the subsequent ball. Therefore, the discharge mode of the spheres (speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) can be made uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the projections 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the ball (speed at the time of discharge, discharge interval, and the like) uniform. Note that, in the present embodiment, the discharging mode of the ball requires about 0.2 seconds to discharge one ball. Therefore, by keeping the regulating member 1600 in the discharge state for 2 seconds or more, all of the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged.

  14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 1000. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is located above the engagement portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300. It is arranged at a distance.

  Since the interposed transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the upper side and is separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not receive a load from the interposed transmission portion 1332, and the regulating member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). The discharge state is maintained by the urging force.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 projects in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or smaller than the projected area of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

  FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device along line XIX-XIX in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 1000. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced in a counterclockwise direction. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

  The interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side with the rotation of the power transmission member 1400. In this state, the extension 1620 of the restriction member 1600 receives a load from the interposition transmission portion 1332, and the posture of the restriction member 1600. Is switched to the tilting posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

  In the open state of the open / close plate 1300, a load associated with the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and the urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the regulating member 1600. In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring is applied. , While maintaining the open / close plate 1300 in the open state while suppressing the driving force of the solenoid 1510. The large biasing force of the torsion spring enables the regulating member 1600 to be immediately switched to the discharging state, thereby leading to the effect that the ball can be quickly discharged from the storage channel 1231. Hereinafter, the adopted structure will be described.

  In this embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation trajectory E1 of the power transmission member 1400, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state. , The power transmission member 1400 is pushed out of the motion trajectory E1 along the rotation axis direction of the power transmission member 1400. The movement trajectory E1 is illustrated as the outer shape of the movement trajectory of a portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

  Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400 but the surface forming the rotation direction. And in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

  That is, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 1600 is directed to the direction in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is pushed back toward the closed state. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

  Thus, once the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the open / close plate 1300 in the open state can be prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the open / close plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the open / close plate 1300 at the maximum value.

  That is, after the solenoid 1510 was excited so as to generate a driving force sufficient to switch the regulating member 1600 to the stored state against the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of the operation, the applied voltage was reduced. However, the open / close plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

  Therefore, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be kept open and the regulating member 1600 can be kept in the storage state without being affected by the load.

  In addition, as the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, a load given by the weight of a sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, the opening / closing plate 1300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311. Therefore, when the ball lands, it receives a load due to the weight of the ball, and the number of balls frequently changes. 1300 is given a varying load. In addition, for example, since a load is applied to the regulating member 1600 from a sphere stored in the storage channel 1231, particularly a sphere arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231, the load is applied to the regulating member 1600. Thus, a fluctuating load is given.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening and closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked, the regulating member 1600 cannot be set to the discharging state while the opening and closing plate 1300 is kept open. Therefore, even if the open / close plate 1300 is illegally maintained in an open state, it is physically determined that more balls (10 or more balls in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the opening and closing plate 1300 from being fraudulently maintained in the open state and increase the number of prize balls to be obtained.

  20 and 21 illustrate the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 21 (a). 21C is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XXIb-XXIb, FIG. 21C is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21D is XXId of FIG. 21C. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device 1000 in the -XXId line.

  20 and 21, in order to facilitate understanding, only the open / close plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). The other components are not shown, and the state in which the open / close plate 1300 changes from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order.

  That is, FIGS. 20A and 20B show a state in which the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (a state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited). 20 (c), the state in which the distal end member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). 21), the tip member 1520 is displaced and is located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2. In FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced. A state where the reference numeral 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (a final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) is illustrated.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the near side is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross-section as used in the illustration is indicated by an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the ball.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 20 (c), although the power transmission member 1400 rotates, the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains its posture. Note that, in FIG. 20C, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300 abut.

  This allows the power transmission member 1400 to be energized before the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated from the closed state to the open state, so that the power transmission member 1400 starts rotating and the opening / closing plate 1300 starts rotating simultaneously. Thus, the driving force required at the start of rotation (at the time of initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharging state, the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and switches between the closed state and the open state. An intermediate state is set (see FIG. 21B).

  In the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, when the plate portion 1310 protrudes to the front side, the ball flows down to the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 (the right side in FIG. 21B). The ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21B), but power is transmitted by moving the tip member 1520 rightward in rear view (rightward in FIG. 21A). Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, the rotation of the open / close plate 1300 due to the weight of the ball can be prevented.

  Therefore, in the intermediate state of the open / close plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, it is possible to discharge the sphere from the discharge port 1150 and to suppress the ball from passing downward on the front side of the open / close plate 1300. .

  Thus, the problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharging state during the time required to discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 and the problem of shortening the closing state of the opening and closing plate 1300 (reducing the interval), which is opposite thereto. In the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the discharge of the ball is continued, the plate portion 1310 is extended to the middle position, and the ball is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200. , Can be achieved together.

  At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), the opening / closing plate 1300 is positioned so as to prevent the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position separated from the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 below, so that the rolling surface 1311 in the state shown in FIG. Can be prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. This can prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, and can effectively maintain the function of limiting the winning number of balls by the first variable winning device 1000. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21D, at the same time when the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be used also as the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

  20 and 21, the case where the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state is described. However, when the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is grasped by going back to FIG. 20 and FIG. can do.

  When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21D is changed to the state shown in FIG. 21B. Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operation direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the loaded portion 1330.

  That is, since the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state after the operation of the open / close plate 1300, it is impossible to maintain the open / close plate 1300 in the open state after the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state. Can be. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular winning in which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts being discharged.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball abuts against the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. In the present embodiment, this can be made impossible.

  That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the open / close plate 1300 is being changed from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward. When the sphere comes into contact with the sphere, no load is generated to support the opening / closing plate 1300 acting in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 descends with the weight of the ball, so that the ball cannot be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the irregular winning from occurring.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 22B is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22 (b)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored. , And the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot A, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot B is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 49” (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot B is reached, the jackpot game of eight rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 1200 prize balls.

  The jackpot C is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot C is reached, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 600 prize balls.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), in any case, the first variable prize winning device 1000 sets the first operation pattern. Works with Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out that can be obtained by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. As the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game increases.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, while a jackpot of 4 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 50%. So basically you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the four-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the fifteen-round jackpot game, so that the launch of a ball aiming at the subsequent jackpot acquisition can be started earlier.

  On the other hand, when a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the second entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, The jackpot a is defined in association with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the big hit a, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 as in the case of the big hit A. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot b is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 89” (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot b is reached, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 (details will be described later). In this case, the prize balls paid out to the player are necessarily less than 2250 (1200 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of the jackpot a.

  The jackpot c is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot c, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 (details will be described later). In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of jackpot a, and the prize paid out in each round The time required for ball and jackpot games fluctuates.

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn in a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the type of the big hit. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, and the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, the time required for the jackpot game can be made longer when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and big hit c) than when the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when the jackpot (the jackpot b and the jackpot c) with a small number of payouts is acquired, the timing at which the ball is hit for the next jackpot is delayed as compared with the case of the jackpot a.

  Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency (Including the number of payouts).

  As a result, the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entry to the second entrance 640) is divided into a jackpot (a jackpot a) in which a large amount of payout can be received in a time efficient manner, and a time inefficient payout. It is possible to provide a small number of jackpots (jackpot b and jackpot c), and it is possible to increase the profit of the player obtained when the jackpot a is acquired. As a result, the difference in the number of payouts when playing the game continuously for a predetermined time while maintaining the probability of obtaining the jackpot a large (the difference between the maximum value of the total number of obtained balls and the minimum value of the total number of obtained balls). (Difference) can be increased.

  As described above, during the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the hit of the normal symbol is reduced. It is set to be longer (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if the big hit is made, the special design prone to the big hit a (maximum hitting big hit) is repeated. This makes it easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as the determination value that is the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, the normal symbol It is determined whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23 (b) is a time measurement of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. FIG. 23C is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the third operation pattern.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the first operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time period in which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be entirely discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored spheres. Is done. Therefore, in order to discharge 10 balls, it takes 2 seconds for the furniture.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  In the first operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which no ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the ball during the first interval time Int1 between rounds. Therefore, even in the second and subsequent rounds, the specified number (in this embodiment, ten) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of each round is achieved. Then, the round game R can be ended without waiting for 30 seconds. Therefore, the round game R can be advanced promptly.

  Thereafter, in the same manner, the round game R of the third round up to the fifteenth round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between the rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

  The second interval time between rounds Int2 is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored spheres. Is done. Therefore, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is five, for example, when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the balls are discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. However, five spheres still remain in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  In the second operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the ball during the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third to fifteenth rounds are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds between each round game R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game are compared. The ball can be fired at intervals of at least 0.6 seconds.

  First, when a jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, the time required for ten balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is at least 6 seconds. When the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time between rounds Int1, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) × 15R + ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10C × 15R).

  On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, ten balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only five balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) × 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 ( 2s) + ED (11s)). Further, the payout number is 1200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only five balls can be won in the round game R of the second and subsequent rounds.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, it takes three times or more as long as the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern. Will be dramatically worse.

  Thereby, the interest of the player in the case of performing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern can be improved. That is, the rare value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a can be increased, the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot can be improved, and the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Although the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 second, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be set to various numerical values, and can be changed in each round.

  For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to use

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time between rounds Int2 is set to 0.5 second, since only two balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If 10 are stored, the round game R is started with eight balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the payout number is also small (30).

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, since seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If the individual balls are stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) of payouts can be desired.

  In addition, the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds can be set to 2.0 seconds (or more time). In this case, at the start of the immediately following round game R, no balls remain in the storage channel 1231 and ten balls can be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to reduce the progress time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  The state in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the second round of the round game R due to the discharge of the balls during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is formed. In this embodiment, ten pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls can be paid out, and the first operating time T1 of each round can be obtained. The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, the prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as in the first operation pattern, while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

  Thereafter, similarly, the third to tenth round round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 interposed between the round round games R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the tenth round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the eleventh round game R is started.

  In the eleventh round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by a timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the eleventh round round game R, The open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eleventh round of the round game R ends.

  Thereafter, similarly, the twelfth to fifteenth round round games R are repeated with the second inter-round interval time Int2 interposed between the round games R, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  By discharging the ball during the second interval time Int2 between rounds, a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in the eleventh round and thereafter can be formed. Therefore, after the eleventh round, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

  Also, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is reduced as compared to the tenth round. Accordingly, the total number of payouts is smaller than the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 = (10C × 10R + 5C × 5R) × 15), and the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is reduced. It can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on what round game is being performed.

  In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the end of the round is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mode in which the number of payouts is small at the beginning but the number of payouts increases toward the end, or a mode in which the number of payouts has a peak in a middle round.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is changed depending on the number of the round game R to be performed, so that the jackpot game is moderated and the interest of the player is improved. Can be done.

  In addition, when the jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, the player does not change from the first operation pattern until the round game R of the tenth round. A jackpot game can be performed with the expectation that the number can be obtained.

  Further, the second interval time Int2 between rounds set in one second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary numerical value corresponding to each round for each big hit type. For example, in some jackpot types, the second interval time Int2 between the rounds of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds, and in another certain jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between the rounds of the third operation pattern is set. For example, the interval time Int2 can be set to 0.5 seconds in an odd round and set to 1.0 seconds in an even round.

  That is, by further subdividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games having different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the eleventh round, it is possible to make the number of balls finally paid out unpredictable until the jackpot game ends, and it is possible to improve the attention to the jackpot game.

  Further, the change in the degree of payout and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) may be made to correspond. For example, when a jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, a figure of a running character is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the stamina of the character remains in the beginning (the first round). The running character runs smoothly, and many prize balls are paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina is depleted (in the last round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and starts walking, and in conjunction with that, the payout of prize balls decreases.

  In this way, by associating the degree of prize ball payout with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible for the player to easily transfer emotions to the liquid crystal effect, and to enhance the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

  In addition, by performing the jackpot game in the above-described second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, each round can be advanced based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game can be performed in a predetermined manner. It can progress over the production time. In other words, for example, when the ball wins in the first specific winning opening 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the time of the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of the moving image that is loop-reproduced for a predetermined rendering time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from ending before the effect during the big hit is completely viewed.

  In addition, when performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a support message from a character (such as “Try your best”) is displayed, the longer the time of the jackpot game, the easier it is to display a support message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thereby, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be advanced (rather happily) without giving stress to the player.

  On the other hand, it is also possible to display a mode in which the player gives more stress. For example, a case will be described in which a character that runs during a jackpot game is displayed, and that the character takes a break in a break area during an interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, the interval between rounds is reached each time a predetermined number of balls are won, so that the character can complete the run without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the eleventh round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the interval between rounds will not be reached unless the specified number of prizes have been won and the maximum value of the first operation time T1 (30 seconds) has to be waited. Therefore, the effect of accumulating fatigue can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between the rounds is short in the first place, the character can be produced. It is possible to perform the production that there is no time to rest. Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the exhausted character and give stress to the player, the ambition of the player to recover in the next big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, in the case where the same display is performed, an effect may be provided in which the character rehydrates at the timing of winning. In this case, while the first operation pattern can sufficiently supply water, in the eleventh and subsequent rounds of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the number of times of water supply (the number of winnings) is the first. Since the running period of the character (the period of the jackpot game) becomes longer as well as the operation pattern becomes shorter, the amount of water that can be replenished is shorter than the sweat from the character, and the character becomes tired more and more. A number of effects can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). As a result, it is possible to make the state of the character correspond to the profit (payout ball including time efficiency) obtained by the player, and to determine how much the jackpot that the player has won is , A jackpot or a super jackpot) can be easily recognized by the player through the effect of the entire jackpot game.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed has been described. However, the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment has the number of balls that can be stored inside. Is configured to be changeable. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the arrangement of the balls stored in the second storage channel 2251 when a ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255 a are illustrated by hidden lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a driving device 1500 similar to those of the first embodiment, and a body member slightly different from that of the first embodiment. 2100, a covered front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and further a second variable winning device 2800 newly introduced in the second embodiment. The second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable prize device 2800 includes a second specific prize port 2255a through which a ball serving as a payout criterion passes during a big hit game.

  The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a which is normally closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). (Or until 10 balls are won), the operation of releasing is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Although the details will be described later, the opening operation can be performed in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern and fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large number of balls win the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  The main body member 2100 has the same configuration as the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the accommodating portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170). , A slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole formed in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is a through hole similarly formed in the thin plate member 1110 and which can be fitted with the second detection sensor 2255. A pair of wall portions arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and a drive guide rib 2183 extending linearly in the left and right direction; and a pair of drive guide ribs along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110. A transmission guide rib 2184 whose walls are arranged side by side in parallel and extend linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 21 that supports the transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800. And 5, a mainly includes.

  The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole for guiding the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 provided on the cover front plate 2200 is inserted.

  Each of the ribs 2183 and 2184 is a rib that guides a sliding operation of the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

  The covering front plate 2200 is connected to the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the housing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) provided in the housing front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second storage section 2250 is provided.

  The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of the thin plate formed at the surface position with the thin plate member 1210, has an upward opening, and has an end connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. The storage channel 2251 and the second detection disposed in the second storage channel 2251 in a posture near the upper end portion of the second storage channel 2251 with the opening along the direction in which the second storage channel 2251 extends. The sensor 2255 closes the space between the front plate of the second storage section 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the left side of the opening of the second storage channel 2251 in a front view, and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left. And an inclined surface 2257.

  When the sphere is stored by closing the discharge port 1150 when the sphere passes through the second detection sensor 2255 and is stored inside the second storage part 2250, the number of stored spheres is reduced. It is configured to be 14 at the maximum.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device that has the second specific winning opening 2255a and produces the same operation as the detection sensor 1240. In other words, when the ball enters the housing portion 1230 by switching the open / close plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball is switched via the second housing portion 2250 by the switching of the second variable winning device 2800. When the ball enters 1230, the ball is detected by the second detection sensor 2255.

  The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening and closing plate 1300 is provided. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage channel 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are directed to the channel forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. You. Therefore, during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open, the player opens any of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a. In the state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by performing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unskilled player can easily play a game.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is provided inside the second storage channel 2251 with a margin for arranging one ball on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing at which the remaining one ball becomes a specified number as it passes through the second detection sensor 2255), a plurality of balls continuously flow into the second storage channel 2251. And a structure in which a predetermined number or more of balls can enter.

  The regulating member 2600 has a configuration in which the regulating member 1600 of the first embodiment is provided (the shaft portion 1610, the extending portion 1620, and the ball receiving portion 1630), and the shaft portion 1610 is further extended leftward. A second extending portion 2640 formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction of FIG.

  The second extended portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates, as described later. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 allows the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening and closing plate 1300 to perform the switching operation of the second variable winning device 2800 and the switching operation of the opening and closing plate 1300. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

  The second variable winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left and right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and a mid-abdomen while one end is supported by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830, and extending from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100; A rod-shaped interposed rod portion 2850 having one end fixed to the member 2820 and slidably disposed inside the drive guide rib 2183, and a transmission guide rib having one end disposed at a position capable of abutting the interposed rod portion 2850. The other end extends along the inside of the second member 2184 and the other end of the second A transmission rod portion 2860 that is disposed against possible position, mainly comprises.

  The interposed rod portion 2850 is guided by the drive guide ribs 2183 in the left-right direction, while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured so as to be closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer (the distance between the drive guide ribs 2183 is narrowed). The movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

  The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided by the transmission guide rib 2184 in the up-down direction, while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured to be closer to each other (narrower between them) as the separation distance of the main body member 2100 from the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer, so that the transmission rod 2860 The movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

  Note that the surfaces of the end portions where the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. Thus, it is possible to smoothly transmit the force from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

  FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 has an arcuate cross-sectional shape on the opposite surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860, and the regulating member 2600 is directed toward the discharge state. The urging force of the urging torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod 2860 via the facing surface 2641. Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, it is determined that a ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable prize device 2800 for enabling a ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

  27 (a) to 27 (c), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. FIGS. 27A to 27C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. 27 (a) to 27 (c), for ease of understanding, illustration of components unnecessary for description is omitted, and the state of the slide plate 2840 changes from the closed state to the open state. Are illustrated in chronological order.

  In FIG. 27A, the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, and the tip member 2820 is located at the position farthest from the solenoid 2810. In FIG. 27B, immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the distal end member 2820 is disposed at the intermediate position in the movement range is disposed in a state in which the distal end member 2820 is drawn most toward the solenoid 2810 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). Each state is shown in the figure. In the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state for preventing the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255. In the state shown in FIG. , An open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, regulating member 2600 is in the discharged state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in the non-excited state, the operation of the second variable winning device 2800 can prevent the regulating member 2600 from being in the storage state. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, a control mode in which the operation of the solenoid 2810 is not generated (maintained without excitation) (for example, a control mode in the first embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

  When a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod 2860 via the interposed rod 2850 to start displacing. I do. Here, in the present embodiment, the portion where the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 contact each other is slightly separated in the state of FIG. The operation of the bar 2860 starts almost simultaneously.

  When the transmission rod 2860 is displaced downward by being pushed by the end of the interposition rod 2850, the lower end of the transmission rod 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extension 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is slightly pushed down, and is in the state between the discharge state and the storage state.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the distal end member 2830 has completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the end position by the intervening rod portion 2850, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27C, the interposed rod portion 2850 slides to the extent that the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod portion 2860 toward the transmission rod portion 2860, so that the interposed rod portion 2860 is moved from the transmission rod portion 2860 to the interposed rod portion. The load applied toward 2850 can flow in the direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of interposed rod 2850.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposed rod portion 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the interposed rod portion 2850 due to the change in the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the distal end member 2820 via the regulating member 2600 from fluctuating, and therefore, to maintain the open state of the slide plate 2840 that changes state due to the displacement of the distal end member 2820, the solenoid 2810 Can be prevented from fluctuating. Thus, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

  Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod 2860, and the state of the regulating member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, the response of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. Thereby, fine adjustment of the state change timing of the regulating member 2600 is possible, so that it is possible to suppress a deviation between the control value of the discharge number specified for each round interval time in the jackpot game and the actual discharge number, The number of discharges can be stabilized.

  FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end of the transmission rod 2860 and the opposing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod 2860. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) for urging the regulating member 2600 toward the arrangement in the discharge state effectively acts on the transmission rod 2860.

  Accordingly, when the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) to the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the regulation by the intervening rod 2850 is released, the urging force of the torsion spring is released. As a result, the transmission rod 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

  FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol according to the present embodiment.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Note that the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is: The description is omitted because it is the same as that described in the first embodiment. In the following, a case in which a lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) results in a big hit in this embodiment. explain.

  Specifically, in the case of a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on entry to the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is associated with a jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

  When the big hit d is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the fourth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 (the details will be described later). In this case, the player can receive the payout of the number obtained by adding the limited increase to about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot e is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 99” (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

  In the case of the jackpot e, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fifth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 (details will be described later). In this case, the prize balls paid out to the player are the number of payouts obtained by adding a limited increase to 2250 prize balls, but the difficulty in increasing the number of payouts is smaller than that in the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the payout number is increased as well as the payout number, the time required for the jackpot game is much larger than the case of the jackpot d.

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn in a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the type of the big hit. Due to the difference in the operation patterns, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, and the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (the first to seventh round game R). When the first variable prize device 2000 receives more balls than the specified number, extra payouts are subtracted in the subsequent specific round game R (the eighth round game R) and the game proceeds to the eighth round. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the additional ball paid out by allowing the first variable prize device 2000 to enter a ball of a specified number or more can be obtained by the player without being deducted. It is configured as follows.

  In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, the game method in which the player can obtain the highest profit as the profit including the time efficiency is a fixed number of prizes until the eighth round, and the round game R after the ninth round The aim is to increase the number of payouts in order to win more than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to insert a predetermined number of balls or more in the first variable winning device 2000 depending on the round game R of the round, and the player's attention to the jackpot game Can be improved.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot d, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means sets the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R is started after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between the rounds.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls ejected from the outlet 1150 during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that in each round game R, more than 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 2255a. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum storage number when the ball is entered from the second storage channel 2251 side is set to 14, so in the jackpot game of the jackpot d, the number of winnings exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. It is limited to four through jackpot games. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that can be obtained by the player playing the jackpot game with the jackpot d can be limited to 60 (= 15 × 4C). As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from greatly changing due to a difference in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, and the like). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy profits fairly irrespective of the experience value of the player.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third round up to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 2810 controls the driving of the solenoid 2810 so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot e, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls ejected from the outlet 1150 during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that in each round game R, more than 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 2255a. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  Thereafter, similarly, the third to seventh round game Rs are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 interposed between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the seventh round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. After the elapsed time, the round game R of the eighth round is started.

  In the eighth round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the eighth round of the round game R, The open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eighth round is completed.

  Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, if balls exceeding the specified number have passed through the second specific winning opening 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the round R in the eighth round Since the balls remain in the storage channel 1231, only the winning of the number obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round) from the specified number in the round game R of the eighth round can be performed. Therefore, the payout of the prize balls including the eighth round is equalized to the payout of the specified number of prize balls up to the eighth round. In addition, since the specified number of pachinko balls cannot be won in the eighth round of the round game R, the player must wait 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, before the next round. It will shift to the game.

  Therefore, the player suffers from the loss of the prize balls paid out by the 7th round being lost, and the time loss that the round R of the 8th round becomes unnecessarily long. Will receive. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game carefully so as not to win more balls than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of winning of a ball exceeding the specified number, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

  If there is no winning exceeding the specified number by the seventh round, the specified number of balls can be passed through the one specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the specified number of balls are paid out. In addition, the round game R of the eighth round can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, a predetermined number of prize balls can be paid out while advancing the round game R quickly.

  Therefore, in the big hit game of the big hit e, intentionally suppressing winnings exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round leads to the player's profit. Therefore, the player's attention in the game up to the seventh round can be kept high.

  When the big hit game R of the eighth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After a lapse of time Int1, a ninth round game R is started. Note that, at the start of the ninth round of the round game R, a state in which no ball remains in the storage channel 1231 can be set.

  In the ninth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is controlled to drive the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the ninth round, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the ninth round of the round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the tenth round to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In the round game R of the ninth and subsequent rounds, since the opening and closing plate 1300 does not perform the opening and closing operation, the prize balls paid out by the balls that have won the second specific winning opening 2255a in excess of the specified number after the ninth round are , Can be received by the player without being deducted.

  Therefore, in the case of performing the jackpot game of the jackpot e, the jackpot game R is suppressed so that the winning in the second specific winning opening 2255a exceeding the specified number does not occur in the jackpot game R up to the seventh round. Aiming for a prize in the second specific prize port 2255a exceeding the number is a game method in which a player can obtain the largest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

  That is, in the round game R of each round, by inserting balls exceeding the specified number into the second specific winning opening 2255a, it is possible to cause a case where the player gains profit and a case where the player suffers damage. Thereby, different playability can be provided for each round of the jackpot game, and the attention of the player who performs the jackpot game can be improved (it is possible to prevent the casual play of the jackpot game). .

  Further, according to the present operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive the payout of the additional prize ball by causing the second specific winning opening 2255a to win the ball exceeding the specified number is substantially performed after the ninth round. Can be restricted. This makes it possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to a difference in game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.), and to prevent a large change in the payout balls. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy profits fairly irrespective of the experience value of the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the sphere that reaches the flow path forming portion when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state and flows down to the downstream of the open / close plate 1300 when the open / close plate is in the open state falls as it is. In the first variable winning device 3000, the falling of the ball is delayed when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, and a part of the ball can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of a first variable winning device 3000 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. It is a rear surface perspective view of the installation front board 3200.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an open / close plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a regulating member 1600, and a rear cover 1700 similar to those of the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a covered front plate 3200 slightly different from those of the first embodiment are provided. FIG. 32 shows a closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  The main body member 3100 has the same configuration as the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the accommodating portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170). An additional winning opening 3181 arranged in a manner to be connected to the left side wall of the covering front plate 3200 in front view on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and upward from the left side wall portion of the additional winning opening 3181 in front view. And a curved extension plate 3182 which extends in a curved manner.

  The additional winning opening 3181 is a ball opening for discharging a ball flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and when balls enter the additional winning opening 3181, the upper limit is 15 balls. Prize balls are paid out. In the present embodiment, it is set so that eleven balls are paid out.

  The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts the passage of a ball flowing down the game area by setting the gap in the up-down direction in the game area to be equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. . In addition, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed to have a shape that is inclined downward from the middle abdomen toward the left in front view, and is inclined downward from the middle abdomen toward the right to the front view.

  The laid front plate 3200 has a structure (a thin plate member 1210, a side wall portion 1220, a housing portion 1230, and a detection sensor 1240) included in the laid front plate 1200 of the first embodiment, and a space between the side wall portion 1220 and the housing portion 1230. , A drop delay plate 3250 extending from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface.

  The drop delay plate 3250 is disposed on the front side of the movement trajectory of the opening and closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening and closing plate 1300, and is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. An extended plate portion 3251 that extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 and connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 and has a concave upper surface from a curved shape. And a rolling arc portion 3252 to be formed.

  The drop delay plate 3250 has a long shape to the left and right, and is decelerated so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down (including bouncing and rolling down) a distance of half the length of the plate. Formed from the shape In addition, the opening / closing plate 1300 is formed in a mode in which the ball flows down in one second or less when the ball flows down a half distance of the length of the plate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the extension plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed so as to be inclined such that the closer the detection sensor 1240 is, the longer the separation width from the main body member 3100 is. The housing includes a facing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b that faces the side wall portion 1220 of the housing portion 1230 and is spaced from the housing portion 1230 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is determined by the radius of the sphere at the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). At the intermediate position (the middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32), the distance is switched to be equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere. The diameter is equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the opposing surface 3251 a is formed along the front-rear direction, and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 3200. (Tangent lines drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction are along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

  The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the sphere that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covered front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the most upstream upstream position Pf1 to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls away from the rolling arc portion 3252, is moved to the downstream position Pf2. Flow down through

  In the present embodiment, since the distance between the facing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the distance until the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3 is reached. , Is prevented from falling through the rolling arc portion 3252. Therefore, the ball will fall from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, the manner in which the ball flows down on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

  34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable prize device 3000 along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. Note that FIG. 34B illustrates a sphere arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34C illustrates a sphere arranged at the downstream position Pf2. In FIG. 34, the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c), the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and contacts the plate portion 1310. The diameter of the ball, which flows down to the contact portion with the falling delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the sphere in the axial direction), is reduced as the ball flows down.

  That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34B, the diameter r1 up to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the drop delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34 (c), the radial length r2 up to the portion where the ball contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the ball.

  These diameter lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of gyration of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In other words, if the rotation speed of the ball is the same, the rolling speed of the ball decreases (the ball is delayed) as the diameter lengths r1 and r2 are shorter. According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Accordingly, the turning radius of the sphere is gradually reduced as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 31). Accordingly, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced as the ball flows down the falling delay plate 3250 to the downstream side.

  Further, when the extension plate portion 3251 extends along the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300, FIG. 34 (c) showing the axial view thereof shows a state as compared with the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). The ball is displaced downward in the state shown in parentheses). That is, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the ball can be separated from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be diverted from the first specific winning opening 1000a. it can.

  Accordingly, even if the ball entry preventing portion 1331 is not formed on the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the falling delay plate 3250 to the downstream end, and is directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is won by flying.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rises to the open state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable prize device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) is the first variable prize device 3000 along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. Note that FIG. 35 (a) illustrates the closed state of the open / close plate 1300, FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c) illustrate the open state of the open / close plate 1300, and FIG. 35 (c) illustrates the open / close plate 1300. The outer shapes of the plate portion 1310 and the ball in the closed state are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 35A and 35B illustrate an example of a ball that has entered the flow path forming unit of the first variable winning device 3000.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the open / close plate 1300 is closed, the ball that has landed on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 moves rightward in a front view along the extending direction of the extension plate portion 3251. If the open / close plate 1300 keeps the closed state as it is, it falls after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the above-described extension plate portion 3251, so that the rolling time of the ball can be maintained long and the attention to the ball can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the open / close plate 1300 moves upward (rotates) toward the open state while the ball rolls, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly moves up along the arc shape of the dynamic arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent of the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the ball abuts at the start of the movement of the ball is oriented in the front-rear direction, the operation of the ball at the start of the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be smoothed. it can.

  The downflow direction when the sphere moves up and rolls over the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 and flows down is parallel to the downflow direction illustrated in FIG. Therefore, compared to the case where the flowing direction of the ball changes completely different directions before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player who visually recognizes the operation of the ball before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300. it can.

  As described above, when the sphere is disposed below the plate portion 1310 of the open / close plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35C), the open / close plate 1300 moves upward to open the sphere. By pushing back (backflow) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the above, it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the ball which is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 and once cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a is brought into a state where it can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a by ascending movement. Since it can be returned, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In other words, FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) both show a state where the sphere is arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240 since there is still a possibility that the sphere passes through the detection sensor 1240. It can be said that. That is, by the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state.

  Further, even when it becomes impossible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 flows down in a direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player may win the first specific winning opening 1000a, and to maintain the player's attention.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the open / close plate 1300 forms a closed state, the fall of the ball reaching the front side of the open / close plate 1300 is delayed, and when the open / close plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By configuring so that it can be resurrected above, it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball that arrives in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. As a result, the number of balls passing through the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening and closing plate 1300 from being hindered due to the arrangement of the ball on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure in which the ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate as in a conventional gaming machine, the ball is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate and the glass plate by operating the opening / closing plate, thereby opening and closing the ball. There has been a problem that the opening of the board is hindered, which may cause a loss to the player.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 in front of the opening / closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained substantially constant (restriction). can do. Therefore, the ball is pinched between the open / close plate 1300 and the glass plate as compared with the case where the ball freely flows down the front side of the open / close plate 1300 and the distance of the ball from the rotation axis changes freely. The risk that the operation of the plate 1300 is hindered can be reduced. Note that, in the present embodiment, the sphere is sandwiched between the glass plate and the opening / closing plate 1300 while the opening / closing plate 1300 is changing to the open state, and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 may be hindered. The drop delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the ball is maintained at the position.

  36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the manner in which the ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000 flows down. In FIG. 36 (a), in a case where the ball is hit and left, the two balls reaching the first variable prize device 3000 flow down in a time-series manner, and in FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball By performing a special hitting method (so-called “twisting”) in which the ball is hit weakly and the second ball is hit harder, the ball when two balls are connected to reach the first variable winning device 3000. Are shown in chronological order.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the ball is hit and the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a predetermined interval, the ball is hit. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state due to the winning of the first specific winning opening 1000a by P1, the ball P2 can still be in a state arranged on the upstream side of the drop delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 completely flows down the drop delay plate 3250, so that the ball can be easily maintained on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. Can be.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when two balls continuously reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball P1 wins the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. When switching to the state, the ball P2 is arranged near the position (falling position Pf3) immediately before the detection sensor 1240, so that it is not possible to wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is next opened, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from plate 3250.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, compared to the case where two balls flow down consecutively by a special hitting method, the case where two balls flow down at a predetermined interval by releasing (normal hitting) is used. This makes it easier to receive the action of the drop delay plate 3250 (changing a ball that has reached the front of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the interval time between rounds so that the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game by a special hitting method such as twisting.

  FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. FIG. 37 illustrates a state immediately after the state of the open / close plate 1300 changed from the closed state to the open state, and illustrates a sphere that jumps upward by colliding with the open / close plate 1300.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open / close plate 1300 in the open state, the bouncing as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball that has landed on the open / close plate 1300 is rebounded during the upward movement of the open / close plate 1300. Only in this case, the sphere bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

  The subsequent flow of the bouncing ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 again or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. Is done. Therefore, the player can receive the prize ball by the bouncing ball. Therefore, a ball that arrives at the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening / closing plate 1300 is being switched to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66, and the player cannot obtain a profit. Can be prevented.

  Further, even when a ball wins in the additional winning opening 3181, a prescribed number (ten in the present embodiment) of balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a separately. The payout by winning the mouth 3181 results in award balls (a profit for an additional amount) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, it is possible to cause a difference in the profit obtained by the player depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening and closing plate 1300 is being switched to the open state. , It is possible to improve the attention of the ball that flows down.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a specially changed state (high probability state) of a special symbol is given as an added value after the end of the jackpot regardless of a difference in a flow state of a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 according to the fourth embodiment includes a probability variation determination unit that determines a right to shift to a certain symbol change state (high-probability state) of a special symbol based on a difference in the manner in which a ball flows. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is shown in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 below the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability variation that is provided on the back side of the game board 13 is changed. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (a main body member 1100, a covering front plate 1200, an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a regulating member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and further includes a new probability variation determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

  The probability variation determination unit 4800 includes a communication path 4810 that is a flow path through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows and extends vertically downward, and a bifurcated flow that is communicated with the lower end of the communication path 4810. The probability variation determination channel 4820 that is a road, the specific region 4830 that is arranged to communicate from the channel on the left side in front view of the probability variation determination channel 4820, and the specific region 4830 that communicates from the channel on the right side in front view A non-specific area 4840, a distribution device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with a game ball at a branch portion of the probability variation determination channel 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 for detecting the passage of a game ball in the specific area 4830, A non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area 4540.

  The communication path 4810 is formed to have a length that elapses approximately one second until the ball that has entered from the outlet reaches the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  The distribution device 4850 is disposed so as to protrude inside the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and allows the sphere to flow down to the specific area 4830 (forms an open state) and to flow to the non-specific area 4840 (changes to the closed state). It mainly includes a distributing member 4851 operable between a closed position (formed) and a solenoid 4852 for driving the distributing member 4851.

  The probability change determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding the acquisition of the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state) only in the special round during the jackpot game (the fifth round in this embodiment). In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game balls to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in an open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in a closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the big hit game, a transition is made to a special symbol positive change state (high probability state). In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased, so that the ball can easily win the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, 40 It is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1 /

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination.

  In the present embodiment, five types of special symbols such as “big hit D”, “big hit E”, “big hit F”, “big hit G”, and “big hit f” are provided (see FIG. 40). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 4000 and The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state).

  FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type of the entrance that triggered the symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is associated with a jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot D, five jackpot games are executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot E is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 49” (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot E, a 5-round jackpot game is executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 675 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state).

  The jackpot F is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 79” (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot F, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot G is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99” (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot G, a 5-round jackpot game is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 750 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift to the surely changed state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) with a probability of 50%. Can be reliably obtained. On the other hand, even in the remaining 50%, it is possible to rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, The jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot f, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850, as in the case of the jackpot D. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot g is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “95 to 99” (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot is g, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls and, rarely, can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state).

  As described above, if a special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) becomes a big hit, the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 have a 95% probability of the sixth variable prize device. Operates in an operating pattern. At this time, it is possible to almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the specially changed state (high probability state) of the special symbol, so that the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64). This is advantageous for the player as compared to a case of a jackpot. Therefore, in order to obtain a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), in the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player performs a right-handed game. Do.

  During the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol decreases (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the normal symbol hit increases (1). Second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is reached, the jackpot f (almost certainly shifts to the special symbol probable change state (high probability state)) It is easy for the player to easily acquire a large amount of prize balls, because the probability of the special symbol being easily changed is likely to be repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41 (b) is a first specific winning in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the sixth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 is controlled so as to be maintained, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round game R is started.

  In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the third round of round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the third round of the round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the third round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, thereby obtaining the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the lapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and the solenoid is operated so as to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has elapsed. The driving of the 4852 is controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. The predetermined time is set as a time during which the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the maximum speed, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is estimated normally that only about five balls can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round is completed only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in this operation pattern, in the interval immediately before the fourth round, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150. Therefore, since the storage channel 1231 is filled with approximately five winnings in three seconds, it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity given to the player due to the shorter time of the round R in the fourth round than in other rounds. can do.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In the second opening time OP2, when the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of stored balls is up to six), all the discharged balls are in the probability variation determination channel 4820. When the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is seven or more (when the number of stored balls is seven or more), at least one of the discharged balls is used. The time is set to be shorter than the time when the sphere of the part passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In the present embodiment, since the fourth round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, even if the fourth round game ends in the second operation time T2, The number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily increased to seven or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the ball remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the remaining ball can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, unlike the prior art, in the present operation pattern, in the fifth round of the round game R, it is not necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation. In addition, the opening and closing plate 1300 can be operated without discomfort. Hereinafter, this will be described.

  In the related art, when a predetermined number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the operation of the distribution operation member 4581 starts, and the round game R ends, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. However, there is a risk that a ball may not be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the player may not be able to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state). In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the open / close plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 was closed before the operation (it was opened twice in one round).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since it is a game property that switches whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a can be made to enter the specific area 4830 by the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round. Even if the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. Since the ball heading for the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable prize device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) without any problem.

  Therefore, in the present operation pattern, the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened so that the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be performed even while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the fifth round of the round game R. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it prevents a problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the winning pattern. can do.

  In addition, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R stays in the storage channel 1231 during the first operation time T1, so that the first ball is won in the fifth round game R. It is possible to prevent a ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination channel 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. Thereby, the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) according to the mode of winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent a problem that whether or not it can be changed occurs.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot E, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as the sixth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, thereby obtaining the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the lapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and the solenoid is operated so as to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has elapsed. The driving of the 4852 is controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass to the specific region 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the maximum speed, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is estimated normally that only about five balls can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round is completed only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in the present operation pattern, in the interval immediately before the fourth round, ten balls (all spheres) are discharged from the discharge port 1150. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled with approximately five possible prizes in three seconds, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the sphere won in three seconds remaining in the storage channel 1231. .

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, since about five balls are ejected from the outlet 1150 in the interval immediately before the fifth round of the round game R, eight or more balls in three seconds are the first specific prize due to some rare cause. Unless the mouth 1000a is awarded, the distributing operation member 4851 is displaced after all the ejected balls have passed through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, no ball remains in the probability variation determination channel 4820, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the open / close plate 1300 and the distributing member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in can be obtained.

  Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the ball can be stored to near the fullness of the storage channel 1231 during the fourth round of the round game R. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high-probability state) of the special symbol, depending on the difference in how the ball is stored, so that the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231. Attention to the ball can be improved. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the first variable winning device 4000.

  Also, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter in the fourth round of the round game R, it is almost certain that the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) is obtained. Although it is possible, since the time of the round game R is short, the more the player is accustomed to the game, the more the player loses the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

  In other words, an unfamiliar player is easier to hit and play during a jackpot game, while a person who is more accustomed to the game is more likely to avoid hitting to avoid wasting balls between rounds during the jackpot and to make it easier to stop between rounds Is the difference resulting from

  More specifically, in the case of an open game, a plurality of balls always flow in the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300, and the ball is prized to the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. Because it occurs, if there are even three seconds, there is enough room for three or more balls to enter. Therefore, an unskilled player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) without any problem.

  On the other hand, in the case of starting the launch after the start of the fourth round of the round game R and performing the stop between the rounds so as to prevent the ball from flowing near the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval period, the useless ball is certainly Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300 until a while after the start of the round game R of the fourth round (for example, two seconds have not elapsed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining one second, which makes it difficult to acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state). Therefore, even a player who is accustomed to the game can be encouraged to make a launch without hitting during the jackpot game.

  As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent risk that, depending on the mode of launching, a person who is more accustomed to the game may decrease the profit obtained. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed, the player can be encouraged to play the game without hitting the jackpot, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be secured.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, after grasping the above-mentioned risks, it is possible to provide a player who still stops between rounds with a jackpot game requiring concentration, which cannot be enjoyed by other pachinko machines 10. . That is, the number of useless balls is reduced by performing an inter-round hitting operation in which the ball is started backward by calculating backward so that the ball flows into the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round. Meanwhile, the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) can also be acquired. In this case, a stop between rounds is performed before the end of the third round game R, and a launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, it is necessary to perform a high-level calculation of starting the launch while predicting the timing of the ball entry while considering the randomness of the flow of the ball entering the ball during the third round game R. Therefore, if the timing at which the ball that has started launching reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning opening 1000a is as calculated, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is a first specific winning in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot F, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the third round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved to the open position. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round game R, and the fourth round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Is terminated by the passage of.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. Note that this opening operation is performed simultaneously with the opening operation due to the elapse of the third opening time OP3.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the ejected balls pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  In this operation pattern, since the fourth round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the fourth round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is seven or more, the distribution operation member 4851 may be opened with the balls remaining in the probability variation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the open / close plate 1300 and the distributing member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in can be obtained.

<When operating in the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is similar to that of the eighth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved to the open position. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round game R, and the fourth round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Is terminated by the passage of.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distributing operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass to the specific region 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the ejected balls pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the fourth round of the round game R is started in a state in which no balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the fourth round of the round game R, a specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to end the fourth round of the round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1. However, when the fourth round game R is completed without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1 as in the case where the fourth round game R is ended by a predetermined number of winnings, in many cases, Immediately after that, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820, and then the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced.

  On the other hand, when the distributing operation member 4851 ends the round game R of the fourth round until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is over, if seven or more balls are ejected in the interval immediately after that, The sphere can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not hurry to win the specified number of prizes, but makes the first specified winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls immediately before the end of the fourth round of the round game R, so that the player has a special symbol. The right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) can be obtained.

  Also, as another method, by ending the fifth round of the round game R immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the ball ejected at the interval immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is stored in the specific area. By flowing down, the player can also acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable state (high probability state).

  As described above, according to the present operation pattern, at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, etc.), the player can change to the certain state of the special symbol (high probability state). Whether or not the right to transfer can be acquired can be made different.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the round game R of the fourth round is specified. When the operation time is specified (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), the player continues to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a so that the player can play the special symbol no matter how the game is played. The right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) can be acquired, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the operation time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player himself / herself selects the operation time according to the game mode (when the specified number of balls are to be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a). In some cases), the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) may be acquired in some cases. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player a sense of excitement to acquire a probable change state by himself. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  The sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern are characterized in that the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is shorter than usual, and the fourth round of the round game with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 is performed. When R is started, it is easy to obtain the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state). That is, when the number of award balls obtained in the round game R of the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is set to such a length as to discharge the ball in the storage channel 1231 as a whole ball, the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state) is granted. Difficult to get. That is, in the case where it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, it is possible to realize the gaming property that the payout of the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game increases. Thereby, a large number of balls to be launched by the player in the normal state to be continued later can be prepared, so that the player's cash investment can be easily suppressed.

  These differences can be grasped at the start of the fourth round by whether or not balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, at the start of the fourth round of the round game R, the player predicts a state after the end of the big hit game. can do. Even in the case of an operation pattern in which it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol state (high-probability state), the right to shift to the special symbol transition state (high-probability state) depends on the manner of the ball entry. Can be obtained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, by forcing the player to make a selection, the concentration of the player during the jackpot game can be maintained. That is, the game mode in which it is easy to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) is exactly the opposite.

  More specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the round game R of the fourth round, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. Winning a prize increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to a special symbol probable state (high probability state) (it is beneficial to win many balls from the start of the fourth round). In the case of the operation pattern of No. 9, in the round game R of the fourth round, a predetermined number of balls are awarded until the end of 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and the period of the round game R is extended. As a result, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) is increased (it is advantageous to suppress the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

  As described above, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) changes depending on how the ball is won in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to maintain the concentration on the game.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the tenth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the fourth round of the round game R is the same as in the case of the above-described sixth operation pattern, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distributing operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In the present operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the lapse of the second opening time OP2 is performed for a short time, the ball cannot basically flow down to the specific area 4830.

  In addition, since the distribution operation member 4851 is opened during the round R of the fifth round, if the round game can be completed early, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. Although there is a possibility that the game will be performed (for example, when the operation after the lapse of the third opening time OP3 is long), in the present operation pattern, the fifth round of the round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be entered, and the fifth round game cannot be ended early. Therefore, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distributing operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R has the same portions as those in the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of No. 6 can be obtained.

  Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the fourth round game R. Since the pattern of the other portions is the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  The tenth operation pattern causes the ball to flow down to the specific area 4830 even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the fourth round of the round game R in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern. They differ in that they cannot.

  That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not relieved even if the ball can be fully stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the game R, and the discharged ball is in the specific area. The user can be prompted to confirm whether to pass 4830 or not. That is, in the jackpot game, a stage (first step) of determining whether or not a ball can be stored in the storage channel 1231, and the distribution operation member 4851 operates before the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes. It is possible to focus on a different part for each stage, divided into the stage of whether or not (second step). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game unintentionally, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where a pitch corresponding to the jackpot type can be acquired regardless of the progress of the game in the special symbol change state (high probability state). However, the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment is described. 5000 is provided with a pitch adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to obtain more pitches as the number of times of change until the jackpot is obtained in the special symbol change state (high probability state) is smaller. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, a covered front plate 2200, In addition to the opening and closing plate 1300, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, An outgoing ball adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the outgoing ball by causing the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 to enter the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is mainly provided.

  The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 that extends downward from the lower end of the rotating tip 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the lower end of the time difference forming portion 5423 extends to a position where the time difference forming portion 5423 contacts the engaging portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is not excited.

  In addition to the configuration described in the second embodiment, the second variable prize device 5800 is configured such that an interposed rod portion 5850 having a slightly added shape and a sliding operation in a vertical direction on the left side in rear view of the transmission rod portion 2860, By being pushed down by the branched portion of the interposed rod portion 5850 (the L-shaped portion in the rear view added to the configuration of the interposed rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment), the interposed rod portion 5850 is arranged so as to be in contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the pitching adjustment device 5900. A pressing action portion 5870 is provided.

  The outgoing-ball adjusting device 5900 is configured to penetrate through the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end of the flowing-down passage forming portion 5910 and the lower end of the flowing-down passage forming portion 5910 to store the ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640. A communication hole 5920 arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) in which a ball can flow into the flow path 1231 and an opening / closing member 5930 for opening and closing the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are mainly provided. Prepare for. It should be noted that the flow-down passage forming portion 5910 is disposed so as to pass through the back side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, and is illustrated with imaginary lines for easy understanding. Also, illustration of the intermediate portion is omitted.

  The flow-down passage forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path through which the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 flows down. The opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920, and the ball is connected to the communication hole 5920. The adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in, and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceeds the specified number (30 in the present embodiment), and then enters the second ball entrance 640. And a surplus sphere discharge channel 5915 for discharging the collected spheres to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The adjustment flow channel 5911 is formed as a deceleration flow channel 5912 formed as a reverse U-shaped flow channel that is curved by a half turn near the lower end, and a second ball entrance 640 is formed from the upper end of the deceleration flow channel 5912. And a falling channel 5913 extending vertically in the rearward direction.

  Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the load of the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent sphere stagnating in the deceleration flow path 5912 is reduced irrespective of the number of stagnation balls. be able to. In other words, when the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the own weight of the subsequent ball from the subsequent ball, the deceleration flow path 5912 assumes that the inclination near the communication hole 5920 is gentle (inclination close to horizontal). Therefore, the effect of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of stagnation balls, the speed at which the sphere immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the sphere to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

  Since the falling channel 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the falling sphere does not receive deceleration and falls freely. Therefore, when a ball continues to enter the second entrance 640 and enters the ball, the preceding ball is decelerated earlier than the subsequent ball, and impedes the flow of the subsequent ball. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the surplus sphere discharge channel 5915.

  In the present embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the balls to stay in order from just before the communication hole 5920, and when the number of the staying balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball becomes the excess ball discharge flow path 5915. The flow path length is designed to be above the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the ball after the 31st ball enters the surplus sphere discharge channel 5915. In other words, up to 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the high probability state of 30 rotations. During this time, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and the player can proceed with the game by a right-handed game, thereby aiming for the next jackpot acquisition while suppressing ball loss. On the other hand, since the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 enters the adjustment channel 5911, the ball stays in the adjustment channel 5911 from the start of the high-probability state to the end of the high-probability state. The sphere increases.

  The opening / closing member 5930 is arranged at a position protruding inside the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not excited, and closes the opening below the outer shape of the sphere, while one of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is excited. Accordingly, the movable closing member 5931 disposed at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, the movable closing member 5931 is connected to the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and is movable in the left-right direction with the driving of the solenoid 1510. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110; and a slide rail portion 5933 provided at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 so as to be vertically movable relative to the connecting rod portion 5932. One end of the connecting rod portion 5932 is provided to apply an upward urging force to the movable closing member 5931. An elastic spring 5934, mainly comprising.

  FIGS. 46A and 46B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 along the line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. FIG. 46A illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is opened, and FIG. 46B illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and the sphere flows into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920 and can stay there, the third ball AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231. The fourth ball AP54 is kept at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920.

  In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) having passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a in this state flows into the storage channel 1231. The space for the ball AP 54 held at a position where the ball AP 54 does not fall out of the 5920 to enter the storage channel 1231 is filled with the flowed ball IP 51. Therefore, the ball retained at a position where it does not escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 and is maintained at the same position.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the restricting member 2600 changes to the discharge state, the movable closing member 5931 moves from the overhang adjustment flow channel 5911 to the storage flow channel 1231. Ball inflow is regulated.

  When the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is completed, the state is switched again to the state shown in FIG. 46A, and the sphere AP54, which has been retained at a position where it has not been removed from the communication hole 5920, becomes the top and the third sphere The ball up to flows into the storage channel 1231.

  In the jackpot game, the inflow of the sphere from the adjustment flow channel 5911 to the storage flow channel 1231 is repeated as described above, and the inflow is regulated at a maximum of three times per one opening of the communication hole 5920. You.

  With reference to FIG. 47, a case where the jackpot game proceeds by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. FIGS. 47A to 47C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

  In FIG. 47 (a), the state where the solenoid 1510 is excited is shown. In FIG. 47 (b), the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the tip of the time difference forming section 5423 is on the rear side of the engaging section 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. FIG. 47 (c) illustrates a state in which the time lag forming portion 5423 is disposed above the engagement portion 1333, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened when the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass.

  When the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves along with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920, while engaging the opening / closing plate 1300. The portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction, and the movement of the open / close plate 1300 is regulated, so that the regulating member 2600 maintains the stored state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the regulating member 2600 is in the discharging state, and the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, in driving the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started. Balls can be prevented from flowing from 5911.

  FIGS. 48A and 48B are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the operation of the regulating member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 by the driving of the solenoid 2810 is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 48A illustrates a state where the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited, and FIG. 48B illustrates a state where the solenoid 2810 is excited.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the movable closing member 5931 is pushed down by the pressing action portion 5870, so that the communication hole 5920 is opened. This allows the sphere to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the urging force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  Accordingly, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened and the ball can flow into the storage channel 1231 while the communication hole 5920 is de-energized. It is closed and the inflow into the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

  In the big hit game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the above-described mechanism, a fixed number (three in the present embodiment) of balls are flown into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes With a probability of 1, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, and the special symbol lottery 30 times It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased, so that the ball can easily win the second entrance 640.

  In this embodiment, three types of special symbols, "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i", are provided (see FIG. 49). Although details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a are differently configured depending on the jackpot type, so that the number of balls that enter the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Be composed.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type of the entrance that triggered the symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”. Is associated with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", and the big hit h Are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

  When the jackpot H or the jackpot h is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive the payout of approximately 2250 prize balls, can win the specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive the payout of the specified upper limit.

  In the case of a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the big hit i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

  When the big hit i is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the payout number of the prize balls and the time required for the jackpot game are made variable depending on the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is obtained.

  In other words, when a special pattern 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), a specified number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big hit. In the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), according to the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is obtained, a prize ball is obtained. Since the maximum number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the gaming ability of acquiring a jackpot in a right-handed game is different from the gaming ability of paying out prize balls depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs. Sex can be added. This makes it possible to prevent the right-handed game from being played indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the attention to each change.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing the time change in the twelfth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the eleventh operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  In the first round of the round game R, the communication hole 5920 is opened with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). When storing the spheres from the second storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 balls can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so that how many (1 to 1) spheres flow from the communication hole 5920 can be stored. Even if it is 3), the round game R can be ended by winning the specified number (10C).

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means sets the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. , And after the third interval time Int3 between rounds has elapsed, the second round game R is started. Here, a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 at intervals of 3 seconds, so that at the end of the first round of the round game R, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251 Spheres (up to 14 spheres) that can be stored in a row can be discharged globally.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third round up to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 2810 controls the driving of the solenoid 2810 so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 from the adjustment channel 5911 every time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excited). Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the entire sphere is stored until the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the tenth round game R). Since the ball can enter the road 1231, the big hit game can be ended without the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating in the twelfth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot i, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed. The operation up to the fourth round of the round game R is the same as that of the eleventh operation pattern, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, although it is possible for the ball to flow from the communication hole 5920 even in the round game R of the fifth round, unlike the fourth round, the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the balls are actually flown from the communication holes 5920, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls obtained in the fifth round of the round game R of the present operation pattern is smaller than the number of prize balls obtained in the same round game R in the eleventh operation pattern, and the first prize ball is obtained. Since the end of the round game R is to be waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the big hit game is prolonged.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the sixth to fifteenth rounds is repeated with the third interval time Int3 between the rounds between each round game R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time between rounds Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In the present operation pattern, the decrease in the number of winning balls that can occur in the subsequent round game R from the fifth round game R and the extension of the round time mean that a ball flows from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231. The number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the jackpot changes the degree to which the number of winning balls decreases and the round time increases. The number of spheres remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of spheres passing through the second entrance 640, while the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the second entrance) 640), the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 is related to the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2.

  In the following description, in the present operation pattern, the number of times of the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) and the number of the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Are described assuming that they have the same number.

  As described above, in the jackpot game of the present operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a once. That is, up to twelve balls have already flowed into the storage channel 1231 before the fourth round of the round game R. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the ball flows into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 because the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911. Is the case. In other words, this is a case where the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) has been received 13 times or more after the transition to the high probability state. .

  Therefore, if the jackpot is obtained between the transition to the high probability state and the reception of the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry to the second entrance 640) 12 times, the number of award balls decreases. And the extension of the round time does not occur, so that the player's attention to acquiring the jackpot by the 12th lottery can be improved.

  In addition, even after the thirteenth lottery, the number of prize balls decreases for each one lottery, and the round time is extended for each three lotteries. Attention can be improved.

  That is, for example, when a jackpot is acquired in a state where 14 balls remain in the adjustment channel 5911 (the 14th lottery of the special symbol 2), the ball is stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the flow channel 1231 is two, the number that can be won in this round is eight. When a jackpot is won in a state where 15 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the 15th lottery of the special symbol 2), the storage flow path passes through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the 1231 is three, the number that can be won in this round is seven. Therefore, as the number of remaining balls increases, the number of prize balls paid out in the fifth round of round R decreases.

  On the other hand, in the case where the jackpot is won in the thirteenth to fifteenth lotteries, in any case, the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 flows into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R. Is zero. Therefore, from the sixth round game R, a specified number of balls can be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a, thereby completing the sixth round game R. No change occurs in the degree of extension.

  In addition, when the number of remaining adjustment channels 5911 when the jackpot is acquired is 16 to 18, in the round game R of the sixth round, and when 19 to 21, the number of adjustment channels 5911 is 22 to 24 in the round game R of the seventh round. In the number of rounds, the number of prize balls decreases in the round game R of the eighth round, in the round game R of the ninth round, in the case of 25 to 27, in the round game R of the ninth round, and in the round game R of the tenth round, in the case of 28 to 30. And the round time is prolonged.

  Thereby, as in the present embodiment, in the gaming property in which the high-probability state ends with the number of lotteries, in the case where the jackpot is acquired shortly after the transition to the high-probability state, and in the case where the jackpot is acquired just before the end of the high-probability state. Thus, it is possible to make a difference in the profit (number of payouts of prize balls, progress time of the jackpot game, etc.) given to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the profit given to the player is reduced as the number of lotteries from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot acquisition is increased, if the number of lotteries until the jackpot acquisition is small, Originally, there should have been a chance to receive a lottery with a high probability even with the remaining number of lotteries, but it is possible to partially eliminate the player's dissatisfaction that the lottery cannot be received.

  In other words, if the jackpot was won in the first lottery after the high probability state was reached, the remaining 29 lotteries should be added and the next 59 lotteries could be received. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to 30 times again can be partially solved. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

  In addition, even in the high probability state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the second specific winning port 2255a is set in the eleventh operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout irrespective of the number of lotteries after opening and closing and shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may play a game (left-handed game) aiming at winning the ball in the first entrance 64 in the high probability state.

  In this case, as compared with the case of performing a right-handed game, the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 is increased without leading to the special symbol lottery, the interval at which the lottery can be received becomes longer, and the game time becomes longer. May be longer.

  Therefore, as a method of playing in the high-probability state, the player may be able to receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time while suppressing the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is obtained. Do you aim for the jackpot of jackpot h) (whether you play a right-handed game) or increase the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is acquired, and expect that the game time will be longer, It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim for a jackpot of a jackpot type (jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of a decrease in the prize ball in (a left-handed game). As a result, it is possible to widen the range of the game method to be selected depending on the player's taste and the situation where the player is placed (playable time or the like).

  After the high probability state ends, the second entrance 640 becomes difficult to open, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment channel 5911, but in the case of the jackpot type (big hit H) that can be obtained in the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by the specified number of prizes, the profit given to the player (the profit in both the number of prize balls and the game time) is not impaired. Therefore, even when the player stops playing the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being lost. A player can start a game at an arbitrary timing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (the lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) and the number of the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (the second entry ball) The description has been made assuming that the number of balls entering the mouth 640) is the same. However, in an actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the time of obtaining the jackpot is the number of balls of the special symbol 2 until the jackpot is obtained. It should be noted that the number of lotteries is rarely the same.

  That is, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed when a ball is won at the second entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the lottery has won the jackpot in the subsequent reach production or , After a button press effect, etc., it is normal for the player to continue to hit the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since up to four balls can be held in the second entrance 640, a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player receives a lottery efficiently, a so-called hold stop) In this case, the player keeps the state in which a maximum of about four balls enter the second entrance 640 in addition to the number of lotteries in which the player can recognize the jackpot determination.

  Also, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 when the number of reserves is the maximum, the lottery cannot be received, but the ball enters the adjustment channel 5911, so that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is reduced. More likely to decrease. The hold is digested by stopping the change and starting the next change, in other words, the longer the period until the stop of the change, the higher the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game decreases. Will be.

  Therefore, when the ball is left open in an effect with a high sense of expectation such as a long reach, it is possible to form a gaming property in which the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is reduced is increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during a high-reliability production such as a long reach, so that the player can concentrate on adjusting the firing power of the ball, eliminating the concentration power can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve a player's concentration on an effect such as a long reach, and it is possible to improve attention to the effect.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position has been described. However, the first variable winning device 6000 according to the sixth embodiment interferes with the balls by driving. Thus, the arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, below the first variable prize device 6000 in the present embodiment, the probability variation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is disposed, and the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 is placed in the specific area 4830. The state after the jackpot game is changed depending on whether or not the game passes.

  FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 along the line LII-LII in FIG. FIG. 52 shows the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable prize device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable prize device 1000 in the first embodiment (the main body member 1100, the covering front plate 1200, the opening / closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and a new interference device 6900 in the sixth embodiment.

  The interference device 6900 is provided with a solenoid 6910 disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and having a movable slide axis disposed along a plane that is flat with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and a tip of the movable portion of the solenoid 6910. A main member 6920 is mainly provided with an interference member 6930 that is slid in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the front member 6920.

  The tip member 6920 includes a long hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The long hole 6921 is formed to be inclined in such a manner as to be closer to the thin plate member 1110 toward the distal end side of the distal end member 6920.

  The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by a through hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 arranged to face the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200, and the rear end portion is a long hole 6921. The rear end moves back and forth along the long hole 6921 with the driving of the solenoid 6910. By this back and forth operation, it is possible to enter the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

  The through hole H61 is provided at a position slightly separated to the left from the center of the third ball P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. When the interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 to be in a protruding state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), the ball P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  FIGS. 53A and 53B are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. FIG. Note that FIG. 53A illustrates a case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53B illustrates a case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. The sphere that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is shown by an imaginary line, and “V” is described in the sphere that first enters the specific region 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later. .

  As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 when the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, while the third ball is stored when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. Subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231, and the number of stored balls is less than 10 balls. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the specified number of the big hit games per round game R is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be ended due to the specified number of winnings, the end of the round game R is waited until the specified time. The effect that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, a quarter With a probability of 1, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends ten times, and the special symbol lottery is performed ten times. When the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 after the game is over, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, the game is normally performed until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be in the time saving state of the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, two types of special symbols such as “big hit I” and “big hit j” are provided. Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000, The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state).

  More specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). . When the big hit I is reached, the big hit game of two rounds is executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of approximately 285 prize balls and cannot almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is selected by lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), a jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

  When the jackpot is j, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state).

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn by a lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the second entrance 640), the right to shift the special symbol to a probable state (high probability state) is almost surely acquired. This is advantageous to the player as compared with a case where a big win is achieved in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64). Therefore, in order to obtain a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), in the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player performs a right-handed game. Do.

  During the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol decreases (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the normal symbol hit increases (1). Second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is hit, the jackpot j is almost completely shifted to the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state). It is easy for the player to easily acquire a large amount of prize balls because the special symbol that becomes the jackpot that can acquire the right) is easily repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is a first specific winning in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  In FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operation time TL). Is done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the length of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the length of each time is performed based on the time relationship described below.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the thirteenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). Then, the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The drive of the solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, and the distributing operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the protruding state by the long-term operation time TL, and after the lapse of the long-term operation time TL, the solenoid 6910 is driven to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again. By controlling, the interference member 6930 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53 (b)). In the present embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the interference member 6930 is first waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is reached. Is in a retracted state, so that it is practically impossible to win a specified number of balls, and the first round of the round game R ends when the first operation time T1 elapses.

  Simultaneously with the end of the first round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retreat state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot pass through to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to maintain the retraction state, respectively, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the fourteenth operation pattern>
In the case of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). Then, the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The drive of the solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, and the distributing operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the protruding state for a very short time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the very short time, the interference member 6930 is again held in the retracted state. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state most of the time, so as shown in FIG. Balls can be awarded. Therefore, while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is set in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability variation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to maintain the retraction state, respectively, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time at which it is expected that the winning number of balls will be 3 or more and less than 6 in the first round of the round game R. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball blocks the line of sight of the player, and it is difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to check the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

  Therefore, the change due to the overhang of the interference member 6930 is limited to the third and subsequent balls moving only slightly in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the player recognizes whether or not the change by the interference member 6930 has occurred. It is possible to make the player enjoy the game of making the first specific winning opening 1000a win a ball and storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 without giving a sense of incongruity to the player by the operation of the interference member 6930. Can be.

  Then, the balls are stored near the entrance of the storage channel 1231, and yet the first round of the round game R is not completed, giving a sense of incongruity for the first time, and causing the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to be actually counted. For the first time, it is possible to form a new game characteristic of recognizing a difference in a jackpot type.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation (change in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, and the player can be operated by the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify a change in the situation of the game board 13 from the given discomfort in an easily recognizable manner, and to make the player recognize the difference in the jackpot type. Therefore, attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment is different from the third embodiment. The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured such that the ball disposed at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of the 1st variable winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to the line. The configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment except for the covering front plate 7200, and thus the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same configuration as the configuration described in the third embodiment (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the accommodation portion 1230, the detection sensor 1240, and the drop delay plate 3250). In addition to the above, a second drop delay plate 7260 newly provided in the present embodiment is provided.

  The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member extending between the terminal surface 3251b and the accommodation portion 1230 and extending to the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and descends as the upper surface 7261 separates from the detection sensor 1240. Incline. As shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 extends rearward so as not to interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the second drop delay plate 7260 has a distance between the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 near the detection sensor 1240 less than the diameter of the sphere and a position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) with respect to the movement trajectory of the sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the ball rolling the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second drop delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member that changes whether or not it comes into contact with the ball according to the path of the ball. This will be described below.

  FIGS. 58A and 58B are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35B. FIG. 58 (a) illustrates a case where the open / close plate 1300 changes to a closed state in a state where the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, and FIG. 58 (b) illustrates a case where the open / close plate 1300 is closed. The case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 in the meantime is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the ball is placed on the front plate in accordance with the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 generated during the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it comes into contact with the second drop delay plate 7260 in the process of falling, flows down to the drop delay plate 3250 side along the slope of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 to fall again to the drop position Pf3. To reach.

  Since the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (the distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball, the force of the ball Is large, it is possible to prevent the ball from vertically falling on the back side of the second drop delay plate 7260.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the sphere rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 moves along the rearward slope of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250 toward the main body member 3100. It flows down while contacting with.

  At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the ball is disposed below the second drop delay plate 7260, the length of the second drop delay plate 7260 extended to the back side is determined by the movement trajectory of the ball. The ball falling from above can be received by the upper surface 7261 while also being held on the front side.

  The sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and falls directly after reaching the fall position Pf3. Therefore, similarly to the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250 without delay.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the ball receives the action of the second drop delay plate 7260 and the case where the ball does not receive the ball, depending on from where the ball approaches the second drop delay plate 7260.

  In the present embodiment, while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the ball rolling the drop delay plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, the two balls are continuously rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 1300, and the previous ball is rolled. Even if the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by passing through the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the fall of the ball disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

  In addition, even if two balls are not connected in a row, the ball that rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 1300 happens to be closed when the ball is accidentally placed in front of the detection sensor 1240. Also, the ball can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the sphere rolls leftward on the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260, and then resumes rightward rolling along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, the ball can be maintained substantially in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 for a time longer than the time when the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 1300 is rolled. Thus, the number of useless balls (balls flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and discharged from the first out port 66) that can occur during the interval time can be reduced.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000.

  59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away so that the opening / closing plate 8300 is visible, and a part of the side wall part 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIGS. 59 and 61, after the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is driven (excited), the open / close plate 8300 is in the open state (elevated posture), and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 is in the open state (extended posture). 60 and 62, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the closed state (inclination posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state (submerging posture). ) Is shown. Also, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the near side of the drawing is referred to as a front (front) side, and the far side of the drawing is referred to as a rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 59 to FIG. 62, the open / close plate 8300 of the first variable winning device 8000 has a distance between the shaft portion 1320, the loaded portion 1330, and the both shaft portions 1320 described in each of the above embodiments of about 4 or the like. And a plate portion 8310 formed in a plate shape in three sections on the left side (front side distant from the detection sensor 1240) in front view.

  That is, in the present embodiment, a gap is formed between the opening and closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are arranged in this gap. Is established.

  In addition, since the axial length of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 is shorter than that of the first embodiment, the formation range of the rectangular recess 1122 can be shortened. In the present embodiment, the rectangular recess 1122 is formed in a minimum range necessary for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a portion fixed to the covering front plate 8200, and plays a role of a rolling surface of a ball guided to the detection sensor 1240. Note that the configuration of the covering front plate 8200 is the same as that of the covering front plate 1200 described in the above embodiment, except for the fixed receiving portion 8250. Description is omitted.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-shaped member protruding from the rear surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the main body member 1100, and has a protruding end (rear end) on the right side of the main body member 1100. Abuts on the main body member 1100 in such a manner as to close the open end (front end). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed such that the upper surface (the rolling surface of the sphere) is flush with the upper surface (the rolling surface) of the open / close plate 8300 in the open state, that is, as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the right. The lower surface is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. The arc on which the shape of the lower surface is based is formed as an arc whose radius is shorter than the radius of the operation locus (arc) of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (the longest portion radius, that is, the radius of the motion locus of the upper end of the opposing surface 8341b). Is done. Accordingly, the upper corner of the facing surface 8341b and the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 moves (rotates) the fixed receiving portion 8250 by a predetermined angle or more. Be regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the protrusion of the fixed receiving portion 8250 (length of extension to the left) is designed to be a length that does not allow the ball dropped from the left end of the inclined surface 1237 to ride on the rolling surface as it is. You. That is, in the present embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is disposed to the left of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, even if the ball collides with the fixed receiving portion 8250 when the ball falls vertically from the inclined surface 1237, the center of gravity of the ball is located on the left side of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250. The event that the ball flows down to the detection sensor 1240 hardly occurs, and the ball spills leftward from the fixed receiving portion 8250 and falls toward the first out port 66.

  In addition, when a ball spilling leftward from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the opposing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the load applied to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from the ball causes the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 to be closed. (The direction in which the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is rotated clockwise in front view). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from changing to the open state due to the load applied from the ball.

  Also, due to the configuration on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 8000 in the game area (arrangement of nails, second ball entrance 640, etc., see FIG. 2), a ball having a lower right speed is sent to the fixed receiving portion 8250. The probability of a jump event occurring is extremely low.

  Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having the rolling surface is arranged on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not exert an effect that the ball is excessively easily guided to the detection sensor 1240. It is composed of

  The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to suppress the occurrence of a problem in flowing down a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) while opening and closing the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 by a rotation operation. Hereinafter, the details of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 will be described.

  The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is a member rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110, and is provided with a receiving plate 8341 disposed on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and extends from the receiving plate 8341 toward the rotating shaft. Rod-shaped connecting portion 8342, a loaded portion 8343 arranged on the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and configured to be able to abut the power transmitting member 1400, and the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are relatively non-rotatable. A rod-shaped member to be connected, which mainly includes a shaft support rod portion 8344 rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110.

  In the present embodiment, the shaft support rod portion 8344 has a circular cross section in which the shaft support portion supported by the thin plate member 1110 has a circular cross section, and a support portion supporting the connecting portion 8342 on the front side and a load portion 8343 on the rear side. The supporting portion to be supported is formed in a D-shaped cross section (a shape other than a circular shape). A fitting portion (a hole or a concave portion) having a shape corresponding to the D-shape is formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the load-receiving portion 8343. In a use state (see FIG. 59), the support portion and the fitting portion are fitted. By being combined, the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

  Loaded portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end is rotatably supported by shaft support rod portion 8344, and includes a contact curved surface 8343a that is a curved upper surface that contacts power transmission member 1400, and a loaded portion 8343. And a center of gravity 8343b including the position of the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the abutting curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, and is extended when the extending portion 1420 descends (tilts). The right end where the extension 1420 starts to contact has a surface substantially parallel to the contact start line FL1 including the point where the portion 1420 and the loaded portion 8343 start to contact.

  A smooth curved surface is formed from the right end to the left end, which is the end point of contact with the extending portion 1420, in such a manner that the radius of rotation is gradually reduced. The load transfer to / from the 8343 can be generated smoothly (with low dynamic friction). Accordingly, the ability of the loaded portion 8343 to follow the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

  The center of gravity portion 8343b is a portion for maintaining the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in a closed state (submerged posture) when a load from the power transmission member 1400 is not generated. That is, since the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is included in the center of gravity 8343b, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its posture toward the closed state (submerged posture) by rotation due to its own weight. When the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 contacts the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250, further rotation of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is restricted, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (submerged posture). Is done.

  The connecting portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at a left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 (that is, a portion adjacent to the opening / closing plate 8300 and where a load may be generated). Accordingly, the rigidity of the left end of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342 is narrowed. Therefore, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened and closed by the opening / closing plate 8300. Even if the collision occurs, the possibility that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is damaged can be reduced.

  The connecting portion 8342 only needs to be able to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, and the configuration of the connecting portion 8342 is not limited to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft supporting rod portion 8344, the right end portion of the receiving plate 8341 may be connected to the shaft supporting rod portion 8344 (ie, two connecting rod portions 8344). The right and left ends of the receiving plate 8341 may be supported by rods.) In this case, the two rods are connected and reinforced by a planar plate along a plane orthogonal to the shaft support rod 8344. Is also good.

  The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-shaped portion having a front-rear width substantially equal to the width in the short direction of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300, and is connected to a flat rolling plane 8341a and a left end of the rolling plane 8341a. And a facing surface 8341b that faces the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (see FIG. 59).

  The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a parallel plane that is connected at the surface position to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (upward posture) in the open state (extended posture).

  The facing surface 8341b is configured as a plane orthogonal to the rolling plane 8341a, and has a width in the short direction (thickness of the receiving plate 8341) substantially equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. Accordingly, a surface that receives a load when the opposing surface 8341b contacts the plate portion 8310 can be enlarged, so that the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is damaged by the load at the time of contact (breaking or chipping occurs). Or breakage, etc.) can be easily avoided.

  Here, the facing surface 8341b is disposed on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) of a plane passing through the shaft support rod portion 8344 and orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates in the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60), the movement trajectory LC1 of the facing surface 8341b is a rolling plane in the open state. It will swell above 8341a (radially outward of the shaft support rod portion 8344). This makes it easier to push the sphere (one in the present embodiment) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240, but the details will be described later.

  Next, an operation mode and an operation sequence of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the opening / closing plate 8300, and the regulating member 1600 by the load transmitted through the power transmission member 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  63 and 64, the operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 65 illustrates a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a). 63 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along the line LXIIId-LXIIId in FIG. 63 (c).

  FIG. 64A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along the line LXIVd-LXIVd in FIG. 64 (c).

  In FIGS. 63 and 64, in order to facilitate understanding, fixing of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62), the other components are not shown, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are closed (see FIG. 63 ( FIGS. 63A and 63B) are shown in chronological order as they change from the open state to the open state (see FIGS. 64C and 64D).

  That is, in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), a state in which the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (a state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited). 63 (c) and 63 (d), the distal end member 1520 is displaced, and the auxiliary second distance shorter than the second distance h2 (see FIG. 20 (c)) shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a. 64 (c) and 64 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (when the solenoid 1510 Excited State of being arranged in a final arrival position) of the focus is illustrated, respectively.

  When the distal end member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 63 (c)), the power transmission member 1400 moves the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 to the contact start line FL1. I agree with the state to match. That is, in the states shown in FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts receiving a load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the state shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), FIG. The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is kept closed until the state shown in FIG. 63 (c) and FIG. 63 (d) is reached.)

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 65, distances h1, h2, h2a, h3, and h4 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) the single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operation earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and ends operation earlier. .

  In addition, the regulating member 1600 starts operating toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time as the opening / closing plate 8300 opens. As shown in FIG. 65, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, the respective members operate in the reverse order of the drive (excitation), as shown in a symmetrical manner in each timing chart.

  As shown in FIG. 65, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, the opening / closing plate 8300 is not in the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is provided. The state in which the hemisphere can enter is maintained (see FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d)). Therefore, in a period in which the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, a state in which a ball can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the movement trajectory LC1 of the opposing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is configured to expand above the rolling plane 8341a, and when the detection sensor 1240 detects the sphere P81, the sphere P81 is detected. The center of the sphere P82 flowing down the upstream side of the sphere P81 in series with the sphere P81 is a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320 and passing through the center of the shaft support rod portion 8344 (the most swelling point of the motion trajectory LC1 is (The plane passing through) is disposed closer to the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, a load in the rightward direction (the direction in which the ball P82 is pushed into the detection sensor 1240) can be applied to the ball P82 at the upper end of the facing surface 8341b.

  Accordingly, with the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor on the assumption that an open ball is formed (the conditions of the ball upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfy the conditions, see the balls P81 and P82 in FIG. 59). When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released by the detection at 1240 (for example, when the specified number of balls in the round game R is detected by the detection sensor 1240 detecting the ball P81) However, only one ball (corresponding to the ball P82) riding on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 has an over-winning prize (so-called over-winning; that is, a predetermined number of round games R (books). In the embodiment, it is configured to allow the detection sensor 1240 to detect more than 10 balls (pass the first specific winning opening 1000a). Can.

  In the present embodiment, while the load is applied to the ball P82 by the receiving surface 8341 operating in an arc orbit, the upper surface of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is rolled after being pushed into the detection sensor 1240 side by the load. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball P82 is pushed along the arc trajectory into the detection sensor 1240, the ball P82 flutters when passing through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the ball P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240 and the downflow occurs. Stagnant, bouncing back, etc.) can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the sphere is configured to be able to be stored on the downstream side (storage channel 1231) of the detection sensor 1240, and as described in each of the above embodiments, the detection sensor is configured by the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231. The passage of 1240 spheres can be regulated. Therefore, when the storage channel 1231 is full of spheres, the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is regulated by the sphere, so that the sphere P82 does not enter the storage channel 1231 and the auxiliary opening and closing is performed. After the member 8340 is closed, it spills and flows down to the first out port 66.

  On the other hand, if there is a gap in the storage channel 1231, excess winning can be allowed for only one ball on the rolling plane 8341 a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. Accordingly, the arrangement of the spheres downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (i.e., the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage channel 1231) can change the likelihood of occurrence of excess winnings. This can be performed by controlling the flow of the sphere in the road 1231 to be adjusted.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is smooth in such a manner that the radius of rotation gradually decreases from the contact start portion (right end) to the power transmission member 1400 to the contact end portion (left end). A curve was formed. As a result, the load can be transmitted in a state where the dynamic friction is small. Accordingly, the ability of the loaded portion 8343 to follow the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

  In a state in which the open ball is formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is limited to one ball on the rolling plane 8341a. When the state changes (rotates) from the open state to the closed state, a load is applied from the rolling plane 8341a to the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a). Thus, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (operates to the closed state), a limited number (one in the present embodiment) of the sphere enters the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a). The ball can be easily made. This can increase the possibility of occurrence of an excess winning with a limited number.

  In addition, the possibility of occurrence of the excess prize changes depending on how the balls in the storage channel 1231 are stored. That is, depending on the arrangement state (the number of stored balls, etc.) of the balls in the storage channel 1231 when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (operates toward the closed state), it is possible to change the possibility of occurrence of an excess winning. Further, the arrangement state of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be adjusted by the driving (excitation) control mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the operation mode of the interference member 6930. In other words, by controlling the drive (excitation) mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, the number of award balls to be paid out due to excess winning can be equalized.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 in the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. The same components as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  66 and 68, a state after the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (elevated posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the open state (extended posture). In FIGS. 67 and 69, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the closed state (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state (submerged posture). The state after the change is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiment, except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from the above embodiment. In brief, this corresponds to a case where the power transmission member 1400 of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment is replaced with the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment.

  As in the above-described embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400, the front-side protruding end of the pushing portion 1422 and the front-side protruding end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are the same orthogonal to the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400. It is arranged on a plane. Therefore, the opening / closing plate 8300 can be opened by pushing the engagement portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 8300 by the time difference forming portion 5423 (corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 71A even before being pushed by the pushing portion 1422). The state changes to the state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

  The thin plate member 9110 extends to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 with an auxiliary entrance 9111 formed to have a size that allows a ball to pass therethrough, and a length capable of guiding the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111. And a rolling plate 9112.

  The auxiliary entrance 9111 is a through-hole disposed to the left of the outlet 1150 in a front view, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) balls are paid out by detecting the passage of the balls. It is a prize ball mouth. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the auxiliary entrance 9111 may be an entrance (for example, an exit) in which payout of award balls does not occur.

  The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate on which the sphere flowing down between the main body member 9100 and the covering front plate 8200 rolls on the upper surface, and as the upper surface approaches the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 (the more toward the right side). ) It is formed as an inclined surface that descends. Further, the rolling plate 9112 is formed so as to be connected to the lower side of the auxiliary entrance 9111. On the front side of the auxiliary entrance 9111, the rolling plate 9112 is formed as an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the rear side. You.

  That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided along the slope to the front side of the auxiliary entrance 9111, and then passes through the auxiliary entrance 9111 and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in the present embodiment, three prize balls are paid out to the player.

  The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed to be such that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the inclined surface 1237 does not pick up the ball flowing down the flow path FK1 of the ball falling freely. That is, in the state where the first variable prize winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball does not pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111 regardless of how much rightward is continued.

  On the other hand, the opening / closing plate 8300 having an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the right is slightly driven (for example, excited for 0.1 second and the opening / closing plate 8300 is rotated toward the open state), and the opening / closing plate 8300 is turned rightward from the opening / closing plate 8300. When the ball flows down the load flow path FK2 in which the loaded ball flows down, the ball can roll on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111. That is, in this embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven, the ball that has come into contact with the opening / closing plate 8300 can pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111 in addition to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Here, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 is different from that described in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

  70 and 71, the operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Also, FIG. 72 illustrates a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the open / close plate 8300, the auxiliary open / close member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

  70A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70A. 70 (c) is a rear view of the first variable prize device 9000, and FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable prize device 9000 along the line LXXd-LXXd in FIG. 70 (c).

  FIG. 71 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a). 71 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along the line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71 (c).

  70 and 71, for easy understanding, the fixing of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69), the other components are not shown, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are in the closed state (FIG. 70 ( 70 (a) and FIG. 70 (b)), and how the state changes from the open state (see FIG. 71 (c) and FIG. 71 (d)) in chronological order.

  That is, in FIGS. 70A and 70B, a state in which the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (a state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is shown. 70 (c) and 70 (d), a state in which the distal end member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIG. FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (b) show a state where the distal end member 1520 is displaced and is located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a shorter than the auxiliary first distance h1a. In FIG. 71 (d), the distal end member 1520 is displaced and located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a (a final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited). State is shown, respectively.

  When the tip member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a (see FIG. 70C), the interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400 and the restriction are provided. This is the same as the state where the contact with the extension portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d), the regulating member 1600 starts receiving a load from the open / close plate 8300 (from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b) to FIG. 70 ( Until the state shown in FIG. 70 (c) and FIG. 70 (d), the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the raised posture (discharged state)).

  In the present embodiment, unlike the eighth embodiment, in a state where the distal end member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71A), the open / close plate 8300 is opened. State (elevating posture), and the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state. Then, in a state where the distal end member 1520 is disposed at a position away from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71A) that has been closed is opened (see FIG. 71A). 71 (c)).

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), the open / close plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (elevated posture) and regulated. The member 1600 is maintained in the storage state.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 72, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) the single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operation earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 After the operation is completed, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating.

  In addition, the regulating member 1600 starts operating toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operating toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time as the opening / closing plate 8300 opens. As shown in FIG. 72, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, the members operate in the reverse order of the driving (excitation), as shown in the timing chart in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 starts driving from a non-excited state, only the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 has not started operating yet. Therefore, by shortening the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (by performing a short opening), the state of the open / close plate 8300 can be changed while the auxiliary open / close member 8340 is maintained in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 73, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  FIG. 73 illustrates a case where the period during which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) is set to a half of the time (0.1 seconds in this embodiment) required for the open / close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. (I.e., a case where driving (excitation) is performed for 0.05 seconds is shown).

  In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and the operation of raising only the opening / closing plate 8300 to the intermediate state is repeated. According to this operation, a load can be applied to the sphere flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300, so that the flow path of the sphere reaching the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven is caused to flow down. The path can be switched from the path FK1 to the load flow-down path FK2 (see FIG. 66). Therefore, by continuing to launch the ball by right-handing, it is possible to pass the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 and pay out the prize ball to the player.

  With this configuration, it is possible to configure, for example, a playability of paying out a prize ball by a small hit game. In the small hitting game, by driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 in the open pattern shown in FIG. 73, the downward flow path of the ball reaching the front side of the open / close plate 8300 is switched at the timing when the open / close plate 8300 operates, and the auxiliary The player can guide the ball to the entrance 9111 and pay out the prize ball.

  Since the driving of the solenoid 1510 for the small hitting game can be continuously performed a plurality of times, the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of times. For example, since one drive (excitation) period is 0.05 seconds, when the drive (excitation) period of the solenoid 1510 is 1.8 seconds in total, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excitation) 36 times. be able to.

  Further, by setting the drive (excitation) interval, it is possible to easily apply a load to the ball via the opening / closing plate 8300. For example, when the ball is fired at 0.6 second intervals, since 0.6 × X (the number of times the ball arrives) = 0.5 × X + 0.1 × X =, the solenoid 1510 is fired at 0.5 second intervals. (Excitation), a load can be applied to the spheres via the open / close plate 8300 at a rate of about one in five spheres, regardless of the drive (excitation) start timing.

  In this case, about seven balls can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 in one small hitting game, and about 21 prize balls can be paid out to the player.

  In this case, the period of the small hitting game is 0.5 seconds interval × 36 times = about 18 seconds. As described above, by extending the time of one small hitting game, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reserved ball of the special symbol is lost (cut) by the end of the small hitting game. Thus, the small hit game can be generated without interruption.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 disposed above the auxiliary entrance opening 9111 is maintained in a closed state, so that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates as described above (above the auxiliary entrance 9111). As in the case where a movable object operates), a ball flowing down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 side (that is, a ball flowing down on the load flow-down path FK2) receives a load from the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and is flipped or opened / closed. It can be prevented from being guided by the detection sensor 1240 on the rolling plane 8341a of the member 8340.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is not in the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is provided. The state in which the hemisphere can enter is maintained in the same manner as described in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, also in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily configure an excess winning with a limited number of balls.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, control is performed so that the regulating member 1600 changes its state to the discharging state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed. When the storage flow channel 1231 is full, it is possible to prevent the ball from being discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 from being erroneously accelerated, so that it is possible to prevent occurrence of an excess winning.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed, the opening / closing plate 8300 maintains the open state (see FIG. 71A). Therefore, the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be changed while the state where the ball can be placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 (open state) is maintained. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a change in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and a time change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 74, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is set to １ ／ of the time required for the open / close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment). Is performed (that is, a case where the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is illustrated). In the following, the mode of releasing the drive (excitation) is also referred to as “１ ／ release”.

  In this case, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the state (maintain the storage of the sphere in the storage channel 1231), and only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the balls on the upper surfaces of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, several spheres (the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300, (Mainly, the sphere located outside the motion trajectory LC1) can flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66).

  Thus, when the ball rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 8300 still passes through the detection sensor 1240 when the open / close plate 8300 is still open (when 15 payout balls are paid out). And the case where the detection sensor 1240 does not pass and passes through the auxiliary entrance 9111 (the case where three prize balls are paid out).

  In this case, the time required for the specified number of balls to pass through the detection sensor 1240 is extended, so that the time of the round game R can be extended without causing a ball loss.

  It is to be noted that the upper and lower surfaces of the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are provided with irregularities, and a vertically long rib is protruded toward the front side at a position in front of the thin plate member 9110 where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 8300 is in contact. By doing so, the flow speed of the ball may be suppressed, and the ball may be arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240. Thereby, when the 1/4 release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is executed, the possibility that the ball is arranged at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300 can be increased. The function of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by canceling the drive (excitation) by 1/4 can be improved.

  In addition, a plurality of types of timing and the number of times of performing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 can be set by associating with the big hit type.

  For example, when the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 1/4 of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released during 9.0 seconds required for 15 balls to reach the opening / closing plate 8300. Occurs five times, that is, one quarter of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released once every 1.8 seconds, so that about five balls are assisted during the round game R. The guide can be guided to the entrance 9111.

  In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball wins in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R.

  In addition, by making this interval twice, that is, once every 3.6 seconds, and 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, about 5 balls are played during the execution of the round game R twice. The guide can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111.

  In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball wins in the first specific winning opening 1000a during the execution of the round game R twice.

  In order to satisfy the condition five times in 9.0 seconds, it is not necessary to make the intervals 1.8 seconds. For example, the solenoid 1510 is repeated five times during 9.0 seconds by adding 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds, and 2.2 seconds in that order for each 0.2 seconds. May be canceled. Further, the １ ／ release of the solenoid 1510 may be generated at different timings. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs.

  Also, for example, the timing at which the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed is concentrated in the first half of the round game R, so that the ball is continuously fired from the start of the round game R, so that the ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111. It is possible to configure a gaming property that increases the probability of being played.

  In this case, if the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds, the ball may not reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing when the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In other words, those who have hit the ball at the interval between rounds can start the next round game R while the hit ball has reached near the first variable winning device 9000, Since the probability that the ball is guided to the ball opening 9111 can be increased, and as a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be increased, it is possible to motivate the player to continuously hit the ball in the interval between rounds. it can.

  Also, for example, the timing for executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is densely arranged in the latter half of the round game R, so that a predetermined number (ten in the present embodiment) of winning (first specification) is reached until the middle of the round game R. It is possible to promote a loose jackpot game in which a ball is fired intermittently so as not to cause a winning in the winning opening 1000a).

  In this case, in the latter half of the round game R, prolonging the round game R until the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed causes payout of the prize ball due to the ball passing through the auxiliary entrance 9111. Since the number of payouts can be increased, it is possible to cause the player to execute a loose jackpot game such as intermittently firing a ball.

  In this case, a difference is provided in the number of times the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs in the second half of the round game R (for example, there are 0 times, 1 time, and 5 times). As a result, the additional prize balls obtained as a result of the loose jackpot game can be differentiated, so that the player's attention to the flow-down state of the ball that has reached the first variable prize device 9000 is maintained in a high state. can do.

  On the other hand, a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls may be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the ball is continuously fired and before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released. . In this case, an increase in the payout of prize balls due to the passage of the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 cannot be expected, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R and the end of the jackpot game The timing of receiving a lottery later can be hastened.

  In this way, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim at the payout of the prize ball through the auxiliary entrance 9111 or to ignore the payout ball and end the round game R early.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A configuration in which a ball that collides with the opening / closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening / closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by being subjected to a load directed to the auxiliary entrance 9111. did. Thereby, even in the case of the operation mode in which the period during which the open / close plate 8300 is maintained in the open state is short, the payout of the prize ball can be easily performed. Can be enthusiastically executed.

  By performing the ４ release of the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 while maintaining the state where the opening / closing plate 8300 guides the ball to the detection sensor 1240, the ball reaching the upstream of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at a specific timing. Flows down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111. Thereby, a variation can be provided in the progress mode of the round game R in the big hit game and the mode of paying out the prize balls.

  For example, even when the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a does not exceed the specified number, the player can pay extra prize balls by entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 to obtain extra prize balls (first It is possible to obtain a prize ball more than a prize ball (150 in the present embodiment) paid out when a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the specific winning opening 1000a.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 in the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. The same components as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 75 and 76 show a state where the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is de-energized and the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 reaches the lowermost end. In FIG. 77, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is shown. Are driven (excited) so that the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 can be discharged on the way.

  As shown in FIG. 75 to FIG. 77, the first variable winning device 10000 includes a case where a ball can be discharged from an intermediate position of a storage channel 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the covered front plate 10200. Except for the difference from the embodiment, the present embodiment is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiment. Briefly, the movable parts (that is, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the interference device 6900) excluding the intermediate discharge device 10180 are the same as those in the eighth embodiment. Is diverted as it is.

  In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging a sphere at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231 will be described. In the present embodiment, the covering front plate 10200 extends in a box shape that opens toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage portion 10230 having a storage channel 1231, a projecting portion 1235, and an inclined surface 1237. .

  The accommodating portion 10230 includes a bulging portion 10232 formed such that a lower wall portion of the box bulges downward, and a through hole 10233 formed in the front-rear direction near the bulging portion 10232.

  The bulging portion 10232 bulges vertically below the sphere whose flow is regulated by the interference member 6930 with a volume equal to or larger than a sphere. Is formed. Thus, the ball staying at a position near the interference member 6930 can be configured to drop downward from the storage channel 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232.

  The through hole 10233 has a horizontal hole 10233a extending horizontally below the bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 and a vertical hole spatially connected to the horizontal hole 10233a and extending downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. 10233b, and an inclined surface 10233c as an upper bottom surface of the vertical hole 10233b, which is inclined downward toward the rear side.

  The horizontal hole 10233a is disposed above the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right ends, near the right end, and below the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231. It is configured to enter above a plane (a plane with a constant inclination) along the extension of the lower bottom surface.

  The main body member 10100 has the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a in the thin plate member 10110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 described in the above embodiment. A horizontal hole 10111 to be bored, an outlet 10112 through which a ball thrown to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c is bored, and a movable hole provided in the thin plate member 10110 and moving along the horizontal hole 10111 And an intermediate discharge device 10180 having a portion.

  The intermediate discharge device 10180 mainly includes a movable member 10181 that is inserted into both the horizontal holes 10111 and 10233a and is movable to the left and right, and a solenoid 10182 that generates a driving force to move the movable member 10181 to the left and right. Prepare.

  The movable member 10181 excites the solenoid 10182 in a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes an opening in the middle of the storage channel 1231 (an opening leading to the through hole 10233) when the solenoid 10182 is not excited (not driven). In the (driving) state, the state is switched to an open state (see FIG. 77) that allows a sphere to pass through an opening in the middle of the storage channel 1231 (an opening leading to the through hole 10233).

  The movable member 10181 is kept out of contact with the bulging portion 10232 when the ball is not on the ball. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of friction between the movable member 10181 and the bulging portion 10232, and it is possible to reduce the movement resistance.

  On the other hand, in the closed state, the movable member 10181 is supported by the upper surface of the bulging portion 10232 and the left and right ends abutting up and down. Accordingly, even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 in the closed state of the movable member 10181, the movable member 10181 can be prevented from drooping excessively, and the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 can be prevented. Flow can be smoothed.

  The movable member 10181 is an upper surface, which is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left, and functions as a rolling surface on which a ball rolls in a closed state. And an inclined lower surface 10181b formed at the left end and inclined downward toward the right.

  The inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state before the ball rides, and in a state where the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in a vertical direction (a state in which the movable member 10181 is floating), the right end portion is adjacent to the storage portion. The flow path 1231 is disposed slightly below the lower bottom surface. Thereby, the load (resistance) received by the ball when the ball moves from the storage channel 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a can be reduced.

  In addition, the inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state after the ball rides, and in a state where the movable member 10181 vertically contacts the bulging portion 10232 (a state in which the movable member 10181 sinks), the left end portion is adjacent to the storage portion. The flow path 1231 has a shape that corresponds to the lower bottom surface and the surface position. Thereby, the load (resistance) applied to the ball when the ball moves from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage channel 1231 can be reduced.

  Note that the shape of the above-described inclined upper surface 10181a has a smaller degree of inclination than the shape of the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 and is not the same shape. However, since the difference is slight, in this embodiment, similarly to the above embodiment, the time required for one ball to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2. Seconds.

  The inclined lower surface 10181b is used to make it easier to get on and off the bulging portion 10232 even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state and the movable member 10181 is about to fall forward. It is an inclined surface provided in. Thereby, the tip of the movable member 10181 is restricted from moving toward the inner surface of the vertical hole 10233b, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the movable member 10181 stops in that state, and keep the flow of the sphere of the storage channel 1231 smooth. be able to.

  When the intermediate discharge device 10180 is opened (see FIG. 77), the upstream sphere, including the third storage sphere counted from the downstream end, flows down the vertical hole 10233b, and the load from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is sent to the rear side and is sent to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the discharge port 10112.

  In this embodiment, a detection sensor 10112a that detects passage of a sphere is provided at the outlet 10112, and is configured to be able to determine the number of spheres that have passed through the outlet 10112. The ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a is detected by detecting means (for example, the specific region detecting sensor 4860, the non-specific region detecting sensor 4870, and the detecting sensor 10112a or the non-specific region detecting sensor 4870 in FIG. 51). ), And control is performed to determine whether the number of incoming balls matches the number of discharged balls.

  According to the present embodiment, according to the operation mode of the intermediate discharge device 10180 in the round game R, when the specified number (ten in the present embodiment) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel It is possible to switch between a case where the storage channel 1231 is full and a state where the storage channel 1231 is not full. This will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of FIG. 78, for ease of understanding, description will be made assuming that the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state.

  FIG. 78 (a) to FIG. 78 (d) are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a and a time change in the state of the movable member 10181 in the round game R. In FIG. 78 (a), the first specific winning opening 1000a is in an open state (also referred to as "open" in the figure. The closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also referred to as "closed" in the figure. The time change when the movable member 10181 is maintained in the closed state (also referred to as “closed” in the drawing; the same applies in the subsequent drawings) over a period of time assumed to be the same in the following drawings is shown in FIG. At 78 (b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in the open state (also referred to as “open” in the figure; the same applies to the subsequent figures) over the period in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is in the open state. The timing changes in each case are illustrated.

  In FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after a lapse of a first predetermined time (1 second in this embodiment) after the first specific winning opening 1000a starts to change to the open state. 2. When the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state after the lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) and is maintained as it is, in FIG. 78 (d), the first specific winning opening 1000a is in the open state in FIG. The movable member 10181 changes to the open state after a lapse of the reference time T11s (about 15 seconds in this embodiment) from the start of the state change, and then closes after the lapse of a second predetermined time (2 seconds in this embodiment). Time changes when the state changes and is maintained as it is are shown respectively.

  As described above, the driving of the movable member 10181 (the driving of the solenoid 10182) is associated with (combined with) the combination of the number of the round R to be executed and the jackpot type. It can be executed in various types of driving modes.

  For example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (a), during the round game R, the movable member 10181 is always in the closed state, so that the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 is discharged in the same manner as in each of the above embodiments. It is discharged from the outlet 1150. That is, since the balls are not discharged from the middle position of the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is formed by entering a predetermined number (ten in the present embodiment) of the balls into the first specific winning opening 1000 a. It is full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (it can be made impossible).

  Also, for example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (b), since the movable member 10181 is always in the open state during the round game R, the sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 is different from the above embodiments. Before reaching the outlet 1150, it falls into the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the outlet 10112. That is, even if the specified number (ten in the present embodiment) of the balls enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel 1231 does not become full. For this reason, it is possible to easily generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be possible).

  In FIG. 78 (b), after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released as the end of the round game R, the movable member 10181 after a lapse of 2 seconds (a period required for the ball to pass through the storage channel 1231). Is changed to the open state, so that the ball including the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a last (immediately before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released) can be dropped toward the through hole 10233. Therefore, it is possible to configure so that the ball passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a does not flow down to the outlet 1150 at all.

  Further, for example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the open state 1.0 seconds after the start of the round game R, and the movable member 10181 3.0 seconds later. Since the control is performed so as to change from the open state to the closed state, if the ball can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds elapse from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in this embodiment) ) Of the balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel 1231 does not become full. For this reason, it is possible to easily generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be possible).

  In order to arrange the ball above the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds elapse from the start of the round game R, considering the time for the ball to flow down the storage channel 1231, about 2.5 seconds from the start of the round game R Before the second elapses, the ball needs to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  In this embodiment, the time of about 2.5 seconds is the time required for the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to flow down the game area and reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (the shortest time). Time, about 4 seconds). Therefore, it is not enough to fire the ball from the start of the round game R.

  Therefore, in order to prevent the storage channel 1231 from being full, it is necessary to continue firing the ball even in the inter-round interval before the round game R. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval between rounds.

  In addition, an effect is formed by a display device or the like such that it is difficult for the player to grasp the information on whether the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c) is generated in the round game R of the round or not in the first place. Thus, regardless of whether or not the round game R is driven in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R is suppressed. Can be.

  Further, for example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from the start of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is opened, and 2.0 seconds elapse thereafter. Later, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change to the closed state.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively performed during the period in which the round game R is continued, but the control is skipped when the round game R is completed, and the movable member 10181 is forcibly closed. Is switched.

  In the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), for example, when a first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in this embodiment) Of the balls pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R ends before the movable member 10181 enters the open state, so that all the balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a are stored in the storage channel. The storage channel 1231 is full and the storage channel 1231 is full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (it can be made impossible).

  On the other hand, for example, when a second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the balls is the first specific winning. If the ball 1000 passes through the mouth 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the round game R ends, and the ball falls toward the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112. It does not become tongue. For this reason, it is possible to easily generate an excess winning exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be possible).

  Therefore, according to the driving mode of FIG. 78 (d), the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) is determined depending on whether the time required for the round games R is less than the reference time T11s or longer than the reference time T11s. It is possible to switch whether or not excess winnings occur.

  In the case of this driving mode, it is preferable to execute the round game R over a long period of time if the number of payouts of the prize balls in the round game R is emphasized. That is, it is preferable that the firing of the balls is intermittently stopped so that the specified number (ten in the present embodiment) of the balls do not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a early. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds is promoted.

  On the other hand, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), as described above, by continuously firing the ball at the interval between rounds, it is possible to aim for the occurrence of an excess winning.

  In this way, by distributing the driving modes in which the preferable ball firing modes are opposite to each other in the round game R of the jackpot game (even in the same round, the driving mode is controlled to be different depending on the jackpot type), It is possible to improve the player's concentration on the jackpot game as compared to the case where the jackpot game should always be executed in the same firing mode (the player can obtain the same profit).

  According to the present embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is determined by the operation mode of the movable member 10181. Can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between a case where the storage channel 1231 is full when 10 balls are filled and a case where the storage channel 1231 is not full even when 10 balls are filled.

  In addition, when the interference member 6930 is in the protruding state, the number of the storage channels 1231 is seven (when the two balls are already arranged downstream of the interference member 6930, nine, see FIG. 75). ) Can be switched between a case where the tank is full by entering the ball and a case where the storage channel 1231 is not full even if 7 (or 9) balls are entered.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 in the extended state in response to the movable member 10181 being in the open state, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing over the through hole 10233 in the left-right direction (jumping over) through the momentum. Can be prevented.

  The driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to be driven by operating the operation button 300.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  By opening the movable member 10181, the sphere can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. Thus, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  That is, while the first specific winning opening 1000a is maintained in the open state, the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is the same as the stored number of the storage channel 1231; The case where the number of balls is different from the stored number of the storage channel 1231 can be configured. This makes it possible to change the possibility of occurrence of an excess winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a depending on the driving mode of the movable member 10181.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 in the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 along line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the installation front board 11200.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in the first variable winning device 11000 of the present embodiment, the shape of the open / close plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream portion of the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted, and the first It has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 3000 of the third embodiment except that two additional winning ports 11183 and the like are added. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the above-described embodiment, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The main body member 11100 has a configuration in which the thin plate member 11110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board is apart from the configuration already described in each of the above embodiments by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the ball. A pair of left and right projecting ribs 11111 projecting toward the front side of the thin plate member 1110, a guide hole 11112 formed as a horizontally long hole and guiding the movement of opening / closing means 11190 described later, and extending to the left of the guide hole 11112. And a guide recess 11113 that is formed as a bottomed recess.

  In addition, the main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional winning opening 11183 configured to allow a ball to pass therethrough, and an opening / closing means 11190 for changing a winning probability of the ball to the second additional winning opening 11183. The details of the opening / closing means 11190 will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the fall delay plate 3250 formed on the covering front plate 11200 maintains only the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position more distant from the side wall 1220 than the diameter of the sphere on the upstream side, The left part of the cut surface SP12 is omitted.

  The position of the cut surface SP12 is set as a position where the sphere that has reached the fall delay plate 3250 by rolling on the inclined surface 1237 does not reach alone. In other words, the ball that has reached the fall delay plate 3250 by rolling on the inclined surface 1237 flows down to the lower right (in the direction approaching the detection sensor 1240) along the slope of the fall delay plate 3250 as long as no external force is applied. I do.

  On the other hand, when a load is applied to the ball and the ball is thrown to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball falls to the second additional winning opening 11183 with a high probability. This falling ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 after passing through the opening / closing means 11190 which will be newly described in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening from which three prize balls are paid out by detecting the passage of the ball.

  The opening / closing plate 11300 has an inclined surface 11340 remaining in the left half portion after being cut off in a shape inclined toward the left shaft portion 1320 from the rotation tip side toward the rotation shaft side.

  The inclined surface 11340 has a position where the end on the rotation tip side is rightward of the cut surface SP12 and the horizontal speed becomes zero after landing on the drop delay plate 3250 (final arrival position FP12, FIG. (See FIG. 82 (a)).

  Therefore, when the open / close plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state when there is a ball at the position where the speed in the left-right direction becomes 0 (final arrival position FP12; see FIG. 82A), the inclined plane 11340 The ball is loaded. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIG. 82 (a) to 82 (c), the change of the state of the first variable prize device 11000 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 82 (a), the opening / closing plate 11300 is in the closed state, and the inclination is inclined. The final arrival position FP12 of the ball that has rolled on the surface 1237 and landed on the drop delay plate 3250 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 82B, the opening / closing plate 11300 is changed from the state shown in FIG. The state after the change is illustrated, and FIG. 82 (c) illustrates a state where the ball falls from the state illustrated in FIG. 82 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the sphere arranged at the final arrival position FP12 comes into contact with the inclined surface 11340 when the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state, and receives a leftward load. The ball given the leftward load is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the drop delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional winning opening 11183.

  On the other hand, when the ball has not reached the final arrival position FP12 (for example, when the ball slightly flows down from the final arrival position FP12 and is arranged at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 82A), the open / close plate 11300 is opened. Even if the state changes, the inclined surface 11340 does not come into contact with the sphere, and the sphere has a rightward component since the rotation direction of the opening / closing plate 11300 (the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal). Direction), and is pushed to the detection sensor 1240 side. Therefore, in this case, the ball does not enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, at the timing when the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state, depending on which position on the front side of the open / close plate 11300 the ball is directed to the detection sensor 1240 , It can be switched to the second additional winning opening 11183.

  The payout of the prize ball by passing the ball through the second additional winning opening 11183 is an extra prize ball exceeding the prize ball planned for the jackpot game for the player, and therefore, the ball passing through the second additional winning opening 11183. The more players there are, the more profits the player can get.

  During the period when the opening / closing plate 11300 maintains the closed state (inter-round interval period), the launching of the ball is continued toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate is stopped as compared with the case where the emission of the ball is stopped. Since the situation where the ball is disposed at the final arrival position FP12 at the timing when the 11300 changes to the open state can be easily caused, it is possible to promote a game mode in which the launch of the ball is continued over the interval period between rounds. it can. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the player stops firing the ball during the interval period between rounds.

  Note that the entry of the ball into the second additional winning opening 11183 is based on the condition that the open / close plate 11300 is changed to the open state, and thus the open / close plate 11300 is driven to the open state (big hit game or small hit game). In a state other than the above, even if right-handed is continued, the ball is unlikely to enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

  Thereby, in a situation where the opening / closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation where the right-handed instruction effect is not executed), even if the right-handed player performs a right-handed shot, the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183. It can be configured that it is difficult for the player to obtain the accompanying profit. In other words, the second additional winning opening 11183 can be made to function as a winning opening in which a ball can easily enter in a situation where driving of the opening and closing plate 11300 occurs (small hitting game or big hitting game).

  Next, the opening / closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) show the arrangement of the protruding rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190, and the second additional winning opening 11183. It is a schematic front view of the projecting rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190, and the second additional winning opening 11183 schematically shown. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the time change of the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening / closing means 11190 is a movable means which is guided by the guide hole 11112 and moves right and left in conjunction with the movement of the distal end member 1520, and is supported by being inserted into the guide hole 11112. Main body support portion 11191, a transmission portion 11192 extending upward from the back side portion of main body support portion 11191 and supported by tip member 1520, and extending leftward from the front side portion of main body support portion 11191. An extending portion 11193, a first projecting portion 11194 projecting to the front side at the left end of the extending portion 11193, and a space slightly longer than the diameter of the ball is provided to the right of the first projecting portion 11194. And a second projecting portion 11195 projecting in the same shape as the first projecting portion 11194.

  A method of assembling the opening / closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is vertically enlarged so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portion is slightly longer than the main body support portion 11191 and is entirely longer than the main body support portion 11191. Is formed as a horizontally long slot.

  Therefore, after projecting the transmission portion 11192 to the rear side through the enlarged portion, the opening / closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and then the driving device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100, and the transmission portion 11192 is supported by the tip member 1520. Thus, the opening / closing means 11190 can be assembled in a manner interlocked with the tip member 1520. Since the transmission portion 11192 does not reach the enlarged portion on the right end of the guide hole 11112 in the movable range of the solenoid 1510 (see FIGS. 83 and 84), it is possible to prevent the opening / closing means 11190 from being disengaged from the guide hole 11112. can do.

  The extension portion 11193 is formed to have a thickness enough to be completely accommodated in the guide concave portion 11113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down on the front side of the opening / closing means 11190 from colliding with the extending portion 11193, and the flowing path of the ball changes in the front-rear direction, or the extending portion 11193 is loaded by the ball. It is possible to prevent breakage.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 are formed as inclined plates which are inclined downward and leftward when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, when the ball on the fall delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, it falls between the protruding ribs 11111 and enters the second additional winning opening 11183 by the opening / closing means 11190. Whether to do is switched. This will be described in detail.

  FIG. 85A shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end of the movement range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end of the second protrusion 11195 and the right protrusion rib 11111 are arranged on the center line of the second additional winning opening 11183.

  When the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85A, the ball contacts the second protruding portion 11195 and flows to the left. As a result, since the ball flows off the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be reduced.

  FIG. 85 (b) shows a state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at an intermediate position in the movement range (see FIG. 20 (c)). That is, it corresponds to immediately after the opening and closing plate 11300 is in the closed state.

  In this case, the upper end of the first protrusion 11194 is disposed to the left of a vertical line passing through the middle position between the pair of protrusions 11111, and the upper end of the second protrusion 11195 has a second additional prize. It is arranged on the right side of the center line of the mouth 11183.

  Therefore, when the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (b), the ball contacts the first protruding portion 11194, flows rightward, and contacts the second protruding portion 11195. It flows to the left. Since the falling ball flows down to the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be increased.

  FIG. 85 (c) shows a state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the right end position of the movement range (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the opening and closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state, as in FIG. 85 (b).

  In this case, the upper end of the first projecting portion 11194 is disposed on the right side of a vertical line passing through the intermediate position between the pair of projecting ribs 11111.

  Therefore, when the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85C, the ball contacts the first protruding portion 11194 and flows to the left. The falling ball is deviated from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down, so that the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be reduced.

  That is, the opening / closing means 11190 keeps the probability that a ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 while the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the open state or the closed state, and keeps the second additional winning while changing the state. It is configured such that the probability of a ball entering the mouth 11183 increases.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 changes by the opening / closing means 11190 interlocking with the state of the opening / closing plate 1300. Here, a description will be given of a case where a ball can be expected to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 and a case where it cannot be expected due to a difference in drive control of the solenoid 1510.

  The phenomenon that the ball flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the falling delay plate 3250 occurs when the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c)).

  Therefore, in a drive pattern in which the solenoid 1510 continues to maintain the drive (excitation) state (an operation pattern with a low probability of entering the ball), when the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the protruding rib 11111, the tip member 1520 The opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position in the same manner as the arrangement of (1). Since the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained because the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained, the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 is deviated from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

  On the other hand, immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), once the drive (excitation) is released (opening / closing plate 11300 is shortly opened) in the drive pattern (operation pattern with a high probability of entering the ball), the cut surface SP12 When the ball flowing to the left passes through the protruding rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the left end position. Thereafter, the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is temporarily released. The opening / closing means 11190 moves toward the right end position by the urging force of the return spring. As a result, the sphere flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a rightward load from the first projecting portion 11194 and flows down along the second projecting portion 11195, and is directed toward the second additional winning opening 11183. Can flow down.

  In this way, by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate 11300, the cut surface SP12 is cut at the same timing (for example, the timing at which the inclined surface 11340 comes into contact with the ball at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82 (b)). The probability that the ball that has flowed to the left will enter the second additional winning opening 11183 can be changed.

  Note that, in the operation pattern with a high probability of entering the ball, the timing of releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is not particularly limited. In this embodiment, the timing at which the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 due to the load from the opening / closing plate 11300 passes through the projecting rib 11111 and reaches between the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195. Is controlled to release the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510.

  In addition, the second additional winning opening 11183 may be configured as an opening for starting the change of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters. In this case, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be increased by the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 11300 during the interval between rounds, so that the normal symbol has a high probability state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon that is accompanied by the suspension of the special symbol 1 and gives a disadvantage to the player.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Depending on the position of the ball on the front side of the opening / closing plate 11300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, the ball moves toward (enters) the detection sensor 1240 or the second additional winning opening 11183. In addition to being able to switch between heading (entering) and continuing to fire the ball during the inter-round interval, the ball can easily flow down to the second additional winning opening 11183. As a result, as a result, it is easier to increase the number of prize balls to be paid out by continuing the firing of the ball during the interval between rounds, so that the game mode of continuously firing the ball during the interval between rounds is promoted. Can be made easier.

  The second additional winning opening 11183 is configured such that it is difficult for the ball to enter even if the ball reaches while the state of the open / close plate 11300 is maintained. This allows the second additional winning opening 11183 to function as a winning opening in which a ball can easily enter in a state in which the opening and closing plate 11300 is driven (small hitting game or big hitting game).

  While it is difficult to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained, it is easy for the ball to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is changing. In addition to the above configuration, a ball receiving a load from the opening / closing plate 11300 when the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state is provided in the second additional winning opening 11183. It was configured to flow down to 11183. Accordingly, by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 11300 after the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven toward the open state (the round game R has started), the probability of the ball entering the second additional winning opening 11183 is provided. Can be changed.

  Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. In FIG. 86 (a) and FIG. 86 (b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is visible, and a part of the side wall part 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are imaginary lines. Is illustrated in FIG. Further, FIG. 86 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a shielded state of the first variable prize device 6000, and FIG. 86 (b) shows a state where the inside is difficult to visually recognize (not easily visible but is visible). Is a schematic diagram showing a transmission state of the first variable winning device 6000 when a transmission effect of changing the first variable prize device to a transparent state that can be visually recognized is executed. Also, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the first variable winning device 6000 described in this control example makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 by the thin plate member 1210 disposed on the front side of the storage channel 1231. (The transmittance of the thin plate member 1210 is low).

  In addition, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage channel 1231 is formed as a bent channel and the downstream side cannot be visually recognized. It is configured so that the number of balls stored in the vehicle cannot be grasped. In addition, since the disposition position of the interference device 6900 is downstream of the bent portion, the movable state of the interference device 6900 cannot be visually recognized.

  Further, by extending the thin plate member 1210 on the upstream side (the left side in FIG. 86A) of the opening direction of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 14), the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is limited. Further, the inside of the storage channel 1231 is configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

  With this configuration, in the shielded state of the first variable winning device 6000, it is difficult to make it difficult to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900. it can.

  In the variable winning device 6000 configured as described above, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on a predetermined condition (for example, success of the timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88B)) being satisfied. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the covering front plate 1200 is constituted by a half mirror so as to switch to a transmission state in which the inside is visible. Thus, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on, it is possible for the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900.

  Note that an optical sensor for detecting light incident from outside may be provided behind the covering front plate 1200. In this case, utilizing the characteristics of the half mirror, which allows the inside to be visually recognized by irradiating strong light from the outside, it has been confirmed that the illegal act of irradiating the covered front plate 1200 with strong light to view the inside was performed. , Can be determined from the output of the optical sensor. Therefore, by setting an error command in response to a change in the output of the optical sensor and performing control so as to make the continuation of the game difficult, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the present control example, a configuration is used in which the light is transmitted to the covering front plate 1200 (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a part (for example, a thin plate member 1210) of the covering front plate 1200 or the light emitting unit is movable so that the incident angle of light emitted from the light emitting unit (LED) that is constantly lit to the covering front plate 1200 is switched. It may be configured so as to be in a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized only when the movable part is located at a predetermined position.

  Further, the covering front plate 1200 may be configured with a transparent color in which the inside is visible, and may be configured to perform a process (for example, a graining process) of irregularly reflecting the irradiated light on the surface thereof. Thereby, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the first variable prize device 6000 is made difficult to see by light emitted from various lamps, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (ie, When the lamp is not lit), the inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be made visible. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the variable winning device 6000.

  In the case of using such a configuration, a shielding wall that blocks light emitted from various lamps from being emitted to the first variable winning device 6000 is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. A configuration may be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 even while the game is being played.

  In addition, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the first variable winning device 6000 with light is provided, and light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231. You may make it switch between a state (state in which light is irradiated) and a visible state (state in which light is not irradiated).

  Furthermore, a movable member for decoration is provided on the covered front plate 1200 in which the inside is visible, and by controlling the operation of the movable member, a state in which the inside of the storage channel 1231 is visible (the movable member for decoration is A state in which the storage channel 1231 is movable at a position that does not overlap with the storage channel 1231) and a state in which the interior of the storage channel 1231 is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which the movable member for decoration is movable so as to cover the storage channel 1231). You may make it switch.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the entire area of the storage channel 1231 is made difficult to visually recognize by the covering front plate 1200, and it is ensured that the movable state of the interference device 6900 is visually recognized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it has an effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in a posture in which a normal game is being played.

  For example, only the lower half of the storage channel 1231 (downstream from the bent portion) may be difficult to see, and the visibility of the upper half may be ensured (even if the formation of the upper half mirror is omitted). Good), or it may be difficult to visually recognize only the portion overlapping the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 in a front view with the same concept. Accordingly, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 can be constructed at low cost.

  Further, for example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 may be secured (the formation of the lower half mirror is omitted), but the visibility of the upper half may be reduced. In this case, the lower limit of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped by visually recognizing the balls remaining in the lower half of the storage channel 1231, while the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. It can be difficult to grasp the exact number.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to stop firing when temporarily stopping the firing of the ball in an attempt to reduce the useless balls (balls not entering the winning opening). In the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in the present control example, when the storage channel 1231 is full (ten balls are stored), no more balls can be expected. With such a configuration, the useless sphere can be reduced by stopping the firing of the sphere at that timing.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, in the round game R of the predetermined number of times, the number of balls that have entered the first variable prize device 6000 does not always match the number of balls that are stored in the storage channel 1231. Even if the number of balls entering the variable winning device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 cannot be known accurately. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to visually check the inside of the storage channel 1231.

  That is, because of the configuration of the present control example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 is ensured (the formation of the lower half mirror is omitted), while the configuration of making the upper half difficult to view becomes effective. It is difficult for the player to easily set the timing for stopping the firing of the ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention and concentration on the launch of the ball in the jackpot game, and prevent the player from playing the game indiscreetly.

  The control example shown in FIGS. 86A and 86B is characterized in that the operation timing of the interference member 6930 is controlled by operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) in addition to the change in the visual recognition state described above. The timing that can be set by the user is prepared, but the details will be described later.

  Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided at the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a center frame 86 are arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 uses the trigger as a trigger to change the display of the special symbol (first symbol). Be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 87B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 93) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second.

  In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), it is determined whether or not the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big hit). Overlooking whether or not there is). In addition, if the combination of the big hit symbols (the same combination of the main symbols in this control example) is arranged on the pay line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as the big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in time. When both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are present, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), there is rarely a situation where there is no ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In many cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided in the left-right direction into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3. Among them, the small area Ds1 indicates the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  Also, a third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the type of the special symbol (either the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) in which the lottery is easily executed differs according to the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery in which a lottery is easily performed in the current game state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed in a case where a lottery of a special symbol, in which a lottery is hardly performed in the current gaming state, is performed.

  Here, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol, in which the lottery is difficult to be executed, is executed is a great attention for the player. For example, in the normal state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol 2 in which the lottery is difficult to be executed is executed, and when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the player is compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit. There is a case where the expectation of the profit obtained is higher. In addition, for example, in the special symbol high probability state, the lottery of the special symbol 1 in which the lottery is difficult to be executed is performed, and when the lottery result is a big hit, compared to the case where the special symbol 2 lottery is a big hit. In some cases, the expectation of the profit obtained by the player may be low.

  Therefore, in the small area Ds3, the variable display is performed only when the special symbol lottery in which the lottery is difficult to be executed in the current game state is executed (by separating from the variable display in the main display area Dm). The player's attention can be easily attracted, and the player can be drawn into the variable display.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of a third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed in the right small area Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a beeper in this control example) performs a predetermined operation, and sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a different character. A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), and If a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is being performed, the number of entered balls is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is the first. This is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second symbol). Retained ball number design) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 87 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

  Note that, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, a timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present control example, an effect related to the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86) is executed based on an operation on the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). In addition, as an effect related to the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, for example, an effect of changing the visibility inside the storage channel 1231, and a discharge mode of the ball stored inside the storage channel 1231. An effect to be changed is exemplified. These effects are configured such that the content of the effect changes depending on the degree of deviation between the operation timing serving as a predetermined reference and the timing at which the player operates the operation buttons 300.

  Here, in the present control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Then, in accordance with the timing effect (operation effect), by performing the operation in a timely manner, the effect is configured so that the profit obtained by the player is maximized. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved.

  First, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display contents during a notice effect performed in a round before a timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during a timing effect (operation effect). In each of the drawings, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status of the operation unit (operation button 300) are used to change the operation of the operation unit (operation button 300) based on the operation of the operation unit. The display contents of the three symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 88, on the third symbol display device 81, a round number display section 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a form indicating that the third round of round game R is being performed. In the area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim at the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the game method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for indicating the number of balls acquired based on the fact that the ball has won the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls of the specific winning opening 1000a. Is done. This acquired number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball in the specific winning opening 1000a, and is then moved and displayed toward the small area Ds2, and finally, the small area Ds2 is displayed. It is added as an acquisition indicator.

  In the number-of-rounds display section 714, a display related to a currently executed game section (number of rounds or an interval) is largely displayed on the left side, and a display related to a game section started after the end of the currently executed game section is displayed on the right side. It is displayed small.

  Also, four circles are displayed side by side below the round number display. The circles are switched depending on the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than four, the circle at the left end is painted out (see FIG. 88 (a), corresponding to the shortage display) and stored in the storage channel 1231. When the number of spheres to be performed is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the intermediate number display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7 If the number is less than nine, the second circle from the right is painted out (see FIG. 92 (a), corresponding to the lack display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten. In this case, the circle at the right end is painted out (see FIG. 92 (b), corresponding to the full display).

  In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying a player that a timing effect (operation effect) is started from the next round and a guidance display for notifying the game property of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

  In this effect area, a button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed, and in response to the button display mode 715, a sub-display area Ds4 in which a display pointer 719 (see FIG. 88 (b)) is displayed. Below the sub-display area Ds4, there is provided a sub-display area Ds5 that is arranged in the same shape as the sub-display area Ds4 and displays information related to the operation of the player.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 88B, the sub-display area Ds4 is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scroll-displayed from right to left, and is a display mode in which the display pointer 719 indicates an operation timing. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at a timing that matches the bar display unit 717, a successful effect (see FIG. 88 (b) described later) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display portion 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 89 described later) is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on in association with the execution of the successful effect in the fourth round game R (see FIG. 86 (b)). In the description of this control example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), when the transmissive lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off, the inside of the translucent lamp 1200 A half mirror is configured to switch to a transmissive state in which the inside can be viewed by turning on 227ba to 227be. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the flowing state of the sphere flowing near the interference device 6900 (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)) (the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231) The storage mode) can be made known to the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 89, in connection with the failure effect being executed in the fourth round game R, some of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on. This makes it impossible to visually recognize the storage mode of the sphere disposed near the interference device 6900 (the lower half of the storage channel 1231), but is disposed near the detection sensor 1240 (the upper half of the storage channel 1231). The storage mode of the sphere is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), while the notice effect is being executed, the characters “waiting” are scroll-moved from right to left in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5.

  Next, the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4. When the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display portion 717, the center of the screen is displayed. Is displayed as a result display mode 720, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the character “Focus on an attacker!” Is displayed near the result display mode 720, and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds5. The character "good" is displayed in the same manner as.

  In this case, by distributing the characters “good” on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display, and an attacker (the first variable prize device 6000) can give the player noticed the display. ) Can be easily noticed. Then, the player can be made aware that the stored balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable prize device 6000 are visible, and the player who has noticed that, Accordingly, appropriate launch ball adjustment can be performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at a timing at which the display pointer 719c does not match the bar display section 717 in the timing effect (operation effect). The word "bad" is displayed, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 89, at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the character “bad” is displayed in the sub display area Ds5 in the same manner as in the result display mode 720. Note that, here, the character of "Attention to attacker!" Is not displayed.

  In this case, by distributing the characters “bad” on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display. Also, by not dare to display the words “Focus on the attacker!”, The player can use the attacker (the first variable) until the stored balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable prize device 6000 are difficult to see. Attention to the winning device 6000) can be suppressed, so that the player's attention to the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's confidence in the display of the characters "Watch out for the attacker!" (Reliability that profit is obtained if the display is followed).

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 89, when the result display mode 720 is displayed, some of the transmission lamps 227ba are turned on. On the other hand, in the present control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the fourth round of the round game R, the operation of the operation button 300 is not performed even if three seconds have elapsed after the display pointer 719 passed through the bar display portion 717. If not performed, since all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to be kept off, in the subsequent round game R (from the fourth round to the sixth round), the storage channel 1231 It is configured such that it is extremely difficult to see the inside.

  FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R. FIGS. 90 (b) to 91 (b) () Is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect). In each of the drawings, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status of the operation unit (operation button 300) are used to change the operation of the operation unit (operation button 300) based on the operation of the operation unit. The display contents of the three symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 90, on the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned round number display section 714 is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a form indicating that the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round of the round game R is in progress, In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim at the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the game method.

  In the center of the screen, an operation instruction display consisting of the characters “press!” For prompting the operation of the operation button 300 is executed. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

  In the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, a band display section 716 that is a display mode indicating operation timing is displayed similarly to the bar display section 717. The band display section 716 has a first band section 716a on the right side of which is displayed the text of "secure" with respect to the bar display section 717, a bar section on the left side of the first band section 716a, and a bar display section. A second band portion 716b that vertically overlaps with 717 and displays a character of “highest” and a third band portion 716c that displays a character of “failure” on the left side of the second band 716b. .

  As described above, the display pointer 719d is scrolled and displayed from right to left in the sub display area Ds4. In the present control example, control is performed such that the profit obtained by the player is changed depending on where the display pointer 719d is on the band display section 716 and the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated.

  For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated while the display pointer 719d is located above the first band portion 716a, a secure effect (see FIG. 91A described later) is executed. In this case, an advantageous event occurs in which a bonus that shifts to the special symbol high-probability state can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced (specified number). (In this control example, the prize balls are reduced as much as ten balls cannot be entered.) An adverse event occurs in which the duration of the fifth round of the round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds). .

  Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated while the display pointer 719d is located above the second band portion 716b, the highest effect (see FIG. 90 (b) described later) is executed. In this case, there is an advantageous event that it is possible to acquire the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and a specified number (10) of balls are set in the fifth round game R in the first round. While there is an advantageous event that the ball can be made to enter the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), no disadvantageous event occurs.

  Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is located above the third band portion 716c, or when the operation button 200 (operation means) is not operated, a failed effect (See FIG. 91 (b) described later). In this case, an unfavorable event occurs in which it is not possible to acquire the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, while the specified number (10) of balls are set in the fifth round game R in the first round. An advantageous event occurs in which the player can make the ball enter the special winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is in the second band portion 716b vertically overlapping the bar display portion 717, the maximum benefit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719d vertically matches the second band portion 716b. In the center of the screen, the result display mode 720 displays the character "maximum! V acquired!" (Maximum effect), and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. You. This allows the player to visually recognize that the maximum profit can be obtained, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  Note that, by operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is in the second band portion 716b vertically overlapping the bar display portion 717, control is performed so that the maximum benefit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (effect in the fourth round of the round game R) displayed in FIG. 88 (b) and FIG. 89, the effect in the interval between rounds is immediately started. Also, the player can execute the operation of the operation buttons 300 (operation means) without feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), since the guidance display indicates that "do not be distracted even after the end of the round", the interval between rounds after the end of the fourth round of the game R (see FIG. 90 (a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Thus, the possibility that the player does not notice the timing effect (operation effect) shown in FIG. 90B and cannot operate the operation button 300 (operation means) can reduce the possibility of disadvantage. it can.

  Next, an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719e vertically matches the first band portion 716a. In the center of the screen, the result display mode 720 displays the character “Relief! V acquisition with a sense!” (Reliable effect) and the fact that the operation button 300 was operated changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Is displayed with. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that it is possible to obtain a safe profit, albeit with some disadvantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  As described above, the slight disadvantage is that the payout of the prize balls in the fifth round of the round game R is slightly reduced (the specified number (ten in the present control example) cannot be entered). This means that the continuation time of the fifth round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Next, an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719f vertically matches the third band portion 716c. In the center of the screen, the character “Fail! V not! Next expected!” (Failure effect) is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation mode of the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Will be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that a great disadvantage will occur.

  As described above, the great disadvantage is a disadvantage that the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game cannot be obtained. Also, in this case, as described above, a specified number (10) of balls can be made to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round of round game R, and the fifth round of round game R can be continued. Since the time can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the end timing of the jackpot game can be advanced and the lottery of the special symbol can be executed earlier than in the case shown in FIG. Since it is possible, the timing for shifting to the next jackpot game can be easily advanced.

  As described above, in the present control example, the profit obtained by the player is based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R. Since it changes, the player's willingness to operate the operation buttons 300 (operation means) can be improved.

  Next, the display in the sixth round of the round game R will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b). FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b) are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the round game R of the sixth round is being executed. It should be noted that FIG. 92 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display when the big hit type is “big hit L” or “big hit N”. In FIG. 92 (b), the big hit type is “big hit K”, It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of a display in the case of "big hit M" or "big hit k".

  In an example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (a), it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot of “jackpot L” or “jackpot N”, that is, that the jackpot has been won in the sixth round. The "big hit" character shown is displayed.

  In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (b), the jackpot type is a jackpot of “jackpot K”, “jackpot M” or “jackpot k”, that is, 6 round jackpot. Is displayed, and the interference device 6900 is executed in an advantageous operation pattern (twentieth operation pattern) for the player in the sixth round of the round game R. Is displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 that informs the user of the excessive winning prize, and the character "Intently right-handed!" Is displayed on the guidance display section in the small area Ds3.

  In the case of the jackpot type of "jackpot K", "jackpot M" or "jackpot k", in the sixth round of round game R, by continuing without firing the ball, more balls than the specified number The interfering device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence of (see FIG. 99 (a)). Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of receiving a prize ball exceeding the specified number by continuing to launch the ball in accordance with the display of FIG. 92 (b).

  As described above, in addition to the mode of notifying that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the mode of notifying the operation state of the interference device 6900 during the jackpot is notified on the display screen in the round game R, A display mode suitable for the round game R of various patterns can be displayed. In the present control example, by continuing or stopping the launching of the ball in accordance with this display, the player can easily receive the maximum profit scheduled for each jackpot type as the profit given to the player. Is controlled. Therefore, the player can easily obtain the maximum profit by firing the ball according to the display.

  In the present control example, the effect of the timing effect (operation effect) is made different based on the operation content of the player executed in the timing effect (operation effect). An operation history (operation) in which the player operated the operation button 300 (operation means) in an operation effect (for example, a mini game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change) executed in a manner other than (operation effect). The effect form of the timing effect (operation effect) may be made different based on the number of times, the operation content, and the operation result). Thereby, a game can be enthusiastically performed with respect to various operation effects performed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, the timing effect is not limited to the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) by the player, for example, based on the time period measured by the time measurement means (RTC) or the game period in which the player played the game. The effect mode of (operation effect) may be configured to be switched.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described again with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 4 will be described, and a description of the same portions will be omitted.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a model diagram illustrating a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, selection of the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the big hit (and the small hit) and selection of the big hit type (big hit symbol). , A stop type counter C3 used to select a stop type, a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern, and an initial value setting of a first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

  In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. The small hit type is selected using a small hit type counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 117). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for a prize for the first ball entrance 64 and each counter value for a prize for the second ball entrance 640. And a special symbol 2 storage sphere storage 203b.

  In the present control example, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are provided with up to four retaining balls, respectively, so that a total of eight retaining balls can be stored in total. Therefore, when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be selected by lottery, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner or when a special symbol jackpot is not being played, each counter value becomes a special symbol. When the game ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second ball entrance 640 wins, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, the respective counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processing for this are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and various counter values for variably displaying the special symbol 2 are displayed. Settings and control processing are executed.

  On the other hand, during a period in which the special symbol 1 cannot be randomly selected, such as during the fluctuation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or during the jackpot game of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, the game ball is set to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance. When the winning port 640 is won, if the number of reserves for the winning port (starting port) is less than the upper limit value (four in the present control example), each counter value is obtained and the winning is performed. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entered entrance is stored. If the number of reserves for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in the present control example), each counter value or the like is not obtained and the prize ball (five in this control example) is not obtained. Prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in the present control example) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (319 in the present control example). I have. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number which is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 94A). If the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  Here, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 94A) will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is set. Specifically, when the gaming state is the low probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is “0” in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery, If it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is in the range of “1 to 4” in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery. If it is within the range of “1 to 4”, it is determined that the hit is a big hit.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “0” is stored in the first random number table as described above. 202a (see FIG. 94 (a)). As described above, the total number of random number values is 320, and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/320”. On the other hand, in the special symbol high-probability state, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 serving as a special symbol jackpot, and the random numbers “1 to 4” are stored in the first random number table as described above. 202a. As described above, the total number of random numbers is 320, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 4, so the probability of a big hit of a special symbol is “1/80”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. When the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)). The Rukoto. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reaching, which is different from the symbol which is reached as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: a "reach out" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and a "complete out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example). When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203 as a special value. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability cases and a special symbol for low-probability cases. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, when the special symbol is in a probable change state, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely out of range" is easily selected, and "reach out of range" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "reach out of range" is hard to be selected. In addition, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry opening 64. The table for the low probability is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of range”, and the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out of reach” is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do.

  In the present control example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 117) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d storing a random value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables commonly used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set. Have been.

  In the present control example, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is usually a hit of the symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 94 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is Is equal to the winning random number specified in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). In the present control example, in the second random number table 202c, there are five random numbers that can be a hit of a normal symbol at the time of a low probability of a normal symbol (during a normal state of the normal symbol), and the range is "5 to 9". It has become. Since the total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 240 out of 240, the total number of random numbers to be won is 5, so the probability of winning a normal symbol at low probability of a normal symbol is “1”. / 48 ".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), there are 200 random numbers that can be hit by the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5-204”. The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that can be obtained is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a symbol is normally "1 / 1.2". . As described above, in the present control example, since the random number value which is the hit of the ordinary symbol is significantly different between the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the winning probability is greatly different. Further, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the ordinary symbol is hit are different between the low probability and the high probability of the ordinary symbol. . For this reason, the ease of entering the second entrance 640 greatly differs between the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, so that in the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, The player can play the game aiming at the first entrance 64.

  When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 (FIG. 2), the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 2 times ”.

  On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed for one second on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2). If the value of the executed and obtained second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed. As a symbol, a symbol “○” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”. In the present control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time and the number of times of opening may be changed as appropriate as long as the game performance is not impaired.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, “0 to 239”), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 117).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 93, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 117), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 116). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c described above, a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an open / close plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area At least an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each type of special symbol, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning and the first hit type selection table 202b are compared. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 for the special symbol 1 is defined as "big hit K" in a range of "0 to 24". This "big hit K" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counters that becomes “big hit K” is 25, so if the special symbol 1 has a lottery, “big hit K” is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  For the "big hit K", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 time savings (80 times of ST) after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of a throwing ball (expected throwing ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big hit to the return of the game state to the normal state.

  Further, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of “25 to 49”, and “big hit L” is defined in association with the value. This "big hit L" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are "big hits L", so "big hits L" are determined when the special symbol 1 has a big hit. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  The “big hit L” is set to six rounds as the number of rounds, and the transition to the high probability state (ST 80 times) of 80 time savings after the end of the big hit is similar to the “big hit K”, but as described later, In terms of game efficiency (number of payout prize balls / time required for the jackpot game), the jackpot type is disadvantageous compared to the "jackpot K".

  For the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of "50 to 74", and "big hit M" is defined in association with the value. This "big hit M" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 "big hit M" counter values, so "big hit M" is determined when the special symbol 1 has a big hit. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  In the “big hit M”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, 100 time saving states of the ordinary symbol are given.

  Further, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as being associated with "big hit N" in a range of "75 to 99". The “big hit N” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit N”, so if the special symbol 1 has a lottery, “big hit N” is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  The "big hit N" is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, 100 times of the time saving state of the ordinary symbol are given in the same manner as the "big hit M". The big hit M is disadvantageous in that the maximum payout number is small (the possibility of excess winning (over winning) is low).

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, “big hit k” is defined in association with the range (all ranges) in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 99”. This “big hit k” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit k" is 100, so if the special symbol 2 is a lottery, "big hit k" is determined. The proportion is 100%.

  The “big hit k” is set to six rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, it is determined whether to shift to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) or to give 100 times the normal symbol time saving state. , Depending on the game mode of the player during the jackpot game. The game mode of the player is not limited at all, and it may be that a ball is passed through a predetermined entrance or by operating a predetermined operation means. It will be described later.

  In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the special symbol 2 is more advantageous in the bonus (normal time saving state or high probability state of the normal symbol) given after the end of the jackpot. (It is easy to shift to the high probability state).

  As described above, in the present control example, the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery and the case where the special symbol 2 is a lottery is shifted to a high probability state in which the player is more advantageous than the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery. It is configured to be easy. Therefore, once the extended play mode (the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol time reduction state) is set, the ball is hit right into the second entrance 640 to draw the special symbol 2 by lottery. Is easily executed, and the jackpot game is easily repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for one purpose of shifting to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the detailed contents of the open / close plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The open / close plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) are stored for each scenario type. Using the information stored in the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game.

  Specifically, operation scenario 1 to operation scenario 6 are defined as the scenario type in the open / close plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set for the open / close plate 1300 and “retreat state” is set for the interference member 6930 as the scenario contents. In the operation scenario 1, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 ends when a predetermined number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and Control is performed so as to return to the state (the state in which the open / close plate 1300 is closed and the interference member is in the retracted state).

  The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario of a maximum of 10 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 and “retreat state” is set in the interference member 6930 as the scenario contents. In the operation scenario 2, even before 10 seconds elapse, the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (ten in this control example) of the balls by the detection sensor 1240, and It is controlled to return to the state.

  In the operation scenario 3, “open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 as the scenario content, and the “retreat state” is set in the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “1.0 seconds → extended state 0.1 seconds → evacuated state” is set. In the operation scenario 3, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when a predetermined number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the operation scenario is initialized. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-described operation scenarios 1 and 2, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (open state) and then closed (closed state), whereby the storage channel 1231 is opened. The remaining balls can be discharged, but details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, it takes 0.2 seconds to discharge one sphere).

  Note that, of the spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231, the sphere ejected while the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds is guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800. In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the fifth round, and 18.0 seconds after that (the fifth round). At 20.0 seconds after the start of the game R), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position.

  The “after 2.0 seconds” is later than the timing at which the third ball counted from the downstream among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 passes through the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51). The numerical value is set as a time point before the timing at which the fourth ball passes through the distribution operation member 4851. That is, the fourth ball passes through the outlet 1150 immediately before the end of 0.8 seconds when the closing (closed state) of the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained (1. This is a numerical value derived from the setting that it takes 1.0 second to pass through the communication path 4810 from the outlet 1150 (2.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R in the fifth round). .

  In the operation scenario 4, “open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 as the scenario content, and the “retreat state” is set in the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “1.0 seconds → extended state 24.0 seconds → evacuated state” is set. In the operation scenario 4, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the initial state ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 4, similarly to the above-mentioned operation scenario 3, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 is opened. Can be discharged, and details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, it takes 0.2 seconds to discharge one sphere). Note that among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the balls ejected while the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800 as described above. is there.

  The “extended state 24.0 seconds” of this operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value capable of maintaining the extended state at least until the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closing position. That is, in the operation scenario 4, as described later, the specified number (ten in the present control example) of the spheres cannot pass through the detection sensor 1240 until the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. Since the distributing operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball ejected from the discharge port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. It becomes impossible to flow down to the specific area 4830.

  In the operation scenario 5, “open (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 as the scenario content, and the “retreat state” is set in the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “0.2 seconds → extended state 0.2 seconds → evacuated state 2.6 seconds → extended state 20 seconds → evacuated state” is set. In the operation scenario 5, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 5, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), thereby discharging one ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 as described later. This is an operation scenario in which the flow of the sphere is restricted by the interference member 6930 and the number of spheres stored inside the storage channel 1231 is limited to eight (see FIG. 53 (b), the interference member 6930). Is equivalent to a state in which there is one downstream sphere).

  In this case, it is possible to restrict the passage of the ball through the detection sensor 1240 in a state where the number of balls passing through the detection sensor 1240 is less than the specified number (9 in the present control example). Since it is possible to allow the ball to pass to the detection sensor 1240 based on the displacement, it is possible to cause the ball to pass to the detection sensor 1240 in a state where a plurality of balls are arranged on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. it can. As a result, it is possible to easily generate an excess winning (a so-called “over winning”).

  In the operation scenario 6, “opening (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → opening (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 as the scenario content, as in the operation scenario 5. In the operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds, “interruption state 0.2 seconds → extension state 2.6 seconds → retraction state 0.2 seconds → extension state 0.2 seconds → retraction state” is set in the interference member 6930. is there. In the operation scenario 6, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 ends when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 6, although the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), since the ball is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. This is an operation scenario in which the ball is not discharged from the discharge port 1150 while maintaining the closed state (closed state). Also, after 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, so that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten (see FIG. 53 ( a)), the round game R ends based on the detection of the tenth ball by the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the operation scenario 6, unlike the operation scenario 5, it is not easy to generate an excess winning.

  In this way, by storing the operation scenarios separately based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, the profit that the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 that is currently being executed gives the player can be obtained. It can be easily determined.

  Note that, for each operation scenario, the opening / closing plate 1300 is forced to be in the closed state (see FIGS. 8 and 9) when a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. (The operation scenario ends), but even if the specified number of balls has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a during the operation scenario, the interference member 6930 will control the round game R The operation based on the operation scenario is continued until the end of the inter-round interval after the end of the operation, and control is performed so as to change to the evacuation state (end of the operation scenario) simultaneously with the end of the inter-round interval.

  FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f. The open / close plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided with information indicating which predetermined scenario type corresponds to which jackpot type and in what round game R.

  In the MPU of the main control device 110, when executing the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930, information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is written. Reading from the operation scenario storage area 202e, the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved.

  The open / close plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is configured so that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on a combination of a jackpot type and a round game R in which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which the interference member 6930 is movably controlled in response to the start timing of the round game R of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the setting order is stored in advance in the opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f, and the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario that changes sequentially from power-on (or a predetermined operation start timing) every time the operation scenario ends. It may be controlled. Thus, the correspondence between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the operation of the interference member 6930.

  Referring to FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), opening / closing plates corresponding to the jackpot type The operation of the 1300 (first specific winning opening 1000a), the interference member 6930, and the distribution device 4850 (specific region 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

  96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b) show the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The first specific winning opening 1000a is also indicated as "closed", the extended state of the interference member 6930 is indicated as "tension", and the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is also indicated as "retracted". The state in which the ball can flow into the area 4830 (that is, the state in which the distribution operation member 4851 is arranged at the open position) is also referred to as “open”, and the state in which the ball cannot flow into the specific area 4830 (that is, the distribution operation member). 4851 is located at the closed position).

  As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 (the first specific winning opening 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round game R to the fourth round game R is as follows. Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the fourth round game R to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

  Further, as described above, the driving mode of the distribution operation member 4851 is common regardless of the type of the big hit (see FIG. 96 (a)). That is, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round of the round game R (opened so that the ball can pass to the specific area 4830), and 18.0 seconds later (5 At 20.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the round), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position (the ball is blocked so as not to pass to the specific area 4830).

  FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96 (a) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is the big hit K (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the first round time Int1 (2.0 seconds) is interposed between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round of the round game R (0.2 seconds × 10 balls). (= 2.0 seconds) The ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R does not remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game. Also, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231. The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during a period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state (the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state). Since the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position and the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the sphere is opened so as to be able to pass to the specific area 4830, the event is not generated.

  On the other hand, the storage channel 1231 is formed in a shape capable of storing a limited number (ten in the present control example) of balls, so that the fifth round of round game R is transferred to the first specific winning opening 1000a by 10 balls. It can be terminated by putting in individual balls. Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific region 4830 (20.0 seconds), the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round of the round game R can be discharged, so that the first specification By continuously firing the ball toward the winning opening 1000a, an event occurs where the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round of the round game R.

  That is, in the present operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give an advantageous privilege (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) to the player. In addition to being able to do so, the round game R of the fifth round can be completed in a short time (finished by winning a specified number (10 in this control example)), so that the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game is reduced. Can be raised.

  Further, since the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round game R, it is difficult to determine whether the ball passes through the specific area 4830 over the fifth round round game R. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 96 (b) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is the big hit L (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the sixteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the second round time interval Int2 (1.0 second) is interposed. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, five balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds × 5). (= 1.0 second) In the fourth round of the round game R, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 may remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round of the round game R. For example, in the round R of the fourth round, when five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the number of balls obtained by subtracting 5 from the stored number remains in the storage channel.

  Here, the progress of the fifth round game R changes depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R, and the cases will be separately described below.

  First, in the fourth round of round game R, when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the fifth round game R starts with five balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Is done.

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Therefore, when the fifth round of round game R is started with five balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific region 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, an advantage (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) advantageous to the player can be given at an early stage.

  On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds). At 1231, one ball remains. Therefore, in the fifth round of the round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage channel 1231 is 9 (less than the specified number (10 in this control example)). The eye round game R does not end until the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of 30.0 seconds elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

  FIG. 96 (b) shows, as a representative example, a time change when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round.

  Second, in the fourth round of the round game R, when nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the fifth round of the round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Is done.

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Therefore, when the fifth round of the round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, an advantage (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) advantageous to the player can be given at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been thrown are ejected. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number). The game can be terminated by making the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Third, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 0 to 8 in the round game R of the fourth round, 5 is calculated from the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. The round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where the number of balls (0 to 3 balls) that have been drawn is stored.

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Also, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231. The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the fifth round R is started, while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the entire sphere (from 0 to 3), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the sphere cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, an event does not occur in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is started.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been thrown are ejected. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number). The game can be terminated by making the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. In addition, if the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 for 1 second or more after the end of the fifth round game R (19 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fifth round game R) If a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this control example) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a beforehand, an event occurs in which the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific area 4830. As the ball passes through the specific area 4830, a benefit (continuation of the special symbol high-probability state in the present control example) that is advantageous to the player is given as the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to.

  To summarize the first to third cases described above, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round is ten, the event that the balls pass through the specific area 4830 is early. On the other hand, the time efficiency with respect to the number of prize balls to be paid out in the fifth round of the round game is reduced (in the first case), and 9 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the round game R. In the case of the number of balls, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be generated at an early stage, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls of the fifth round game increases (second case), the fourth round When the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R is 0 to 8, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R. In, go up is time-efficient for the payout prize ball number of 5 round round game (third case).

  Therefore, in the case of controlling with the same operation pattern, the timing at which the player can obtain a profit and the magnitude of the obtained profit can be changed for each game mode of the jackpot game.

  In the present control example, as described above, in the round game R of the fourth round, by setting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to nine, the profit obtained by the player can be maximized. . For this reason, at least when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, information on the standard of the number stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)). Thereby, the attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved, and the line of sight of the player can be guided.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the seventeenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 97 (a) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is big hit M (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the seventeenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) is interposed between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at an upper limit of nine balls (0.2 seconds). × 9 balls = 1.8 seconds) In the fourth round of round game R, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 can remain in the storage channel 1231 with an upper limit of one ball until after the start of the fifth round game. There is. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for a ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, a new ball is newly added to the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round of round game R. The entered ball is not ejected from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 for one second after the start of the fifth round game R.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state (the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state). , The distributing operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, so that an event of passing through the specific area 4830 does not occur immediately after the ball is opened to allow the ball to pass to the specific area 4830.

  In addition, from 1.0 second after the start of the round game R of the fifth round to 25.0 seconds, the interference member 6930 is in the protruding state and regulates the flow of the ball (FIG. 86). (Refer to (a)), the storage channel 1231 is in a state where the restricted number (ten in this control example) of balls cannot be stored (a maximum of nine can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930). Since the balls are not stored, a maximum of seven balls can be stored). Therefore, the round game of the fifth round cannot be completed until 25.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, and thereafter, ten balls are thrown into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Or, after a predetermined time (30.0 seconds in this control example) elapses, the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (until 20.0 seconds elapse from the start of the fifth round of round R), the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round of round R. Ball cannot be discharged. Therefore, even if the ball is continuously fired toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, an event does not occur in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the fifth round R is completed.

  That is, in the present operation pattern, since the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830, an advantageous privilege (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) is given to the player. In addition to this, the round game R of the fifth round becomes longer, so that the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game cannot be increased (can be reduced).

  FIG. 97 (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the eighteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 97 (b) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is big hit N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the eighteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the first round time Int1 (2.0 seconds) is interposed between the rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a) and FIG. 97 (b), the eighteenth operation pattern is different from the seventeenth operation pattern except that the length of the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R is different. Since this is the same as the pattern, the description of the parts common to the above description will be omitted.

  The difference between the eighteenth operation pattern and the seventeenth operation pattern is whether or not a remaining ball that remains without being discharged from the storage channel 1231 occurs in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R.

  That is, in the seventeenth operation pattern, as described above, the inter-round interval is the fourth inter-round time interval Int4 (1.8 seconds), so that the maximum number of discharges is nine, and When 10 are stored, one remnant sphere is generated.

  On the other hand, in the eighteenth operation pattern, the interval between rounds is set to the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds), so that the number of discharges becomes 10 at the maximum, and the number of balls 1231 (the maximum) Even if it is stored, it can be discharged globally, and no residual ball is generated.

  In this case, in the seventeenth operation pattern, since there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, the ball is identified immediately after the start of the fifth round game R. While it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the area 4830 (expected normal jackpot), in the eighteenth operation pattern, immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the storage channel 1231 Since there is no ball to be ejected (remaining ball), the player can know that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R (expected non-normal jackpot).

  Therefore, the player's expectation can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 while substantially sharing the profit obtained by the player.

  In addition, as described above, the profit obtained by the player is greater than the jackpot whose jackpot type is jackpot M, and the sixteenth operation pattern in which a remaining ball occurs in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R (see FIG. 96 (b)) can be grasped by the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the nineteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is big hit k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the nineteenth operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the round game R is interposed with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The round game R of the fifth round is started in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, how many balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R changes by the operation of the player.

  That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) in accordance with the above-described timing effect (operation effect, see FIGS. 90 and 91), the interference member 6930 changes to the overhang state, Since the subsequent discharge of the sphere is regulated, the sphere disposed upstream of the interference member 6930 remains in the storage channel 1231. The operation of the operation button 300 is controlled such that only the first pressed timing in the interval between rounds is determined to be valid, and control is performed so as to be invalid for the subsequent pressing, which will be described later in detail.

  Here, the progress of the fifth round of the round game R changes depending on the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so that the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved. Hereinafter, the cases will be described separately.

  First, the case where there are many spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 (the case where the number is five or more) will be described. That is, the fifth round of the round game R is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to a case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91A).

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Therefore, when the fifth round of the round game R is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball moves to the specific region 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific region 4830. Since the vehicle passes, a privilege (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) advantageous to the player can be given at an early stage.

  On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds). One or more spheres remain at 1231. Accordingly, in the fifth round of the round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 9 or less (less than the specified number (10 in this control example)). The round game R of the round does not end until the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of 30.0 seconds elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

  That is, in the first case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of the prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced. In other words, the prize balls decrease because the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be entered, and the disadvantage is that the duration of the fifth round R is the maximum time (30 seconds). Events occur.

  Second, a case where four spheres remain in the storage channel 1231 will be described. That is, the fifth round of the round game R is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is well-tuned (see FIG. 90 (b)).

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Therefore, when the fifth round of the round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, an advantage (continuation of the special symbol high probability state in the present control example) advantageous to the player can be given at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been thrown are ejected. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number). The game can be terminated by making the ball enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. Note that the specified number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is limited after the elapse of 25.0 seconds from the start of the fifth round of the round game R from the control mode of the interference member 6930. .

  That is, in the second case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game can be obtained, and the specified number (10) of the round game R in the fifth round can be obtained. While the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the advantageous event that the duration of the fifth round round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds) occurs, while the disadvantageous event is Does not occur.

  Third, a case where the number of spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 is small (the number is three or less) will be described. In other words, this is a case where the fifth round game R is started in a state where three or less balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to a case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91B).

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. At the timing of passing through the 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position.

  Also, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231. The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the fifth round R is started, while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the entire sphere (from 0 to 3), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the sphere cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, an event does not occur in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is started.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Although all the balls were ejected, the interfering member 6930 maintains the extended state from 1.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round of game R to 25.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round. The number (ten in this control example) of balls cannot be made to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Further, when 20.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830.

  Therefore, it is configured such that the event that the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round of the round game R does not occur.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls ejected from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been thrown are ejected. Therefore, in the fifth round game R, the number of additional balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number). The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a (the ball can be ended without waiting for elapse of 30.0 seconds which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1).

  Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. Note that the specified number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is limited after the elapse of 25.0 seconds from the start of the fifth round of the round game R from the control mode of the interference member 6930. .

  In other words, in the third case, an unfavorable event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game is not obtained, while the specified number (10) of the fifth round game R is generated. An advantageous event occurs in which a ball can be made to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Summarizing the first to third cases described above, when five or more spheres remain in the storage channel 1231, an event that the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 can be caused at an early stage, while 5 Time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls of the round game in the round is reduced (first case), and when four balls remain in the storage channel 1231, an event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 occurs early. And the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls to be paid out in the fifth round game increases (second case), and when three or less balls remain in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830. While no event occurs, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game increases (third case). Which case is applied changes according to the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

  That is, the profit obtained by the player can be changed according to the timing at which the operation button 300 is operated, so that attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved, and participation in the timing effect (operation effect) can be achieved. Motivation can be increased.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the twentieth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99 (a) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is the big hit K, M or k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the round game R of the sixth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to this operation pattern, the upper limit on the number of extra balls (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)) into the first specific winning opening 1000a in the sixth round of the round game R. It can be easily caused by one. Details will be described below.

  The inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round game R is set as a first inter-round time interval Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started with zero balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

  Immediately after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is set in the extended state, but immediately returns to the retracted state (see FIG. 95A). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a before 1.0 second elapses from the start of the sixth round of the round game R is prevented from flowing down by the interference member 6930 for 2 seconds. It takes 0.0 seconds to reach the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, a position in contact with the regulating member 1600).

  The initially entered ball is ejected when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed (the outlet 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened) 3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round game R. . Here, since the period during which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is limited to one upper limit.

  3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts to open, the interference member 6930 changes to the protruding state. Therefore, thereafter, the ball arranged upstream of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

  The internal shape of the storage channel 1231 is formed such that up to two spheres can be stored downstream of the interference member 6930 and up to seven spheres can be stored upstream of the interference member 6930 when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (FIG. 86 (b)).

  After 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930 and stays upstream of the interference member 6930. Will be.

  On the other hand, as described above, when one ball disposed at the lowermost end is discharged from the storage channel 1231, as a result, the ball disposed downstream of the interference member 6930 inside the storage channel 1231 It becomes one or less. Therefore, the maximum number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is eight. Since the total number of the spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number (10 in the present control example), the specified number of spheres is maintained while the interference member 6930 maintains the extended state. Cannot be made to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the sixth round cannot be ended.

  During this time, since the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86 (b)), the player can continue right-handing according to the display on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92 (b)). In addition, a plurality of balls can be aligned on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 1300 (so-called “grape” can be generated).

  When the interference member 6930 changes from the extended state to the retracted state, it flows down along the inclination of the opening / closing plate 1300 so that the sphere, whose flow has been regulated inside the storage channel 1231, follows the flow down later. (Runs down like an avalanche). The opening / closing plate 1300 starts to move toward the closed state when a predetermined number (ten in this control example) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a due to the flow of the balls, but corresponds to the number of ejected balls. Since a gap corresponding to one ball is generated in the storage channel 1231, the momentum of the ball flowing into the storage channel 1231 is maintained even after the opening and closing plate 1300 starts operating.

  Therefore, before the opening / closing plate 1300 closes the first specific winning opening 1000a, there is a possibility that a ball that gains momentum enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. A prize can be generated.

  In the case where the ball is not arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the downstream of the interference member 6930 is continued after the lapse of 3.0 seconds. Does not change the number of spheres placed in the sphere. Therefore, in this case, the number of spheres remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0 to 2. In addition, since the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 does not occur, the above-described gap is not generated inside the storage channel 1231, and the configuration is such that the effect of generating an excess winning cannot be achieved. You.

  FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the twenty-first operation pattern. In this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 99 (b) is executed in the big hit game when the big hit type is the big hit L or N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the twenty-first operation pattern, the round game R of the sixth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to the present operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, an extra ball (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)) enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be difficult. Details will be described below.

  The inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round game R is set as a first inter-round time interval Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started with zero balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

  Immediately after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the extended state for 2.6 seconds (see FIG. 95 (a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a until 1.0 second elapses from the start of the sixth round of the round game R is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

  When the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the sphere whose flow has been regulated restarts to flow down, but 0.2 seconds (2.0 seconds, which is the time required to flow down the storage channel 1231/10 storable numbers) In ()), the sphere flows down only for the length of one sphere. Therefore, the sphere that has resumed flowing is the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating to the closed state (the outlet 1150 (see FIG. 14) starts opening). (A position where it comes into contact with the regulating member 1600). Therefore, in the present operation pattern, the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the sixth round.

  3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts to open, the interference member 6930 changes to the extended state again, but immediately returns to the retracted state. Therefore, after that, the sphere disposed upstream of the interference member 6930 is not restricted by the interference member 6930 from flowing down, and the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 in order.

  With the specified number (ten in this control example) of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the twentieth operation pattern), the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. Changes to At this time, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten, and the storage channel 1231 is full, so that more balls are prevented from entering. Therefore, according to the present operation pattern, similarly to the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23A), the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is equal to the prescribed number (10 in this control example). ) And no extra winnings can be generated.

  Therefore, even if a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at the end of the sixth round jackpot game R, the ball does not contribute to the benefit of the player. Therefore, in the sixth round game R in the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is the jackpot L or N, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display that does not strongly encourage the continuation of the ball to be fired (see FIG. 92 (a)). Be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a) and FIG. 99 (b), the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state based on the start of the sixth round of the round game R, and the interference member When an excess winning is likely to occur in the round R of the sixth round while performing the control in which the timing at which the 6930 changes from the evacuation state to the overhang state is common (see FIG. 99 (a)), it is unlikely to occur. (See FIG. 99 (b)).

  This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the round game R of the sixth round in the current jackpot game is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or the twenty-first operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which a ball suitable for the operation pattern is fired while predicting the operation pattern. This can prevent the player from inadvertently digesting the big hit game.

  As described above, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the twentieth operation pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is shortly opened (opened for 0.2 seconds), No two balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930. On the other hand, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the twenty-first pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is shortly opened (opened for 0.2 seconds), the interference member 6930 is opened. May leave two spheres downstream of.

  Therefore, by confirming how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930, the round game R of the sixth round is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or controlled by the twenty-first operation pattern. Since the ease of discrimination is improved, the interference member 6930 enters the retreat state after a predetermined period of time (for example, 23.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round of the round game R) on the downstream side of the interference member 69301. (Until 2.0 seconds before).

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability change counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, output flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p , The closing flag 203q, the count start flag 203qa, the closing counter 203r, the V flag 203s, the V winning effective counter 203t, the notification counter 203u, the winning number counter 203w, the discharging number counter 203x, and at least the other memory area 203z. It is.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Of the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the winning winning in the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). In the vacant areas of the (area), the areas are sequentially stored in ascending order of the area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the counter value increases to a maximum value of 4. It is incremented by one (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 108, S405 in FIG. 111). reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of retained balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102 (b)) of the sound lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Due to the influence of the above, even if the number of balls is deviated from the actual number of balls retained in the variable display retained in the main controller 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command. .

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 (see FIG. 93) of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. To send a display hold ball count command for The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times.

  The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e increases to a maximum value of 4. One is added at a time (see S410 in FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 108). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts up to four times the number of waiting balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to.

  The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 114). ).

  The certainty change counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times of change of the remaining special symbols in the specially changed state of the special symbol. That is, when the value of the probability change counter 203g is a natural number, the special symbol is in a probable variation state, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol is in a low probability state. In the present control example, the special symbol probable change state usually involves the time-saving state of the symbol, and the value of the probable change counter 203g corresponds to the remaining time-saving period (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates).

  When the ball passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game, 80 is set in the probability change counter 203g at the end of the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). That is, in the present control example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the probable change state after the jackpot game is limited to 80 times.

  In addition, the probability change counter 203g is set to 0 when a jackpot is set by the lottery of the special symbol and the start of the jackpot is set (see S219 in FIG. 108). In the initialized state (that is, the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed), the probability change counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power-off occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the power-off occurs is backed up.

  The time reduction counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time reduction period (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) in the normal symbol time reduction state (time reduction state). When the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the big hit game, 100 is set at the end of the big hit game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, if the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game, 100 time saving states are given.

  In this control example, a case has been described in which the time-saving state is given regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, all or one of the big hit types (“big hit K”, “big hit L”, and “big hit k”) that allow the ball to flow to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing the game in an appropriate game mode. In the section, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the big hit game, control may be performed so that the time saving state is not provided.

  In this case, the game was not executed in an appropriate game mode (for example, the ball was not fired or the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) was not operated without following the notification of the display device). ) Is excessively large (they do not shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, which should have shifted, and the time reduction state is not given), so that the motivation to execute the game in an appropriate game mode can be improved. it can.

  The operation scenario storage area 203i stores the open / close plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f (see FIG. 95 (b)) when the operation control (see S1004 in FIG. 117) of the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 53) is started. ) Is an area for reading out and storing the operation scenario. The operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

  The operation counter 203j is a counter for determining the timing of movably controlling the interference member 6930 in the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set in the operation counter 203j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

  The outgoing flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state, and when turned on, indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state (see FIG. 53B). , Off indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53A).

  This outgoing flag 203k is determined in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125) when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 has been detected during the valid period (S1403 in FIG. 19: Yes) or at the operation start timing. If it is performed (S1408: Yes in FIG. 125), the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed by being set to ON, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). ) Is set to off (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set ON in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see S1282 in FIG. 123), and is used to start counting by a remaining ball timer 203n described later.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is a timer that is counted in order to specify a normal range in the big hit control process (see S1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (a value corresponding to one second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific region detection sensor If the number of spheres detected by 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the number of spheres detected by non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) do not match, the difference between those numbers is It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

  The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting a difference between the number of incoming balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 over each round. When it is determined that the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0 in the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 121) (S1231: No in FIG. 121), an error command is set.

  The closing flag 203q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, and is a flag that is set to ON in the winning processing (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see FIG. 123). S1278) is used to start the count of a closing counter 203r described later. Then, in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129), the closing flag 203q is set to OFF based on the fact that the closing counter 203r has exceeded a predetermined value.

  The count start flag 203qa is set to ON based on the close flag 203q being set to ON in the fifth round of the round game R, and is used to start counting by the close counter 203r. The count start flag 203qa is determined based on the fact that the closing counter 203r has reached the upper limit value (a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is set to off (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

  The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129) that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 at normal timing. It is a counter to perform. The closing counter 203r is incremented by one each time the V winning process is executed.

  In the present control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as an interval period after the round game R according to various timings. The closing counter 203r is used for determining an abnormality in the timing of the V winning in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

  At a predetermined timing (within a set value, in this control example, a predetermined period after the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is in a closed state), the V flag 203s indicates that the ball is in the specific area 4830 (FIG. ) Is set to ON when it is detected that the vehicle has passed the vehicle. This V flag 203s is set to OFF after the value of the probability change counter is set to 80 in the ending process (see S1110 in FIG. 121) (see S1236 in FIG. 121).

  The V winning effective counter 203t is a counter that is decremented by the same number as the closing counter 203r in the V winning processing (see S1009 in FIG. 129). The V winning award effective counter 203t is used to determine that the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 has passed normally through the specific area 4830 in a state where the distribution operation member 4851 is located at the open position. Then, in the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123), a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) is set when the close flag 203q is turned on.

  The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts a time until a notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) is set based on a predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). .

  The winning number counter 203w is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123).

  The discharge number counter 203x is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. The relationship between the numerical values of the winning number counter 203w and the discharge number counter 203x is determined each time the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit value in the abnormal process (see S1113 of FIG. 124).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a large open-port solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid 1510) and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a solenoid 6910 for driving an interference member 6930 are connected. The MPU 201 issues various commands and commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, and a game The operation button 300 operated by the user is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on various switches 208, a signal output from the operation button 300, and a RAM erasure signal SG 2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253. To execute various processes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 102A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command) ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from main controller 110.

  The opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario 222b is provided for the operation status of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930, the operation of which is controlled by the main control device 110, to be grasped also on the sound lamp control device 113 side. This is an area in which information stored in an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the control device 110 is stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 223d, a change start flag 223e, and a stop type selection A flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a probable change state flag 223i, a time saving state counter 223j, a storage state flag 223k, a storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, and an operation flag 223p. Effect temporary storage area 223r, first operation effect flag 223wa, second operation effect flag 223wb, first input flag 223wc, second input flag 223wd, effect under execution flag 223x, and pressing period information storage area 223y. And other memory area 223z There has been provided with at least.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. In detail, it is constituted by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 132) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c are variable effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that are reserved in the main control device 110 for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the reserved ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c stores the second special symbol ( This corresponds to the number of balls reserved for a variable effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2).

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. , The number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 adds the number of reserved balls of the variable display due to the entry into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or a special symbol in the main control device 110. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of retained balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2210 in FIG. 132). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the stored first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, the second special symbol The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the retained ball counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 retaining ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 retaining ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. While its value is changed. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. And change it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command when a command set when the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 increases or decreases is received. This counter is used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol managed by the main controller 110 with the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol managed by the voice lamp controller 113. is there. The value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when displaying the retained symbol number of ordinary symbols on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the case where the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are the same as the case where the reserved symbol number of the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described above. The description is omitted because it is the same.

  The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process (see FIG. 131) is executed, the value is incremented by one and updated. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown). When determining the effect pattern with reference to a plurality of counter values in one loop processing, the values of the different counters are different from each other. Used. Thus, when one effect pattern is set, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of locations, so that the bias of the effect pattern to be set can be suppressed. The effect pattern may be set by using different values calculated after performing different processes on the values acquired from the same counter. Specifically, of the effect patterns, one selection refers to the first place of the obtained value, another selection refers to the tens place of the obtained value, and another selection refers to the first place of the obtained value. A value obtained by multiplying the tens place by three times and a value obtained by multiplying the tens place by five times may be used to refer to the one place of the obtained value. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The round number accumulation counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and is updated to a value corresponding to the command when a round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received ( In S2504 in FIG. 133), the counter value is reset to 0 by receiving the jackpot ending command (S2510 in FIG. 133). In the sound ramp control device 113, a display command related to the display during the big hit game is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

  The probable change state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probable change state flag 223i is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from main controller 110.

  In the present control example, in the present control example, if the value of the probability change counter 203g is 1 or more, it is assumed that the probability variation game is being performed, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is If the value is 1 or more, it is determined that the game is during a time saving game, and when the value of the probable change counter 203g is 0 and the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109). Is a mode indicating that a normal game is being played.

  It is determined whether or not the current state is the special symbol change state according to the state of the change state flag 223i, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image displayed in the special symbol probable change state, or to display a right-handed warning image when a right-handed game is executed in a normal state. Or to determine.

  The time-saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal symbol time-saving state. If the time reduction state counter 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state, and if it is off, it indicates that the normal symbol is in the normal state (low probability state). The time saving state counter 223j is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. In accordance with the state of the time reduction state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time reduction state of a normal symbol, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, or to determine whether to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86 (a)), and is a detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and a ball discharged from the discharge port 1150. Is set based on the detection result. If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. If the storage state flag 223k is off, the number of balls less than the stored number is stored in the storage channel 1231. Indicates that

  This storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (four in this control example). (See S2807 in FIG. 137), and is set to off when it is determined that the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the predetermined number (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, an intermediate number is displayed on the display during the round game, and when the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF, the shortage display (FIG. 88) (Refer to (a)).

  The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in the present control example). The setting based on the detection result of the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 is performed. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. If it is off, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is not stored in the storage channel 1231. Show.

  This storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is the upper limit number (see S2814 in FIG. 137). If it is determined that the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the upper limit number, it is set to off (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON, a full tank display (see FIG. 92 (b)) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF, a dissatisfaction display (FIG. 92 (a)).

  The storage counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the ball, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by one, and the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 causes the specific region detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific region detection sensor 4870 (or a dedicated The value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 when the value is detected by the ball discharge sensor.

  The operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the operation button 300 has been operated. If the operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 has been operated, and if it is off, it indicates that the operation button 300 has not been operated. The operation flag 223p is set to ON when an operation command is received in the command determination processing (S2218 in FIG. 132: Yes), and is set to OFF in the button input monitoring / effect processing (see S3007 in FIG. 139). .

  The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect contents until the effect is executed. For example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is displayed. During the period from the set timing (the third round) to the timing (the fourth round) at which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the big hit, the content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored. This effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and in the case of the round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the big hit effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134). Is read (S2537 in FIG. 134).

  The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether or not to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for executing an effect for causing the player to operate the operation means (operation button 300). If ON, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. If OFF, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied.

  In the present control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the second operation effect flag 223wb indicates that the fourth round game R has been started with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa. On the other hand, it is set that the round game R of the fourth round of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k has been started. The effect information read from the effect temporary storage area changes depending on the setting of the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb.

  Further, the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are turned off after the effect execution flag 223x is turned on (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

  The first input flag 223 wc and the second input flag 223 wd are flags for limiting the number of times the operation button 300 is operated during the corresponding effect (in the present control example, limiting the number of operations to one). When the first operation is performed during the period, or when the operation period is exceeded, the operation is set to ON, and the input of the operation button 300 thereafter is invalidated. Further, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to be turned off after the round game R of the fifth round is started and the effect execution flag 223x is set to be turned off (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

  The effect execution flag 223x is a flag for determining whether or not a timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and if it is off, it is off. For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect execution flag 223x is referred to when determining whether an operation on the operation means (operation button 300) is an operation based on a timing effect (operation effect).

  The effect execution flag 223x indicates that the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2532 in FIG. 134: Yes) in the big hit effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134), and the display effect round command is displayed. After the setting, it is set to ON (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) ends, it is set to off (S2542 in FIG. 134).

  The press period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). .

  In the press period information storage area 223y, a successful press period is set corresponding to the set display pointer (effect pointer). The successful pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring and effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the timing at which the operation button 300 is pressed is the successful pressing period.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are output from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initialization processing executed after the boot processing by the boot program is completed is set.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 106) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process on the one-frame image display time in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “x” at the same position as the symbol “○” are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", display "○" symbol for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if "missing special symbol", display "X" symbol after stopping the variable effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. An instruction is given from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed at 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and displays, for example, a city, the sea, the sky, and the like. In addition, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 88A) and the like are also stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. It is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a big hit (big hit K or the like). ), The stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed will be opened, and the round effect is This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big hit state).

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which one frame of image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is expressed as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image in the image are defined as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address. For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 104) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 105). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 105).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 105, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , In the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 231. Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. Set to off.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected. When the simple image display flag 233c is on, The simple command determination process and the simple display setting process are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing and display setting processing are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process, and is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is no resident target image data, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed, and if the simple image display flag 233c is off, it is necessary for the drawing process. A normal image transfer setting process for transferring the proper image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for the image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while defining the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237, the pointer is set. Update processing is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 106), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 106, the back image used for the image of one frame and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present control example).

  Based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed. Each time it is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235. If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set, and the image controller 237 is set. Then, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a.

  On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the rendering process is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (319 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random number counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 319, 99, 99, 239), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol changing process is performed through the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67. A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change processing (S104). This special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are stored.

  After the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the obtained special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 by the process of S209 (S209: No), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the processing shifts to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S214: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a jackpot K, a jackpot L, a jackpot M, a jackpot N, or a jackpot k.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 when the big hit K occurs, and the red LED is turned on when the big hit L occurs. If the jackpot is M, N or k, the yellow LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the operation scenario of the first specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and thereafter, the start of the jackpot is set (S218). . The operation scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened for 1 to 4 rounds for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), and in the 5th and 6th rounds, the jackpot type is set. This indicates that the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened in a corresponding pattern (see FIG. 95 (b)). When the process of S218 ends, the value of the probability change counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the counter 203h during working hours is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is off (S216: No), a status command setting process is performed to determine whether or not the time saving state has ended (S222), and the process proceeds to S221. Transition.

  In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, the present process ends.

  Next, the state command setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the status command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and includes various types of the probability change counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h. This is a process for determining a game state based on the value of the counter and setting a state command (S234, S238).

  In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203g is 1 or more (S231). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes), the probability change is performed. The value of the counter 203g is decremented by one, and the value of the medium time counter 203h is decremented by one (S232). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter 203g is 0 (S233). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S233: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), a state command indicating the normal game state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, it is 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more (S235). When it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 or more (that is, it is 0) (S235: No), the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more (S235: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S236). Next, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203h during working hours is 0 (S237). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S237: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter 203h during the working hours is 0 (S237: Yes), a state command indicating the normal gaming state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (determination of success or failure), and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of a variable effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, a first random number counter C1 and a first type counter C2 stored in a common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , And the respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302). If it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, four random numbers of “1 to 4” are set as the random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the first one. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 share the judgment value of the jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is selected. A different random value may be used. With such a configuration, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the judgment value of the big hit is set to the same number in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 And the number of judgment values to be a big hit may be changed. With this configuration, the probability of the jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player By doing so, it is possible to give expectations to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (the low-probability game state). ), The lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability. (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of “0” is set. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value for the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot is set. Is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes) The display mode at the time of the big hit indicating the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the five types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots) are compared. It determines what the jackpot type is among K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k). . In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k) are set as the stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

  The variation patterns specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, “out (for a long time)”, “out (for a short time)”, “out of a chance”, “out of a chance” Various types of "normal reach", various types of "missing super reach", and various types of "missing chance reach" are specified. In addition, as the fluctuation patterns of various types of jackpot sharing, various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “shared super reach”, various types of “shared chance reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. On the basis of this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to be out of reach or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete out is set. If it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). The variation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 117). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and determines whether there is a winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters when a winning start is made, and executing a holding process of the values.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is changed) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

  On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are updated. Then, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first of the available reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as each processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The processing of S407 to S412 is different from the processing of S401 to S406 only in that the processing of retaining the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed. Since they are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the processes of S407 to S412 are completed, a pre-read process is executed (S413), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the prefetch processing (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 111).

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and any one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is determined. If there is no new winning (S501: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is the special symbol change state. It is determined (S502), if the special symbol is in the probable change state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the processing of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the special symbol change state (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the processing is S505. Move to.

  In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the results of the jackpot determination, are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and is associated with the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of suspended display of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: Yes), the second information acquired in the processing of S607 is obtained. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for a high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 94 (c)).

  In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time reduction state (S608: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607. Based on the second random number table for low probability and the second random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 10 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 94 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol obtained by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S613). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S613: Yes), the motorized hand attached to the second entrance 640 is determined. The release period of the object 640a is set to one second, the number of times of release is set to two (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of times of release is set to one (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

  In the processing of S611, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S611: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

  In the processing of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S617). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S617: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is set to one second (S618), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-saving state (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and the process ends. Thus, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 1 second", compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602). S622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S618 or the processing of S619 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623).

  In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device (lighted display). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S616, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S612 or the processing of S616, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624).

  If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or S615 are completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 107), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, this is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704).

  Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the empty holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93), and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a description will be given of a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). In the initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S910 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S910 in such a case.

  The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1017 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S911, S912).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S912) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). Upon completion of the process in S912, the process shifts to a process in S913.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power return to the sound lamp control device 113 is output (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a probable change state, whether or not the ordinary symbol is in a time saving state, the number of times of ordinary symbol saving, and the like.

  A state command is generated in accordance with the value of the counter 203h during the working hours and the value of the counter 203g, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113. By outputting this status command, the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can match the recognition of the game state. Therefore, right-handed navigation (for example, see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 88 (a)) is displayed in spite of the low probability state of the normal symbol, or the high probability state of the normal symbol. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a right-handed warning image (not shown) from being displayed when the player makes a right-handed. That is, it is possible to match the game state with the effect to be executed.

  When the processing of S913 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S914). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S915), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001).

  Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is corresponded to the number of acquired balls. Send a prize ball command.

  In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 108) and the start winning process (see FIG. 111) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 1000a of the variable winning device 6000 is executed (S1004).

  In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 1000a are set for each round of the jackpot state according to the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108). In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present control example, of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends, the first symbol display device 37 displays The executed variable display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variable start process (see FIG. 110). Display (lit).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. I do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on.

  Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 113). Lights up).

  After executing the processing of S1007, the storage control processing is executed (S1008). The storage control process (S1008), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, executes a process for setting the retreat and extension of the interference member 6930. Next, when the process of S1008 is completed, a V winning process is executed (S1009). This V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, when the processing of S1009 ends, other processing is executed (S1010).

  When the process of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1012). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1012: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, and thus the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1011, if the information of the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 115 has been executed, the processing at S1015 and thereafter upon power-off is executed.

  First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1017), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1011 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1001 to S1010 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001.

  That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). The jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed or the first specification is performed. This is processing for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 1000a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1101, if a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1103, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1103: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1103 that the special symbol is being hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the big hit operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

  The operation of the distribution device 4850 (the distribution operation member 4851, the solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set based on the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). After that, this process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the distribution device 4850 (the distribution operation member 4851 and the solenoid 4852) and the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 are set for each round.

  As described above, each operation of the first variable winning device 6000 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1105 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio ramp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 (S1107). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), an opening / closing process is performed (S1108).

  Here, the opening / closing processing will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening / closing process (S1108). In the opening / closing process (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the sorting device 4850 that matches the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004). Then, the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed after 6 rounds have been completed, and the standby time, which is the ball ejection time (3.0 seconds or more from the design of the storage channel 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800, is required). It is required, and in the present control example, when 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined as the ending effect start timing. If it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, the ending process (S1110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 121). In the ending process (FIG. 121, S1110), it is first determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a problem such as clogging of the ball has occurred, or the player has improperly stopped the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 by a strong magnet or the like. Therefore, an error command is set (S1232), and then an ending command is set (S1233).

  The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the error command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a display mode of the error notification based on the information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, an error command corresponding to the display mode of the selected error notification is transmitted to the display control device 114. When an error command is received by the display control device 114, an error notification is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, the characters "Ejection error. Please call a hall clerk" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the control is performed so as to notify the player that an abnormality has occurred.

  Further, when receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 emits a strong red light to the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the illumination units 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1) or the sound output device 226. By controlling the hall clerk (see FIG. 4) to output a loud sound (in this control example, the sound of a black phone bell), the hall clerk is made aware of the occurrence of the abnormality.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, an ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1233 ends, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set to on (that is, whether the ball has passed the specific area 4830) (S1234), and is set to on (that is, the specific area 4830). (S1234: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203g is set to 80, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 80, and then the V flag 203s is set to off. (S1236), it returns to the big hit control processing (S1004), ends this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1234 that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set. It is set to 100 (S1237), the process returns to the big hit control process (S1004), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203s is on, and if it is on, a numerical value is set in the probability change counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is passing through the specific area 4830 and set a certainty change. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable change game state until the jackpot game ends.

  Furthermore, if a ball can be passed to the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, the certainty-change game state is given after the jackpot game, so that even during the jackpot game, it is determined whether the ball passes through the specific area 4830. Play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1109: No), a notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification processing (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification processing (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and if it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No). This process ends, and the process returns to the big hit control process (S1004).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is a value larger than 0 (S1252). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253). In the fourth round, the end timing of the fourth round is determined by detecting that 10 balls have been won or by determining that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that the end timing of the fourth round has been reached (S1253: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1253 that it is not the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: No), this processing ends. Here, the counter of 0.5 seconds is set in S1254, so that the notification counter 203u becomes 0 during two seconds of the interval time, which is the ball elapse time after four rounds, and the sound of "pressing" is given. Is output.

  Therefore, the distribution device 4850 operates in the fifth round, but the player must operate the operation buttons 300 in the interval time after the end of the fourth round, and attention is drawn to the operation buttons 300 and the liquid crystal. The number of spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made less visible. Thereby, it can be suppressed that whether or not the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 is identified from the number of remaining spheres. Therefore, for example, at the start of the fifth round, by performing the above-described control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231, it is difficult to determine whether a ball has passed the specific region 4830, The player can play a game until the end of the jackpot game (and even after the end of the jackpot game), expecting that the certain-variable game state will be given (given).

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203u, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the fifth round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1252, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is updated by subtracting -1 (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u after the update is 0 (S1256). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), a notification command is set (S1257). After that, this processing ends. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the output of the sound “press”.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), it is first determined whether or not the round is valid (S1271). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the open / close plate 1300 is opened to when the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state and the interval period ends. If it is determined that it is outside the round validity period (S1271: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether the vehicle has passed the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a. When it is determined that the vehicle has passed the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is updated by adding 1 (S1273). After that, the process of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the light does not pass through the detection sensor 1240 (S1272: No), the process of S1274 is executed.

  In the processing of S1274, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203q is on (S1277), and when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on. (S1277: Yes), this process ends, and the process returns to the big hit control process (S1004).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1277, when it is determined that the close flag 203q is off (S1277: No), the close flag 203q is set on (S1278), and thereafter, the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t ( In this control example, a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds or more is set (S1279), and thereafter, the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a is set. 1300 is set to be closed (change of state of the closed state) (S1280), and thereafter, a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) is set in the V winning effective counter 203t (S1281). The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, it can be determined that the ball has been thrown since the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. Thereafter, the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit control process (S1004).

  As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t varies based on the number of stored balls. Accordingly, when only three balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (control is performed so that the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830), the flow of the balls due to dirt inside the storage channel 1231 is reduced. Even if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 with a delay, the passing of the specific area 4830 can be invalidated outside the range of the set value of the V winning counter 203t.

  Thereby, when a different display effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 depending on the number of stored in the storage channel 1231, the degree of expectation indicated by the display effect (a degree of payout of prize balls and an end of the big hit game) It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a discrepancy between the actual game result and the degree of the possibility of shifting to the special symbol high probability state later).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1274 that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1275). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processing from S1277 to S1282 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening / closing plate 1300 halfway based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, if it is determined that it is the timing to close halfway (S1276: Yes), the processing from S1277 to S1282 is executed. The process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). After that, this processing ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal processing (S1113). In the abnormal process (S1113), a process of monitoring whether the specific area 4830 has been illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormal process (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round valid period (S1301). If it is out of the round validity period (S1301: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302). It should be noted that whether the game ball has passed through the outlet 1150 is determined by whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51). Done.

  If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203x is updated by adding 1 (S1303). After that, the process of S1304 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302: No), the processing of S1304 is executed.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1304: Yes), the ball is being thrown out, so the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by one and updated (S1305). The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether the upper limit value (various interval times in this control example) has elapsed (S1306). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1306: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1306: Yes), the number of ejected balls (the number of spheres detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51)) It is determined whether or not the total value of the number of balls detected in step (1) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203w) (S1307).

  If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the processing of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), a value obtained by subtracting the value of the discharge number counter 203x from the value of the winning number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the processing of S1309 is executed. I do.

  In the process of S1309, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1309). If it is not the ending effect start timing (S1309: No), the process of S1312 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). If the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the process of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set because an abnormality has occurred in the ejection of the ball (S1311), and the process of S1312 is executed.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, even if the game balls are left illegally in the storage channel 1231 or the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800, and the jackpot types of the jackpots to be acquired later are the jackpots M and N, the illegally passing the game balls to the specific area 4830 is performed. Can be suppressed.

  In this way, by controlling to notify the ball ejection error at the start timing of the ending effect, even if a difference occurs between the number of incoming balls and the number of ejected balls in the round game R of each round, the error notification is performed. Game can be executed without any change. Thereby, it is possible to partially control the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 in the interval between rounds, and to realize the gaming property of starting the next round with the ball stored in the storage channel 1231. .

  Also, even if a difference occurs between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls in the round game R of each round, the game can be executed without performing error notification. (A period required for discharging the spheres stored in the flow path 1231 as a whole sphere).

  The method of setting the ball ejection error command is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, a value that can be normally generated as the difference between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls is set, and if the difference between the numbers is within the range of the value, no error command is set and the difference between the numbers However, if the value is out of the range, control may be performed so that an error command is set. In this case, it is possible to determine that a ball ejection error has occurred without waiting for the start timing of the ending effect, so that the occurrence of an abnormality can be detected early. Thus, when the ball discharge error is caused by a fraud, it is possible to detect the fraud early.

  In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1313). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203w and the discharge number counter 203x are reset to the initial values, respectively (S1314), and thereafter, this processing ends.

  Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for setting the state of the interference member 6930.

  As described above, depending on the situation, the state of the interference member 6930 changes when the player operates the operation button 300 (S1403 to S1407), and when the state changes at a preset timing ( S1408 to S1411), both of which are included in the storage control process (S1008).

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401). If it is determined that the output flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the interference member 6930 is turned off. It means that it is in the evacuation state. Next, it is determined whether the operation period of the operation button 300 is valid (S1402).

  If it is determined that the period is valid (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S1403, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept in the retracted state. In order to keep this, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 has been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has been detected) (S1403: Yes), the upper limit value setting processing 1 of the operation counter is executed (S1404). Here, the upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation counter upper limit value setting processing 1 (S1404). In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), a process of setting an upper limit value that differs depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as the operation counter upper limit value is performed.

  That is, in the upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter (S1404), pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected from the inter-round interval period after the start of the inter-round interval period (that is, the press detection signal is generated). The value indicating the remaining period is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), the process ends, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, the output flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (the extended state based on the operation of the operation button 300, the extended state). The storage state command corresponding to the protruding state of the interference member 6930 is set to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the change to the outgoing state 1) (S1407), and this processing ends, and the storage control is performed. It returns to processing (S1008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the valid period (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). If it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), the present process ends, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), the upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter is executed (S1409). Here, the upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter (S1409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation counter upper limit value setting processing 2 (S1409). In the upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter (S1409), a process of setting an upper limit value preset according to the operation scenario as the upper limit value of the operation counter is executed.

  That is, in the upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter (S1409), first, it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the overhang state based on the operation scenario (S1431). If it is determined that it is not the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the overhang state (S1431: No), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the overhang state (S1431: Yes), the interference member 6930 is maintained in the overhang state based on an appropriate value from the operation scenario (based on the operation scenario). Is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  Next, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, the output flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (the extended state, the extended state based on the operation scenario). The storage state command corresponding to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 is set in order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 that 2) has been reached (S1411), and this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the overhang state, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a display back image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the overhang state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

  That is, for example, the mode is set such that the character “passing ball is being stored” is displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87A). This allows the player to easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the storage state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the output flag 203k is ON (S1401: Yes), the storage valve operation processing for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, the storage valve operation process (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the storage valve operation process (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930.

  In the storage valve operation process (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is set to ON (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not particularly shown, if the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443).

  In the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is set to off (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to off (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), the process ends.

  Upon completion of the process in S1412, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is off (S1413). If it is determined that the output flag 203k is not off (that is, on) (S1413: No), the process ends. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), it means that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of this fact, a storage state command corresponding to the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command corresponding to the evacuation state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the evacuation state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

  By executing the storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set according to the operation state of the operation button 300. Thereby, it is possible to switch between a state where the flow of the ball is restricted by the interference member 6930 at an arbitrary timing of the player and a state where the restriction is released and the flow of the ball is permitted.

  In addition, by this storage control process, the interference member 6930 can be driven at a time other than the operation timing of the operation button 300. Therefore, a member that operates according to the operation state of the operation button 300 and a member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be configured by the same member.

  Next, the V winning process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the V winning process (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for performing control for monitoring the flow of the ball after the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. .

  In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). If it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether the close flag 203q is on (S1502). If it is determined that the close flag 203q is ON (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current execution is the fifth round (S1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, if it is determined that the close flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), it is determined that the current execution is not the fifth round in the processing of S1503. If the processing has been performed (S1503: No), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the count start flag 203qa is ON (S1501: Yes), it means that it is near the timing at which the distribution operation member 4851 that opens and closes the specific area 4830 operates. In order to determine whether or not the passage of the ball to the specific area 4830 has occurred normally, the closing counter 203r is updated by adding 1 to the closing counter 203r (S1505), and thereafter, the V winning effective counter 203t is similarly decremented by 1. Update.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the closing counter 203r is a predetermined value (that is, whether or not the period during which the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has elapsed) (S1507), and if the value is the predetermined value (S1507). : Yes), the closing flag 203q is turned off and set (S1508), and then the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if the value is not the predetermined value (S1507: No), the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the process of S1509, it is determined whether or not the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (4.0 seconds). If the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (S1509: Yes), it means that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t has become 0, so the count start flag 203qa is turned off (S1510), The closing counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, when the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process proceeds to S1512 as it is.

  As described above, after the closing counter 203r has reached the upper limit value (that is, 4.0 seconds have elapsed since the opening and closing plate 1300 was closed), the count start flag 203qa is turned off. The processing of S1512 is not executed. In other words, the process of S1512 is performed only during a period from when the open / close plate 1300 is closed to when 4.0 seconds have elapsed.

  In the processing of S1512, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (that is, whether the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860). When it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is within the range of the set value (S1513).

  In the processing of S1513, if it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is within the range of the set value (S1513: Yes), it means that the ball has normally passed the specific area 4830. , The V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and the process ends.

  Immediately after the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds is set in the V winning effective counter 203t, and the value is subtracted from the value. As described above, the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is set as the timing at which the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830. In the present control example, the set value is 3.0 seconds. Hereinafter, a numerical value range corresponding to (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds or more is set.

  Therefore, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is larger than 3.0 seconds), the value falls outside the range of the set value. In this case, it is suspected that the ball is stuck near the lower end of the communication path 4810 (clogged or stopped due to improper fastening of the ball) and that the ball started flowing down immediately after the closing plate 1300 was closed. Is controlled to notify an error.

  Further, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after a long time has passed since the opening and closing plate 1300 closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is less than (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds), The value is out of the setting range. In this case, a problem (ball biting, stopping by illegally holding the ball, or the like) occurs when the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231, and the timing of discharging the ball from the storage channel 1231 (when the open / close plate 1300 is closed). Since it is suspected that the ball has begun to be ejected with a delay from the timing of the state), control is performed so that an error is notified just in case.

  In addition, as improper stopping the ball, improper operation of holding the ball with a strong magnet or improper operation of the ball by launching a ball with a thread attached to the game area and operating the thread by the player is assumed. . In this pachinko machine 10, in order to prevent fraud by a magnet, a magnetic sensor (not shown) is arranged near the storage channel 1231 or the storage channel 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800 are set to such an extent that the magnetic force does not reach. This is achieved by disposing the glass unit 16 behind the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) or increasing the thickness of the glass unit 16.

  In addition, against illegality due to a ball to which a thread is adhered, when the thread is crawled into the communication path 4810 via the storage channel 1231 and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 When the thread is fixed and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 and the drainage member are sandwiched between the holding member 1230 and the side wall of the storage portion 1230 that holds the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7). The yarn is fixed by being sandwiched between the outlet 1150. Therefore, even if the player operates the thread, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the ball in the communication path 4810.For example, the thread held by the player at an arbitrary timing is released, As described above, even if the ball is illegally passed through the specific area 4830, the thread is fixed in some places, so that it is easy to prevent illegally passing the ball through the specific area 4830. Can be.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t does not fall within the range of the set value (S1513: No), an error command is set because some irregularity or a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 is suspected. (S1515), and terminates this process. In this case, the V flag 203s does not turn on.

  In the present control example, a case has been described where the setting value of the V winning effective counter 203t is set based on the number of stored in the storage channel 1231 to determine the occurrence of fraud or malfunction, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not. For example, the occurrence of fraud or malfunction may be determined by detecting the discharge interval of balls from the storage channel 1231. The occurrence of fraud or trouble may be determined by detecting the period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged. The determination may be made, and if the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the required number (less than 4), the occurrence of fraud or malfunction is determined based on the detection of the passage of the balls in the specific area 4830. May be determined.

  In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, a case has been described where the V flag 203s is set to ON only when it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is within the set value. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is not within the set value, the V flag 203s is set to ON so that the game cannot be performed until the error caused by the error command is eliminated. It may be controlled. The elimination of the error command is executed by turning off the power. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 203 may need to be cleared.

  In this case, if the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is shifted due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 instead of the fraud of the player, and after it is detected, the player can operate the special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol without any problem. A game can be executed.

  On the other hand, if the cause is fraudulent by the player, after it is detected, first, the game of the fraudulent player is stopped, the hall clerk clears the RAM 203, and the special symbol has a low probability state. Force control so that Thereby, it is possible to prevent another customer from having an extra waiting time before starting a game on the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraud has been performed.

  In the present control example, while the error command is set in S1515, for example, control is performed so that the launch of the ball is disabled, or when the launch of the ball occurs, an error notification is made to notify the clerk. In such a way as to prevent the prize ball from being paid out even if the fired ball enters the winning opening (for example, to stop the function of the payout control device 111), or to launch or win a ball. The control is performed such that the power is turned off based on a ball entering the mouth, or the like, and the game is controlled so as to be impossible to play.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 130, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-on processing of S2120 is performed (see FIG. 131) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 131), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2117 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S2120 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S2120 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S2120, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S2117 (see S2116 in FIG. 131). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2117 is executed, the process starting in S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). The permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S2008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S2008 is performed via the processes from S2004 to S2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probable change state flag 223i is updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2011), interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. By updating the probable change state flag 223i based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the sound ramp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, an effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  The reason why the clearing process in S2009 is skipped is that when the process from S2004 to S2008 is performed via the process in S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing or the current processing of S2101 (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2110. In the processing of S2101, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is determined mainly in S2102 to S2110, which is processing relating to display (staging), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2111, the variable display setting process of S2112, and the storage state monitoring process of S2113 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay. Further, by executing the process of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m without delay based on the storage state.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2108 to be described later (S2103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S2104).

  The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and the production corresponding to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform. In this process, when an operation of the operation button 300 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set to the display control device 114.

  When the button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S2110 ends, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from main controller 110 is performed (S2111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2112. In the process of S2112, a variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The storage state monitoring process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process is performed in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination processing (S2111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 132, S2113), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is analyzed. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). The fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol, and the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each of the symbols.

  In the process of S2201, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this processing ends. The extracted variation pattern type can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as a variation pattern type of a special symbol for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol). In the case of notifying the start of the special symbol variable display effect and the display mode of the special symbol variable display effect to the display control device 114 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later. This is used when setting a special design display variation pattern command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2204). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) has been received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to ON. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special type The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON.

  Next, the type of stop (one of K, L, M, N, and k) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the process ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. This is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display controller 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), a display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this processing ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. (I.e., the number of spheres on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S2210), and the process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. Is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and thus the starting winning is obtained. Every time there is, by the processing of S2210, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are stored in the special symbol 1 holding device of the main control device 110. The value can be adjusted to the value of the ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Alternatively, even if the value deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided. Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2209 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). In the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2212: Yes), the winning information command receiving process is executed (S2213).

  In the winning information command receiving process (S2213), setting of various flags and setting of various counters to be referred to for setting various effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol on hold, before the change of the special symbol on hold is started (that is, the special symbol executed before the change of the target special symbol is changed). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol that has transmitted the winning information command, and the lottery result of one special symbol is provided to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. A suggestion can be given, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2212 that the winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), the display notification command is set (S2215), and the process ends.

  In the process of S2214, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2214: No), the storage device related command (the storage status command corresponding to the evacuation status (S1414, see FIG. 125)) or the overhang status is supported. It is determined whether a storage state command (S1407, see FIG. 125) has been received (S2216) .If it is determined in S2216 that a storage device related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the corresponding display back image is changed. The command is set (S2217), and the process ends.

  In the process of S2216, when it is determined that the storage device related command has not been received (S2216: No), it is next determined whether an operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, if it is determined that the operation command has been received (the operation button 300 has been operated (pressed down)) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. I do. This operation command is a command output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (S2220).

  In the processing of S2220, if it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S2220: Yes), the hit-related processing is executed (S2221), and this processing ends. The details of the hit-related processing (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2220 that no hit-related command has been received (S2220: No), a process corresponding to another command is executed (S2222), and this process ends.

  In the process of S 2222, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, and a processing result is stored in the RAM 223. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, the input command is set based on the fact that the ball has entered each of the entrances provided in the game board 13. Is received, a process of accumulating the number of entered balls is executed for each type of entrance where the ball has entered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S2221). The hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2111 in FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the main control This processing is executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110.

  When the hit-related processing (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then a display opening command is set (S2502), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that no opening command has been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2503). In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the round number accumulation counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot medium effect process is executed (S2503). S2505), this process ends.

  The big jackpot effect process (S2505) is a process for selecting the mode of the round effect (the effect of the round game R and the effect of the interval between rounds), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the hit related command received this time is not the round number command (S2503: No), it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from main controller 110 when each round in the jackpot is completed. In the process of S2506, if it is determined that the interval command has been received (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set ( S2507), and terminates the process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the big hit ending command has been received (S2508). In the process of S2508, if a jackpot ending command is received (S2508: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2509), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S2508, if it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2508: No), this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 134, the middle jackpot effect process (S2505) will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the jackpot mid-game production process (S2505). In the jackpot-in-producing process (S2505), in addition to the jackpot game effect for congratulating the jackpot as an effect executed during the jackpot, the inside of the storage channel 1231 is visually recognized by causing the player to operate the operation button 300. The first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) that is enabled, and the second operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) in which the state of the interference member 6930 is changed by causing the player to operate the operation button 300 are defined. After the number of balls has been entered, an effect mode and a presence / absence of an effect are set for a continuous firing effect that prompts the continuation of firing of the ball, and each effect is executed.

  When the big hit effect processing (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect executing flag 223x is ON (S2531). When it is determined that the effect under execution flag 223x is ON (S2531: Yes), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is not on (is off) (S2531: No), then it is determined whether the currently received round number command is the round number command indicating the third round of the jackpot. Is determined (S2532).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2532 that the command is the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2534.

  In the process of S2534, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S2534). If it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot k (S2534: Yes), the second operation effect flag 223wb is turned on. Is set (S2535), and the flow shifts to the process of S2536. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the jackpot k (S2534: No), the process directly proceeds to S2536.

  That is, if the jackpot is k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to ON, but if the jackpot is a jackpot other than the jackpot k (jackpot K, L, M, N). , Only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON.

  Here, the display effect round command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the display effect round command setting process (S2536), first, it is determined whether the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551), and if the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551: Yes), The first display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2552), and this process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot effect process (S2505).

  In the first display mode, as a display effect round command, it is displayed that, in the third round of the round game R, there is an operation effect in the next round, and that there is an operation effect also in the interval period after the end of the next round (FIG. 88 (a)), and an operation effect is displayed in an interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R (see FIGS. 90 and 91).

  The display during the interval period after the end of the third round round game R and the display during the fourth round round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, it is off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot L or M (S2553). If it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2554), and this process ends. Then, the process returns to the jackpot medium effect process (S2505).

  In the second display mode, as the display effect round command, there is an operation effect in the next round in the third round game R (see FIG. 88 (a)). Information is set to be displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)), and during the interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed. Is done.

  Here, the information on the number of stored balls is prepared so as to be displayed, and is based on the operation button 300 being operated at the successful timing of the operation effect (for example, the timing at which the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display portion 717). Is controlled so that the display is executed.

  The display during the interval period after the end of the third round round game R and the display during the fourth round round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2553 that the jackpot type is not the jackpot L or M (that is, the jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), the information is read as information readable from the effect temporary storage area 223r. Then, the third display mode is set (S2555), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit production process (S2505).

  In the third display mode, as the display effect round command, in the third round of the round game R, there is displayed an operation effect in the next round, and a character that prompts the firing of a ball toward the first specific winning opening 1000a is displayed. (See FIG. 88). In the interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed.

  The display during the interval period after the end of the third round round game R and the display during the fourth round round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

  As described above, the display of the third round game R and the fourth round game R are collectively set as display effect round commands.

  Returning to FIG. After the processing of S2536, the effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and a display effect round command for a display effect of the third round game R and the fourth round game R is set (S2537). The effect execution flag 223x is set on (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set off (S2539), and the process ends.

  Although not shown in detail, the process of S2539 is configured to skip the process if the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb is already set to off. doing. Thereby, execution of unnecessary processing can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2532 that the command is not the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: No), it is next determined whether the currently received round number command is the fourth round of the jackpot ( S2540).

  In the processing of S2540, if it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), a display command indicating that the fourth round has been reached is set. Then, since the display mode of the fourth round has already been selected as described above, this process is ended to avoid selecting another display mode in duplicate, and the process returns to the hit-related process (S2221).

  On the other hand, in the process of S2540, if it is determined that the currently received round number command is not the fourth round of the jackpot (S2540: No), then, the currently received round number command is the fifth round of the big hit. It is determined whether or not (S2541).

  In the process of S2541, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect execution flag 223x is set to off (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wc described later are set. The input flag 223wd is set to off (S2543), and the flow shifts to the process of S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2541 that the command is not the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S2544.

  In the processing of S2544, it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is the sixth round of the jackpot (S2544). In the process of S2544, if it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M or k (S2545).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M, or k (S2545: Yes), a display continuous firing round command is set (S2546), this process ends, and the process returns to the hit-related process (S2221). .

  The display continuous firing round command is set as a display effect round command to include a display (see a small area Ds3 in FIG. 92 (b)) that prompts to continue firing the ball without stopping. . This display is executed only in the jackpot type (jackpot K, M or k, see FIG. 94 (b)) for which an excess prize can be expected in the round game R of the sixth round. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of an excess winning by continuing to fire the ball according to the display.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2544, when it is determined that the command is not the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or in the processing of S2545, the jackpot type is not the jackpot K, M or k (that is, the jackpot L, If it is determined that the number is N (S2545: No), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and the process ends.

  Accordingly, in the present control example, when the round number command of the first, second, fifth round, and the sixth round when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, N, the display round number command is set by the processing of S2547. You. On the other hand, when another round number command is received, a display effect round command or a display continuous firing round command is set. As described above, by changing the display of the round game R according to the type of the big hit and the number of rounds, the big hit game can be advanced without getting the player bored.

  The various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command) set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the. When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command), the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. I do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the current round number is determined based on the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Alternatively, the process of adding the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223h may be eliminated by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command.

  In addition, when the third round number command is acquired, the display mode of the fourth round is also selected. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the third round number command may be acquired. The same control as that performed when the fourth round number command is acquired may be repeatedly performed. Also, for example, the display mode is set only when the third round number command is acquired, and the display mode is selected when the fourth round number command is acquired. May be.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the next round (three rounds) before the round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed is performed. A notice effect is given to notify that a timing effect (operation effect) will be executed in the round (see FIG. 88 (a)). Then, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88 (b)).

  As described above, since the notice effect is performed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the effect of operating the operation button 300 is executed. it can. In addition, since the notice effect is executed only in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the notice effect is executed. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is configured to be executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be used. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are stored, a timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. This allows the player to play the game of storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 more positively.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2112). The variable display setting process (S2112) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) is based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (completely out of reach, out of reach, big hit), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the process proceeds to S2706 because the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is ON (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the special symbol at this time is determined based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. The processing of each of S2702 to S2705 is performed.

  More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702), then, the extracted fluctuation pattern is obtained (S2703), and a fluctuation pattern command for display is set (S2704). Winning information included in the command storage area based on the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter (the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c). The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the flow shifts to the processing in S2706.

  In the process of S2706, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set off (S2707), and then the command determination process (FIG. 132) In the process of S2206 in step S2206, the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2710), and the process ends.

  Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring process (S2113) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51). This is the process for determining that

  Here, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage flow path 1231 is provided as a part of a storage device capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of 10 balls can be stored. It is composed.

  A detection sensor 1240 is provided at an upstream end of the storage channel 1231, and the detection sensor 1240 detects a ball entering the storage channel 1231. The sphere discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

  In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (ie, whether the ball has been detected by the detection sensor 1240) (S2801), and the first specific winning opening is determined. If the ball has passed the 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process shifts to S2803. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (S2801: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S2803.

  In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (ie, whether the passage of the ball has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870) (S2803), and the ball is discharged from the outlet 1150. Is determined to have passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S2804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the outlet 1150 (S2803: No), the flow shifts to the process of S2805.

  In the processing of S2805, it is determined whether or not the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is turned on. Is determined (S2806). If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set on (S2807), and a display intermediate number command is set (S2808). ), And proceeds to the process of S2812. On the other hand, in the process of S2806, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to S2812.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2805: No). S2809). When it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2809: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S2810), a display shortage command is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. . On the other hand, in the process of S2809, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to S2812.

  In the process of S2812, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. It is determined whether or not (S2813). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set on (S2814), and a display full command is set (S2815). ), End this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2813, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2813: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2812, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816). ). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2817), a dissatisfaction command for display is set (S2818), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2816, when it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2816: No), the present process ends as it is.

  As described above, the settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are updated as needed based on the detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific area detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

  As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in the present embodiment, the storage state of the sphere in the storage channel 1231 is determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 1231.

  In the above description, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are based on the number of balls entered based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharges based on the detection results of the specific region detection sensor 4860 and the non-specific region detection sensor 4870. Is calculated, but the number is not limited to this.

  For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a sphere is provided at an arbitrary position in the storage channel 1231, and based on a lapse of a predetermined period in a state where the sphere is detected by the sensor, the sphere is stored downstream thereof. May be determined. As an example, when a sensor is provided at a position where the third ball from the downstream stays, three spheres including the two spheres disposed on the downstream side are stored by the sensor. Can be determined.

  Further, even if the open / close plate 1300 is closed, if the ball is continuously detected by the sensor, it is possible to suspect that the ball is improperly parked. Can be found early. That is, the sensor for detecting a sphere can be used for both detection of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and detection of fraud.

  Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this lamp output processing (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. It is processing for.

  Here, in the present control example, as the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93), in addition to the above-described configuration, the decoration lamp 227a (described above) used for effects and the like provided over the entire pachinko machine 10 is used. In contrast to the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like), and the covering front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided to cover the storage channel 1231, the inside of the covering front plate 1200 A transmission lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) for bringing the player into a transmission state in which the player can view the display, and another lamp 227z are provided.

  When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present time is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, the predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) clocked by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2905.

  When the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, it is controlled so that all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on (intensity).

  Here, in the present control example, in a normal game state, the cover front plate 1200 is provided so as to configure a state where it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the internal state of the storage channel 1231 and the operation state of the interference member 6930. I have. As described above, the covering front plate 1200 is configured to irradiate predetermined light (light from a transmission lamp) from the back surface, thereby changing the state from the shielding state to the transmission state.

  Then, the transmission lamp is turned on for a predetermined period (a predetermined period after the start-up process is performed) after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, regardless of the gaming state. Thus, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, at the timing when the clerk checks the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the storage channel 1231 covered by the wrapped front plate 1200 can be easily visually recognized. it can.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the present time is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, ( Next, it is determined whether or not the detection sensor 1240 has detected the passage of a ball (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 ( S2903), and proceeds to the processing of S2906.

  Note that the transmission lamp lighting command in this case is a time (for example, 2.0 seconds) sufficient for the ball to pass through the area covered by the covering front plate 1200 in the storage channel 1231 (for example, 2.0 seconds). Is set to be lit, and while the permeable state is maintained during the period in which the sphere flows down the storage channel 1231, the permeable state can be released after the sphere is stopped, It is not limited to this. For example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off under the condition that a ball has passed through the discharge port 1150, or that the specific region detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific region detection sensor 4870 has detected the passage of a ball (shielded from the transmission state). State). This allows the covering front plate 1200 to be maintained in a transparent state during the period in which the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the process of S2902, if the detection sensor 1240 does not detect the passage of a sphere (S2902: No), it is then determined whether a transmission lamp-related command has been set (S2904), and the transmission lamp-related command is set. If it has been set (S2904: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command specified in advance is set (S2905), and the flow shifts to the process of S2906. On the other hand, if the transmission lamp-related command has not been set (S2904: No), the process directly proceeds to S2906.

  The setting of the transmission lamp-related command is mainly executed by the ball number confirmation process (S3004) described later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2906, a decoration lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state) (S2906), and this processing ends. In addition, the decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to a variation pattern to be executed, a current game state, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button input monitoring / production process (S2107). In the button input monitoring and effect processing (2107), an input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of effect is monitored, and when the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform a corresponding effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, setting of an operation button effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated, and setting of various flags based on the operation contents are performed. The settings are made.

  Specifically, first, during the round game R of the fourth round, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is a pressing success period. Sets the lamp lighting command for transmission to execute the lamp lighting based on the determination result, and sets the display command for displaying the ball number grasping effect (successful effect, failed effect, unacceptable effect) accompanying it. (See FIG. 140). Secondly, in the interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is a large press success period or a successful press down period. It is determined whether the period is a press-down failure period or not, and a display command for displaying an effect (great success effect, successful effect, failure effect) based on the result is set.

  When the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect-in-progress flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). If it is determined in the process of S3001 that the effect execution flag 223x is ON (S3001: Yes), it is next determined whether the currently-running jackpot type of jackpot is the jackpot k (S3002). . In the process of S3002, if it is determined that the jackpot is k (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is an interval period (S3003), and if it is an interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the hit is not the jackpot k (that is, the hit is K, L, M, and N) (S3002: No), or in the process of S3003, it is not during the interval (that is, the round game) If it is determined that R is being executed (S3003: No), a ball number confirmation process is executed (S3004), and this process ends.

  Here, the ball number confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the ball number confirmation process (S3004). This ball number confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed in the button input monitoring / production process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. is there.

  This ball number confirmation processing (S3004) monitors an input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect, and responds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, as described above, various flags are set based on the operation content, a transmission lamp lighting command for executing lamp lighting is set, A display command for displaying the ball number comprehension effect (successful effect, failed effect, unacceptable effect) accompanying it is set.

  When the ball number confirmation processing (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and if it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes). Since the transmission lamp lighting command and the display ball number grasping related command have already been set, the present processing is terminated as it is, and the flow returns to the button input monitoring / production processing (S2107).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is not on (that is, it is off) (S3101: No), it is next determined whether or not the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is detected. (S3102). When the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether it is within the ball number grasping period (S3103).

  Here, the number-of-balls grasping period means a period in which the display pointer 719 at least partially coincides with the bar display unit 717 in the above-described timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88B). The length of the ball number grasping period can be adjusted according to the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the bar display section 717.

  In this control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], the operation speed is 20 [cm / s], and the width of the bar display section 717 is 1 [cm]. In this case, the ball number grasping period is the same as the time when the display pointer 719 moves by 4 [cm], and thus is 0.2 [s].

  In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the time is within the ball count period (S3103: Yes), a display ball count grasp success command is set (S3104), and a transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set (S3105). ), And proceeds to the process of S3111.

  Here, when the display ball number grasping success command is set, a display prompting grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (for example, a character display of “Attention to the attacker !!”) is displayed in the third symbol display. This is executed in the device 81, and “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation button 300 is changed to the pressed state (see FIG. 88 (b)).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on at least from the fourth round game R to the fifth round game R.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3103 that the operation of the operation button 300 has not been performed within the ball count period (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 has been performed at a timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display unit 717 are shifted (see FIG. 89)). (S3103: No), the display ball number grasping failure command is set (S3106), the transmission lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

  Here, when the display ball number grasping failure command is set, the display for prompting the grasp of the ball number stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and “bad” is displayed as the result display mode 720 and the operation is performed. A button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 is changed to a pressed state mode (see FIG. 89).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is turned on at least from the fourth round game R to the fifth round game R.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3102, if it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 has not been detected (S3102: No), the process proceeds to S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether or not the limit time (3 seconds from the start of the round R in the fourth round in the present control example) has elapsed (S3108). If it is determined that the time limit has elapsed (S3108: Yes), a display ball number unobservable command is set (S3109), a transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S3108, if it is determined that the time limit has not elapsed (less than 3 seconds from the start of the round R in the fourth round), the process is terminated, and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) Return to).

  Here, if the display ball number grasping impossible command is set, the display for prompting the grasp of the ball number stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 does not change (see FIG. 88A).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the subsequent round game R.

  As described above, in the present control example, a player can obtain a player operating the operation button 300 from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b, rather than not operating the operation button 300. Controlled to increase profit. In the case of operating the operation button 300, performing the operation during the ball number grasping period (0.2 seconds in the present control example) is better than performing the operation at other timings. Is controlled such that the profit obtained by the player from the display at the time and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b is increased.

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to operate the operation buttons 300 during the fourth round of the game R, and to concentrate on the operation. The operation of the operation button 300 is performed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the gaze of the player trying to operate the operation button 300 can be collected on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to ON (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to ON by operating the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the time limit), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to ON, the ball number confirmation processing (S3004) is skipped. Therefore, in the ball number confirmation process (S3004), only the first operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is validated (S3101).

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly hit repeatedly and to carefully time the operation of the operation button 300. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (displaying a reminder) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of times of use early, and to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

  When the processing in S3111 ends, the present processing ends, and the flow returns to the button input monitoring / production processing (S2107).

  139 will be described again. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005). If it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is ON (S3005: Yes), the display operation button-related effect command has already been set, so this process ends as it is, and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). Return to

  On the other hand, in the process of S3005, if it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is not on (that is, it is off) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S3006). The fact that the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125 and S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132) is an effect for changing the state of the interference member 6930 to the extended state (see FIGS. 90 and 91). Means that the operation of the operation button 300 (pressing down) is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, it means that the state change of the interference member 6930 to the extended state is executed.

  If it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to off (S3007), and the round is determined from the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the fourth round of the round game R. After subtracting a value obtained by dividing the elapsed time of the interval by 0.2, it is determined whether the number of remaining balls indicated by the value obtained by subtracting 2 is 4 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of spheres left in the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930.

  Here, the value calculated in S3008 is 4 because, in the timing effect (operation effect), when the display pointer 719d is at a position where at least a part of the second band portion 716b vertically coincides with the second band portion 716b, The control is performed so that the operation is performed (see FIG. 90B). Here, during a period in which the display pointer 719d is in a position where at least a part thereof is vertically aligned with the second band portion 716b, depending on the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the second band portion 716b. , Length can be adjusted.

  In the present control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], and the width of the second band portion 716 b is newly set to 4.2 [cm]. Since the time required for one ball to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 0.2 seconds, the time required for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second band 716b is 0.1 seconds. , The operating speed of the display pointer 719 becomes 72 [cm / s]. With this setting, the display pointer 719 is controlled such that its left end reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (for 0.8 seconds). At the timing, the right end passes through the left end of the second band portion 716b). In the present control example, by performing such control, it is possible to limit the period in which the display pointer 719 and the second band portion 716b at least partially coincide with each other up and down to 0.1 second.

  In the process of S3008, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 4, (S3008: Yes), a display operation button great success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button great success effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the highest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 90 (b)).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3008 that the number of remaining balls is not 4 (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls is 5 or more in S3010 is that in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all of the display pointers 719d are in a position vertically matching the first band portion 716a. Is executed (see FIG. 91A). That is, this corresponds to a case where the operation button 300 is operated before 0.7 seconds elapse from the start of the interval period (when the operation is performed too early).

  In the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), a display operation button success effect command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a moderate profit (that is, a profit that is neither the highest nor the lowest) as a result of the timing effect (the operation effect). The indicated display is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or the operation flag 223p is not set to ON. If the limit time (1.5 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S3012: Yes), a display operation button failure effect command is set (S3013), and the process shifts to S3014.

  Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls is 3 or less in S3010 is that, in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all the display pointers 719d are in positions vertically matching the third band portion 716c. Is executed (see FIG. 91 (b)). That is, this corresponds to a case where the operation button 300 is operated after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period (when the operation is too slow) or a case where the operation button 300 is not operated.

  Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the lowest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 91 (b)).

  As described above, in the present control example, operating the operation button 300 increases the profit obtained by the player rather than not operating the operation button 300, and accordingly, the display on the third symbol display device 81 also changes. Is controlled as follows. When the operation button 300 is operated, the operation is performed at a timing when the number of remaining balls becomes 4 (until 0.8 seconds elapse from 0.7 seconds after the start of the interval period). It is controlled so that the highest profit can be obtained, the medium profit before the timing, and the lowest profit after the timing.

  Therefore, the player is able to improve his / her willingness to operate the operation button 300 during the interval period immediately after the fourth round game R, and can select the operation mode of the operation button 300.

  That is, when the player wants to obtain at least a medium profit, the player can press the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period to obtain a medium profit without danger (stably). Profit). On the other hand, if you want to get the highest profit, if you delay the operation even a little, you will not get a medium profit and you will get the lowest profit, so take into account the disadvantage (Profits are unstable and volatile).

  In this way, by making the operation mode of the operation button 300 different, the player selects whether the medium profit is stably obtained or the unstable but the highest profit is obtained. be able to.

  Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation button 300. The operation of the operation button 300 is performed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the gaze of the player trying to operate the operation button 300 can be collected on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to ON (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set to ON by operating the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the time limit), and while the second input flag 223wd is set to ON, the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) is performed. Since the operation is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is validated in the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107).

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly hit repeatedly and to carefully time the operation of the operation button 300. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (displaying a reminder) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of times of use early, and to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

  According to the control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The visibility inside the storage channel 1231 is changed depending on the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ease with which the operation mode of the interference device 6900 can be grasped.

  In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to take a line of sight from the storage channel 1231 and pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) and participate in a timing effect (operation effect). It was configured so that Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the big hit game ends with the player's line of sight concentrated on the first variable winning device 6000.

  Further, when the storage channel 1231 is in a transparent state as a result of the player operating the operation button 300 in the timing effect (operation effect), pay attention to the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage channel 1231 is provided. The display that prompts the user to do so is configured. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) to be moved to the storage channel 1231 when necessary.

  A circle is displayed on the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) so that the number range of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. This makes it easier for the player to predict the state of the inside of the storage channel 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and to easily determine how many more balls should be fired before the specified number of prizes. be able to. Therefore, the launch mode of the ball can be easily selected.

  As timing effects (operation effects) performed on the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81), different qualities (in the present control example, regarding the visibility of the storage channel 1231 and payout of prize balls) are provided to the player. In the case where the timing effect (operation effect) for giving the profit of (directly connected to) is continuously executed, the operation timing for giving the highest profit for the player is grasped as the same timing (similar timing) for the player. It was configured to be. Thereby, even when the transition from the previous timing effect (operation effect) to the subsequent timing effect (operation effect) occurs immediately, it is possible to cause the player to execute the operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  Depending on the jackpot type, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the sixth round), when a ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (the twentieth operation pattern, operation scenario 5), or when it is not discharged (the twenty-first operation pattern). , And the operation scenario 6). This makes it possible to define whether or not an excess winning has occurred in the predetermined round game R, depending on the type of the jackpot.

  By changing the interval between predetermined rounds (for example, the interval between the fourth round and the fifth round) depending on the jackpot type, the inside of the storage channel 1231 in the round game R immediately after the interval between the rounds is changed. The state (the number of stored balls) was configured to change. Thus, even if the state of the state change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the round game R is the same, the progress of the round game can be changed.

  The predetermined number of round games R (the fourth round game R in the present control example) is different from the specified number (10 in the present control example) (nine in the present control example) of balls. By ending the game with the specific winning opening 1000a, the profit obtained by the player in the next round game R (the fifth round game R in the present control example) is maximized. did. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from inadvertently digesting the jackpot game.

  In a configuration in which the ball flows down toward the specific region 4830 as the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, a specified number of the first specific winning opening 1000a are stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a while the interference member 6930 maintains the extended state. The ball was configured to be impenetrable. Thereby, by the operation mode of the interference member 6930, the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R can be defined, and the ball reaches the upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing and the end timing of the round game R can be dissociated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R can be defined.

  In the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls are configured to be easily retained in a state where the balls are arranged upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the retained balls are in a state in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. It is configured to flow down to the first specific winning opening 1000a at the changing timing. Thus, a plurality of stagnated balls can be collectively entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the possibility of occurrence of excess winning can be increased.

  In addition, the number of excess winnings can be defined. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of excess winnings from becoming excessive and hindering the game performance.

  Further, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the excess winning can be defined by the operation mode of the interference member 6930 disposed downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the operation mode of the interference member 6930 is predetermined based on the type of the big hit. You. As a result, even if the ball is similarly retained upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to switch between a case where an excess winning occurs and a case where no excess winning occurs based on the type of big hit.

  On the basis of the operation timing of the operation button 300, the profit (for example, the visibility inside the storage channel 1231 or the number of ejected balls discharged from the storage channel 1231, which is obtained by the player in the round game R, or based on it) The configuration is such that the presence / absence of a ball entering the specific area 4830 and the maximum number of balls entered in the round game R are changed. Thereby, the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved.

  Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, two types of profits obtained by the player are configured to be seesawed, and the display device (the third symbol) is provided so that the player can grasp the mode of the profits obtained by the player. The display device 81) is configured to display the image. Thereby, the player who has visually recognized the display on the display device can obtain a profit suitable for the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit to be preferentially obtained. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the timing effect (operation effect) can be increased.

  Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 141, for the special symbol 1, the “big hit P” is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”. This "big hit P" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value of "big hit P" is 50, so "big hit P" is determined when the special symbol 1 has a big hit. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

  In the “big hit P”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol shift to the high probability state. In the present control example, at least one big hit is controlled from the transition of the special symbol to the high probability state to the transition to the low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of a throwing ball (expected throwing ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big hit to the return of the game state to the normal state.

  For the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in a range of "50 to 99" in association with "big hit Q". The “big hit Q” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit Q”, so if the special symbol 1 is a lottery, “big hit Q” is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

  The “big hit Q” is set to six rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, 100 time saving states of the ordinary symbol are given.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, “big hit m” is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 99” (entire range). This “big hit m” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of “big hit m” is 100, so if the special symbol 2 is a lottery, “big hit m” is determined. The proportion is 100%.

  For the “big hit m”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol shift to the high probability state. In the present control example, at least one big hit is controlled from the transition of the special symbol to the high probability state to the transition to the low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of a throwing ball (expected throwing ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big hit to the return of the game state to the normal state.

  In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the bonus (normal symbol high-probability state or special symbol high-probability state) given after the end of the jackpot is changed to the special symbol 2 Is defined to be more advantageous (it is easier to shift to a high probability state).

  As described above, in the present control example, the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery and the case where the special symbol 2 is a lottery is shifted to a high probability state in which the player is more advantageous than the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery. It is configured to be easy. Therefore, once the extended play mode (the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol time reduction state) is set, the ball is hit right into the second entrance 640 to draw the special symbol 2 by lottery. Is easily executed, and the jackpot game is easily repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for one purpose of shifting to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 142, of controlling in the round game R of the sixth round the operation pattern to be different in accordance with the jackpot type. Note that, in this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described in the ninth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the 22nd operation pattern, and FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing in the 23rd operation pattern. FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the member 8340, and FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the open / close plate 8300 and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 in the twenty-fourth operation pattern.

  In the present control example, in the sixth round game R of the big hit P, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven in the 22nd operation pattern, and in the sixth round game R of the big hit Q, The opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven in the 24th operation pattern in the round game R of the sixth round of the jackpot m in the operation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the twenty-second operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), and the round game R starts. After the elapse of the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example), the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state.

  Note that the interference member 6930 returns to the retreat state when the round game R ends (the skip is performed when the round game R ends before the standby time TK). Here, the round game R is determined such that the passage of a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) is detected at the first specific winning opening 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example, (30 seconds) elapses.

  In the round game R of the sixth round of the jackpot P in which the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are drive-controlled in the 22nd operation pattern, the specified number (10 in this control example) before the standby time TK elapses. When the ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R ends without waiting for the waiting time TK.

  On the other hand, when the specified number of balls have not entered the first specific winning opening 1000a before the standby time TK has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is in a protruding state, and ten balls can be stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be thrown into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the time required for the round game R becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1 (30 seconds).

  The standby time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) does not stop the launch of the ball even in the interval between rounds from the end of the round game R of the fifth round, and the ball is not released even after the start of the round game R of the sixth round. By continuing firing, a period in which the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls can reach the first specific winning opening 1000a sufficiently is set. In this control example, the ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  On the other hand, for example, when the firing of the ball is stopped during the interval between rounds from the end of the fifth round of the round game R and the firing of the ball is started at the start of the sixth round, the fired ball is From the balance with the time required to reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (approximately 4.0 seconds), a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls are transferred to the first specific winning opening by the elapse of the standby time TK. 1000a cannot be passed.

  Therefore, when the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round, the case where the firing of the ball is continued at the interval between the rounds is compared with the case where the firing of the ball is continued at the interval between the rounds. Can be configured to be longer. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval between rounds.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the twenty-third operation pattern, the open / close plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), but before the elapse of the standby time TK. Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is controlled to open and close a plurality of times (one side opens and closes as shown in FIG. 74). That is, the control for canceling the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

  Note that, after the elapse of the standby time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) from the start of the round game R, the state of the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state, as in the twenty-second operation pattern. .

  According to this operation pattern, not all the balls riding on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some balls flow toward the auxiliary entrance 9111. Before the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses, a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls can be made harder to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a than the operation pattern. .

  Therefore, the round game R of the sixth round can be extended for a long time (30 seconds) with a high probability. On the other hand, unlike the twenty-second operation pattern, a prize ball can be paid out when the ball enters the auxiliary entrance 9111, so that the number of prize balls paid out is larger than in the twenty-third operation pattern. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), but before and after the standby time TK elapses. Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is controlled to open and close a plurality of times (one side opens and closes as shown in FIG. 74). That is, the control for canceling the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

  Note that, after the elapse of the standby time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) from the start of the round game R, the change of the state of the interference member 6930 from the retracted state to the extended state is caused by the 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern. The operation pattern is the same.

  In the present operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some balls flow toward the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66). Similarly to the twenty-third operation pattern, the probability that the round game R will be completed can be reduced by passing the specified number (ten in the present control example) of balls through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, the round game R of the sixth round can be extended for a long time (30 seconds) with a high probability. On the other hand, unlike the twenty-third operation pattern, the ball can be made to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the elapse of the standby time TK. Throughout, it is possible to generate a payout of a prize ball due to a ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. Therefore, more payouts of prize balls can be caused as compared with the twenty-third operation pattern.

  In this operation pattern, control is performed so that one-sided opening and closing can be performed even after the interference member 6930 is set in the extended state. In other words, even after the storage channel 1231 is filled with spheres (filled up) and the spheres stay on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one-sided opening / closing occurs. Is easier to guide the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 at the time of one-sided opening / closing as compared with the case where is not specified.

  Next, referring to FIG. 143 (a) and FIG. 143 (b), the display in the round game R of the sixth round will be described. FIG. 143 (a) and FIG. 143 (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents that the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the round game R of the sixth round is being executed.

  In FIG. 143 (a), an example of the display of the round game R in the sixth round when the jackpot type is “big jackpot P” or “big jackpot Q”, or the sixth round game in the case of “big jackpot m” FIG. 143 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display before the elapse of the standby time TK in R. In FIG. 143 (b), the standby time TK in the sixth round of the round game R when the jackpot type is “big hit m” is shown. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display after the lapse has been illustrated.

  That is, when the jackpot type is “big hit P” or “big hit Q”, a display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained over the round game R, and the jackpot type is “big hit”. In the case of “m”, after the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained, the display is switched to the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) after the elapse of the standby time TK. The display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) is maintained until the end of the round game R.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the round number display section 714 for displaying the current round number is in the sixth round of the round game R. A sub-round display section 714b, which is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a manner and is displayed below the number-of-rounds display section 714, indicating that a period in which an additional prize ball can be expected in the round game R is displayed.

  In FIG. 143 (a), the number-of-rounds display unit 714 displays light (displays brightly), while the sub-round display unit 714b displays light-off (displays darkly). In FIG. The unit 714 is turned off (darkly displayed), while the sub-round display unit 714b is illuminated (brightly displayed).

  That is, in the present control example, the round game R is executed by the display in the mode shown in FIG. 143 (a) during the period in which the payout of prize balls accompanying the ball entry into the first specific winning opening 1000a is mainly performed. In addition to notifying the player of this, after the elapse of the standby time TK, it becomes impossible to expect the payout of the prize ball accompanying the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the ball enters the auxiliary entrance 9111. The player can be made aware that the period in which the payout of prize balls can be expected continues.

  Here, by changing the display on the sub-round display portion 714b, it is possible for the player to easily recognize a substantial change in profit obtained by the player by entering the ball. That is, the payout of the prize ball due to the entry of one ball into the auxiliary entrance 9111 is three as described above, and is 1/5 of the case where the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is. This change in the number of winning balls with respect to the number of entered balls can be easily recognized by the player.

  Further, the ball flows to the auxiliary entrance 9111 only when the ball is arranged between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 during a short time when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened, The ball does not always flow to the auxiliary entrance 9111 each time the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened.

  Accordingly, the frequency of the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 during the period in which the sub-round display portion 714b is emitting light (displaying brightly) is the same as the frequency of the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 during the period in which the round number display portion 714 is emitting light (displaying brightly). It is lower than the frequency of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  As described above, according to the present control example, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended, the player can obtain the profit (change of the prize ball paid out by entering one ball, change of the prize ball, At the same time).

  In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 143 (b), the character “+ chance” is displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 described above. In the present control example, the character “+ chance” may cause a ball to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by firing a ball. Corresponding to being able to get paid.

  As described above, in the present control example, control is performed so as to pay out additional prize balls due to the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 in the round game R. Therefore, in the round game R, the number of prize balls (150 in the present control example) to be paid out to the player when a specified number (10 in the present control example) of the balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. More prize balls (excess prize balls) may be paid out.

  In particular, in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, even after the elapse of the standby time TK, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the auxiliary entrance 9111, and the game will be performed in comparison with the other twenty-second and twenty-third operation patterns. The number of prize balls paid out to the player can increase. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

  That is, from the 22nd operation pattern to the 24th operation pattern in the present control example, it is possible to provide a difference in the number of award balls to be paid out to the player while maintaining the same driving mode of the interference member 6930.

  Note that the maximum number of times that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes in the round game R corresponds to the maximum number of times that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

  According to the control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the inter-round interval period, the period required for the next round game R is more likely to be longer when the firing of the ball is stopped than when the firing of the ball is continued during the inter-round interval period. Thus, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval period between rounds.

  The driving mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (that is, whether or not the above-described “one-sided opening / closing” occurs) can positively change the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the round game R. . In other words, whether the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the auxiliary ball opening 9111 downstream of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is determined. It can be switched by the driving mode of 8340.

  Accordingly, it is possible to separately configure a timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 and a timing at which the ball is not easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111. Therefore, for example, during the period of the round game R, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be concentrated in a part of the period. In this case, the balls reaching the circulating movable object are sorted in the order of arrival, and a predetermined number of the reached balls is guided to the winning opening (winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary opening 9111). As a result, the attention power in the vicinity of the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be improved.

  That is, the ball is fired at a timing when the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111, and the firing of the ball is stopped at other times, so that the number of fired balls with respect to the payout number can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the timing at which the ball should be fired in order to win the auxiliary entrance 9111 is made different based on the type of big hit. Thus, it is possible to request the player to change the shooting mode of the ball for each big hit game, so that it is easy to prevent the player from playing the big hit game casually. In addition, by making it difficult to grasp the jackpot type, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a capture method, and to provide a particular player (experienced player) with excessive profit (for example, the number of paid out balls rather than the number of launched balls) Is increased) can be prevented.

  The auxiliary entrance 9111 is located at a position where the ball is not guided (is difficult to be guided) when the opening / closing plate 8300 is not driven (non-excited). This makes it possible to improve the concentration of the player on the game as compared with the case where the ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are not driven.

  In the round game R, the player can easily grasp the change in the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out with respect to the number of balls arriving at the first variable winning device 9000 from the display of the display device (the third symbol display device 81). It was configured as follows. This makes it easier for the player to arbitrarily select whether to continue firing the ball or stop firing the ball from the display on the display device during the continuation of the same round game R.

  Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. In the ROM 202, a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202c, a first type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, At least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided in addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f.

  The small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is something that can be done.

  With reference to FIG. 145, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 145 (a) to FIG. 145 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the first random number table 202a indicates whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 obtained by the game ball entering the first entrance 64 is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 obtained by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. Special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. This is a table in which (judgment values) are set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the obtained first random number counter C3 is “0”, and if the value is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that the small hit is made. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 319”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the second special symbol lottery based on a ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is set in the table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the obtained first random number counter C3 is “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined that the big hit has occurred. In addition, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 obtained is “1 to 318”. If the value is “1 to 318”, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. In addition, when it is determined to be “319”, it is determined to be out of place.

  As described above, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first random number counter C3, at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the number of random hits of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is Since there are 320, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of a big hit of the first special symbol is “1/320”. In addition, since the total number of random hit values for small hits is 3, the probability of small hits for the first special symbol is “3/320”.

  On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the random number value which is the jackpot of the second special symbol is one. Since the total number of the random numbers is 1, the probability of the jackpot for the second special symbol is “1/320”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be the small hit is 318, the probability of the small hit of the second special symbol is “318/320”.

  In addition, as in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples, when it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, “停止” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). The symbol is lighted up and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is reduced, but is opened for only 0.2 seconds when the time is not reduced. Therefore, even when the value of the second random number counter C5 is a hit when the time is not reduced, it is difficult to cause the game balls to win the second winning opening 640. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player tries to enter the second winning opening 640 even though the time is not reduced (the jackpot with the time reduction is not displayed).

  FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, as described above, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C4 is It is defined in association with the jackpot type and the type of the winning opening that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 49”. Is associated with a jackpot R (see 202b21 in FIG. 146).

  In the case of the jackpot R, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is a time-saving state (100 times) until the change of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  The jackpot S is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C4 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b22 in FIG. 146).

  In the case of the jackpot S, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls, but cannot obtain the benefit of the time reduction after the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game can be reduced to the time-saving state with a probability of 50%. During working hours, the player will aim for a bigger jackpot by playing a small jackpot game described later.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 is a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 9”, and the big hit is obtained. n are defined in association with each other (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). The jackpot n gives the player the same profit as the jackpot R described above.

  In other words, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes the time reduction state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  A large hit p is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C4 in the range of “10 to 99” (see 202b24 in FIG. 146). The big hit p is provided with a difference in the number of times of the time saving game while giving the player the same payout of the prize ball as the big hit n described above.

  In other words, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes the time-saving state (four times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is consumed four times. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  As described above, the jackpot generated by the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640) shifts to the time saving state when 100% is established. Therefore, the possibility of acquiring the next big hit in a short time after the end of the big hit game is increased as compared with the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1.

  As described above, during the special symbol time reduction, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit is reduced. It is set to be long (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, the ball can be easily entered into the second winning opening 640, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. Then, if the special symbol 2 is a lottery and the big hit is a big hit, the time is reduced after the big hit is completed, so that it becomes easier to obtain a big hit by the special symbol 2 lottery.

  Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the time-saving state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is reached, the special symbol that is likely to be the jackpot G is likely to be repeated. It becomes easier to obtain a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the special symbol time saving state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the present control example, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved special symbols are related to each other, so that the ball is in the specific area 4830 (in the present control example, the next big hit is caused by the passage of the ball. (See FIG. 51) is determined, but the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g.

  The small hit type selection table 202g includes a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202g1 for selecting a small hit type based on the first entrance 64 and a small hit based on the second winning port 640. There is a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202g2 for selecting a hit type (see FIG. 147 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 147 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first entrance 64, if the value of the small hit type counter C6 is "0 to 1", the small hit A is selected, and "2 to 99". ", The small hit B is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), at the time of the small hit based on the second winning opening 640, if the value of the first hit type counter C6 is “0 to 9”, the small hit A is selected, and “10” is selected. In the case of "-99", the small hit B is selected.

  In this control example, the operation of the open / close plate 1300 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 148). Although details will be described later, the small hit A is a small hit in which a large hit is given with a high probability when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, and the small hit B is a small hit in which the big hit is not given with a high probability. .

  In addition, in the present control example, the big hit given after the small hit A and the small hit B is configured to be the big hit G (16R hour big hit).

  In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit. However, as another specification, the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit is Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent small jackpot game, the jackpot that has just acquired the right is executed by the game ball passing through the specific area 4830. You may. By doing so, the player can select the small hit that passes through the specific area 4830, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510, and the sorting device 4850 at the small hit A, and the time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510, and the sorting device 4850 (see FIG. 51) at the small hit B. It is. The operation of the distribution device 4850 is the same for the small hit A and the small hit B.

  In FIG. 148, the illustration of the difference between the operation timing of the open / close plate 1300 and the drive timing of the solenoid 1510 is omitted, and the operation is started at the same time.

  First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. At the small hit A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) such that the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.0 second from the start of the small hit, and when 1.0 second has passed, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). (Excitation) is released. 0.2 seconds after the excitation is released, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, and the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 0.6 seconds, and then the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released.

  Next, an outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In the small hit B, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.8 seconds from the start of the small hit, and when 1.8 seconds have elapsed, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). ) Is released.

  As described above, the small hit A and the small hit B differ in whether or not the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed during the small hit game, while the time of the small hit game is the same (1.8 seconds). .

  In the present control example, when the small hit game is started immediately after the small hit game ends, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol remains and the small hit game is continuously generated, during the small hit game, The period during which the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to a minimum of 0.4 seconds. Therefore, in the above-described embodiment, when the small hitting game occurs continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51), the ball is discharged from the discharge port 1150 during the small hitting game. The number of balls performed is limited to two. Therefore, the ball that entered the storage channel 1231 in the previous small hit game may remain in the storage channel 1231 even during the next small hit game.

  An operation mode of the distribution device 4850 will be described. The distributing device 4850 keeps the distributing operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds elapse after the solenoid 1510 starts driving (excitation) at the start of the small hitting game, and after 2.0 seconds elapses The distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds, the distributing operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. In addition, the distributing device 4850 moves the distributing member 4851 to the open position after 3.2 seconds from the start (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 at the start of the small hitting game, and maintains the distributing member 4851 for 0.5 second. After elapse of 0.5 seconds, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) in such a manner that the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again.

  That is, the distribution operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for one small hitting game. The first movement corresponds to one second (corresponding to the time that elapses until the ball that has passed through the discharge port 1150 reaches the sorting operation member 4851) after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed at the small hit A. .

  From this, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is driven with the small hit A, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 in advance, the ball passes through the specific region 4830 during the first movement of the distribution operation member 4851. Can be done. On the other hand, the probability of occurrence of the small hit A is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, so that it is difficult to frequently cause the ball to pass to the specific area 4830 at this timing.

  The second movement of the sorting operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small hitting game (corresponding to immediately after the second ball that has passed the outlet 1150 has passed the sorting operation member 4851). Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is a mode in which the ball is not allowed to enter the specific area 4830 if up to two balls have been discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the small hitting game.

  That is, according to this control example, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 unless the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. It can be configured as follows.

  Thus, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time-saving game, the timing at which the ball passes the specific area 4830 can be limited to when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. In this case, a prize ball paid out in a game in which a ball is continuously inserted into the second ball entrance 640 so that the number of reserved balls does not become 0 can obtain a payout prize ball in a short time game.

  On the other hand, it is difficult to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830 while the ball continues to be inserted into the second entrance 640, so that the next jackpot is obtained (the ball passes through the specific area 4830). In addition, the player needs to make a timing for reducing the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the time saving game. Thus, in a time-saving game, if the number of remaining time-savings is reduced, it is possible to configure so that the timing at which the number of reserved balls is frequently reduced to 0 increases the profit obtained by the player.

  According to the setting of the second movement, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is three, the balls pass through the specific area 4830, but the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, the number of discharges may be set when the number of discharges is greater than the number of discharges (two) at the shortest interval (0.4 seconds) of the small hit game. The second movement may be set at the passing timing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small hit game). In addition, the shortest interval of the small hit game may be set to 0.2 seconds (the number of ejected pieces is one). In this case, the second movement is performed when the number of ejected pieces is larger than the number of ejected pieces (one piece). For example, the second movement may be set at the timing when the second ball passes the specific area 4830 (1.2 seconds from the end of the small hitting game).

  Also, since the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 in one small hit game is about 1 or 2 on average, the storage channel 1231 can be set before the small hit game in which the number of reserved balls becomes zero. By accumulating the sphere in the area, the possibility that the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 can be increased. Therefore, the timing at which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is set to 0 can be selected based on the number of balls in the storage channel 1231 that increases or decreases with each small hit game. Thereby, the attention power to the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In the present control example, as the period of the time saving game becomes longer, the payout prize balls due to the ball entering the second entrance 640 increase. Here, by setting the number of prize balls of the second entrance 640, the player can select whether to shorten or lengthen the time saving game period.

  For example, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is one, there is no profit (number of payout prize balls) that the player can obtain by subtracting the number of shot balls from the number of shot balls. Therefore, it is beneficial for the player to shorten the time-saving game period.

  On the other hand, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is two or more (for example, five), there is a profit (number of payout prize balls) that can be obtained by the player by subtracting from the number of shots (one piece). that's all). Therefore, it may be beneficial for the player to suppress the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830 and lengthen the time-saving game period.

  In the present control example, the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 for one small hitting game is set to 1.8 seconds from the first opening start to the closing, so that the opening time is set to the first specific winning opening 1000a in one small hitting game. Is 3 or 4 balls, but is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the opening pattern of the small hitting game in an opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls) can be obtained during one small hitting game. ) May be configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, for example, by disposing the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, even when the opening time of the opening and closing plate 1300 is short, the ball is closed at the lower end of the opening and closing plate 1300 when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. It is possible to prolong the time required for the ball to fall downward, and to guide the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  In the present control example, the ball is controlled to be able to be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so that the small hitting game (small hitting A, small hitting B) in which the period from opening to closing is 1.8 seconds is the shortest interval (0 (At intervals of .4 seconds), the number of small hit games with respect to the number of balls that can be fired is 11 balls / 3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be fired during three small hit games.

  Here, in order to generate a small hitting game, it is necessary to enter a ball into the second entrance 640, so that the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 is 0, such as at the start of right-handing. Therefore, it is necessary to make three balls enter the second entrance 640 as the number of balls for generating three small hit games. Therefore, it is the remaining eight balls that deviate from the second entrance 640 to the first specific winning opening 1000a. In three small hit games, for example, if all the small hits are the above described small hits B, six balls are ejected through the three small hit games. Therefore, after three small hit games, two balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the expected number of additional balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 when the balls are continuously fired is two for three small hit games.

  It should be noted that the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hit game is not discharged if it has not reached the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It takes 2 seconds to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231 from the first specific winning opening 1000a, and even if it is considered that the opening in the small hitting game is completed in 1.8 seconds, the second time in the small hitting game is considered. Before the ball that has passed the one specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231, the opening of the next small hit game may start.

  Therefore, when the ball starts to be stored in the storage channel 1231 (when the ball is not zero, the first time), the small hitting game in which the ball is not zero (for example, in a state where two balls remain in the storage channel 1231) In comparison with the case where the number of balls is additionally increased in the executed small hit game (continuous round), the balls can be easily left in the storage channel 1231.

  On the other hand, when the number of retained balls at the second entrance 640 is not 0, even if three balls do not enter the second entrance 640, the number of retained balls and the number of remaining balls are newly set. If the number of balls that have entered the second entrance 640 exceeds three, three small hit games can be executed at the shortest interval (at 0.4 second intervals). In this case, the number of balls going to the first specific winning opening 1000a during the three small hit games is 8 or more, and more balls can be directed to the storage channel 1231. Thus, more than two spheres can be additionally left in the storage channel 1231.

  As described above, in the present control example, the small hitting game that is generated based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and as many balls as possible It is controlled so that it is more profitable for the player to make the ball enter the one specific winning opening 1000a and leave the ball in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the ball entering the second entrance 640 does not contribute to the occurrence of the small hitting game (when the number of reserved balls is full (four in this control example)), the ball enters the second entrance 640. Is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls and from the viewpoint of increasing the number of additional balls left in the storage channel 1231 (to the second entrance 640 during a right-handed game). May be disadvantageous for the player).

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during a right-handed game.

  Here, in the present control example, when aiming to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830, at the stage where the number of reserved balls at the second entrance 640 becomes zero, more balls than two are stored. It needs to be stored in the channel 1231. That is, the ball flows into the specific area 4830 unless the number of the reserved balls is reduced based on the time when there are more balls than twice the number of the reserved balls in the second entrance 640 (identification). It is configured so that it is difficult to make it. Thereby, in addition to the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In this control example, the adjustment of the game area (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment in which a ball easily passes through the normal entrance 67 and many balls enter the second entrance 640 during a right-handed game. However, even if it is an adjustment that makes it difficult for balls to enter the second entrance 640 and many balls are likely to go to the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to reduce the loss given to the player.

  That is, for example, in the case of an adjustment in which many balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during a right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to be stored in the storage channel 1231, and while the small hit game B continues to be generated. Although it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830, the ball can pass to the specific area 4830 if the small hitting game A selected in 10% of the times occurs, so that the ball enters the specific area 4830. By allowing many balls to enter the second entrance 640 before this, it is possible to pay out many prize balls.

  In addition, for example, during the right-handed game, when the ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 and many balls are easily adjusted to the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Because it is difficult to enter, most of the right-played game balls can be allowed to enter the storage channel 1231. In addition, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on the entry into the second entrance 640 is 0. Since it is easily maintained as it is, it becomes easy to discharge two or more balls in the first small hit game. Therefore, since the ball can easily pass through the specific area 4830 early, the time-saving game can be ended early, and a period in which a loss due to the difficulty of the ball entering the second entrance 640 (ie, the time-saving game Period) can be shortened.

  In this control example, since the opening and closing plate 1300 and the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small hitting game, it is desirable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big hitting game. For example, as described in the second embodiment, a second specific winning opening 2255a different from the first specific winning opening 1000a may be set as a winning opening used in the jackpot game.

  In this case, the storage channels 1231 do not necessarily need to be merged. For example, an independent storage channel may be configured by the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, The second specific winning opening 2255a may not constitute a storage channel (discharged to a ball discharge channel).

  Note that this control example is an example of one means of the technical idea related to a gaming machine that “the player can select the timing at which the ball flows into the specific area 4830 (can aim)”, and other means for the same purpose. May be used.

  For example, a small hit (small hit A in the present control example) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is driven (excited) in a driving mode in which the ball easily flows (flows) into the specific area 4830, and the ball hardly flows into the specific area 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small hit (small hit B in the present control example) for driving (exciting) the opening / closing plate 1300 in the drive mode in which no inflow is selected, which small hit is to be executed is determined. The game is controlled so as to notify the player, and the content of the notification is grasped, and the control is performed so as to include the case where the shot ball can pass through the specific area 4830. May be selectable. According to this, it is possible to allow a “game mode in which the ball is not fired at the predetermined timing to avoid the ball from entering the specific area 4830”.

  The means of notification is not limited at all. For example, the notification may be given on the display of the third symbol display device 81 or may be given by voice.

  In the third control example, as described above, a jackpot can be obtained by passing a ball through the special area 4830. That is, it is controlled so as to be operable as a so-called “one and two type mixer”. In addition, by associating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 with the number of balls flowing down to the specific region 4830, when the ball passes through the specific region 4830, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is reduced. It is configured so that the case of 0 occurs most frequently. Next, an example of the effect of the present control example will be described.

  FIGS. 149 (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of display contents of the third symbol display device 81. The current state of the storage channel 1231, which is not actually arranged there, is schematically shown inside a circular broken line on the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, for easy understanding, the display of the main display area Dm is omitted. The display at the time when the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 148) is opened due to the small hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2 is illustrated.

  In FIGS. 149 (a) and (b), as shown in the small area Ds1, it is assumed that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is the same, while as shown in the circular broken line. , The number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is different. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 149 (a), three balls are stored, while in the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), seven balls are stored.

  In the small area Ds2, a semicircular picture, a first display Ds21 in which "sorry" is described on the left part of the semicircular picture, and a state that a predetermined profit can be obtained on the right part. A second display Ds22 described as “V” and a needle Ds23 that rotates while overlapping with the picture of the semicircle with the center axis of the semicircle as the rotation axis are displayed.

  In the small area Ds3, an appropriate display is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the game method. That is, in FIG. 149 (a), the ball is fired toward the second ball entrance 640 because the ball is fired toward the second ball entrance 640 because the player is in a state where profits are easily received. The message "Aim for the right" is displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 149 (b), as will be described later, since it is in a state where the player is likely to benefit even by suppressing the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640, A "chance of stopping" is displayed, which indicates that the firing of the aimed ball can be stopped.

  Here, a description will be given of the subsequent game progress when stopping the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in the state of FIGS. 149 (a) and 149 (b). The display content of the small area Ds2 is the content along the game progress. In order to facilitate understanding, all the lotteries corresponding to the hold display of the special symbol 2 shown in FIGS. 149 (a) and 149 (b) are all small hits, and all the small hit types are small. The description will be made on the assumption that the hit B (see FIGS. 147 (c) and 148).

  First, in the state shown in FIG. 149 (a), when the ball entry to the second ball entrance 640 is stopped, a small hit occurs as many times as the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (ie, two times). Here, as described above, when small hits occur continuously due to the number of retained balls of the special symbol 2 remaining, the upper limit number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is two. Therefore, the small hit occurs twice after the state shown in FIG. 149 (a), and the number of ejected balls from the storage channel 1231 is 2 balls and 1 ball.

  As described above, after the small hit B repeatedly occurs, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830 when three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Limited. Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 149 (a), the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) thereafter.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), when the ball entry to the second entrance 640 is stopped, a small hit occurs as many times as the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (ie, two times). . Here, as described above, when small hits occur continuously due to the number of retained balls of the special symbol 2 remaining, the upper limit number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is two. Therefore, the small hit occurs twice after the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), and the number of discharged balls from the storage channel 1231 is 2 balls, 2 balls, and 3 balls.

  As described above, after the small hit B repeatedly occurs, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830 when three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Limited. Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), the ball then passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51).

  As described above, the display of the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 is based on the reserved number of the special symbol 2 and the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, and thereafter, whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830. It has a role as notification.

  That is, when the ball cannot be expected to pass to the specific area 4830 even if the ball entry to the second ball entry port 640 is stopped, the needle Ds23 is switched to the first display Ds21 as shown in FIG. 149 (a). It is arranged at an intermediate position between the two displays Ds22.

  Note that the needle Ds23 does not need to be arranged at the accurate intermediate position, and it is difficult for the player to determine whether the needle Ds23 is inclined toward the first display Ds21 or the second display Ds22. Any arrangement is acceptable. Further, the needle Ds23 may be stopped, or may vibrate left and right.

  Further, as another case where the hand Ds23 is disposed at the intermediate position, the hand Ds23 may be inclined toward the first display Ds21. For example, when the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 is completely discharged before the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 due to the small hit of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (see FIG. 149 (a)). That is, in the case of ((the number of reserved balls × 2) ≧ the number of stored balls), the needle Ds23 is displayed so as to be inclined toward the first display Ds21 side, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is opened / closed by a small hit. When the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 may remain until after the end of the opening / closing operation of the plate 1300 (for example, in FIG. 149 (a), five or six balls are stored in the storage channel 1231). That is, in the case of ((the number of reserved balls × 2) <the number of stored balls <(the number of reserved balls × 2) +3), the hand Ds23 is positioned at an intermediate position between the first display Ds21 and the second display Ds22. May be displayed so as to be arranged.

  By doing so, as compared with the case where the hand Ds23 is arranged at the intermediate position, the time when the hand Ds23 is inclined toward the first display Ds21 is a period until the ball enters the specific area 4830. Is long (that is, there is a large number of balls to enter the second entrance 640 by an opportunity to enter the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be used as a notification that allows the player to predict the time (or the number of shot balls) required to make the ball enter the specific area 4830.

  In FIG. 149 (b), the needle Ds23 in the small area Ds2 is tilted toward the second display Ds22 as a display corresponding to a state in which the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 can pass through the specific area 4830. However, the process leading to this state is not a single one, and various modes are exemplified.

  For example, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are in the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), the hand Ds23 is tilted toward the second display Ds22. Alternatively, after a predetermined time delay (for example, after a lapse of 3 seconds or a lapse of the opening / closing time of the second ball entrance 640) from the time point determined as such, the hand Ds23 may display the second display. It may be inclined to the Ds22 side, or when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 becomes larger than the state shown in FIG. 149 (b) (when the number of spheres becomes excessive). The hand Ds23 may be inclined toward the second display Ds22.

  In the above description, the case where all the small hits of the special symbol 2 are the small hits B has been described. However, when the small hit A occurs, the display may be changed in another mode. That is, in the case of the small hit A, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 can pass through the specific area 4830 regardless of the reserved number of the special symbol 2 if the ball can be discharged. It is desirable to control the display so as to be changeable irrespective of the relationship between the reserved number of symbols 2 and the stored number of storage channels 1231.

  Here, when the small hit of the special symbol 2 is the small hit A, the timing at which the hand Ds23 switches to the display tilted toward the second display Ds22 is not limited at all. For example, if it is determined that the small hit A has occurred, the display may be switched regardless of the storage state of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 (the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 as an operation pattern of the opening and closing plate 1300). The display may be switched when it is determined that a small hit A occurs and the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 so that the ball can be discharged. Then, the display may be switched in accordance with the actual operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 due to the small hit A (the ball passes through the specific area 4830). This is equivalent to switching the display by calculating the timing backward).

  When the display is switched in accordance with the actual operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 due to the small hit A, the time required for the ball discharged from the storage area 1231 to reach the specific area 4830 is about 1 second as described above, Immediately after the hand Ds23 is switched to the second display Ds22 side, the player shifts his / her line of sight to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) at the lower right of the game area, and the ball passes through the specific area 4830. Can be visually recognized.

  In other words, the time from when the display is switched to when the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 can be defined, so that the third symbol display device 81 is focused on until the display is switched, thereby allowing the third symbol display device to be focused. The display is switched one second before the ball passes through the specific area 4830 while securing a long period for the player to pay attention to 81, thereby preventing the player from overlooking the state where the ball passes through the specific area 4830. It can be aimed at.

  This is because the ball that entered the first specific winning opening 1000a earlier than the ball that entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game being executed can pass through the specific area 4830 in the present invention. It is only possible if there are features. That is, as in a conventional gaming machine, in the case of a structure in which a ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a passes through the specific area 4830 in a small hit game being executed, a ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. There is a possibility that the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 may be affected by the timing. Therefore, most of the display on the third symbol display device 81 focuses on the specific area 4830 during a period in which the ball can pass through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, as in the present control example, when the ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a passes through the specific area 4830 in the small hit game executed before the small hit game being executed, the current execution is performed. The timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is determined by the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 (the mode of discharging the ball from the storage channel 1231) regardless of the mode of entering the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small win game in the middle. Can be specified.

  Therefore, even when the display that suggests that the player visually recognizes the specific area 4830 is executed only at the timing (moment) when the ball passes the specific area 4830, the player can display the ball that passes through the specific area 4830. The possibility of oversight can be reduced. Thereby, while extending the time to pay attention to the third symbol display device 81, the possibility that the player misses the ball passing through the specific region 4830 (the region arranged outside the third symbol display device 81) is reduced. be able to.

  If the special symbol 2 includes a miss (the value of the random number counter C3 per first is 319), the ball easily passes through the specific area 4830 by the number of the misses. This is advantageous for the player. For example, if the two special symbols 2 shown in FIG. 149 (a) are out of hold, no small hits will occur after that, so the three balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are The sphere is discharged at once, and the sphere passes through the specific area 4830.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 145 (c), the probability that the special symbol 2 will be lost when the special symbol 2 is held is the same as the probability of the jackpot. The fact that the special symbol 2 is released from holding is advantageous for the player when trying to pass the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 to the specific area 4830. In other words, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the special symbol 2 to come off to the same extent (or more) as the special symbol 2 being a big hit.

  In addition, when the fluctuation currently being executed or the special symbol 2 is held and the jackpot (the value of the first random number counter C3 is 0) is included, whether or not the ball passes the specific area 4830 is determined. Irrespective of this, since the game shifts to the jackpot game, it may be controlled so that a notification indicating the game is executed separately.

  For example, when the change currently being executed is a big hit, while the display of the small area Ds3 is maintained at “Aim at the right” (see FIG. 149 (a)), the display of the small area Ds2 is changed by the hand Ds23. It may be changed so as to be inclined toward the second display Ds22 (see FIG. 149 (b)).

  The timing at which the needle Ds23 inclines is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted from the timing of the start of the change, or may be tilted at the timing of the stop of the change.

  Further, for example, when there is a big hit in the holding of the special symbol 2, the corresponding holding may be made different from the display form of another holding. For example, the color may be changed to another color, blinked, glowing luminously, or the shape may be changed.

  In addition, as described above, the display of the small area Ds2 may be changed such that the hand Ds23 is inclined toward the second display Ds22 (see FIG. 149 (b)). Further, the change of the display mode of the suspension and the change of the display of the small area Ds2 may be executed in conjunction (combination).

  FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the relationship among the gaming state, the type of special symbol, the fluctuation time, and the type of hold. To facilitate understanding, only the special symbol 2 will be described, and the description of the special symbol 1 will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game is set to one of the normal state and the time saving state described above, and the game proceeds based on the set game state. In FIG. 150, the description is made on the assumption that only the small hit B described above is executed as the small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the normal state, when a deviated symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 minutes. Further, in the case of the time saving state, when the departure symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.1 second.

  As a result, even for the same out-of-design, the profit obtained by the player changes depending on whether it fluctuates in the time saving state or in the normal state. When the time fluctuates in the time saving state, as described above, the discharge mode of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is estimated from the number of spheres to be reserved in the special symbol 2. It acts so as to be advantageous to the player by the number of off symbols included in the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2.

  For example, the number of reserved balls is two, the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 is five, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened due to the small hit currently being executed, and the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 is performed. If there are no symbols in the hold and the remaining holds are small hits, the ball will be placed in the order of two, two and one for each small hit based on the number of balls held. The sphere will be ejected and will not pass through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, in the same case, if there is one missing symbol in the hold and the remaining hold is a small hit symbol, the small hit that occurs is one time, so two for each occurrence of the small hit, The balls are ejected in the order of three, and the balls pass through the specific area 4830.

  As another case, for example, even if the number of reserved balls is two and the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 is three, if all of the symbols have been released, the small hit currently being executed is performed. Since no small hit occurs after the end of the process, three balls are discharged collectively from the storage channel 1231, and the balls pass through the specific area 4830.

  Therefore, the inequality ((the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2−the number of retained balls in the off symbol) × 2 ≧ 3) can be used as a guide as to whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830. The player's attention to the determination of the departure symbol based on the suspension of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, the change time of the off symbol in the normal state is set to 10 minutes. Therefore, once the off symbol is determined, the next change is not started for 10 minutes even if the special symbol 2 is retained. Even if the small hit symbol is determined by the remaining reservation, the number of discharged balls from the storage channel 1231 is not limited by the small hit.

  As an example, a case will be described in which three balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of time savings is 0 in a state where the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 4, and the state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state. When the small hit symbol is determined based on all four holdings, the fluctuation time is not different from the time saving state until 10 times after the transition to the normal state, so the discharge mode of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is: The ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 because it is divided into two pieces and one piece.

  On the other hand, when the shift is made in the same manner, if the departure symbol is determined based on the first or second variably displayed hold, the execution of the subsequent small hit game is delayed. Are discharged collectively, whereby the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Unlike the fluctuation of the off symbol in the time saving state, a sufficient time elapses to discharge all the balls from the storage channel 1231 in one fluctuation, so the presence or absence of the off symbol is noticed, and the number of the off symbol is a problem. Not be.

  On the other hand, in the case where the shift is made in the same manner, when the departure symbol is determined based on the hold that is variably displayed at the third or fourth time, the ball has already been removed from the storage channel 1231 by the execution of the previous small hit game. Since the ball is discharged, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 does not pass through the specific area 4830. As described above, even when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are the same, the profit obtained by the player varies depending on which of the retaining symbols is determined. (In the present control example, it is more likely that the player who determines the departure symbol based on the hold whose change starts earlier will benefit the player).

  In other words, the player advances the game with the expectation that a symbol deviating from the suspension of the special symbol 2 after the transition to the normal state will be determined based on the suspension whose change starts earlier. Thereby, it is possible to configure a gaming characteristic in which the possibility that the player can obtain a profit by determining the off symbol based on the holding of the special symbol 2 after shifting to the normal state is increased.

  Further, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be a predetermined time (0.1 second) from the start of the normal state to 10 fluctuations, Thereafter, a random time of 5 to 10 minutes is determined. Further, in the case where the small hit symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2 in the time saving state, the fluctuation time is determined to be a predetermined time (0.1 second).

  The reason why the fluctuation time is set to a long time of 5 to 10 minutes is that the profit obtained by a player who tries to execute a game (illegal game) in which a ball is thrown into the second entrance 640 during normal times is obtained. This is to lower it. That is, it is to suppress the occurrence of illegal profit. On the other hand, in the 10 fluctuations after the transition to the normal state, the same fluctuation time as that in the time reduction state is set, because the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 immediately before the end of the time reduction state changes with the transition to the normal state. This is to prevent discharge at a stretch. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from easily protruding through the specific area 4830 when the time-saving state transitions to the normal state.

  Conversely, it may be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer regardless of the number of fluctuations after the transition to the normal state. In this case, the interval of the small hits after the shift to the normal state can be extended, and the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged at a time. It can be configured such that the ball sometimes protrudes and passes through the specific area 4830.

  In the present control example, when the ball has passed the specific area 4830 by a predetermined number of times (10 times in the present control example) after the gaming state has changed to the normal state, if the ball passes through the specific area 4830, the normal state is assumed. It is controlled so that a big hit game is started. That is, even when the ball passes the specific area 4830 after the end of the time-saving game, the big hit game may be started.

  On the other hand, if the ball has passed the specific area 4830 after the predetermined number of times (10 times in this control example) has been executed since the gaming state became the normal state, an error command is set. Is controlled. Thereby, if the player executes the game in a game mode in which the notification is ignored and the ball is launched toward the second entrance 640, even if the ball may pass through the specific area 4830, It is possible to prevent a transition to a jackpot game triggered by this.

  Further, in the normal state, when the big hit symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.1 second. In addition, in the time saving state, when the big hit symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.1 second. Thus, by stopping the fluctuation early and starting the big hit game, the timing at which the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830 can be entered during the big hit game, so the big hit symbol is determined. It is possible to prevent a plurality of jackpot games from being generated as a result of being played. In addition, by stopping the fluctuation early, it is possible to immediately shift to the production of the jackpot game, so that the player does not feel the separation of the time-saving game and the jackpot game from the time-saving game to the jackpot game. The transition to can be felt smoothly.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 178. In the first control example, the case where the operation effect of the operation button 300 is executed while the launch of the ball toward the storage channel 1231 is continued has been described. However, in the fourth control example, the operation effect of the operation button 300 is performed. Is executed during the execution of the effect of stopping the emission of the sphere toward the storage channel 1231 (the effect of preventing the excessively entering ball). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Further, the description will be given by using the variable winning device 4000 described in the fourth embodiment. First, an outline of this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152.

  FIG. 151 (a) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the jackpot game in the fourth control example, and FIG. 151 (b) shows the contents of the start round selection table Tb which defines the discharge mode at the end of the start round Rpb. FIG. 151 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the progress of the game in the effect round Rpt, and FIG. 151 (d) specifies the discharge mode at the end of the after-effect game round Rpa. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the after-production game round selection table Ta.

  FIG. 152 is a timing chart showing changes in the electrical states of the solenoid 1510, the detection sensor 1240, and the specific area 4830 and changes in the display of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example.

  As shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, in the present control example, as a round game R for executing a continuous effect toward the V winning round Rv, a start round Rpb, an effect round Rpt, and a post-effect game round Rpa are consecutive. (See FIG. 151A).

  In each round, a participation promotion effect for encouraging the player to participate is performed, and the execution of the game in accordance with the participation promotion effect has a V prize in comparison with the case of performing the game without following the participation promotion effect. In the round Rv, control is performed so that the difficulty of passing the ball through the specific area 4830 can be reduced. Therefore, the player's willingness to operate in each round can be maintained, and the player's attention to the display can be prevented from decreasing in any of the round games R.

  As shown in the start round selection table Tb (see FIG. 151 (b)), the start round Rpb is controlled so that the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the round game R can be made different, and the discharge mode is performed. Is defined in association with the jackpot type as an interval time, but details will be described later.

  When the first discharge mode Tb1 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the fifth interval time Int5 (1.2 seconds) between rounds. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly six balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the balls are fully stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the fifth interval time Int5 between rounds has elapsed, four balls remain in the storage channel 1231 (insufficient discharge occurs).

  The expression “full” in the present control example means a state in which the storage channel 1231 stores the ball until the additional ball cannot be entered (in other words, “full”). ). In other words, it indicates a state in which the maximum number of stored balls (10 in this control example) that can be defined in advance in the storage channel 1231 is stored in the storage channel 1231. In the following, unless otherwise specified, the expression “full” is used in the same sense.

  When the second discharge mode Tb2 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the fourth inter-round time interval Int4 (1.8 seconds) described in the above embodiment. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly nine balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the balls are fully stored in the storage channel 1231, one ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (insufficient discharge occurs) immediately after the elapse of the fourth interval time Int4 between rounds.

  When the third discharge mode Tb3 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds) described in the above embodiment. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly 10 balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, even when the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in a full state, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged globally after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds (insufficient discharge). Does not occur).

  The start round selection table Tb is based on the assumption that insufficient discharge of balls occurs from a state where the balls are fully stored in the storage channel 1231. For this reason, the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 may be different from the number expected for the effect depending on the game style of the player.

  For example, in the start round Rpb, when the player voluntarily performs a game in which the number of entering balls into the storage channel 1231 is fixed to six, there is no insufficient discharge regardless of the selection of the start round selection table Tb. .

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the control is performed such that the greater the number of winnings in the start round Rpb (the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231), the greater the profit obtained by the player in the subsequent effect round Rpt. You. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the ball in the start round Rpb, and to improve the willingness to execute the launch of the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (c), in the effect round Rpt, the ball entry possible period starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 and the X-th (X: An integer from 1 to 10 is entered. (See FIG. 152) The period after the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240 (after the storage channel 1231 is full with less than the specified number of balls in the round game R). During the (ball entry impossible remaining period), control is performed so as to execute an attention effect described later. At the same time, a notification indicating stoppage of the launch is executed (see FIG. 152, “stop instruction”).

  Note that examples of the attention effect include a player-participation type operation effect executed on the third symbol display device 81, information that is displayed along with the operation effect, and a display that is beneficial to the player, and the like.

  In addition, as information which suggests stop of launch, not only information which simply recommends stop of launch but various modes are illustrated. For example, a mode may be used in which the player is notified that the profit obtained by the player with respect to the predetermined winning opening is the maximum, and it is suggested that the player does not gain any more shots of the ball, or the launch is stopped. The notification mode may be the same as the notification period, or may be a mode in which the winning opening targeted is changed.

  In this manner, by specifying the timing at which the player stops firing the ball in the round game R, the firing of the ball is continued during the remaining period in which it is impossible to enter the ball, and the ball is discharged through the out port 66 without entering any winning port. Can be prevented.

  In addition, by executing a noticeable effect relating to the profit of the player at the timing of stopping the launch of the ball, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player in the remaining period in which the player cannot enter the ball. In addition, in the present control example, the effect of maintaining the concentration of the player can be enhanced by including the timing effect (operation effect) in the attention effect.

  As shown in the post-production game round selection table Ta (see FIG. 151 (d)), the post-production game round Rpa is controlled such that the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the round game R can be made different. The discharge mode is defined in association with the jackpot type as an interval time, but the details will be described later.

  If the first post-production discharge mode Ta1 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the sixth inter-round time interval Int6 (0.4 seconds). That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly two balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when three or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls remain in the storage channel 1231 (insufficient discharge occurs) immediately after the lapse of the sixth interval time Int6 between rounds.

  When the second post-production discharge mode Ta2 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between rounds. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly nine balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when ten or more balls (10 in this control example) are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls remain in the storage channel 1231 immediately after the fourth interval time Int4 between rounds has elapsed (discharge). Shortage).

  When the third post-production discharge mode Ta3 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly 10 balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, even when the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in a full state, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged globally immediately after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds (discharge). Shortage does not occur).

  If a remaining ball occurs in the storage channel 1231 immediately after the end of the post-production game round Rpa, the V winning round Rv (see FIG. 152) cannot be completed by the specified number of balls, so the V winning round Rv is specified. It does not end until the time (30 seconds in this control example) elapses. In the present control example, since the opening period Tv during which the specific area 4830 is opened is set to be shorter than the specified time of the V winning round Rv, the storage channel 1231 immediately after the end of the post-game round Rpa. When the remaining ball is generated, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, information indicating which of the discharge modes Ta1 to Ta3 is selected from the post-production game round selection table Ta is a player's attention.

  In the present control example, the mode of notification (see FIG. 152, “discrimination display”) indicating which discharge mode Ta1 to Ta3 is selected from the post-production game round selection table Ta corresponds to the attention of the performance round Rpt. In the operation effect, the control is performed differently depending on whether or not the player succeeds in the operation. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the operation effect can be improved.

  According to the post-production game round selection table Ta, since the minimum number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the post-production game round Rpa is two, the production is performed irrespective of the presence or absence of the notification and the mode of the notification. If the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 in the subsequent game round Rpa is suppressed to two or less, it is possible to prevent the V winning round Rv from being started in a state where there is a remaining ball in the storage channel 1231. Before the opening period Tv elapses, a predetermined number (ten in this control example) of balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240, thereby completing the V winning round Rv and allowing the balls to pass through the specific area 4830. it can.

  Therefore, even if there is a situation where the operation in the effect round Rpt cannot be performed (for example, even if the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) is broken), the ball is passed through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv. It is possible to enable a game in a game mode in which the game can be performed.

  On the other hand, in this game method, there is a possibility that the maximum number of prize balls obtainable in the post-production game round Rpa while maintaining a state where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv is not obtained. Then, by performing an appropriate operation in the effect round Rpt, the appropriate number of entering balls in the post-effect game round Rpa is notified.

  By performing the game in accordance with the notification, the player can easily obtain the largest prize ball that can be obtained in the post-production game round Rpa while maintaining a state where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 152, the above-described attention effect, stop instruction, and determination display are all executed in the first display example, and are all omitted in the second display example. Whether or not the attention effect, the stop instruction, and the determination display are executed is controlled so as to be determined based on the jackpot type and the winning mode of the ball, which will be described later in detail.

  The display contents of display example 1 (see FIG. 152) will be described. The display content of the display example 1 corresponds to a case where the discharge shortage occurs immediately after the end of the start round Rpb. 153 and 154 are schematic diagrams showing, in chronological order, changes in the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the start of the effect round Rpt to the start of the post-effect game round Rpa in the first display example.

  In each display content, four circles are displayed side by side below the number of rounds display. As in the case of the first control example, the circles are switched depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, similarly to the first control example, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than four, the circle at the left end is painted out, and the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is When the number is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is painted out, and when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more and less than 10, the right circle is displayed. When the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten, the circle at the right end is filled.

  153 and 154 show a common display example up to the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side). That is, in the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), five main enemies and a tank that bombards the enemies are illustrated in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A). In the eyes (display example shown in the middle left), the state where the enemy is invisible due to the smoke accompanying the shelling is shown, and in the third frame (display example shown in the lower left), the timing effect (attention The sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 for executing the operation effect in the effect (see FIG. 88 (a)) are shown.

  Switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is executed at the timing when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is full. From the second frame, since it is impossible to expect the ball to enter the storage channel 1231 (it becomes impossible), the display on the guidance display unit of the small area Ds3 is "Aim at the right" (indicating continuation of launching). The display switches from “display. Launch instruction” to “do not hit” (display indicating launch stop. Stop instruction).

  153 and 154 show different display examples from the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), and will be described in order. In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side) in FIG. 153, a state in which the timing effect (operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88 (a)) is successful is shown, and on the fifth frame (shown in the middle right side). In the display example), it is displayed that the number of remaining enemies is two, and thereafter, the production round Rpt ends, and the state after the post-production game round Rpa is started is shown in the sixth frame (shown in the lower right). Display example). In the display of the sixth frame, “insert two” is displayed on the guidance display section of the small area Ds3, so that a notification that explicitly suggests the number of entering balls is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in the case where the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88 (a)) is successful, the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) should be made to enter the ball in the game round Rpa after the effect. Since the display indicating the number of balls (discrimination display) is explicitly notified, the player can play the game without hesitation.

  In the present control example, if a larger number of balls than the explicitly notified number are caused to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231), the player is disadvantaged (the specified number in the V winning round Rv (the number of balls)). In the control example, 10) balls are prevented from entering the detection sensor 1240).

  On the other hand, in the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side) of FIG. 154, a state in which the timing effect (operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88 (a)) has failed is shown. Display example), it is displayed that the smoke is still fine and the remaining number of enemies is unknown, and then the rendering round Rpt ends, and the state after the post-production gaming round Rpa starts is 6 frames. This is illustrated in the eyes (display example shown on the lower right). In the display of the sixth frame, a notification indicating that the number of entered balls is unknown is displayed by displaying “insert?” In the guidance display section of the small area Ds3.

  As shown in FIG. 154, when the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88 (a)) fails, the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) should be entered in the post-effect game round Rpa. The display indicating the number of balls (discrimination display) is a mode in which the number is not explicitly notified, and the number of balls to be entered is unknown, so the player is wondering how many balls to fire to the detection sensor 1240. The game will be played.

  Here, when a ball in the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) is made to enter a larger number of balls than the number of balls notified when the timing effect (operation effect) is successful in the game round Rpa after the effect, the player Since it is controlled so as to be disadvantaged, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a game in a game mode for causing a large number of balls to enter the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, as will be described later, since the lower limit is two, the number of balls that enter the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) in the post-production game round Rpa is reduced to two, Can avoid disadvantages. Therefore, the display of “OK up to two” as the number of balls that the player does not suffer disadvantage is displayed in the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower part of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A)). ).

  FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the attention effect operation difficulty switching table and the discrimination display switching table. As shown in FIG. 155, in the present control example, the length of the noticeable effect and the difficulty of the operation effect change according to the entry timing of the Xth ball (the timing at which the storage channel 1231 becomes full). Is controlled.

  That is, if the X-th ball entry timing is before 15 seconds from the start of the effect round Rpt, “long moving image” is selected as the noticeable effect. In this long moving image, the display pointer 719 moves from end to end of the sub-display area Ds4 over 10 seconds, so that the operation button 300 can be easily operated when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717. (Easy difficulty).

  If the X-th ball entry timing is from 15 seconds after the start of the effect round Rpt to 25 seconds after the start, “short moving image” is selected as the noticeable effect. In this short moving image, the display pointer 719 moves from end to end of the sub-display area Ds4 over 5 seconds, so that it is difficult to operate the operation button 300 when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717. The moving speed of the display pointer 719 is twice as high as the difficulty level “easy”. The difficulty level is “difficult”.

  Here, the movement mode of the display pointer 719 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, after disappearing at a predetermined position while moving, it may suddenly reappear at another position, may hide the display pointer in a predetermined section, or increase the speed by a predetermined section from the predetermined position while moving. The vehicle may be moved so as to move instantaneously (may slide), or may move so as to change direction once at a predetermined position during movement and change direction again at another position.

  In any case, since the time from the start of the attention effect to the period when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 is determined in advance, at the time of the timing effect, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the start of the attention effect. When the operation of the operation button 300 is detected at the timing when the time until the period when the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display section 717 is detected, it is determined that the operation timing is appropriate. (See S4763 in FIG. 176).

  When the X-th ball entry timing is from 25 seconds after the start of the effect round Rpt to 30 seconds after the start, “still image” is selected as the target effect. In this still image, "press!" Is largely displayed on the entire screen (not shown). Then, in the present control example, when the operation of the operation button 300 is detected at the same time when the still image is displayed, it is determined that the operation is successful.

  That is, in order to succeed in the operation effect, it is required to match the timing of entering the ball to the detection sensor 1240 with the operation timing, but the display timing of the “still image” is transmitted to the detection sensor 1240 due to control. Since the ball is slightly delayed from the entering ball timing, the timing at which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 is checked, and the operation button 300 is operated by slightly delaying the operation timing instead of completely adjusting the operation timing to the timing. It is required to operate the operation button 300 at the moment when it is confirmed that has been executed (operation difficulty level “extremely difficult”).

  As described above, the earlier the timing at which the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231), the easier it is to achieve a successful timing effect. The player's motivation to shorten the period up to the winning can be improved.

  As shown in the discrimination display switching table, if the timing effect is successful, the number explicit display (see the fifth and sixth frames in FIG. 153) is executed, while if the timing effect fails, the number unknown display (5 and 6 frames in FIG. 154) is displayed. Is executed).

  Here, the entry timing of the X-th ball tends to be earlier as the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the effect round Rpt is larger. In this control example, the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the effect round Rpt is linked to the jackpot type and changes according to the selection of the start round selection table Tb, so the jackpot type (see FIG. 160 (b)) ) (I.e., due to factors other than the manner of launching the ball and the manner of falling in the effect round Rpt), the possibility of making the Xth ball entry timing earlier can be changed.

  The start timing of the noted effect changes depending on the manner in which the player's ball is fired during the round game R. Therefore, if the mode of the attention effect is uniform, there is a possibility that the V winning round Rv may end in the middle of the attention effect depending on the game mode (the mode of launching the ball or the mode of entering the detection sensor 1240). On the other hand, in the present control example, the attention effect to be executed is updated over time.

  Accordingly, in the present control example, the noted effect can be ended before the end of the effect round Rpt, regardless of the timing at which the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, even if important information is displayed at the end of the noted effect, the effect round Rpt does not end before the display is performed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the noted effect can be improved.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which timing effects with different degrees of difficulty are performed once depending on the timing at which the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). It is not limited.

  For example, a timing effect is performed a plurality of times from the start of the effect round Rpt to the Xth ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231), and the number of successes in the timing effect (success probability ), The difficulty of the timing effect executed after the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) may be changed. For example, the greater the number of successes (the higher the probability of success), the lower the difficulty of the timing effect executed after the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). Is also good.

  In this case, if the timing sensor does not participate in the timing effect until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) or fails, the timing effect having a higher importance (for example, FIGS. 153 and 154). (See the third and fourth frames.) Since the difficulty level increases and it is difficult to succeed, the player pays attention to the timing effect even before the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). It is possible to make it difficult to notice the flowing state of the sphere inside and around the storage channel 1231. In this case, the player shoots a ball regardless of the number of balls inside the storage channel 1231, so that a ball that does not fit into the storage channel 1231 is discharged from the out port 66, resulting in a ball loss for the player. .

  That is, for the player, the timing effect is repeatedly executed while preparing for a certain ball loss, and the game is performed so as to reduce the difficulty of the timing effect having a high importance, or the storage channel is set so that the ball loss does not occur. By paying attention to the flow of the ball inside and around 1231 and adjusting the firing of the ball, it is possible to play or select so as to be prepared for the difficulty of timing production with high importance to increase. Can be prevented from becoming sluggish.

  In addition, the earlier the timing at which the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240, the lower the difficulty of the timing effect is made (control is performed so that the difficulty is determined by multiplying the conditions). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped when the timing effect is performed until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, in this case, the case where the player is forced to make the selection as described above is divided into the operation of the timing effect and the timing of entering the storage channel 1231 as in the present control example, according to the jackpot type. Thus, a case where the player is not forced to make a selection (a case where the game may be executed in order as informed) may be provided. In addition, the type of the jackpot game being executed may be notified so that the player knows which jackpot type corresponds to the type, or may be notified so that it is difficult to understand.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated about the profit which a player can obtain by a timing effect. For example, an unusual image (premier image) of a character that cannot be normally seen may be the benefit displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, at the start of the effect round Rpt, a plurality of cloud-like figures are displayed so as to hide at least a part of the character, and the timing until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 The display may be switched so that the cloud-shaped figure disappears little by little and the character can be visually recognized each time the effect is successful.

  In this case, important information of the character (for example, when the face is displayed, the character is displayed in a portion that becomes visible when the timing effect after the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 succeeds) Information that indicates whether the character is a normal character or a special character that indicates a jackpot), or information that is important for future games (such as the state of the game being executed or information on the number of balls that have been fired up to the present) Is drawn, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be increased.

  In addition, for example, the display corresponding to the desired number of entering balls (for example, the display of the sixth frame in FIG. 153) described in this control example is set so that the accuracy is about 50% (accuracy of less than 100%). , The number to be displayed may be selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from hindering a free game, and it is possible to configure the display effect of the third symbol display device 81 as a display (display for effect) having little effect on the number of payouts.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a method of making the accuracy of the correct answer less than 100%. For example, a plurality of numbers may be displayed in advance, and whether a "+" or "-" is inserted between them may be unknown (the four arithmetic operations are expected by the player), or a well-known sequence of numbers may be used. The number of the predetermined digit (for example, the number of digits below the decimal point of the pi) may be hidden and displayed as "the number of hidden numbers", or the number may be displayed only for a moment. You may let it.

  Next, the display contents of display example 2 (see FIG. 152) will be described with reference to FIG. The display content of the display example 2 corresponds to a case where shortage of discharge has not occurred immediately after the end of the start round Rpb (global discharge has been performed). FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the start of the effect round Rpt to the start of the post-effect game round Rpa in the display example 2.

  In FIG. 156, in the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), as in FIGS. 153 and 154, the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A) shows five enemies and A bombarding tank is shown. In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), the state where several enemies (two in FIG. 156) have fallen down by bombardment is shown, and in the third frame (display example shown in the middle right), The state after the enemy has fallen is illustrated, then the state after the production round Rpt is completed and the game round Rpa after the production is started is shown in the fourth frame (a display example shown on the lower right side).

  The switching of the display is executed based on the number of detections of the detection sensor 1240. That is, the display is switched such that every time two balls are detected, one enemy falls down. That is, the display of the second frame is a state where four balls have passed through the detection sensor 1240 in the effect round Rpt, and the display of the third frame is a state where ten balls have passed the detection sensor 1240 in the effect round Rpt. Each corresponds.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 156, the display of the small area Ds3 on the guidance display unit is maintained as "Aim at the right" (display indicating that continuation of launching. Launching instruction). Therefore, the player can proceed with the jackpot game without hesitation while continuing to launch.

  Next, the switching of the display of the V winning round Rv will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. The display of the V winning round Rv is switched to a different display depending on the jackpot type, which will be described later, but the display mode to be started is a common basic effect regardless of the jackpot type. That is, various factors that change depending on the jackpot type (the presence / absence of a remaining ball in the storage channel 1231, the round digestion time that changes accordingly, the presence / absence of ball discharge from the storage channel 1231 during the round game R, and the like) are determined. Control for switching the display is executed.

  FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the basic effect of the V winning round Rv. The basic effect is a display mode started at the same time as the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the first frame of the basic effect (display example shown on the upper left), in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87 (a)), a treasure chest hidden in a dent and five rocks (number 1 And tanks bombarding the rock. Until ten seconds have elapsed since the start of the V winning round Rv, the display of the first frame is maintained.

  In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), a situation is illustrated in which rocks are broken and a plurality of rocks (numbered 2 are added) fall into the formed space. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 157, three rocks fall after this. Switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is executed at a timing when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), a situation is illustrated in which the five rocks that have fallen (number 2 is added) accumulate again and block the depression. The display of the third frame is maintained for 10 seconds after the lapse of 10 seconds from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), a situation is illustrated in which rocks are broken and a plurality of rocks (numbered 3 are added) fall into the formed space. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 157, three rocks fall after this. Switching from the display of the third frame to the display of the fourth frame is executed at a timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the fifth frame (display example shown on the right side in the middle), a situation is illustrated in which the five rocks that have fallen (number 3 is added) accumulate again and close the depression. The display of the fifth frame is maintained for 10 seconds after 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), the treasure chest is enlarged, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in the present control example, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game). "Sorry" is displayed to indicate that no profit was obtained.

  Switching from the display of the fifth frame to the display of the sixth frame is executed at a timing when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv, and the display is maintained even during the interval immediately thereafter. Then, in the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A) after the end of the interval period, the display is switched to the prepared ending time display.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the display example of the present control example, the display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A) is performed for the second and third frames, the fourth and fifth frames, and It is common except for the number added to the rock. This makes it possible to reduce the number of images required to execute moving image display over the V winning round Rv.

  FIG. 158 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the V winning round Rv.

  In the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), a display similar to the basic effect described above in the first frame in FIG. 157 is illustrated. That is, in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87 (a)), a treasure chest hidden in the dent, five rocks (numbered 1 is added) closing the dent, and a tank that bombards the rock are illustrated.

  In the second frame (display example shown on the left side in the middle), a state where the rock is crushed is illustrated. In addition, the rock does not fall into the formed space, and the state where the dent is opened is maintained. Switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is performed by determining that a specified number (ten in the present control example) of the balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Be executed. That is, the display of the second frame is switched to the end timing of the V winning round Rv, and the display is maintained even immediately after the interval time.

  Note that the basic effect described with reference to FIG. 157 is continued until the display is switched to the second frame. It is not determined that a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) within a specified time (30 seconds in this control example) of the V winning round Rv. In this case, the display does not switch to the second frame, but switches from the basic effect to the display of the ending time ED.

  In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left), the treasure chest is expanded and opened, and the player gains a predetermined profit (in this control example, the ball passes through the specific area 4830, thereby completing the game after the big hit game ends). The letter “V” is displayed, indicating that the profit of shifting to the probability state has been obtained. For the purpose of adjusting to the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830, the display is switched to the third frame 1.0 seconds after the display is switched to the second frame.

  The display of the third frame is maintained until the end of the interval time, and when the display shifts to the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A), the display is switched to the display for the ending time prepared in advance.

  As described above, the timing of switching to the display of the second frame is unknown in the display example shown in FIG. 158, but the display of the third frame can be described as a display example in which the interval time is reliably reached.

  FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the V winning round Rv.

  In the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), a display similar to the basic effect described above in the first frame in FIG. 157 is illustrated. That is, in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87 (a)), a treasure chest hidden in the dent, five rocks (numbered 1 is added) closing the dent, and a tank that bombards the rock are illustrated.

  In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), a situation is illustrated in which rocks are broken and a plurality of rocks (numbered 2 are added) fall into the formed space. In FIG. 159, only two rocks are shown, but three rocks fall after this. Switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is performed in a short period of time when the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is closed (in this control example, less than 0.2 seconds; specifically, 0). (1 second).

  Note that the basic effect described with reference to FIG. 157 is continued until the display is switched to the second frame. Here, as will be described later, in the present control example, the first timing of switching to the closed state for a short time is before 10 seconds from the start of the V winning round Rv, so the second frame in FIG. Is switched before the switching timing in the basic effect (the switching timing to the display of the second frame in FIG. 157). Therefore, display switching without a sense of incongruity can be performed.

  Further, the timing at which the display is switched to the closed state for a short time is approximated to the timing at which the display is switched in the basic effect (for example, after 10 seconds or 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv, etc.), and it is performed at present. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the displayed display is the display of the basic effect or the display of the display example shown in FIG. 159. Thereby, during the V winning round Rv, a predetermined profit (in this control example, a profit of shifting to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game by passing the ball through the specific area 4830) can be obtained for the player. The game can be executed with the expectation that the game may be performed.

  In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), a situation is illustrated in which the five rocks that have fallen (number 2 is added) accumulate again and block the depression. The display of the third frame is maintained until the next time when the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is switched to the closed state. When the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the closed state for a short time while the display of the third frame is continued, the display is switched again to the display of the second frame (the number assigned to the rock increases by 1). That is, each time the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the closed state for a short time, the display of the second frame and the continuous display of the third frame are repeatedly switched.

  In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), the character “Moshiya” is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87A). In FIG. 159, switching to the display of the fourth frame is switched from the display of the first frame or the third frame, and is controlled so as not to be switched from the display of the second frame.

  The switching to the display of the fourth frame is performed when the opening and closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is switched to the closed state for a long time (in this control example, a time of 0.2 seconds or more, specifically, 0.2 seconds). It is executed according to.

  In the fifth frame (display example shown on the middle right), a state in which the rock is broken is shown, as in the second frame in FIG. 158. In addition, the rock does not fall into the formed space, and the state where the dent is opened is maintained. In addition, a letter "V" flying toward the treasure chest is displayed. The character “V” is displayed so as to fly at a speed reaching the treasure chest one second after the timing of switching to the fourth frame (the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830).

  In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), the treasure chest is expanded and opened, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in the present control example, the ball passes through the specific area 4830, so that after the big hit game is over, The letter “V” is displayed, indicating that the profit of shifting to the probability state has been obtained. After the character “V” reaches the treasure box in the display of the fifth frame, the display is continuously shifted to the display of the sixth frame.

  Then, the display of the sixth frame is maintained until the end of the interval time, and when shifting to the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A), the display is switched to the display for the ending time prepared in advance.

  As described above, in the display example shown in FIG. 159, the timing at which the display is switched to the display of the second frame or the display of the fourth frame is defined by the operation pattern. Irrespective of the setting.

  This display is particularly effective in a jackpot type in which the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is determined regardless of the winning mode of the V winning round Rv (that is, determined based on the previous winning mode) as described later. Becomes That is, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 and the timing at which the treasure chest is opened can be matched, so that the effect can be improved.

  In the display examples described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159, the display example in which the basic effect is continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 157 is compared with the display examples shown in FIGS. Profits are lower. In other words, in the V winning round game Rv, the player continues the game while expecting the display to be switched from the basic effect.

  On the other hand, since the basic effect is displayed until the display is switched in common in FIGS. 157 to 159, even if the display is switched in any of the display examples in FIGS. It can be expected that the display can be switched from the basic effect. Therefore, even if the V winning round Rv ends as a result of the lapse of the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) (the round game R takes a relatively long time), the player can play the game. You can prevent getting tired of it.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c described above, a first hit type selection table 202b3, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3, At least an opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is provided.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b3 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b3. The first hit type selection table 202b3 is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type. It is stipulated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning and the first hit type selection table 202b3 are compared, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected. In FIG. 160 (b), the contents of the post-production game round selection table Ta, the start round selection table Tb, and the V winning prize round Rv whose contents are switched according to the selected jackpot type are also described.

  In the present control example, by providing a variation in the combination of the post-production game round selection table Ta, the start round selection table Tb, and the V winning round Rv, the player can determine the jackpot type during the jackpot game and expect to obtain The aim is to prevent the profits that can be made from being grasped in advance.

  That is, in the distribution of the special symbol 1, the first difference that can be grasped by the player is the interval time (difference in the start round selection table Tb) between the effect round Rpt and the post-effect game round Rpa. In the present control example, regardless of whether the first discharge mode Tb1 or the second discharge mode Tb2 is selected as the interval time, the distribution of the post-production game round selection table Ta and the V winning round Rv are similarly determined for each of them. The first hit type selection table 202b3 is configured to occur (with the same probability).

  Similarly, even if the player grasps the difference in the interval time immediately before the V winning round Rv (the after-production game round selection table Ta), whether the subsequent V winning round Rv is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player? Does not change, so that the player can execute the game while predicting the jackpot type until the V winning round Rv is being executed. As a result, the player can be drawn into the game as compared with a gaming machine whose jackpot type can be quickly grasped, and the concentration of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the "big hit Ua" is defined in association with the special symbol 1 when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9" ( (See 202b31 in FIG. 160 (b)). The “big hit Ua” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hits Ua", so if a special symbol 1 has been hit by a lottery, "big hits Ua" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  In the “big hit Ua”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to a high probability state (ST 80 times) of 80 time savings after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830, the specified number (with this control example) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv In this case, it is required to end the round game R by causing 10) balls to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the first discharge mode Ta1 (0. In the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, all the balls are discharged when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is configured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv. Therefore, in the big hit game of “big hit Ua”, the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is adjusted. In many cases, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 if the sphere cannot be formed.

  For the special symbol 1, “big hit Ub” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 24” (see 202b32 in FIG. 160B). ). This “big hit Ub” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit Ub”, so if a special pattern 1 lottery wins, “big hit Ub” is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  In the “big hit Ub”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds. When the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161 (a)) that is long closed during the round game R, the specified number (the number of pieces) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv is determined. In the control example, even if 10 balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv). Regardless of that, when the ball is closed for a long time during the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) so that the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to. Therefore, even if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not determined whether the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830.

  In addition, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of "25 to 34" in association with "big hit Va" (see 202b33 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This “big hit Va” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hits Va". Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the special symbol 1 lottery, the "big hits Va" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  In the “big hit Va”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state (ST 80 times) of 80 time savings after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  Since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 34 (see FIG. 161 (a))) in which only a short closing is performed during the round game R, V is required to pass the ball through the specific area 4830. In the winning round Rv, it is required that a specified number (ten in the present control example) of balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) within the opening period Tv to end the round game R. Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the first discharge mode Ta1 (0. In the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, all the balls are discharged when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is configured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv. Therefore, in the big hit game of “big hit Va”, the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is adjusted. In many cases, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 if the sphere cannot be formed.

  Also, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of "35 to 49", and the "big hit Vb" is associated and defined (see 202b34 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This "big hit Vb" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 15 counter values that are "big hits Vb", so if the special symbol 1 has a lottery, the "big hits Vb" is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  In the “big hit Vb”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit. If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161 (a)) that is long closed during the round game R, the specified number (the number of pieces) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv is determined. In the control example, even if 10 balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv). Regardless of that, when the ball is closed for a long time during the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) so that the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to. Therefore, even if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not determined whether the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830.

  For the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of “50 to 59”, and “big hit Wa” is associated and defined (see 202b35 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This "big hit Wa" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit Wa", so "big hit Wa" is determined when a big hit occurs in the special symbol 1 lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  In the “big hit Wa”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit. If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830, the specified number (with this control example) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv In this case, it is required to end the round game R by causing 10) balls to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the first discharge mode Ta1 (0. In the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, all the balls are discharged when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is configured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv. Therefore, in the big hit game of “big hit Wa”, the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is adjusted. In many cases, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 if the sphere cannot be formed.

  Also, for the special symbol 1, “big hit Wb” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C 2 in the range of “60 to 74” (see 202 b 36 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This “big hit Wb” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit Wb”, so if a special pattern 1 lottery wins, “big hit Wb” is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  In the “big hit Wb”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161 (a)) that is long closed during the round game R, the specified number (the number of pieces) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv is determined. In the control example, even if 10 balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv). Regardless of that, when the ball is closed for a long time during the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) so that the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to. Therefore, even if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not determined whether the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830.

  For the special symbol 1, “big hit Ya” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “75 to 84” (see 202b37 in FIG. 160B). ). The “big hit Ya” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit Ya", so if the special symbol 1 has a lottery, "big hit Ya" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  In the "big hit Ya", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  Since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 34 (see FIG. 161 (a))) in which only a short closing is performed during the round game R, V is required to pass the ball through the specific area 4830. In the winning round Rv, it is required that a specified number (ten in the present control example) of balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) within the opening period Tv to end the round game R. Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the first discharge mode Ta1 (0. In the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, all the balls are discharged when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is configured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv. Therefore, in the big hit game of “big hit Ya”, the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is adjusted. In many cases, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 if the sphere cannot be formed.

  For the special symbol 1, “big hit Yb” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “85 to 99” (see 202b38 in FIG. 160 (b)). ). This “big hit Yb” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 15 counter values that are "big hit Yb", so if a special pattern 1 lottery wins, "big hit Yb" is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  In the “big hit Yb”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit, but the specific area If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161 (a)) that is long closed during the round game R, the specified number (the number of pieces) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv is determined. In the control example, even if 10 balls are made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv). Regardless of that, when the ball is closed for a long time during the round game R, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) so that the ball passes through the specific area 4830. be able to. Therefore, even if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not determined whether the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit q” in a range of “0 to 99” (entire range). This “big hit q” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since the counter value of “big hit q” is 100, “big hit q” is determined when the special symbol 2 has a big hit. The proportion is 100%.

  In the “big hit q”, six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the state shifts to the high probability state of 80 time savings (ST 80 times) after the end of the big hit. If the ball does not pass through 4830, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

  In addition, since the V winning round Rv is an open pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to let the ball pass through the specific area 4830, the specified number (with this control example) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv In this case, it is required to end the round game R by causing 10) balls to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the ball cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

  In addition, since the discharge mode in the immediately preceding interval time is the third discharge mode Ta3 after the production, the V winning round regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (even if the ball is full). Rv can be started in a state where no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but in the special jackpot game of the special symbol 2, regardless of the number of balls in the post-production game round Rpa immediately before the V winning round Rv. Since the ball can be passed to the specific area 4830, the player can proceed with the jackpot game without stopping the launch of the ball (without adjusting the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231). . Therefore, the big hit of the special symbol 2 can progress the big hit game more smoothly than the big hit of the special symbol 1.

  As described above, in the present control example, the state is shifted to the high-probability state in which the player who wins in the special symbol 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the case in which the special symbol 1 lottery wins. It is configured to be able to smoothly advance the game for. Therefore, once the extended play mode (the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol time reduction state) is set, the ball is made to enter the second entrance 640 by right-handing, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed. Is easily executed and the jackpot game is easily repeated, and the digestion speed of the jackpot game can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for one purpose of shifting to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the detailed contents of the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e3. The opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) are stored for each scenario type, and are stored in the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3. The open / close plate 1300 is operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game using the information that has been set.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3, operation scenarios 31 to 34 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 31 is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 31, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls. Control is performed so as to return to the state (the state in which the open / close plate 1300 is closed).

  The operation scenario 32 is an operation scenario of a maximum of 10 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set in the open / close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 32, even before the elapse of 10 seconds, the detection sensor 1240 detects the specified number of balls (10 in this control example), and the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  The operation scenario 33 includes, as the scenario contents, “open (open state) 9.0 seconds → closed (closed state, short-closed) 0.1 seconds → open (open state) 5.0 seconds in the open / close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6). → Closed (closed state, long-closed) 0.2 seconds → Opened (open state) 4.0 seconds → Closed (closed state, long-closed) 0.2 seconds → Opened (open state) 4.0 seconds → closed (Closed state, long-closed) 0.2 seconds loop "is set, and the operation scenario is a maximum of 30 seconds.

  In the operation scenario 33, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in the present control example), and the operation scenario of the open / close plate 1300 ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In the operation scenario 33, unlike the above-described operation scenarios 31 and 32, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state, long-closed), so that the storage channel is opened. The ball remaining at 1231 can be discharged. Therefore, the sphere can be allowed to pass through the specific area 4830, and the sphere can be newly entered into the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) by eliminating the fullness of the storage channel 1231.

  That is, in a situation where the round game R is started from the state where the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is full, and the round game R is continued, the round game R wastes the remaining time. In order to suppress the sphere, it is desirable to stop firing the sphere. On the other hand, this playability gives the player time, which may reduce the concentration of the player and reduce the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in the operation scenario 33, even when the storage channel 1231 is full, each time the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (closed state, long-closed), one ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 one by one. Therefore, a new ball can be made to enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). In this case, it is preferable to restart the launch of an appropriate number of balls from the aspect of the number of payout prize balls and the rapid digestion of the round game R. That is, according to the present control example, even after the storage channel 1231 is full, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (closed state, long-closed) to enter the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). Since the ball can be restarted, it is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and concentration of the ball to fire.

  As described above, the closing of the opening and closing plate 1300 is related to the profit of the player in two points, that is, the possibility of the ball passing into the specific area 4830 and the new entry of the ball into the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Therefore, the player's attention to the closing (operation) of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be improved.

  The operation scenario 34 includes, as the scenario contents, “open (open state) 9.0 seconds → closed (closed state, short-closed) 0.1 seconds → open (open state) 5.1 seconds in the open / close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6). → Closed (closed, short-closed) 0.1 seconds → Opened (opened) 4.1 seconds → Closed (closed, short-closed) 0.1 seconds → Opened (opened) 4.1 seconds → closed (Closed state, short-closed) 0.1 seconds is a loop, and the operation scenario is a maximum of 30 seconds.

  In the operation scenario 34, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 ends when a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 34, unlike the above-described operation scenario 33, closing after the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened (open state) is configured only by closing (closed state, short closing). Therefore, as in the operation scenario 33, the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the open state (open state), but the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are not discharged. Therefore, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 at the timing of closing (closed state, short closing) of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the fullness of the storage channel 1231 cannot be eliminated.

  That is, in the operation scenario 34, while maintaining the effect of the operation scenario 33 in which attention is paid to the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, even if the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed, the profit obtained by the player does not change. It can be maintained (if the storage channel 1231 is full, it remains full after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, and the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830).

  The closing timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 is common to the operation scenario 33 and the operation scenario 34, and the difference in the operation length is 0.1 second, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated in either the operation scenario 33 or the operation scenario 34. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the player is operating.

  Therefore, when the player resumes firing the ball in accordance with the closing of the opening / closing plate 1300, additional profit can be obtained as expected (in the case of the operation scenario 33), and most of the fired ball becomes a prize ball. The case where they are not linked (in the case of the operation scenario 34) can be configured.

  In this way, by storing the operation scenarios separately based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, the profit given to the player by the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 currently being executed can be reduced by the main control device. 110 can be easily determined.

  FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate operation scenario table 202f3. The opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is provided with information indicating which of the predetermined scenario types corresponds to which jackpot type and which round game R.

  The MPU of the main control device 110 reads information corresponding to the contents specified in the opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 from the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 and executes opening / closing when controlling the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. The plate 1300 is moving.

  The opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is configured so that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on a combination of the jackpot type and the number of the round game R. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the open / close plate 1300 is movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

<Main controller flow>
Next, details of the RAM 203 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 162, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a described in the first control example (see FIG. 101). Symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probable change counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, exit flag 203k, remaining ball Timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p, closing flag 203q, count start flag 203qa, closing counter 203r, V flag 203s, V winning effective counter 203t, notification counter 203u, winning number counter 203w, discharging number counter 203x , Addition of the other memory area 203Z, has not reached flag 203Qb, winning after counter 203Wa, at least.

  The unreached flag 203qb is a flag for determining whether or not a ball is disposed at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. ON and OFF are switched based on the relationship with the time required to flow down. When the unreached flag 203qb is on, a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231, and when the unreached flag 203qb is off, no sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

  The post-winning counter 203wa is a counter that measures the time since the last ball entered the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) in a predetermined round (in this control example, the V winning round Rv). That is, it is set to be reset each time a ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) is detected.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the ROM 222 has at least the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a described above in the first control example and the open / close plate operation scenario 222b3.

  The opening / closing plate operation scenario 222b3 is provided for the operation status of the opening / closing plate 1300 controlled by the main control device 110 on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area in which the information stored in the opened / closed plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 and the opened / closed plate operation scenario table 202f3 is stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 in this control example. The RAM 223 stores a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c, and a normal symbol retaining ball number in the same manner as described above in the first control example. Counter 223d, fluctuation start flag 223e, stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probable change state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, an operation flag 223p, an effect temporary storage area 223r, a first operation effect flag 223wa, a second operation effect flag 223wb, a first input flag 223wc, a second input flag 223wd, Effect executing flag 223x and pressing period information storage area 2 3y, and at least a memory area 223z. In addition, the attention effect timer 223ga, the effect switch flag 223gb, the V winning round timer 223gc, the skip flag 223gd, the unreached effect flag 223qb, At least a first effect start flag 223ya, a second effect start flag 223yb, a third effect start flag 223yc, and a fourth effect start flag 223yd are provided.

  The attention effect timer 223ga is a timer for measuring the elapse of a predetermined round (in this control example, the effect round Rpt), and is used for setting a display effect to be executed.

  The effect switching flag 223gb is a flag for preventing a malfunction that is updated to another effect after a display effect with an operation effect, which is executed in a predetermined round (in the present control example, the effect round Rpt), is set. It is. If the effect switch flag 223gb is on, it indicates that the display effect to be executed is determined, and if the effect switch flag 223gb is off, it indicates that the display effect to be executed is not determined.

  The V winning round timer 223gc is a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the V winning round Rv.

  The skip flag 223gd is a flag for preventing the display from being erroneously updated after the display is updated.

  The unreached effect flag 223qb is a flag that is controlled to be turned on and off in conjunction with the on / off switching of the unreached flag 203qb in the RAM 203. Therefore, when the unreached effect flag 223qb is on, a ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231, and when the unreached flag 223qb is off, no ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. .

  The first effect start flag 223ya to the fourth effect start flag 223yd are on / off switching controlled in conjunction with the progress of the big hit game.

  The first effect start flag 223ya is a flag that is switched according to the progress status of the jackpot game, and when turned on, before the end of the start round Rpb (the third round in the present control example) from the start of the jackpot game (effect round Rpt). If it is off, it indicates that it is after the end of the start round Rpb (after the start of the effect round Rpt).

  The second effect start flag 223yb is a flag that can be switched in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game. If the second effect start flag 223yb is on, after the start round Rpb (the third round in the present control example) ends (after the start of the effect round Rpt). This indicates before the end of the effect round Rpt (in the present control example, the fourth round) (before the start of the game round Rv after the effect), and if OFF, before the end of the start round Rpb (before the start of the effect round Rpt) ) Or after the end of the effect round Rpt (after the start of the after-effect game round Rpa).

  The third effect start flag 223yc is a flag that can be switched according to the progress state of the jackpot game, and if ON, after the end of the effect round Rpt (the fourth round in the present control example) (after the start of the post-effect game round Rpa). ) Indicates before the end of the game round Rpa after the effect (the fifth round in the present control example) (before the start of the V winning round Rv), and if OFF, before the end of the effect round Rpt (the game after the effect). This is before the start of the round Rpa) or after the end of the post-production game round Rpa (after the start of the V winning round Rv).

  The fourth effect start flag 223yd is a flag that can be switched in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game, and if ON, after the end of the post-effect game round Rpa (the fifth round in the present control example) (start of the V winning round Rv). After), before the end of the V winning round Rv (the sixth round in the present control example) (before the start of the ending time), and when off, before the end of the post-production game round Rpa (the V winning round). Rv), or after the end of the V winning round Rv (after the end of the ending time).

<Main controller flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a description will be given of a main process in the fourth control example executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process described above in the first control example. FIG. 164 is a flowchart illustrating a main process in the fourth control example executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process. In this control example, the jackpot control process S1004 is changed to S4004, the V winning process S1009 is changed to S4009, and the storage control process is different from the main process (FIG. 117) of the first control example. This is common except that S1008 is deleted. Therefore, the same portions as those in the main process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Only different portions will be described.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S4004) in this control example. The jackpot control process (S4004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 164). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed or the first specification is performed. This is processing for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 1000a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

  In the jackpot control process (S4004) in the present control example, the notification process (S1111) is omitted from the jackpot control process (S1004) in the first control example (the role of the audio lamp control device 113 whose role will be described later). 169), and is the same as the jackpot control process (S1004) except that the winning process (S1112) is changed to the winning process (S4112). Therefore, the same portions as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the winning process (S4112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S4112) in the fourth control example. This prize processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 164), similarly to the prize processing (FIG. 123) in the first control example, and the first specific winning opening ( This is a process for closing the (large open port) 1000a and setting condition values (set values and initial values) for determining whether or not the specific area 4830 has passed normally after the close.

  The prize-winning process (S4112) in the fourth control example is the same as the prize-winning process (S1112) in the first control example, after executing the process of S1278 and then executing the set value selection setting process (S4290). The only difference is that the set value is set (S4297), and the rest is the same. Therefore, the set value selection setting process (S4290) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the setting value selection setting processing (S4290). In the set value selection setting process (S4290), a process of selecting a range of the set value set in the V winning effective counter 203t according to the situation is executed.

  First, the outline of the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example will be described. The setting value selection setting process (S4290) is a process provided to cope with a difference from the first control example.

  First, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example in which the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 is limited at the start of the round game R, the discharge from the storage channel 1231 in the middle of the V winning round Rv is performed. Since the discharge of the balls occurs at predetermined intervals, the balls may be arranged in the storage channel 1231 in a separated state at the end of the round game R. In other words, the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is started before the sphere that has passed through the detection sensor 1240 collides with the sphere staying downstream of the storage channel 1231 (a complete ball is formed). Could be done.

  Also, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, when a ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the middle of the V winning round Rv, regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, A predetermined number (one in this control example) of balls is ejected.

  That is, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, it is necessary to determine the set value in consideration of the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage channel 1231 and the timing at which the closing is performed. The process of selecting a value is the set value selection setting process (S4290).

  Next, the details of the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example will be described. In the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example, it is determined in the process of S4290 whether or not the game is closed at the end of the round game R (S4291). If the closing is not the closing at the end of the round game R (S4291: No), it is determined from the operation scenario currently being executed whether the closing is a long closing (0.2 second closing) (S4292).

  In the process of S4292, when it is determined that the ball is not long-closed (S4292: No), the ball is closed shortly (closed for 0.1 second), so that the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the present processing is ended, and the flow returns to the winning processing S4112.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4292, when it is determined that the ball is long-closed (S4292: Yes), in order to determine whether or not the ball is parked at the lower end of the storage channel 1231, the lowermost stream remaining in the storage channel 1231 is determined. It is determined whether or not 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the sphere passed through the detection sensor 1240 (S4293).

  This determination is made, for example, by providing a plurality of (for example, 10) counters for starting time counting when a ball entering the detection sensor 1240 is detected, similarly to the counter 203wa after winning, and before the time counting, the detection sensor 1240 is provided. Based on the ball entering, one of the counters is controlled to start timing (i.e., since the timing is sequentially started, the value to be counted will be different for all counters), and the timing is started. Thereafter, the counter is controlled so as to reset the clock every time 10 balls enter the detection sensor 1240. On this premise, the value of the counter corresponding to the most downstream sphere among the spheres remaining inside the storage channel 1231 that is grasped from the detection timing of the detection sensor 1240 and the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 based on the operation scenario It is executed by confirming.

  In the process of S4293, when it is determined that 2.0 seconds or more have elapsed (S4293: No), the lower limit of the numerical range described in the first control example is set as the number of stored balls = 1, and the range of the set value is selected. I do. That is, a range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × 1) seconds or more (S4294), and the process shifts to S4299. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4293, when it is determined that 2.0 seconds have not elapsed (S4293: Yes), the non-arrival flag 203qb is set to ON (S4295), the process ends, and the winning process S4112 is executed. Return.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4291 that the game has been closed at the end of the round game R (S4291: Yes), the value of the post-winning counter 203wa is set to a predetermined determination formula (2- (number of stored items) × 0.2). ) Is determined (S4296).

  The process of S4296 is a process for determining whether the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 forms a ball with the whole sphere, or whether there is a part that is distant even in part.

  In the process of S4296, when it is determined that the value of the post-winning counter 203wa is not smaller than a predetermined determination formula (2- (storage number) × 0.2) (S4296: No), the inside of the storage channel 1231 is determined. Indicates that the sphere constitutes an open ball in the entire sphere, so that the range of the set value is selected in the numerical range described in the first control example. That is, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) or more (S4297), and the process proceeds to S4299. Transition.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4296, if it is determined that the value of the post-winning counter 203wa is smaller than a predetermined determination formula (2- (number of stored items) × 0.2) (S4296: Yes), the storage channel Since there is an interval (separation) between the balls inside the 1231, it is inappropriate to select a range of the set value from the stored number. Therefore, the lower limit of the set value is set as the time when the ball that last passed the detection sensor 1240 reaches the specific area 4830. That is, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected in a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3- (3-value of post-prize counter 203wa) = value of post-prize counter 203wa) or more. Then, the flow shifts to the processing of S4299.

  In the above equation, (3-value of the post-winning counter 203wa) is a period during which the ball passes through the storage channel 1231 (2.0 seconds in the present control example) and the communication path 4810 from the outlet 1150. From “3” which is the sum of the period during which the ball passes (1.0 second in the present control example), the current position of the ball that has finally passed the detection sensor 1240 is subtracted by the counter 203wa after winning, and the ball is connected to the communication path 4810. Is a part where a period until the specified area 4830 is reached after passing through is calculated.

  In the process of S4299, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t selected in any of S4294, S4297 or S4298 is set. Thereafter, the present processing is ended, and the flow returns to the winning processing S4112.

  Returning to FIG. In the present control example, the V winning process (S4009) is changed from the first control example. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example. This V winning process (S4009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 164), similarly to the V winning process (FIG. 129) in the first control example, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. This is a process for controlling to monitor the flow of the ball after the ball has flown.

  The V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example is different from the V winning process (S1009) in the first control example in the process in S1501 after the count start flag 203qa is determined to be off. Only the difference is (S1501: No), and the others are the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

  First, an outline of changes in the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example from the first control example will be described. First, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, the opening / closing plate 1300 is controlled to be able to be closed (shortly closed) in such a manner that the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 does not occur. The response is. Second, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, a case may occur in which a ball can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the V winning round Rv. At this time, the ball is discharged. Whether this is determined by the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage channel 1231 (whether or not the spheres are arranged at the lower end) is dealt with. Third, since the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed during the V winning round Rv and the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed at the end of the V winning round Rv, a different predetermined value is set to the closing counter 203r. It corresponds to.

  Next, the details of the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example will be described. In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). If it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is ON (S1501: Yes), the subsequent processing is the same as in the first control example, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether the close flag 203q is on (S1502).

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the close flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), the process proceeds to S4526.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is ON (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether the current closing is a closing (short closing) that does not discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 (S4521).

  In the process of S4521, if it is determined that the closing is a closing (short closing) that does not discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 (S4521: Yes), the closing flag 203q is set to off (S4522), and the process of S4526 is performed. Move to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4521, the closing is not a closing (short closing) that does not discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 (that is, the closing is a closing that discharges the ball (long closing or closing at the end of the round game R)). ) (S4521: No), it is determined whether the closing is a closing (long closing) in the middle of the V winning round Rv (S4523).

  In the process of S4523, when it is determined that the closing is a closing (long closing) in the middle of the V winning round Rv (S4523: Yes), it is determined whether the unreached flag 203qb is on (S4524).

  In the process of S4524, when it is determined that the unreached flag 203qb is ON, it indicates that the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the unreached flag 203qb is set to OFF (S4525), and the closing flag is set. 203q is set to off (S4522), and the flow shifts to the process of S4526.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4523 that the closing is the closing at the end of the V winning round Rv (S4523: No), and in the processing of S4524, the unreached flag 203qb is not on (that is, off). When it is determined that there is (YES) (S4524: No), the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S4528), a different numerical value is selected from the closed contents, and a predetermined value of the closed counter 203r is set (S4529). finish.

  In the process of S4529, a numerical value according to the closing time is selected. That is, 0.1 second is selected when the closing is short, 0.2 second when the closing is long, and the interval time immediately after the closing at the end of the round game R is selected. In the present control example, if normal, the process of S4529 is not executed at the time of short closing, but if the process of S4529 is executed due to some problem (such as generation of noise), the above-described process is performed. Then, a numerical value is selected for the closing counter 203r.

  In the process of S4526, it is determined whether the sphere has passed the specific area 4830 (S4526). Since S4526 is a process executed when the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 in a normal game. Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S4526 that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 (S4526: Yes), it is expected that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 illegally, and an error command is set (S4527). Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the sphere did not pass through the specific area 4830 in the processing of S4526 (S4526: No), the present processing ends.

  Note that the control after the error command is set is the same as the content described in the first control example (the processing of S1515 in etc.), and thus the description is omitted here.

<Control of audio ramp control device>
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, in the present control example, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the main processing in the present control example is different from the main processing in the first control example in that the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) is omitted and the command determination processing (S4111). Is different from that of the first control example in that it is mainly different from the first embodiment in that the effect is changed and the effect switching process S4701 is added after the storage state monitoring process S2113. Are omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  Next, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination processing (S4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  The command determination process (S4111) is different from the command determination process (S2111) in the first control example only in that the hit-related process (S2221) is changed to the hit-related process 2 (S4221). Are identical.

  FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 2 (S4221). The hit-related processing 2 (S4221) is different from the hit-related processing (S2221) in the first control example in that the effect start flag setting processing (S4301) is executed after the round number command is received. The point that the bonus jackpot effect processing (S2505) shifted after receiving is changed to the processing of S4505 (processing of setting a display round number command corresponding to the received round number), and after the jackpot ending command is received The only difference is that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set off (S4509), and the other points are the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first control example, and description thereof is omitted.

  Every time the round number command is received in the processing of S2503, the effect start flag setting processing (S4301) is executed, the display round number command is set in the processing of S4505, and the command output processing (S2102, see FIG. 169) is performed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this output, the display control device 114 can grasp the number of rounds to be executed next.

  The effect start flag setting process (S4301) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an effect start flag setting process (S4301) in the fourth control example. This effect start flag setting process (S4301) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 169), and sets a flag for the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the contents of the currently executed round game R. It is.

  In the effect start flag setting process (S4301) in the fourth control example, it is determined whether the started round is round 1 in the process of S4301 (S4302).

  If it is determined that the started round is the round 1 (S4302: Yes), the first effect start flag 223ya is set to ON (S4303), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the started round is not the round 1 (S4302: No), it is determined whether the started round is the effect round Rpt (round 4 in the present control example) (S4304).

  In the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the started round is the production round Rpt (S4304: Yes), the first production start flag 223ya is set to off (S4305), and the second production start flag 223yb is set to on. (S4306), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the started round is not the rendering round Rpt (S4304: No), it is determined whether the started round is the post-production gaming round Rpa (round 5 in the present control example). (S4307).

  In the process of S4307, when it is determined that the started round is the post-production game round Rpa (S4307: Yes), the second production start flag 223yb is set off (S4308), and the third production start flag 223yc is turned on. This is set (S4309), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4307, if it is determined that the started round is not the post-production game round Rpa (S4307: No), it is determined whether the started round is the V winning round Rv (round 6 in the present control example). (S4310).

  In the processing of S4310, when it is determined that the started round is the V winning round Rv (S4310: Yes), the third effect start flag 223yc is set to off (S4311), and the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to on. (S4312), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4310, when it is determined that the started round is not the V winning round Rv (S4310: No), the process ends as it is. After receiving the jackpot ending command (S2508), the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to off in the process of S4509. As described above, in the present control example, the currently executing round can be determined based on the states of the first effect start flag 223ya to the fourth effect start flag 223yd.

  Next, the effect switching process (S4701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the effect switching process (S4701). This effect switching process (S4701) is a process of a main process (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing an effect that changes according to the progress of the jackpot game. is there.

  In addition, since this processing includes processing for detecting a winning state of a ball to the first variable winning device 4000, the main processing is configured to be executed in a short cycle (within 1 ms). Thus, the setting for detecting the winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 4000 can be performed without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 173, in the effect switching process, in the process of S4701, it is determined whether the second effect start flag 223yb is on (S4702). If the second effect start flag 223yb is on (S4702: Yes), the effect round display mode setting process (S4703) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, the effect round display mode setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (S4703). FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect round display mode setting process (S4703). In the effect round display mode setting process (S4703), first, it is determined whether the process is the first process after the start of the jackpot (S4720). If the process is the first process (S4720: Yes), the basic effect prepared in advance Is displayed (S4721), and if it is not the first processing (S4720: No), the processing of S4721 is skipped, and the detection sensor is started at the start of the currently performed effect round Rpt. It is determined whether or not a value obtained by subtracting the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the 1240 is 1 or more (S4722).

  In addition, in the process of S4720, various methods can be considered as a method of determining that it is the first time. For example, a process of determining whether the value of the predetermined counter is 1 or more is provided as the process of S4720, a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4720 and S4721, and a predetermined counter is provided at the start of the jackpot game. May be set to 1.

  Note that, in the present control example, the basic effect in the process of S4721 is the display shown in the first frame (display example on the upper left side) in FIGS. 153, 154, and 156.

  In the process of S4722, when it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S4722: No), the effect is produced. This means that the storage channel 1231 was empty at the start of the round Rpt (there was no remaining ball), and the display number erasure is set so that the number display is erased in the game round Rpa after production. The command is set (S4723), and the process ends.

  When the display number erasure command is set, in this control example, a display in which the notification of the number is intentionally omitted (see the display example of the fourth frame (lower right side) in FIG. 156) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4722, when it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 is 1 or more (S4722: Yes), at the start of the effect round Rpt Means that a residual ball has occurred in the storage channel 1231, and the flow shifts to S4724.

  In S4724, it is determined whether or not the effect switching flag 223gb is on (S4724). If it is determined that the effect switching flag 223gb is not on (ie, off) (S4724: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. Is determined (S4725).

  In the process of S4725, if it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S4725: No), the attention effect timer 223ga is set to 1 in order to check the lapse of time from the start of the effect round Rpt. The processing is added and updated (S4726), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4725 that the storage upper limit flag 223m is ON (S4725: Yes), the attention effect setting processing (S4727) is executed.

  Here, the attention effect setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 175 (S4727). FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the attention effect setting process (S4727). In the attention effect setting process (S4727), first, the difference between the specified time of the effect round Rpt (30 seconds in this control example) and the value of the attention effect timer 223ga is set as a determination numerical value (S4740). It is determined whether the determination value is included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741).

  In the process of S4741, if it is determined that the determination value is included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741: Yes), the attention effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155) is used as the attention effect. , “Long moving image” (easy) is selected, and the present process is terminated (S4742).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4741 that the determination value is not included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741: No), the determination value is included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds. It is determined whether it is (S4743).

  In the process of S4743, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4743: Yes), the attention effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155) is used as the attention effect. , “Short video” (difficult) is selected, and the present process ends (S4744).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4743, when it is determined that the determination value is not included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4743: No), it means that the determination value is less than 5 seconds. Therefore, “still image” (extremely difficult) is selected as the noted effect from the noted effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155), and the process ends (S4745).

  Returning to FIG. After the processing of S4727, the display effect command for display of the selected target effect is set (S4728), the effect switch flag 223gb is set to ON, and the present process ends (S4729).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4724 that the effect switching flag 223gb is off (S4724: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S4730).

  In the process of S4730, if it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S4730: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4730, if it is determined that the operation flag 223p is not on (that is, it is off) (S4730: No), an operation determination process is executed, and this process ends (S4731).

  Here, the operation determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (S4731). FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation determination processing (S4731). In the operation determination process (S4731), first, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the operation waiting period (S4761).

  If it is determined in the process of S4761 that the operation is in the operation waiting period (before the start of the interval between rounds in this control example) (S4761: Yes), it is determined whether the operation of the operation button 300 is detected (S4762). ).

  If it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 has not been detected in the processing of S4762 (S4762: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4762 that the operation of the operation button 300 has been detected (S4762: Yes), it is determined whether the operation timing is appropriate (S4763). Here, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not the operation timing is appropriate based on whether or not the operation is performed (appropriate) or not (inappropriate) at the timing when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display unit 717 ( 153 and 154).

  If it is determined that the operation timing is appropriate (S4763: Yes), display commands for a success display (see the display example of the fourth frame in FIG. 153) and an explicit display (see the display example of the fifth frame in FIG. 153) Is set (S4764), and a number explicit display (refer to the display example of the sixth frame in FIG. 153, see FIG. 155 in the present control example) is set as the display of the next round (game round Rpa after production) (S4765). The operation flag 223p is set to ON, and the process ends (S4766).

  Note that the number of displayed in the explicit display depends on the mode of the post-production game round selection table Ta, and thus indirectly corresponds to the jackpot type (see FIG. 160 (b)). That is, in the big hit type of the first discharge mode Ta1 (0.4 seconds) after the effect, since the number of balls to be discharged is two, "2" is displayed when the explicit display is displayed. . In addition, in the case of the big hit type in the second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) after the effect, since the number of balls to be discharged is nine, "9" is displayed when the explicit display is displayed. In addition, in the case of the big hit type of the third discharge mode Ta3 (2.0 seconds) after the effect, since the number of balls to be discharged is ten, "10" is displayed when the explicit display is displayed.

  In addition, when the player is likely to obtain an excessive profit by notifying an appropriate number every time in the explicit display, the probability that the above-described number is displayed as the explicit display may be reduced (the reliability of the number). May be reduced). Thereby, the explicit display can be made a display for reference only.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4763, when it is determined that the operation timing is inappropriate (S4763: No), a failure display (see the display example of the fourth frame in FIG. 154) and an unknown display (the fifth frame in FIG. 154) A display command is set (refer to a display example) (S4767), and the number unknown display is displayed as a display of the next round (a game round Rpa after production Rpa) (in this control example, refer to the display example of the sixth frame in FIG. 154, see FIG. 155). ) Is set (S4768), the operation flag 223p is set to ON, and the process ends (S4766).

  If it is determined in the process of S4761 that the operation is not in the operation waiting period (S4761: No), it means that the operation button 300 has not been operated until the start of the interval period, and the process proceeds to S4768. Then, the process of S4766 is executed, and this process ends.

  In the above control flow, for the sake of convenience, control is performed so that the operation flag 223p is set to ON even when the operation button 300 is not operated (when the operation waiting period has elapsed). Since this is after the time during which the player can operate the 300, the player does not suffer any disadvantage by this control.

  The effect switching flag 223gb and the operation flag 223p set in the effect round Rpt are turned off at the timing when the currently executing big hit game ends, and the attention effect timer 223ga ends the currently executing big hit game. Reset at the timing.

  Returning to FIG. 173, the description will be continued. In the process of S4702, when the second effect start flag 223yb is not on (that is, off) (S4702: No), it is determined whether the third effect start flag 223yc is on (S4704).

  In the processing of S4704, when it is determined that the third production start flag 223yc is ON (S4704: Yes), a display command based on the setting in the immediately preceding round game R (production round Rpt) is set, and this processing is performed. The process ends (S4705).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4704, when it is determined that the third effect start flag 223yc is not on (that is, it is off) (S4704: No), it is determined whether the fourth effect start flag 223yd is on (S4706). ).

  In the process of S4706, when it is determined that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is on (S4706: Yes), the V display setting process (S4707) is executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4706, if it is determined that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4706: No), the process ends as it is.

  The V display setting process (S4707) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V display setting processing (S4707). In the V display setting processing (S4707), first, it is determined whether the current processing is the first processing after starting the current big hit (S4781), and when it is determined that the processing is the first processing (S4782: Yes), the display for display prepared in advance is performed. The basic effect command is set (S4782), the loading of the display material is set (S4783), and the flow shifts to the process of S4784.

  In the process of S4781, various methods are conceivable as a method of determining that it is the first time. For example, a process of determining whether the value of a predetermined counter is 1 or more is provided as the process of S4781, a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4781 and S4782, and a predetermined counter is provided at the start of the big hit game. May be set to 1.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4781 that the process is not the first process (S4781: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S4784.

  In addition, in the present control example, a predetermined moving image is displayed on the third symbol display device by the setting of the display basic effect command in the processing of S4782 (the table of the first frame which is a common display in FIGS. 157 to 159). See example).

  The necessary materials in the processing of S4783 include various display materials (for example, display of broken rock (second frame in FIG. 158) that can be switched at a predetermined timing from the basic effect (see FIG. 157), (The third frame in FIG. 158), the display for V preparation (the fourth frame and the fifth frame in FIG. 159), and the like.

  In the processing of S4784, the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is incremented by 1 and updated (S4784), and the opening / closing pattern of the V winning round Rv is determined from the type of big hit (S4785). That is, in the V winning round Rv, it is determined whether or not the big hit type in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed halfway.

  If it is determined in the V winning round Rv that the jackpot type does not cause the closing of the opening / closing plate 1300 (S4785: Yes), it is determined whether a ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv. Is done.

  Various methods are used to determine whether a ball remains inside the storage channel 1231. In this control example, the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (no remaining ball) Yes).

  If it is determined that a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv (S4786: Yes), the V winning round Rv ends after a specified time (30 seconds in this control example). That is, the sphere cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the basic effect is continued (S4787), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4786 that there is no remaining ball in the storage channel 1231 (there is no sky) (S4786: No), it is determined whether the skip flag 223gd is on (S4788).

  If it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4788: No), 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the V winning round Rv based on the value of the V winning round timer 223gc. It is determined whether it is (S4789).

  Note that the numerical value of 5 seconds is set as the number of seconds in which the probability of winning the specified number (10 in this control example) is low, and can be changed according to the situation.

  If it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the V winning round Rv (S4789: Yes), a display command for displaying broken rocks (see the display example of the second frame in FIG. 158) is set (S4790). , To S4792.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv (S4789: No), it is determined whether a specified number (ten in this control example) of the balls have entered the detection sensor 1240. It is determined (S4791).

  If it is determined in step S4791 that a specified number of balls have hit the detection sensor 1240 (S4791: Yes), the flow shifts to steps S4790 and S4792.

  In the process of S4792, the skip flag 223gd is set to ON (S4792), and the flow shifts to the process of S4793. Also, in the process of S4788, when it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is ON (S4788: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S4793.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4791 that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4791: No), the flow directly proceeds to the processing of S4793.

  In the process of S4793, it is determined whether the sphere has passed the specific area 4830 (S4793). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4793: Yes), a display command for displaying that a V prize has been given (see the display example of the third frame in FIG. 158 in this control example) is issued. This is set, and this processing ends (S4794). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4793 that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S4793: No), this processing ends as it is.

  The sphere detected to pass through the specific area 4830 in the process of S4793 is a sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 after the start of the V winning round Rv. That is, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the V winning round Rv passes through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4785, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 closes halfway in the V winning round Rv (S4785: No), the display switching process for halfway closing (S4795) is executed, and this process is executed. To end.

  With reference to FIG. 178, the halfway display switching process (S4795) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the halfway display switching process (S4795). In the halfway display switching process (S4795), first, it is determined whether the skip flag 223gd is on (S4801).

  If it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), then it is determined whether the specified number (ten in this control example) of the balls have entered the detection sensor 1240. It is determined (S4802).

  When it is determined that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4802: No), the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is referred to, and the ball is short-closed (0.1 seconds in the present control example). It is determined whether or not the timing is such that the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 (closed state) (S4803).

  Note that the timing is determined so that the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the operation timing of the open / close plate 1300 in the currently executing big hit game using the open / close plate operation scenario 222b3 (see FIG. 163) provided in the ROM 222. Therefore, it can be easily performed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4803 that it is the timing at which the short closing occurs (S4803: Yes), a gassing effect display command is set (S4804), and the processing shifts to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4803 that it is not the timing when the short closing will occur (S4803: No), the process directly proceeds to the processing of S4805.

  In the present control example, the display example of the second frame and the third frame shown in FIG. 159 is such that the display changes from the immediately preceding display and then returns to the original display. Is done.

  In the processing of S4805, referring to the value of the V prize round timer 223gc, it is a timing at which a long close (close for 0.2 seconds in this control example, a close for discharging the ball from the storage channel 1231) occurs. It is determined whether it is (S4805). If it is determined that it is not the time when the long closing will occur (S4805: No), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the time when the long closing occurs (S4805: Yes), it is determined whether or not a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806). In the present control example, if the unreached effect flag 223qb is on, it is determined that a ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. If the unreached effect flag 223qb is off, a ball is positioned at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. Can be determined that is not arranged.

  If it is determined that no ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806: No), no ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231, so that a gash effect display command is set and the process is terminated ( S4807). Note that, as the gaseous effect, an effect similar to the above-described effect is executed in the processing of S4804.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4806 that a ball is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806: Yes), a V preparation effect display command is set (S4808), and the skipping flag 223gd is turned on. Is set (S4809), and the flow shifts to the process in S4812.

  If it is determined in step S4801 that the skip flag 223gd is ON (S4801: Yes), the process directly proceeds to step S4812. Also, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the specified number (ten in this control example) of the balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4810.

  In the process of S4810, when it is determined that the process is the first process (S4810: Yes), the process proceeds to S4811 and then to S4812. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the first process (S4810: No), the process directly proceeds to S4812.

  Note that in the process of S4810, various methods can be considered as a method of determining that it is the first time. For example, a process of determining whether the value of a predetermined counter is 1 or more is provided as the process of S4810, a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4810 and S4811, and a predetermined counter is set at the start of the jackpot game. May be set to 1.

  In the process of S4811, a display command for displaying a broken rock (see the display example of the second frame in FIG. 158) is set (S4811), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S4812. In the process of S4812, it is determined whether the sphere has passed the specific area 4830 (S4812). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4812: Yes), a display notifying that a V winning has been made (in the present control example, the display example of the third frame in FIG. 158 or the sixth frame in FIG. 159) A display command to perform the display process is set, and the process ends (S4813). On the other hand, in the process of S4812, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S4812: No), the process ends as it is.

  In this control example, the V preparation effect is a display that informs that a V prize has been won as shown in the display example of the fourth and fifth frames in FIG. 159 (see the display example of the sixth frame in FIG. 159). ) Means a display (a display that gives a feeling of foresight).

  The sphere detected to pass through the specific area 4830 in the process of S4812 is not limited to the sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 after the start of the V winning round Rv, and the storage channel at the start of the V winning round Rv. The ball may remain on the 1231. That is, by providing the processing of S4812, it is felt that the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv is not an existence that gives the player only a disappointing impression, but may lead to a profit. Can be present.

  Note that the skip flag 223gd set in the V display setting process (S4707) is set to off at the timing when the currently executing big hit game ends, and the updated V winning round timer 223gc sets the currently executing big hit game. Is reset at the timing when is ended.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the ball that has reached the open / close plate 1300 rolls rightward and passes through the detection sensor 1240 has been described. However, the first variable winning device 12000 in the twelfth embodiment has It is configured to be symmetrical, and the ball rolling leftward is directed to the detection sensor 1240. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments (including the parts that have only changed symmetrically) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 179 is a front view of the game board 13 of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, the first variable winning device 12000 is different from the third embodiment in that the opening / closing plate 12300 is a longer plate (in the present embodiment, the width in the long direction is 135 [mm]). ), And additionally includes a drop delay plate 12250 having a shape similar to that of the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment.

  The opening / closing plate 12300 has the same configuration as the opening / closing plate 1300 described in each of the above embodiments, except that the plate portion 12310 is long in the axial direction. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The main difference between the fall delay plate 12250 and the third embodiment is that the configuration of the fall delay plate 12250 differs for each section in the left-right direction. Here, the drop delay plate 12250 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 180 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 12200. As shown in FIG. 180, the drop delay plate 12250 is arranged on the front side of the movement trajectory of the opening / closing plate 12300 so as to avoid interference with the opening / closing plate 12300, is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 12300, and An extension plate portion 3251 which is a linear plate portion parallel to and extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and connects between the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210. And a rolling arc portion 12252 having an upper surface formed of a concave curved shape.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the extension plate portion 3251 is configured to be longer than in the third embodiment, but the other shapes are the same and are configured for the same purpose. The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  Supplementary to the opposing surface 3251a, in the present embodiment, the distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 12110 of the main body member 12100 is set at the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (the right side in FIG. 179). Is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere at a portion arranged vertically below, and is switched to be equal to or more than the radius of the sphere at an intermediate position (the middle position in the horizontal direction in FIG. 179), and is arranged at the most downstream side (left side in FIG. 179). In a portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere, the radius is equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. That is, as compared to the third embodiment, the inclination of the facing surface 3251a with respect to the thin plate member 12110 is gentler.

  The rolling arc portion 12252 is divided into three equal parts along the longitudinal direction of the drop delay plate 12250. That is, it mainly includes a first rolling portion 12252a, a second rolling portion 12252b, and a third rolling portion 12252c from the side far from the detection sensor 1240.

  The first rolling portion 12252a, like the rolling arc portion 3252 in the third embodiment, has a shape in which a tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the facing surface 3251a extends in the front-rear direction. At the same time, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 12200 has a shape that smoothly intersects with the thin plate member 1210 (a tangential line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

  The radius of curvature of the first rolling portion 12252a as viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, resistance when the ball rolls on the first rolling portion 12252a in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  In the second rolling portion 12252b, the upper end of the upstream end surface (the end surface farther from the detection sensor 1240) is connected to the upper end of the downstream end surface (the end surface closer to the detection sensor 1240) of the first rolling portion 12252a. At the same position, the radius of curvature when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of curvature of the first rolling portion 12252a.

  Therefore, the resistance when the ball rolls on the second rolling portion 12252b in the front-rear direction increases as compared with the resistance when the ball rolls on the first rolling portion 12252a in the front-rear direction. That is, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction may be increased in the rolling in the second rolling portion 12252b as compared with the rolling in the first rolling portion 12251a. it can.

  In the third rolling portion 12252c, the upper end of the upstream end surface (the end surface farther from the detection sensor 1240) is connected to the upper end portion of the downstream end surface (the end surface closer to the detection sensor 1240) of the second rolling portion 12252b. The second rolling portion 12252b is disposed at the same position and has a radius of curvature that is larger than the radius of curvature of the second rolling portion 12252b.

  Therefore, the resistance when the ball rolls on the third rolling portion 12252c in the front-rear direction increases as compared with the resistance when the ball rolls on the second rolling portion 12252b in the front-rear direction. That is, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction may be increased in the rolling in the third rolling portion 12252c as compared with the rolling in the second rolling portion 12251b. it can.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the degree of deceleration when the ball rolls in the front-back direction on the rolling arc portion 12252 can be changed depending on the left-right position of the ball. That is, when there are a plurality of balls flowing down on the rolling arc portion 12252 at the same speed, when these balls are similarly rolled back and forth, compared with the deceleration degree of the balls arranged on the upstream side In addition, the degree of deceleration of the ball disposed on the downstream side can be increased. Therefore, the interval between a plurality of spheres can be reduced, and by rolling back and forth a plurality of times, the interval between the spheres can be eliminated (composed of a continuous ball).

  With reference to FIG. 181, an example of a flow-down mode of a sphere flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a change in arrangement of spheres flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300.

  In FIG. 181, a schematic graph is shown as an example of the arrangement of spheres flowing down the horizontal axis and the vertical axis flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300. The vertical axis indicates the rolling start point of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 at the intersection of the lower axis with the horizontal axis, and the rolling end point of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 (detection sensor). 1240). The horizontal axis is graduated at equal intervals, similar to the ball firing interval. That is, in the present control example, since the firing interval of the ball is 0.6 seconds, the interval between the scales on the horizontal axis corresponds to 0.6 seconds.

  FIG. 181 illustrates curves connecting the arrangement of spheres over time. For easy understanding, the flow of the sphere will be described as the flow due to the gravitational acceleration. Therefore, when a load other than gravity is not applied to the sphere, the curve shown in FIG. 181 is a quadratic curve, and this curve will be described as a basic curve BPF.

  Here, in the twelfth embodiment, after the ball reaches the open / close plate 12300 maintained in the open state, the open / close plate 12300 rolls on the upper surface of the open / close plate 12300 maintained in the open state to detect the detection sensor. It is configured so that it takes about 4 seconds to enter 1240. Therefore, the basic curve BPF is illustrated as a quadratic curve that reaches the upper end position of the vertical axis (the position of the detection sensor 1240) after 4 seconds. Note that, in order to facilitate understanding of the mechanism that forms the open ball, the description will be made assuming that the flow velocity of the ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 is 0.

  The sphere flowing down the opening / closing plate 12300 basically flows down along the curve BPF. Therefore, when the open / close plate 12300 maintains the open state, the interval at which the ball reaches the open / close plate 12300 and the interval at which the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 are the same. On the other hand, when the state of the open / close plate 12300 changes between the closed state and the open state, the ball may be decelerated and the interval may change.

  FIG. 181 illustrates an example in which the open / close plate 12300 changes state between the closed state and the open state (corresponding to halfway closing in operation scenarios 51 and 52 described later) at closing timings TC1 to TC3. The closing timings TC1 to TC3 are illustrated as straight lines parallel to the vertical axis. The interval between the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing TC3 is illustrated at one second intervals in order to facilitate understanding of operation scenarios 51 and 52 described later.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the degree of deceleration changes depending on the arrangement of the balls. That is, whether the ball is disposed above the first rolling portion 12252a, whether the ball is disposed above the second rolling portion 12252b, or whether the ball is disposed above the third rolling portion 12252c. The degree of deceleration changes depending on whether or not the vehicle is moving.

  In FIG. 181, the change in the degree will be described by a change in a curve immediately after the closing timings TC1 to TC3. That is, when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state in which the ball is arranged above the first rolling portion 12252a, it is assumed that the subsequent flow-down state of the ball is not affected (the degree of deceleration is small). When the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state where the ball is arranged above the second rolling portion 12252b, the subsequent ball flow-down mode changes to the middle position HC of the curve BPF (one second after the flow-down start). ) (The degree of deceleration is medium), and when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state where the ball is arranged above the third rolling portion 12252c, the subsequent ball Is to be restarted from the start position SC of the curve BPF (the degree of deceleration is large).

  The falling trajectory of the sphere shown by the first curve BP1 is the first closing timing TC1 on the way down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300, but since it is arranged above the first rolling part 12252a, the influence is affected. It is a trajectory when the flow continues without receiving.

  On the other hand, the falling trajectory of the ball shown by the second curve BP2 is the first closing timing TC1 on the way down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300, which is the same as the ball shown by the first curve BP1. Since it is located above the second rolling portion 12252b, the trajectory is decelerated, and the trajectory from the middle position HC resumes the downward flow.

  Since the first curve BP1 and the second curve BP2 intersect at the intersection position UC before reaching the upper end of the vertical axis, the sphere indicated by the first curve BP1 and the sphere indicated by the second curve BP2 are connected. Is configured.

  The falling trajectory of the sphere indicated by the third curve is the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing on the way down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300, and is located above the third rolling portion 12252c. , A trajectory from which flow-down is resumed as a trajectory from the start position SC.

  The falling trajectory of the sphere shown by the fourth curve is the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing on the way down the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300, and the first rolling portion at the second closing timing TC2. Since it was located above the 12252a, the Chinese continued without being affected, and at the time of the third closing timing TC3, it was located above the second rolling part 12252b, so that it was decelerated and moved as a trajectory from the intermediate position HC. This is the trajectory where flow has resumed.

  Since the third curve BP3 and the fourth curve BP4 intersect at the intersection position UC before reaching the upper end of the vertical axis, the sphere indicated by the third curve BP3 and the sphere indicated by the fourth curve BP4 are connected. Is configured.

  In a fifth control example described below, the twelfth embodiment is used. In the fifth control example, a description will be given of a case in which during the round game R, a timing at which an over-win is easily made and a timing at which it is not so are configured. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 executes notification relating to the timing.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183. FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c, a first hit type selection table 202b5, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5, At least an opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is provided.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b5 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b5. The first hit type selection table 202b5 is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type. It is stipulated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b5, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big win in a lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 39”. Is associated with the jackpot Ta (see 202b51 in FIG. 182 (b)).

  If the big hit Ta is reached, a big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 12000 (see FIG. 23A). In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  A large hit Tb is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “40 to 79” (see 202b52 in FIG. 182 (b)).

  In the case of the jackpot Tb, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in a 25th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 12000 described later. In this case, in addition to the payout of approximately 2250 prize balls, the player can receive a prize ball for an excess prize with a high probability.

  The jackpot Tc is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99” (see 202b53 in FIG. 182 (b)).

  When the jackpot Tc is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern of the first variable prize device 12000 (see FIG. 23C). In this case, in addition to the payout of the prize balls obtained by subtracting the unacquirable portion due to the influence of the remaining balls from about 2250 balls, the player receives the payout of some prize balls due to the balls winning in the general winning opening 63. be able to.

  Here, the similar operation pattern means that the second interval time Int2 between rounds is arranged after the tenth round in the third operation pattern, and the second interval time Int2 is arranged between predetermined rounds. Corresponding. In this control example, the second interval time Int2 is arranged at least between the fifth round and the sixth round.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”. The jackpot r is defined in association with it (see 202b54 in FIG. 182 (b)).

  When the big hit r is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the 25th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 12000, which will be described later, as in the case of the big hit Tb. In this case, in addition to the payout of approximately 2250 prize balls, the player can receive a prize ball for an excess prize with a high probability.

  As described above, when the special symbol 2 is won by a lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), a jackpot game that can receive a prize ball for an excess winning with a high probability is executed. You. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to win the jackpot by the special symbol 2 lottery.

  Next, in order to describe the configuration of the twenty-fifth operation pattern, the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and the opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5. The open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 is an area in which an operation scenario used for operation control of the open / close plate 12300 (see FIG. 179) is stored for each scenario type, and is stored in the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5. The open / close plate 12300 is operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game using the information that has been set.

  Specifically, an operation scenario 51 and an operation scenario 52 are defined as scenario types in the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5. The operation scenario 51 includes “(open (open state) 5.0 seconds → (close (close state, short-close) 0.1 seconds) → open (open state) 0” in the open / close plate 12300 (see FIG. 179) as the scenario content. .9 seconds) × 5 (repeated)) × 3 (repeated) ”.

  In the operation scenario 51, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 12300 ends when the specified number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the initial state ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 51, the closing after the opening / closing plate 12300 is opened (open state) is configured only by closing (closed state, short closing). Therefore, although the opening and closing plate 12300 operates from the open state (open state), the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are not discharged. Therefore, the number of the stored balls in the storage channel 1231 cannot be reduced during the round game R.

  In the case of the operation scenario in which the closing of the open / close plate 12300 is released before the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 as in the operation scenario 51, the ball is displaced particularly near the regulating member 1600. That is, since the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state in 0.1 second when the opening and closing plate 12300 is in the closed state, the ball is about to be discharged in that 0.1 second, and then the regulating member 1600 is in the storing state. The ball is pushed back.

  Therefore, when the sphere is pushed back, there is a concern that the whole sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is pushed back and detected again by the detection sensor 1240. In the present invention, the arrangement of the detection sensor 1240 is defined. This prevents re-detection. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the detection sensor 1240 has a center in the width direction as a detection position on the upstream side of the ninth ball from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231, and It is arranged so that the downstream hemisphere portion of the tenth sphere from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 enters the center in the width direction as the position.

  By arranging the detection sensor 1240 in this manner, even if the ball once flowing downstream (displaced with a diameter smaller than the diameter of the ball) is pushed back by the operation of the regulating member 1600, the downstream of the storage channel 1231 is pushed. The tenth ball from the side is always kept at the center in the width direction as the detection position of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, during the operation of the regulating member 1600, even if the detection sensor 1240 keeps detecting the ball, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ball is detected again.

  In this control example, although the arrangement of the detection sensor 1240 is devised to prevent the occurrence of re-detection due to being pushed back by the regulating member 1600, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, during the operation of the regulating member 1600, a preventing means for preventing the displacement of the stored sphere on the upstream side from the predetermined position may be provided, or even when the regulating member 1600 operates, the flow of the ball starts for 0.1 second. A flow restricting means for restricting the flow of the sphere may be provided so as not to prevent the flow.

  The operation scenario 52 includes, as the scenario content, “(open (open state) 5.0 seconds → (closed (closed state, long closed)) 0.2 seconds → open (open state) in the open / close plate 12300 (see FIG. 179). ) 0.8 seconds) × 5 (repeated)) × 3 (repeated) ”.

  In the operation scenario 52, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 12300 ends when a specified number (ten in this control example) of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the initial state ends. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 52, the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged by closing (closed state, long-closed) after the open / close plate 12300 is opened (opened state). For this reason, the number of stored channels in the storage channel 1231 can be reduced, so that a gap is easily formed inside the storage channel 1231 when a specified number of balls enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Since it is easy to configure a state in which balls are less than the allowable number (10) of 1231), the probability of occurrence of excess winning can be increased.

  In the present control example, the case where excess winning is unlikely to occur (in the case of the operation scenario 51) and the case where excess winning is likely to occur (in the case of the operation scenario 52) are different for each round, and the 25th operation pattern Is composed. More specifically, the twenty-fifth operation pattern is configured with the even round as the operation scenario 51 and the odd round as the operation scenario 52. As a result, excessive occurrence of excess winnings can be suppressed.

  In this way, by storing the operation scenarios separately based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, the profit that the operation of the opening and closing plate 12300 that is currently being executed gives the player can be controlled by the main controller. 110 can be easily determined.

  The closing timing of the opening / closing plate 12300 is common to the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52, and the difference in the closing length is as short as 0.1 second. This makes it difficult for the player to determine which pattern is operating.

  FIG. 183 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate operation scenario table 202f5. The opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is provided with information indicating which of the predetermined scenario types corresponds to which jackpot type and which round game R.

  The MPU of the main control device 110 reads information corresponding to the contents specified in the opening / closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 from the opening / closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and executes opening / closing when controlling the operation of the opening / closing plate 12300. The plate 12300 is moving.

  The open / close plate operation scenario table 202f5 is configured so that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on a combination of a jackpot type and a round game R in which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the open / close plate 12300 is movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

  Next, an example of display contents during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the big hit game in which the first variable winning device 12000 operates in the twenty-fifth operation pattern.

  The first frame in FIG. 184 (display example shown on the upper left side) is a display following the part in the middle of the above-described basic effect (for example, the third frame in FIG. 157 (display example occupying the lower left side)). That is, the display example shown in FIG. 184 is a display that is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the display is being performed in the basic effect.

  In the first frame of FIG. 184 (display example shown on the upper left side), in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87 (a)), a treasure chest hidden in a dent and five rocks (number 2 The tank that bombards the rock is shown, and the display in the guidance display section of the small area Ds3 changes from “Aim at the right” (indicating that continuation of launching is to be performed. Launch instruction (see FIG. 157)). (Indicating that the launching should be continued, which is equivalent to a stop suggestion instruction).

  Switching from the basic effect to the display of the first frame in FIG. 184 is based on the average time (1 second) for the ball to reach the opening / closing plate 12300 from the launch of the ball and the second frame in FIG. ) To the 6th frame (lower right display example), the opening and closing plate for the total time (2.5 seconds) of the time related to the countdown effect (display is switched at regular intervals, 1.5 seconds in total) The display is switched at the timing of rewinding from the start of the period in which the closing of 12300 is repeated. That is, in the present control example, at the timing when 2.5 seconds, 12.5 seconds, or 22.5 seconds elapse from the start of the above-described operation scenarios 51 and 52, the display is displayed in the display example of the first frame in FIG. 184 from the basic effect. Is switched.

  In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), a child trying to pass in front of the rock (image suggesting that the ball firing is stopped) is displayed. In the third frame (display example shown in the lower left), The state in which the child is passing in front of the rock is illustrated, and the display of the small area Ds3 in the guidance display unit is switched to “3”.

  Thereafter, in the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), a state in which the child passed the front of the tank is illustrated, and the display of the small area Ds3 on the guidance display unit is switched to “2”. Thereafter, in the fifth frame (display example shown in the middle right), a state in which the child passed the front of the tank (an image suggesting a reunion of launching a ball) is shown, and the small area Ds3 is displayed on the guidance display unit. Is switched to “1”. In addition, the number of the guidance display part of the small area Ds3 is displayed as an example of a so-called “countdown effect” in which the number is reduced by one and some notification is made at a timing when the number may become “0”.

  In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), a state in which the tank starts to bombard (display suggesting the launch of a ball) is illustrated, and the display of the small area Ds3 on the guidance display unit is “Aim at the right”. The display is switched to a display indicating that the launching is to be continued. A launch instruction (see FIG. 157).

  When changing the launch and stop of the ball according to the display switched as shown in FIG. 184, the launch of the ball is stopped from the first frame to the fifth frame in FIG. 184, and the launch of the ball is started at the sixth frame ( Restart). In this case, the ball fired immediately after being switched to the sixth frame (in this control example, immediately after the timing of the lapse of 4 seconds, 14 seconds, or 24 seconds from the start of the above-described operation scenarios 51 and 52), is 1 second later. Reaches the opening / closing plate 12300 at the timing when the closing of the opening / closing plate 12300 is started.

  Therefore, the ball fired during a predetermined period thereafter (4 seconds in the present control example) rolls toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening / closing plate 12300 during a period in which the opening / closing plate 12300 repeats the closing operation. In addition, the kinetic energy is reduced with the closing operation of the opening and closing plate 12300.

  In addition, as described above, the degree of decrease in the kinetic energy associated with the closing operation of the opening and closing plate 12300 is greater for the sphere disposed downstream (on the side closer to the detection sensor 1240). The distance between the rolling balls can be reduced. For this reason, it is possible to easily form the open ball.

  On the other hand, when the ball is fired from the first frame to the fifth frame, the ball reaches the opening / closing plate 12300 during a period in which the opening / closing plate 12300 maintains the open state. Therefore, the interval between the balls rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 is easily kept unchanged from the interval when the ball arrives at the opening and closing plate 12300. Therefore, it is difficult to form a ball.

  That is, according to the present control example, the execution and stop of the ball in accordance with the display example shown in FIG. Thus, the ball rolling toward the detection sensor 1240 can easily form an open ball.

  Here, when the balls rolling toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening / closing plate 12300 constitute an open ball, a predetermined number (in this control example, In the case where the winning (10) is detected and the open / close plate 12300 is switched to the closed state, the ball connected to the upstream side of the previous ball easily enters the detection sensor 1240 before the switching.

  Therefore, the player can increase the profit (payout of the prize ball) obtained in the jackpot game by firing the ball so as to form the open ball. In the present control example, since the third symbol display device 81 notifies the timing at which the open ball is likely to be formed, the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  In the present control example, the display change as shown in FIG. 184 is executed both in the case of the operation scenario 51 (even round in the present control example) and in the case of the operation scenario 52 (odd round in the present control example). . On the other hand, when an open ball is formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 12300, excess winning can be expected only in the case of the operation scenario 52.

  In this way, by displaying an indication to the player to stop launching, while maintaining the effect of prolonging the digestion time of the round game R, it is possible to prevent excessive winning in each round and increase the profit of the player excessively. Can be prevented.

  Note that the configuration of the display example is not limited to this. For example, the display change shown in FIG. 184 may be executed only in the case of the operation scenario 52 (an odd round in this control example). In this case, it is not necessary to stop firing of the ball in order to form an open ball until an excess winning cannot be expected, so that the progress of the round game R can be made smooth.

  Further, for example, the display change illustrated in FIG. 184 may be executed only in the case of the operation scenario 51 (even number round in the present control example). In this case, excess winning can be suppressed, and the progress of the round game R can be made slow (slow).

  According to this control example, the opening and closing plate 12300 repeatedly changes to the closed state for 5 seconds after the ball is fired in accordance with the switching of the sixth frame in FIG. 184. During this period, as described above, the ball heading toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening / closing plate 12300 is decelerated to some extent to facilitate the formation of the open ball. However, if the open / close plate 12300 changes to the closed state immediately before or during the plurality of balls forming the open ball passing the detection sensor 1240, the ball may fall between the detection sensor 1240 and the end surface 3251b. In this case, there is a possibility that the pre-configured open ball may be canceled (for example, when a ball between the open balls falls).

  Therefore, if the open ball can be formed, a period during which the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state (in the present control example, from the start of the operation scenarios 51 and 52 to the lapse of 5 seconds, from the lapse of 10 seconds to the lapse of 15 seconds, Alternatively, it is preferable to pass the detection sensor 1240 between the time when 20 seconds elapse and the time when 25 seconds elapse). Here, as described above, in the twelfth embodiment, after the ball reaches the open / close plate 12300 maintained in the open state, the upper surface of the open / close plate 12300 maintained in the open state is rolled, and the detection sensor 1240 is rotated. It takes about 4 seconds to enter the ball.

  Therefore, for example, after about 4 seconds before the period during which the opening and closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state starts (and before the period during which the opening and closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state starts). When the open ball is formed with the ball that has arrived at the top, a situation where the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 during the period in which the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state can be generated with high probability.

  On the other hand, even before about 4 seconds ago, if the ball stays on the open / close plate 12300 for 4 seconds or more, the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 while the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state. Can be generated with a high probability.

  Here, according to this control example, the timing shown in the sixth frame in FIG. 184 (display example on the lower right) is about six seconds before the period in which the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started. Immediately after this, the ball that has fired reaches the opening / closing plate 12300 about 5 seconds before the period in which the opening / closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started, and thus is before about 4 seconds before.

  However, thereafter, the switching plate 12300 repeatedly switches to the closed state, so that the sphere flowing down along the switching plate 12300 is decelerated. That is, there is a situation where the ball stays on the opening and closing plate 12300 for 4 seconds or more. Therefore, the time that the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 12300 stays on the opening / closing plate 12300 about 5 seconds before the start of the period in which the opening / closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is extended by 1 second (that is, the flow speed of the ball) Is reduced to 80%), the timing at which the leading ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 can be included in the period in which the open / close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state.

  In addition, the ball fired at the timing shown in the sixth frame (the lower right display example) of FIG. 184 is positioned near the upstream end of the opening / closing plate 12300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 12300 starts the switching operation to close. To reach. Therefore, the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 12300 while the opening / closing plate 12300 is performing the switching operation (repeating operation) to the closing or the closing of the opening / closing plate 12300 while the opening / closing plate 12300 is rolling. The number of times of deceleration by the operation of the opening / closing plate 12300 can be increased to the maximum as compared with a ball or the like in which the switching operation of (i) is started. Therefore, it is possible to most easily form the open ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 185, an example of the display content during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 12000 operates in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern.

  The first frame (display example shown on the upper left side) in FIG. 185 is a display following the part in the middle of the above-described basic effect (for example, the third frame (display example occupying the lower left side) in FIG. 157). That is, the display example shown in FIG. 185 is a display that is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the display is being performed in the basic effect.

  Here, the predetermined condition is that when the storage channel 1231 is full (see S5032 in FIG. 189), the detection sensor 1240 detects that a specified number of balls have passed in the currently executed round game R. If there is no such condition (see S5033 in FIG. 189), the condition is satisfied (hereinafter, also referred to as a "full-fill-unreached condition"). That is, it is assumed that the round game is started in a state where there is a remaining ball in the storage channel 1231.

  Here, in a situation where the round game R is started from a state in which the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is full, and the round game R is continued, the remaining time of the round game R is In order to prevent the generation of a useless ball, the firing of the ball may be stopped. On the other hand, when the firing of the ball is stopped, a free time is generated for the player, so that the concentration of the player may be reduced and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, even in a situation where the storage channel 1231 is full and a ball is prevented from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a (when the full tank non-attainment condition is satisfied). , While maintaining the display for promoting the launch of the ball (display indicating launch), switching the display so as to notify the player that the expected profit (payout of the prize ball) has been switched by the launch. I do.

  This control example utilizes the above-described structure capable of storing a sphere in the storage channel 1231. That is, in the present control example, after the above-described condition of not reaching the full tank is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state (elevated posture) until the specified time of the round game R (30 seconds in the present control example) elapses. Is done.

  Therefore, if the launching of the sphere (right-handed) is continued while the full tank failure condition is satisfied, the sphere that has reached the opening / closing plate 12300 moves in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing plate 12300 due to the storage channel 1231. Since the downward movement is regulated by the opening and closing plate 12300, the ball is held on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 until the opening and closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state. In other words, the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 12300 is kept in an unknown destination until the opening / closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state. It is unknown at this time.

  When the open / close plate 12300 shifts to the closed state from the state in which the ball remains on the upper surface of the open / close plate 12300, and then opens again, in other words, when the previous round game R is not the final round, There is a possibility that the ball on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 is scooped up again.

  More specifically, in the twelfth embodiment, a drop delay plate 12250 is provided below the opening / closing plate 12300, and when the opening / closing plate 12300 is in a closed state, a ball moves the upper surface of the drop delay plate 12250 along the length of the opening / closing plate 12300. Rolls in the direction along the direction (the direction along the opening direction of the detection sensor 1240), and falls toward the out port 66 on the left side of the terminal end surface 3251b. Therefore, the sphere that has not reached the terminal surface 3251b before the opening / closing plate 12300 changes to the open state rides on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 12300 again and passes through the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a).

  Therefore, there is a possibility that even if the ball has reached the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300 while the full tank condition has not been reached, a prize ball can be paid out by winning the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). Can be. Therefore, as compared with the case where it is not possible to expect the payout of a prize ball due to a prize to the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a) (when there is almost no possibility, for example, in the normal state), the ball is fired (right). It is possible to improve the player's willingness to continue hitting.

  In the twelfth embodiment, since the length in the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing plate 12300 is about 135 [mm], when the balls (diameter 11 [mm]) are arranged side by side without overlapping vertically. Can put up to 12 balls on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 12300.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the launch of the ball (right-handed) is continued while the full tank failure condition is satisfied, and some of the balls that have not reached the opening / closing plate 12300 enter the general winning opening 63. Win a prize. The payout number of the general winning opening 63 is set at five. The greater the percentage of balls that enter the general winning opening 63, the greater the total number of prize balls paid out to the player in the jackpot game.

  The display example shown in FIG. 185 uses these structures. That is, while promoting to the player that the possibility of the ball loss is low due to the structure of the opening and closing plate 12300 and the drop delay plate 12250, the player is allowed to enter the general winning opening 63 to obtain a payout of the prize ball while promoting the game. It is.

  When a movable object capable of changing the storage state of the ball is arranged inside the storage channel 1231, the round game R is started with the storage channel 1231 empty (there is no remaining ball). In such a case, the full tank failure condition may be satisfied. For example, in the case where the above-described interference device 6900 is provided in the sixth embodiment, the above-described predetermined condition may be satisfied by setting the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 to the overhang state after the start of the round game R. .

  In the first frame (upper left display example) of FIG. 185, the sub-round display unit 714b is displayed in the small area Ds1 (FIG. 87A). Before switching to the first frame in FIG. 185, the number-of-rounds display section 714 displays light (displays brightly) and the sub-round display section 714b displays off (displays dark). In the meantime, on the contrary, the number-of-rounds display section 714 is turned off (displayed dark), while the sub-round display section 714b is displayed light-emitting (displayed brightly). Note that the meaning of displaying the period in which an additional prize ball can be expected in the round game R in the sub-round display portion 714b is the same as that described above (see FIG. 143).

  In the first frame (upper left display example) in FIG. 185, a display that promotes the launch of a sphere (a display that suggests launching) is maintained in the small area Ds3, and the background is displayed at 1-second intervals in the background. The character "3" is displayed as the number to count down.

  In the second frame of FIG. 185 (display example in the middle left), a state in which the display of the small area Ds3 is down and the number “1” is displayed is shown, and one second after that, 3 seconds in FIG. It can be switched to the frame (lower left display example).

  In the third frame of FIG. 185 (display example on the lower left side), an area including the main display area Dm is maintained below the small area Ds3 while the display for promoting the launch of the ball (display indicating launching) is maintained. , A plurality of circular figures are superimposed and displayed near the center of each figure, and a display for promoting the launch of a sphere (character “hit”) is added. In this state, a figure of a “treasure box” to be described later is prepared in advance on the back side of the plurality of figures.

  In the fourth frame (upper right display example) in FIG. 185, the above-described circular figure is partially erased, and a state in which a part of the “treasure box” is exposed is illustrated. In the display example on the right), a state is shown in which all of the above-described circular figures are deleted and the entire “treasure box” is exposed.

  In this control example, it is possible to switch the number of the circular figures to be erased in accordance with the number of balls entering the general winning opening 63 after the display is switched to the display example of the first frame in FIG. 185. It is said. That is, control is performed so that the number of circular figures erased increases as the number of balls entering the general winning opening 63 increases.

  As an example, in this control example, four circular figures are displayed in the third frame of FIG. 185, and one circular figure is deleted each time a ball enters the general winning opening 63. Is controlled. That is, the display example of the fourth frame shows a state in which two balls enter the general winning opening 63 (a state in which ten payout award balls are generated by entering the general winning opening 63). The display example of the frame shows a state where four or more balls have entered the general winning opening 63 (a state where 20 or more payout balls have been paid out by entering the general winning opening 63).

  The “treasure box” in the display example of the fifth frame has a meaning as a display indicating the level of profit obtained by the player. That is, when the entire “treasure box” is displayed, 20 or more prize balls to be paid out by entering a ball other than the first variable prize device 12000 are generated. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of payout balls to be paid out by entering the general winning opening 63 by grasping the number of times of viewing the display of the “treasure box” (the predetermined number (in this control example, the treasure box) (The number obtained by multiplying the number of times of viewing by 20) can be used as an indication that an excess winning has been obtained.

  Further, this display is displayed separately from the prize ball by the ball entering the first variable prize device 12000. Therefore, the player can display the “treasure box” from the display of the “treasure box” and determine the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the first variable prize device 12000 in the jackpot game (that is, (the number of rounds) × (the specified number of round games R) ) × (the number calculated from the number of payout prize balls per winning of one ball)), it is possible to grasp how much the number of payout prize balls can be increased.

  In addition, in the display example of the fifth frame, the case where the display corresponding to the number of payouts of the prize balls has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of “treasure box”, any of the characters “probability variation”, “normal” or “time saving” (display indicating a gaming state) is associated with the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game in advance. May be prepared. In this case, the player can grasp the game state after the end of the currently running big hit game by increasing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 63.

  Note that it is often difficult to make two or four balls enter the general winning opening 63 within 30 seconds (during round R). Therefore, before switching to the display example of the fifth frame in FIG. 185, a corresponding ball loss (the ball flows to the right of the open / close plate 12300 after the open / close plate 12300 becomes full, A player who does not find any benefit here may stop firing the ball and suppress the ball loss.

  That is, as a game mode, the player continues to fire the ball so as to be able to see advantageous information (for example, the above-mentioned display indicating the game state) even if a ball loss occurs, or the ball to prevent the ball loss. To stop firing.

  Note that if the display is switched to the fifth frame in FIG. 185 before the top of the open / close plate 12300 is full (four or more balls can be made to enter the general winning opening 63), the game is played. Can obtain advantageous information with minimal ball loss. Therefore, after the display is switched to the first frame in FIG. 185, the firing of the ball can be motivated to continue.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 186 (a), the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuating pattern selection table 222a and an opening / closing plate operation scenario 222b5.

  The opening / closing plate operation scenario 222b5 is provided for the operation status of the opening / closing plate 12300 controlled by the main control device 110 on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area where the information stored in the open / close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and the open / close plate operation scenario table 202f5 is stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 223d, a change start flag 223e, and a stop type selection A flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a probable change state flag 223i, a time saving state counter 223j, a storage state flag 223k, a storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, and an operation flag 223p. Effect temporary storage area 223r, first operation effect flag 223wa, second operation effect flag 223wb, first input flag 223wc, second input flag 223wd, effect under execution flag 223x, and pressing period information storage area 223y. And other memory area 223z There are at least provided, in addition, a display switching flag 223Pa, a light emitting timer 223Yh, and a display erasing counter 223yj are at least provided.

  The display switching flag 223pa is a flag that is set to ON when the storage channel 1231 becomes full in the middle of the round game R, and the sound lamp control device 113 performs the sub-round effect processing (S5036, see FIG. 190). ) Is a flag for grasping the timing of executing ().

  The light emission timer 223yh is a timer for managing a period during which the transmission lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) disposed near the first variable winning device 12000 emits light. In this control example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on each time a ball passes through the general winning opening 63, and is turned off after one second.

  The display erasure counter 223yj is a counter that manages the number of balls that have entered the general winning opening 63 since the display switching flag 223pa is turned on, with an upper limit of four. Each time the number of the display erasure counter 223yj decreases, the circular figure (see the third to fifth frames in FIG. 185) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased, and the display on the back side (FIG. The “treasure box” at 185 is controlled to be easily visible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, in the present control example, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  The main processing in this control example is different from the main processing in the first control example in that the processing shifts to the effect switching processing 3 (S5001) after the storage state monitoring processing (S2113), and the other is the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and different portions will be described.

  Next, the effect switching process 3 (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the effect switching process 3 (S5001). This effect switching process 3 (S5001) is a process of a main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing an effect that changes according to the progress of the jackpot game. It is.

  Note that this processing also includes a process of detecting a winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 12000 and a process of detecting a winning mode to the general winning opening 63, so that a short cycle (within 1 ms) in the main process. It is configured to be executed by. This makes it possible to make settings for detecting and detecting a winning mode of a ball in the first variable winning device 12000 or the general winning opening 63 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 188, in the effect switching process 3, in the process of S5001, it is determined whether or not a big hit is occurring (S5011). If it is determined that the big hit has not been made (S5011: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5011 that a big hit is being made (S5011: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit type is a big hit Tb or a big hit r (S5012). If it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot Tb or the jackpot r (S5012: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the display switching with reference to the open / close plate operation scenario 222b5 (S5013), and the timing of the display switching ( If it is determined that the timing is 2.5 seconds, 12.5 seconds, and 22.5 seconds from the start of the round game R (S5013: Yes), a first countdown effect display command is set (S5014). ), End this processing. Also, in the process of S5013, when it is determined that it is not the timing of display switching (S5013: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5012 that the jackpot type is neither the jackpot Tb nor the jackpot r (S5012: No), it is next determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot Tc (S5015).

  In the process of S5015, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot Tc (S5015: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5015, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot Tc (S5015: Yes), the process proceeds to a sub-round switching process (S5016), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, the sub-round switching process (S5015) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the sub-round switching process (S5015). This sub-round switching process (S5015) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113, and the storage channel 1231 becomes full during the round game R. This is a process for executing the effect after the game has become true.

  As shown in FIG. 189, in the sub-round switching process, in the process of S5015, it is determined whether the display switching flag 223pa is on (S5031). If it is determined that the display switching flag 223pa is not on (that is, it is off) (S5031: No), it is determined whether the storage channel 1231 is full (S5032).

  In addition, various methods are exemplified as a method of determining that the storage channel 1231 is full. In the present control example, it is determined that the length of time that the detection sensor 1240 detects a sphere exceeds a predetermined period (2 seconds in this control example). In this case, the entry timing of the Xth ball may be set at the elapse of a predetermined period, at the start of the predetermined period (that is, at the timing of entering the detection sensor 1240), or at the elapse of the predetermined period. A flag may be set at one point in time, and when it is determined that the tank is full when a predetermined period has elapsed, the flag may be set at the timing.

  In the process of S5032, when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is not full (S5032: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5032 that the storage channel 1231 is full (S5032: Yes), the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls is detected in the currently executed round game R. It is determined whether the ball has entered the sensor 1240 (S5033).

  In the process of S5033, if it is determined that the specified number of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (S5033: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5033, when it is determined that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S5033: No), a display switching command is set (S5034), and the display switching flag 223pa is turned on. This is set (S5035), and this process ends.

  In the present control example, after the display switching command is set (S5034), in the third symbol display device 81, the number-of-rounds display section 714 is turned off (dark), while the sub-round display section 714b emits light. The display is controlled so as to be displayed (brightly displayed) (see the first frame in FIG. 185).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5031, when it is determined that the display switching flag 223pa is ON (S5031: Yes), the process proceeds to a sub-round effect process (S5036). The details of the sub-round effect processing (S5036) will be described later.

  After the processing of S5036, it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the round (S5037). If it is determined that the timing of the end of the round is reached (S5037: Yes), the display switching flag 223pa is set to off (S5038), and The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing is not the end time of the round (S5037: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the sub-round effect processing (S5036) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the sub-round effect processing (S5036). This sub-round effect process (S5036) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and performs the lighting effect and the lighting effect after the storage channel 1231 is full. This is a process for executing a display effect.

  As shown in FIG. 190, in the sub-round effect process, in the process of S5036, it is determined whether or not the timing is 5 seconds before the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) in the currently executed round game R is reached. (S5051).

  In the process of S5051, if it is determined that the timing is 5 seconds before the specified time is reached (S5051: Yes), a second countdown effect display command is set (S5052), and the value of the display deletion counter 223yj is set. “4” is set, and the routine goes to the processing of S5054. On the other hand, in the process of S5051, if it is determined that the timing is not 5 seconds before the specified time is reached (S5051: No), the process directly proceeds to S5054.

  In this control example, after the second countdown effect display command is set (S5052), control is performed on the third symbol display device 81 so that a series of display effects starting from the first frame in FIG. 185 are executed. Is done. Since the value of the display deletion counter 223yj is 4, four circular figures are displayed as shown in the display example of the third frame in FIG. 185.

  In the processing of S5054, it is determined whether or not a ball has won the general winning opening 63 arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 12000 (S5054). In the processing of S5054, if it is determined that the ball has won the general winning opening 63 (S5054: Yes), the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) in the currently executed round game R has elapsed within 5 seconds. It is determined whether it is the timing to perform (S5055).

  In the processing of S5055, when it is determined that it is the timing when the specified time has elapsed within 5 seconds (S5055: Yes), the value of the display deletion counter 223yj is subtracted (S5056), and the display deletion command is set (S5056). S5057), and the process proceeds to S5058. On the other hand, in the process of S5055, when it is determined that the timing is not the time when the specified time has elapsed within 5 seconds (S5055: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S5058.

  After the value of the display erasure counter 223yj is subtracted (S5056), and the display erasure command is set (S5057), the third symbol display device 81 displays the circular figure shown in the display example of the third frame in FIG. 185. Is controlled so that the display is switched in such a manner that one is deleted. The display of the fourth frame in FIG. 185 shows the state after the process of S5057 is executed twice from the display of the third frame in FIG. 185, and the display of the fifth frame in FIG. The state after the processing of S5057 has been executed twice (or more) from the display of the frame is shown. After the processing of S5056 and S5057 is performed for the fifth time (the value of the display deletion counter 223yj <0), the circular figure is maintained in the display of the fifth frame in FIG. 185.

  In the process of S5058, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on (S5058), the numerical value corresponding to "1 second" is set in the light emission timer 223yh (S5059), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5054 that the general winning opening 63 has not been won (S5054: No), the light emission timer 223yh is subtracted (S5060), and it is determined whether the value of the light emission timer 223yh is 0 (S5050). S5061).

  In the process of S5061, if it is determined that the value of the light emission timer 223yh is 0 (S5061: Yes), it is determined whether the transmission lamp 227b is on (S5062), and the transmission lamp 227b is on. If it is determined (S5062: Yes), the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (S5063), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5061 that the value of the light emission timer 223yh is not 0 (S5061: No), or if it is determined in step S5062 that the transmission lamp 227b is not on (S5062: No). ), And the process ends.

  As described above, according to the present control example, every time a ball wins in the general winning opening 63, the control is performed so that the transmission lamp 227b is turned on for one second, and the visibility of the internal state of the storage channel 1231 is improved. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, at the end of the round game R, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are ejected. Therefore, by visually checking the internal state of the storage channel 1231, the end timing of the round game R can be easily determined. It becomes possible to grasp. Further, the end timing of the round game R is one of the important timings for the player as a material for determining the timing of switching between firing and stopping of the ball.

  Therefore, the timing at which the effect such as the display effect is switched is not made to correspond to the end timing of the round game R, and the change in the state of the ball inside the storage channel 1231 is grasped to grasp the timing of the end of the round game R. In the case where a gaming machine capable of being constructed is configured, the willingness of a ball to enter the general winning opening 63 can be improved.

<Another example of the fifth control example>
Next, another example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194. Another example of the fifth control example will be described using the first variable winning device 13000 described as the thirteenth embodiment.

  FIG. 191 is a front view of the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 191, the first variable prize device 13000 is provided with three paths through which the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 can pass, compared to the configuration of the twelfth embodiment, and whether or not each path can pass. Is different from that of the first variable winning device 12000 of the twelfth embodiment in that a path switching device 13800 that is configured to be able to be switched in association with the driving of the solenoid 1510 is provided. The points will be described in detail, and the same portions will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  The path switching device 13800 is visible below the opening / closing plate 12300 in a front view (visible by making at least a part of the game board 13 transparent), and is disposed on the back side of the game board 13. Provided with two discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813, and a sphere discharged from the lower end of the storage channel 1231 through the discharge port 1150 is detected by any of the discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813 and arranged downstream thereof. It is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown). Next, details of the path switching device 13800 will be described.

  192 and FIG. 193 are rear views of the first variable winning device 13000, and FIG. 194 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 13000 along the line CXCIV-CXCIV in FIG. Note that FIG. 192 shows a state in which the driving of the solenoid 1510 is released (non-excitation state), and FIGS. 193 and 194 show a state in which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excitation state). In FIGS. 192 and 193, the rear cover 1700 is shown by imaginary lines for easy understanding, and the discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813 are arranged behind the discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813 with the sectional view thereof. 194 is omitted, and in FIG. 194, the resistance change member 13854 is omitted for easy understanding, and the cross section in FIG. 194 is similar to the cross section in FIG. The storage channel 1231 is configured as a surface along the slope on the lower end side (or a surface cutting the center of the stored sphere).

  As shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, the path switching device 13800 of the first variable winning device 13000 includes a plurality of discharge path sensors 13810 arranged side by side downstream of the discharge port 1710 and a tip member of the solenoid 1510. An operating member 13820 that operates in accordance with the movement of the 1520 and a groove shape for defining the movement trajectory of the operating member 13820 are formed in the same shape on the thin plate member 12110 and the rear cover 1700 (formed in a groove shape (thin plate member). 12110) or a perforated (rear cover 1700)) defining portion 13830, a first switching device 13840 in which the state is switched each time the operating member 13820 makes one rotation of the defining portion 13830, and a corner portion 13831 of the defining portion 13830 Each time the operating member 13820 arrives, and operates under the load from the operating member 13820. A second switching device 13850 configured so as to vary, mainly comprises.

  The part that can switch the path of the ball before guiding the ball to the discharge path sensor 13810 will be described first. As shown in FIG. 192, the defining portion 13830 is formed in an elliptical groove shape in rear view, and has a known shape for defining the moving direction of the operation member 13820 by switching the depth of the groove. Each time the solenoid 1510 is switched between the excited state and the non-excited state, the operating member 13820 is guided in one direction along the defining portion 13830.

  That is, when switching from the non-excited state to the excited state, it passes through the upper half groove (state change from FIG. 192 to FIG. 193), and when it is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state, it passes through the lower half groove (FIG. State change from 193 to FIG. 192).

  The defining part 13830 includes a corner part 13831 formed as a path that deviates from a round path of the elliptical shape. The corner 13831 is configured as a portion to which the operating member 13820 reaches when the operating member 13820 is switched again to the excited state before the operating member 13820 has completely moved after the switching from the excited state to the non-excited state is started ( The defining portion 13830 is formed in such a shape that the operating member 13820 can reach the corner 13831).

  Accordingly, when the de-energized state is maintained for a sufficient time (for example, 2 seconds) as in a normal round-to-round interval, the corner 133831 does not reach the operating member 13820, while the operating scenario 51, When the non-excitation state is maintained for a short time (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds) and is immediately switched to the excitation state, as in the closing during the round game R of 52 (see FIG. 183 (a)). Is configured as a portion to which the operating member 13820 reaches. That is, according to the present configuration, the operating member 13820 is brought into contact with the closing member during the round-to-round interval to apply a load (in the present control example, the first switching device 13840), and the operating member 13820 is brought into contact with the closing member during the round game R. The target to which the contact load is applied (in the present control example, the second switching device 13850) can be different.

  The first switching device 13840 is configured to have a switching valve 13841 having a slide body that can slide back and forth above the first discharge path sensor 13811, and to be able to transmit the load given from the operating member 13820 to the switching valve 13841. And a transmission member 13842 which is

  The arrangement of the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is switched and maintained by a known notch mechanism, and the position is switched between a front position 13841a and a rear position 13841b every time a load is applied from the transmission member 13842. When the slide body is at the front position 13841a, the sphere flowing down from the discharge port 1710 goes to the first discharge path sensor 13811. However, when the slide body is at the rear position 13841b, the sphere flowing down from the discharge port 1710 is moved to the first discharge path. Before arriving at the sensor 13811, it collides with the slide body and flows down to the second discharge path sensor 13812 along the slope of the upper surface of the slide body. That is, the discharge path sensor 13810 through which the ball flowing down from the discharge port 1710 passes changes according to the state of the slide body.

  The transmission member 13842 is configured as a target to which the operating member 13820 abuts and applies a load when closed during the inter-round interval. When a load is applied to the transmitting member 13842 as the operating member 13820 moves along the defining portion 13830 (moving along the lower half of the defining portion 13830), the transmitting member 13842 is slightly moved about a predetermined axis. However, when the load applied from the operation member 13820 is released, it is configured to return to its original position by its own weight. That is, the transmission member 13842 is configured to repeat the same posture change (oscillation) every time a load is applied from the operation member 13820.

  Then, the load is transmitted to the slide body of the switching valve 13841 by the change in the posture of the transmission member 13842, and the arrangement of the slide body is switched. In other words, the arrangement of the slide member of the switching valve 13841 is configured to be switched each time the operating member 13820 operates along the defining portion 13830 by closing in the interval between rounds.

  The second switching device 13850 has a special discharge member 13851 that rotates by stacking posture changes due to a load applied from the operation member 13820, and an arrangement that is switched according to the state of the rotation of the special rotation member 13851 in the third discharge path. A regulating member 13852 configured to switch the manner in which the ball passes to the sensor 13813; a belt-shaped connecting band 13852 that connects a predetermined angular position of the special rotating member 13851 to an upper end of the regulating member 13852; And a resistance change member 13854 that can change the resistance in the rotation direction of 13851 by the arrangement of the operation member 13820.

  The special rotating member 13851 is a member having a rotationally symmetric shape (for example, a gear shape or a disk shape) rotatably supported below the rear cover 1700, and receives a load from the operating member 13820 that has reached the corner 13831. Are arranged to be able to be given. The operating member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831 from the left and right intermediate position of the defining portion 13830, and at this time, applies a load in the rotating direction to the special rotating member 13851, and the special rotating member 13851 rotates by a predetermined amount. According to the present embodiment, the connection belt 13853 rotates in the rotation direction in which it is pulled up.

  When the operation member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831, the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 is increased by an operation described later of the resistance change member 13854, and the rotation of the restriction member 13852 by its own weight is restricted. Therefore, as the number of times that the operation member 13820 reaches the corner 13831 increases, the rotation angle of the special rotation member 13851 increases. In the present embodiment, when the number of times that the operating member 13820 reaches the corner 13831 is two or more, the regulation of the discharge path sensor 13810 by the regulating member 13852 is released, and the ball can enter the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is configured to be.

  Note that the number of times that the operation member 13820 needs to reach the corner 13831 before the restriction of the discharge path sensor 13810 by the restriction member 13852 is released is not limited and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, in consideration of the amount of rotation of the special rotation member 13851 every time a load is applied from the operation member 13820 and the accompanying movement amount of the restriction member 13852, the position of the restriction member 13852 on the second discharge path sensor 13812 side is considered. The position of the end may be adjusted.

  The regulating member 13852 has one end connected to the connection band 13853, and the other end extending obliquely right and left (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 192 and 193) above the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is supported by the guide 13852a.

  The regulating member 13852 normally closes the third discharge path sensor 13813 in a fall-down state (see FIG. 193). The other end slides along the guide portion 13852a (moves to the side where the left and right distance from the one end is reduced), and the regulating member 13852 gradually rises (from the collapsed state to the special rotation). The state in which the member 13851 is loaded on the operating member 13820 twice or more). Then, when the load via the special rotating member 13851 is released, the state returns to the state of falling by its own weight (see FIG. 193).

  In a state where the regulating member 13852 has fallen (see FIG. 193), the upper surface is inclined downward toward the second discharge path sensor 13812, so that the sphere that has deviated from the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the action of the switching valve 13841 is removed. The guide can be smoothly guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812.

  In a standing state, the regulating member 13852 is arranged at a position where the other end does not hinder the passage of the ball to the third discharge path sensor 13813. As a result, the ball that has deviated from the first discharge path sensor 13811 due to the operation of the switching valve 13841 is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812 or the third discharge path sensor 13813.

  The connection band 13853 is made of a material with low elasticity, such as a string or a cloth, or a thin metal wire (thin metal plate). Therefore, the rotation position of the special rotation member 13851 and the arrangement of the regulating member 13852 correspond one-to-one.

  The resistance changing member 13854 is a member that is long in the vertical direction and is disposed in such a manner as to fall down on the special rotating member 13851, and one end (upper end) has an end (left and right ends) of the defining portion 13830 and an upper end. The other end (lower end) is rotatably supported below the rear cover 1700, and can be brought into contact with the special rotating member 13851 at the middle portion.

  The resistance change member 13854 has an effect of increasing the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 by contacting the special rotation member 13851. In other words, while the resistance changing member 13854 leans against the special rotating member 13851 and applies a load by contacting the special rotating member 13851, the rotation of the special rotating member 13851 due to its own weight is regulated (maintaining the posture), and the operating member 13820 is moved. Only rotation by the load when reaching the corner 13831 occurs.

  On the other hand, when the operating member 13820 is disposed at the end of the defining portion 13830 at the time of closing and opening during the inter-round interval, the upper end of the resistance change member 13854 is pushed by the operation member 13820, and the resistance change member 13854 And the special rotation member 13851 is released from contact. Accordingly, the rotation resistance of the special rotating member 13851 decreases, the special rotating member 13851 rotates by its own weight, and the regulating member 13852 falls down (the special rotating member 13851 is in a state before a load is applied). Become.

  Note that the rotation resistance of the special rotating member 13851 may increase at a timing excluding the interval between rounds (for example, at the time of opening and closing during the round game R, the timing at which the operating member 13820 is arranged at the corner 13831). In this case, the state of the special rotation member 13851 and the regulating member 13852 is maintained.

  Next, the arrangement and operation of each sensor of the discharge path sensor 13810 will be described in order. The first discharge path sensor 13811 has an opening that can pass when a ball that has passed backward through the discharge port 1710 falls vertically downward is configured as a detection port. That is, the ball that has passed through the discharge port 1710 passes through the first discharge path sensor 13811 and is detected by the first discharge path sensor 13811 unless an external force other than its own weight is applied.

  In the present control example, the first discharge path sensor 13811 is configured as a detection device that sets the V flag 203s to ON when detecting passage of a ball. In other words, the same operation as that of the specific region 4830 or the specific region detection sensor 4860 in each of the above embodiments occurs.

  Although the first switching device 13840 is disposed between the first discharge path sensor 13811 and the discharge port 1710, the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is switched at every interval between rounds. Regardless of the game R, by playing the jackpot game normally in a mode in which the ball enters the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be passed through the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the end of the jackpot game.

  The second discharge path sensor 13812 is a detection sensor arranged next to the first discharge path sensor 13811. The second discharge path sensor 13812 is configured as a detection sensor that detects only passage of a ball. That is, the state of the V flag 203s does not change (is maintained) even when the ball passes through the second discharge path sensor 13812.

  The third discharge path sensor 13813 is arranged next to the second discharge path sensor 13812, and is used when a sphere flowing down from the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the action of the switching valve 13841 does not pass through the second discharge path sensor 13812. It is a detection sensor that passes. When the regulation of the passage of the ball by the regulating member 13852 is released (when the regulating member 13852 is in a standing state), the ball is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812 or the ball is guided by the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is configured such that there is no large difference (becomes random) as to whether or not it is guided.

  In the present control example, the third discharge path sensor 13813 is configured as a detection device that sets the V flag 203s to off when detecting the passage of a ball. That is, in the ending process (S1110, see FIG. 121) described in the above control example, it is determined whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a probable change state or a time saving state by delaying the ball during the jackpot game. It is possible to configure a gaming ability that changes depending on which of the first discharge path sensor 13811 and the third discharge path sensor 13813 has detected.

  According to this control example, it is possible to configure the following gaming characteristics. In this control example, the jackpot type used in the fifth control example is used (see FIGS. 182 and 183).

  As described above, in the interval between rounds, the restricting member 13852 is in a state of falling down, and the passage of the ball of the third discharge path sensor 13813 is restricted. Therefore, when the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 only at the closing time between rounds (for example, in the case of the jackpots Ta and Tc), the ball is detected by the third discharge path sensor 13813 and the V once turned on. There is no possibility that the flag 203s is set to off.

  On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth operation pattern including the operation scenarios 51 and 52 in which the opening and closing plate 12300 is closed at intervals other than between rounds, the ball may be discharged from the storage channel 1231 at intervals other than between rounds. Since the turned-on V flag 203s may be set to off, it is possible to improve the attention of the whereabouts of the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231.

  The following description focuses on the twenty-fifth operation pattern. In the present control example, in the twenty-fifth operation pattern, the description will be made assuming that the open / close plate 12300 is drive-controlled in the operation scenario 52 in the all-round game R.

  Since the twenty-fifth operation pattern is configured as a 15-round (odd-number) jackpot game, the state of the first switching device 13840 in the predetermined round is not determined in one way, and the jackpot game of the 25th operation pattern is continuously performed. If so, it will be replaced every time a big hit game is played.

  For example, when the slide body of the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is at the front position 13841a in the fifteenth round game R in the first jackpot game, the fifteenth round round game R in the second jackpot game The sliding body of the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 in the above is set to the rear position 13841b.

  Therefore, the passage of the ball to the first discharge path sensor 13811 is restricted in the 15th round once every two times (there is a possibility that the V flag 203s is set to OFF), and once in the 15th round is the 15th round. In, the ball is guided to the first discharge path sensor 13811 (the big hit game is easily ended by turning on the V flag 203s). In other words, a gaming machine capable of guaranteeing two sets of the probability change state with a high probability (the number of times the state after the end of the jackpot game becomes the probability change state is up to two) can be configured.

  When the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the round game R in a state where the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is disposed at the rear position 13841b, at the time of the first discharge, the regulating member 13852 is still in the third discharge path. Since the passage of the ball to the sensor 13813 is restricted, the ball is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812.

  As described above, in discharging the first ball, the discharged ball can be visually recognized by the player in a front view without changing the state of the V flag 203s. That is, the ejection of the ball can be used to direct the player's attention to the path switching device 13800.

  After the second ejection, the ball of the third ejection path sensor 13813 is allowed to pass. Accordingly, in the round game R, the balls are ejected every five seconds, one ball per second, for a total of five balls, but the second and subsequent four balls are sent to the third ejection path sensor 13813. Can be guided.

  Here, when the interval between rounds is reached, the regulating member 13852 shifts to the falling state, so that the player starts to discharge the balls during the round game R, and then determines the number of incoming balls within a short time. To start the interval between rounds.

  In other words, at a timing when one ball is ejected from the storage channel 1231 (the space of the storage channel 1231 directly connected to the excess winning number is equal to one ball), the specified number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 ( According to the game mode of (10 in this control example), the ball is not detected by the third discharge path sensor 13813, and the game can be executed with confidence.

  On the other hand, by discharging two or more balls from the storage channel 1231, a sufficient space is secured in the storage channel 1231, and many balls are opened and closed after a lapse of 15 seconds from the start of the round game R. In a game mode in which a ball is formed to aim for an excessive winning prize (a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped during the round game R and the firing of the ball is restarted in accordance with the operation timing of the open / close plate 12300) Since the balls are successively discharged from the discharge port 1710 in a state where the balls can be guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813, the balls enter the third discharge path sensor 13813 as a reaction to the increase in the number of excess winnings that can be aimed at. It is more likely to ball. That is, when the degree of aiming for the excess winning becomes excessive, it is possible to constitute a gaming property in which the possibility that the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is changed to the certainty state is reduced.

  In the present control example, the opening and closing during the round starts 5 seconds after the start of the round game R, but if the game mode in which the firing of the ball is not stopped and firing is continued, the specified number (this control example) In this case, 10 balls are fired in 6 seconds, so if the total of the balls fired before the start of the round game R is detected, 10 balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240 within 5 seconds. Things happen with a high probability. In addition, the drop delay plate 12250 (see FIG. 191) further guides the ball to the terminal surface 12251 b in front of the detection sensor 1240 irrespective of the open / close state of the open / close plate 12300.

  For this reason, in the present control example, the notification "Aim at the right" is continuously maintained in the sub-display area Ds3 as the notification related to the firing mode in the jackpot game (see FIG. 158). In this control example, when the ball is continuously fired according to this notification, the possibility that the ball is guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the game mode in which the launch of the ball is stopped without following the notification that the launch of the ball is continued, the ball may be guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813. Is also good.

  For example, the notification may be divided every 5 seconds, and it may be clearly notified that the possibility that the ball is guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813 increases every 5 seconds. In this case, by notifying the player at the same time that the V flag 203s is currently turned on, the player is not required to fire the ball. It is possible to select whether to proceed to a round game.

  Also, based on the same notification, whether or not to link the position of the first switching device 13840 and the effect changes depending on the required game characteristics, and either may be controlled. For example, when the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is disposed at the front position 13841a, all the discharged balls pass through the first discharge path sensor 13811 regardless of the state of the regulating member 13852, and therefore, the third discharge path Since the possibility that the ball is guided to the sensor 13813 does not increase, the above-described notification may be omitted, or the above-described notification may be executed as an effect regardless of the position of the switching valve 13841.

  In the former case, by giving the player a correct state, the game is made to be slow (shooting a ball without hitting (sudden) and allowing the shooting to be stopped (slow)). be able to. In the latter case, it is possible to cause the ball to continue firing anyway, so that the speed of the jackpot game can be increased.

  In the present control example, the switching valve 13841 is configured to slide back and forth, and it is difficult to recognize a change in the state of the switching valve 13841 in a front view. Therefore, the player plays the game by visually confirming the state of the switching valve 13841. It is possible to reduce the possibility (a game in which the production intention is ignored).

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the storage channel 1231 is configured as a channel extending on a plane, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be configured so that the right side of a plane orthogonal to the left-right direction is bent 90 degrees and extends in the front-rear direction. That is, the flow path may extend in the left-right direction from the detection sensor 1240 to the bending position, extend in the front-rear direction from the bending position, and extend again in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150.

  The flow path extending in the front-rear direction has a flow path shape in which the extending direction is switched from left and right to front and rear (rotated by 90 degrees about a vertical axis) by diverting the shape of the storage flow path 1231. It is formed by combining two substantially symmetrical light-transmitting members having concave portions constituting one side surface of the flow path on the opposite side from the left and right.

  The storage channel 1231 including the channel extending in the front-back direction is different from the above embodiment in the direction of the channel, but the number of balls that can be stored downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (10 in this embodiment). Pieces). That is, also in the present embodiment, the same playability as the playability described in each of the above embodiments can be configured.

  Also with respect to the storage channel 1231 including the channel extending forward and backward, the solenoid 6910 enters the channel when driven (excited) in a state where the solenoid 6910 is driven (excited). When the drive (excitation) is released, there is provided an interference member that is retractable from the flow path and can be switched between a retracted state that allows the sphere in the flow path to flow down.

  Here, the arrangement of the interference member with respect to the flow path is the same as in the sixth embodiment. That is, of the balls stored on the downstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the flow path extending forward and backward on the upstream side of the second ball counted from the lowermost ball restricted from flowing down by the regulating member 1600. And the third ball is disposed so as to be able to regulate the downward flow of the third ball. In the extended state of the interference member, seven balls are located upstream of the interference member and downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. Of balls can be stored.

  The flow path extending back and forth is formed so that the third and subsequent balls are stored behind the second ball counted from the lowermost ball whose flow is regulated by the regulating member 1600. Therefore, when the second ball is arranged, the ball is arranged on the front side of the interference member, and the interference member is hidden by the ball. That is, the state of the interference member can be made difficult to grasp by the ball.

  Compared to the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, the entire sphere is not visually recognizable, and the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the visual recognition target is reduced by the flow path itself extending to the back side. In the case where the storage channel 1231 includes a channel extending forward and backward for reasons such as being farther away, the state in which ten spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 by retracting the interference member and the interference member Are protruding, and it is difficult to grasp the state in which nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 from the arrangement of the balls. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored balls even when the first variable winning device 1000 is directly viewed.

  In the case where such a feature is provided, for example, the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, it is better to look at the third symbol display device 81 than to visually recognize the storage channel 1231 having poor discrimination of the number of stored balls, to grasp the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 1000a. Since the configuration can be made to be easy, the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved relatively to the attention to the first variable winning device 1000. Therefore, it is possible to easily remove the player's line of sight from the first variable winning device 1000.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member that opens and closes the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You may do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged without strictly controlling the operation length of the second discharge port regulating member. Therefore, the number of discharged balls can be changed between the case where the balls are discharged from the first discharge port and the case where the balls are discharged from the second discharge port. In this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be simultaneously opened, the time required for discharging the ball as a whole can be reduced, and the interval can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 that moves up and down can guide the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the upper position, and can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the lower position. May be deviated. In this case, when the ball is raised, it is not necessary to arrange the ball at a position sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200, so that the ball can be lifted more smoothly.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged from the single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional outlet may be arranged at a position midway in the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed depending on whether to discharge from the discharge port 1710 or to discharge from the additional discharge port. That is, it is difficult to discharge the ball clogged on the discharge port 1710 side from the additional discharge port. In addition, by discharging both of the discharge ports at the same time, the discharge efficiency of the ball can be increased, and the interval can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability variation determination unit 4800 starts operation based on the operation timing of the open / close plate 1300 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the sphere according to the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be acquired depending on the number of ejected balls regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly deviated has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation may be started at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resistance of the ball entering the ball changes depending on whether there is a gap in which the ball enters the storage channel 1231 (whether the storage channel 1231 is in the full state), It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that a predetermined sphere entering the storage channel 1231 is decelerated depending on whether or not the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is nearly full. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of round games R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, winning more than the specified number can be suppressed. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being prolonged while suppressing winnings of a specified number or more, as compared to the case where the ball is decelerated regardless of the stored number. In addition, not only deceleration but also acceleration may be performed. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than a predetermined number of winnings.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 so that the stored ball restricts the ball from entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electrically driven member may be provided that operates by a predetermined amount when a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes and that facilitates regulating the ball from entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the interval between rounds can be reduced as compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged at one time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the specified number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specified number of +1 balls may be stored. In this case, the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a exceeding the specified number can be limited to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, for each round, the round in which the eleventh ball easily passes and the round in which the eleventh ball is restricted from passing may be switched.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening and closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held (falls) at a position in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that two balls are not won simultaneously. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one ball may be held, so that the ball may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a until the open / close plate 1300 is closed. Alternatively, the possibility of this possibility may be switched for each round.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening through which the ball passes is configured as an opening that gives a benefit to the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed so that a fall flag (a flag for shifting the probable change state to the normal state or the time saving state) is turned on when a ball enters a predetermined winning opening. In this case, it is possible to execute a game in which attention is paid so that a ball does not enter a predetermined winning opening.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the regulating member 1600 mechanically interlocks with the open / close plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the regulating member 1600 may be driven by a driving device different from the solenoid 1510 for driving the opening / closing plate 1300, or the regulating member 1600 may be configured to be drivable by the solenoid 1510 or another driving device.

  In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage channel, and the storage channel may be a channel that branches off toward the outlet on the way. In this case, a predetermined number of spheres can be left in the storage channel 1231 regardless of which outlet the sphere is discharged from.

  In the second embodiment described above, the case where the number of storable balls when entering the ball from the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game, It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a is less than the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when the ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255a. May be equal to or more than the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure a gaming property in which, when the ball is ejected from the first specific winning opening 1000a while the ball is ejected every time at the interval between rounds, the round time is necessarily extended.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the ball that has flowed below the opening / closing plate 1300 is lifted again above the opening / closing plate 1300 by the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be lifted by a movable member having a constant operation capable of picking up the ball. In this case, the player can be entertained by the movement of the ball.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (the drop delay plate 3250) is provided below the open / close plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib projecting from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be provided above the opening / closing plate 1300. When the sliding plate 1300 is in the open state, the ball may not contact the rib, and when in the closed state, the ball may contact the rib. Thus, even above the opening and closing plate 1300, the flow speed of the ball can be changed to delay the flow.

  As a method of preventing the ball from abutting on the rib, the ball may be moved to the front or rear by tilting in the front-rear direction, and the rib may be provided on the opposite side.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the falling of the ball is delayed by the drop delay plate 3250 arranged on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be constituted by a flow path curved through the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that once passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player by the opening and closing plate 1300 is discharged again from the exit. Can be performed by the falling of the ball, and the area for delaying the ball is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. Therefore, even when the interval is long, the ball is delayed until the next round is started. A sufficient section can be secured.

  Note that the entrance is preferably below the opening and closing plate 1300, and the exit is preferably above the opening and closing plate 1300. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the opening of the entrance is narrowed by a part of the opening / closing plate 1300 to such an extent that the passage of a ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening and closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side has been described. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be configured to become gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the flowing direction of the sphere becomes small, and the sphere can be decelerated.

  The change in acceleration / deceleration may be reversed. In the case where the ball accelerates toward the downstream, it is possible to prevent the formation of an open ball on the drop delay plate 3250.

  In the third embodiment, the case where only the ball that has passed below the opening and closing plate 1300 abuts on the opening and closing plate 1300 by arranging the drop delay plate 3250 below the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, in a mode in which a ball slides in a pocket where a winning opening is arranged in an open state and a ball rolls on an upper surface of the open / close plate in a closed state, the rolling ball is opened and closed by a front and rear slide type opening and closing plate. A rib that can contact when reaching the downstream side on the plate may be arranged. A ball that directly enters the pocket does not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the open / close plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the ball from moving up and down with the operation of the open / close plate.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the formation of the fall delay plate 3250 at the fall position Pf3 is omitted and the ball falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the drop delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, and a through-hole through which the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 to the right is formed, and the ball is discharged from the through-hole. You may make it. In this case, even when the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be disposed above the open / close plate 1300.

  This is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the sphere that has fallen at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and lands on the fall delay plate 3250 remains rightward (detection sensor). The ball that has fallen to the second fall delay plate 7260 by the same fall, once falls to the left (to the side away from the detection sensor 1240), and then falls again to the fall delay plate 3250. To reach. That is, the period in which the flow of the sphere is delayed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the path along which the sphere flows are different.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, a case is described in which the flow paths in which the balls flowing from the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning ports 1000a and 2255a flow down to the storage channel 1231 and the number of entered balls is related. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sphere may be automatically supplied to the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the high probability state, the case where the number of lotteries until the jackpot is obtained decreases as the profit obtained by the player decreases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the greater the number of lotteries up to the jackpot, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained by the jackpot obtained in a short time is small, and the profit obtained by the jackpot obtained in a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be made uniform.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 to change the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operation member that operates in the storage channel 1231 in accordance with the stored number and changes the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 may be provided. In this case, regardless of the drive timing of the drive device 1500, the operation members move according to the stored number, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the operation timing of the operation members is different from normal.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion (particularly, a U-shaped portion) forming the storage channel 1231 moves in the extending direction (left-right direction) of the channel to change the length of the storage channel 1231. May be. In this case, even if the player has moved in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice whether or not the player has moved because of the small movement amount. Therefore, it is possible to form a playability in which the player notices the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) only after the ball is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable prize device 6000 can be increased. Can be improved.

  The movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the switching of the movement may or may not be performed by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 projects in a state where a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an overhang state may be formed before the ball starts to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be seven. In addition, a pattern that forms a protruding state after the ball is stored and a pattern that forms a protruding state before the ball starts entering the storage channel 1231 may be mixed in each round. In this case, a single member can be used to switch between a round in which the storage number is seven and a round in which the storage number is nine.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be changed to a protruding state while the sphere is being discharged from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing at which the ball is ejected and the timing at which the interference member 6930 is brought into the extended state, the ejection mode of the ball can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

  In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is auxiliaryly viewed, but is not limited thereto. For example, only the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 may open and close, and the opening and closing plate 8300 may be configured as a fixed plate. In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be provided with a flow path for dropping a ball from above vertically so as to prevent the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from passing leftward. In this case, a limited number of excess winnings can be allowed based on the open ball mode.

  Further, for example, for each round game R, the opening / closing mode of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be switched between a long-term opening and a repeated short-term opening. In this case, at the end of the round game R, it is detected by the detection sensor 1240 and closed, or is closed as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240, and a specified number of balls are passed through the detection sensor 1240 during closing. Is detected, the round game R ends, and it can be switched whether or not the next opening will occur. In this case, the probability of occurrence of excess winnings will be lower in the case of repeated short opening than in the case of long opening, so the possibility of occurrence of excess winning will differ depending on the operation pattern. Can be.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the same driving device has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a dedicated driving device may be provided for each device, and the driving device may be independently driven.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are changed to the open state, the opening / closing plate 8300 rotates in a manner of rising upward and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is turned leftward. Although the case has been described in which the opening and closing plate 8300 is configured to rotate in a manner approaching from above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are parallel (for example, the axis in the front-rear direction), and the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are opposed to each other (for example, one is downward and the other is upward). You may make it operate. In this case, an effect can be performed in which the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 sandwich a sphere in accordance with a state change.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 includes the ball entry prevention portion 1331 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball entry prevention section 1331 may be omitted. In this case, since the opening / closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be used as a member that regulates the guidance of the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Further, for example, the front surface of the ball entry preventing portion 1331 may be recessed so as to be recessed toward the back. In this case, the period from the start of the state change of the open / close plate 8300 toward the closed state until the passage of the ball of the detection sensor 1240 is disabled can be lengthened.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 have been described as members for allowing the passage of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, but are not necessarily limited thereto. There is no. For example, by omitting the ball entry prevention unit 1331, the permissible passage of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a can be switched only by the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 allows the ball to enter the auxiliary entrance opening. It may be interpreted that the ball is thrown toward 9111 or the first out port 66. That is, the opening / closing plate 8300 merely serves to guide the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether or not the ball is guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a is switched according to the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. May be interpreted. In this case, the attention of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be improved as compared with the attention of the opening / closing plate 8300.

  In the ninth embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which a plurality of members are movable on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a ball is caused to flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 by configuring a driving mode of operating one of the members. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable member is singular (for example, the opening and closing plate 1300), and the interference member 6930 is controlled to be in the extended state in accordance with the timing when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed, thereby closing the opening and closing plate 1300. The discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or by setting a shorter period for closing the opening and closing plate 1300 (the time required for one ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150). (Less than 0.2 seconds), the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 may be suppressed.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary entrance 9111 is configured as a general winning opening has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to a special symbol lottery. In this case, by configuring the special symbol 2 to be able to acquire the lottery of the special symbol 2 by entering a ball into the auxiliary entrance 9111 under the control of changing the special symbol 2 in preference to the special symbol 1, the big hit game It is possible to suppress the start of the change of the special symbol 1 immediately after the end.

  In the ninth embodiment, the rolling plate 9112 is configured as a fixed plate, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state changes between a state in which the rolling plate 9112 is retracted from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which the rolling plate 9112 does not collide with a game ball) and a state in which the rolling plate 9112 extends over the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which it hits a game ball). May be configured as a movable plate that is driven and controlled to perform the operation. In this case, various modes are exemplified as the operation pattern. For example, a fixed operation may be performed after the power is turned on, or a predetermined operation starting from the start of the big hit game may be performed.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case has been described in which the operation speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released is substantially constant (depending on the restoration mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the time of the return operation of power transmission member 5400, a damper that applies a load to power transmission member 5400 after auxiliary transmission member 8340 is closed may be provided. In this case, the period during which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state can be lengthened, so that one-side opening control can be facilitated.

  In the above-described ninth embodiment, the description has been given of the case where the ball is switched to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 on the assumption that the state of the opening / closing plate 8300 changes toward the open state. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a ball can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 at a predetermined ratio during a period in which the open / close plate 8300 maintains the closed state. For example, another movable object having a constant operation may be provided, and a ball may collide with the movable object to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the ball is discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181 and the number of balls that can be accommodated in the storage channel 1231 or more can pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the capacity of the storage channel 1231 may be configured to be variable. In this case, since the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made to correspond to the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the specific area detection sensor 4860, the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, and the like are exemplified as the detection means for detecting the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the opening of the outlet 1150 (or an opening arranged close to the opening) may be configured as a detecting means (a ball passage sensor). In this case, a time delay from the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 to the detection of the ball by the detection means can be minimized.

  In the tenth embodiment, the ball is discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181, so that a space is formed inside the storage channel 1231 and it is advantageous for the player that an excess prize can be aimed at. Although a case where a significant change occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 due to the operation of the movable member 10181 falls at a predetermined probability with a fall detection sensor (a detection sensor that sets the V flag 203s off, a third discharge path sensor of the thirteenth embodiment). (Similar to 13813). In this case, by discharging the ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181, not only a change advantageous to the player but also a disadvantageous change can occur.

  In particular, in the tenth embodiment, since a plurality of types of operation patterns of the movable member 10181 are prepared, notification of which operation pattern drives the movable member 10181 is performed in advance, so that the player can The player can play the ball in a mode of launching a ball that allows the ball to be ejected from the middle of the storage channel 1231 (for example, continuously firing (leave the ball)), or launch the ball so as not to enter the storage channel 1231 as much as possible. It is possible to select whether to play in a firing mode in which execution and stop of the game are adjusted. That is, the player chooses whether to aim for an over-prize prize with the risk that the V flag 203s may be set off or to eliminate the risk that the V flag 203s is set off instead of giving up the excess prize. can do.

  In the first control example, the case where the periphery of the first variable winning device 6000 is brightly lit based on the operation of the operation button 300 and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit location does not need to be near the first variable prize winning device 6000, but may be a wide range (such as the center frame 86) including the first variable prize winning device 6000.

  Note that various modes are exemplified as means for changing the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. For example, a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and the data of the lighting mode is transmitted to the lamp control device 227 at the rise of the clock pulse, and the transmitted data is corresponded at the fall of the clock pulse. The lamp may be turned on. In this case, when turning off the light, data corresponding to the turning off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227. Also, a combination with a latch may be used.

  Alternatively, a plurality of types of lighting pattern tables may be prepared in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the table. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining this lighting pattern table and the above-described clock. Further, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or control may be performed using a serial port driver.

  The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be based on a so-called dynamic lighting method (a lighting method that produces a difference in brightness by changing the time interval of turning on and off) or may be based on a voltage level.

  In the first control example, a case has been described where the transmission lamp 227b is kept lit if the operation effect is successful, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on for a short period (for a moment). In this case, the attention to the storage channel 1231 can be improved. Further, based on the success of the operation effect, for example, the number of remaining balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 may be notified instead of turning on the lamp.

  In the first control example, a case where five or more spheres are stored upstream of the interference member 6930 and the sphere is caused to flow into the specific area 4830 by setting the interference member 6930 to the retracted state by operating the operation button 300 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the number of balls stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is set to four or less and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the stored ball can pass. You may. In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called “holding device”.

  In the first control example described above, a case has been described in which the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 is notified by display in the round game R in which the operation effect has been executed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the round in which the operation effect is executed may be advanced by one round, and the number of balls to be made to enter the storage channel 1231 in a round game after the round in which the operation effect is executed may be notified. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls from being excessively stored in the storage channel 1231 before the notification.

  In the case of notifying the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, a time that is insufficient to reach the number (continuously firing the balls) It is desirable to execute the notification at a time that is insufficient when the notification is performed. Thereby, even if the launch of the ball is continued from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball is excessively entering the storage channel 1231 at the execution timing of the notification.

  In the first control example, the case where the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation effect is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operating speed of the display pointer 719 and the number of displays may be controlled to be changeable based on a predetermined condition. Examples of the predetermined condition include, for example, the number of times the special symbol has changed up to the jackpot, the score accumulated according to the number of games, and the like. In this case, for example, when the number of times the special symbol changes is large or when the privilege is high, control is performed so that the difficulty level of the operation effect is reduced, so that the burden (the number of changes, The greater the number of games, the greater the benefit that the player can obtain from the operation effect.

  Here, examples of the difficulty level include the difficulty level of the operation effect itself, the difficulty level of obtaining a profit after the operation effect, and the like. When the difficulty level of obtaining the profit after the operation effect is high, for example, the operation effect and the execution timing of the notification accompanying the operation effect are in the latter half of the round game R (the period of time during which the specified number of balls can enter the storage channel 1231). (After) is exemplified. In this case, at the timing of the notification, a situation may occur in which the number of spheres that have entered the storage channel 1231 exceeds the number notified as the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231.

  Further, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself may be associated with the difficulty level of obtaining the profit after the operation effect. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is low, it is easy to succeed in the operation itself, but the time lapse until the operation timing is long. There is a possibility that more balls than the reported number will enter. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is high, it is difficult to succeed in the operation itself, but the time lapse until the operation timing is short. Can be prevented from entering more balls than the number reported as.

  In addition, since the duration of the remaining round game R differs depending on the difference in the execution timing of the notification, the adopted display effect may be controlled to be switchable in accordance with the duration of the remaining round game R. For example, when the duration of the remaining round game R is short, a display effect is configured with a moving image that can be completed in a short period, and when the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, the display effect is displayed with a moving image that lasts for a long period. The effect may be configured. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a problem that the loading of the moving image does not end in the remaining time of the round game R and the round game R ends without being displayed.

  In the above-described first control example, the case where the number of balls to enter the storage channel 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number, is not limited thereto, and the number of balls to enter is arbitrary. Can be set to For example, an extremely small number (for example, two) of balls may be made to enter the storage channel 1231 so as to increase the profit obtained by the player. In this case, at the start of the round in which the notification is made, the player can be prompted to stop firing the ball. At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 or the like may give a notification such as "Stop firing".

  In the first control example described above, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the operation effect and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 may be shifted by a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation of the operation button 300 using the state near the interference member 6930 (flowing state of the ball) as a guide, and it is possible to improve the attention to the operation effect.

  In the above-described first control example, the timing at which the error command is set in S1515 is the timing at which the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 is performed, and the solenoid 1510 is turned off. If the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 even after the setting, the discharge from the storage channel 1231 is continued, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, another movable object that regulates the passage of the ball of the outlet 1150 is provided, and is driven (excited) to allow the passage of the ball of the outlet 1150 when the power is turned on. May be controlled to change the state so as to restrict the passage of the ball. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the timing when the error command is generated. When an error command is set for deceleration due to dirt, etc., it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused to the player. After that, the error command is canceled by turning off the power or the like, and the power is turned on again, so that the game can be restarted from a state in which the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (a state immediately before the error command is set). .

  Note that the control of the movable object is not limited to the control depending on whether or not an error command is set. For example, control may be performed so that the state changes when the power is turned on and off. In this case, for example, when the game cannot be continued due to a sudden power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231.

  The control of the movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, it is not necessary to be able to restart the game from the state immediately before the error command is set until the case where the setting of the error command is based on a fraud and the RAM 203 is cleared. Before restarting the game, the operation of the movable object may be controlled to discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231.

  The form of the movable object is not limited at all. For example, a drive device is separately provided, and the means for preventing the discharge of the ball may use the regulating member 1600, or may be configured so that the interference member 6930 can be maintained in the extended state as a process at the time of power-off. The interference member 6930 may be employed as the movable member.

  In the first control example described above, the control flow is configured based on the number of rounds started in the big hit effect processing S2505. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control is performed based on the start of a specific effect, such as the start of a round game R in which a ball can pass through a specific area 4830 or the start of a round game R in which an operation effect is started. A flow may be configured. In this case, even if the round in which the effect is to be performed is changed due to a specification change or the like, a significant change in the control flow can be made unnecessary. it can.

  Also, the control flow is configured such that the flag turned on in the control flow in the case of determining the third round in the big hit production process S2505 is turned off in the control flow in the case of determining the fifth round. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed so that the flag is turned off at the end of the control mode set in the third round, that is, at the end of the round of the round R in the fourth round. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of changing the specifications when adopting the four-round jackpot game.

  In the first control example, the case where the interference member 6930 retreats at the start timing of the fifth round of the round game R has been described as the nineteenth operation pattern, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the evacuation may be performed 0.5 seconds before the start timing of the round game R. In this case, the round game R of the fifth round can be started in a state in which the ball whose flow has been restricted by the interference member 6930 is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

  In the first control example described above, the case where the operation button 300 is pressed according to the effect to emit light around the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the presence or absence of the effect, control may be performed so that the light around the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 is emitted when the operation button 300 is operated at a predetermined timing. In this case, the player's willingness to press the operation button 300 can be improved when the operation effect during the round game R is not executed.

  In the first control example, the case where the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment is controlled has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment may be controlled. In this case, by the operation of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, it is possible to easily set the number of excess winnings and determine whether or not an excess winning occurs.

  In the second control example, the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111 by the drive control in which only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by employing the open / close plate 1300 described in the first embodiment and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a drive (excitation) mode in which the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in a closed state for a predetermined period during the round game R, an auxiliary entrance is provided. The ball may flow down to 9111. In this case, the ball can flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 without dividing the board for guiding the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  In this case, by setting the period during which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state to less than 0.2 second, the discharge port 1150 is again discharged before the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (in a state where the ball is almost discharged). Of the ball can be restricted. Therefore, the sphere can flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 without reducing the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second control example, the case has been described where the display mode of the round number display unit 714 and the sub-round display unit 714b is controlled to be switched based on the elapse of the standby time TK. It is not limited. For example, control may be performed so as to be switched based on the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, by controlling to switch the display based on the fact that the number of the balls stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a is nine (the storage channel 1231 is full when the interference member 6930 is overhanging), The change timing of the display mode can be recognized by the player as the timing when the storage channel 1231 is full.

  The number inside the storage channel 1231 may be determined based on the value of the remaining ball counter 203p, or a separate contact sensor may be provided in the storage channel 1231 to directly detect the number of balls. You may do it.

  In the second control example, the case where the character of “+ chance” is displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 at a predetermined timing of a predetermined jackpot type has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, irrespective of the jackpot type, the character “+ chance” may be displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 during a period when a ball can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111, or the auxiliary entrance may be performed. The character “+ chance” of the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 may be controlled to be able to be displayed as a fluttering display during a period during which the ball opening 9111 cannot be entered. For example, when the number-of-rounds display portion 714 is displayed brightly, the character “+ chance” may be displayed.

  In addition, as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721, the character “+ chance” may be continuously displayed for a certain period, or displayed so that display and non-display can be switched in a short period. May be.

  In the second control example, the configuration is such that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is controlled to open to one side based on the jackpot type and the lapse of time from the start of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the occurrence frequency and the occurrence timing of the one-sided opening may be changed based on the jackpot type or the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the firing mode of firing the ball so that the ball reaches the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (reducing the effect of the firing mode).

  In the third control example, the case where the sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 is continuously discharged while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the interference member 6930 and controlling it to be in the protruding state at a predetermined timing, the case where the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 while the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is configured. be able to. This makes it possible to complicate the selection of the shooting mode of the ball by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing casually.

  In the third control example, the case where the type of the jackpot game shifted based on the passage of the ball through the specific area 4830 is one type is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there are prepared a plurality of types of jackpot games in which the number of rounds, the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained, the number of time reductions that can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, and the like are determined, and the jackpot determined by when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 You may comprise so that the kind of game may change. In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting the timing at which the shooting of the ball is stopped to aim at the passage of the ball to the specific area 4830, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the third control example, the case where the small hit is determined from the plurality of small hit types based on the numerical value of the small hit type counter value C6 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the small hitting A or the small hitting B (or another small hitting) may be determined without depending on the small hitting type counter value C6. In this case, the relationship between the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be made uniform.

  In the third control example, the case where the time (0.4 seconds) in which the upper limit of the number of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is two is set as the interval at which the small hits are continuously executed is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper limit of the number of ejected balls may be one (the interval at which the small hit is executed is 0.2 seconds), or the upper limit is three or more (the interval at which the small hit is executed is 0.6 seconds or more). good. In addition, changing the operation pattern of the distribution device 4850 with changing the small hitting interval is naturally allowed.

  In the third control example, the case where the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are limited to the balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a has been mainly described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as described in the fifth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball that has entered the second entrance 640 also joins the storage channel 1231. In this case, compared to the case described in the third control example, it is necessary to keep a larger number of storages in the storage channel 1231 as much as the ball has entered the second ball inlet 640 but flows into the storage channel 1231. Can be.

  Therefore, even if the ball is excessively guided to the second entrance 640 or is in a nail state, and the ball is difficult to be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a (or depending on the situation, In other words, it is possible to prevent a sufficient number of balls from being hardly stored in the storage channel 1231 in the time reduction game. Accordingly, by stopping the launch of the ball, the timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 can be maintained for a long time, so that the timing at which the player can select the timing for stopping the launch of the ball is increased. it can.

  In other words, the player can stop firing the ball by selecting a desired timing while grasping the number of remaining time savings, so that the player's concentration can be improved as compared with the case where the time saving game is played casually. It is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, means for suppressing the timing at which the player can select the timing to stop firing the ball may be employed. For example, by distributing the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 (including the case where the fluctuation time becomes long), even if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remains, the interval at which the small hit is executed. Is extended (the small hit is not executed until the fluctuation stop). Accordingly, it is possible to increase the types of modes in which the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231, and it is possible to provide a portion that is difficult to predict in the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, by providing distribution for the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2, a plurality of variations can be given to the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, and the effect can be complicated.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the sphere that has entered the second entrance 640 does not merge with the storage channel 1231, but acts on a sphere that flows down inside the storage channel 1231. In this case, the action on the sphere flowing down inside the storage channel 1231 may be changed according to the number (or frequency) of spheres entering the second entrance 640.

  As a first method, for example, a movable piece that can be displaced is arranged in a flow path of a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance 640, and the movable piece is displaced when the game ball collides with the movable piece. In such a configuration, while the movable piece enters the storage channel 1231 due to the displacement, when the game ball separates from (passes through) the movable piece, the movable piece retreats outside the storage channel 1231 by a return spring or the like. By doing so, the movable piece may enter the storage channel 1231 so that the flow of the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 can be inhibited (stoppable or decelerable).

  As a second method, for example, a sphere that has entered the second entrance 640 does not flow into the storage channel 1231, but partially enters (for example, a ball AP 54 shown in FIG. 46A). No.), the ball may flow down via the state, so that the ball may enter the first specific winning opening 1000a and contact the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to correlate the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 with the flow-down state of the ball inside the storage channel 1231 without using a movable piece.

  In the third control example, the case where the small hit A or the small hit B that is completed in 1.8 seconds is determined as the small hit type is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is possible to determine the small hit Z such that the opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times as described above in 0.1 seconds between the opening besides the small hit A and the small hit B. May be controlled.

  In this case, 3.3 seconds can be secured as a time for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Guide to the mouth 1000a can be facilitated. Further, since the interval between the open periods (the period during which the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state) is 0.1 second, the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3.3 seconds can be stored in the storage channel 1231.

  For the player, the small hit Z is positioned as a small hit that allows the ball to be more easily stored in the storage channel 1231 in one small hit than the small hit A or the small hit B. Therefore, after the small hit Z occurs, the game can be continued in a state where the ball is sufficiently stored in the storage channel 1231, and the firing of the ball is stopped in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830. The degree of freedom in selecting the timing to perform can be improved.

  In the third control example, the execution interval of the small hit game corresponds to the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830, and it is more profitable for the player to play the ball so that the ball easily enters the specific area 4830. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the probability change state with a predetermined probability, and the ball falls through the specific area 4830, and the fall flag (the flag for shifting the probability change state to the normal state or the time saving state) is turned on. It may be controlled to be set. In other words, since it is disadvantageous for the player to make the ball enter the specific area 4830, it is possible to execute the game in a game mode in which the ball does not easily enter the specific area 4830 while the probable change state continues. it can.

  Here, in the third control example, since three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231 at a time, the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 with a high probability. As a game mode in which it is difficult to enter a ball, for example, a mode in which the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231) is set to 2 or less per small hit game, or a small hit game In order to maintain the interval in a period in which only two balls are discharged, a mode in which the holding of the special symbol 2 is not interrupted is exemplified.

  In the above-described third control example, as the small hit type, the small hits A and B in which the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 during the small hit game is small have been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as another operation mode of the small hit C completed in the same 1.8 seconds, the opening / closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state, and changes to the closed state after maintaining the open state for 0.2 seconds. Then, it operates in such a manner that it changes to the open state after being maintained in the closed state for 1.4 seconds, and then changes to the closed state after being maintained in the open state for 0.2 seconds. Control may be performed such that driving to the open position is omitted (or the drive returns to the closed position in a minimum time). In this case, at the time of occurrence of the small hit C, since many balls can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 while lowering the probability of the balls passing through the specific area 4830, the number of stored balls so far is significantly reduced (reset). S) can be given a meaning as a distribution of small hits, and by providing the player with surprise, the interest of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the small hit C is a great loss to the player that the meaning of storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 after a few changes of the special symbol 2 to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 is lost at a stroke. It is desirable to set the occurrence probability to several percent (for example, 0.1%) because it is a small hit that makes you feel. Further, in order to distinguish the small hits A and B from each other, it is possible to control such that an effect dedicated to the small hits C is executed by the third symbol display device 81, or the same effect as the other small hits A and B. The effect may be completed, and the discharge of a large number of balls may not be noticed until the player sees and confirms the storage channel 1231.

  In the third control example described above, a case has been described where the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed after the small hitting game, whereby the ball is entirely discharged from the storage channel 1231. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the opening and closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, the number of discharges is adjusted by another driving device arranged so as to be able to maintain the regulating member 1600 in the stored state, or the interference member 6930 is arranged in the storage channel 1231 to form the opening and closing plate. Even when 1300 is in the closed state, the number of discharged balls may be adjusted by the interference member 6930. In this case, for example, even if a long variation (for example, about 2 to 3 minutes) is selected as the variation of the special symbol and the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state for a predetermined time, the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 may be maintained. Can be prevented from decreasing.

  In the fourth control example, the case where the production round Rpt, the production round Rpa, and the V winning prize round Rv are successively configured with the start round Rpb being the third round has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, the jackpot game may be configured with 16 rounds more than 6 rounds, and the start round Rpb may be configured as the 10th round instead, or both the 3rd and 10th rounds may be configured as the start round Rpb. May be. In this case, by changing the timing of setting the corresponding effect start flags 223ya to 223yd to ON, the control flow (control flow of the effect switching process (S4701)) can be diverted, so that the specification can be easily changed. Can be.

  In the fourth control example, the case where the effect in the round game R and the effect in the interval period are separated has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if it is determined during the previous round of the V winning round Rv (the post-production gaming round Rpa) that the game ball passes through the specific area Rv in the V winning round Rv, the V winning round Rv and the post-production game An effect extending from the middle of the interval period to the round Rpa to the V winning round Rv may be executed. In this case, even if a long effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the effect from being delayed.

  In the above fourth control example, even if the launch of the ball is continued after "hitting" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the fourth round of the round game R. The case where the specified number of balls do not enter the detection sensor 1240 has been described because control is performed so as not to be ejected, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the round game R of the fourth round, the opening / closing plate may be closed (long-closed) at a predetermined timing and the ball may be discharged from the storage channel 1231. In this case, when a plurality of balls are on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300, an additional ball is added to the detection sensor 1240, and thus the fourth round of the round game R ends without waiting for a specified time (30 seconds). there's a possibility that. Therefore, as a disadvantage given to the player when the ball is continued to be fired after "not hit" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the effect performed in the fourth round of the game R is interrupted. The disadvantage is that you can only see it up to that point.

  When such a disadvantage is provided, it is desirable that the timing of displaying “do not hit” be a timing before the storage channel 1231 becomes full. For example, based on the detection mode by the detection sensor 1240 and the detection mode of the sphere passing through the discharge port 1150, the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is monitored, and the number of spheres inside the storage channel 1231 becomes full. When it is near the tongue (for example, seven), “Do not hit” may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where an extra ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 due to the slow execution of the display even though the emission of the ball is stopped according to the display.

  In the fourth control example, when the storage channel 1231 is filled with a ball, a predetermined operation effect is executed during the round game R, and if the operation effect is successful, advantageous information in the next round game R is displayed. A case has been described in which a predetermined profit can be obtained (a ball can pass through the specific area 4830) by playing the next round game R in accordance with the information, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a predetermined operation effect is executed in an interval between rounds which is started when a specified number of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240, and when the operation effect is successful, advantageous information in the next round game R is obtained. A predetermined profit may be obtained by playing the next round game R according to the information. In this case, since the operation effect can be executed in a period that is not changed by the game mode of the inter-round interval, the possibility that the operation effect is interrupted can be reduced.

  In the fourth control example, the case where the X-th ball is entered in the storage channel 1231 is determined by determining that the detection time of the ball by the detection sensor 1240 is long (2 seconds). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the start of the round game R, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is controlled by a predetermined counter (winning number counter 203w, discharge number counter 203x) so as to be determined in advance. On the other hand, the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 after the start of the round game R is added, and when it is determined that the total has reached the specified number (10 in this control example), the Xth ball is determined. It may be determined that the ball has entered.

  In the fifth control example, in the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52, the period in which the open / close plate 12300 repeats the change between the open state and the closed state is configured at one second intervals, but is not necessarily limited to this. It can be changed in design. For example, depending on the degree of deceleration of the ball when a load is applied from the rolling arc portion 12252, the frequency of the occurrence of a continuous ball, or the like, the interval may be shortened, may be increased, or may be different. May be combined to form an operation scenario. In this case, basically, the shorter the distance, the greater the total load that the ball receives when it moves between the open / close plate 12300 and the rolling arc portion 12252 and moves back and forth. The effect becomes remarkable, and a ball is easily generated.

  In the fifth control example, the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52 are the closing (short closing) of the opening / closing plate 12300 that cannot discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 and the opening / closing plate that can discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231. Although described as a difference from the closing (long closing) of the 12300, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operation scenario of performing an operation of closing (second long closing, closing for 0.4 seconds) in order to have a variation in length as a closing of the opening and closing plate 12300 capable of discharging a ball from the storage channel 1231 is described. May be provided. In this case, the longer the closing of the opening / closing plate 12300, the larger the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the larger the number of spheres that can enter when the opening / closing plate 12300 is next opened. can do.

  In the fifth control example described above, the case where the winning tempo (the period required until the specified number of winnings) is changed by short closing of the opening and closing plate 12300 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a long-time closing of the open / close plate 12300 is performed immediately after the start of the round game R, and from the start of the round game R until the ball actually starts being guided by the detection sensor 1240 (until the open / close plate 12300 is opened). ) May be long. In this case, when the opening / closing plate 12300 is in the closed state, it reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 12300, reaches the terminal surface 3251b before the opening / closing plate 12300 is opened, and falls between the detection sensor 1240 and the terminal surface 3251b. The hit ball heads to the out port 66 as it is.

  In another example of the fifth control example, a case has been described in which the V flag 203s may be set to off by a ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 during a jackpot game, but is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, in the case where a probability change state is provided as a game state to be shifted to after the big hit game ends, and a special symbol (for example, special symbol 2) mainly changing in the probability change state is provided with a small hit distribution, the small hit game is performed during the small hit game. The falling flag (flag for shifting the probable change state to the normal state or the time saving state) may be set to ON when the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 enters the third discharge path sensor 13813.

  In this case, for example, as the small hit type, the second switching device 13850 allows the small hit to allow the ball to pass through the third discharge path sensor 13813 and the second hit to allow the ball to pass through the third discharge path sensor 13813. The 2 switching device 13850 may be provided with a small hit that regulates. Thereby, it is possible to configure a gaming property in which the probability change state may be ended by the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the small hit game during the probability change state.

  In another example of the fifth control example, a case has been described where the discharge path sensor 13810 that guides the ball is switched according to the state of the switching devices 13840 and 13850 that are switched in conjunction with the operation of the solenoid 1510, but not necessarily. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined probability (such as a jackpot type, a game mode, and the like, and whether or not a ball is to be taken at a gate passing timing when a jackpot game is started by passing through a predetermined gate, is determined downstream of the outlet 1710. A rotating member that rotates at a constant speed is provided with a ball receiving portion on which the ball rides, and the ball is placed at a predetermined time (for example, two minutes) after the ball is loaded on the ball receiving portion. The rotating member may be configured to rotate so as to pass through a falling sensor that turns on a falling flag (a flag for shifting a certain state to a normal state or a time saving state).

  In another example of the fifth control example, while the resistance change member 13854 is in contact with the special rotation member 13851, the special rotation member 13851 does not rotate by its own weight of the regulating member 13852 (the resistance is not sufficient). (Large) case has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, while the resistance change member 13854 is in contact with the special rotation member 13851, the special rotation member 13851 may be slowly rotated (the resistance is slightly small) by the weight of the regulating member 13852. By setting this rotation speed to a rotation speed sufficient to return to the state in which the regulating member 13852 has fallen in 5 seconds, the state of the regulating member 13852 at the timing at which short opening and closing during the round game R is started is overturned. State.

  In another example of the fifth control example, the case where the resistance change member 13854 interferes with both left and right end portions of the defining portion 13830 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that interference occurs only at one end of the defining portion 13830 (the end where the operating member 13820 reaches when the solenoid 1510 is in the excited state). In this case, the arrangement of the regulating member 13852 is maintained during the interval between rounds, and the solenoid 1510 is excited to start the round game R of the next round, so that the regulating member 13852 starts to fall down, so that during the interval between rounds, It is possible to configure a high game rate with a high occurrence rate of an event in which a ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 is guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813.

  In another example of the fifth control example, the case where the increase in the resistance of the special rotation member 13851 is canceled after the interval between rounds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the resistance change member 13854 may be in contact with the special rotation member 13851 even in the inter-round interval, and the posture of the special rotation member 13851 may be periodically switched while the resistance increase is maintained. In this case, the special rotating member 13851 does not return to the original state at the end time or the start time of the big hit game, and also the number of times the special rotating member 13851 changes its posture in one big hit game depends on the game mode of the player, In addition, since the jackpot game is allowed to start regardless of the state of the special rotating member 13851, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and prevent capture.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points not to win more than the target number>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. And a ball entry preventing unit that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the entrance when a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a predetermined period by the detection unit. Machine A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly and vigorously on the operating member, an extra ball is required between the start of the operation of the operating member and the drop of the ball from the operating member. However, there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of balls may pass through the detection port because there is a possibility of passing through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means can make it difficult for the predetermined number or more balls to pass through the detection means. Therefore, irrespective of the magnitude of the momentum of the ball in the state arranged on the upstream side of the entrance, the ease of passage of the ball when passing through the entrance is determined by comparing a predetermined number of balls with a predetermined number of balls. It can be changed with subsequent spheres. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port.

  In addition, as the ball entry preventing means, means for changing the ease of passage of the ball in accordance with the detection result of the detecting means, means for constantly maintaining the ease of passage of the ball in the ball entrance, etc. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the ball entry preventing means includes: a container for accommodating the ball passing through the ball entrance; an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits the container; A first state in which the ball can pass therethrough, and a discharge switching unit that is switched in a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, wherein the storage unit is provided between the entrance port and the discharge port. A game machine A2 characterized by being formed with a volume that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, the accommodation means is formed with a capacity for accommodating a maximum of a predetermined number of balls between the entrance port and the exit port. When the balls are stored in the storage means while the means are maintained in the second state, the balls stored in the storage means can prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the predetermined number or more balls from passing through the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A2, the entering ball switching means is formed so as to be maintained in the second state while the discharge switching means is in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the accommodation means from the entrance while the ball is being ejected from the accommodation means. The operation timings of the discharge switching unit and the incoming ball switching unit may be simultaneous or different.

  The gaming machine A4, wherein the gaming machine A2 or A3 is provided with a driving unit which is also used as the discharge switching unit and the incoming ball switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the combined driving means. Thereby, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, after the incoming ball switching means starts changing the state from the second state to the first state, the discharge switching means moves from the first state to the first state. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that a state change is started in a state in which the state change is started toward two states, and the state changes are completed almost simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the accommodation means from being ejected from the ejection port after the entrance switching means is in the first state. While preventing (while preventing irregular winning), the ball switching device can be started to operate from the second state before the ball is discharged from the discharge port, so that the discharge from the discharge port is performed. As compared with the case where the operation of the ball-input switching means is started after the completion of the game, the number of balls flowing through the game area and passing through the ball-input switching means toward the out port can be reduced.

  The order of the state change may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching unit, or a dedicated driving unit may be provided for each switching unit to control the timing. May be.

  A gaming machine A6, wherein any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 includes a changing means for changing the maximum number of the housing means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodation units can be changed by the changing unit, so that the predetermined number is temporarily (for example, in a specific round). A state in which more balls than the number are accommodated in the accommodation means can be formed. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to reconfigure a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of numerical values are changed by using accommodating means having the same shape (it is possible to cope with a difference in specifications). As a result, development costs can be reduced as compared with the case where a shape is created for each specification.

  In the gaming machine A6, the entrance is connected to the first entrance and the storage means downstream of the first entrance, so that the ball flowing down the game area can pass therethrough. And a second entrance where the passage is switched by the entrance switching means, wherein a ball enters the accommodation means from the first entrance and the accommodation from the second entrance. In the case where the ball enters the means, the maximum number of accommodated means is changed, and the changing means selectively sets which of the entrances allows the ball to pass therethrough. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the ball entering from the first entrance and the ball entering from the second entrance can be stored together in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required space as compared with a case where separate storage units are provided respectively.

  In the gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interference means capable of projecting into the accommodation means, wherein the interference means interferes with a ball which is projected and stored inside the accommodation means, and A game machine A8 characterized in that the maximum accommodation number of accommodation means is changed depending on whether or not the accommodation means is evacuated to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the number of balls to be accommodated is changed by changing the volume inside the accommodation means without changing the path of the ball entering the accommodation means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the accommodation number without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the accommodation means, and is configured to be able to arrange a ball on the front side during evacuation. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of evacuation can be hidden by the ball arranged in front. This makes it possible to make the operation of the interference means inconspicuous while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Point AK to hide the number of stored balls>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. And a ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for the balls to pass through the entrance when the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a prescribed period. A game machine comprising: accommodation means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the entrance, and a visibility-reducing means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the ball accommodated in the accommodation means. AK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the visibility downstream of the detection port does not change, the effect of the effect of the effect of the ball passing through the detection port becomes insufficient, and the attention power may be reduced. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AK1, at least a part of the balls accommodated in the accommodation means is made difficult to be visually recognized by the visibility obstruction means, so that the effect differs depending on the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means. In the case of employing a mechanism for generating the action, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's expectation of the effect to be generated coincides with the effect to be generated. As a result, the power of attention for the effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AK1, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits the storage means, a first state in which the ball can pass through the outlet, and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the outlet. Wherein the accommodation means is formed to have a capacity for accommodating the predetermined number of balls at the maximum between the entrance port and the exit port. Machine AK2.

  According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK1, the ball can be stored in the accommodation means, so that the period in which the effect by the ball can be maintained can be extended.

  A gaming machine AK3, characterized in that the gaming machine AK1 or AK2 is configured to change the action of the visibility-reducing means based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the player's attention to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition can be improved.

  Note that the form of the predetermined condition is not limited at all. For example, as the predetermined condition, detection that an operation means operable by the player has been operated by the player at a predetermined timing may be employed. In this case, the magnitude of the deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means and the actual operation timing is detected, and the degree of change in the action of the visibility-reducing means is changed according to the magnitude. Is also good. For example, changes may be made so that the visibility of the ball accommodated in the accommodation means is better when the degree of displacement is small compared to when the degree of displacement is large. In this case, the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be improved. Alternatively, the reverse is also possible.

  Further, for example, a condition that a ball has passed a predetermined entrance hole may be adopted as the predetermined condition. In this case, for example, the degree of change in the operation of the visibility-reducing means may be changed according to the number of balls that have passed through a predetermined entrance in a predetermined period. For example, the change may be made such that the greater the number of balls that have passed through the entrance, the better the visibility of the balls accommodated in the accommodation means. In this case, the player can be motivated to fire more balls. Alternatively, the reverse is also possible. In this case, since the adjustment of the launching strength of the ball can be made eager, it is possible to suppress a casual game.

<Points for performing launch stop instruction utilizing this structure: Aim A>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. In a state in which the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a notification for urging the player to stop firing game balls toward the entrance. A game machine AKK1 characterized by being performed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly and vigorously on the operating member, an extra ball is required between the start of the operation of the operating member and the drop of the ball from the operating member. However, there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of balls may pass through the detection port because there is a possibility of passing through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AKK1, it is possible to execute a notification for prompting the stop of the launch of the game ball, so that the extra ball passes through the detection port by causing the player to play the game as the notification. Possibilities can be reduced.

  In addition, as the notification, the ball entrance is configured as a starting port, and the purpose is to prevent further ball entry that occurs when the number of reserved balls is full, or Although a lottery is not executed, a lottery entrance is configured as a special winning opening, and a purpose for preventing a ball loss which occurs when the end of the round game is approaching is exemplified.

  Further, the manner of executing the notification is not limited at all. For example, the notification of the purpose may be executed by generating a display urging the stop of the firing, or the notification of the target may be performed by extinguishing (prohibiting, hiding, and erasing) the display promoting (prompting) the firing. You may.

  In addition, the effect on the player when the notification is ignored is not limited at all. For example, by ignoring the notification and continuing the firing of the game ball, an abnormal notification (error notification) may be made to the player, or a ball loss may occur (the probability increases). Alternatively, the content other than the prize ball (for example, the right to shift to the special game state) and the expected profit may not be obtained.

  That is, it may be set so that if the game ball is fired or stopped in the firing mode as informed, it is not possible to obtain the profit that would normally be obtained. In this case, regardless of whether the game is fired in accordance with the notification or fired or stopped ignoring the notification, the type of special game acquired (the player May be configured to be variable.

  In addition, as the predetermined period, a period required until a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the storage means (storage channel) for storing the game balls that have entered the ball entrance (a period that varies depending on the type of ball entry) ), And a period until a predetermined control mode started by entering a game ball into the entrance is completed.

  In the gaming machine AKK1, a situation is provided in which a special gaming state is provided in a state where a lottery entrance port for executing a lottery relating to a state change of the entrance port is provided, and the number of game balls stored in the entrance port is 0. Game machine AKK2 characterized by the fact that the maximum number of occurrences occurs.

  According to the gaming machine AKK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK1, the number stored in the entrance can change the possibility of shifting to the special gaming state. In other words, the sense of expectation to shift to the special game state can be greatly changed depending on whether the number of game balls stored in the entrance is 0 or not.

  In addition, as the number of game balls to be stored, the number of game balls when actually accumulating game balls, such as a ball staying downstream of the entrance port, and the entry data to the entrance port are The number of pieces of data to be held (the number of pieces of hold) and the like are exemplified.

  A game machine AKK3, wherein the game machine AKK2 is configured to be able to perceive in advance a point of transition to a special game state based on the game balls being stored in the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine AKK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK2, the occurrence of an event in which a player stands before the transition to the special gaming state can be reduced by knowing the point in time when the gaming machine shifts to the special gaming state. .

  In addition, examples of the means for perceiving include a method of perceiving the flowing state of the game ball by making it visible, a method of notifying by a display device, and the like.

  In the gaming machine AKK2 or AKK3, even after the possibility of transition to the special game state occurs, a game ball can be added to the entrance to allow the ball to enter the special game state. A gaming machine AKK4 characterized in that it can be shifted to a special game state later than the scheduled shift.

  According to the gaming machine AKK4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK2 or AKK3, the timing of transition to the special game state is changed by firing of the game ball after the possibility of transition to the special game state occurs, It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from losing interest before shifting to the special game state.

<Points for setting the upper limit of ball entry: Aim B>
The gaming machine AKK11, wherein an upper limit within a predetermined condition period is set in the calculation of the predetermined number of balls in the gaming machine AKK1.

  According to the gaming machine AKK11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK1, the higher the frequency of the ball entering the entrance, the higher the frequency of the ball entering the entrance before the notification to prompt the stop of the firing is executed. The number of spheres can be increased.

  In the gaming machine AKK1 or AKK11, the gaming machine AKK12 is characterized in that the length of a predetermined period corresponds to a large number of the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine AKK12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AKK1 or the gaming machine AKK11, it is possible to easily grasp the relationship between the period required for the game and the gaming ball fired toward the entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11, and the gaming machine AKK12, the number of game balls that can enter the entrance by the end of the predetermined period is determined by the number of game balls entering the entrance. The game machine AKK13, which is configured to be changeable depending on the difference between the game machine AKK13 and the game machine AKK13.

  According to the gaming machine AKK13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11 or the gaming machine AKK12, the number of gaming balls that can enter the entrance by the end of the predetermined period depends on the entering mode. Since they are different, it is possible to cause the player to devise the manner of launching the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling free.

  In any one of the gaming machines AKK1 and the gaming machines AKK11 to AKK13, by stopping the launch of the gaming ball based on the notification, it is possible to prevent the delay in determining the profit based on the entering of the ball into the entrance. A game machine AKK14 comprising a fixed delay prevention means capable of executing control.

  According to the gaming machine AKK14, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AKK1, the gaming machines AKK11 to the gaming machines AKK13, the control for preventing the delay of the determination of the profit given to the player due to the stop of the launch of the gaming ball is prevented. Can be executed, so that a period in which the ball is allowed to enter the entrance (a period including a predetermined period) has passed before the scheduled profit is determined, and the player obtains the planned profit. Missing can be prevented.

<If launching is continued after launch stop indication is displayed: Aim C>
A game machine AKK15 characterized in that, in any of the game machines AKK1, the game machines AKK11 to the game machine AKK14, before and after the notification is executed, the state change state of the incoming ball switching means is similarly maintained.

  According to the gaming machine AKK15, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11 to the gaming machine AKK14, the game ball can be generated under the same condition even after the notification, so that the game ball can be generated. The degree of freedom in selecting the firing mode of the camera can be improved.

  Under the premise that the magnitude of the profit obtained by stopping the launch of the game ball and the gain obtained by continuing the launch can be changed, the launch mode of the game ball is determined based on the comparison result. Can be changed.

  For example, when the profit obtained by stopping the launch is early jackpot acquisition (acquisition of the right to shift to the special game state), and there is no time left to execute the jackpot game due to circumstances. (E.g., if the player has circumstances, or it is just before the closing time), even if abandoning the early jackpot acquisition, a lot of prize balls are paid out based on letting game balls win at the entrance. Acquiring is more profitable for the player.

  In this case, if the entry probability to the entrance changes before and after the notification is executed (the entry probability decreases after the notification), the player stops firing the game ball and shifts to the jackpot. There is a possibility that the game will end without watching the production. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine of the present case, if the firing of the game ball is continued even after the notification, the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the entrance may be obtained even slightly, Motivation to play until full time can be increased. Thereby, the operating rate of the gaming machine (for example, an index of the ratio of the length of the gaming time to the business hours) can be improved.

<Instructions for operation when launch stop notification>
In any of the gaming machines AKK1 and AKK11 to AKK15, an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and during the period in which the notification is being performed, a second notification for prompting the operation of the operation means is provided. A game machine AKK16 comprising an instruction means.

  According to the gaming machine AKK16, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11 to the gaming machine AKK15, the player is allowed to operate the operating means by notifying the player of the operation of the operating means. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming idle while firing is stopped.

  The gaming machine AKK17, wherein in the gaming machine AKK16, the second notification is updated in accordance with a timing at which the notification prompting the stop of the firing is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AKK17, the second notification is updated in accordance with the timing at which the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed, so that the player is bored compared to the case where the content of the second notification is the same each time. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AKK17, the second notification is configured such that the earlier the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed, the easier the operation difficulty of the operating means becomes. .

  According to the gaming machine AKK18, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK17, the earlier the timing at which the notification prompting the stop of the firing is executed, the easier the operation becomes to be successful, so that the gaming ball is eagerly fired at the entrance. be able to.

<Direction decision by previous ball entry>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. In a state where the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a predetermined period, the mode of effect relating to the game ball entering the entrance is being executed. A gaming machine AKK20 characterized in that the game machine AKK20 is defined regardless of whether a game ball enters the entrance in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine AKK20, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance relating to the game ball that entered the entrance.

  In the case where the gaming machine is provided with an operation means and performs an effect for prompting a player to perform an operation in the effect, a timing (timing in a predetermined period) at which a predetermined number of game balls enter the entrance of the ball is detected. May be changed according to the effect. For example, control may be performed such that the earlier the timing, the lower the difficulty of the operation effect. In this case, the greater the profit obtained by the player due to the successful operation effect, the more the launch of the game ball to the entrance can be promoted (the stop of the launch of the game ball can be suppressed).

  The gaming machine AKK21 according to the gaming machine AKK20, wherein the effect is configured based on a point in time at which a game ball enters a right-occurring entrance located below the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine AKK21, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AKK20, an effect corresponding to the time of entry into the right-occurring entrance opening is configured, so that the effect is associated with the actual flow of the game ball. It can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AKK20 or AKK21, when the first state is set, the rendering is performed in accordance with the manner in which the game ball enters the entrance when the first state is switched to the previous state. The gaming machine AKK22, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine AKK22, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK20 or AKK21, even if the manner of entering the game ball into the entrance in the first state during execution is the same as the previous state of the first state. The effect can be made different when the game ball enters the entrance of the game ball in a different manner, so that the player's attention to the effect currently being executed can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines AKK20 to AKK22, when the effect is executed in the first state, a start time of the effect is set before the first state is started. Gaming machine AKK23.

  According to the gaming machine AKK23, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AKK20 to AKK22, the effect can be started before the incoming ball switching means is switched to the first state, so that the switching timing of the incoming ball switching means The game can be continued while making it difficult for the player to be aware of the game.

  Further, when the effect is started during a period in which the incoming ball switching means is maintained in the second state, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the effect. In addition, it is possible to easily perform an effect that is continued for a long period of time, as compared with the case where the effect starts during the first state.

<Points to suppress unnecessary balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Delay means for delaying the flow of a ball at an upstream position of the entrance when the incoming ball switching means is in the second state, as compared with the case where the incoming ball switching means is in the first state; A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the out port, it is possible to strike the ball so that the ball does not fall from the operating member. There is a problem that a certain number of pitches actually occur depending on whether or not (the level of the technique of launching by the player).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the incoming ball switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing from the upstream position of the incoming port cannot be guided to the incoming port, the delay means operates. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to easily arrange the ball at an upstream position of the ball entrance until the ball switching device is switched to the first state. If the incoming ball switching means is in the first state while the ball is at a position upstream of the entrance, the ball is guided to the entrance. As a result, the effect of the player's launching technique on the actual pitch can be reduced, so that a beginner-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

  The mode of the delay unit is not limited. For example, it may be a drop restricting means composed of a horizontally long member for supporting the ball from below and restricting the ball from falling down to the end, or a projecting means formed of a projection for decelerating the ball by contact.

  In the gaming machine B1, the delay means increases the degree of delay in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side as compared with a case where the ball is arranged on the upstream side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases in a state where the ball is arranged downstream of the delay means, so that the attention of the ball flowing down along the delay means is increased. Can be improved.

  Note that the degree of the delay is not limited at all. For example, the velocity of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the incoming ball switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that a ball arranged on a downstream side has a shape in which an interval between the ball and the opening direction of the entrance is larger than a ball arranged on an upstream side. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in the downstream side of the delay means in such a manner that the distance between the opening direction of the entrance opening and the ball increases. Is formed, it is possible to suppress direct entry into the entrance to the ball when the ball vigorously flows down the delay means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the incoming ball switching means includes an ascent means for elevating a game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means comprises: A gaming machine B4, which is disposed below the lifting means in a state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is disposed below the ascending means in the first state, so that the ball can be moved from the incoming ball switching means. The ball can be delayed after being visually recognized by the player as if it had fallen. As a result, attention to the ball can be improved.

  The gaming machine B5, further comprising a climbing restricting means which is disposed on the upstream side of the ball flow path from the lifting means and regulates the upward movement of the ball and guides the ball in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is restricted by the upward restricting means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

  The gaming machine B6, wherein the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascent control means is provided with a rescue entrance for giving a predetermined benefit to the player.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, as a benefit different from the benefit generated when the ball passes through the entrance opening due to the ball that has been given a load when the ascent means is lifted and flew off. In addition, it is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the rescue entrance. Thus, even if the ball deviates from the downflow path to the entrance, it is possible to prevent the attention from being reduced, and the movement of the ball can enhance the interest of the player.

  The gaming machine B7 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, wherein the delay means includes a variable action portion having a different effect on a ball depending on a mode of arrival at the delay means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be made different depending on the mode of arrival at the delay means. As a result, it is possible to select different spheres to give different effects.

  It should be noted that the difference between the modes of arrival is not limited. For example, a difference in the arrival position of the ball with reference to the entrance port or a difference in the flowing direction of the ball before reaching the delay means may be used.

  In the gaming machine B7, the variable action section delays the flow of the ball reaching the delay means at a position separated from the entrance by a predetermined distance or less, while separating from the entrance by a predetermined distance or more. The gaming machine B8, wherein the gaming machine B8 does not act on a ball that has reached the delay means at a position.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B7, for a ball that is close to the entrance and cannot switch the state of the entrance switching means in time, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action section. On the other hand, an appropriate game speed can be maintained by not allowing the variable action portion to act on a ball that is far from the ball entrance and is sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball switching device.

<Point BK that makes use of the ball that arrived in the interval>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. , Compared to the ball that has reached the ball-input switching means while the ball-input switching means is in the first state, while the ball-input switching means is in the second state or from the second state. A gaming machine BK1 comprising a profit giving means that easily gives a profit to a player by a ball that has reached the entering ball switching means during the state change to the first state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the out port, it is possible to strike the ball so that the ball does not fall from the operating member. Depending on whether or not (the level of the player's launching technique), a substantial number of pitches occur, so that the player has to be careful in playing the game, and there is a problem that interest may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, the profit is given to the player by employing the profit giving means because the ball which arrives during the state change of the entering ball switching means can easily give the profit to the player. Since chances can be included in the magnitude of profits, it is possible to remove caution from games and improve interest.

  In addition, the mode of the profit provided to the player by the profit providing means is not limited at all. For example, a payout of prize balls, a lottery of a predetermined symbol, a right to shift to a high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game, or a determination of the next jackpot may be performed.

  For example, when the mode of the profit provided to the player by the profit providing means is a lottery of the special symbol 2, during the jackpot game, the ball is made to reach the ball entry switching means at a predetermined timing, so that the special symbol 2 The number of reserved balls can be increased to a predetermined upper limit. This suppresses the occurrence of an event in which the change of the reserved special symbol 1 is started because the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0 when the state shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Can be. Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is more advantageous to the player, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player wins unintentionally by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and disadvantageously occurs to the player. can do.

  In the gaming machine BK1, a ball is sent to the profit providing means by a load applied from the incoming ball switching means.

  According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which a ball is thrown to the profit provision means when the ball entry switching means is stopped.

  In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the profit that can be provided to the player by the profit providing means is equal to or more than a loss that can occur while the incoming ball switching means maintains the second state. .

  According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the player's attention to the profit giving means can be improved, and the game is performed so that the profit given by the profit giving means can be obtained. You can be encouraged to.

  The gaming machine BK4, wherein in any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, the profit giving means is controlled so that a plurality of types of periods maintained in the second state can be selected.

  According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, a period in which the profit giving means is maintained in the second state is selected in a plurality of types. It is possible to make it difficult to fire a ball in anticipation of the timing of change to the second state. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball through the profit provision means, it is possible to configure a gaming property in which the firing of the ball must be continued.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game launch>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A ball that can pass through the entrance in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance during a period in which the first state was formed before the entrance switching means maintains the first state; A gaming machine C1 comprising number changing means capable of changing the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, by the number changing means, the number of balls passing through the entrance hole in the state where the incoming ball switching means forms the first state, and before that, the incoming ball switching means uses the In the case where the first state is formed, it can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance, so that in a series of operation patterns in which the incoming ball switching means repeatedly forms the first state, the profit given to the player can be reduced. Adjustments can be made.

  The method of adjusting the profit is not limited. For example, due to having passed through a large number of balls through the ball entrance when the ball switching device previously formed the first state, the ball was then entered when the ball switching device formed the first state. The mode in which the number of balls that can enter the mouth may be suppressed may be used, or when the incoming ball switching unit next forms the first state due to a similar event, the profit of the player (not limited to outgoing balls, For example, the right to shift to the high probability state may be obtained).

  In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes: accommodation means for accommodating the balls passing through the entrance; an exit through which the balls pass when the balls exit the accommodation means; Discharge switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes. A gaming machine C2 comprising: an operation mode switching unit that enables a change in the number of balls ejected from the storage unit depending on a difference in operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the number of the balls accommodated in the accommodating means discharged from the outlet can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the balls remain in the accommodating means. And the number of remaining spheres can be made variable. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres required until the accommodation means is filled with spheres, and to physically change the maximum number of spheres passing through the entrance.

  The difference between the operation modes is not limited at all. For example, the operation periods may be different, or when a plurality of outlets are arranged, the discharge switching unit provided in which outlet is operated (operating target) may be different.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining an interval of discharging balls from the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, since the interval of discharging the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, regardless of the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means, The number of discharge balls from the discharge port can be defined according to the length of the period in which the switching unit is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls to be discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

  The mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load that the ball immediately before the discharge port receives from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or the flow path may be formed from the inner wall of the storage means. A rib that is protruded and applies a load to the sphere to decelerate the sphere may be used as the means.

  In the gaming machine C3, the gap maintaining means includes a protrusion protruding from an inner surface of the housing means in a flow path of the ball near the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, since the protruding portion is protruded into the downflow path, the downflowing ball is brought into contact with the protruding portion to decelerate, so that the ball having a short distance from the discharge port. And the falling speed of the sphere with a short distance from the discharge port can be prevented from changing greatly, and the falling speed of the sphere can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine C4, the accommodating means includes a discharge path for causing the ball to flow continuously in a predetermined flowing direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protruding portion is staggered from an opposing surface constituting the discharge path. A game machine C5, which is projected at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the protruding portions are alternately protruded from the opposing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the protruding portions collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path, thereby causing the balls to collide. It is possible to cause the ball to collide with the protrusion at predetermined intervals while being displaced in the vertical direction in the predetermined flow-down direction, and the action of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long time.

  In the gaming machine C5, the accommodation means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and that rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the falling velocity of the ball is formed to be higher than the falling velocity of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flow down at a higher speed than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so that the balls stored in the storage means. Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) for discharging the balls from the outlet can be kept constant.

  The gaming machine C7 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, wherein the entrance includes an opening for judging a special symbol big hit by passing a ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of times of the special symbol big hit determination and the number of entering balls into the entrance can be associated. Thereby, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed according to the number of times of determination of the special symbol required until the big hit is obtained.

  The gaming machine C7 includes starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting port can enter the accommodation means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine C8.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices provided can be reduced.

  Incidentally, the outlet includes a first outlet and a second outlet arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first outlet and the second outlet independently of each other. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are provided to the storage means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the ball is discharged from the second discharge port (under the same conditions). It may be arranged at a position where the number of remaining balls can be changed.

  In this case, the number of the balls remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, so that the flow speed of the balls flowing down the storage means changes. Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the number of balls discharged from the storage means.

  The arrangement of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodation means and the other may be arranged at an intermediate position of the accommodation means, or both may be arranged at the lower end, and a branched flow path for distributing the sphere may be arranged upstream thereof. You may do it.

  Further, the operation mode of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited. For example, they may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are opened, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the storage means can be reduced as compared with the case where balls are discharged from a single discharge port. Thereby, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls ejected from the out mouth during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  By the way, the first discharge port may be disposed at a lower end of the storage means, and the second discharge port may be disposed upstream of the first discharge port.

  In this case, when discharging the ball from the second discharge port, regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is stored in the storage means. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means varies, it is possible to easily keep the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls constant. Further, even if the launch of the ball is reduced due to clogging of the ball or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage means.

  Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on a downstream side branched at a lower end portion of the storage means.

  In this case, from the state in which the same number of balls are accommodated in the accommodation means, it is possible to switch from which outlet the last ejected ball is ejected through the operation mode of the ejection switching means. From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the discharge mode of the ball. That is, for example, in a case where the profit given to the player changes depending on which discharge port discharges the ball that is discharged last, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow-down state of the ball.

<During a round, as if the round was switched>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. An opening state switching unit configured to be able to switch between a period during which the ball easily passes through the entrance and a period during which the ball is hard to pass when the entrance switching unit maintains the first state. A gaming machine CK1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the ball is entered in the same manner in the winning opening in each round, the attention to the winning opening may not be sufficiently improved. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CK1, while the entrance switching unit maintains the first state, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball entry mode to the entrance by the opening-side switching unit. .

  The mode of the open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of a movable object disposed on the upstream side of the detection unit, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detection unit. May be.

  The gaming machine CK2, wherein the gaming machine CK1 includes a notifying unit for notifying a change in profit given to a player while the incoming ball switching unit maintains the first state.

  According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, it is determined that the profit obtained by the player has changed while the incoming ball switching means maintains the first state. Can understand. Therefore, the game mode can be adjusted by the notification of the notification means.

  The mode of notification by the notification means is not limited at all. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, it may be informed that a break is made in the middle of the round game R (a screen is switched or a sound is output), or the display of the number of rounds is turned off. , Sub-round may be displayed as if a new round game R had been started. In any case, assuming that the start timing of the round game R and the notification timing by the notification means are game breaks, the number of times exceeding the maximum number of control-controlled rounds (for example, 16 rounds) and the break of the jackpot game are By being set (for example, 20 breaks), the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CK2, it is configured to easily give a predetermined profit to the player based on the fact that the number of balls that can pass through the entrance is guided to the entrance switching means. A gaming machine CK3 comprising conditional profit giving means.

  According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CK2, when more balls than the number that can pass through the entrance are fired, all of them can be prevented from becoming useless balls. As a result, it is possible to link the enhancement of interest to the player by the effect with the substantial profit (payout of the prize ball).

  It should be noted that a notice may be given to instruct the player to continue firing so that the player does not stop firing by visually recognizing that the ball has stopped passing through the entrance. Various modes are exemplified as the mode of notification in this case. For example, a direct notification such as "Continue firing" may be used, a notification indicating the number of fires in a euphemistic manner such as "5 chances are great", or "Some objects can be seen through a ball" (In this case, it is not possible to visually recognize when there is no ball, and when there is a ball, irradiate a light beam that displays some figure or picture so that it can be visually recognized to a predetermined position near the ball switching unit and where the ball is stored. Is desirable).

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A switching drive unit that is controlled to be drivable by switching the entrance ball switching unit to the second state in response to a prescribed number of balls passing through the entrance for a predetermined period, and based on the prescribed number. A gaming machine DKK1 comprising: adjusting means configured to adjust the number of excess balls to the entrance.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DKK1, the adjusting means can adjust the excess entering ball to the entrance, so that the profit given to the player by the ball passing through the entrance fluctuates in a short time. In the meantime, leveling can be performed for a long time.

  It should be noted that the mode of the adjustment of the extra ball is not limited at all. For example, the system may be adjusted so as to be able to see the same number of excess balls every time, based on the specified number of balls that can be passed through the entrance during the first state by the entrance switching means, or may be a predetermined (plural or singular). ) With respect to the first extra ball that occurs when the first state is entered at the timing, the second extra ball that occurs when the first state is entered at another (plural or singular) timing is reduced. It may be adjusted so that the first extra ball and the second extra ball are balanced, or depending on whether the period in which the ball switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit The number of occurrences of extra balls can be distinguished and adjusted so as to balance them, and the case where the period during which the ball switching means is in the second state is short or long (between rounds). It can be an interval or during a round May be a status change), the number of occurrences of excess ball entrance may be set to be distinguished.

  In the gaming machine DKK1, the adjusting means is configured to be able to change at least one of a frequency at which the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state and a period maintained in the second state. Machine DKK2.

  According to the gaming machine DKK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DKK1, it is possible to pay attention to the frequency and the period during which the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state, and as a result, the player's attention to the incoming ball switching means Strength can be improved.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as the frequency of switching. For example, the number of times of switching may be a little, or the occurrence of switching may be determined. That is, in the case where switching to the second state is performed once in the predetermined period, the state is switched to the second state as compared with the case where switching to the second state is not performed in the predetermined period (when switching occurs 0 times). High frequency.

  In addition, when the frequency of switching to the second state is high, excessive entering balls may be easily generated, and when the frequency of switching to the second state is low, excessive entering balls may be easily generated. .

  In the gaming machine DKK1 or DKK2, the adjusting means includes a load applying means configured to apply a load to the game ball when the state of the entering ball switching means changes, and the load applying means includes the entrance port. A game machine DKK3 configured to change a load applied to a game ball in accordance with a distance between the game ball and the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine DKK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DKK1 or DKK2, it is possible to pay attention to the arrangement of the game balls when the state change of the incoming ball switching means occurs, and as a result, the player for the incoming ball switching means Attention can be improved.

  In the gaming machine DKK3, the load applying means is configured such that the closer the distance between the entrance and the gaming ball is, the greater the load applied to the gaming ball is.

  According to the gaming machine DKK4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DKK3, it is possible to improve the power of attention for gaming balls that are close to the entrance. In this case, the load applied to the game ball may be a load in a direction toward the entrance (a load along the opening direction of the entrance) or a load in a direction to retreat from the entrance ( Load along the opening direction of the entrance) or a load in a direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the entrance.

  For example, when the load is in the direction toward the entrance, the game balls arranged near the entrance are pushed into the entrance due to the load, and the expectation that excessive entering will occur. Can be directed.

  For example, when the load is in the direction of retreating from the entrance (or when a load is applied in a direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the entrance and the game ball is decelerated due to friction or the like), the load is applied to the entrance. A closer game ball has a greater degree of deceleration of the speed toward the ball entrance as compared to a game ball far from the ball entrance, and the interval between the game balls can be reduced. In this way, a plurality of game balls can be guided to the entrance in a lump, so that a sense of expectation that an excess ball is generated can be produced.

  In any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK4, the adjusting means includes a ball entry prevention means capable of preventing a subsequent ball entry into the entrance port with a previous entry into the entrance port, A gaming machine DKK5, characterized in that the maintenance of the entry ball prevention by the entry ball prevention means can be determined based on the driving mode of the switching drive means.

  According to the gaming machine DKK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK4, the switching drive means that the player does not visually recognize whether or not the ball entry prevention means maintains the ball entry prevention. Is determined on the basis of the driving mode, so that the player's imagination as to whether or not it is possible to enter the entrance is stimulated.

<Technical concept considering the V flag off route>
In any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK5, the game machine includes a profit ball entrance to which a predetermined profit is given by entering the game ball, and the mode of entering the game ball into the profit ball entrance is determined by the switching. A gaming machine DKK6 that changes in response to driving of a driving unit.

  According to the gaming machine DKK6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK5, the switching drive means can be used not only to switch the manner of entering the ball entrance but also to enter the game ball into the profit entrance. It can also be used for switching between spherical modes.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a predetermined profit. For example, it may be a profit that is positive for the player, or a profit that is negative for the player (loss, positive for the game store).

  The gaming machine DKK7, characterized in that the number of pieces that are adjusted to allow excess ball entry by the adjusting means in the gaming machine DKK6 increases so that it becomes easier to enter the profit ball entrance.

  According to the gaming machine DKK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DKK6, a game in which a profit by entering the profit ball opening is provided along with a payout prize ball as a profit provided as a result of excess entering the ball. Sex can be configured.

  For example, when the profit provided by entering the profit entrance is a positive profit for the player, it is possible to recommend that the player play a game aiming at excess entering ball.

  On the other hand, for example, if the profit provided by entering the profit entrance is a negative profit (loss) for the player, is it possible to aim for an extra ball even if the player is prepared for the negative profit (loss)? In order to avoid a negative profit (loss), the player can choose whether or not to give up (not aim) the extra ball.

  In the gaming machine DKK6 or DKK7, the profit entrance is disposed downstream of the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine DKK8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DKK6 or DKK7, it is possible to improve the attention to the gaming ball after entering the entrance.

  A gaming machine DKK9, wherein in any one of the gaming machines DKK6 to DKK8, a mode of entering a game ball into the profit entrance is set in accordance with a driving mode of the switching drive unit.

  According to the gaming machine DKK9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines DKK6 to DKK8, the switching drive means can be effectively utilized.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Switching drive means for switching the incoming ball switching means to the second state in response to a predetermined number of balls passing through the entrance opening during the first state, A gaming machine DK1 comprising: adjusting means configured to be able to adjust an excess ball entering the entrance based on a prescribed number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DK1, since the adjusting means can adjust the excess entering ball to the entrance, the profit given to the player by the ball passing through the entrance fluctuates in a short time. In the meantime, leveling can be performed for a long time.

  It should be noted that the mode of the adjustment of the extra ball is not limited at all. For example, the system may be adjusted so as to be able to see the same number of excess balls every time, based on the specified number of balls that can be passed through the entrance during the first state by the entrance switching means, or may be a predetermined (plural or singular). ) With respect to the first extra ball that occurs when the first state is entered at the timing, the second extra ball that occurs when the first state is entered at another (plural or singular) timing is reduced. It may be adjusted so that the first extra ball and the second extra ball are balanced, or depending on whether the period in which the ball switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit The number of occurrences of extra balls may be distinguished and adjusted so as to balance them.

  Note that the incoming ball switching means may be configured in a single arrangement or in a plurality of arrangements.

  In the gaming machine DK1, in the process of the switching drive by the switching drive unit, a load application unit configured to be able to apply a load directed to the detection unit to a ball arranged at a predetermined position on the upstream side of the detection unit is provided. A gaming machine DK2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine DK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DK1, the ball arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means can be configured to be easily detected by the detecting means by the action of the load applying means.

  The number of balls to which a load is applied by the load applying means is not limited at all. For example, the number may be one or more.

  In the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, as a state at the start of the switching drive, a post-driving ball that can be switched between an allowable state in which the ball is allowed to pass through the entrance and a restricted state in which the ball is restricted from passing. A gaming machine DK3 comprising state switching means.

  According to the gaming machine DK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass through the entrance regardless of the manner in which the ball flows to the entrance and the operation speed of the entrance switching means. Can be defined by the entry state switching means after driving, so that the degree of excessive entry of the ball into the entry port can be easily adjusted.

  In any of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, the load applied from the ball to the ball switching device is applied in a direction along the direction in which the ball switching device is driven during the switching drive. Machine DK4.

  According to the gaming machine DK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress a problem that the load from the ball prevents the incoming ball switching means from changing to the second state. .

  In addition, as a mode of applying the load from the ball, for example, the incoming ball switching unit is configured to be driven in a manner of falling (dropping) by the switching drive, and the own weight of the ball is applied to the incoming ball switching unit. The case is exemplified.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Switching drive means for switching the incoming ball switching means to the second state in response to the predetermined number of balls passing through the entrance during the first state, and After the switching drive by the switching drive unit is started, an allowed state that allows the ball to pass to the entrance and a driven ball state switching unit that can form a regulated state that regulates the passage of the ball, A gaming machine D1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the after-drive ball-entry state switching means switches whether or not a ball can enter after the entrance has been closed by the switching drive means, an extra ball can enter. Timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine D1, the entrance includes a first entrance and a second entrance, and the post-drive entry state switching means forms the restricted state at the first entrance. The gaming machine D2, wherein the second entrance is formed in the allowable state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number depends on whether the ball passes through the first entrance and the ball passes through the second entrance. It is possible to switch whether or not the ball can be made to enter the ball, so that it is possible to improve the attention of which ball opening is opened by the ball switching device.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first entrance is provided with a drop hole in front of the opening, and when the entrance switching means starts switching to the second state, the first entrance is closer to the first entrance than in front of the opening. A gaming machine D3, wherein a ball disposed on the upstream side is also dropped into the drop hole.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains upstream of the first ball entrance, the ball is dropped into the hole while the ball switching device maintains the second state. And keep it away from the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a ball exceeding the specified number from passing through the first entrance.

<Points where balls join the storage channel from multiple winning ports>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A storage means for storing a predetermined number of balls passing through the entrance, and a ball stored in the storage means based on the switching of the input ball switching means to the second state. A gaming machine EK1 comprising discharging means for discharging, wherein the input ball switching means can be switched to the first state before the discharging action by the discharging means is completed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EK1, the discharging action by the discharging means is configured to be able to be ended leaving the ball ended in the accommodation means, so that the number of balls that can be inserted into the entrance in each round is related. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference between the prize balls throughout the jackpot game.

  Also, since the balls can be accommodated in the accommodation means over a period in which the state of the incoming ball switching means is switched a plurality of times, the number of balls that can pass through the entrance while the incoming ball switching means is maintained in the first state More balls can be accommodated in the accommodation means. As a result, a guide to the frequency of ball entry can be notified, so that the player can be shown the gaming efficiency of the gaming machine currently playing.

  The means for indicating the game efficiency is not limited at all. For example, the ratio of the number of awarded spheres paid out to the number of spheres launched (prize spheres / number of launch spheres) may be used. An index indicating whether the ball has been passed may be used.

  The number of the entrances, the entrance switching means and the accommodation means is not limited to one, but may be plural. In this case, the entrance switching unit and the accommodation unit may be provided corresponding to each entrance, and the state of each entrance switching unit may be configured to occur in order, or each entrance switching unit may be provided. You may comprise so that a state may change partially simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine EK1, it is configured such that whether or not the discharging action ends with the ball accommodated in the accommodation means being ended can be adjusted according to the manner in which the ball is fired.

  According to the gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine EK1, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in a game in which game balls are fired toward the entrance.

  In the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the balls passing through the first entrance or the second entrance merge. The gaming machine EK3, wherein the accommodation means is formed by:

  According to the gaming machine EK3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the balls that have passed through the first entrance or the second entrance are merged inside the accommodation means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the first entrance. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts associated therewith) throughout the entire game can be made uniform.

  A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A container for accommodating a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entrance, wherein the entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the first entrance Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 wherein the accommodation means is formed in such a manner that the balls passing through the second entrance are merged.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance merge in the accommodation means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. The number of balls that can pass through the second entrance hole can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts associated therewith) throughout the entire game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the accommodation means is empty, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the first entrance and the accommodation by passing through the second entrance. A gaming machine E2, wherein the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second entrance are different. The player's attention to whether or not the entrance to the ball is opened can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance is set smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls are discharged when each entrance is closed. The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance, and the first entrance is opened during the opening when the second entrance is opened a plurality of times. A gaming machine E3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, the ball that has passed through the second entrance before opening the first entrance and the second entrance after opening the first entrance. The passed ball can make a substantial difference to the player.

  That is, if the ball passes through the second entrance before opening the first entrance, even if more balls than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, the ball is exceeded. No ball is ejected, and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated from the first entrance, so that the second entrance has the same number as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance. The player will only get the same profit as passing through the number of.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, and if more balls than can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, they are deducted. The player can get additional benefits.

  The setting of the number of game balls that can be accommodated is performed in various modes. For example, it can be performed by setting the length and thickness of the flow path in which the game balls are accommodated. Further, the change in the substantial profit given to the player is not limited to the number of winning balls, and for example, changes the substantial profit given to the player also depending on whether the ball can pass through a specific area. Can be.

<Points where the interference member overhangs>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. An interfering means which is disposed in a flow path of a ball passing through the entrance and is switchable between a protruding state in which the ball can interfere and a retracted state in which the ball does not interfere. Gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the interference means is disposed on the flow path of the ball passing through the entrance, the interference means is maintained in the extended state, so that the distance from the entrance to the interference means is maintained. Ball can be blocked in the path, and further balls can be prevented from passing through the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the prize ball throughout the jackpot game by the operation mode of the interference means.

  A gaming machine F2 comprising a stopping means for stopping a ball in front of the interference means in the retreat state of the interference means in the gaming machine F1.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhang state in a state where the ball is parked in front of the interference means. , The movement can be hidden by the sphere. Therefore, the operation can be made hard to be noticed by the player.

  In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the state of the interference means can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of the state change state of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means, so while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state, The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<It is difficult to predict the type of privilege from the number of stored items>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Operating means arranged on the flow path of the ball passing through the entrance and capable of operating in a plurality of operation patterns, and changing the profit obtainable by the player based on the operation patterns of the operation means. A gaming machine FK1 characterized in that it can be configured.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the special winning opening. There was a problem that there is.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, the operating means is provided downstream of the entrance and the operating pattern of the operating means can change the profit obtainable by the player. Of attention to the downstream side of the can be improved.

  The gaming machine FK2, wherein the gaming machine FK1 includes operating means operable by a player, and an operation pattern of the operating means is configured to be changeable by a player operating the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine FK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine FK1, the operation pattern of the operating means can be changed by the player operating the operating means, thereby improving the player's willingness to operate the operating means. Can be done.

  In the gaming machine FK2, a first privilege and a second privilege are set as profits given to a player based on a game ball passing through the entrance, and the first mode is set according to an operation mode of the operation unit. A gaming machine FK3 characterized in that the mode of acquiring the privilege and the second privilege changes.

  According to the gaming machine FK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player directly changes depending on the operation mode of the operating means, so that the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be improved. it can.

  The modes of the first privilege and the second privilege are not limited at all. For example, the first privilege may be set as the payout of the prize ball, the second privilege may be set as the determination of the probable change state after the jackpot game (as the V-variable gaming machine), or the second privilege may be set as the determination of the jackpot. (As a small hit game in a one-type two-type mixer).

  Note that the relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited at all. For example, the relationship may be large or small, may have another property, or may be in an opposite relationship.

  Here, as the one having the relationship of large and small, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege is both the payout of the prize ball, and the number of the payout balls in the first privilege is larger than the payout ball in the first privilege. When the number of balls to be paid out in the 2nd privilege is larger, or the profit given to the player in the 1st privilege and the 2nd privilege is a transition to the jackpot game state, and is compared with the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st privilege. Then, a case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

  Further, as another characteristic, for example, while the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a shift to the jackpot game state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is an award. In the case of paying out balls, or in the case where the profit given to the player in the first privilege is the indication of the playing state, the gain given to the player in the second benefit is to obtain the maximum payout prize ball. And the like.

  Further, as the conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the player's profit such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). Information), the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or information relating to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot). For example, the case of extinction is exemplified.

<Points if you pass "passing" without entering the entrance. Difference with "entrance">
A game area in which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area can pass, and a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance; A gaming machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball port to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball port; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball port. In the above, it is provided with an operating means arranged in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the entrance, and can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns, the profit that can be obtained by the player based on the operation pattern of the operation means A gaming machine FKK1 which is configured to be changeable and wherein a game ball passes through the entrance in the second state of the entrance switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in each round, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening depends on the situation on the upstream side of the special winning opening and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. The player's line of sight concentrates on the game board, and the entire game board cannot be effectively used.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FKK1, the operating means is disposed on the downstream side of the entrance and the profit that can be obtained by the player can be changed by the operating pattern of the operating means. Of attention to the downstream side of the can be improved.

  In addition, since a game ball that has passed through the entrance without entering the entrance will affect the profit that can be obtained by the player, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball. .

  In addition, if it is set that a profit equal to or greater than the profit obtained by the player when a game ball enters the entrance is given to the player by the action of the game ball passing through the entrance, It is possible to construct a game that expects a game ball to pass without entering the mouth. As a result, it is possible to improve the power of attention in the region on the downstream side of the entrance.

  In the gaming machine FKK1, a post-passing entrance where a game ball passing through the entrance is disposed so as to be able to enter, and a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the post-passing entrance after the passing. And a post-passing ball switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can flow from the upstream side of the ball entrance after passing and a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance after passing cannot be guided to the ball entrance. The gaming machine FKK2, characterized in that the entering ball switching means is configured to be able to shorten the interval of switching to the first state as the entering of a game ball into the entrance takes place.

  According to the gaming machine FKK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine FKK1, the presence or absence of a game ball entering the entrance affects whether or not the game ball enters the entrance after passing. , The attention to the entrance can be improved.

  In the gaming machine FKK1 or FKK2, a lottery entrance ball port is provided upstream of the entrance port so that a predetermined lottery can be started when a game ball enters, and according to the lottery result of the lottery entrance port. A game machine FKK3 wherein a pattern in which the state of the incoming ball switching means is switched is selected.

  According to the gaming machine FKK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FKK1 or FKK2, the switching of the state of the ball entry switching means occurs based on the pattern selected by entering the lottery entrance. That is, since the entry of the game ball into the lottery entrance is a condition for changing the state of the entrance switching means, the area for improving the player's attention can be expanded to the lottery entrance.

  In the gaming machine FKK3, a gaming ball that has entered the lottery entrance is configured to enter the entrance after the passing.

  According to the gaming machine FKK4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine FKK3, the role of conditioning the change in the state of the entry switching means for the game ball entering the entrance, and entering the entrance after passing In this case, a role of giving a predetermined profit to the player can be shared. Thereby, the attention power of the game ball can be improved.

  The gaming machine FKK5 according to any one of the gaming machines FKK1 to FKK4, wherein a plurality of rules are prepared for the incoming ball switching means to switch between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine FKK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines FKK1 to FKK4, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball entry switching means.

  In addition, as a plurality of rules, for example, a rule in which the length of the period maintained in the first state is different or a rule in which the state change start timing after the start of the flow of the game ball toward the incoming ball switching means is different. And the like.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize is possible based on the attacker's actions>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. And a profit switching means that can be switched in the game machine. In the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, when a ball can pass through the profit provision means, It is possible to switch between the case where the ball cannot pass through the application means. Game machine G1, wherein.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, when the ball can pass through the profit provision means, and when the ball passes through the profit provision means. Since it is possible to switch between cases where it is not possible, it does not obstruct the entry of the ball into the entrance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the entrance.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a stopping means disposed upstream of the profit switching means and switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed. The stopping means is switched from the stopped state to the passing state as the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the ball flowing downstream of the stopping means is switched to the profit switching. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the ball passing through the entrance is once stopped by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball gains at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent reaching to the switching means. Thus, no matter how the ball passes through the entrance while the entry switching device is in the first state, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching device at unexpected timing. it can.

  The gaming machine G2 further includes a period changing unit that changes a period during which the ball that passes through the stopping unit and reaches the profit switching unit after switching the stopping unit to the passing state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period in which the ball can pass through the stopping means and reach the profit switching means changes due to the period changing means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the playability of the game, and to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

  Incidentally, the period changing means may be means for changing the flowing speed of the ball passing through the stopping means, or means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state to when the ball starts to flow, Means for changing the number of balls stopped at the stopping means may be used.

  The gaming machine G4, wherein in the gaming machine G3, the period changing means is formed so as to be able to switch the number of balls stopped by the stopping means in accordance with a profit given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted based on the number of balls parked in the stopping means, so that attention is paid to the balls parked in the stopping means. Strength can be improved.

  The means for switching the number of balls parked in the parking means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means can be changed by a combination of a period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and a period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

  That is, for example, when the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened, and then immediately after that, the period during which the entrance switching means is set to the first state is extremely shortened, However, since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream of the stopping means is extremely small, even if a new ball does not enter from the entrance, a large number of balls are stopped at the stopping means.

  On the other hand, if the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state is sufficiently long, and then immediately after that, the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state is extremely short, of the balls that have been parked in the stopping means, In addition to the fact that most of the balls flow downstream of the stopping means and that no new balls enter the entrance, almost no balls remain in the stopping means.

  In this way, by changing the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and immediately after that, shortening the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state, the ball is stopped in the stopping means regardless of the launch mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the entering ball switching means includes a plurality of types of closing maintaining periods that are maintained in the second state, and the setting unit selects and sets the closing maintaining periods, and a predetermined period from an end point of the closing maintaining periods. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a lapse.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, since the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods in which the entering ball switching means maintains the second state, the ball is stopped. Since the period from when the ball is passed to when the profit switching unit is switched to the first state is formed in a plurality of types, even if the number of balls stopped in the stopping unit is the same, the ball passes through the profit providing unit. It can be controlled to be able to form when it does and when it does not pass. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the power of attention for the downward flow of the ball.

  Note that, for example, a period in which the entrance ball switching unit is maintained in the first state for a period long enough to allow a specified number of balls to pass through the entrance, and immediately after that, a period in which the entrance ball switching unit is maintained in the second state. When the setting unit selects the closed maintenance period in an extremely short manner (the ball passing through the stopping unit is shorter than the ball reaching the profit switching unit), the entering ball switching unit enters the first state immediately thereafter. By changing the state of the profit switching means from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set a period from when the stopping means enters the passing state to when the profit switching means enters the first state. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed the stopping means passes through the profit provision means. Thereby, regardless of the number of balls arresting on the arresting means and the mode of the arrest (for example, timing), it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the sphere that has passed the arresting means passes through the profit provision means.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the entrance switching means is performed not by the first operation caused by a specified number of balls entering the entrance, but by a second operation caused by the passage of a specified time. A gaming machine G6 including an intentional selecting means for intentionally selecting the game machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, by the action of the intentional selecting means, the switching operation of the incoming ball switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time, It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching depending on the passage manner of the ball at the entrance. Thereby, while the profit switching means is in the first state, it is possible to secure a long time during which the ball is not allowed to enter.

  The intentional selecting means is exemplified by a state in which the ball does not pass through the entrance due to the passage of less than the specified number of balls. This can be realized by intentionally clogging (making the ball not passing) the ball in the middle of passing through the entrance.

  A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. In the gaming machine provided with a profit switching means, which is switched in, the flow-down state determination means for determining whether the flow-down state of the ball to the profit provision means is normal, and a notification based on the determination result by the flow-down state determination means And a notifying means for performing the game. GK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, there is a problem that a considerable number of players try to gain an illegal benefit due to an improper act of applying a load (magnetic force or impact) to the ball before reaching the distribution unit. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GK1, when the abnormality is determined, the notification is made by the notification means, so that the wrongdoing can be suppressed. In other words, even if the flow of the ball is illegally obstructed, there is a high possibility that the notification will result in the inability to gain improper profits. Deterrent effect can be exerted.

  It should be noted that the manner of determining the abnormality is not limited at all. For example, the timing may be set such that the ball is completely discharged after the profit switching unit is switched to the first state, and the notification may be performed by detecting that the ball has not been discharged even at that timing. In this case, since the notification can be made before the ball passes through the profit switching means, dissatisfaction from the player can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine GK2 in the gaming machine GK1, wherein the flow-down state determination means makes a determination based on the number of balls arranged from the entrance to the profit provision means.

  According to the gaming machine GK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether the flow-down state of the ball is abnormal irrespective of the degree of accumulation of gaming balls from the entrance to the profit providing means. it can.

  In the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, the gaming machine GK3 further includes an arrangement suppressing unit that suppresses a change in arrangement of a ball on an upstream side of the profit providing unit after the notifying unit executes the notification.

  According to the gaming machine GK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, the change in the arrangement of the balls can be suppressed by the arrangement suppressing means, so that the player suffers when resuming the game when an unexpected error occurs. Losses can be minimized.

<Point 2 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize is possible based on the attacker's operation, there is a fool>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched in the game machine, wherein the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by the operation mode of the incoming ball switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching unit can be changed by the operation mode of the ball switching unit while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the ball is reached by the profit switching means.

  The gaming machine H2, wherein the number of balls related to the time when the entering ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means in the gaming machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the player can determine how the ball is guided to the profit switching means based on the length of the incoming ball switching means maintained in the second state. , It is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the entering ball switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a start state in which a ball is started to be sent to the profit switching means is formed while the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means only after the start state, the operation of the ball entry switching means is stopped immediately before the start state, Since it is possible to return to the first state, it is possible to form a playability in which throwing the ball to the profit switching means is not necessarily started just by starting the operation from the first state. As a result, it is necessary to directly check whether the ball reaches the profit switching means, so that the attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

  A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. And a profit switching means that is switched in the game machine, comprising: a state changing means configured to be in a state capable of changing the state of the entering ball by detecting the passage of a ball, the state changing means To the profit switching means based on the passing frequency of the ball to Gaming machine HK1, characterized in that it is configured to be switchable, the number of balls that can be spherical.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine HK1 is configured such that the number of balls that can be sent to the profit switching means can be switched based on the passing frequency of the balls to the state changing means. Can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the behavior of the ball that has passed through the entrance.

  In the gaming machine HK1, an upper limit value of the number of balls sent to the profit switching means in a predetermined period is set when a frequency of entering the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency. Machine HK2.

  According to the gaming machine HK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine HK1, it is possible to escape from the gaming property that it is better that the ball is passed through the state changing means.

  In the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, the game machine HK3 is characterized in that the ball that has passed through the entrance through a plurality of opening / closing operations of the entrance switching means can be sent to the profit switching means. .

  According to the gaming machine HK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, the ball entering the entrance at the time of the plurality of opening and closing of the ball entry switching means can be associated with the throwing mode to the ball entry switching means. Therefore, the variation of the throwing mode can be increased as compared with the case where the throwing mode to the entering ball switching means is independent by one opening and closing of the throwing ball switching means.

  In addition, how to count the number of times of opening and closing of the incoming ball switching means is not limited at all. For example, it may be counted based on the number of operations of the incoming ball switching means, or may be counted based on the number of occurrences of a combination of operations of the incoming ball switching means (for example, a preset operation pattern such as a small hit game).

  Operation means operable by a player, a storage state for temporarily storing a ball that has entered the ball-switching means, and a passage state for releasing the storage of the ball and allowing the ball to flow toward the profit provision means. A gaming machine HP1 comprising: a temporary storage device that can be switched between the temporary storage device and the operation device.

  According to the gaming machine HP1, the player can switch the state of the temporary storage unit at an arbitrary timing, so that the willingness to participate in the operation of the operation unit can be increased.

  The gaming machine HP2, wherein the profit given to the player is selected from a first privilege or a second privilege according to the operation timing of the operation means in the gaming machine HP1.

  According to the gaming machine HP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine HP1, the player's attention to the operation of the operation means can be improved.

  Note that the relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited at all. For example, the relationship may be large or small, may have another property, or may be in an opposite relationship.

  Here, as the one having the relationship of large and small, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege is both the payout of the prize ball, and the number of the payout balls in the first privilege is larger than the payout ball in the first privilege. When the number of balls to be paid out in the 2nd privilege is larger, or the profit given to the player in the 1st privilege and the 2nd privilege is a transition to the jackpot game state, and is compared with the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st privilege. Then, a case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

  Further, as another characteristic, for example, while the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a shift to the jackpot game state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is an award. In the case of paying out balls, or in the case where the profit given to the player in the first privilege is the indication of the playing state, the gain given to the player in the second benefit is to obtain the maximum payout prize ball. And the like.

  Further, as the conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the player's profit such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). Information), the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or information relating to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot). For example, the case of extinction is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine HP2, based on the selection of the first privilege, the passage of the ball at the entrance when the entrance switching means is set to the first state is restricted. Gaming machine HP3.

  According to the gaming machine HP3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine HP2, based on the selection of the first privilege, the ball is prevented from passing through the entrance, regardless of the state of the entrance switching means. If the player does not want the ball to pass through the entrance, it is possible to eliminate the need to temporarily stop firing the ball (perform a so-called "striking") at an appropriate timing. it can. In this case, since the player can continuously shoot the ball regardless of the state of the entering ball switching means, the desired game can be smoothly executed.

  In the gaming machine HP3, based on the selection of the first privilege, the gaming machine HP4 is controlled so that the game can be continued irrespective of the ball detection time by the detecting means.

  According to the gaming machine HP4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine HP3, it is possible to realize a playability of restricting the entering ball by clogging the detection means with a ball.

<Technical concept to secure the shortest time of R game longer than expected from firing interval>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry Ball entry switching means for switching between a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and detection means for detecting entry into the ball entry port. It is provided with a flow-down state changing means for changing a flow-down state of a ball flowing down the upstream side of the ball opening, and the flow-down state change means is configured to be capable of changing a pitch of the ball entering the ball entrance according to a predetermined rule. Gaming machine IKK1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a ball shot to a special winning opening is guided to the special winning opening almost without spilling the ball (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-177858). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to balance with other gaming machines, instead of being able to receive a large amount of prize balls in a short time in a jackpot game, the progress in a normal game is set to be slow. Have been. For example, by increasing the firing interval of game balls, the number of lotteries is reduced, and the time until a jackpot is obtained is increased.

  The firing interval of the game balls is directly linked to the exit speed in the jackpot game. That is, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the firing interval of the gaming ball may be determined in order to balance the game different from the jackpot game of the normal state or the probable change state with the jackpot game, in which case, There is a problem that the degree of freedom in setting the firing interval of the game balls is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine IKK1, since the flow-down state changing means changes the pitch of the ball into the entrance, the presence or absence of the flow-down state change means is set for each ball entry port, or a predetermined rule is set. By making adjustments, it is possible to set a ball entry mode (speed, interval) for each entrance. As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the firing interval of the game balls can be improved.

  In the gaming machine IKK1, the flow-down mode changing means includes a contact means disposed so as to be capable of contacting a game ball, and the contact means is provided while the incoming ball switching means maintains the first state. A gaming machine IKK2, wherein the gaming machine IKK2 is configured at a position different from a flowing trajectory of a gaming ball entering the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine IKK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine IKK1, the contacting means does not obstruct the game ball reaching the entrance in the first state of the entrance switching means, so that the game ball enters the entrance. Can be limited to the case where the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state.

  In the gaming machine IKK1 or IKK2, the flow-down mode changing unit includes a ball entry prevention unit configured to prevent a game ball from entering the entrance by a game ball entering the entrance. A gaming machine IKK3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine IKK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine IKK1 or IKK2, the ball entry preventing means is configured to prevent the ball from entering the entrance using the game ball entered into the entrance. Therefore, the timing at which the ball is prevented from entering the entrance can be associated with the manner of entering the entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machines IKK1 to IKK3, the flow-down mode changing means is configured to be able to extend a pitch between the balls into the entrance, as compared with a firing interval of the balls. .

  According to the gaming machine IKK4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines IKK1 to IKK3, the other entrances while extending the entrance interval to the entrance located downstream of the flow-down state changing means are extended. It is possible to prevent the interval between entering the ball from being extended. Thereby, for example, while maintaining a short interval between the entrance to the starting port, the entrance to the entrance (for example, a large winning opening) arranged downstream of the flow-down state changing means as compared with the interval between the entrance to the starting port. Can be extended, so that it is easy to configure a gaming machine that increases the number of prize balls in one jackpot game while shortening the interval at which the special symbol lottery is executed.

  In the gaming machine IKK4, the flow-down mode changing means includes a second ball entrance that is configured to allow a ball that flows down the game area and does not enter the entrance to enter the ball. Gaming machine IKK5.

  According to the gaming machine IKK5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IKK4, the frequency of entering the second entrance can be reduced by generating the entrance to the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to configure the flow-down state changing means by using the second ball entry port that is usually arranged in the game area, and it is possible to use the members in common.

  In the gaming machine IKK5, the flowing-down mode changing means changes a pitch of the ball into the entrance according to a predetermined rule regardless of the number of balls entering the second entrance. .

  According to the gaming machine IKK6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine IKK5, it is possible to prevent a change in the manner of changing the pitch between the balls into the entrance due to a slight difference in the number of balls into the second entrance. Can be.

  In the gaming machine IKK5, a flow path in which the ball that has entered the entrance port flows down and a flow path in which the ball that has entered the second entrance port flows down are configured to merge. Gaming machine IKK7.

  According to the gaming machine IKK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine IKK5, the flow path is configured to merge, so that the entering mode to the second entrance and the entering mode to the entrance are improved. Can be associated. This makes it possible to compose complex playability.

<Technical philosophy related to gaming ability that falls when passing through the gate>
A game area in which the game ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the game ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which the game ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance. Ball entry switching means for switching a game ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance to a second state in which the game ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and the game state can be changed by entering the game ball And a first state in which game balls can enter the variable ball entry means, and a second state in which game balls cannot enter the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine J1 comprising: a second switching unit configured to change the state according to the operation of the incoming ball switching unit.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. A gaming machine that improves the power of attention to the special winning opening by changing the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching corresponding to each round by opening in a short time when the ball is impossible (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, since the special winning opening is grasped as a target only for a game ball to enter, there is a problem that a degree of improving a player's attention may become insufficient. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the state of the second switching means for switching whether the game ball can enter the ball or not to the variable ball entry means relating to the change of the game state is entered. Since it is configured to change in response to the operation of the switching means, since the operation of the entrance switching means disposed around the entrance is related to the change in the game state, the entrance and the entrance switching The player's attention to the means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the entering ball switching means can change the state in a plurality of modes, and the second switching means can change the state in a different manner corresponding to the changing state of the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, if a state change occurs irrespective of the state of the state change of the incoming ball switching means, the incoming ball is compared with the case where the second switching means changes the state. Attention to the switching means can be improved.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of the state change of the incoming ball switching means. For example, a mode in which the length maintained in a predetermined state is different (long / short), a mode in which the interval between status changes is different, a mode in which the number of status changes is different, or a status change is started (until it ends) Examples of such different times, combinations thereof, and the like are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine J2, the variable ball entry means includes a plurality of variable ball entrances through which game balls can enter, and the second switching means includes a plurality of variable ball entrances provided corresponding to the respective variable ball entrances. A gaming machine J3, characterized in that a different switching member changes its state in response to execution of a different state change as the state change of the incoming ball switching means.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2, it is possible to improve the attention to the incoming ball switching means.

  In the gaming machine J3, the plurality of variable entrances include at least a disadvantageous variable entrance configured to be able to change a game state to a disadvantage side for a player by entering a game ball. Gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, the disadvantageous variable entrance is provided, so that when the ball enters the variable entrance, the game state changes to an advantageous side for the player. , The attention to the variable entrance can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J4, the plurality of variable entrances include at least an advantageous side variable entrance configured to be able to change a gaming state to an advantageous side for a player by entering a game ball, A change in the game state when a game ball enters both the advantageous side variable entrance and the disadvantage side variable entrance is the variable entrance on the side where the game ball entered later in the predetermined period. A gaming machine J5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J4, it is possible to obscure the direction of the change in the game state due to the entry of the gaming ball into the variable entrance until the end of the predetermined period. Attention can be paid to the variable entrance during the period.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a predetermined period. For example, in the case of a jackpot game, the period may be a predetermined round game R or a period until the end of the ending effect.

  The gaming machine J6, wherein any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5 includes a driving unit, and the driving unit is also used as the incoming ball switching unit and the second switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the control mode of the driving means can be simplified.

  A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 , The gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 , The gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 , Wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is guided to a special winning opening without spilling a ball (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-177858).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the degree of freedom in setting the mode of launching the game ball.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of freedom in setting the shooting mode of a game ball.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. Switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entrance and a second state in which a ball flowing from the upstream side of the entrance cannot be guided to the entrance, and the entrance Detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball, and a falling mode changing means for changing a flowing mode of a ball flowing on the upstream side of the ball entrance, and the flowing mode changing means is provided to the ball inlet. The pitching interval is configured to be variable according to a predetermined rule.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein the flow-down mode changing unit includes a contact unit disposed so as to be able to contact the game ball. While the entry ball switching means maintains the first state, the entry ball switching unit is configured at a position different from a flowing locus of a game ball entering the entrance.
The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the flow-down mode changing unit includes a game ball that has entered the entrance and the game ball has entered the entrance. Ball entry prevention means configured to prevent a ball is provided.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the degree of freedom in setting the shooting mode of the game ball can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to make the change in the flow-down interval of the game balls correspond to the operation of the entry ball switching means.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, the state of entry into the entrance using the game ball entered into the entrance Can be changed.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device (part of notification means, part of operation instruction means)
110 Main controller (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selecting means, part of flow-down mode determining means, part of fixed delay prevention means, adjusting means Part of)
300 operation buttons (operation means)
640 Second entrance (part of entrance, starting port, part of state changing means, lottery entrance)
640a Electric accessory (part of entry switching means)
1000a First specific winning opening (part of the entrance, first entrance)
1140 Projection (part of interval maintaining means, projection)
1150 Discharge port (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means)
1210 Thin plate member (visual difficulty means)
1231 Storage flow path (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-drive ball entry state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path, part of adjustment means)
1231a Guide surface (part of interval maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of interval maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Projecting part (part of interval maintaining means, projecting part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening / closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
1310 Plate part (lifting means)
1331 Ball entry prevention part (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 Restriction member (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, discharge switching means, stop means, part of arrangement suppression means, part of adjustment means, part of post-passing ball switching means )
2251 Second storage channel (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-drive ball entry state switching means, storage means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd specific winning opening (part of the entrance, 2nd entrance)
2840 slide plate (part of ball entry switching means)
3181 additional winning opening (relief entrance)
3182 Curved extension plate (lift control means)
3250 Drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b Terminal surface (part of falling hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit granting means, right entry entrance)
4850 distribution device (part of profit switching means and operating means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit provision means)
5900 Ball adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means, part of adjustment means, part of post-driving ball state switching means, part of operating means, part of arrangement suppression means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 Opening / closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening / closing member (part of ball switching unit, part of switching unit in open state, part of adjustment unit, part of load applying unit, part of ball entry state switching unit after driving)
9111 Auxiliary entrance (part of entrance, part of profit provision means, part of conditional profit provision means)
10112a Detection sensor (part of detection means)
10180 Intermediate ejection device (part of operation means, part of ball entry switching means)
11183 Second additional winning opening (part of the entrance)
11190 Opening / closing means (part of the entering ball state switching means after driving)
12250 Fall delay plate (part of adjustment means, load applying means)
13811 First discharge path sensor (part of profit entrance, part of variable entrance means, part of variable entrance, advantageous side variable entrance)
13813 Third discharge path sensor (part of profit entrance, part of variable entrance means, part of variable entrance, disadvantageous variable entrance)
13840 First switching device (part of second switching means, part of switching member)
13850 second switching device (part of second switching means, part of switching member)

Claims (3)

A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry Ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and detection means for detecting entry into the entrance,
A falling form changing means for changing a flowing form of a ball flowing on the upstream side of the entrance port,
A gaming machine characterized in that the flow-down state changing means is configured to be able to change a pitch between the balls into the ball entrance according to a predetermined rule. The flow-down state changing means includes a contact means disposed so as to be able to contact the game ball,
2. The abutment means is configured at a position different from a falling trajectory of a game ball entering the entrance while the entrance switching means maintains the first state. Gaming machine.   The flow-down mode changing unit includes a ball entry preventing unit configured to prevent a game ball from entering the entrance by a game ball entering the entrance. Or the gaming machine according to 2.

Images